JP2022121573A5 - - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether a game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of aspects relating to visual recognition in an effect, and the effect corresponding to the aspect set by the setting means. and an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a display means that can display information about the mode set by the setting means, and a predetermined The information displayed on the display means is hidden based on the establishment of a condition, and the effect type of the effect executed by the effect execution means is during a specific period. One performance type can be determined from among a plurality of performance types including a performance type in which a specific performance is executed by executing a predetermined operation on the operating means, and the predetermined operation is performed during the specific period. is executed, the information is not displayed, and the information is displayed when the predetermined operation is performed during a predetermined period during which the information is hidden and which is different from the specific period. is configured to allow

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of aspects relating to visual recognition in an effect, and an effect capable of executing the effect corresponding to the aspect set by the setting means. execution means, operation means operable by a player, and display means capable of displaying information about the mode set by the setting means, and a predetermined condition is established. Based on the above, the information displayed on the display means is hidden, and as the effect type of the effect executed by the effect execution means, for the operation means during a specific period One effect type can be determined from among a plurality of effect types including a effect type in which a specific effect is executed by executing a predetermined operation in the specific period, and when the predetermined operation is performed during the specific period does not display the information, and displays the information when the predetermined operation is performed during a predetermined period during which the information is hidden and is different from the specific period. It is

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit taken along line XX of FIG. 2; (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. FIG. 4 is a partial front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a partial front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the wing-shaped member and the auxiliary member, showing the meshing state of the wing-shaped member and the auxiliary member. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; FIG. 4A is a top view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the support plate portion, feather-shaped member, auxiliary member, and fixed transmission plate; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the support plate portion, feather-shaped member, auxiliary member, and fixed transmission plate; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the support plate portion, feather-shaped member, auxiliary member, and fixed transmission plate; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the support plate portion, feather-shaped member, auxiliary member, and fixed transmission plate; (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operation unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member; FIG. FIG. 4 is a top view of a plate-shaped displacement member; 7 is a front perspective view of hollow member 740. FIG. 48(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member, the plate-like displacement member, and the hollow member taken along line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operating unit; 54. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of change in conduction of left and right electromagnetic solenoids over time and change in posture of a plate-like displacement member. FIG. 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of change in conduction of left and right electromagnetic solenoids over time and change in posture of a plate-like displacement member. FIG. FIG. 11 is a top view of the second operating unit; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing rotational displacement of a large receiving portion; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58; (a) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of a first operation unit in the third embodiment; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit of a second operation unit in a fourth embodiment. 54(a) and 54(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit of the fifth embodiment along the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line in FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. (a) is a perspective front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. FIG. 87B is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87B is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. 93(a) and 93(b) are sectional views of the drive unit taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. 93(b). FIG. 84 is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVII-XCVII of FIG. 83; 97(a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIII--XCVIII in FIG. (a) is a front view of a specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific prize winning opening unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of a specific winning hole unit 950; 99(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit taken along line CII-CII in FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning slot unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit taken along line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the drive unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a ball-throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball-throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of a sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 112(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). 112(a) and 112(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of a passageway unit, and (b) is a side view of the passageway unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the passageway unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit; (a) is a front view of the replaceable unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replaceable unit. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replaceable unit along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the replaceable unit along line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118(a). 81. It is a cross-sectional view of the game board along the CXIXa-CXIXa line in FIG. 119(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board taken along the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). 119(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board taken along the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member in a 7th embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit and in an eighth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective rear view of a rear base and a displacement member in the tenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear views of a front unit and a displacement member. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective rear view of a rear base and a displacement member in an eleventh embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear views of a front unit and a displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXIXb-CXXIXb of FIG. 129(a). 130(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a). 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit according to a fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of a game board in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a game board in a sixteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a schematic rear view of the prize winning unit in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the prize winning unit along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb of FIG. 135(a). 136(a) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). 137(a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a). 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. 143(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 143(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144(a). 144 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 144; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; 154(a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 154(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 155. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 155, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); 144 is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 196(a), and (c) is FIG. 196(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 196(a) and 196(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 196(a). 196(a) and 196(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 196(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 202(a). 203(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 203(a). 204(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 204(b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 204(a); is. 205(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 205(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 211(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 211(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 211(a). is. 213(a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 213(a). 214(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 214(a). FIG. 215(a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 215(a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 215(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 215(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) 215(e) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 215(e); FIG. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; FIG. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 144 is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; FIG. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; FIG. FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. 231(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 231(a). 232(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 232(a). (a) is a rear view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 233(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233(c). (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 249(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 252(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 252(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 261(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 261(d) is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 261(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 261 (a), and (b) is FIG. is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 264(a) and 264(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 264(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. FIG. 224 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 223; FIG. 224 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 223; FIG. 224 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 223; FIG. 224 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 223; It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. (a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 283(a). 284(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 284(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of the petal actuator taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 290; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 340(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 340(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 340(a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 340(a). 224(a) and 224(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 223; (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 343(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 343(a). FIG. 343(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 343(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIc of FIG. 343(a); 343(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 343(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a); It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a view showing four reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode in which the character J0 appears from the display area C after the character J0 is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four held balls are set during the variation of the third symbol, and no vacant recommended value is increased, and (b) is further held from the state of (a) It is the figure which showed the display mode when the number of balls increases and it exceeds a recommended value. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of held balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) shows a character J0 in the display area C indicating the optimum number of held balls according to the state. It is the figure which showed the display aspect in a case. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a change to a held ball while the third symbol is changing. , and a character J2 is displayed in the display area C. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of pending balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when an over-win is won. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player accumulates the number of reserved balls up to 6 during reach, and (b) shows that the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to 6, and the pattern arrangement changes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode when (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the lucky display of the last big hit pending, and (b) is a display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated up to 6. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect during long open, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of long open prize winning. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal random number table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table for time reduction, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning command table in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension effect mode selection table in the first control example. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows a normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram showing an advance notice A mode reservation lid range selection table in the first control example, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection table; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a ready-to-win effect holding lid range selection table in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. is. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserve command table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character change table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal balloon selection table in the first control example. , (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement B balloon selection table in the first control example. is. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect balloon table in the first control example. be. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserved speech balloon selection table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win start time calculation table in the first control example. There is, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reservation lottery table in the first control example. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. 7 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design 1 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 2 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting prize-winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation start processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing a lucky display determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a reach-in-progress pending effect setting process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a holding lid setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pending character setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a balloon lid setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing short-term winning determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a lucky pending storage process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding effect management process during reach performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flow chart showing an announcement effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing mode switching processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing a pending character display process. 8 is a flowchart showing balloon display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the second control example; (a) is a display mode showing the display screen during the continuous effect in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing the display screen during the special effect in the second control example. It is the display mode which showed the background change during continuous production|presentation in the 2nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd example of control. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the process during time saving performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation return processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 13 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production return processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 14 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first rotation after power is turned on in the fourth control example. . It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a volume table in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing initial sound volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing volume-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. 4 is a timing chart when the tilting device performs a retry operation; 4 is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario table in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario B table in the fifth control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection operation A table in a fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection B table in a fifth control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing retry processing during touch input executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing tilting device control processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing operation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing tilting initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a process during operation presentation executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an effect backtracking operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 483(a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the held ball has a variation of the jackpot A and the third symbol is varied; It is the figure which showed the display mode when one is digested and it becomes a jackpot A. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the state of FIG. 483(b), with one more held ball digested, showing a display mode during super time; ), one more is digested, and this time variation is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is achieved. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during probability variation. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is started, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect for the 1st round of the big win. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of notifying that there is a button effect during the big win, It is the figure which showed the display mode in the case of informing a player that probability variation was provided. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over and the variable probability mode is entered. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows a promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop symbol switching processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command reception process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing opening processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a big prize winning ball process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing round processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; It is a flow chart showing a game state setting process to be performed. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a big winning process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when long open is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a view showing a display mode in the case of the long open effect in the seventh control example. It is a diagram of FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display mode during long opening effect regulation in the seventh control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventh control example; It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing long opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing long open-related processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in an eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display screen and BGM when the power is turned off in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when power is turned on, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return fluctuation after initial setting is completed. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing in Toku-zu fluctuation|variation. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background change operation is performed while the third symbol is changing at a low speed, and (b) is a diagram showing the next display after the background change operation is performed during the low speed change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variable screen; FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing the flow of the variation state of the third symbol, the valid period of the touch sensor, and the operation in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the 8-piece pending effect is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first variation after the 8-piece pending effect is executed. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a new prize is won after the 8 pending effect is executed, and (b) is from a new winning after the 8 pending effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the completion|finish of 8 pending|holding production|presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during a touch effect. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special effect selection table in an eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing vibration pattern data in the eighth control example. and (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an 8-piece reservation lottery table in the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in an eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an 8 effect scenario selection table in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 8 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing variation pattern reception processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a number-of-holds control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing fluctuation recovery processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing display start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing left and right button input processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing background change processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing 8 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing mode identification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ramp setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing counter update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing eight-display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing pending display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing resident image transfer setting processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background announcement selection table in the ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the sea mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the mountain mode. be. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing background change processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a customer waiting setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing customer waiting effect processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the flow of crack effect in the ninth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a crack effect is started, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the crack effect. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the cracking effect, and (b) is a view of the display mode when the button is not operated during the first period of the cracking effect. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a crack effect selection table in the tenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a crack effect ending process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the tenth control example; FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation effect pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the eleventh control example; It is a timing chart showing a flow. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the jackpot in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the PUSH effect screen during the jackpot in the eleventh control example. . It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the success of the PUSH effect|presentation during a jackpot in the 11th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending effect in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the success of the ending effect in the eleventh control example. . FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation effect selection table during a grand prize in the eleventh control example; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a tilting action scenario C table in the eleventh control example; (b) schematically showing the contents of an ending scenario table in the eleventh control example; It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation effect execution timing selection table in the eleventh control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a process 11 during operation presentation executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing opening processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing round processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the role product operation, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when there is the last effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the role product operation, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when there is no last effect in the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the role product operation, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when the role product control device is driven during the round performance of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing round processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 12 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing final round processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twelfth control example; (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twelfth control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twelfth control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the role product control device in the twelfth control example; 4 is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twelfth control example; FIG. (a), (b), in the thirteenth control example, the display content of the BGM and the third symbol display device when the power is cut off in the state of the special figure fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation is restarted when the power is turned on is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the thirteenth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a silhouette advance notice selection table defined in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing fluctuation recovery processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing display start-up processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing background change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing counter update processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a mode promotion effect display mode in the fourteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when three identical numbers are arranged vertically in the mode promotion effect in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a mode promotion effect in the fourteenth control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after the background mode is upgraded by . FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a mode promotion effect selection table specified in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the fourteenth control example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a win table that constitutes a mode promotion effect selection table; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a failure table that constitutes the mode promotion effect selection table in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the specified content of the number-of-rounds display data table in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing mode promotion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing display setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing drawing content acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the three-symbol display device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) is a front perspective view of the second variable winning device 65 in a closed state (first state) in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is an open state (second state) in the A1 embodiment. state) is a front perspective view of the second variable winning device 65. FIG. It is a transition diagram showing the flow of the game state in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment, and the time-dependent change of the production|presentation mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending of the jackpot that transitions to a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending of the jackpot in the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in RUSH displayed with a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the attacker does not win a prize during RUSH displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end of the latent certain state displayed by the 3rd design display. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the transition method of the game state in the A1 embodiment and the temporal change of the effect mode, (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning the jackpot F during RUSH. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the A1 embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number table in the A1 embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small per random number table in the A1 embodiment It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd hit random number table in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit type selection table in the A1 embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability table in the A1 embodiment is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main-control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 3(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. . FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot acquired ball number storage area in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in Embodiment A1; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the A1 embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the A1th embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the A1 embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows through gate passage processing which is performed by MPU in main control unit in the A1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a small winning operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining count update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing remaining acquired ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 10 is a flow chart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the addition production|presentation of the number of remaining probability variation in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when winning the second specific winning opening during the latent state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of over winning during the latency state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 2nd A2 embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first variation after winning over during the latency state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the frequency|count of substantial remaining probability change displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in A2 embodiment remains. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of Super RUSH displayed by the third symbol display device in the A2 embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the A2 embodiment It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when winning a jackpot (resurrection effect) during the super RUSH displayed by . (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the subtraction effect in the A2 embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display mode of the subtraction effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the A2 embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 2 table in the A2 embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a latency confirmation table in the A2 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the table for long small hits in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit classification selection 2 table in 2nd A2 embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd A embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the A2 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the A2 embodiment. be. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect table in the A2 embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the additional effect selection table for the second specific winning opening in the A2 embodiment; It is a diagram. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table in the A2 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A2 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing latency state update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A2 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A2 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the second deviation fluctuation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A2 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd A embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A2 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd A2 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing state command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A2 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd ball entry process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A2 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A2 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing remaining count update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the A2 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A2 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd A2 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing super rush processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the A2 embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the subtraction effect setting process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. (a) to (c) are perspective views of a sorting device 670 in the A3 embodiment. (a) to (c) are right side views of the sorting device 670 in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the game state in the A3 embodiment and the temporal change of the effect mode. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second winning random number table in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for probability variation in the A3 embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table for probability variation in the A3 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the HOLD effect (jackpot effect) displayed by the third symbol display device in the modification of the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the A3 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during HOLD production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a form. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the HOLD production|presentation success displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine").
) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12 .
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. Front view (
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is, for example, the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 2
), or to change the contents of the super ready-to-win effect.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are mounted on the periphery of the window part 14c.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, the front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) At the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball is lent according to the operation. done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
0 is provided with an operating handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 .

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through The gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 is positioned through the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
can be seen from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted inside the outer rail 62, like the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided,
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly according to whether or not a prize has been won in the prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加in particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while
When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only is it indicated whether the result of the lottery is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 14
The time in which the feather member 945 (electric accessory) associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set than in normal. When the feather member 945 is in the open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than when the feather member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the feather member 945 associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, the feather member A change may be made to increase the number of times the 945 is opened. again,
At least one of the time during which the feather member 945 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened in one hit without changing the hit probability of the second pattern during the variable probability or the time reduction. may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time saving, the time when the feather member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened per hit, only the probability of the second pattern may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 (start winning).
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the feather member 945 attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the feather member 945 of the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball to the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the feather member 945 for one hit is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning feather member 945 for
The opening time and number of times of opening may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
A part of the third symbol display device 81 may light up the symbol reserve lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, through gate 67
is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Also, the first pattern display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls on hold, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4).
It is indicated by the pattern display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first prize winning port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 may be five.

A feather member 945 is attached to the second prize winning port 140 . The feather member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the feather member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 140 . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 140 .

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the feather member 945 is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have a feather member like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state in which a ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the feather member associated with the second winning opening 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140.
Shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"),
It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning the first prize winning port 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 14
The feather member 945 associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to win. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the feather member, and aim to win a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second winning port 140. beneficial to those who

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, the first winning port 6
4 or when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning to the second prize opening 140 becomes a jackpot,
After a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seals are made of a brittle material.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forced to open, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes
Payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, opening and closing driving to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving the blade member and a solenoid for driving the blade member is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1
11 but not connected to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 81.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in . Also, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, power failure (
It judges that the power failure, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111, NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6 . Further, in FIG. 6, illustration of the third pattern display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. , general prize gate 6
3. First prize winning port 64, second prize winning port 140, through gate 67, variable prize winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, pair of left and right window movable units 150, balls discharged from the game area can flow down. The spherical flow downward unit 290 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of plywood in which plywood is laminated, and the base plate 60 is mounted so as not to allow the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Shieldable at 60 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 has a through hole drilled at a substantially central position so that the variable display device unit 80 can be arranged, and a through hole for passing electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67 . A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through-holes 60a provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b recessed so as to be fitted to the front end portion of the operation unit 300. , and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light transmitting holes 60c formed in the front-rear direction in the left and right lower portions.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position through which light emitted from the operation unit 300 side can pass, thereby improving the effect of the game board 13 from the viewpoint of light emission effect. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, a flow-down surface forming member 91 made of a light-transmitting resin material is provided.
, 92 are disposed, and the outer portions 94 of the flow-down surface forming members 91, 92 are the light passage holes 60c.
The flow-down surface forming members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in such a manner as to cover the .

The left and right flow-down surface forming members 91 and 92 are provided with a covering plate FB on the front side of the right-side flow-down surface forming member 92.
Since it is configured in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape except that the
will be described in detail, and the description of the flow-down surface forming member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5 , the flow-down surface forming member 91 has a plate-like portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60 , which is formed into a band-like portion 93 having a width equal to that of the inner rail 61 . is configured to be partitioned, and the belt-shaped portion 93, the outer portion 94 that is the outer portion (front view outer portion) of the game area partitioned by the belt-shaped portion 93, and the game partitioned by the belt-shaped portion 93 and an inner portion 95 that is the inner portion of the region (the inner portion when viewed from the front).

As described above, the outer portion 94 is located outside the playing area, and is configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since there is no need to consider the effect on the ball due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

As a result of designing the outer portion 94 to be thin, even if the thickness of the inner portion 95 is reduced, the thickness of the base plate 60 is disposed on the rear side of the inner portion 95, so the rigidity of the base plate 60 is maintained. can be used to suppress displacement of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction (deformation in the thickness direction). Furthermore, by designing the thickness of the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to be thin, it is possible to sufficiently secure the front-to-rear width of the game area.

In this manner, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the functions required of the inner portion 95. As a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 300 and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. , the outer portion 94 can be easily viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, since the base plate 60 is made of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the rear side through the thickness of the base plate 60 . On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) and arranging the light emitting means on the back side thereof as in the present embodiment, the base plate 60 can be configured with a wooden plate member. The brightness visually recognized through can be easily changed.

For example, in the case of forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as being continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions when viewed from the front, By changing the brightness of the outer portion 94 by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 in a plurality of types, it is possible to change the appearance of the same decorative pattern in a plurality of types.

Further, for example, a decorative member that changes the visible pattern according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94 . In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed by the light emission mode of the light emission means 778 .

The mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emission mode is not limited at all. For example, it may be a member that is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle at which light is applied, as typified by an illumination plate. Also, for example, on the premise that a pattern is drawn in multiple colors and multiple colors of light to be irradiated are prepared, a member designed to change the visually recognized pattern by changing the luminescent color may be used. .

The inner part 95 is arranged inside the game area as described above. The inner portion 95 is displaced (
However, in the present embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95 (the light (because the transmission hole 60c is configured to be accommodated on the outer side portion 94 side with respect to the strip portion 93 in a front view).
, the rigidity of the base plate 60 can be used to prevent displacement (deformation) of the inner portion 95 .
As a result, the downflow of the ball can be stabilized.

A general prize winning port 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95 , the general prize winning port 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow-down surface forming member 91 is the front surface of the game board 13 . It is fixed by fixing with a tapping screw or the like from the side.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 is positioned through the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
can be seen from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, and the window portion movable unit 150 is placed at the left and right upper corners of the center frame 86. is arranged.

7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. In FIG. 7, illustration of the lower part of the game board 13 is omitted, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and illustrated in perspective from the front.

The window portion movable unit 150 is rotatably displaceable, and includes a displacement member 151 configured to be visible to the player in the window portion inside the center frame 86, and a displacement member 151 disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. and an auxiliary device 160 that generates driving force for driving the displacement member 151 and irradiates the displacement member 151 with light.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape when viewed in the front-rear direction, and includes a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end configured near the bent portion, and a bifurcated portion 152 that is disposed at both ends of the bifurcated portion 152 and has an open back side. and a protruding portion 154 protruding radially from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152 .

The tip part 153 is formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side, and is fastened to an effect part 153a arranged so as to be visible to the player, and to the open part side of the effect part 153a. A ring-shaped portion 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped portion and has a shape in which the opposite side of the performance portion 153a narrows compared to the side of the performance portion 153a is provided.

The effect part 153a has a light diffusion shape (notched shape) formed on the inner surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated from the back side to the inside of the open part, so that the light actually irradiated is a narrow range. Even if the illumination is directed to the front side, the player viewing the effect portion 153a from the front side can visually recognize the effect portion 153a as a whole as if it were shining (faintly).

The protruding portion 154 defines a displaceable range in both directions in the rotational direction by a pair of claw portions 86a projecting from the center frame 86 side. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotationally displaceable at an angle (less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the projecting portion 154. As shown in FIG.

8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. FIG. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 arranged at a position capable of contacting the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal member having one end (front side end) connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to each other. (in this embodiment, made of brass) transmission shaft rod portion 162 and its transmission shaft rod portion 162
A driven member 163 connected to the other end (back side end) of the
a known E-ring 164 radially fitted to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 162; It is equipped with an electric decoration board 180 that is made.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a cylindrical member having a perfect circular external shape when viewed in the axial direction (front-rear direction) of the midsection. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. By fitting the both side end portions into the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, the contact member 161 and the transmission shaft rod portion 16
2 and the driven member 163 are connected so as not to rotate relative to each other (integrally).

The abutment member 161 is made of a resin material, and has a base end portion 161a in which an insertion hole 161b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is formed. ,
An arm portion 161 extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front.
c.

The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and has a base end portion 163a and a base end portion 163a in which a through hole 163b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is bored. , the arm portion 1 extending straight toward the outside of the base end portion 161a thereof, and configured in a substantially flat plate shape.
63c.

A metal plate member MB<b>1 made of metal (magnetic material) is arranged on the upper surface of the driven member 163 . In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engaging with the elastic claws 163d.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-to-rear sliding of the metal plate member MB1 are provided at both ends of the arm portion 163c in the radial direction. formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pushed down by the metal plate member MB1. At this position, the elastic claw 163d is released from being pushed down by the metal plate member MB1 (the elastic claw 163d is raised to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1). It engages so as to restrict retraction of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, bound with a binding band, or attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 includes a rear member 170B, a middle member 170M provided on the front side of the rear member 170B and formed with a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and the middle member 170M.
A front member 170F is provided on the front side of 0M and has a decorative shape (wavy pattern) formed on the front side. ing.

The illumination board 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front in accordance with the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation. It comprises a light emitting means 181, a connector 182 arranged as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 drilled in the electrical board 180 for assembly.

The light-emitting means 181 includes a strong light-emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmission hole 177 in a front view, and a weak light-emitting means arranged outside the light transmission hole 177 (arranged so as to face the rear surface of the front member 170F). 181b.

The through-hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction of inclination. This will
It is possible to facilitate assembly of the through hole 183 to the protruding cylindrical portion 172 which has a perfect circular outer shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the electrical board 180 is tilted (see FIG. 10), the projecting direction of the projecting cylindrical portion 172 is not tilted (in the front-rear direction). In this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction in which the electrical board 180 is tilted. A large margin for the through-hole 183 along the direction of inclination can be secured, and the through-hole 183 can be easily attached to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 .

The electrical board 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M.
The electrical board 180 is oriented so that the front surface of the board faces obliquely downward (the normal line is inclined downward to the front side). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 taken along line XX in FIG. In order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The line XX is arranged so as to pass through the center of the projecting cylindrical portion 172 on the upper side. 8 and 9 will be referred to as necessary in the following description.

The middle member 170M has different wall-shaped portions on the front side between the upper wall-shaped portion 170MU and the lower wall-shaped portion 170MD. That is, the upper wall-shaped portion 170MU is configured as a wall-shaped portion that is non-inclined (with its normal directed horizontally), and the lower wall-shaped portion 170MD is configured as a wall-shaped portion that is inclined (with its normal directed downward to the front side). configured as

In contrast to the wall-shaped portions having different normals, the electrical board 180 has a lower wall-shaped portion 170 on the back surface of the plate.
It is supported so as to take a posture along the MD (a posture in which the normal is inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the electrical board 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The intermediate member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting toward the front side in a frame shape, and a plurality of projecting cylindrical portions projecting toward the front side in the form of small-diameter cylinders inside the projecting frame portion. 172 and left and right outer (
Left side) A wire through hole 173 drilled in the front-rear direction so as to surround the connector 182 at the corner.
and

The protruding frame portion 171 abuts on the outer frame portion of the front member 170F in the front and rear, thereby
seal around the perimeter of the As a result, the electrical board 180 is separated from the front member 170F and the middle member 17
It is possible to avoid being visually recognized from between 0M and prevent light leakage from occurring from a similar position.

The projecting cylindrical portion 172 has a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that further protrudes from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion enters the through-hole 183 of the electrical board 180. The back surface of the electrical board 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the electrical board 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 172 provided on the upper wall portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 172 provided on the lower wall portion 170MD. As a result, it is possible to stably support the electrical board 180 that is assembled in the above-described inclined posture, and to ensure a space between the upper wall-shaped portion 170MU and the electrical board 180 .

The protruding end of the seat portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protruding length becomes shorter toward the lower side) matching the posture of the electrical board 180 . . Thus, the protruding cylindrical portion 172 can be provided with a function of stabilizing the position of the electrical board 180 as well as the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the electrical board 180 .

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the electrical board 180 . Since the posture of the electrical board 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the electrical board 180 via the electric wiring, the electrical board 180 can be fixed without fastening.
The posture of the electrical board 180 can be stably supported.

The front member 170F is made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material so that the back surface thereof is substantially parallel to the lower wall-shaped portion 170MD, and is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light-transmitting holes 177 and a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 protruding toward the back side in a thin cylindrical shape.
and an L-shaped support portion 1 that is L-shaped in the left-right direction and connects between the back surface of the plate and the frame portion that forms the outer periphery
79.

The light transmitting hole 177 is formed so as to surround any one of the LEDs forming the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting means 181 disposed on the back side of the light transmission hole 177 and the light emitting means 181 other than the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front side of the front member 170F changes.
That is, the inside of the light transmitting hole 177 can be visually recognized as emitting stronger light than the other portions.

A plurality of projecting cylindrical portions 178 are formed with substantially the same projecting length. As a result, while the interval between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the electrical board 180 is uniform over the entire arrangement range of the electrical board 180, the electrical board 180 in an inclined posture is surface-supported at a plurality of positions. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode, the electrical decoration substrate 18
The sense of stability of supporting 0 can be improved.

That is, since the front surface of the electric board 180 is tilted toward the front side, it is preferable to support it from the front side in order to maintain that position. When the electrical board 180 is supported by the electrical board 180, the area where the light emitting means 181 can be arranged on the front side of the electrical board 180 tends to be limited. If the area of the supporting portion is reduced with priority given to the area where the light emitting means 181 can be arranged, the posture of the electrical board 180 collapses and the front member 170F
The distance between the main body plate portion and the electrical board 180 tends to vary within the range of arrangement of the electrical board 180, and there is a risk that unevenness in the light emission mode may easily occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of projecting cylindrical portions 178 having a similar projecting height and a small diameter are provided,
Since they are configured to support the front surface of the electrical board 180 at a plurality of points at the same time, the projecting cylinders that support the electrical board 180 at a plurality of small gaps generated between the adjacent light emitting means 181 are arranged. A plurality of portions 178 can be provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the stability of supporting the electrical board 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 faces the upper surface and the front surface of the electrical board 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the electrical board 180 . In other words, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 arranged opposite to the front surface of the decorative electrical board 180 supports and prevents the electrical board 180 from falling forward due to its own weight.

In addition, the rear part of the L-shaped support portion 179 facing the upper surface of the electrical board 180 and the electrical board 1
80 is normally arranged with a gap therebetween, so that vertical displacement of the electrical board 180 can be suppressed to a minimum while supporting the electrical board 180 loosely.

A support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is the lower wall portion 170M of the intermediate member 170M.
They are also formed on the front side of D (formed at two positions on the left and right), are arranged opposite to the lower surface and the rear surface of the decorative board 180, and function to suppress the displacement of the decorative board 180. FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the L-shaped support portions arranged above and below the electrical board 180 are configured to be capable of suppressing displacement of the electrical board 180 in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the electrical board 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is stably supported by being sandwiched between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and rear. there is This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the electric board 180 are fastened and fixed to form a single rigid body, the electric board 180 may vibrate under the influence of the vibration generated in the middle member 170M. , is a countermeasure in consideration of it.

That is, according to this embodiment, the electrical board 180 is not fastened and fixed to either the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, so even if the middle member 170M or the front member 170F vibrates, it will It is possible to make it easier to independently maintain the arrangement of the electrical board 180 .

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the intermediate member 170M is likely to cause vibration of the intermediate member 170M. It is arranged on the opposite side (rear side) of the electrical board 180 across a gap generated on the front side of the part 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the electrical board 180 via the small-diameter protruding cylindrical portion 172, so that the deformation of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 mitigates the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the electrical board 180 . Therefore, it is possible to avoid direct transmission of vibration from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as a vibration source to the electrical board 180. FIG.

The intermediate member 170M includes a support hole 174 having a diameter slightly longer than that of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and formed in the front-rear direction so as to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162;
A lower regulation portion 175 arranged below the OL1 and an upper regulation portion 176 arranged on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 are provided.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated. The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the metal plate member MB1
The abutment member 161 and the driven member 163 rotate as the contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are displaced between the raised position arranged as a result of being raised by the electromagnetic force and the lowered position arranged as a result of the disappearance of the electromagnetic force and lowered by its own weight. Displace. The rotational displacement will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG.

11(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. FIG. 12(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. FIG.

11(a) and 11(b) show a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state in the lowered position). 12(a) and 12(b) show a state in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by the electromagnetic force generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 (up position state).

Also, in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), for ease of understanding, the rear member 170B
is omitted, and in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the outer shape of the displacement member 151 and the shape of the open portion on the back side are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), in the lowered position, the driven member 163 abuts against a cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower restricting portion 175, thereby restricting the downward displacement. As for the position, the cushion portion 17 attached to the lower surface of the upper restricting portion 176
6a and its upward displacement is restricted.

The material of the cushion portions 175a and 176a is not limited at all. For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resins, polyurethanes and epoxy resins may be used, and rubber materials may be used. Also, the cushion portions 175a,
The material of 176a may be the same or may be different.

Here, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are configured so that their positions (distances from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with respect to the transmission shaft rod portion 162 are different. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly caused by the weight of the driven member 163, supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163 reduces the load on the driven member 163. It can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulation part 175
It is arranged at the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (approximately at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper restricting portion 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.
There is little advantage in relating the arrangement of . In this embodiment, by arranging the upper restricting member 176 to face the rotating tip of the driven member 163, the driven member 163
reduces the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the .

That is, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the position farther from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is longer) is transmitted through the driven member 163 . Since the load becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

In this way, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). As a result, it is possible to avoid load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and to stably generate load transmission at the tip of rotation.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is continuously generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 at the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the driven member 163 bounces back after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulating portion 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface that receives the load can be increased. The pressure (
stress) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, rebounding of the driven member 163 can be suppressed while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a through the driven member 163 during displacement in both the vertical direction.

Below the upper restricting portion 176, a protruding portion 176b is formed to protrude in a curved shape toward the rear side of the intermediate member 170M. The projecting portion 176b is arranged to face the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the projecting portion 176b prevents contact with the driven member 163 with a small area while preventing the driven member 163 from contacting the driven member 163. guides the rotation of

As shown in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the distal end portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmission hole 177 in front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light-emitting means 181 a is visually recognized by the player through the tip portion 153 .

As described above, due to the internal shape of the effect section 153a, it is possible for the player viewing the effect section 153a from the front side to visually recognize the entire effect section 153a as if it were shining (faintly). Even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced while the actual arrangement of the means 181a is not changed, it is possible to suppress the change in the lighting mode of the effect section 153a.

In other words, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light visually recognized through the effect section 153a as if it were displaced in synchronism with the displacement of the effect section 153a. is arranged, and it is possible to make an illusion as if the displacement is synchronized with the displacement of the effect part 153a.

On the other hand, the weak light emitting means 181b can appear to emit light at a fixed position. It can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a that is also arranged on the electrical board 180 can be visually recognized as emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, by adopting a plurality of electric decoration boards, the first board is fixed and the second board is displaceable. It can be realized using a decorative substrate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of electrical boards while achieving the same presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 5, description will be made. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. FIG. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and an outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311 and a rear case 310 formed in a box shape whose front side is open.

A rectangular opening 311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, so that the rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit 300 includes a first operation unit 400 disposed in the inner space of the rear case 310 so that the movable device can be displaced along a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and a first operation unit 400 disposed on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a. A left and right effect unit 600 for performing such operations and a second action unit 700 disposed below the opening 311a are accommodated, respectively, and configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are provided on the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 above the opening 311a and below the opening 311a, respectively. 5 shows a state in which the first operation unit 400 and the second operation unit 700 are attached to the rear case 310. As shown in FIG.

The back case 310 extends along the back of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall 312 (for example,
It has a support plate portion 313 extending as a plane plate (arranged in parallel) and supporting the surface of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a projecting toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into the fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. and a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 313a into the fitting recesses 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the action unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

In addition, the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess 60b may be used, or a fitting gap may be increased in consideration of workability during assembly. A shape (smaller outer shape) projection may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in this embodiment, a large number of support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310, and less support plate portions 313 are formed on the right side and the lower side. However, this is the result of design considering the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of plywood in which plywood is laminated as in this embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. becomes invisible, the entire back side of the area where an opening can be formed (recessed from the side) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is effective as an area for effect where the movable member is arranged so as to be visible.

On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the inner space of the rear case 310 is eroded inwardly by the area of the support plate portion 313 when viewed from the front. This narrows the area where it can be arranged. Therefore, even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, if the problem of strength can be maintained while being resolved, it is said that by omitting the support plate portion 313, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the arrangement range of the movable member. That is.

In this embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 because of the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the balls shot into the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to reach the game area. , and after that it is configured to flow down the game area. In a pinball game, the point where the most attention is considered to be the point where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 or the inner rail 61) ) is usually low in attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left with reference to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left and upper right with reference to the upward convex arc are the ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is conceivable that the player's attention to .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the surfaces of the outer edge member 73 and the lower left and upper left portions of the outer rail 62 facing the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material. The rear side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized through the block-shaped member 74. FIG.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged at the locations where the attention force is low and the locations that are invisible. Actually, even in the left side and the upper side where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portions 313 are formed near the corners of the rear case 310, avoiding the central portion as the projecting end portion of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from locations with low visibility (low performance performance), the operation unit 300
In addition, while achieving the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board 13, it is possible to ensure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since the pachinko machine has a common configuration in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls along the outer rail 62 and is introduced into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left and the upper left. can be easily arranged in the upper and upper right corners.

Approximately the lower half of the outer wall 312 on the right side is provided with a notch 312a that is notched (formed as a notch) toward the rear side. The notch portion 312a is cut below the band-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in a front view, and a gap is formed between the game board 13 and the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). Form.

By forming the notch portion 312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch portion 312 a can function as a wire passage through which the electric wire connected to the variable winning device 65 passes outward from the rear case 310 . As a result, the possibility of the electrical wiring interfering with other components can be reduced compared to the case where the wiring is routed vertically.

In addition, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the variable winning device 65. FIG. The configuration required for the variable prize winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which the ball flows, a substrate that accompanies the lighting effect, a detection sensor that detects the ball, and other structures. are exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily recognized by the player as light with a blurred outline.
In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). , the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to avoid the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board 13 from depending on the shape of the rear case 310, and to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as LEDs is arranged along the back surface of the game board 13 so as to extend outside the operation unit 300, the electric wiring can be operated through the notch 312a. The configuration of this embodiment, in which the light is led out of the unit 300, can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED.

In other words, the possibility of the electric wiring blocking the light emitted from the LED can be eliminated by constructing the electric wiring so that it can be put out of the operation unit 300 without being routed to the front side of the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the performance by the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED.

In addition, the formation length (vertical direction length) of the notch part 312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion 312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the right side of the back case 310 is not fastened to the game board 13. Therefore, when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board 13, it is necessary to rely on the rigidity of the operation unit 300. can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13 . The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75,
15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate member 75. FIG. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated alone, and illustration of other members arranged on the game board 13 is omitted.

The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and having an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from a lower end portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a. and an inclined wall portion 73c having an upper surface inclined downward from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 can be formed more easily than when the outer edge member 73 is formed from a plurality of vertically divided members. The man-hours for assembling to the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-like projecting portions 73b1 projecting along the right surface portion toward the back side.
A plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed by bending the front side edge portion of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction, and the joint portion between the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c are cylindrically formed to the rear side. A cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 that protrudes, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided along with the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed are provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-like member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate-like member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is achieved while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate-like member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 allow the metal plate-like member 75 to be bent. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at regular intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring in any one place.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a body plate portion 75a that is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction and is formed without creases in the longitudinal direction, and the back side edge of the body plate portion 75a is bent leftward. A plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. and an insertion hole 75e through which a fastening screw can be inserted through a plate portion formed side by side with the plate portion formed with the through hole 75d and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently reinforce the vertical wall portion 73b by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which tends to bend in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 are formed so as to be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 into the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, forming a cylindrical projection. Part 73b3
is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

Since the metal plate-like member 75 is arranged over the vertical wall portion 73b from the above configuration, the vertical wall portion 73b can be entirely reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the rear side, and the tip thereof engages with the game board 13 . The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board 13 will be described below.

The game board 13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed to receive the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and the columnar projecting portions 73b3 are received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. and a plurality of positioning holes 13f recessed as possible recesses.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 is received in the concave portion 13e, and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b
3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pieces to be positioned.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. The portion 73b can be formed so thin as to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress deformation of the game board 13 (improve the rigidity). It can maintain its shape.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 13, description will be made. A first operation unit 400 is arranged above the third pattern display device 81 of the operation unit 300 . The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. It is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling displacement in synchronism or controlling displacement in synchronism with the operation of the frame button 22 operable by the player. The details of the first operating unit 400 are described below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 16 illustrates a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. The projected state projected (descended) toward the 3-symbol display device 81 side is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the rear case 310 is not symmetrical. In particular, for the upper wall (ceiling surface), the shape of the tank 130 of the dispensing unit 93 (
3), the right side in front view is lower than the left side in front view. That is, when the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operation unit 300, the upper side wall of the rear case 310 is arranged at a lower position on the right side than on the left side in order to secure the arrangement area. (arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

As described above, in the inside of the back case 310, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is more room in the ceiling height). Auxiliary devices such as SP1 that do not directly affect the appearance of the performance (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) are arranged on the left side.

As a result, a recess (gap portion) caused by the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310
can be effectively used to dispose the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1, and the lower edge of the first motion unit 400 can be brought to the upper side as much as possible while making the shape symmetrical. It is possible to easily secure a large vertical dimension of the visual recognition area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the shape of the wing-shaped member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operation unit 400 is selected according to the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310 .
The shape of the side facing the upper wall of the rear case 310 in the retracted state of 0 is designed. Namely
The left wing-like member 460 is designed to protrude toward the upper wall side of the rear case 310 compared to the right wing-like member 460 .

It should be noted that the feather members 460 are united when the state of the first operation unit 400 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, and are configured so as to be visually recognized integrally, and are designed to have a bilaterally symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right feather members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In this embodiment, when the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state, the asymmetrical portion of the wing-like member 460 (the upper side that abuts when combined) is hidden behind the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right feather members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS.
4 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. FIG. 18 and 20 show the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 show the extended state of the first operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS.

In the first operation unit 400, the arm member 414 rotates via a plurality of intervening gears when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, and the elevating plate 430 ascends and descends in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is arranged substantially in the left-right center position, and is supported by a metal rail 405 configured to be vertically extendable and an auxiliary arm member 444 arranged on the left-right opposite side of the arm member 414 . be.

The elevating plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is relatively displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and rotates symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. A plurality of displaceable feather members 460 are displaced.

Accordingly, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement manner in which the drive motor MT1 is driven, in which the upward/downward movement and the rotation are combined. As a result, the structural members can be displaced in a plurality of directions even though only the single drive motor MT1 is used, so the performance effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first motion unit 400, the auxiliary arm member 4
44 is constructed so that the upper end portion of the arcuate upper gear portion 444 b projects upward from the upper edge portion of the lift plate 430 . In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge of the elevator plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is protruding.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevator plate 430 from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 toward the extended state, the upper edge of the elevator plate 430 in the retracted state can move downward. The arc-shaped gear portion 444b that also protrudes upward (see FIG. 27)
As the lift plate 430 is displaced downward, it is displaced downward and hidden below the upper edge of the lift plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this manner, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the lift plate 430 at the portion shielded by the base plate 60 due to the arrangement, and the lift plate 430
By displacing the auxiliary arm member 444 so as to hide the overhang behind the lift plate 430 until the lift plate 430 displaces to a position where the lift plate 43 is not shielded by the base plate 60, the lift plate 43
0, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the lift plate 430 can be improved compared to the case where the auxiliary arm member 444 is hidden on the back side of the hoist.

For example, the top edge of the lift plate 430 can be positioned lower so that the lift plate 430
Interference between the upper edge of the rear case 310 and the upper outer wall 312 of the rear case 310 can be easily avoided (see FIG. 16).

Further, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, the third symbol display device 81
While avoiding a situation in which the rack gear-shaped portion (the portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is kept projecting on the side, the projecting length of the lifting plate 430 toward the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. can be sufficiently secured.

That is, even if a fixed rack-gear-shaped portion is formed on the side of the lifting plate 430 of the main body plate portion 401 so as to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the lifting plate 430 is vertically displaced, and the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 does not affect the lifting plate 430. Although the relative displacement member 442 can be vertically displaced, in this case, it is necessary to always arrange a fixed rack gear-shaped portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if most of the elevating plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 as in the elevating plate 430 of the present embodiment, the fixed rack gear-shaped portion can be used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 . Therefore, it is necessary to project from the third pattern display device 81 side.

Therefore, the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 is deteriorated because the third pattern display device 81 is shielded by the fixed rack gear-shaped portion. Since the purpose is to hide the curved portion, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in designing the lift plate 430 is lowered.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, instead of the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is adopted, so that the rear side of the lift plate 430 (
Auxiliary arm member 444 may be positioned (hidden). Therefore, while avoiding a situation in which the rack-gear-shaped portion is maintained overhanging toward the third symbol display device 81, the extension length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 is sufficiently increased. can be secured.

22(a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operation unit 400, and FIG.
(b) is a front perspective view of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 showing the engagement state of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are exploded rear perspective views of the first operation unit 400 It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a), 23, 24 and 25, the first operating unit 400
The bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16) is formed of a resin material into a plate shape elongated in the left and right direction.
11, a transmission unit 410 composed of a plurality of members rotatably supported on the main body plate 401, and an arm member 41 of the transmission unit 410.
a rear plate 420 composed of a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged on the same plane including a connecting plate portion 421 connected to the tip of the rear plate 420; 4
20, and a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the housing plate portion 425 of the rear plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
.

In addition, the first operation unit 400 includes a plate-like support plate portion 4 that is fastened and fixed to the lifting plate 430 .
50, and a pair of right and left feather members 460 which are rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450 thereof and rotationally displaced by the load applied by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. , and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the feather member 460 (FIG. 2).
2(a), FIG. 22(b) and FIG. 24).

The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft support portion 402 that supports a transmission gear 412, a terminal support portion 403 that is disposed at the lower right portion and supports a terminal gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports an arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 disposed in the center of the left and right and fixed on the rear side so that the front side can be vertically displaced, and a long left and right opening is drilled on the right side of the metal rail 405. a long hole portion 406 formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape and covering the area where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the back side; and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state. Prepare.

The end support portion 403 includes a shaft support portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft support portion 402, an annular projection 403b projecting along a circle centered on the shaft support portion 403a, and an annular protrusion 403b. A stopper portion 403c projecting in a fan shape toward the front side is provided at a position between the projecting portion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the projecting portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the area where the long hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 passing through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaching the rear side of the long hole portion 406 is connected to the long hole. It is guided to the front side through the portion 406 . Therefore, in a situation where the back side is open without the lid 407, the electrical wiring DH1 protrudes toward the back side, and during the assembly work, the space between the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 13) of the back case 310 and the main body plate portion 401 is removed. There is a risk of being caught in the In contrast, in the present embodiment, the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid portion 407, so that the electric wiring DH1 is prevented from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. can be done.

As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor MT1; A terminating gear 413 meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and an arm supporting portion 404 capable of changing its posture as the terminating gear 413 rotates.
and an arm member 414 pivotally supported on the .

The terminating gear 413 has a gap between an annular protrusion 413a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and protruding toward the rear side of the annular protrusion 413a and the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stopper-receiving portion 413b projecting in the same fan shape as the stopper portion 403c with a space therebetween, and the shaft support portion 40
A columnar projecting portion 413c projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side at an eccentric position away from 3a, and a detected portion extending in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the front side of the gear portion. 41
3d.

The annular protrusion 413a is disposed so that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b,
The annular projection 403b is sandwiched between the stopper-receiving portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail that guides the rotation of the terminal gear 413. As shown in FIG.

The stopper-receiving portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the projecting portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stopper-receiving portion 413b rotates toward the stopper portion 4 in its rotational direction.
Interfere with 03c. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is
03c and the portion to be stopped 413b in the circumferential direction. That is, the terminal gear 413 is rotationally displaced by a rotation angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper-receiving portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is set to 36
The stopper portion 403c and the stopper-receiving portion 41
Each shape of 3b should be designed. As a result, weakening of the strength of either the stopper portion 403c or the stopped portion 413b can be avoided, so that the useful life of the first operation unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical projecting portion 413c is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the terminal gear 413 made of resin. A friction-reducing ring-shaped collar C1 and a well-known E-ring E1 are arranged at the protruding distal end portion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical protruding portion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected portion 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1.
13 MPUs 221 can determine that the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404,
A plate-like portion 414b extending in the radial direction from the front side portion of the annular portion 414a, and an extended end of the plate-like portion 414b arranged in parallel to the rear side of the plate-like portion 414b. and an intermediate plate portion 414c connected to the portion, and an elongated hole portion 414d bored in the intermediate plate portion 414c.
, a front end plate portion 414e arranged parallel to the rear side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c; and a columnar projecting portion 414f that projects in a columnar shape.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to pass through, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical projecting portion 414f is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the tip plate portion 414e made of resin. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a well-known E-ring E1 are arranged at the projecting tip of the columnar projecting portion 414f so that the connecting plate portion 421 of the rear plate 420 cannot fall off. It is connected and supported by the projecting portion 414f.

26 is a top view of the first operating unit 400. FIG. In FIG. 26, the first operating unit 4
A second intermediate position of 00 is shown and for ease of understanding the coil spring SP
1. A fixed pulley in which the coil spring SP1 is guided, a driving motor MT1, and a base plate to which the driving motor MT1 is fastened are not shown.

According to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, the arm member 414
is bent back and forth, it is possible to functionally avoid interference with other members. This will be explained below.

The plate-like portion 414b is arranged closer to the front side than the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the restriction on the front and back position of the plate-like portion 414b is based on the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the location not related to the detection sensor SC1 (the location on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). The front and back position can be designed arbitrarily.

In this embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c, which is arranged on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1, is arranged on the back side compared to the plate-like portion 414b. As a result, the front-to-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 at the root side of the cylindrical projection 413c. It is possible to avoid a decrease in load transmission efficiency due to deformation of the columnar projecting portion 413c.

Furthermore, since it depends on the relationship with the terminating gear 413 at the front and rear positions of the intermediate plate portion 414c, a portion not related to the terminating gear 413 (rotating shaft (arm support portion 404
) on the opposite side of ), the front-rear position can be arbitrarily designed.

In this embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e arranged on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the terminal gear 413 is arranged on the back side compared to the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, it is possible to secure a large space on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e. It is possible to make it easier to ensure the front-to-rear dimensions of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440 .

Thus, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set so as to avoid interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by bending the arm member 414 in stages, the load generated on the arm member 414 can be avoided from being concentrated locally (at one point) (stress concentration can be relieved), and the arm member 414 durability can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a large gap on the opposite side of the arm member 414 to the other member that secures the gap. Therefore, the gap can be used to lay an electric wiring (an electric wiring different from the electric wiring DH1), or to arrange an additional production member (electrical decoration board, etc.).

Further, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 arranged to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is unintentionally caught in the feather-shaped member 460 or rotated. It is configured such that it can be prevented from being bitten by the gear teeth of the gear 441 and the relative displacement member 442 . This will be explained below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electric wiring DH1 first passes from the main body plate portion 401 side through the elongated hole portion 406 to the auxiliary arm member 44.
You will be directed to 4. At this time, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted through the through-hole 448a of the end side plate 448 to pass inside the extended portion 444c.

Inside the extended portion 444c, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the proximal side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. After that, the electrical wiring DH1 is connected to the proximal side portion 44
It is guided from 4 a to the rear side of the housing plate portion 425 and reaches the through hole 427 through the L-shaped region partitioned by the frame portion protruding toward the rear side of the housing plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428 .

The frame portion protruding toward the rear side of the housing plate portion 425 is provided with an omission portion 425b in which the protruding portion is omitted over approximately half the circumference around the insertion hole 425a. The omission part 425b allows the electrical wiring DH
1 can be guided to the front side of the closing plate 428 at an angle of 180 degrees. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 is bent near the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates.

The electric wiring DH1 is passed through the through-hole 427 to the front side, and is guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430 through the cylindrical portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through-hole 427 in the front and rear direction. It is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of 450 with a binding band or the like, and is connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board of the light emission effect device LA1.

In this way, most of the route of the electrical wiring DH1 is provided by the constituent member (auxiliary arm member 444).
, and the rear plate 420), the electrical wiring DH1 is not exposed (exposed) in most of the path as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to reduce the possibility of colliding with other movable members and receiving loads.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path of the electrical wiring DH1 is separated from the relative displacement member 442 that slides. That is, it is limited to rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by sliding displacement of the rotation shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or curving in the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the elevator plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are greatly different, the deformation of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 are substantially different.
It is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 by breaking the relationship with the displacement speed of .

Returning to FIG. 22(a), FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The rear plate 420 includes a plate-like connecting plate portion 421 that is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened and fixed to the lifting plate 430, and is disposed on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421 and attached to the lifting plate 430. The housing plate portion 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and the housing plate portion 4 thereof
25 and an L-shaped blocking plate 428 that partially blocks the rear side of the housing plate portion 425 .

The connection plate portion 421 is formed in the main body plate portion in the form of a long hole elongated in the left-right direction, and is formed into a cylindrical projecting portion 414f.
and a support box portion 423 formed in a box-like shape with an open front side and an upper side below the long insertion hole 422 .

Since the support box portion 423 is elongated downward with respect to the long insertion hole 422 , the support box portion 423 can be used to reinforce the rigidity of the housing plate portion 425 . That is, the support box portion 42
3 are arranged to face the support wall portion 426 on the left and right. can be suppressed.

The housing plate portion 425 includes a support wall portion 426 protruding toward the front side in a linear plate shape extending in the vertical direction from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a through hole formed at the front side of the blocking plate 428 . and a hole 427 .

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. As shown in FIG. That is, the through-hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter that allows the insertion of the connector arranged at the end of the electrical wiring DH1.

The blocking plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts against a frame portion that protrudes like a frame on the back side of the housing plate portion 425 , and partitions the region between the housing plate portion 425 and the blocking plate 428 . Configured. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only inside the frame of the housing plate 425 (on the front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side of the frame portion).

A deformed hole 428a is formed through the blocking plate 428 so that the temporary retaining portion 425c, which is a portion protruding in a U-shape toward the rear side at a position closer to the through hole 427 than the omission portion 425b, can be visually recognized from the rear. be.

The deformed hole 428a is composed of a horizontally elongated portion having a lateral width slightly longer than the width of the temporary fastening portion 425c and a vertically elongated portion provided to intersect the horizontally elongated portion to secure an area through which the binding band can be passed. It is formed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion for the binding band. Electrical wiring D with cable ties
By temporarily fixing H1, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. in this case,
By tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the blocking plate 428 side can be shifted to the blocking plate 428 side. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the circular plate portion and the electric wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As a result, the electric wiring DH1 is connected to the housing plate portion 42
Since it is possible to avoid rubbing against the edge portion of 5, the service life of the electrical wiring DH1 can be extended.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fixing the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the closure plate 428 .

As a result, the temporary fixing position of the electric wire DH1 is a position between the housing plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, which is a position where the position of the electric wire DH1 is fixed with respect to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 (that is, the electric wire is fixed). An electric wiring DH from the light emission effect device LA1 to which one end of DH1 is connected
1, the electric wiring DH1 is temporarily displaced at a location where the electric wiring DH1 overlaps the path to the base end side portion 444a of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first portion where the electric wiring DH1 is displaced with respect to the elevator plate 430. Replacing the zip ties while fastening can be done without removing the closure plate 428 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the service life of the electrical wiring DH1, and to improve the maintainability of the binding band related to the electrical wiring DH1.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is laid along the front side of the blocking plate 428 along the shape of the blocking plate 428, and the blocking plate 428 is L-shaped in rear view.
is curved along a first plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction on the front side of the closing plate 428, while along a second plane perpendicular to the left-right direction (a plane perpendicular to the first plane) near the through hole 427 will be curved. As a result, the holding force for holding the electrical wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the housing plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of portions related to the fastening and fixing of the rear panel 420 and a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of portions related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440.
, a tubular portion 433 formed so that the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted, a fastening portion 434 configured from a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a main body plate portion to avoid interference between members and a decorative portion 436 having a substantially symmetrical pattern on the front surface of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 is arranged at least at the lower end portion of the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 (
A pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a are provided to support the vertical displacement of the slide rack. The gourd-shaped projection 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, and has a female screw shape formed from the tip thereof, into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the housing plate portion 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed. be. That is, it is used both as a portion related to the fastening and fixing of the rear plate 420 and a portion related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440 .

The tubular portion 433 extends to the rear side through the gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440 , and the rear side end portion of the cylindrical portion 433 contacts the front surface of the housing plate portion 425 . The inside of the tubular portion 433 is continuously connected. Through this continuously connected portion, the electrical wiring DH
1 is inserted back and forth.

As the countermeasure portion 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion (in this embodiment, raised fastening portions arranged vertically) between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442, the main body plate portion A notch portion 435a that is notched upward from the lower edge and an auxiliary arm member 444
A recessed portion 435b formed to avoid interference with the arcuate gear portion 444b formed in a wall portion formed in a wall shape so as to protect the axially upper portion of the arcuate gear portion 444b is exemplified. .

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back side of the wing-shaped member 460, and is configured to cooperate with the wing-shaped member 460 as the wing-shaped member 460 is displaced so that a series of patterns can be visually recognized. will be described later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotating gears 441 that mesh with each other and the rotating gear 441.
A relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the gears 41 and is formed to be displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of elongated holes 443 bored in the relative displacement member 442, and the other of the rotary gear 441 and the teeth. It comprises an auxiliary arm member 444 having matching rotary gear teeth, and an end side plate 448 fastened and fixed to the rotating tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the rear side.

A gourd-shaped protrusion 431 a is inserted through the long hole 443 . The longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the long hole 44
3 are arranged substantially parallel to each other, the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

In addition, compared to the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an elliptical shape, the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced, so that the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be separated from each other. It is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated between them.

The auxiliary arm member 444 has a ring-shaped proximal side portion 444a pivotally supported by the large-diameter projection 432a of the support portion 432, and an arcuate gear tooth formed concentrically with the ring shape of the proximal side portion 444a. A gear portion 444b and a ring-shaped extension portion 4 extending radially from the base end portion 444a.
44c, and a portion formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape disposed at the extended distal end portion of the extended portion 444c, and the open portion inside the cylinder is configured to be continuously connected to the open portion of the extended portion 444c. and a tubular member 444d.

The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a through which a fastening screw is inserted into a female threaded portion formed at the distal end of the large-diameter projection 432a while being inserted into the large-diameter projection 432a. The housing plate portion 425 restricts the movement to the rear side. That is, the base end side portion 444a
and the housing plate portion 425 from the front and the rear so as to be pivotally supported so as not to fall off.

The extending portion 444c is formed in a box shape with an open rear side, and extends from one side in the transverse direction to the other side in the rear side portion, and connects the short side of the electrical wiring DH1 to the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the directional dimension (width dimension) is provided. The retaining portion 444c1 serves to prevent the electrical wire DH1, which is disposed inside the extending portion 444c and is passed between the other side of the extending portion 444c in the short direction, from falling off thereafter. have.

Note that the form of the retainer portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the extension part 4
The gap between 44c and the retaining portion 444c1 is the lateral dimension (width dimension) of the electrical wiring DH1.
It may be configured to be shorter than In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electrical wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. It is possible to improve the effect of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 from coming off.

As long as the electrical wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extended portion 444c, it is possible to minimize the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 when the first motion unit 400 is vertically displaced. 30 as described below.

The tubular member 444d is designed such that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the lateral dimension of the long hole portion 406, and when it is inserted through the long hole portion 406, the cylindrical member 444d extends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the long hole portion 406. , and rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444.

The end side plate 448 is provided with a through hole 448a through which the electrical wiring DH1 can be inserted.
The electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a is connected to the cylindrical portion 4 inserted through the elongated hole portion 406.
44 d , through the extended portion 444 c , guided to the rear side of the base end side portion 444 a , and entered between the blocking plate 428 and the housing plate portion 425 . Then, it is guided to the front side through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433 .

Since the electric wire DH1 is passed through in this way, the inner shape of the through-hole 448a is the same as that of the electric wire DH1.
is formed larger than the external shape of the connector connected to the end of the In other words, through hole 448
a is formed in such a size that the connector can be inserted.

The through-hole 448a is formed in an irregular shape including not only the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also an eccentric area on the radial outer side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electric wiring DH1 can be brought closer to the extended portion 444c side, so that the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 becomes larger as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes. You can avoid changing (ramping).

In addition, the through hole 448a extends counterclockwise in a rear view from the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448 with the extension portion 444c side as a reference. Due to this extension, the opening range of the through-hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right, so that the horizontal displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plates 448 are displaced laterally when the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, the lateral displacement of the end side plates 448 can be suppressed by changing the direction of the through holes 448a. It can act as a mitigator. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electrical wiring DH1 can be made shorter than the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the excess wiring length set in consideration of the displacement of the electrical wiring DH1 can be shortened. and end side plate 44
8 can reduce the load applied to the electric wiring DH1.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442 . That is, the lifting plate 4
30 and the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced.

The support plate portion 450 is formed in a disc shape and is used in the light emitting effect device LA having a light emitting substrate disposed on the back side.
A plate-like member 1 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and is internally fitted into a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which fastening screws inserted through the elevating plate 430 are screwed, and the cylindrical portion 461 of the feather-shaped member 460. , lifting plate 43
0, a pair of left and right fastening and shaft supporting portions 452 into which fastening screws are inserted, a pair of left and right through holes 453 drilled below the fastening and shaft supporting portions 452, and a light emitting device LA1.
and a support portion 454 for hooking and supporting the upper projecting piece LA1b.

The light emitting device LA1 has a pair of fastening portions LA1a at its lower portion into which fastening screws to be inserted through the support plate portion 450 are screwed, and a pair of projecting pieces protruding to be inserted into the support portion 454 at its upper portion. LA1b is provided. In this way, while the lower part of the light emitting effect device LA1 is supported by fastening,
By supporting the upper part by engagement, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from appearing on the upper back side of the electrical board while ensuring sufficient support strength.

A three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern is applied to the front of the light-emitting effect device LA1 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured to be visible as an integral decoration with the wing-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when it is visible without being hidden by the wing-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (Fig. 34). reference).

In this embodiment, the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are shaped like shellfish (for example, scallop shells), and the light emitting device LA1 arranged between them is shaped like a pearl. It is formed in a substantially circular shape that can be visually recognized from the front. That is, by making the light emitting member LA1, the feather member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 integrally visible, it is possible to construct an appearance that reminds one of a series of concepts of "a pearl placed inside an open shell". .

The feather-like member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening/shaft-supporting part 452 , and has a cylindrical part 461 rotatably supported on the fastening/shaft-supporting part 452 , and a cylindrical part 461 . an arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape and meshing with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and the extension portion 463 Forming portion 464L that is formed on the extension end side and is configured to be able to reflect light strongly by coating the plate front portion with plating.
, 464R, a downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the arcuate gear 462 along an arc with a smaller diameter than the arcuate gear 462, and a flange portion formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462. 466, and a columnar projecting portion 467 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side from the extended end portion where the flange portion 466 extends in the outer shape direction.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as gear teeth formed in an arc having the same diameter and meshing with each other at an intermediate position of the pair of cylindrical portions 461 . That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) feather members 460 rotated by the engagement of the circular arc gears 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extended portion 463 has a recessed portion 463a that is recessed only on the right side. recessed part 4
Reference numeral 63a denotes a shaped portion for easily avoiding interference with electric wiring guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430 through the cylindrical portion 433, the details of which will be described later.

Forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the extended state of first operation unit 400 and configured as a series of substantially semicircular (substantially semielliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17).
In the retracted state of the operation unit 400, they are arranged separately on the left and right, and their sizes are left and right asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, while the lower part is formed symmetrically, the left forming part 464L protrudes in the rotational direction compared to the right forming part 464R in terms of the shape of the upper part, which abuts when combined. By being done, it will be greatly formed. In other words, in the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the contact surfaces S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged on the right side (FIG. 17).
reference).

The shape of the upper ends of the feather members 464L and 464R, which are arranged to face each other, is
It differs depending on the distance from the tubular portion 461 . That is, on the side closer to the tubular portion 461 (the side closer to the rotation shaft, the inner diameter side), the blade members 464L and 464R are arranged so that they overlap each other in a front view when they are closest to each other. Interference portion 4 displaced in the rotation axis direction
64a is provided.

In this embodiment, the side closer to the tubular portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visible as a series of patterns is formed when the feather members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. When the feather members 464L and 464R come closest to each other due to the above-described interference portion 464a, the feather members 464L and 464R
Since it is possible to prevent the contact surface S1 of the 464R from being cut, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized by the player without discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the tubular portion 461 (the side far from the rotating shaft, the outer diameter side), the feather member 464L
, 464R so as to stop the rotation of the wings 464L, 464R.
The shape is such that the abutment surface is arranged at a position that coincides with R in the direction of the rotation axis.

By providing the portion where the load on the wing-shaped members 464L and 464R when they are stopped is at the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the moment of force is the longest, the wing-shaped members 46
It is possible to minimize the load generated on 4L and 464R.

In this way, by changing the shape of the wing-like members 464L and 464R according to the distance from the tubular portion 461, the series of decorative patterns formed when the wing-like members 464L and 464R are closest to each other makes the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to minimize the load that may be generated on the wing members 464L and 464R when the wing members 464L and 464R are closest to each other.

The flange portion 466 is used both for suppressing the positional deviation of the arc-shaped gear 462 in the front-rear direction and for separating the arc-shaped gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490 . As a result, the meshing state of the arc-shaped gear 462 can be optimized, and it is possible to prevent the arc-shaped gear 462 from coming into contact with and being caught by the fixed transmission plate 490 and causing excessive resistance.

The columnar projecting portion 467 is inserted through the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and a ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted through the projecting tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed on the protruding distal end portion, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the collar C1 and has a head portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is screwed. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 467 so as not to fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-like members that are rotatably supported, and includes a supported portion 471 formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom, and a through hole 453 that is inserted through the supported portion 471 so as to be non-rotatable. and a gear portion 473 having gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the metal insertion rod 472 and non-rotatably fitted to the end of the metal insertion rod 472.
and

A female thread is formed in the radial direction on the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472 , and the supported portion 471
A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to , through which a threaded portion of a fastening screw to be screwed into the female screw can be inserted. After inserting the insertion metal rod 472 through the supported portion 471 , the insertion metal rod 472 can be prevented from falling off from the supported portion 471 by screwing a fastening screw into the female thread through the through hole.

As the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through-hole 453 , the gear portion 473 moves toward the through-hole 4 .
It is rotatably supported around 53 . The gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (
22(b)), it rotates in synchronism with the rotation angle of the vane member 460. As shown in FIG.

The fixed transmission plate 490 includes a plate-like portion fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 formed as a curved long hole in the plate-like portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-like portion. It comprises a metal bar 492 which is a non-rotatably supported metal bar-like member and protrudes toward the front side, and a decorative portion 493 which is non-rotatably fixed to the protruding tip of the metal bar 492 .

The long hole portion 491 includes a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction and a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction.
and a curved change portion 491b formed by bending in the left-right direction from 1a. By partitioning the long hole portion 491 in this way, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the accompanying rotational displacement of the feather-like member 460 are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronous mode. The details are described later.

The metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 are connected and fixed by the above-described insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 47 .
1 is the same as the connection mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the metal rod 492 from falling off from the decorative portion 493 .

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28 and 2
9 and 30 are rear views of the first operation unit 400. FIG. FIGS. 27 to 30 illustrate how each constituent member is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 27 shows the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 16), the lift plate 430 descends from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical deviation dimension.
29, the second intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 in which the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 faces the left-right direction, and the extended state of the first operation unit 400 in FIG. , respectively.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the position of the terminal gear 413 is determined by the detected portion 413d entering the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. In this embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, extended state) are displaced by a preset amount from the retracted state. This is a state after displacement, and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical projecting portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member 414). 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminating gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminating gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 is loaded.
posture can be maintained (use of dead point).

A tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is arranged outside an arc MXS that circumscribes the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. Thereby, it is possible to avoid interference between the tip plate portion 414 e and the terminal gear 413 during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 .

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the lift plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is slidably supported in the long hole portion 406,
It is not without resistance, but the contact friction between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes movement resistance. That is, the right side portion of the lifting section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the action of this movement resistance.

As shown in FIG. 28, the arm member 414 is rotationally displaced so that the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward.
The relative displacement member 442 is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the lifting plate 430 .

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears. corresponds to the rotation angle of .

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the feather member 460 assumes the same posture as in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing when the elevator plate 430 starts to descend from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing when the feather-shaped member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the lift plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) before the wing-like member 460 starts rotating. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of the problem of colliding with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when displacing.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the feather-shaped member 460 rotates after it descends by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed so that the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 does not have a height difference between the left and right sides. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the feather member 460 is rotated simultaneously with the descent of the lifting plate 430 in the case where the lifting plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, it is possible to realize the operation of the first operation unit 400 of the present embodiment by using the operation conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the displacement mode of the conventional type. Thereby, the cost required for design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 4 hidden behind the lift plate 430 in the retracted state
14 is displaced so as to protrude above the lift plate 430 as the lift plate 430 descends, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the feather member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the lift plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). In other words, the feather-like member 460 not only serves as an effect means for making the player visually recognize the ornamental pattern formed on the surface side and executes an effect to liven up the game. It also functions as a co-hidden shield.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the wing-like member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting the driving force is arranged is compared to the forming portion 464R of the wing-like member 460 on the opposite side. Since the arm member 414 has a large shape, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

Similarly, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, due to its configuration, in the second intermediate state, the arm member 4
14 overhangs the lift plate 430 , while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the lift plate 430 . That is, after the arm member 414 protrudes above the lift plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 protrudes above the lift plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even if the forming portion 464R, which has a shape smaller than that of the forming portion 464L (the amount of upward protrusion of the lifting plate 430 at the same point in time is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L), there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. 444 can be hidden from the player's view.

As shown in FIG. 29, the auxiliary arm member 444 is in a posture in which the longitudinal direction faces the left-right direction at a position slightly past the state where the columnar projecting portion 414f is leftmost away from the rotation axis of the arm member 414. Become. In the state where the columnar projecting portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the lift plate 430 tends to increase.
On the other hand, when the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the lift plate 430 at the same timing, the displacement resistance of the lift plate 430 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state in which the columnar overhanging portion 414f is farthest leftward from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the cylindrical portion 44
4d (see FIG. 25) is arranged at the right end of the elongated hole 406 to apply a leftward load to the lift plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby increasing the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430. While suppressing the displacement resistance, the lifting plate 4 is moved by the lateral load applied to the lifting plate 430 .
30 can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the columnar overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is defined as a reference position only, and the terminal gear 41
3 and the arm member 414 are designed by dynamically examining whether or not interference will occur when the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked.

As shown in FIG. 30 , in the extended state of the first operation unit 400 , the terminating gear 413 rotates around a position where the stopped portion 413 b of the terminating gear 413 contacts the stopper portion 403 c of the main body plate portion 401 as an end point. As for the control, the portion to be stopped 413b is controlled by the stopper portion 40
The drive motor M is rotated so that the terminal gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where it abuts on 3c.
T1 is driven. As a result, the stopper-receiving portion 413b and the stopper portion 40
Over-rotation of the terminating gear 413 can be structurally prevented while avoiding premature breakage of 3c.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm). (radial direction of rotation of member 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminating gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminating gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 is loaded.
posture can be maintained (use of dead point).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of arm member 414 . That is, it is possible to prevent not only the displacement in the direction of gravity, but also the upward displacement of the first operation unit 400 from the extended state to the retracted state.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lifting plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from rebounding upwardly after reaching the extended state. Displacement of the members (synchronous operation unit 440, feather member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) can be prevented. Therefore, the contact state of the feather member 460 can be easily maintained.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the lift plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is slidably supported in the long hole portion 406,
It is not without resistance, but the contact friction between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes movement resistance. That is, the right side portion of the lifting section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the action of this movement resistance.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the lift plate 430 . As a result, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 are applied to the left and right sides (
Although it is a configuration that occurs only on the left side), it is possible to avoid the attitude of the lifting plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405 .

Here, as described above, as long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 during the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 should be minimized. Explain what you can do.

When following the path of the electric wiring DH1 from the light emission effect device LA1 side, the auxiliary arm member 444
The path is fixed to the lifting plate 430 until it reaches , and the path becomes variable only with the auxiliary arm member 444 . On the other hand, the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is disposed is fixed in shape even while the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, so that the electric wiring DH1 is less likely to expand or contract. can.

The end side plate 44 is connected to the electric wiring DH1 at the position where it exits from the through hole 448a to the rear side.
A horizontal displacement is caused by the horizontal displacement of 8 . Thus, the electrical wiring DH1
Since the displacement that can cause expansion and contraction is limited to that due to the displacement of the end side plate 448,
In this embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured, the necessary extra length is calculated,
After adding the excess length to the electric wiring DH1 in the route from the fixed position of the electric wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electric wiring DH1 loosened), the electric wiring DH1 is fixed to the main body plate portion 401. ing.

In other words, it is possible to limit the portion near the end side plate 448 where there is a possibility that the electric wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430. can be suppressed to less than half of the vertical displacement of

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 causes the end side plate 448 to
Since the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced compared to the displacement width of the electric wiring D
The extra length of H1 can be shortened.

31, 32, 33 and 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400. FIG. Figure 3
1 to 34 illustrate the displacement of each component along with the rotation of the drive motor MT1. FIG. The first intermediate state is, in FIG. 33, the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is
In FIG. 34, the extended state of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated respectively.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge of the feather member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first action unit 400, the first action unit 400 entering the field of view of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrical movable member.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly displaced downward, the attitude of the feather member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the first action unit 400, which enters the field of view of the third symbol display device 81, as a symmetrical movable member.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, compared to the retracted state shown in FIG. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the downward displacement amount.

Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the vertical displacement of the single elevator plate 430 but also the vertical displacement of the elevator plate 430 is observed by the player who visually recognizes the elevator plate 430. Since the vertical displacement of the decorative portion 493, which is displaced by a vertical displacement amount different from that of 430, can be visually recognized, the production effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the amount of displacement of the lifting plate 430 and the amount of displacement of the decorative portion 493 increases compared to the first intermediate state. 470 changes its posture.

FIG. 34 illustrates a state in which the feather members 460 abut against each other at opposing positions. Feather member 46
0 is visually recognized as if it were a single substantially semicircular (semielliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members. It is formed at a position deviated to the right from the center position in the left-right direction.

In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is formed in advance on the side of the forming portion 464R more than the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R, so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is displaced from the left-right center. It consists of

Since the upper edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged at positions shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the forming portion 46
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 4L and 464R are configured in a left-right asymmetrical shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the asymmetrical shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

In addition, since the contact surface S1 is displaced from the metal rail 405 in a front view, even if the feather member 460 rebounds due to the impact at the time of contact and creates a gap again, the rail member can be removed from the gap. 405 can be avoided from being visually recognized, and the decorative shape formed on the plate front surface of the main body plate portion 401 can be visually recognized.

As a result, the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is compared to the case where it is visually recognized through the gap. , it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, the contact surface S1 is arranged at a position shifted from the left-right center position, which is generally assumed by a player as a gap between a pair of movable members that contact and separate on the left and right sides. In other words, a contact surface S1 is provided at a position deviated from the position (left-right central position) visually recognized by the player while anticipating that a gap will be formed. By arranging, even if a gap occurs, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the feather members 460. As shown in FIG. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first action unit 400, the external shape of the decoration part 436 is shielded by the feather member 460, and the player can see the whole picture. The structure is difficult to comprehend.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the external shape of the decorative portion 436 arranged below the wing-shaped member 460 is visible, and the external shape of the decorative portion 436 is the same as that of the wing-shaped member 460. It is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of when viewed from the front.

That is, the series of decorative shapes (“shellfish” shapes in this embodiment) visible when the pair of feather members 460 are in the protruding state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, it is possible to configure a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining the pair of feather members 460,
It can be visually recognized by the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement process of forming a series of ornamental shapes by displacing the feather member 460 is not uniform. That is, the first displacement process includes a process of forming a series of decorative shapes by displacing and merging the pair of feather members 460 as one component of the series of decorative shapes in a manner to approach each other.

On the other hand, in the process of the second displacement, the wing-like member 460 and the decorative portion 436, which constitute one configuration of the series of decorative shapes, overlap front and rear in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and are projected. A process of forming a series of ornamental shapes by displacing the feather members 460 in the direction in which the overlapping margin becomes smaller (the direction in which the feather members 460 move away from the decorative portion 436) as the state approaches.

Through these different processes, while the displacement of the wing-shaped member 460 itself is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, the shape can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the wing-shaped member 460, and a series of ornamental shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Accordingly, the individually displaceable vane members 460
While keeping the shape of , it is possible to configure a series of ornamental shapes that are combined in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 to be large compared to the size.

35, 36, 37 and 38 show the support plate portion 450, the feather-shaped member 460, the auxiliary member 4.
70 and a rear view of the fixed transmission plate 490. FIG. FIGS. 35 to 38 illustrate how each component is displaced as the driving motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 37 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 38 shows the extended state of the first operating unit 400. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c distributed along an arc shape are formed on the rear side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks out to the rear side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the extended state of the first operation unit 400, the through hole LA1
Since the feather member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back side of c, the light leaking from the through hole LA1c can be reflected to the front side by the forming portions 464L and 464R of the feather member 460. FIG.

Rotational displacement of feather member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38 . Feather member 4
Since the rotational displacement of 60 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical projecting portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in particular detail.

From the retracted state illustrated in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state illustrated in FIG.
, and the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the vane member 460 from being rotationally displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical projecting portion 467 .

In this embodiment, there is no separate member for urging the feather member 460 toward the retracted state, but due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R, the center of gravity is arranged laterally outward from the rotation axis. It is maintained in a retracted posture by its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, columnar overhanging portion 467 enters curvature changing portion 491b, so that a lateral load is applied to columnar overhanging portion 467, and vane member 460 starts rotational displacement. From the viewpoint of the transmission path of the drive force, the drive force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the fixed transmission plate 4
From 90 , it is transmitted to the left wing member 460 via the cylindrical projection 467 and then to the right wing member 460 . That is, compared to the right wing 460, the left wing 46
0 is upstream in the driving force transmission path.

In this embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left feather member 460, which is upstream in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be arranged so as to become lighter toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path. As a result, it is possible to achieve good transmission of the driving force, and it is possible to suppress the rebound displacement of each component after it has been displaced to the end position.

One of the reasons why the tubular portion 433 as a guide path for the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in weight between the forming portions 464L and 464R. More specifically, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact of the facing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R. error or
Deformation over time of the long hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the vane member 460 causes the formation portion 46
It is possible that the position after the displacement of 4L, 464R will change slightly.

In this case, the change in position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the extended portion 463 of the feather member 460 is arranged below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, a concave portion 463a is provided so that the overlap between the cylindrical portion 433 and the extension portion 463 is reduced. Accordingly, even if the formation portion 464L is unintentionally pushed down and displaced, the possibility of interference between the electric wiring DH1 and the formation portion 464L can be reduced.

In addition, since the forming portion 464L can be assumed to be easily displaced, the cylindrical portion 4
33 and recessed portion 463 can be designed at a position where they partially interfere (see FIG. 38).
Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In this embodiment, the formation range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 433 can be particularly opened. As a result, it is possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the extension portions 463 and the electrical wiring DH1 that tends to sag under its own weight inside the cylindrical portion 433 .

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from coming too close to the forming portion 464 side, so that the recessed portion 463a is positioned toward the rear side of the auxiliary member 470 in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400. , and the concave portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, the concave portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 in any state from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operation unit 400. FIG. Therefore, the extending portions 463 and the lower edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R of the pair of left and right feather-shaped members 460 can be easily visually recognized symmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Transmission of driving force from fixed transmission plate 490 to columnar projecting portion 467 occurs when fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward away from tubular portion 461 of vane member 460 . As the driving force is transmitted, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is pulled by the fixed transmission plate 490 and is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 461. Assuming that the fixed transmitting plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is It is configured so as not to be displaced at a constant velocity (configured so that the angular velocity changes).

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is set near the left and right of the cylindrical portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curvature changing portion 491b is an elongated hole extending in the horizontal direction (lateral direction). In this case, as the columnar projecting portion 467 is displaced downward, the angle of rotational displacement of the columnar projecting portion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction increases. Therefore, when the stationary transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the rotational displacement speed (angular speed) of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the pair of feather-like members 460 decelerate during displacement, it is possible to construct a powerful effect of displacing and merging at high speed.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical projection 467 leads to the speedup of the pair of wing members 460 just before they approach and merge. There is a possibility that the pair of wing-shaped members 460 may rebound greatly due to the impact at the time, and there is a possibility that the production effect of the present embodiment, in which the pair of wing-shaped members 460 are united to make a series of decorative patterns visually recognizable, may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curvature changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation shaft side of the wing-shaped member 460 (the left-hand wing-shaped member 460) having the cylindrical projecting portion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). It is formed as an elongated hole extending in an upwardly inclined direction. As a result, an increase in rotational displacement velocity (angular velocity) of the columnar projecting portion 467 can be suppressed.

The degree of suppression depends on the horizontal direction (horizontal direction)
corresponds to the amount of upward displacement of the curvature changing portion 491b with respect to the elongated hole parallel to (hereinafter also referred to as "upward correction amount").

As in the present embodiment, when the curvature changing portion 491b is formed as an elongated hole extending in a direction that inclines upward toward the rotating shaft side, the lower the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is displaced (the pair of vane members 4).
60 are closer to being combined), the amount of upward correction is increased. Therefore, the extent to which an increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of cylindrical projection 467 is suppressed (decrease width) can be gradually increased as the arrangement of cylindrical projection 467 changes downward.

Therefore, it is possible to moderately suppress the increase in speed compared to a structure exemplified by a brake structure that maintains the same frictional state. Note that the actual displacement speed of the feather-shaped member 460 will be described later.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first motion unit 400. FIG. 39(a) to 39(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. b)
39C, the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the feather member 460 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 39(c).

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case the terminating gear 41
3 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not rotate at a constant speed.
The up-and-down displacement of 30 also does not become a uniform velocity displacement.

That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode (for example, uniform rotation) of the drive motor MT1 and the control mode (non-uniform displacement) of the lift plate 430, and the lift plate 43 in the driving force transmission path is displaced.
The downstream displacement of 0 is affected by this shift. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed, it is difficult to displace the components arranged downstream in the transmission path at a constant speed.

For example, even if a fixed rack-gear-shaped portion is formed on the body plate portion 401 and the rack-gear-shaped portion engages with the rotating gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is Since it depends on the up-and-down displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, uniform velocity displacement is not achieved.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined by the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, but the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the elevator plate 430 . , the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 .

That is, a predetermined rule (for example, FIG. 39A) for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 into the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430 accompanying the vertical displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 414f of the arm member 414.
conversion formula for converting the numerical value of the horizontal axis to the numerical value of the vertical axis), to convert the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 444 d of the auxiliary arm member 444 accompanying the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441 By reversing the application, it is possible to partially offset the deviation of the displacement mode and approximate the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the rotation gear 441 .

In other words, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 is 1
At about 40 degrees, the deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 begins to occur (see FIG. 39(a)), while the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is changed from 30 degrees to 17 degrees when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is 30 degrees.
The deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed over the vicinity of 0 degrees (see FIG. 39(b)).

As a result, for example, as the driving motor MT1 and the terminating gear 413 rotate at a constant speed, most of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed (see FIG. 39(b)). can be vertically displaced with respect to the lifting plate 430 at substantially constant speed.

As a result, the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily associated with the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the first motion unit 40 can be used as a driving performance to be visually recognized by the player.
It is possible to easily set the speed of the drive motor MT1 by calculating back from the displacement mode to be executed at 0.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence exerted on the distal end side of the transmission path by the configuration that produces an advantageous effect only on the drive device side in the transmission path of the driving force. here,
With reference to the lift plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side is defined as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side is defined as the leading end side of the transmission path.

On the driving device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the extended state of the first operation unit 400.
Although it is preferable from the viewpoint of quickly starting and stopping the arm member 414, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state is extremely small on the distal end side of the transmission path. However, there is a problem in that it tends to be slow.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode of the distal end side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 must be set to or by controlling the arm member 414 to stop before deceleration of the arm member 414 occurs (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the extended state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used to displace the distal end of the transmission path becomes small, narrowing the width of the displacement mode. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the distal end side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413, so that the synchronization is performed immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state. The extent to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operation unit 440 decelerates can be made easier to reduce. Therefore, while maximizing the rotation angle of the arm member 414, the relative displacement member 442 arranged on the distal end side of the transmission path (and the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 arranged downstream thereof) can be adjusted. slow displacement can be avoided.

What the player visually recognizes is the displacement of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 . Figure 39 (
As shown in c), the rotational angular velocities of the vane-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the terminal gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed tend to increase (at least at a constant speed) immediately before the stop. The speed is reduced according to the shape of the curved portion 491 b of the long hole portion 491 .

As a result, compared to the case where the displacement mode of the wing-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430, the speed of the displacement of the wing-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be increased. Therefore, powerful displacement can be realized, and the performance effect can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the rotational angular velocities of the wing-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while they are increasing (the wing-shaped members 460 are united), a section is provided immediately before the wing-shaped member 460 is decelerated so that the wing-shaped member 460 Rebound displacement after uniting can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430 continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, and the relative displacement member 442 and the fixed transmission plate 490 of the synchronous operation unit 440 displaced on the downstream side thereof. , the displacement modes of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be different.

In particular, while going downstream along the transmission path of the driving force, the once-changed displacement mode can be changed back to the original state. As a result, a unique displacement mode can be configured in a configuration in which a plurality of members are synchronously displaced.

Although the case of shifting from the retracted state to the extended state has been described as a control mode of the drive motor MT1, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to reverse at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reversely controlled so that the first operation unit 400 undergoes reciprocating displacement (repeated reciprocating displacement) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevator plate 430 starts to descend, the elevator plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state before the feather member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating. The displacement of the first motion unit 400 can be limited to vertical displacement and the rotational displacement can be excluded.

Note that even when the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the stationary transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are relatively displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the lifting plate 430, so the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 40, operation unit 3
00, the game board 13 is removed and placed on the front side.
0 and the upper part of the game board 13 are omitted. 40, a transparent cover member 79 is arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 and formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin.
The outline of 0 is shown in phantom lines, and the structure below it is shown to be visible.

The game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed, and when used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed through the window portion defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). , the upper surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operation unit 700 are arranged so as to be visible. In addition, the light emitted to the front side by the electrical board 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, so that it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60. FIG.

41 is a front perspective view of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 714 arranged side by side in the left and right direction, and illumination light guide members 714 arranged in the left and right directions. A substrate 777 is provided.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be capable of guiding irradiation light emitted from below, and transmits the irradiation light from the upper end. The decorative board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED capable of emitting light to the front side. In this way, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714 and emit light toward the front side through the electrical board 777 .

43 and 44 are exploded front perspective views of the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit 700. FIG. FIG. 43 shows a downward view from above, and FIGS. 44 and 45 show an upward view from below. In addition, in FIG. 45, the projecting pressing portion 724 is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, the second operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 31.
0 (see FIG. 40) base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311, and the base member 70
A cover member 720 is put on from above and fastened and fixed to a base member 701, and it is sandwiched between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 and can be rotationally displaced (rotationally displaceable at a rotation angle of about 6 degrees).
and a hollow member placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) hollow members configured to be at least vertically displaceable. 740, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) variable decoration members 75 placed on the upper surface of the plate-like displacement member 730 on the front side of the hollow member 740 and configured to be at least vertically displaceable.
0 and a pair of plate-shaped displacement members 730 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701, respectively, having a configuration substantially symmetrical with respect to a straight line extending in the vertical direction and capable of applying a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It has a drive unit 760 and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40).

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member shaped to cover the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700. The transparent cover member 790 prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720, It acts to prevent the first operation unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714 even if any component of the operation unit 400 malfunctions.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back side, the light guide member 714
A portion of the light emitted directly upward from the upper end of the can be refracted to the rear side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected in the third symbol display device 81. Optical member 71
4 (including changes in brightness, vibration of light, and displacement of the hollow member 740) can be easily noticed.

43, 44 and 45, illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 that forms the skeleton of the second motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. FIG. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 7
01 is a plate-shaped member 702 formed to have sufficient strength, an electrical decoration substrate 705 that is fastened and fixed facing the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 702, and an electrical decoration substrate 705 that faces the plate upper surface. A partition member 708 arranged and fastened and fixed to the plate-like member 702, a thin film cover member 712 which is a member covering the partition member 708 and is formed of resin in a thin film shape, and the thin film cover member 712. A plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 714 placed in contact with the top of the
14 and a displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the upward movement and horizontal displacement of .

The plate-like member 702 includes an engaging portion 702a formed so as to be able to engage with the hook-like portion 721c of the cover member 720, and a pair of supported portions of the plate-like displacement member 730 formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702. Receiving recess 702b formed so as to be capable of axially supporting 731; Control projection 702c projecting upward from the front side edge and formed so as to be able to control the rotation of plate-shaped displacement member 730; a plurality of fastening portions 703a formed on the upper surface of the fixing portion 703a; and a plurality of columnar protrusions 703b formed in a columnar shape so as to protrude upward beyond the fastening portions 703a so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the tip of the protrusion. , and a plurality of through holes 704 drilled in the vertical direction.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing fastening screws inserted through the electrical board 705. The fastening portions 703a are formed at three locations, ie, the left-right center and the left-right ends.
is provided with a protruding pin for positioning.

By arranging the electrical board 705 so that the projecting pins are inserted into the through holes drilled in the electrical board 705 corresponding to the projecting pins for positioning, the fastening screws can be inserted into the electrical board 705. Since the through-holes drilled for connecting are continuously connected to the fastening portion 703a, the electrical board 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-like member 702 by inserting and screwing fastening screws therethrough.

The columnar projecting portion 703b includes a displacement regulating member 716, a thin film cover member 712, and a partition member 70.
It is a portion into which a fastening screw that is inserted in order of 8 is screwed, and the base end side is formed to be inclined in a trapezoidal shape. This makes it easier to arrange the electrical board 705 at an appropriate position.

The through-hole 704 is sized to allow the passage of a connector (not shown) disposed on the lower surface of the electrical board 705 and electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the electrical board 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the electrical board 705 and does not protrude above the electrical board 705 . This will
The entire top surface of the electrical board 705 can be utilized as an area where the light emitting means 706 such as LEDs can be arranged.

The illumination board 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs, etc., and a base member 701.
In the assembled state (see FIG. 43), it has a columnar projecting portion 703b and an open portion 707 formed so as to leave a slight gap.

A plurality of light emitting means 706 (in this embodiment, 8
) of individual light emitting means 706a and a plurality of overall light emitting means 706b arranged at positions different from the individual light emitting means 706a.

The open portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b.
The projecting end position of 03b is higher than the position where the electrical board 705 is arranged in the assembled state. Therefore, when the electrical board 705 is lowered to the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the open portion 707 advances along the columnar projecting portion 703b.

In the present embodiment, the base end portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a circular shape in top view and a trapezoidal shape in a front view that tapers upward, so that the base end portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is tapered upward. The side surface is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. When the electrical board 705 is displaced downward, if the position is greatly displaced in the front-rear direction from the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, it is moved along the slope of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b. can be used to correct the misalignment of the illumination board 705.
The electrical board 705 can be easily arranged at a desired position.

The partition member 708 is made of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and includes a plurality of light transmitting holes 709 drilled at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a,
a plurality of through holes 710a bored with an inner diameter that allows the tip of the columnar projecting portion 703b to be inserted; a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that fastening screws that are inserted into the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed; A plurality of receiving portions 710 recessed (or bored) so as to receive protruding pins 716b protruding from the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716 at positions shifted in the front-rear direction with respect to the fastening portion 710b.
c.

The light-transmitting hole 709 is formed with an elongated crystal-shaped (substantially elliptical, substantially tortoiseshell-shaped) cross section in the front and rear, and the longitudinal direction thereof faces different directions depending on the position from the left-right center. That is, the more central the transparent holes 709 are, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is (in this embodiment,
coincident), and the longer the direction is, the closer it is to the left and right ends, the more the longitudinal direction is slanted toward the front and toward the center of the left and right.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light-transmitting hole 709 is set in a direction inclined toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left-right end. In this embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (approximately 5 degrees).

The thin-film cover member 712 is a thin-film colorless and transparent resin member with low rigidity, formed so as to swell in the central portion, open on the bottom side, and vertically perforated at the left and right ends of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through-holes 712a, a plurality of middle through-holes 712b drilled vertically inside the outer through-holes 712a in the left-right direction, and vertically displaced from the middle through-holes 712b in the front-rear direction. A plurality of small through holes 712c are provided.

The large through-hole 712a is formed with a diameter longer than the diameter of an annular projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) projecting from the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716 to surround the insertion hole 716a. The protruding portion 716e that protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 protrudes with a protruding length that exceeds the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, so that the edge portion of the large through hole 712a receives a load (fastening force) during assembly. load) can be avoided.

One of the intermediate through holes 712b is provided at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b at the central position on the front side, and the other is provided at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through-hole 712c is displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through-hole 712b arranged at the position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b. The projection pin 716b received in the receiving portion 710c of 708 can be inserted through.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, and the displacement regulating member 7 is mounted thereon.
16 are placed on the bottom of the partition member 716, and the members are fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws in various places.
0c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 can be easily aligned (at the same time) with respect to the partition member 708 before the fastening screws are screwed in, and then the fastening screws are screwed. It is possible to improve the efficiency of input work.

The light guide member 714 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and formed into a bottomed cylinder having a bottom at the top. a main body portion 714a, a protruding edge portion 714b that protrudes leftward, rightward and forward from the lower edge of the main body portion 714a;

Since texturing is formed on the upper outer surface of the main body portion 714a, the single individual light emitting means 7
When the light emitted from 06a travels inside the light guide member 714 and reaches the upper end, the player can visually recognize the light as if it were emitted from a surface instead of a point light emission.

On the other hand, in the body portion 714a, texturing is not formed in portions other than the upper outer surface (intermediate portion, etc.), and a smooth surface is formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular reflection from occurring when the light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body 714a. can be easily directed toward the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a, the energy loss of the light at the intermediate position of the main body portion 714a can be reduced.

The lengthwise direction of the main body portion 714a of each light guide member 714 in top view conforms to the setting of the lengthwise direction of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the longer the light guide member 714 is closer to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side and closer to the center of the left and right direction. Inclining direction.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 is set in a direction inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (approximately 5 degrees).

By configuring in this way, the front side end portion of the light guide member 714 in the top view (
A portion closer to the player as a portion that irradiates the light to the player side can be made to face the player side (front side left and right center) compared to the central position in the longitudinal direction. That is, the light guide member 71
The player can be made to feel as if the lights emitted from 4 toward the player side are concentrated toward the player.

The projecting edge portion 714b is formed with a uniform thickness in the vertical direction and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714. It functions to emit light to the side, the details of which will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is made of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light. a plurality of projecting pins 716b, a plurality of receiving cylinders 716c formed in a cylindrical shape penetrating vertically at positions corresponding to the light guide members 714, and an enlarged inner shape of the lower edge of the receiving cylinders 716c. A plurality of recessed portions 716 d are recessed with steps so as to form a shape capable of receiving the overhanging edge portion 714 b of the light guide member 714 .

The receiving cylindrical portion 716c has an inner shape that is approximately the same as the inner shape of the light transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, the recess depth of the recessed portion 716d is equal to that of the light guide member 7.
14, the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b is equivalent to that of the second operation unit 70.
0 (see FIG. 40), the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 71
6 (lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) and the overhanging edge portion 714b can be stably supported on the surface.

The protruding edge portions 714b are formed to protrude on the left, right, and front side, and the formation on the rear side is omitted. Correspondingly, recessed portions 716d of the displacement restricting member 716 are also recessed on the left, right, and front sides, and recesses on the back side are omitted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled with the front and rear reversed.

That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the front-rear direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b is misaligned. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the protruding edge portion 714b protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. As shown in FIG. The thin film cover member 712 has a gap corresponding to the thickness of the projecting edge 714b.
and the displacement regulating member 716 to make it difficult to fasten and fix, so that the assembling operator (or an automatic assembling machine) notices that the light guide member 714 is upside down. can be done.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 71
2, the projecting edge portion 714b is sandwiched in the vertical direction, thereby stably fixing the position and attitude of the light guide member 714. As shown in FIG.

A procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the electrical board 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b, placed at the fastening position, and fastened and fixed to the plate member 702. As shown in FIG. Next, the illumination board 7
05, the constituent members are arranged in the order of a partition member 708, a thin film cover member 712, a light guide member 714, and a displacement regulating member 716. FIG.

At this time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar projecting portion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712 are positioned.
The displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708 by passing the projecting pin 716b through c. Further, the light guide member 714 is positioned by the displacement restricting member 716 by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c. In this way, since the components are positioned relative to each other before the fastening screws are screwed in, the work of screwing in the fastening screws can be made more efficient.

Finally, the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 716a, and the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projecting portion 703b are connected.
Each structural member can be fastened and fixed by screwing into. According to this embodiment, a plurality of fastening screws can be collectively screwed in after placing the constituent members arranged above the electrical board 705 in appropriate positions, thereby simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the step of screwing in the fastening screw (using an automatic screwdriver).

In this embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be pulled out when the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar projecting portion 703b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, while the light guide member 714 is placed on the thin film cover member 712, it can be regarded as substantially the same as the configuration in which the light guide member 714 is placed on the partition member 708. By supporting the light guide member 714, the support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

In addition, the thin film cover member 712 can be sandwiched between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708, so that the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced. can be planned.

Returning to FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, description will be made. The cover member 720 is a member that is formed of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material, is fastened and fixed to the base member 701 , and is disposed on the peripheral portion of the base member 701 when viewed from the bottom. A plurality of coupling portions 72 used for coupling
1, a plurality of rear through-holes 722 formed in a shape larger than the light-guiding member 714 corresponding to the position of the light-guiding member 714 of the base member 701, and a pair of right and left on the front side of the rear-side through-holes 722. A plurality of front through-holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a set of through-holes, and downward from the left and right outer portions on the back side and the left and right inner portions on the front side of the rear through-holes 722 A plurality of projecting pressing portions 724 are provided.

The coupling portion 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a through which fastening screws can be inserted from above,
A plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws are inserted through the base member 701 from below are screwed, and a plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the left and right outer rear portions and engaged with the base member 701. Prepare.

The rear through-holes 722 are located at four locations near the center and at four locations near the left and right, and the vertical positions of the lower edge portions are different. In this embodiment, the central portion is formed higher. This is the cover member 7
20 is associated with the design of the top shape. That is, in order to give the upper surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect, the portion near the center is curved upward so that it appears to swell. is adjusted.

The projecting holding portion 724 has a projecting length that is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 . In other words, the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 is equally adjusted on the left and right sides by increasing the length of the projecting pressing portion 724 arranged near the center. In addition, both the projecting holding portion 724 on the front side and the projecting holding portion 724 on the back side are
Since the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is disposed at a position overlapping with the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 when viewed in the vertical direction, the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is positioned so that the plate-like displacement member 7 does not move even if the posture of the hollow member 740 collapses.
30 can be prevented from falling off from the small receiving portion 735 .

In this embodiment, the vertical position of the lower end portion of the projecting pressing portion 724 on the rear side is arranged lower than the vertical position of the lower end portion of the projecting pressing portion 724 on the front side. As a result, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the projecting pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be shifted to the backward tilting posture. As a result, the shape and pattern on the front side of the cylindrical main body portion 741 of the hollow member 740 can be easily seen by the player looking down at the hollow member 740 from the front side.

The plate-like displacement member 730 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702 b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720 . A pair of shaft-supporting portions 731 coaxially protruding from both left and right ends with a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 drilled in the vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and a shaft-supporting portion 731. a pair of loaded portions 733 extending in a plate shape toward the front side and receiving a push-up load from below;
A plurality of light guide insertion holes 734 having a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted thereinto are bored in the vertical direction, and a pair of light guide insertion holes 734 are arranged on a diagonal line of the light guide insertion holes 734 and have a ring shape when viewed from above. and a plurality of large receiving portions 736 arranged at the center position of the front through-hole 723 of the cover member 720 in top view and projecting in a ring shape in top view.

47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG. The loaded portion 733 is arranged on the front side of the rotating shaft passing through the center of the supported portion 731, and left and right are respectively associated with separate drive units 760, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is controlled by the difference in the mode of the load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, or whether the load is applied at short time intervals). Depending on whether a load is applied or whether a sustained load is applied, etc.), the rotational displacement about the pivotally supported portion 731 is performed in different manners, the details of which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmitting hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in the front and rear in a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape), and the longitudinal direction thereof faces different directions depending on the position from the left-right center. .

That is, the longer the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side and closer to the center of the left and right. direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set in a direction inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to increase toward the left and right ends.
In this embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (approximately 5 degrees).

The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that supports the hollow member 740 while allowing rattling. The relationship of the insertion hole 734 with respect to the longitudinal direction (the interval between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, the plurality of hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side have a bilaterally symmetrical shape), while the second operation unit 700 is assembled. (see FIG. 40), the posture of the hollow member 740 can be varied.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the more central the hollow member 740 is, the smaller the displacement between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is. direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the hollow member 740 is set in a direction inclined toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left-right ends. In this embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (approximately 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 includes a front small receiving portion 735a which is arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section and a bottom, and a front small receiving portion 735a which is arranged on the rear side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. and a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom.

In this embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the projecting columnar portion 7 of the hollow member 740
43 is designed to have a cross-sectional diameter of 3 mm, and the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is 4.8 mm.
mm], and the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap dimension between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743 in the facing direction is larger than that between the front small receiving portion 735a and the projecting columnar portion 743. Part 7
It becomes smaller than the gap dimension with 43.

As a result, the hollow member 740, which is supported while allowing rattling, can be displaced in an orderly manner. That is, in the present embodiment, rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a can be made easier than rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b.

In other words, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the hollow members 740 in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while allowing the arrangement of the hollow members 740 to easily deviate in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. , the hollow member 7 accompanying the rotational displacement of a plate-like displacement member 730, which will be described later.
The direction of displacement of 40 can be aligned in the direction of expanding left and right outward toward the back side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that supports the variable decorative member 750 while allowing rattling.
Compared to the large bearing portions 736 arranged on the center line CL1, the large bearing portions 736 arranged on both the left and right sides are spaced longer from the rotation axis passing through the center of the supported portion 731, and are positioned vertically. are formed differently, details of which will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, description will be made. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because the four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the left side and the four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the right side are configured in a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 located on the left side will be described in detail, and the description of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left side will be omitted.

48 is a front perspective view of hollow member 740. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged so as to surround the front, rear, left, and right of the light guide member 714, thereby shielding the light leaking from the front, rear, left, and right of the light guide member 714 so that the player does not (difficultly) see the light. and the light guide member 71 that makes it easy to visually recognize the light.
A member configured to attract the player's line of sight at the upper tip of 4, which is a cylinder whose outer frame is designed in a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoiseshell shape) in the front and back and is open up and down. a tubular main body portion 741 formed in a shape, a flat plate extension portion 742 extending in the front, rear, left, and right directions from the lower edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741, and a plate lower surface of the flat plate extension portion 742 and a pair of protruding columnar portions 743 protruding downward from the base.

The outer shape of the cylindrical body portion 741 when viewed from the top is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through-hole 722 of the cover member 720 when viewed from the top, while the outer shape of the flat plate extending portion 742 when viewed from the top is the same as the outer shape of the cover member 720 when viewed from the top. It is formed so as to be larger than the inner shape of the rear side through hole 722 of 720 when viewed from above. That is, the second
In the assembled state of the operation unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is allowed to move up and down while being inserted into the rear through-hole 722, but is restricted from being pulled upward from the cover member 720. .

The upper edge of the tubular main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. As a result, the light reaching the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. on the other hand,
Most of the light directed upward on the back side is blocked by the cylindrical body portion 741 . Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be well delivered to the eyes of the player, and a large amount of light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from being deteriorated by putting it away.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion whose upward displacement is restricted by the projecting pressing portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the projecting pressing portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting columnar portion 743 on the back side, and restricts the upward displacement of the hollow member 740 . In this way, the hollow member 74 is formed by forming the projecting pressing portion 724 and the projecting columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions.
0 changes its posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 does not touch the small receiving portion 7 of the plate-like displacement member 730.
35 can be prevented, so the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The protruding columnar portion 743 has a hemispherical protruding tip, and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (see FIG. 40), it is received in the small receiving portion 735 .

The pair of protruding columnar portions 743 and the cylindrical main body portion 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetrical, so that the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 can be changed when assembled in the reversed front-to-rear direction. , erroneous attachment can be prevented. It should be noted that four hollow members 740 are arranged on each side.
is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740, which is assembled on the left side of the lateral center position, from being assembled on the right side (prevention of erroneous attachment).

Here, while the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis pointing in the horizontal direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 , the projecting columnar portion 743 is mainly displaced vertically by the hollow member 740 . However, since the projecting tip of the projecting columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with little resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49(a), 49(b), and 49(c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, plate-like displacement member 730, and hollow member 740 taken along line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. Figure 49 (
49(b) shows the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and FIG. 49(c) shows the plate-shaped displacement A top end orientation of member 730 is illustrated. Note that the horizontal posture corresponds to a posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated (raising displacement) by about 2.1 degrees around the reference O1 from the lower terminal posture, and the upper terminal posture is
The plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates about 4 degrees around the reference O1 from the horizontal posture (upright displacement).
corresponding to the posture.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal position (lower terminal position (initial position)). ), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In this embodiment, by recessing the rear small receiving portion 735b deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, the support position ( bottom) and the support position of the rear small receiving portion 735b (
(bottom) is suppressed in the vertical direction.

As a result, the hollow member 74 is supported by the plate-like displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture).
It is possible to prevent the posture of 0 from becoming a forward leaning posture. In addition, the surfaces of the support positions (bottom portions) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the hollow member 740 Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, the position of the hollow member 740 is shifted to the front position (initial position) before the drive unit 760 operates. can be stably maintained at

As shown in FIG. 49(b), in the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 in both the front and rear directions. .
Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the vibration mode inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743 . There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to displace chaotically in the front, rear, left, and right directions.

As shown in FIG. 49(c), in the process of displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the front protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 abuts against the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed to the rear side. advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with the upper end posture as a reference (near the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is rotated around the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. is prone to rotational displacement. That is, it is configured to be able to change the displacement mode that is likely to occur in the hollow member 740 in accordance with the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 that serves as a reference for small vibrations.

The light guide member 714 is inserted through the hollow member 740 inside the cylindrical body portion 741 , and the pair of projecting columnar portions 743 are received by the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to be supported. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described first.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 , it is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 . Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced around the reference O1, which is a straight line connecting the supported portions 731 (a straight line facing the left-right direction), the small receiving portion 735 moves in the reference O1 direction (
It does not displace in the horizontal direction), but displaces on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1. Accordingly, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the degree of inclination of the hollow member 740 with respect to the center line CL1 is encouraged to change.

The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is not only displaced on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1 but also displaced in the front-rear and left-right directions (horizontal direction) and Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the change in the degree of inclination is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. 740 can be symmetrically symmetrically displaced or changed in the front-rear and left-right directions (horizontal direction).

Also, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (center side)
A change in the degree of inclination of 35 and a pair of small receiving portions 7 on the far side (outer left and right) from the center line CL1
It is different from the change in the degree of inclination of 35. In this embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of left and right outer small receiving portions 735 having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. is greater than the degree of change in inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the central side (see FIG. 47). As a result, the amount of change in posture of the hollow member 740 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a constant manner is defined by the center line C
It can be changed on the side close to L1 or on the far side.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress resistance when the hollow member 740 is displaced, the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 are separated from each other.
The arrangement of the small receiving portion 735, the shape of the hollow member 740, and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed in such a dimensional relationship that a gap is created between them and the outer surface of the .

Here, the design gap differs between the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 in top view and the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. That is, the gap in the longitudinal direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, the larger the angle of inclination of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the top (the more the light guide member 714 is arranged on the left and right outer side), the more the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 become closer to each other. The gap in the front-rear direction between is narrowed.

Therefore, if the hollow members 740 are displaced in the front-rear direction by the same amount due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides are pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or a large amount of friction. There is a possibility that the load will be applied easily and it will be damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of shielding the light guide member 714 except for the tip portion by the hollow member 740 and focusing the player's line of sight on the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is weakened.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the amount of longitudinal displacement of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the amount of longitudinal displacement of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right central sides. is configured as

That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are arranged on the left and right central sides. The front small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 are arranged so that the distance in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the small receiving portion 735 that is arranged.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward as the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. It can be geometrically defined so that the members disposed on the left and right outer sides are slightly smaller than the members on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gaps between the small receiving portions 735 and the protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are substantially uniform in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel to the horizontal direction. It is provided to such an extent that it does not fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 even when moved.

Therefore, in the state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced when the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are displaced, the displacement is suppressed to be less than the dimension of the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 . Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

As the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates, the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes when viewed from above. It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while the center of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the member 740 remains aligned.

At least, in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743, the small receiving portion 735
Since the arrangement of the protruding columnar portion 743 with respect to the vertical direction changes, the hollow member 740 can be displaced in the left-right direction and its posture can be changed along with this change.

A mode of pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side with the larger longitudinal displacement)
) starts contacting the front side surface of the protruding columnar portion 743, and is pushed toward the rear side.

At this time, due to the above-described dimensional relationship, the inner surface front portion of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743
A gap is maintained between the front part of the Therefore, rattling in the direction of rotation about the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. It is configured to be able to cope with a change in the interval between the small receiving portions 735 when viewed from above due to the displacement using this backlash.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the back side, and the rear small receiving portion 735 is configured to allow a rotational displacement about the projecting columnar portion 743 on the front side. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735 b and the protruding columnar portion 743 . Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 collides with the light guide member 714 during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714, the load generated between them can be kept small, so cracking or chipping of the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 can be prevented.

Returning to FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, description will be made. The variable decorative member 750 is the cover member 72
0 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the two-forked support member 751
51 and a decorative member 756 disposed on the upper side of the cover member 720 .

The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting downward from the lower surface of the central portion of a plate-like main body formed in a left-right long plate shape, and left and right end portions of the plate-like main body. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 753 (different lengths) projected upward from the plate-like projecting portion 753, and a plate-like extending portion extending from the center of the plate-like main body to the back side in a plate-like shape 754.

The projecting tip of the columnar projecting part 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape and is received in the large receiving part 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730 . The cylindrical protruding portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 extends through the front through hole 723 .
The front through-hole 723 allows the bifurcated support member 751 to be vertically displaced, while the large receiving portion 736 is rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of the supported portion 731 .
Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, since the protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced. can.

The plate-like extending portion 754 acts to position the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the rear side of the center of the column-like projecting portion 752 . In other words, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stabilized by its own weight can be set to the backward leaning posture. As a result, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 assumes the initial posture, the contact position between the column-shaped projecting portion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be moved toward the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 can be increased near the start of the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 .

The decorative member 756 includes a pair of protruding leg portions 75 protruding downward corresponding to the cylindrical protruding portion 753 .
7, and a female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg portion 757 . The protruding leg portion 757 is inserted inside the cylindrical protruding portion 753 .

The plate-like body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the cylindrical projecting portion 753 . By inserting a fastening screw through the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757, the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 75 are connected to each other.
7 are fastened and fixed.

An assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is attached to the cover member 720 . That is, the cylindrical projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through-hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted through the cylindrical projecting portion 753 to form the projecting portion. A fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg portion 757 .

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are put on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. FIG. Note that the cover member 72
0 to the base member 701, the hook-shaped portion 721c is engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back side of the plate-shaped member 702, and the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 721a from above. 720 and the base member 701 are fastened and fixed, and then the fastening portion 721 is turned upside down.
A fastening screw is screwed into b.

As a result, a plurality of members are arranged in a non-fixed manner between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and the fastening screws are screwed into a plurality of locations from the bottom surface. can be prevented from falling out from between the base member 701 and the cover member 720 .

Finally, the drive unit 760 is arranged below the base member 701, and a fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix. In the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the traveling direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310 . It is considered difficult to pull out the fastening screw in the housed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently removed from the rear case 310 when the front side of the operation unit 300 is illegally opened.

In addition, a fastening portion 766 to which a fastening screw inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 is fastened and fixed is formed on the rear side of the driving unit 760 . Therefore, when the second operation unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screw is inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operation unit 700 . Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened in stages, it is possible to make the operator aware of the lack of the drive unit 760 . As a result, forgetting to assemble the drive unit 760 can be suppressed.

50 is an exploded front perspective view of drive unit 760. FIG. FIG. 50 illustrates the drive unit 760 arranged on the right side in front view. Although the drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, the components are bilaterally symmetrical.
Description of the left drive unit 760 is omitted.

The drive unit 760 includes a load member 7 configured to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 .
61, a cylindrical shaft portion 762 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) that rotatably supports the base end of the load member 761, and the shaft portion 762 is fixed to the entire body. , an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 disposed inside the support case 763, and a front lid member 770 disposed on the front side of the support case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763. and an electrical board 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770
and

The load member 761 is made of a resin material, has a base end portion 761a formed with a through hole through which the shaft rod portion 762 is inserted, and extends outward from the base end portion 761a. A rod-shaped extension portion 761b that is bent into a V shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c that is formed in a rod shape that bends upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b toward the front side, and a rod-shaped extension portion 761b. Setting portion 761b
A projecting portion 761d projecting along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from the extending tip of the extending portion 761b, and a circular arc centering on the axial rod portion 762 at the boundary between the projecting portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. A facing curved portion 761e that is formed in a shape and arranged to face the curved projecting portion 774 of the front lid member 770
and

A metal plate member MB2 made of metal (magnetic material) is arranged on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.
In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b by engagement with the elastic claws, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the forward and backward sliding of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the bar-shaped extension portion 761b. (only the rear side is sufficiently open). When the metal plate member MB2 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. This restricts the slide, and at this position, the metal plate member MB2
The elastic claws are released from being pushed down by (raised to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claws are engaged so as to restrict the retraction of the metal plate member MB2 to the rear side.

Note that the method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the bar-shaped extension portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the bar-shaped extension portion 761b,
It may be bound with a binding band, or may be pasted with an adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 includes a projecting frame portion 771 projecting toward the front side in the shape of a frame, and a plurality of projecting portions projecting toward the front side in the form of small diameter cylinders inside the projecting frame portion 771 . A cylindrical part 772, a wiring through recess 773 recessed so that an electrical wiring connected to the electrical board 777 or a connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring can be passed at the lower edge, and from the back surface of the board. Shaft portion 76
2, and a curved projecting portion 774 projecting in the shape of a curved plate along an arc shape centered on .

The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to face the periphery of the electrical board 777, and is a portion that prevents a load from being applied to the electrical board 777 from the vertical and horizontal directions.

The protruding cylindrical portion 772 has a gourd-shaped seat when viewed from the front and a small-diameter insertion portion which further protrudes from the seat. By assembling, the back surface of the electrical board 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the electrical board 777 can be stabilized. A female threaded portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided along with the insertion portion of the seat portion, and the electrical board 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by fastening screws that are screwed into the female threaded portion.

The electric decoration board 777 includes light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs or the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation, and a plurality of through holes 77 drilled in the electric decoration board 777 for assembly.
9.

The through-holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (two locations in this embodiment) as a pair of circular through-holes corresponding to the insertion portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 772 and the female screw portion.

In this embodiment, the electrical board 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 . Namely
This corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 and the electrical board 777, which are arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, are configured like a single rigid body. Therefore, electromagnetic solenoid SOL2
Vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can easily vibrate the electrical board 777, and the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be configured to vibrate the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778. .

In this embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is provided between the load member 761 that is displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. As shown in FIG. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved projecting portion 774, excessive transmission of vibration can be prevented.

Note that the width dimension of the curved projecting portion 774 can be set arbitrarily. Therefore, the light emitting means 77
The setting of the width dimension of the curved protruding portion 774 can be changed depending on whether it is desired to vibrate the optical axis of the light emitted from 8 or to maintain it without vibrating. In the former case, the width dimension should be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension should be lengthened.

The support case 763 includes a lower regulation portion 764 arranged below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and an upper regulation portion 765 arranged on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
and a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw that is inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 310 is screwed.

The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) pushes the metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and displaced upward.

That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the raised position where the metal plate member MB2 is raised by the electromagnetic force and the lowered position where the electromagnetic force disappears and the metal plate member MB2 is lowered by its own weight. , and a plate-like displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives the load from the load member 761.
It is displaced in the direction of rotation about 31 . The rotational displacement will be described below with reference to FIG.

51(a) and 51(b) are front views of the drive unit 760. FIG. In addition, Fig. 51
In (a) and FIG. 51(b), the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 77
7 is omitted, and the outline of the curved protruding portion 774 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

Further, in FIG. 51(a), no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 7
51(b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted to the load member 76 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
1 is shown in the raised position.

As shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), the load member 761 abuts against the lower restricting portion 764 at the lowered position and is restricted from downward displacement, and contacts the upper restricting portion 765 at the raised position. Upward displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulating portion 764 and the upper regulating portion 765 are arranged with the axial rod portion 762 as a reference (
The distance from the axial rod portion 762) is different, and the effect produced thereby will be described.

First, the load applied to the lower regulating portion 764 via the load member 761 is mainly the load member 7
Since the load is caused by the weight of the load member 61, the load member 761 can be stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. FIG. For this reason, the lower restricting portion 764 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761 .

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight bar shape, the center of gravity is positioned substantially at the center of the member.
1, since the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend bifurcated from the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, the center of gravity is closer to the extension tip side than the substantially central position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. will be placed in

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower restricting portion 764 is arranged on the extension distal end side of the substantially central position of the bar-shaped extension portion 761b as a position corresponding to the center of gravity of the load member 761. .

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The advantages associated with location are small. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by arranging the upper regulation portion 765 to face the rotating tip of the load member 761 .

That is, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted via the load member 761 is greater at a position farther from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper restricting portion 765 can be reduced.

In this way, it is desirable that the load is transmitted to the upper regulating member 765 at the rotating distal end portion of the load member 761. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d extends further from the extending distal end portion of the bar-shaped extending portion 761b. Extending to the outer diameter side of a circle centered on the axial rod portion 762, the projecting portion 761d
is configured to abut on the upper regulating member 765 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the load from being transmitted at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and to stably transmit the load at the rotating tip side.

In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured not to push the load member 761, but to pull it up by the attraction force. That is, the load member 761 is pulled up by the magnetic force generated in the iron core disposed in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 attracting the metal plate member MB2.

According to this configuration, even if the load member 761 is displaced by the load applied to the load member 761, the load member 761 is overloaded (locally Since an excessive load) is unlikely to occur, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the structure of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. As a result, even if the load member 761 is configured to receive a varying load as in the present embodiment, the service life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), the load member 761 is in surface contact with the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 (at the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state (at the elevated position) that the load member 761 receives the attraction force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. contact at a plurality of points on a plane), while a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the body portion (the portion containing the coil) of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The upper restricting portion 765 and the protruding portion 761d are configured to contact each other on a plane parallel to .

This prevents the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, thereby avoiding overloading the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The lower edge portion and the lower surface (abutting surface) of the upper restricting portion 765 can be dispersedly received. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load.

At the lifted position of the load member 761, a gap is provided not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. The load from the load member 761 is transferred to the upper regulation portion 7
It may be configured so that it is received only by 65 . In this case, the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be interrupted, so that the electromagnetic solenoid SO
The durability of L2 can be improved.

In this case, the load tends to concentrate on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, so the overhanging portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken).
Even in such a case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to contact the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, concentration of the load on one point can be avoided. can.

Furthermore, in this case, if the projecting portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 contacts the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether the projecting portion 761d is damaged (broken).

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) continues to be generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the load member 761 bounces back after colliding with the upper restricting portion 765 . Therefore, considering only the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765, the upper regulation portion 765
can be designed (the straight line passing through the center of the axial rod portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 76
5 can be designed to have a small angle with a straight line along the width direction).

On the other hand, the straight line along the width direction of the lower restricting portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower restricting portion 764 and passing through the center of the axial rod portion 762 . Compared to the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line, the directions in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed (force resolution). As a result, rebounding of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower restricting portion 764 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the width dimension (the width along the radial direction) of the lower restricting portion 764 is formed to be long, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the load. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulation portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the load member 761 is displaced in both the vertical direction, the load transmitted to the lower regulating portion 764 and the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is reduced.
can be suppressed.

In addition, the material of the upper regulation part 765 and the lower regulation part 764 is not limited at all.
For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resins, polyurethanes and epoxy resins may be used, and rubber materials may be used. Also, the upper regulation portion 765
and the lower restricting portion 764 may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

For example, when the upper restricting portion 765 is provided with the function of suppressing the positional displacement in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 may receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the raised position, As the material of the upper restricting portion 765, a material or structure having excellent frictional resistance as well as damping properties may be adopted.

In this case, the load applied to the load member 761 from the plate-like displacement member 730 causes the load member 7
61 can be easily prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction), particularly only in a state where the projecting portion 761d and the upper restricting portion 765 are in contact with each other.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposing curved portion 761e displaces the rear side of the curved projecting portion 774. As shown in FIG. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 are arc-shaped with the axial rod portion 762 as the center, the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side, and the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposing bending portion 76
Since 1e and curved protruding portion 774 only slide along the direction of rotation, resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposing curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above it. In this embodiment, the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c is arranged in this secured space.

The vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c extends upward from the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the curved opposing curved portion 761e, it extends straight when viewed from the front. That is, load member 761
is arranged in the elevated position, the rod-like member extends vertically in a front view.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from laterally bending and deforming due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the distal end of the load member 761 is slightly displaced laterally and displaced upward as in the present embodiment. Even with this configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stably pushed up. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the manner of support will be described later.

The vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is formed in a rod shape that extends straight in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. It is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left position of the rod portion 762).

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 on the lower side than the vicinity of the axial rod portion 762 can be moved toward the back side, and the area for arranging the members arranged on the front side can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the electrical decoration board 777 can be shifted to the back side, by separating the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the electrical decoration board 777, the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 flows downward. The light seen through the members 91 and 92 can be easily seen as light with a spread. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to see by surface emission in which light reaches in a circular shape centering on the optical axis and shines in a planar shape, instead of point emission that is visually recognized as large as the outer shape of the LED.

Furthermore, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed back and forth by the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, local overload is not caused when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if it occurs, the load can be relieved by bending deformation of the load member 761 . Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by varying the easiness of bending of the load member 761 in the front, rear, left, and right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761 . It is possible to achieve the effect of being able to

When the load member 761 is located at the raised position, an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761. It is supported stably by

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the base end portion 761a to the projecting portion 761d are still stably supported. The range in which bending occurs can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

As a result, the load member 761 is entirely displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 , and contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770 can be avoided. In other words, if the load member 761 rubs against another member, the member may be damaged,
It is possible to prevent an extra drive force for driving the load member 761 from being required.

<Action of Second Operation Unit 700>
An operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700,
Since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs according to the driving mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right sides, the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 are displaced accordingly. are also configured differently. In the following, first, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described, and then the displacement modes of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be described.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. FIG. In Figure 52,
A state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are placed in the lowered position is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the member 761 is displaced upward from the lowered position to the raised position is illustrated, and FIG. 54 illustrates a state in which the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both arranged in the raised position.

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state (non-excited state) in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 . In this state, the load receiving portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the plate-shaped displacement member 730
is a lower end posture (initial posture) maintained by contact with the base member 701 .

The state shown in FIG. 53 is the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (
(see FIG. 50) in which current is controlled to flow (one-side excitation state).
In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pushed up by the load member 761 on the right side, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and assumes a halfway posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal position in the halfway position.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon concentrates on the load member 761 on the right side. In this embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in the shape of a thin rod and bent in the front-rear direction so as to be easily bent in the lateral direction (the front-rear direction). It is formed with strength (rigidity) to the extent that it can be flexed and deformed by the weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it rides.

In this embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is applied in a direction including a longitudinal component at the contact position with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily flexurally deformed, and the load can be relieved by this flexural deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which the load member 761 is flexurally deformed.

It should be noted that the plate-shaped displacement member 7 in the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG.
The difference in posture in the rising direction of 30 can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761 . That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, it is possible to design different postures of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG. Note that the left and right load members 761 may be designed to have the same elastic modulus, or may be designed to have different elastic moduli.

Further, in this embodiment, since the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are bilaterally symmetrical, the state shown in FIG. ), and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on the right side is not energized, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 remains the same as shown in FIG.
It becomes equivalent to the posture shown in 3. Therefore, hereinafter, the state shown in FIG. 53 will be referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is bilaterally symmetrical will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760 . Therefore, the load of its own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced by half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the fact that the left load member 761 is arranged in the raised position as compared with the state shown in FIG. The difference is that the degree of flexure of 761 is about half.

55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 along line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of second operation unit 700 along line LVb-LVb in FIG. be.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are energized, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-like displacement member 730 is divided into two. The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state in which the bending deformation of 761 is small (a state in which the bending deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(a), when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is energized, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied to the load member 761 on one side. concentrate on This load increases the bending deformation that occurs in the load member 761, so even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same, the rising displacement amount of the plate-like displacement member 730 is suppressed by the bending deformation.

In this embodiment, the plate-like displacement member 730 is configured to rotate about the reference O1. A state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the restricting protrusion 702c (initial posture, FIG. 5
5( a ) shown by imaginary lines), the contact surface (lower surface) of the load receiving portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
Abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state in which the normal line extending from the rear surface direction extends downward.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-like displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the load-bearing portion 733 is generated along the direction in which the vertical rod-like extension portion 761c extends, the bending deformation of the load member 761 is suppressed to a small level. . Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is mainly used for raising the plate-like displacement member 730 .

On the other hand, in the halfway posture (see FIG. 55(a)), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the load receiving portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is below the reference O1 in the front direction. abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 while extending downward.

That is, in the vicinity of the halfway posture (see FIG. 55(a)) where the amount of flexural deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the The load applied by the y has a frontal component and a downward component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction that inclines upward toward the front, the load having the front component and the downward component acts as a load that flexurally deforms the load member 761 . do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the upward displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the bending deformation of the load member 761 (the driving force used for the bending deformation of the load member 761). gradually increase)
.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the easiness of bending deformation of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes. That is, the posture (lower terminal posture (initial posture)) at which the load member 761 starts to apply the load to the load receiving portion 733
), a rear load is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is less likely to be flexurally deformed. , forward load).

As a result, even when the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761, and the force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (in particular, the shape of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c) and the load Depending on the design of the portion 733, it is possible to adjust the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to flex (posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of flexural deformation.
The behavior of the second operating unit 700 when driving the driving unit 760 can be designed differently.

In this embodiment, the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c is shaped to extend upward while projecting toward the front side, so that the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c can be flexurally deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c is flexurally deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture, the load of its own weight transmitted via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761 .

In this manner, the use of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761, thereby reducing the load. Even if the member 761 undergoes excessive displacement or insufficient displacement, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
Variations that occur in the 0 posture can be reduced.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761 directly affect the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are not precisely designed. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage of the member and in the assembling stage, so the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 is flexurally deformed, even if there is some difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761, it is designed to be offset by the flexural deformation of the load member 761. By doing so, the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stabilized. Therefore, the precision required in the manufacturing and assembly stages for stabilizing the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be kept low, so the manufacturing cost can be kept low.

This applies not only to the load member 761 alone, but also to the combined displacement of the left and right load members 761 . That is, when the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are configured to have a symmetrical shape as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load members 761 and the upper end portions of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 Even if there is some difference in height, the difference can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761 .

As a result, regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state, the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized halfway.

Further, the load applied to the load member 761 through the load receiving portion 733 causes the load member 761 to
can be limited to the front side. This direction
b coincides with the direction of positional deviation in the front-rear direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extension 761c.
As a result, the load that causes bending deformation of the load member 761 can be directed away from the rod-like extension portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the flexural deformation of the load member 761, and the rod-shaped extended portion 761b is affected by the load applied from the loaded portion 733. can be made smaller. In other words, load member 761
can be suppressed in the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

That is, the friction and deformation occurring at other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved projecting portion 774 and the opposing curved portion 761e, etc.) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the mode of bending deformation of the load member 761. Therefore, it is possible to design the structure of the load member 761 and the mode of displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the premise that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. can be made easier.

In addition, the direction in which the load member 761 is flexed can be limited to the front side (the same location can be prevented from flexing to the front side or flexing to the back side depending on the situation). ), the position of the load receiving portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761 can be associated one-to-one.
durability can be improved.

55(a) and 55(b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c, and the load members 761 are both raised. (See FIG. 51(b)).

Therefore, as described above, the load member 761 may
Friction generated between the projecting portion 761d and the upper restricting portion 765 can suppress the longitudinal displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the .

Therefore, even when the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is controlled to repeatedly bend and release (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in an excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in an excited state). The control mode of repeatedly switching between the non-excited state and the non-excited state) can suppress the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole.

This is because the load member 761 is not only the shaft rod portion 762 as in the present embodiment, but the shaft rod portion 7
62 and the upper restricting portion 765, it is possible to satisfactorily realize this. More specifically, instead of receiving the load from the plate-like displacement member 730 while the load member 761 is arranged between the lowered position and the raised position, the plate-like displacement is performed while the load member 761 is fixed at the raised position. It is precisely because the load is received from the member 730 that it can be realized satisfactorily.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the axial rod portion 762, the axial rod portion 762 consisting of the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is opposed to the longitudinal component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
However, if the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 twists the rod-shaped extension 761b or shifts its position in the front-rear direction, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 will be in contact with each other. gaps may occur.

When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance at which the electromagnetic force is effectively generated, the electromagnetic force rapidly weakens, making it difficult to maintain the load member 761 at the raised position. As a countermeasure, the rigidity of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is increased, or the axial rod portion 762 and the load member 7
However, in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavy and causes an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
Since an excessively large driving force is required to rotate the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably attached not only to the shaft rod portion 762 but also to the left and right end positions of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 765. Support. This makes it possible to suppress the torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b compared to the case where it is supported on one of the left and right sides. can be suppressed.

Therefore, when performing control so that bending and releasing of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c occur repeatedly, the entire load member 761 is suppressed from being displaced in the front-rear direction without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the bar-shaped extended portion 761b because of the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent torsional deformation of the bar-shaped extension portion 761b.

Returning to FIG. 54, description will be made. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to the state (excited state) in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 is energized. In this state, the loaded portions 73 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are attached to the load members 761 on the left and right sides.
3 is pushed up, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction, and assumes the upper end posture. In addition, in the present embodiment, the plate-like displacement member 730
is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the middle posture (about 6.1 degrees from the bottom end posture, and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is divided between the left and right load members 761. As a result, the bending of the load member 761 is alleviated.

In FIG. 54, for the sake of convenience, the bending of the left and right load members 761 is illustrated as being so small that it cannot be determined. That is, it is illustrated in the same shape as the load member 761 illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, by switching the state of conduction to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be set in a plurality of (at least three) orientations. can be switched with

53 to 54, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is kept energized, and the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is turned on. Since it suffices to excite SOL2, the posture can be easily switched smoothly.

FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of changes over time in conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and changes in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b), the upper timing chart shows the conductive state of the left electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the middle timing chart shows the right electromagnetic solenoid. The lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG.

Due to the configuration, the plate-like displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is energized (there is a slight time difference). For the sake of convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated as being displaced simultaneously with the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The state of conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(a) is the state shown in FIG.
is the same as the mode in which the states shown in 1 and 2 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(b) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG.
2 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(b) is the state shown in FIG.
52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are repeated alternately.

In this way, the pattern of switching the states described above with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 is not just one, but is generated in a plurality of ways by different combinations of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since there are a plurality of patterns for switching the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730, the hollow member 740 on top of the plate-like displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (see FIG. 43)
) can be configured in a plurality of patterns, the details of which will be described later.

56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b), for the sake of convenience,
Although the short-time conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown as constant, this is merely an example. For example, short-time conduction intervals may be set randomly, or may be configured to gradually lengthen or gradually shorten, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, by shortening the short-time conductive length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
While 30 attitude changes can be instantaneously (pulsedly) generated, the attitude change can be maintained for a sufficient length by increasing the conduction length. Furthermore, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
By shortening the conduction interval of L2, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed in posture as if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 were vibrating.

58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the second motion unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape when viewed from above. In the following, the portion on the right side of the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the portion on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 59, 60, 61 and 62 show the displacement of the second motion unit 700 in chronological order. In FIG. 59, the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). 60 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture, FIG. 61 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and FIG. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is illustrated.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of a pair of supported portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is illustrated as a reference O1 as a rotation axis for rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG. The reference O1 is illustrated with the same meaning in subsequent drawings. FIGS. 59 to 62 show cross sections at the center in the left-right direction of the center variable decorative member 750 in the left-right direction.

The variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left-right direction is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through-hole 723 (see FIG. 43). It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

In the following, the displacement of the variable decoration member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the gravitational direction is omitted from the illustration.

59, 60 and 61, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retracted) to the position where it contacts the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

61 and 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
0 is displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts against the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752, and load transmission in the front-rear direction occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
is mainly caused in the vertical direction (the stage where the change in posture from the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is small, see FIGS. 59, 60, and 61), and the combination of the vertical direction and the front-back direction. 61 and 62), which occurs in the direction of . As a result, it is possible to increase variations in the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction).

Here, the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state. can be switched in a plurality of variations.

As shown in FIG. 62 , a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion forming the front through-hole 723 . Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 do not sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of load is suppressed, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. can be done.

63, 64, 65 and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 63, 64, 65 and 66 show the displacement of the second operation unit 700 in chronological order, and in FIG.
0 is the lower terminal posture (initial posture), and in FIG.
is in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position, and FIG. be done. 63 to 66 show cross sections of the right variable decorative member 750 at the center in the horizontal direction.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43). It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both left and right sides are arranged at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and farther from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction than the large receiving portion 736a in the center of the left and right.

In the following, the variable decorative members 75 (on both the left and right sides) accompanying the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
A displacement of 0 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted from illustration.

63, 64, and 65, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retracted) to the position where it contacts the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

65 and 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
0 is displaced to the extent that it abuts on the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 (although it is retreating),
There is no relationship that pushes forward any further, and load transmission in the front-rear direction is suppressed.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed only of the load in the vertical direction. The amount of displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is larger than the amount of displacement of .

In this way, the variable decorative member 7 (at the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
50 is configured to be displaced in different directions in each step, while the displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction mainly occurs in the up-down direction. As a result, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
Depending on the degree of change in posture of 30, the displacement mode of the central variable decorative member 750 in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be made different.

As described above, a large vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the horizontal direction is ensured, so that, as shown in FIG. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion forming the front through-hole 723 disappears, and the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through-hole 723 in the front-rear position. It has a dimensional relationship that it bites into the cylindrical portion that

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 abuts against the lower end of the cylindrical portion forming the front through-hole 723 and moves parallel to the back side is shown. Illustrated.

Accordingly, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the variable decoration member 750 is subjected to a load in the vertical compression direction from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Given. As a result, the posture holding force of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, in the state where the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are energized and the plate-like displacement member 730 assumes the upper end position, the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). , the left and right variable decorative members 750 are stably supported. for that reason,
After the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture, the plurality of variable decoration members 750 can be made different.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is configured (loosely supported) to allow slight displacement as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides , the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decoration member 750 in the center of the left and right by being configured (hardly supported) to suppress displacement.

As described above, the displacement in the vertical direction due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is greater for the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides than for the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right. While the player's attention is likely to be focused on the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides,
When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper end position, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right.

Therefore, when the driving state of the drive unit 760 is set such that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper terminal posture or the posture is repeatedly changed so as not to be held (stopped) in the upper terminal posture. The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides can easily attract the player's line of sight, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set in a mode in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is slightly held in the upper end posture, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right can be used by the player. It is possible to make it easier to collect the line of sight of

As a result, among the plurality of light guide members 714, a specific light guide member 7 that is particularly desired to attract the player's attention is displayed.
14, by controlling the drive unit 760 to drive in a manner that facilitates the player's line of sight to the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 (the light emission mode of the light guide member 714 and the drive unit 760 ), the player's line of sight can be focused on a specific light guide member 714 .

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. As shown in FIG. FIG. 67 shows a direction view of the reference O1, and shows the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper end posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is arranged above the reference O1 on the front side, at a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees) at which the plate-like displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, the longitudinal displacement is greater than the vertical displacement. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged directly in front of the reference O1 (because they are arranged on a horizontal line), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees).
, the vertical displacement is greater than the longitudinal displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the plate-like displacement member 730 about the reference O1, the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b can be made different. can be done. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be made different between the member arranged in the left-right center and the member arranged on the left-right outer side.

68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 68, 69, 70 and 71 show the displacement of the second motion unit 700 in chronological order. In FIG. 68, the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). is illustrated, and in FIG. 69, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
30 is shown in a horizontal posture, FIG. 70 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position, and FIG. 71 shows a state in which the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture illustrated.

68 to 71 show cross sections at the center of the light guide member 714 in the left-right direction. As described above, the front small receiving portion 735a is maintained until the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the halfway position (see FIG. 70).
and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 do not come into contact with each other, and the displacement of the hollow member 740 is mainly vertical displacement.

On the other hand, a front small receiving portion 735a is formed between the halfway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the upper end posture.
and the front side portion of the protruding columnar portion 743 are in contact with each other, and after the abutment, the hollow member 740
is pushed to the rear side as the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced. In this way, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
A time difference can be provided between the start timing of the vertical displacement and the horizontal displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the zero displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the effect of changing the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture), the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player side is LH1a, whereas the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper position. The width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side in the terminal position is the width LH.
1b (LH1a>LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the third pattern display device 81 side (back side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, it is possible to change the balance between the amount of light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player side and the amount of light emitted toward the back side as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is directed toward the player compared to the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). Since the light becomes weaker, the light guide member 714 can be seen directly (easier to see).
It is possible to make it easier for the light emitted from 14 to move into the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, when the player pays attention to the third pattern display device 81, the line of sight is directed to the light guide member 714.
can be drawn to

72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58. FIG. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the electrical board 705 as described above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is configured to suppress

That is, in the present embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the electrical board 705, and the dimension of the gap is the size of the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the electrical board 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed toward the light guide member 714 without any leakage (see enlarged view in FIG. 72).

In addition, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but when focusing on another light guide member 714 (one individual light emitting means 706a) It is configured to prevent it from going toward the light guide members 714 other than the light guide members 714 arranged above. That is, since the base ends of the light guide members 714 are separated from each other by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and going to another light guide member 714 (FIG. 72). (See enlarged view).

The light guide members 714 are indirectly connected to each other through the thin film cover member 712, but the thin film cover member 712 is thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706 a from reaching the other light guide member 714 .

Therefore, when an effect is performed in which the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are made different, the light reaches the other light guide member 714, and the appearance of the other light guide member 714 changes. influence can be avoided. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from unintentionally emitting light, and the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a to be mixed and viewed through the light guide member 714. .

In addition, when the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks out from the gap between the decorative board 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the overall light emitting means 706b to be visually recognized by the player. can be done.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced in different manners by varying the driving manners (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the drive units 760 arranged below the plate-like displacement member 730, respectively. do.

For example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as a first displacement mode, by repeatedly operating one drive unit 760, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reciprocally displaced between the lower end posture and the middle posture. can be made Further, as a second displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to move the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the middle position and the upper end position. can be reciprocated by

Further, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as a first stop mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, thereby causing the plate-shaped displacement. The member 730 can be stopped halfway. As a second stop mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is
is maintained in an excited state, the plate-like displacement member 730 can be stopped in the upper end posture.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the load applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when only one of the drive units 760 is in an excited state is applied without providing a structural difference between the left and right drive units 760 . The posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the deflection of the load member 761 caused by the above (see FIG. 55(a)).

Therefore, one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 in the first displacement mode (stop mode) or the second displacement mode (stop mode) are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. No, it can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 7 on the side that is maintained in the excited state
60 and the drive unit 760 on the side of repeated operation are alternately switched according to the number of times of operation, or switched for each period, to match (adjust) the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760. be able to. As a result, the left and right drive units 760
As a result, the service life of the second operation unit 700 can be maintained for a long time.

It should be noted that the degree of bending of the load member 761 is merely an example, and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, it is sufficient to have a configuration that can make even a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the driving units 760 and driving and controlling both of them.

The second operation unit 700 is arranged so as to be visually recognizable between the third symbol display device 81 and the first prize winning opening 64 from the player's line of sight through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). Although the control mode of the second operation unit 700 is set arbitrarily, for example, the entry of game balls into the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140 and the specific winning port 65a, and the driving unit 760 The control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the electrical decoration board 705 may be controlled so as to correspond to each other.

For example, as a correspondence with the control mode of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning hole 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is lit according to the number of pending changes. A plurality of game balls enter the second winning hole 140, and control may be performed to light the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side according to the number of reserved balls that are reserved for variation. .

In this case, by confirming the light emission mode of the light guide member 714, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of reserved balls. In addition, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the player's line of sight can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700. FIG.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-described first displacement mode, and is more advantageous to the player than entering the first winning hole 64. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 140, which is often the case, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-described second displacement mode. The player can easily grasp whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

As another example of associating the game ball entry with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be driven and controlled in relation to the upper limit value of the number of held balls. That is, for example, when game balls enter the first winning port 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning port 64 is the upper limit value, the player can obtain prize balls, but cannot obtain the opportunity for variation. Therefore, when the number of balls held in the first winning hole 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to inform the player of it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second motion unit 700 can be displaced, and the appearance of the second motion unit 700 can be changed. can attract the player's attention. Therefore, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning hole 64 is close to the upper limit (or is the upper limit), the player can tell that the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or is the upper limit). ) can be easily noticed.

In addition, the entry of the game ball, the control mode of the drive unit 760, and the light emitting means 70 of the illumination board 705
6 may be associated with the entry of a game ball into the specific winning hole 65a.

In this case, for example, it may be associated with the entry of game balls into the specific winning opening 65a, or the number of balls expected to enter when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round). It may be associated with the fact that game balls exceeding the number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over winning).

As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a or that an unexpected number of game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Players can be made to understand.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the attraction force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described, but the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the attraction force acts in the horizontal direction. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

73(a) and 73(b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73(b) shows a state in which the energization is canceled and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 includes a contact member 2190 supported coaxially with the auxiliary device 160 and disposed so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and a biasing spring SP21 that biases the contact member 2190. and

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163 so that the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in a non-excited state. (See FIG. 73(b)).

The abutting member 2190 is a cushion portion 175a arranged so as to be able to abut against the driven member 163.
and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the biasing spring SP21, and the biasing force of the biasing spring SP21 is generated in the direction of pushing back the rotating member 2191 toward the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

A displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted by the electromagnetic force to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in the non-excited state, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, passes through the state shown in FIG. is rotationally displaced. That is, until the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 is displaced alone, and from the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are displaced together. That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state of FIG. 73(b) as a boundary.

Further, in this embodiment, after the state of FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 can be vibrated and displaced by the varying biasing force. As a result, variations in the displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the lift plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described. A transmission means 3410 (for example, a rack-and-pinion transmission mechanism (not shown)) for transmitting driving force is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 in the third embodiment. 74 to 77 show how the lift plate 430 is displaced downward in chronological order.

FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first motion unit 3400. FIG. 78(a) to 78(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. b
), the rotation amount (angular change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and the displacement amount of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 78(c).

In the first operation unit 3400 , an L-shaped (a shape obtained by integrating a rectangle whose long sides are perpendicular to each other) elongated hole 3406 is formed through the main body plate 401 . The long hole portion 3406 is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the cylindrical portion 444d is arranged at the upper end position of the vertically elongated opening of the long hole portion 3406, and the vertically elongated opening is displaced downward by the displacement up to FIG. do. 74 to 75, the lateral position of the cylindrical portion 444d does not change, so the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the lift plate 430 . That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced as the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction. and can be configured.

By forming a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the lift plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the driving force transmission is cut off with the auxiliary arm member 444 as a reference. This role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to this embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (improving the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490). be able to).

Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved while maintaining the effect of being able to shift the operation start timings of the lift plate 430 and the vane-shaped member 460 .

In this embodiment, the transmission means 3410 makes it easy to vertically displace the lifting plate 430 by uniform linear motion (see FIG. 78(a)). If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is used as it is, the rotational displacement speed of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes greatly during the displacement.

Specifically, the angular velocity of rotational displacement near the second intermediate state of first operation unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of rotational displacement near the retracted state or the extended state of first operation unit 3400 . (The amount of change in angle relative to the amount of displacement of the base end portion 444a becomes smaller).

Therefore, it becomes impossible to displace the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 at a substantially constant speed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arc-shaped gear portion 444 d is provided as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441 , meshes with the upper right rotary gear 441 , and is connected to the relative displacement member 442 . An armed rotating gear 3441 having an extending portion is provided. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement modes between the lift plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, the vertical displacement amount of the proximal side portion 444a is different from the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in correspondence with (proportional to) the angle change amount with respect to the vertical displacement amount of the proximal side portion 444a. By converting the amount of change in angle with respect to , the difference in displacement mode between the lift plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (cancelled).

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be brought closer to the displacement mode of the lift plate 430 .

In this embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 passes through the rotation shaft of the armed rotary gear 3441,
It may be configured to be guided by the relative displacement member 442 . That is, the route of the electric wiring DH1 is
Auxiliary arm member 444 , lifting plate 430 , rotating gear with arm 3441 and relative displacement member 4
42, the electric wiring D accompanying the displacement of the first operation unit 3400 is formed.
Large variations in the path length of H1 can be avoided.

In this case, since the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative portion 493, it is possible to arrange the electric decoration board in the decorative portion 493 and facilitate the execution of the light emission effect by the light emitting means such as the LED. can be done.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operation unit 700 was not arranged, but the second operation unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760 A detection device 4780 is provided for detecting. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. 79(a) and 79(b), illustration of the front cover member 770 and the electrical board 777 is omitted except for the curved projecting portion 774, and the outline of the curved projecting portion 774 is represented by an imaginary line. illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 79(a), no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4
761 is placed in the lowered position by its own weight, and in FIG. 79(b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4
761 is shown in the raised position.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), the load member 4761 abuts against the lower restricting portion 764 at the lowered position and is restricted from downward displacement, and at the raised position the upper restricting portion 765.
and the upward displacement is regulated.

The load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 described in the first embodiment except that the projecting portion 761d is changed to a thick projecting portion 4761f and a thin projecting portion 4761g. The configurations are identical.

The thick overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that overhangs along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b from the extending tip of the rod-like extending portion 761b with the same thickness (front-rear width) as that of the rod-like extending portion 761b. , correspond to a stopping portion that abuts against the upper restricting portion 765 and receives the load in the process of the load member 4761 being arranged at the raised position.

The thin overhanging portion 4761g extends from the overhanging tip of the thick overhanging portion 4761f to the thick overhanging portion 476.
It is a plate-like portion that is thinner (shorter in front-to-rear width) than 1f and protrudes along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin projecting portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the projecting direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick projecting portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the projecting direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin overhanging portion 4761g is configured to abut against the upper restricting portion 765 in the same manner as the thick overhanging portion 4761f when the load member 4761 is positioned at the raised position. Since it is thin, it is damaged more preferentially than the thick projecting portion 4761f due to accumulated fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) It does not have to be flush, and at least the top surface is flush, and the position of the bottom surface can be set arbitrarily. For example, by making the vertical width of the thin overhanging portion 4761g shorter than the vertical width of the thick overhanging portion 4761f, the electromagnetic solenoid SO can be reduced until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged.
By reducing the number of repeated excitations of L2, it is possible to adjust the period until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged.

Drive unit 4760 comprises detection device 4780 . The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 which is arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 and arranged such that a thin protrusion 4761g can be inserted into and removed from a detection groove.
and

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler-type detection device, and when the load member 4761 is in the lowered position, the thin protrusion 4761g blocks the detection light (see FIG. 79(a)), and the load member 476
At the elevated position 1, the thin overhanging portion 4761g is arranged upward so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79(b)).

The function of detection sensor 4782 will be described. Since the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 and the position of the load member 4761 usually correspond to each other, it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating appropriately based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 . MPU 22 confirms this
1 (see FIG. 4), and when it is determined that there is a malfunction, an alarm is generated or an error is displayed on the display device, so that the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700 is notified to the player or the hall clerk. You can make it easier to notice.

In addition, when the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged (broken) and dropped, the thin overhanging portion 47
Since 61g and the load member 4761 do not operate synchronously, the change in the position of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond. When the change in the position of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) issues an alarm or displays an error on the display device. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the hall clerk to notice that the portion 4761g has been damaged (broken).

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used both as position detection means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and as damage detection means for detecting damage (fracture) of the load member 4761. .

According to this embodiment, even if the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, the thick overhanging portion 4761f abuts against the upper restricting portion 765 so that the load member 4761 can be stopped at the raised position. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, it is not necessary to stop the game immediately and put it in the maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, so that the player can avoid unexpected disadvantages. can be avoided.

In this way, by providing a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) in the portion that abuts on the upper restricting portion 765 and detecting the breakage (breakage) by the detection sensor 4782, the thick projecting portion 476
The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to the extent that 1f fails (breaks).

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c is flexurally deformed due to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c itself is described. A deflection adjustment device 5780 is provided to adjust deflection deformation. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

80(a) and 80(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment along the line corresponding to line LVa-LVa in FIG. The deflection adjustment device 5780 is a box-shaped base member 5781 in which a metal coil is built, and an iron bar supported by the base member 5781 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and is arranged to protrude above the base member 5781. and an adjustment member 5782 that is

As shown in FIG. 80(b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-side excited state, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is driven to reduce the bending deformation of the load member 761 (the bending deformation is about half). state). In other words, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is employed instead of the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper end posture by energizing the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (both of them) in the first embodiment. ing.

That is, while the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in a one-side excited state (see FIG. 80(a)), a metal coil (not shown) incorporated in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjustment device 5780 is rotated around the adjustment member 5782. By energizing the metal coil in the winding arrangement to form an electromagnet and driving the adjustment member 5782 upward, the load in the direction of restoring (restoring) the bending of the vertical bar-shaped extension 761c is released. It can be given to the vertical bar-shaped extension part 761c (FIG. 80(b)
)reference).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the adjustment device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side are cooperatively driven to achieve the plate-shaped displacement member. It is possible to maintain the displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture), the middle posture, and the upper end posture.

As a result, the arrangement of the drive means can be made more compact than when a pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 need to be arranged. For example, since the arrangement of the electric wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be fixed, the areas required as routes for the wiring to pass through
left and right) can be avoided.

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140 and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in a winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the rear side (or rear).

First, referring to FIGS. 81 and 82, the prize winning unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. Figure 81 shows
It is a front view of the game board 13 in 6th Embodiment. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. FIG. Note that in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81), etc.) other than the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 below the central opening in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through-hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 provided in the front unit 940 are inserted inside the through-hole 60a.

On the base plate 60, a prize winning unit 930 is arranged from the game area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (rear side) to the game area, which are fastened and fixed by tapping screws or the like. The detailed configurations of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86, the overall configuration of the prize winning port unit 930 will be described. 83(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the prize winning unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the prize winning unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the prize winning unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (FIG. Mainly a drive unit 960 arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950 (Fig. formed in preparation for

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape that corresponds to the through hole 6 of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front.
It is formed larger than 0a. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. This will
A game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 penetrates from a space other than a game ball passage path (first winning port 64, second winning port 140, and specific winning port 65a) formed in the front unit 940 described later. It is possible to suppress passage through the hole 60a.

Part of the specific winning hole unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning hole 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball is inserted into the specific winning hole unit 95 through the specific winning hole 65a.
It is possible to throw the ball inside 0. A detailed description of the specific winning hole unit 950 will be given later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is attached to the feather member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. concatenated. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the feather member 945 . A detailed description of the operation of the feather member 945 will be given later.

Next, a detailed description of the front unit 940 will be given with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. Figure 8
7(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a front view of the front unit 940. FIG.
is a rear view of the. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. In addition, in FIG.87(a) and FIG.87(b),
The outer shape of the feather member 945 is illustrated with dashed lines.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair of) feather members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back base 941 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness and having an upside-down substantially T-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. hole 60a
The inside of the can be seen.

The rear base 941 includes a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b))) and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87 ( b) a specific prize winning port 65a located above) and penetrating in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the specific prize winning port 65
A second prize winning port 140 penetratingly formed above a and a first prize winning port 64 notched in the edge opposite to the first out port 71 are mainly provided.

Further, the rear base 941 has a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction in the outer edge portion. The through-hole 941a includes a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87(a)) to the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)), and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced as the diameter increases.

The first through hole 941 a 1 connects the rear base 941 (winning unit 930 ) to the base plate 60 .
It is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is
Since the diameter is reduced from the front side to the back side, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the rear base 941 is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. be. As a result, the rear base 941 (the prize winning unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60. FIG.

The second through-hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the rear side of the rear base 941 . In this case, the operation of removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941 requires that the prize winning unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13 .

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side to the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding to the rear side of the rear base 941 . As a result, when the specific winning hole unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, the head of the screw can be prevented from coming into contact with the specific winning hole unit 950. FIG.

The rear base 941 has a lower (lower in FIG. 87(b)) end in the gravitational force direction formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13 . The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, of the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () Game balls that have not flowed into any of the game boards 1 through the first out port 71
The ball can be thrown to the back side of 3 (opposite side of the game area (Fig. 87(b) front side of paper surface)).

The first winning hole 64 is formed by cutting out a semicircular end portion of the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out hole 71 . In addition, the first winning hole 64 is formed so that the size of its inner edge is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g, which will be described later, is pushed through the first winning port 64 to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87(b)).
You can throw the ball to the front side of the paper).

At the edge of the first winning port 64, a first receiving portion 941g protruding toward the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a)) and formed in a cup shape, and the side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 ( b) A first ball feeding portion 942g that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941g is formed to have a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the gravity direction upper side of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) can be caused to flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g.

In addition, the bottom surface of the first receiving portion 941g is inclined downward toward the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g can be thrown to the rear side (first ball-throwing portion 942g side) through the first winning port 64 below.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper ends of both ends of the base plate 60 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) toward the second prize winning opening side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). A guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be inclined outwardly in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. The guide part 941 g 1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941 . As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down region collides with the first receiving portion 941g, and the first receiving portion 941g
damage can be suppressed.

Further, if the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area becomes insufficient. It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of Therefore, even though there is a risk that the interest of the player will be spoiled, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed. .

Furthermore, since the guide portion 941g1 is inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning hole 140, the game that collides with the guide portion 941g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the rear base 941 . As a result, the base plate 60
It can be made to collide again with a game nail (not shown) arranged in the ball, and it is possible to easily change the flowing direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

The first ball feeding portion 942g is formed in a U shape that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance dimension between opposing inner edges thereof is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the first ball throwing portion 942g
The bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87(b))), and the protruding tip side is at the edge of the inlet 982d of the ball feeding unit 970, which will be described later. abutted. As a result, the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing portion 942g from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g through the first winning port 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball feeding portion 942g has a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view at the upper end portion of the projecting tip. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a recessed portion on which a second protrusion 982d1 of the ball feeding unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have approximately the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first ball-throwing portion 942g and the ball-throwing unit 970 will be given later.

The second prize winning opening 140 is penetratingly formed in a substantially D shape with an upwardly curved shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the opposing feather members 945 to be described later is passed through the second winning port 140 to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87).
(b) The ball can be thrown to the front side of the paper)).

At the edge of the second winning opening 140, the front side (game area side (Fig. 87 (a) paper surface front side))
) and a second ball-feeding portion 942c protruding to the rear side (opposite side to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b))).

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60 . The front side wall portion 941b is sized so that its projecting tip end surface abuts a ball-feeding guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball feeding portion 942c is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second prize winning opening 140 so as to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear. The dimension of the second ball feeding portion 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) is set larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the front base 94, which will be described later,
It is possible to suppress that the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of 3 falls from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

The pair of second ball feeding portions 942c are arranged so that the distance between them in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)) is equal to the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. (Fig. 87(b) left and right direction) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension, and the rolling part 9
43a is provided. In addition, the second ball feeding portion 942c is formed with a second recessed portion 942c1 cut out on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 87(b))) of the projecting tip portion. The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion in which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and detailed description thereof will be given later.

The back base 941 moves from the game area side of the back base 941 toward the opposite side of the game area to the other side of the gravity direction (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140. A first shaft hole 941d is recessed at two places in a circular shape, and two first openings 941e are formed through the rear base 941 by bending about the axis of the first shaft hole 941d. A projecting portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b located outside the two first openings 941e in the facing direction and projecting on the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. and

The first shaft hole 941d can support a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a blade member 945, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arcuate shape centered on the center of the first shaft hole 941d. again,
The projection 945b of the feather member 945 can be inserted through the first opening 941e, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. Thereby, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the projection 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e.

The projecting portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are positioned on substantially the same plane as the central position between the opposing feather members 945 described later. In addition, the uneven sides of the projecting portion 941c are formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the feather members 945, and the length dimension thereof is set slightly larger than the dimension between the facing feather members 945 in the closed state. be. Furthermore, the projecting portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the feather members 945 are closed, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown to the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the feather member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 is displaced. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short side direction of 966.

In addition, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and are extended in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. As a result, the projecting portion 966 a of the displacement member 966 is moved to the first guide wall 9 .
42b, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a has a long rectangular opening in the facing direction of the pair of feather members 945 (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)). can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the rear base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite side to the game area), and recessed portions at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a from the back side. and a recess 941h provided.

The standing portion 942f has an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as a front view shape of a specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 is installed inside the standing portion 942f.
can be easily positioned and arranged.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 serving as the rotating shaft of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the rear base 941. It is formed. As a result, the bar member 952 moves toward the plate member 951
When the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction in which it escapes from the plate member 951 , the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941 h to suppress the rod member 952 from slipping out of the plate member 951 .

Further, the front base 942 includes a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the opposing standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87 (
b) a second guide wall 942d projecting upward);

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the rear side of the rear base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c. As a result, a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) to be described later
is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 941 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), the displacement member 9
A predetermined gap can be formed between 66 and the rear surface of the rear base 941 . As a result, the displacement member 9
66 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The rear base 941 is provided at the edges of the specific winning port 65a in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)) on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). A second out port 941f is formed by cutting out a circular shape. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (opposite side to the game area). formed to a shape larger than the diameter of the

A third ball-feeding portion 942e, which is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear, is formed at the edge of the second outlet 941f. As a result, the game ball thrown to the rear side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing portion 942e.

The third ball-throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape when viewed from the rear protrudes toward the rear side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f is formed. can be rolled to the rear side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third ball feeding portion 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside down substantially T-shape that is smaller than the rear base when viewed from the front. Also, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the rear base 941 facing each other can be visually recognized by the player.

The front base 943 has a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a protruding from positions corresponding to the second prize winning port 140 and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 described above.
and are formed mainly.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and is positioned inside the rear base 94 when viewed from the front.
1 second winning opening 140 is arranged. Also, the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape)
is provided with a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. Furthermore, the projecting distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, and suppress the game ball from flowing into the second winning port 140 from the outside between the pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. can.

In addition, the second receiving portion 943c includes a ball-feeding guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof,
A first concave portion 94 formed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).
3ca, and a rolling part 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the rear base side.

A pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Also, the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, respectively.
3 are combined, their end faces are brought into contact. Thereby, the pair of feather members 945
A game ball that has flowed into the space between the two can be thrown between the two facing ball guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) between the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d, and the upper end surface 943a1 in the gravitational direction slopes downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Also, as described above, the rolling portion 943a
1 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), it is arranged inside the recess 941j, and the tip thereof is on the back side of the back base 941 (FIG. 87(b) front side of the paper surface).
protruded to

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of ball-throwing guide portions 943d opposed to each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to move the game ball to the rear side of the rear base 941. can throw to

Further, the front base 943 has an annular projection 943b projecting annularly at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second axial hole 943b1 on its inner edge, and the second axial hole 943b1
The other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a feather member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted inside b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945 a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941 d of the rear base 941 . Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game balls flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can be transferred to the rear surface through the second out port 941f. You can throw the ball to the side (the side opposite to the play area).

A first concave portion 943ca and a second concave portion 944a1 are formed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a. The first recessed portion 943ca and the second recessed portion 944a1 are portions to be fastened to which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the rear base 941. be done. Thereby, the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize winning opening 140 formed in the rear base 941 interposed therebetween when viewed from the front. The feather member 945 is made of a colored translucent material, and is visible to the player through the front base 943 .

The feather member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than the space between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The feather member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c penetrating in the thickness direction (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a projection 945b protruding from the rear base 941 side surface (back surface).

The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the feather member 945 is rotatable. It can be arranged between opposing sides. As a result, the feather member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the blade member 945.
It is set to a dimension that protrudes to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the back base 941 on which the displacement member 966 is arranged via. A detailed description of the connection state between the projection 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

A detailed description of displacement member 966 will now be provided with reference to FIG. Figure 90(a)
) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966. FIG.

The displacement member 966 is formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating therethrough in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90(b)) substantially at the center position when viewed from the front. Second opening 9
In 66c, the shape of the inner edge in front view is formed larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, the game ball thrown to the opposite side of the game area through the second winning hole 140 is moved to the displacement member 96 .
Collision with the inner edge of 6 can be suppressed.

The displacement member 966 has a protrusion 966a that protrudes in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) from one end (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90(a)). A bulging portion 9 that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) to the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85))
66b.

The projecting portion 966a has a sliding groove 966a2 formed through the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction.
and the abutting portions 96 located on both lateral sides of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction.
6a1.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the blade member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in an elongated hole elongated in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. Also, the sliding groove 966a2 is
The width dimension is set larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the slide groove 966a2 facing each other in the width direction, and restricting the movement of the feather member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge on the front side (the side of the front base 943 (see FIG. 85)) and the side of the rear side (the side of the rear base 941). As a result, the contact area between the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the later-described drive unit 960 can be reduced. resulting in,
Resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back base 941 side), and a laterally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is
It is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965 e ) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 , which will be described later, is inserted. note that,
A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to a one-side abutted portion 966b2 on the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and the other side abutted portion 966b3 on the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a bulging portion 965 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later.
This is the surface with which e1 abuts. The displacement member 966 has a bulging portion 965 on one side contacted portion 966b2.
The feather member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the contact of e1 and the sliding displacement.

The other-side contacted portion 966b3 is a bulging portion 965 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later.
The side surface opposite to e1 is the contact surface. The displacement member 966 is slidably displaced by contacting the other-side contacted portion 966b3 with the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1.
5 can be displaced to the closed state (see FIG. 91).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the feather member 945 will be described in detail. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). 91 and 92, the outer shape of the feather member 945 is illustrated with a dashed line. 91 illustrates the closed state of the wing members 945, and FIG. 92 illustrates the open state of the wing members 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the blade member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of blade members 945 in the closed state. A surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the specific winning opening 65a), the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b
3 and a second surface 945b2 that is continuous with the second surface 945b2.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (connection hole 966b1 side) and contacts the protrusion 945b to displace the feather member 945 to the open state.
An upper inner surface 966a3 facing the a4 and contacting the protrusion 945b to displace the blade member 945 to the closed state, and a lower inner surface 96 from the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) of the displacement member 966.
and an inclined surface 966a5 inclined inward in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966 toward the 6a4 side.

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the rear base 941 by a transmission member 965 which will be described later. Feather member 945 is a displacement member 966
is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a (lower side in FIG. 91), it is closed, and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 (upper side in FIG. 91), it is opened.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 will be described. As described above, the projection 945b of the blade member 945 is positioned in the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member.
66a2.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the blade member 945 is closed, the projection 945b is positioned in the sliding groove 96. As shown in FIG.
It is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of 6a2 (outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second prize winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the projection 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. Thereby, the feather member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the rear surface of the pair of feather members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposed portions are formed which face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the projecting portion of the feather member is inserted between the opposed portions. Therefore, when the rotary member is rotated, the facing portion of the rotary member pushes up or pushes down the projecting portion of the wing member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the opposing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening and closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, but the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. Then, the projecting portion interferes between the opposed portions, and the rotary member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing parts to a size that does not interfere with the projecting part, and the gap between the facing part and the projecting part is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing members are likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operations of the wing members are not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 rotated by the driving force of the drive means (driving unit 960) and a displacement member 966 slidably displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is projected from a pair of feather members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 into which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement member 966
is a sliding displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the projection 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the projecting portion during rotation unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation shafts of the pair of feather members 945 , the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the feather members 945 . As a result, the space required for arranging the feather member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the rotation axis direction of the pair of feather members 945, so the space required for disposing the displacement member in the rotation axis direction of the pair of feather members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of blade members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the blade member 945 and the transmission member 965. At the time of operation in the direction of sliding displacement upward (the other side in the gravitational direction), the displacement member 966
As the weight is added, the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610, which will be described later) increases. Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed,
The protrusion 945b is positioned on the lower side (one side in the direction of gravity) of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945 in the direction of gravity. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity (the other side in the direction of gravity) is set below the rotational axis of the feather member 945 along the direction of gravity. As a result, the projection 945b pushed up on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2
can be increased in the horizontal direction (right and left direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravitational direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the stopped state (
It is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the closed state) and opening or closing it.

Further, the center of gravity of the feather member 945 is set on the opposite side of the projection 945b across the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c). As a result, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the feather member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the blade member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is opened, so the blade member 945 is rotated by its weight (self weight). can be made Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it.

Furthermore, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945 . As a result, even when the position of the projection 945b is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the feather member 945, the projection 945b can be guided along the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 966a5, thereby displacing the displacement member. 966 can be smoothly started to slide toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

In addition, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced accordingly, but also the projection 945b to the inclined surface 966a5 In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity,
Horizontal displacement can also be restricted. Therefore, the feather member 94 in the closed state
5 can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibration accompanying the falling game ball, the feather member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966
The projection 945b is displaced by coming into contact with the first surface 945b1 of .b. As a result, the feather member 945
can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the side of the second winning opening 140 to the side of the specific winning opening 65a is set in the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when the feather member 945 is closed, the feather member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966 . As a result, the feather member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

A detailed description of the drive unit 960 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 . 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. Figure 9
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion. 9
63, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the connecting member 964 which is pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963.
64 and a transmission member 965 connected thereto.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. ), and a guide portion 962b protruding toward the center.

The covering portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side being open. In addition, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d projecting outward from the opposing wall surface in the facing direction.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages with an engaging portion 963c of a second housing portion 963, which will be described later.
Accordingly, before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened, the engaged portion 962c
Since the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 96
Workability of fastening with 3 can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is attached to the second housing portion 9 when the drive unit 960 is assembled.
63 is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of 63 and is located on the side of the second accommodating portion 963 (see FIG. 93).
(a) It has a through hole 962da penetrating toward the bottom).

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) to be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 is inserted.
It is formed with an inner diameter larger than 3b1. As a result, the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 96
3 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side and connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a. A wall portion 962f is formed, and a protruding portion 962g protrudes from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portions 962e extend from the facing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (
FIG. 85) and the protruding tip side is bent to the other side in the direction of gravity (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side) to form a substantially L shape in a side view. In addition, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is substantially the same as the distance between the horizontal ends of the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the sorting unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portions 962e on the distal end side (bent side), and has a shape larger than that of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front. In addition, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the rear base 941 described above. is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3=L4). Further, the wall portion 962f is such that the distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) extends from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (
L5=L6). As a result, the displacement member 9 is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 facing each other.
66 can be arranged, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the opposing first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outside of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e. It is set substantially the same as the projection dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Moreover, the projecting portion 962g
93(b)) is set slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the facing direction. Furthermore, the projecting portion 962g has a dimension in the direction of gravity set substantially equal to the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is arranged on the rear base 941 (the front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposed projecting portions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the rear base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing standing portions 942f.

The second housing portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-like body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second housing portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (horizontal direction in FIG. 93(b)) when viewed from above.
In addition, the second housing portion 963 includes recessed portions 963e that are recessed at a plurality of locations on both wall portions that extend in the longitudinal direction, and the recessed portions 963e that extend from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e to the first housing portion 962 side. an engaging portion 963c that protrudes into the longitudinal direction, and a protruding portion 963b that protrudes in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction;
It is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion on one side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) extending in the lateral direction.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude in a semicircular shape outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963,
A fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962 is provided. This will
The first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodation portion 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in the space formed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other. By circulating the air through the recessed portion 963e, the first
It is possible to cool the solenoid 610 arranged between the housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first housing portion 962 from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the width direction of the second housing portion 963. be. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962. As shown in FIG.

Moreover, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the proximal end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962. FIG.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotation shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later.
It is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. The end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the side of the first accommodation portion 962 is covered with the side surface of the first accommodation portion 962 on one side in the direction of gravity, and the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d from coming off to the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a body portion 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft portion 961b inserted into the body portion 961a and displaceable with respect to the body portion 961a, and a shaft portion 961b.
It has an annular portion 961c arranged at the opposite end of the body portion 961a of 1b, and a coil spring SP1 arranged between the annular portion 961c and the body portion 961a.

The body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 961b to be inserted into the body portion 961a to be pulled inward and inserted.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape.
The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction faces the rear base 941 side, and is arranged in a state where a portion on the rear base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the body portion 961a, the displacement is displaced from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964.
can be transmitted to and displace the connecting member 964 .

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound multiple times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be kept separated from the main body portion 961a. In addition, when the application (supply) of electric power is interrupted after the application (supply) of power to the body portion 961a, the ring portion 961c can be quickly separated from the body portion 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 has a base portion 96 formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.
4a and an upright portion 964b that bends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the direction of gravity toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85).

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end face on one side in the direction of gravity (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape with one open side in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first concave portion 964c is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the first recessed portion 96
An annular portion 961c can be inserted into 4c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the rear, and the first concave portion 964c
It is formed so as to open from the side toward the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b has an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the gravitational direction, and a projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, the connecting member 9
64 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 96 is formed on the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e.
5d contacts and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is bent when viewed from the side, and the shaft portion 961 of the solenoid 610
and a rotating portion 965b that is continuous with the tip portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

The rotating portion 965b is formed such that the width dimension in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) is smaller than the dimension between the opposing bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. be done. In addition, the rotating portion 965b is provided at the end on the 964 side in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 (
FIG. 93(b) Vertical direction) Rotating shaft 965c protruding in a cylindrical shape on both sides, and its rotating shaft 965c
and a protruding portion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the direction of gravity.

The rotating shaft 965c is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d, as described above. In addition, the pair of rotating shafts 965 c is set such that the distance between the protruding tips thereof is larger than the distance dimension between the pair of facing bearing portions 963 d formed in the second housing portion 963 . Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the projecting portion 965d is a projection inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Further, the projecting portion 965d displaces the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 (main body portion 96).
In the state before power is applied (supplied) to 1a, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610
is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the projecting portion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the shaft portion 961
It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 965 from being restricted due to contact between the protrusions 965d on both end surfaces in the displacement direction of the portion b and the insertion hole 964e.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e that is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and an upright portion 965f that protrudes from the connection side of the rotating portion 965b in the direction of gravity. formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted through the inner side of the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the displacement operation of drive unit 960 will be described. Figure 96
96(a) and 96(b) are sectional views of the drive unit 960 along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. 93(b). 96(a) shows the state before the solenoid 610 operates, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state after the solenoid 610 operates. Also, Fig. 9
6(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In the state in which it is not closed, the circular ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the circular ring portion 961c. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction (left side in FIG. 96(a)) away from the body portion 961a.

When the connecting member 964 is pushed away from the body portion 961a, the transmission member 965
The surface of the projecting portion 965d on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the inner surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the direction of gravity is restricted by the contact portion 965g coming into contact with the second accommodating portion 963 .

As shown in FIG. 96(b), power is applied (supplied) to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610.
In this state, the magnetic force generated in the body portion 961a causes the shaft portion 961b to move toward the body portion 961a.
, and the ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than the state in which power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction (right side in FIG. 96(a)) approaching the body portion 961a.

When the connecting member 964 is displaced toward the body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 opposite to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the connecting member 964
The inner surface of the insertion hole 964e on the solenoid 610 side and the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in FIG. 96B) about the rotating shaft 965c. Also, the transmission member 96
5 toward the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted by the connection portion between the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962 .

Therefore, by displacing the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963.
can be brought into contact with either one of the As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like from the player side (game area side) into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first housing portion 962 or the second housing portion 963 to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is increased. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the feather member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965, it is possible for the store operator to easily discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966, and a rotating portion 965a extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of the present embodiment. If the distance of the displacement member 966 is set substantially equal to the total distance of the rotating portion 965b, the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment.
66 increases, and the whole becomes large-sized.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes small.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are connected to the rotating shaft 96
5 c is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the axial direction, the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the sliding displacement amount of the displacement member 966 . Also, the projecting portion 965d is formed on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b opposite to the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (the ball throwing unit 97 described later)
0) and the transmission member 965 in the space between the passage member 955 of the specific winning port unit 950
can be arranged efficiently, and the overall size can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the connection between drive unit 960 and displacement member 966 will be described in detail. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line XCVII--XCVII in FIG. 98(a) and 98(b) are XCVII of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line I-XCVIII. Note that FIG. 98(a)
shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and in FIG. 98(b), the solenoid 61
The state after operation of 0 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is connected to the connecting hole 966b of the displacement member 966.
1 is inserted.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), FIG.
8(a) and 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the contact portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact with each other, causing the displacement member 966 to move in the direction of gravity. It is slid to the other side.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (the side of the second winning opening 140), the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced and the feather member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the feather member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the transmission member 96 is driven by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed on the solenoid 610 as described above.
5 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the connecting hole 966b of the displacement member 966 are connected to each other.
1 of the other side contacted portion 966b3, the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the gravitational direction.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravitational direction (the side of the specific winning opening 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, since the blade member 945 can be in the closed state while the application (supply) of power to the body portion 961a is cut off, the body portion 961a can be closed due to disconnection of the wiring of the body portion 961a or due to fraud by the player. When the wiring is cut, the feather member 945 is in an open state and the second winning opening 1
It is possible to suppress a state in which game balls easily flow into 40.例文帳に追加

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction. Thereby, the pair of feather members 94
5 and the transmission member 965, the change in posture of the displacement member can be easily allowed. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the feather member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the transmission member 965 rotates, the displacement member 966 is slid and displaced to open or close the pair of feather members 945. Only one of the pair of feather members 945 receives the load from the game ball. When acted upon, the position of displacement member 966 is changed such that displacement member 96
6 is connected to the pair of feather members 945 at two points and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two points, displacement between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 A change in the posture of the member 966 is difficult to tolerate, and resistance occurs when the displacement member 966 is slid (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated), hindering the opening or closing of the wing members.
In contrast, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of blade members 945 at two points and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one point. Even if the load from the game ball acts on only one of the 945, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the abutment surface between the one side abutted portion 966b2 and the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is equal to the maximum external dimension D2 (FIG. 98A) of the projection 945b. (
a) is set to be less than three times cf. This makes it easier to allow the change in posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 . That is, the insertion portion 965
When the width dimension D1 of e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of blade members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 are likely to come into contact with each other. Since the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted, setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b restricts the change in the posture of the displacement member 966. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather member 945 and the transmission member 965 .

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily suppress the contact between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

Next, the specific winning slot unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG.
99(a) is a front view of the specific winning slot unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning slot unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning slot unit 950. It is a diagram. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning slot unit 950, and FIG.
FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of a specific winning hole unit 950;

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning hole unit 950 includes a ball entry member 953 formed in a box-like body that opens toward the player side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 99), and the opening of the ball entry member 953. A plate member 951 arranged to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball-entering member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is made of a colored translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the side of the entering ball member 953 via the plate member 951 . The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front; and an engaging portion 951d protruding toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side of the main body 951a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and both ends in the longitudinal direction are coaxially set. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball-entering member 953 by supporting the ball-entering member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude from one side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the driving of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the direction of gravity is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the falling game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d has a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the projecting tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the concave portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. In addition, the engaging portion 951d is such that the plate member 951 is
When it is rotationally displaced about b as an axis, a part of it protrudes toward the flow-down region side, so that the body portion 951
It is possible to suppress the game ball that has flowed down to a from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball-entering member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a box shape that is oblong in the front view, a standing wall 953b erected on the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. an engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the main body portion 953a; A wall portion 953d projecting from both longitudinal direction outer sides of the edge portion toward the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the main body Protruding portions 953g protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, and protrusions 9 protruding toward the plate member 951 from the open-side edge portion of the main body portion 953a.
53h and two inlets 953j penetrating through the bottom surface of the body portion 953a.

The body portion 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion with a size that allows game balls to pass through, and has an opening 953a1 that opens toward the plate member 951 and a rolling surface that rolls the game balls flowing in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in a front view is formed slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. As shown in FIG. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set larger than the spaced distance of the pair of feather members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning hole 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the plate member 9
51 is in an open state, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1.

The rolling surface 953a2 is the inner edge of the main body 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. In addition, the dimension in the direction (transverse direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, opening 9
A game ball thrown from the 53a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the three-direction outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 that is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 except for the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 is positioned between the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953.
It can be arranged inside the part enclosed by f. In addition, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the standing wall 953b at a distal end portion separated from the base end by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f are engaged with each other, and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a
can be prevented from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the thickness direction of the detection device SE1. The detection hole SE1a is formed in either one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1, which is arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear. Alternatively, a detection substrate SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is
It is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and allows game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass therethrough.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of annular portions on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the entrance member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the distance dimension between the opposing walls is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951 . This will
A plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of walls 953d facing each other.

The wall portion 953d is formed with a circular shaft hole 953d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (horizontal direction in FIG. 99(a)). The shaft hole 953d1 is the shaft hole 95 of the plate member 951.
It is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of 1b. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d, the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 95 from both sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951.
The plate member 951 can be axially supported by the ball entry member 953 by inserting the plate member 951 into 3d1 and the shaft hole 951b.

Furthermore, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a projection dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess 941h formed in the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, the front unit 9
40 and the specific winning port unit 950 are combined, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the concave portion 941h. This can prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955 described later is inserted toward the plate member 951, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. be done.

The projecting portion 953g is formed to project on the axis of the connecting projection 942j of the front unit 940. As shown in FIG.
Further, in the state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning slot unit 950 are combined, an insertion hole 953g is formed through the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting projection 942j and the projecting portion 953g.
1 are arranged coaxially, and the projecting portion 953g and the connecting projection 942j are in contact with each other.
As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by a drive unit 957, which will be described later, a game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the body portion 953a.

Moreover, the projection 953h is connected to the projection 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 95 of the engaging portion 951d.
1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the projecting side of the projection 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which a game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 953a is fed to the passage member 955, and a pair of the inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered into the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. one ball at a time. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member is correspondingly increased. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, which tends to cause over-winning. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inlets 953j are formed in a pair (at two locations) at a predetermined interval.
The length of the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball up to 53j can be shortened. Therefore,
By shortening the time required to reach the inflow port 953j, the liquid can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short period of time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of game balls into the ball entry member 953
j and a concave portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later. This will
A game ball entering the opening 953a1 of the body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore,
By the plate member 951, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed, and it is possible to prevent over-winning.

In addition, the inlet 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of feather members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity when the front unit 940 and the specific prize winning unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of feather members 945 in a closed state are arranged between a pair of inlets 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 (the pair of feather members 945) in the gravity direction. In addition, since the pair of feather members 945 are disposed in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is less likely to flow downward in the gravity direction of the pair of feather members 945 . Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning port unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of feather members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, so that the inflow port 953j is located at a position where a large amount of game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inflow port 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the ball entering member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, over-winning of game balls to the entering ball member 953 can be suppressed.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has an outer shape when viewed from the front that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the above-described ball-entering member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of the respective detection devices SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction and extending from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. a pair of third openings 955c penetrating from the driving unit 957 side to the ball entering member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction; The driving unit 9 is positioned between the rolling part 955d provided and the pair of recessed parts 955a.
A second recessed portion 955f recessed from the 57 side is provided.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is connected to a connecting member 957c of a drive unit 957 and a transmission member 9, which will be described later.
This is the space in which 58 is arranged. A shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) projecting in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 in a cylindrical shape is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 through the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the direction of insertion of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Accordingly, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c.
Further, the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c, and the detection hole S
E1 protrudes toward the entrance member 953 side.

An engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 from the edge of the third opening 955c. The engaging portion 955e has its projecting tip bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is positioned to detect the detection device SE2.
is engaged with the detection board SE1b side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling part 955d is curved in an arc shape. Further, the rolling portion 955d is configured to move the plate member 95 when the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are combined.
The end on the 1 side is connected to the third ball feeding portion 942 e of the front unit 940 . As a result, the game balls flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 are
can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d.

The other end side of the rolling portion 955d is positioned on the other side in the gravitational direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between a pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as passages for game balls as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 (horizontal direction in FIG. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the accommodation portion 963 (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h penetrating through the passage member 955 at a longitudinally intermediate position and a projection 955g projecting toward the drive unit 957 side. insertion hole 95
5h is a hole for inserting a screw that fastens the entrance member 953 and the passage member 955, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955g is formed in a columnar shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center thereof. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific prize winning port unit 950) is screwed.
It is formed at a position facing the long hole 963f formed in 3. As a result, the drive unit 9
60 and the passage member 955 (specific winning port unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped and a body portion 957a.
1 and a shaft portion 957a2 that can be displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1;
A coil spring SP2 is provided between the annular portion 957a3 and the body portion 957a1.

The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied).
1 can be drawn inside and inserted.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction directed toward the passage member 955, and is arranged such that a portion on the rear base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, thereby displacing the connecting member 957c.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound multiple times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the opposing annular portion 957a3 and the body portion 957a1. As a result, the ring portion 957a3 is replaced with the body portion 957a.
It can be biased away from 1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be kept separated from the main body portion 957a1. In addition, when the application (supply) of electric power is interrupted after the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Moreover, the case member 957b
is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 passing through the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction, and an opening 957b2 passing therethrough on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole for inserting a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957), and is formed larger than the external shape of the tip of the screw.
A screw inserted through the insertion hole 957 b 1 is screwed into the passage member 955 .

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the body portion 957
Wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to a1 through opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from the end face on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. A second recess 957c1 located on the solenoid 957a side of the shaft 957c1 and having a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2.
It has a concave portion 957c2 and an engaging portion 957c3 that protrudes toward the ball entering member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape with one open side in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Also, the first recessed portion 95
The groove width of 7c1 is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. This will
The annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on one side in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is formed so as to open from the side of the first concave portion 957c1 to the side of the solenoid 957a.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. A connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. Accordingly, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a substantially triangular plate-like body when viewed from the side. The transmission member 958 has a circular shaft hole 958b penetrating in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a cylindrically protruding in the plate thickness direction from the end on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion protruding toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

The shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted, as described above. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed such that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955 .

The connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3, as described above. Accordingly, when the connecting member 957c is operated by displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The distal end portion 958c is inserted into the concave portion 951d1 of the plate member 951 and arranged. Therefore,
When the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the distal end portion 958c is displaced to push up the engaging portion 951d.
Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. Figures 102(a) and 102(b) are sectional views of the specific winning port unit 950 along line CII-CII in Figure 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning slot unit 950. FIG.

102(a) and 103(a) show the closed state of the plate member 951.
103(a) and 103(b) show the open state of the plate member 951. FIG. again,
The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entering member 953. is separated from the opening of the

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
When the application (supply) of electric power to a1 is interrupted, the shaft portion 957a2 protrudes toward the plate member 951 (left side in FIG. 102(a)) due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP2. Accordingly, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side away from the body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c.
It is pushed out to the 51 side. As a result, the shaft hole 958
A force is transmitted in the direction of rotation in the gravity direction one side (lower side in FIG. 102(a)) about b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the concave portion 951d are separated from each other.
. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the side of the plate member 951 and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the side of the solenoid 957a are brought into contact with each other. As a result, when the player makes an illegal operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the side of the plate member 951 is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the side of the solenoid 957a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of force to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 due to improper operation. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), the body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
When power is applied (supplied) to a1, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a
The connecting member 957c arranged in 3) is similarly arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c. (right side of FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in a direction to rotate the distal end portion 958c about the shaft hole 958b toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the concave portion 951 are separated from each other.
d1 abuts, the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 contacts the main body portion 953a of the entering ball member 953.
is rotated in a direction away from the opening side of the Thereby, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the weight of the plate member 951 can be used to displace the plate member 951 in the opening direction. It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b)
104(a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning port unit 950 taken along line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG.
04(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Moreover, FIG.
) and FIG. 104(b), the closed state of the plate member 951 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the body portion 953a, there is a longitudinal direction of the body portion 953a (FIG. 1).
04(a) left-right direction) Inclined surface 954 that inclines to one side in the gravitational direction outward from the intermediate position
a, a recessed portion 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a projecting portion 954c projecting from the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recessed portion 954b, each surface on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and the passage member 955. A vertical wall 954d is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface.

The inclined surface 954a allows game balls flowing in between the pair of inlets 953j to face each other.
It is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls to the side, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inlet 953j side. As a result, the game ball that flows into the space facing the inflow port 953j can roll to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave tip surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball entered from the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be made to flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short period of time.
It is possible to suppress over winning by suppressing another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed.

In addition, the concave portion 954b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (Fig. 104(b)).
) in the vertical direction). As a result, the rolling surface 953a2
A game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of a2 (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) can be easily received in the concave portion 954b, and the received game ball can be guided (flowed) into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the recessed portion 954b has a width dimension L9 (FIG. 104) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling contact surface 953a2.
(b) reference) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are received in the concave portion 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, the width dimension of the concave portion 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (the plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the concave portion 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, the plate member 9
51 prevents another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-described inclined surface 954a across the concave portion 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling contact surface 953a2, and the inlet 953j (passage member 955).
It is formed with a downward slope toward As a result, the game ball entered on the side of the second inclined surface 954e rolls in front of the inlet 953j using the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and rolls quickly toward the passage member 955. can be made As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced apart from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) allows the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e.
A second guide surface 954d1 is provided on the side.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the side of the opening 953a1, and is formed to be inclined from the side of the opening 953a1 toward the side of the inlet 953j toward the side of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and is formed so as to contact the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2.
3 a 2 and the passage member 955 . Thereby, the opening 953a
A game ball flowing into the body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of 1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As shown in FIG. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a and protrude toward the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction). As a result, the inclined surface 95
4a can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955) in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of the recess 954b (immediately before), and the game ball passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge portion 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball (the longitudinal direction outer direction of the rolling surface 953a2) It is formed sloping to the side. As a result, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced by the concave portion 954.
It can be decelerated before b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is increased, and the rolling in the longitudinal direction of the game ball is decelerated before (just before) the recess 954b. Then, the game ball passes through the recessed portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 9
Rolling up to 54e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a. An end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on the one end (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Furthermore, the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 is
1, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball, before the recess 954b (
Immediately before), the rolling of the game ball is decelerated, and the game ball can be suppressed from rolling from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, the plate member 951 causes the opening 95
Over-winning can be suppressed by suppressing the entry of another game ball until the 3a1 is closed.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connection portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j toward the side portion 954c2 of the connection portion with the inclined surface 954a. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is opened 953a1.
The game ball can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short period of time while suppressing jumping out.

That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the game ball with a relatively low (slow) rolling speed is opened 933
Since it is less likely to protrude from the opening 953a, it is brought into contact with the guide surface 954c1.
1 side, the second inclined surface 954e passes from the inclined surface 954a through the concave portion 954b.
It is possible to suppress the rolling to the extent and to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time accordingly. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the side of the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by riding over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly made to flow into the inlet 953j (passage member 955) while preventing it from jumping out of the opening 953a1. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A side edge portion 954c3 of the projecting portion 954c on the end surface opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erected wall 954d is
A second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface on the side opposite to 4c extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of 3a2. As a result, the game ball that has crossed over the guide surface 954c1 is moved to the second side edge portion 954d of the standing wall 954d.
2, the speed can be reliably reduced, and the position in the vicinity of the passage member 955 can be facilitated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. resulting in,
By the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the standing wall 954d is set such that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A protruding portion 954c is positioned on the extension of the inclination direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d, and the game ball guided toward the concave portion 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 rolls. Even if the moving speed is relatively high (low), such a game ball is pushed to the projecting portion 9.
54c and can be decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c has a distance dimension L33 (Fig. 10
4(a)) is set larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed continuously with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d rolls. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time.
As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning hole unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105(a) shows a specific winning opening unit 95
0 and the drive unit 960, and FIG.
0 and a side view of the drive unit 960. FIG. FIG. 106(a) is the CVI of FIG. 105(a)
106(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960 along the line CVIb-CVIb of FIG. 106(a). is.

105(a) and 105(b), the solenoid 9 that operates the plate member 951
A part of wiring HS1 connected to 57a and wiring HS2 connected to solenoid 610 for operating a pair of blade members (see FIG. 83(a)) are shown. Also, FIG. 106 (
In b), part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the feather member 945 (FIG. 83 (
a) The drive unit 960 that drives the reference) is the specific winning opening unit 95 in a front view.
It is formed at a position where 0 and part of it overlap. From this, the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 9
A space can be formed on the opposite side (rear side) of the game area of 45).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, the pair of feather members 945 for opening or closing the second winning opening 140, the first driving means for driving the pair of feather members 945, and the specific winning opening 65a , a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a, and the plate member 95
1 is known. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first driving means and the second driving means each have a pair of feather members 945,
Since it is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 and the plate member 951, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of feather members 945 is
Since it is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (see FIG. 97). That is, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are concentrated on the back side of the plate member 951 (the specific winning opening 65a), thereby arranging other members and devices. A pair of feather members 945 provide space for
It can be secured on the back side of (the second prize winning port 140), and the space can be effectively utilized accordingly.

Further, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the blade member 945 arranged near the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is moved away from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning port unit 950) arranged on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) It can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player by retreating to the back side of 60 (opposite side to the game area).

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 at the time of normal (retraction),
It is arranged near the central opening so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize and is easy for the player to visually recognize by protruding inside the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 when movable (protruding). By arranging the operation means (drive unit 960) of the feather member 945 to be horizontally overlapped with the specific winning opening unit 950 located far from the central opening,
The movable body can be easily arranged at a position away from the central opening when retreating. Therefore, normal (retract)
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the action unit at the time. As a result, when the movable body is moved to the protruding state, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

Further, the plate member 951 is set to have a projected area larger than that of the pair of feather members 945 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the dead space behind the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, two displacement members (a plate member 951 and a pair of feather members 94
5), the driving means (driving unit 957 and driving unit 960) are arranged on the rear surface of the side (plate member 951 side) with a larger projected area in front view, so that each driving means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and a space can be formed on the back surface side of the other displacement member (pair of feather members 945).

Furthermore, the plate member 951 has a projected area larger than that of the driving unit 960 that drives the pair of blade members 945 and the driving unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 . The dead space behind the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a drive unit 96 for driving a pair of feather members 945
0 and the plate member 951 are driven in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 10).
5(a) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the dead space behind the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific prize winning unit 950) is disposed at a position spaced apart from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) than the pair of feather members 945, The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separating direction. Thereby, the space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 can be easily secured. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is disposed through the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the rear base. 941 so that the front base 943 and the rear base 94
1 is fastened and fixed, the front base 943 is caused to hold the drive unit 960 (
can be arranged). As a result, the front unit 94 is attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13).
0 and the ball throwing unit 970, forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 can be suppressed.

Solenoid 957a of drive unit 957 and solenoid 610 of drive unit 960
, the position of the end of the specific winning port unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 side (back side) is set at substantially the same position, and is connected to the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected from the end of the specific winning hole unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 side (back side). As a result, wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily organized. As a result, game board 1
3, the wires HS1 and HS
2 can be suppressed from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 and the plate member 95 of the drive unit 960 that drives the blade member 945
1, the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 drives the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957
The main body part 961a and the shaft part 9
The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (drawn out) to the opposite side of the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of the 57a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 95
7 can be easily combined with the wiring HS2.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush. Thus, a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of the electromagnetic field in the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged
can be simplified.

That is, the body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the body portion 957a of the drive unit 957
1 are formed to have different sizes, or the two side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity. Since both side surfaces of the body portion 961a of the unit 960 and the body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the gravitational direction form a step, it is necessary to form a partition member according to the step, and the shape of the partition member is complicated. Become.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at a position where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 in the gravitational direction are substantially flush with each other, and a step is formed between the outer surfaces. Therefore, the partition member can be made flat. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partitioning member is a conductive barrier for partitioning the arrangement area of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 from other areas and restricting the flow of electromagnetic waves between these areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

In addition, the transmission member 965 is disposed between the passage member 955 of the specific winning port unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and its tip (insertion portion 96
5e) is provided with a displacement member 966 that slides according to the rotation of the transmission member 965 to open and close the pair of blade members 945, so compared with the conventional product in which the pair of blade members 945 are opened and closed only by rotating members. Thus, a space can be secured on the back side of the second winning hole 140 and on both sides (lateral sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, there is no need to bend the ball throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950 side. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair in the specific winning opening unit 950 in a front view. is set. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As shown in FIG. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with through the specific winning opening 65a, the detection substrate SE of the detection device SE1
1b, the drive unit 960 can be hidden, making it difficult to commit such fraud.

Here, as described above, when the driving means (driving unit 960) for driving the feather member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole penetrating from the game area side to the drive unit 960 is formed in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine by doing so, it is difficult for the clerk to discover the illegality. there was a risk of being

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entering member 953,
The ball-entering member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and it is difficult for the store clerk to discover fraudulent use of the ball-entering member 953.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like, detection is performed. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and the driving unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the driving unit 960 can be removed from the plate member 9 by closing the plate member 951.
It is particularly effective to be able to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, because the portion where the fraud is applied is blocked by 51 and cannot be visually recognized.

In addition, since the detecting device SE1 is the same diversion product (ready-made product) as the detecting devices for detecting other game balls (for example, the detecting device SE2 and the detecting device SE3), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is ensured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills the ball-entering member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a possibility that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's cheating.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposing sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wiring HS3 can be broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the clerk to discover the fraud by informing the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific prize winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ). Alternatively, it is made to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3,
Fraud can be easily deterred.

An annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of detecting devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball entry member 953 (the lower side of E10(a)), the screw screwed into the annular projection 953c allows the drive unit to be tampered with. 960 can be hidden, making such fraud more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1. , the unshielded area in front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screws, making fraud more difficult.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is connected
It is wound around c. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened, and the drive unit 96 is driven from the open side of the entrance member 953 .
If cheating is added to 0, such cheating can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10
Since the pachinko machine 10 can make the pachinko machine 10 recognize the detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the store clerk to discover the fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c. As a result, force in the shearing direction is less likely to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, the wiring HS
3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is ejected to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wire HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharge direction, and the detection device SE1 and A force in the shear direction acts on the connection portion with the wiring HS. Detection device SE1
and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion-type connector, and is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wire HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c, so that when the wire HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning hole unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 can act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is the detection device SE.
It is formed at a position biased toward the end opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3 of 1. Therefore, since the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the opposite side of the screw engagement position (annular projection 953c), the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area of the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened and the specific winning opening 65
If the drive unit 960 is tampered with from a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is located on the player side (game area side).
A sorting unit 980 provided with a space in which game balls can be inserted, and a passage unit 990 arranged on the side opposite to the game area of the sorting unit 980.

The sorting unit 980 includes openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above. ) through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 to the opposite side of the game area. A detailed description of the sorting unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side of the sorting unit 980 in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first
It is provided with insertion holes 991a to 991d, and game balls sent inside the sorting unit 980 can be received from the openings thereof. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112, the configuration of distribution unit 980 will be described in detail. FIG. 109(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG.
) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. Figure 11
2(a) is a sorting unit 980 on the CXIIa-CXIIa line in FIG. 109(a)
112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 along CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a).

As shown in FIGS. 109-112, the sorting unit 980 includes a rear base 985,
A front base 981 arranged on the player side of the rear base 985, and a front base 98 thereof.
1 and the back base 983, and a back base 98;
5, mainly including a distribution portion 983 and a cover member 987 disposed at a corresponding position.

The rear base 985 is formed from a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material,
A base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body, a plurality of openings (openings 985b to 985g) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, and recesses on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings. and a housing portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.
and a projecting portion 986e.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d circularly penetrating the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 990, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping part of the openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravitational direction. Also, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, it is possible to guide the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity to the side of the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, the game balls can be easily made to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109(b)) and is formed substantially in the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recessed portion 985h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, inside, and has a bearing portion 985j projecting annularly from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short direction, and the inner edge dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, opening 985
b and the opening 985c are formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed substantially in the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109(b)), and is positioned substantially at the same position in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 109(b)) as the openings 985b and 985c. position. Also, the opening 985d is the same as the opening 985b and the opening 9
As with 85c, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

An opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and an opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f are space inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 that open toward the front base 981, and the openings 985e and 985f.
, and intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 extending in the direction of gravity and communicating the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. be.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. . Thereby, game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Further, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 that are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball (gravitational direction). The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4.
3 is set to be substantially the same as the external shape. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be installed by inserting it from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.
, and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the intermediate passage 985e2
, 985f2. As a result, the game ball passes through the intermediate passage 9
When flowing down from the other gravity direction side (gravitational direction upper side) of 85e2 and 985f2 to the gravity direction one side (gravitational direction lower side), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, game balls passing through the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 can be detected.

In addition, since the detecting device SE3 is formed such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily used when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are connected to the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passage 98
It is formed continuously with the space of 5e3 and 985f3. That is, intermediate passages 985e2, 985f
2 is formed using the detection device SE3. As a result, the intermediate passages 985e2, 985
It is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of f2 in the gravitational direction. As a result, the rear base 985
can be suppressed from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. again,
When the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are formed by a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991c of the passage unit 990, which will be described later.
It is connected to the insertion hole 991d. As a result, game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 and can be passed through the space to be thrown to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). again,
Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can roll to the side opposite to the front base 981 .

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular rings. Further, the accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b that is formed in the cylindrical body. Moreover, the projecting dimension of the accommodation portion 986b is
It is set larger than the axial dimension of 8b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. In addition, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies,
Even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to a manufacturing error, the magnetic body 988b can be disposed by elastically deforming the pair of semi-annular bodies.

The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. In addition, the projecting portion 986e has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape in its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through the cover member 987 described later is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact, the cover member 987 is fastened to the rear base 985. can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a by being disposed in the housing portion 986b. As a result, a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, is repelled, and the distributing portion 983 can be easily displaced.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. In addition, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge bulging from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the rear base 986). It is mainly formed with an exit portion 982 .

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 98
1d, and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity.

The insertion hole 981g inserts the assembled ball feeding unit 970 into the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82).
It is a hole through which a screw (not shown) to be fastened to is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular annular shape, and has a bulging portion 982 described later.
are formed in a pair in the lateral direction with the . In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the semicircular open portion faces substantially the center in the widthwise direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below the bulging portion 982, which will be described later, in the gravitational direction, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that the inner edge shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985 described above. Accordingly, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f
The wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981
f and the second guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is located between the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981.
formed in the center of d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed between the front base 981 and the rear base 985.
is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c, and the front base 9
The front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened by inserting a screw from the 81 side and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. again,
The through-hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected along its edge on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(a)). Also, the through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above.
It is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into 40 .

The side wall portion 981b is sized so that the upright front end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 . In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the inner surface in the gravity direction, which is located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b has a projection 981b1 projecting from the upright tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position radially separated from the game ball in the gravity direction from the rolling surface 981c1. As a result, from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c of the through hole 981c.
1, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. In addition, from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 9 of the through hole 981c
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to 81c1 will be given later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows game balls to pass through the inside thereof, and the game balls flowing in from the inflow port 982d pass through the inside thereof. and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent and erected toward the back base 985 at a position approximately in the middle of an inlet 982d formed by cutting the upper end in the direction of gravity. and concave portions 982e to 982j provided at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is cut out in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d is
When the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 , the inner edge portion is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning hole 64 of the winning hole unit 930 .

In addition, the inlet 982d has a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes in the opposite direction to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning hole unit 930 described above. Concave portion 942g
1, the second protrusion 982d1 abuts on the inner edge of the second protrusion 982d1.

Also, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second projection 982d1 to the end surface of the inlet 982d on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is the first distance from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1.
It is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the ball feeding portion 942g on one side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the first ball-throwing portion 94 through the first winning port 64
When the game ball sent to 2g flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 9
82) and the first ball feeding portion 942g.

The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the gravitational direction and includes a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed in the standing direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

The standing wall 982a is separated from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 by a distance L36 in the horizontal direction.
(See FIG. 112(b)) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2, which are spaces through which the game ball can pass, are formed between them.

The first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a sorting section 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the sorting section 983 is thrown to one of them. The sorting unit 983 is set to alternately throw game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of game balls flowing into the first winning hole 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A bearing portion 982c that annularly protrudes from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the shaft member 988a is replaced by the bearing portion 982c.
, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, one end side of the shaft member 988a is the bearing portion 985 of the rear base 985.
When the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j and the other end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. A shaft member 988 a can be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 .

The abutment portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by the action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction).
A first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch path BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first path TR1, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch path BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second path TR2, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage T
R1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the recesses 982h and 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d, and moves the game balls that have flowed into the back base 98.
5 opening 985e.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d, and moves the game balls that have flowed into the back base 98.
5 opening 985e.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Also, the concave portion 982g
A third branch passage BK3, which is a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
is formed between the first path TR1 and the second path TR2, the sorting unit 980
miniaturization can be achieved.

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is the first
It is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the passage or the second passage, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985 d of the rear base 985 .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and extends toward the one side in the direction of gravity while being inclined toward the rear base 985 side. Also, the inclined portion 98
2b shows the opening 98 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined.
5b to the opening 985f. As a result, the first passage TR1, the second
By bringing the game ball flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2 and the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the inclined portion 982b, the game ball flowing down is opened to the openings 985b to 985.
It can be guided to the f side to facilitate the flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1
j and the inclined portion 982b, and the upright end face faces the rear base 985 side (Fig. 109).
(b) is inclined downward toward the front side of the paper). As a result, the game balls flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are brought into contact with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, and the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to make it easier to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985, and collides with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game ball to collide with the opening 985e. and the opening 985f. Furthermore, the inclined portion 982
Since the vertical distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased to improve durability.

Here, as described above, the sorting unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is made visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, through the front unit 940, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
The game ball flowing down becomes difficult to be visually recognized from the player side. Furthermore, opening 985e and opening 98
When the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of 5f, the guide portions 982h1 and
Due to the thickness of 982j1, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guiding portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed so as to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the standing dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, opening 985
The game balls thrown to e and the opening 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily visually recognized even when the front unit 940 is interposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned closer to the back base 985 as the game ball flows down, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the sorting portion 983 penetrates through an acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b projecting from approximately the center position of the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and a connection portion between the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. and a contact portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c,
A wall portion 98 formed by connecting the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side
3e.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to have a slightly larger outer diameter than the shaft member 988a.
As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, the shaft member 988
a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distributing portion 983, the distributing portion 983 is arranged between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b extends outward in the radial direction of the through-hole 983c, and in a state in which the displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b extends from the distal end of the intermediate plate 983b. The spaced distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be thrown through the first passage TR1 or the second passage T
Regulated by either one or the other of R2. Also, the intermediate plate 983b
3 is rotated around the through hole 983c, the state in which throwing of game balls to one side of the first path TR1 is restricted to the state in which throwing of game balls to the other side of the second path TR2 is switched.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the action portion 983a is connected to the contact portion 983d at the intermediate plate 98.
It is set on the other end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) from the connection position with the contact portion 983d of 3b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 through the inflow port 982d is
A load is applied to the 83a side. As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and the through hole 98
It is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of 3c. The wall portion 983e has a through hole 983c
In the direction perpendicular to the axis of , it protrudes outward from the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and its thickness dimension is set smaller than the recess dimension of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 described above. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, the game ball thrown into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d is
By being caught inside 85h, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being hindered from flowing down.

In addition, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b and at the radially outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodation portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet, and the magnetic body 988c arranged on the rear base 985
It is disposed in a state of repulsion with 88b. As a result, the distributing portion 983 receives a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985, rotates about the through hole 983c, and rotates the extending direction of the acting portion 983a to one side or the other side. can be tilted to

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a state of repelling each other, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 9 is inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1.
It is possible to prevent the 88c from slipping out of the accommodating portion 983e1. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distributing portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c to the distributing portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic forces of the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are set to magnetic attraction forces smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown inside the sorting unit 980 is moved to the magnetic body 9
It is possible to suppress stagnation inside the sorting unit 980 due to magnetic attraction to the 88b and the magnetic body 988c.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the top, and covers the concave portion 9 of the rear base 985 .
It is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of 85h. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recessed portions 987a and a second recessed portion 987b that are recessed in the direction of gravity in a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recessed portion 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodation portion 986b of the rear base 985 described above inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodation portion 986b. Therefore, in a state where the magnetic body 988b is housed inside the housing portion 986b as described above, the housing portion 9 is inserted into the first concave portion 987a.
By accommodating the tip of 86b, it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b from slipping out of the accommodating portion 986b.

The second concave portion 987b has a through hole 9 for fastening and fixing to the rear base 985 in the concave bottom surface.
87b1. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 9
87 can be positioned by accommodating the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e through the through hole 987b1.

Next, referring to FIG. 113, the operation of the sorting section 983 when game balls flow into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. Figures 113(a) and 113(
b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In the following description, the acting portion 983a of the distribution portion 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first path TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of a game ball to one side of the first path TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of a game ball to the other side of the second path TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution portion 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action portion 983a), as described above, it is distributed to the distribution portion 983. Through-hole 9
The intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the intermediate plate 83c is inclined toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by contacting the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 with the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the sorting section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the side of the first passage TR1. As described above, the action portion 983a
, the connection position with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. It can act on the acting portion 983a on the side of the passage TR1.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113(b), the sorting portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. It is said that The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. As shown in FIG. Moreover, in this case, the magnetic body 9
The direction of repulsion of 88c extends from through hole 983c to intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of second passage TR2.
The state of acting on the side is switched to the state of acting on the side of the first passage TR1.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 uses the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c to
It can be rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c. Moreover, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution part 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the sorting section 983 displaces the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b to throw the game ball one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passageway unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passageway unit 990. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 for throwing a game ball passing through, and a third passage member 993 arranged in the second passage member 992 for throwing a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992.
and a detection device SE4 disposed between the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. Further, the first passage member 991 includes a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side of the sorting unit 980 in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and the first insertion hole 991a.
A second insertion hole 991b formed through one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of 91a in the gravity direction, and a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991c formed through both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction. A through hole 991d and a plurality of through holes 9 circularly formed around the outer periphery in a front view.
91f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

In addition, the first insertion hole 991 a has an inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) that is the second passage member 9 .
It is formed with a downward inclination toward the 92 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is connected to the distribution unit 980.
and the passage unit 990 are combined, the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980
85g and the internal space are formed in a continuous position. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the inner surface of the second insertion hole 991b on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward inclination toward the 92 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the third insertion hole 991c is connected to the distribution unit 980
and the passage unit 990 are combined, the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980
The internal spaces of 85b are formed in a continuous position. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (first passage TR1) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c is provided with recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be connected to the sorting unit 9.
Unauthorized operation from the outside in a state in which 80 and passage unit 990 are combined can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the concave portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a projecting portion 991c2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontally adjacent. It is inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and roll in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is the distribution unit 980
and the passage unit 990 are combined, the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980
The internal spaces of 85b are formed in a continuous position. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (second passage TR2) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be connected to the sorting unit 9.
Unauthorized operation from the outside in a state in which 80 and passage unit 990 are combined can be suppressed.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a projecting portion 991c2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontal. is inclined downward in a direction away from the adjacent second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and roll away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 penetrating to the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) and the fifth insertion hole. 922
, and a standing wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed by the first insertion hole 9 of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
The internal spaces of 91a are formed in a row. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991 a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922 .

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge portion of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 922 can roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

An engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and the first passage member 9
and a projecting wall 992e projecting horizontally from the end on the 91 side. engagement portion 99
2d is formed in an L shape that protrudes horizontally and whose tip is bent toward the third passage member 993 side. The engaging portion 992d is positioned between the upright wall 992a and the detecting device SE4 described later.
And the wiring of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980 is inserted. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE
3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 .

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude in a semicircular shape in a front view from both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and has a through hole 992e1 passing through the axis of the semicircle. Moreover, the protruding wall 992e is formed in the first passage member 99 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
1, and the through hole 992e1 is formed in the fastening hole 9
It is positioned coaxially with 91g1. As a result, the through hole 992e is opened from the second passage member 992 side.
1 and by screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. be. As a result, the second insertion hole 991 of the first passage member 991
A game ball passing through b can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

A guide wall 992c1 standing toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction. and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

The second passage member 992 also has an annular projection 992f projecting toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 114(a)). The annular protrusion 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. fastening hole 992
f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

In addition, the first insertion hole 991 a has an inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) that is the second passage member 9 .
It is formed with a downward inclination toward the 92 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is connected to the distribution unit 980.
and the passage unit 990 are combined, the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980
85g and the internal space are formed in a continuous position. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the inner surface of the second insertion hole 991b on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward inclination toward the 92 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 is
A seventh insertion hole 993a penetratingly formed substantially in the middle position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and the second passage member 992 side from the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity. , an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and the second passage member 99.
It is mainly formed with a recess 993c recessed in the side surface on the second side.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Also, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position that communicates with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions except for the gravity direction other side (gravitational direction upper side) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Also, the guide wall 993b
, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (
It is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the seventh
The game ball sent to the insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114(b)).
The third passage member 993 can be arranged close to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the sorting unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the sizes of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced.

When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the upright wall 993e has a distance dimension between the opposing first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the short side distance dimension in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the SE1a. Accordingly, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the gravitational direction.

In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is formed on the upstream side (the side of the second passage member 992) where game balls are thrown. Thereby, the sixth insertion hole 9
A game ball passing through 92c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing fraud by the player. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 992c that positions the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown is where the game ball cannot be inserted.
2 is formed, it is possible to suppress positional deviation between the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the height of the rolling surface. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c is detected through the detection hole SE1a.
can be easily inserted into the

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and has a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the projecting tip. bent portion 993d
1 is a state in which the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined;
The distance dimension between the passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 is set substantially equal to the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This makes it possible to position the detection device SE4 in the horizontal direction.

The recessed portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and has an outer diameter of the annular projection 992f. It is formed with an inner edge shape that is larger than the Further, the recess 993c has a through hole 993 formed through the bottom surface of the recess coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f.
c1. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the concave portion 993c, and the screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side to tighten the fastening hole 9.
The second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed by screwing them together with 92f1.

According to the ball-throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball-throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64
And since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 equipped with the second prize winning port 140, by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (sorting unit 980) and arranging another unit, Another game mode can be achieved without affecting the flow of game balls flowing down the game area.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the sorting unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the replaceable unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replaceable unit 1980. FIG. FIG. 118(a) is the
118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 118(a). FIG. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the replacement unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a rear base 1985 arranged on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the game area side. formed in preparation for

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Also, the front base 19
81 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player (the side opposite to the rear base 1985).

Also, the front base 1981 is made of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). As a result, the player can easily recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 .

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with specifications on which the sorting unit 980 is arranged and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with specifications on which the exchange unit 1980 is arranged are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, both specifications have the same shape of the game area (the front surface of the game board 13). By doing so, the player can easily recognize which specification the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) has.

The base plate 1981a has a shape similar to that of the base plate 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front.
It is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a. Therefore, from the distribution unit 980 to the replacement unit 198
0 (specification is changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. FIG. Therefore, with the specification change due to the replacement of the sorting unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980,
It becomes unnecessary to change the shape of the base plate 60, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size such that a game ball can be inserted therein. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an inlet 982d formed by notching the upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inner side and flow down. . In addition, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is set at substantially the same position in the direction of gravity as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on the one side in the direction of gravity. As a result, game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inlet 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inlet 982d.

The rear base 1985 has a shape similar to that of the rear base 98 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front.
5, and an opening 98 that communicates with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982.
5d and an opening 985g communicating with the internal space of the through hole 981c.

According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as described above, the base plate 1
Since the outer shape of 981a in a front view is substantially the same as that of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, the distribution unit 980 can be easily replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specification change).

Here, a game comprising a ball-entering unit provided with a ball-entering opening formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and a game board on which the ball-entering unit is arranged machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball-entering unit with another ball-entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the game board. can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the ball-entering unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance in front of the game board. Therefore, when using a ball-entering unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the sorting unit 980 (entering ball unit) has an inflow port 982d and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d. A prize winning unit 930 arranged on the front side, and a first passage T
Since the passage unit 990 connected to the R1 and the second passage TR2 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is required. There is no need to secure it in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the exchange unit 1980, the game board 13 (the base plate 60 and the front unit 940) can be diverted (commonly used), and the game board 1 can be used when changing the specifications of the game board 13.
The space in front of 3 can be effectively utilized.

Also, as described above, the front unit 940 is made of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the prize winning unit. In addition, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the sorting unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Also, the sorting unit 98
In order to make the 0 or replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmissive material. affix the seal to the Alternatively, since the base plate 60 can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Furthermore, since the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is made of a colored translucent (light-transmitting) resin material, the front unit 940 is passed through the distribution unit 980 .
Alternatively, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the inside (passage) of the replacement unit 1980, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, since the front unit 940 is made of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored and semi-transparent (light-transmitting) resin material, Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980. FIG.
In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down while changing its position in the front-rear direction, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The game ball passage of the sorting unit 980 is formed with a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 includes a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2.
A detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through is provided. Therefore, when a game machine with different specifications is manufactured by changing from the sorting unit 980 with many passage paths of game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with few passing paths, it is possible to prevent the worker from making a mistake in the number of detectors SE3 to be provided.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the downflow passage When changing from a distribution unit 980 in which two flow passages are formed to a replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 There is a possibility that the number of detection devices SE3 will be increased. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in a passage branched from the ball-throwing passage TR0, the sorting unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1.
When changing to 980, since the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangement.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of game balls into the second winning hole 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices provided in the sorting unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

In addition, the exchange unit 1980 has a second winning opening 1 at the same position as the sorting unit 980.
A side wall portion 981b is formed for throwing a game ball introduced from 40 . Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, the replacement unit 1980 is replaced with the front unit 940 (the winning opening unit 93).
0), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same.
By positioning , even the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned with respect to the front unit 940 .

Furthermore, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is similar to that of the sorting unit 980, and there is a positional deviation (step) at the connecting portion between the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b.
Since it is possible to position the target part, the occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively suppressed compared to the case where other parts are positioned. can. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXIXa--CXIXa in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball-throwing unit 970 are connected so that they abut against each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 119). It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940 .

More specifically, the first ball-feeding portion 942g and the inlet 982d are formed by a second projection 982d formed in the inlet 982d inside the first recess 942g1 formed in the first ball-feeding portion 942g.
1 is placed. In addition, the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b
A protrusion 981b formed on the side wall portion 981b is formed inside the second concave cutout portion 942c1 formed in the
1 is placed.

Also, the second ball feeding portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 98 of the sorting unit 980
1b is arranged in an internal space surrounded by an arm portion 962e and a wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960. As shown in FIG.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member A game machine is known which has two passages and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board. After flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member, the game ball flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and flows into the second passage of the second member on the back side of the game board. Go through 2 passages. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be entertained.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth downflow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. are requested to do so. However, the game machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the second member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, the game board is turned over A separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not realistic.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the front unit 940 includes the drive unit 9 .
60 is disposed, the pair of second guide walls 942d of the front unit 940 are inserted between the facing projections 962g of the drive unit 960. As shown in FIG. When the ball feeding unit 970 is arranged in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e from which the projecting portions 962g project.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a projecting portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. and As a result, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960. FIG.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is connected to the pair of second ball feeding portions 942c of the front unit 940.
located on the outside in the opposite direction of the As a result, the projecting portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, respectively. Positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to 940 can be performed effectively. That is, the positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) is connected to the guide portion 962b (the arm portion 9
62e), it is possible to perform direct positioning, thereby effectively suppressing the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b.

Further, the drive unit 960 having the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being arranged in the front unit 940. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960 . That is, the front unit 940
Since the through hole 60a for disposing the connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can also be used as an arrangement space, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced. can be achieved.

As described above, the drive unit 960 having the guide portion 962b is configured so that the second ball feeding portion 942
Since it is arranged (formed so as to be held) in the front unit 940 provided with c, there is no need to attach the drive unit 960 separately when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the front and back of the game board 13. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Further, in a state where the drive unit 960 is arranged in the front unit 940, the front unit 9
40, the protruding portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the front unit 9 is attached to the base plate 60
40 and the drive unit 960, there is no need to separately engage the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball-feeding portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is arranged in the front unit 940, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the rear surface of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other.
And the above-described displacement member 966 is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 facing each other. Therefore, it is unnecessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966 . Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is the protrusion 94 of the pair of feather members 945.
5b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member 966 is moved by the wall portion 962 f of the drive unit 960 .
By blocking the opening of 66a2 from the outside, it is possible to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the sliding of the projecting portion 966a by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of blade members.

Next, referring to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state will be described using the connection between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b as a typical example. Figures 120(a) and 121(a) are
FIG. 120(b) and FIG. 121(b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). be. 121(a) and 121(b) show a state in which the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b). be.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second concave cutout 942c1 are set such that the distance L38 between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius of the game ball is substantially the same.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. machine is known. However, in the structure that connects the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, positional deviation between the two cannot be avoided. There is a problem that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Also, the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 6 as described above.
0 are respectively fastened and fixed. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (thickness is increased), the prize winning unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may separate in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the projection 981b1 are formed with different positions in the passage direction of the game ball, the game ball is placed on the bottom side of the step. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface side different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling portion 943a of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the second ball feeding portion It is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (horizontal direction in FIG. 121(a)) from the gap K2 of the space formed between the second concave cut portion 942c1 of the 942c and the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling from the second ball feeding portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the gap formed between the connecting portion of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can reduce the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding grooves 966a2 are formed linearly has been described. A concave portion 8966 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 122))
a6, and is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at substantially the center position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c has an inner edge shape that is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 when viewed from the front,
In the state where the displacement member 8966 is arranged in the front unit 940, the second winning opening 1
40 are placed.

In addition, the displacement member 8966 includes a protruding portion 966a protruding in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12).
2 lower side) to the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122).

The projecting portion 966a is formed by sliding grooves 8966 formed through the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction.
a2, and contact portions 966 located on both lateral sides of the displacement member 8966 and extending in the longitudinal direction.
and a1.

The slide groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. The recessed portion 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction on the other side of the gravity direction (gravity direction). It is recessed toward the direction upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension in the lateral direction of the recessed portion 8966a6 is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b. In addition, the moving side surface of the projection 945b extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the projection 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122).
It is parallel to the first surface 945b1 of the projection 945b of the feather member 945 in the closed state.

Therefore, when the feather member 945 is closed, the projection 94 is located inside the recess 8966a6.
5b can be accommodated, and when the feather member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 8966a6 to restrict the displacement of the projection 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction).
can be extracted from the inside of the recess 8966a6. As a result, the projection 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 to displace the projection 945b.

That is, when the driving force is transmitted from the blade member 945, the transmission of the driving force to the transmission member 965 side can be restricted. can be disengaged from the projection 945b to be displaceable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

Furthermore, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In addition, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the gravitational direction (gravitational direction), the projection 945b can be received as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 8966 can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6.

Next, referring to FIG. 123, an insertion portion 9965e of a transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has a distal end disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

123(a) and 123(b) are sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. 123(a) and 123(b) are the same as those shown in FIG.
Corresponds to (a). Further, FIG. 123(a) shows the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 123(b) shows that the feather member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player to change the closed state to the open state. The engaged state in the middle of being displaced to .

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is bent in a side view, and has a distal end portion 996 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
5a, and a rotating portion 96 connected to the tip portion 9965a thereof and extending toward the connecting member 964 side.
5b.

As in the sixth embodiment, the distal end portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 9965a includes an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end thereof, and the rotating shaft 96
5c, and an upright portion 965f protruding toward one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction).

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e is connected to the connecting hole 9
An engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from 66b1 toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and a bulging portion 965e1 that protrudes from the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1. be done.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to protrude in the displacement direction (gravitational direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the contact surface 9965e4 on the side of the rotation shaft 965c separates the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a small gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), the displacement member 9
66 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the gravity direction), the displacement of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted by bringing the front surface of the displacement member 966 into contact with the contact surface 9965e4.

Specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the connecting hole 966b1
The one-side contacted portion 966b2 contacts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y and displaced toward the rotating shaft 965c due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c, the contact surface 9965e4 is displaced by the displacement member 966.
can be abutted on the front surface of the Since this restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates earlier than the displacement member 966 so that the insertion portion 9965
contact between e and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965 .

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the feather member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9
The rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted by contact with 965e4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feather member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and its insertion portion 99
65e, and when the blade member 945 is closed, the displacement member 966 is displaced to insert the insertion portion 99 into the contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the displacement member 966.
The engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966 when one side of the 65e is brought into contact. Therefore, when the feather member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 96
6 can be engaged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 and displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965
described the case where the tip is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the ninth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is positioned inside the connecting hole 109
66b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) show the drive unit 10960 in the ninth embodiment.
and a cross-sectional view of a displacement member 10966. FIG. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). Further, in FIG. 124(a), the feather member 9
45 is shown in the closed state, and in FIG. 124(b) the feather member 945 is shown in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending when viewed from the side, and the distal end portion 10 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
965a and a rotating portion that continues to the distal end portion 10965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width dimension of the distal end portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is reduced as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 10965a is
An insertion portion 109 inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, is provided at the distal end thereof.
65e, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connection side with the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape in a front view that corresponds to the connecting hole 10966 of the displacement member 10966.
It is formed smaller than the inner edge shape of b, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. The insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion that bulges from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1. 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate-like shape that curves around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside a concave portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the feather member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 has a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The abutment surface 10966d4 is arranged to face an abutment surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap therebetween when the feather member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating therethrough in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 124(a)) substantially at the center position when viewed from the front. second
The opening 966c has an inner edge that is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second ball throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 when viewed from the front, and is arranged with the second ball throwing portion 942c inserted inside. be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning hole 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966 .

In addition, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes in the lateral direction from one end in the longitudinal direction.
, a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the back side, and a concave portion 10966d that is recessed on the opposite surface of the bulging portion 966b.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to continue to the contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the connecting hole 966b1, and has a contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the side of the bulging portion 966b. Abutted surface 109
66d1 is curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the feather member 945 is closed, and the contact surface 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is curved.
4 and are disposed facing each other with a slight gap. In addition, the abutted surface 10966d1 has an inclined surface 10966d2 at the end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to incline toward the rear side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2. In addition, the inclined surface 10966d2 is the contact surface 1096 centered on the rotating shaft 965c
It is formed radially inward of 6d1.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposing contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the contact contact portion 966b2 of the one side is the insertion portion in the front view with the feather member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 (see FIG. 124(a)) of 10965e in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4
is displaced to the back side, it is possible to prevent the abutting surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 from coming into contact with each other and restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the blade member 945 is displaced to the open state, when the solenoid 610 is driven, the drive is transmitted from the coupling member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. Thereby, the transmission member 1096
5 is rotated around the rotation axis 965c. As described above, the contact surface 1 of the transmission member 10965
0965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c. The contact surface 10966d1 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap therebetween. That is, the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, the one-side contacted portion 966 extends from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1.
Since the distance dimension between the opposing sides up to b2 is formed larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, by rotating the transmission member 10965, the concave portion 1096 of the displacement member 10966
The insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the 6d can be brought out to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 is brought into contact with the contact portion 10966b3 on the other side, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when displacing the pair of feather members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the transmission member 1
The tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the 0965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutted surface 10966d1, thereby displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). , the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inside the recess 10966d.

On the other hand, when driving is transmitted from the pair of feather members 945 when displacing the pair of feather members 945 to the open state, the driving is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965 . In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid while the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966 . Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced as the displacement member 10966 is slid, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced rearward by the rotational displacement. Therefore, the engaging portion 10
The abutment surface 10965e4 of the 965e3 abuts against the abutted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e. One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity is brought into contact with 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity (bulging portion 965e1), the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravity direction, the engagement of the engaging portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the gravitational direction is restricted. Therefore, the feather member 94
5 can be suppressed from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the position where the engaging portion 10965e3 comes out of the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engaging portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 toward the other side in the direction of gravity, the displacement member 10966 is slid toward the other side in the direction of gravity.
5 can be released.

125 and 126, the displacement member 1196 in the tenth embodiment
6 will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. note that,
The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and displacement member 11966. FIG. 126(a) illustrates the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 126(b) illustrates the open state of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 11942b extend in the direction of gravity on both sides of the second prize winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the rolling portion 9 arranged between the opposing second ball feeding portions 942c
The tip position of 43a is set to be substantially the same as the projecting tip position of the second ball feeding portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have first gear tooth flanks 1194 on opposite sides thereof.
2b1 is formed. In addition, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126(a)). is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is a first gear GY1 pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later.
are engaged. As a result, the displacement member 11966 slides to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a plate-like body that is oblong in the front view, and
A second member 11968 is displaceably disposed on the first member 11967, and a first gear GY1 is pivotally supported by the first member 11967 and meshes with the second member 11968. be.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in a front view. Also, the first member 11967 is located on the other side of the second opening 966c in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).
2, a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966;
A supporting portion 11966d and a sliding projection 11966e are formed to project annularly on both lateral sides of the opening 966c.

The support portion 11966d protrudes toward the first member 11967 and has a tip that extends toward the first gear G.
It is inserted into the shaft hole of Y1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding projection 11966e protrudes toward the first member 11967 and has its tip inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968 . Thereby, the second member 11968
can be disposed on first member 11967 .

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a substantially gate-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front. A slide groove 11968b is formed in the plate thickness direction along the extending direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (the vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)), and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the gate shape. It is formed with a blade portion 11968c inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending to the plate.

The pair of second tooth flanks 11968a1 are each meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal side surfaces of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are formed.

The sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extension direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1 as described above, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding projection 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is shifted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 119.
68 to displace the second member 11968 in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion of the blade portion 11968c is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the direction of gravity when the feather member 945 is closed. , is arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning hole 140 .

Also, the protruding distance of the second ball feeding portion 942c is set to a length that makes contact with the rear side of the second member 11968 . As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling part 943a arranged between the opposing second ball-feeding parts 942c is set at substantially the same position as the tip position of the second ball-feeding part 942c. As a result, the end portion of the rolling surface flowing in from the second prize winning port 140 and the blade portion 1196
A foreign object inserted into the second winning hole 140 can be cut by 8c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second ball feeding portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut off by an illegal operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140. FIG.

On the other hand, when the feather member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11 of the displacement member 11966
As 967 is displaced upward by transmission member 965, second member 11968 is displaced. The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the displacement of the first member 11967 with respect to the rear base 941. A distance greater than the diameter of the game ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a that serves as the rolling surface. As a result, when the feather member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position to open the feather member 945 to the position to close it, and the edge of the path. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning port 140. can be done.

For example, the tip of a string is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is made to enter from the second winning hole 140 and passes through the rolling part 943a, and the detection device SE4 (see FIG. 1) detects the passage of the game ball.
14), the other end of the string is manipulated (pulled out, drawn) to cause the game ball to reciprocate, causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered in a state where the feather member 945 is opened, the displacement member 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and displaced, and blade portion 11968c moves to rolling portion 9
43a and the second ball-throwing portion 942c, the midway portion of the string whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 11968c and pressed against the rolling portion 943a or the edge of the second ball-throwing portion 942c. At the same time, when the blade portion 11968c rubs against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the thread is pulled between the blade portion 11968c and the rolling portion 943a or the edge of the second ball feeding portion 942c. can be cut. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

127 and 128, displacement member 1296 in the eleventh embodiment
6 will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. note that,
The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and displacement member 12966. FIG. 128(a) illustrates the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 128(b) illustrates the open state of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 12942b extend in the direction of gravity on both sides of the second prize winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the projection distance of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a is set to be short, and the projecting tip surface is set to a position where it abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. be.

Displacement members 129 are provided on both sides of the second prize winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction.
A first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 protruding to the 66 side are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are respectively connected to a first gear GY described later.
It is inserted through the shafts of the first and second gears GY2, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 protruding in the opposite direction on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance dimension between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other is set slightly larger than the width dimension of the first member 12967 described later in the lateral direction. As a result, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed on the first member 12967 in a displaceable state, and a rear base 941 pivotally supported. 12967, and a second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having tooth flanks on its outer peripheral surface, and is mounted on the rear base 94 as described above.
1, and its tooth surface meshes with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears of different sizes, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. The second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a meshes with the first gear GY1.
The tooth flank of 2b is meshed with the second member 12968 .

The first member 12967 is made of a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in a front view. Also, the first member 12967 is the second opening 12
A pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the transverse direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of 966c, and annular grooves on both sides in the transverse direction sandwiching the second opening 12966c. and a sliding projection 12966e protruding from the second side of the gear tooth surface on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.
tooth surface 12966f.

The second opening 12966c has an inner edge shape larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 as viewed from the front. Also, in the second opening 12966c,
A second blade portion 12966c2 is provided on the inner surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 in a state in which the pair of feather members 945 are closed, and the pair of feather members 945 In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966
c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁

The sliding projection 12966e protrudes toward the second member 12968 and has its tip inserted inside the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968 . Thereby, the second member 12968
can be disposed on the first member 12967 .

The pair of third tooth flanks 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1 respectively. This will
As the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slid along with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Also, as described above, the first
The gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, whereby the second gear GY2 is engaged.
Gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12968 is formed of a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). In addition, the second member 12968 has a second tooth flank 12968a of the gear tooth flank on the outside of the pair of extending portions in the facing direction, and along the extending direction of the second tooth flank 12968a (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b is formed through the plate thickness direction in a long hole shape, and a blade portion 6683 is formed on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extended portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). be done.

The sliding groove 12968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a as described above, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slidably displaced in the gravity direction with respect to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding projection 12966e.

The pair of second tooth flanks 12968a are meshed with the large-diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2. Therefore, the second member 12968 is slidably displaced by rotating the second gear GY2. As described above, the second gear GY2 is connected to the first member 129 by the transmission member 965.
67 is slid and rotated. Therefore, the second member 12968 is the first
It can be displaced as the member 12967 is displaced.

The first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to slide in opposite directions.
set large.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side of the second ball throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) when the feather member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction). That is, the second member 1
2968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 in a front view with the feather member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c is traversed and the edges of each other are rubbed against each other. The second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 that cause the first member 12967 and the second
Since the member 12968 (displacement member 12966) is provided, it is possible to cut off an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140. FIG.

For example, the tip of a string is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is made to enter from the second prize winning port 140, and passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and the detection device SE4 is detected. When the game ball reaches the detection position of , the other end of the string is operated (pulled out, drawn) to reciprocate the game ball, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the pair of feather members 945 opened, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the string whose tip is adhered to the game ball is cut into a pair of the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 66.
It can be sandwiched between 83 and cut. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12968 has a blade portion 6683 in a state where the feather member 945 is opened.
is arranged on the other side in the direction of gravity from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140. As described above, when the feather member 945 is opened, the first member 12967
The second blade portion 12966c2 of is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in a state in which the pair of feather members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 provide the second
The second member 12968 can block the rolling passage of the game balls entering the prize winning port 140.
can be made smaller than the second member 11968 in the tenth embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game balls flowing into the second winning port 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game balls flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 are closed can flow into the rolling passage. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the transmission of the driving force from the solenoid 610 to the blade member 945 is performed through the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The transmission of drive from to the blade member 945 is performed by one member. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG.
29(b) is a sectional view of the prize winning opening unit 930 taken along line CXXIXb-CXXIXb of FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the outer shape of the specific winning port unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the main body portion 9
When the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the body portion 961a, the pair of feather members 945 are closed, and when the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a, the pair of feather members 945 are opened. state.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950 (on the right side in FIG. 129(b)), and the solenoid 61
0 is arranged with the axis of the shaft portion 961b directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). A transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 .

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and the blade member 94 extending from the end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side.
5 and an engaging portion 13965j erected toward the projection 945b side.

The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at the end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Accordingly, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) when viewed from the rear (or viewed from the front). Also, the engaging portion 1
3965j is set to a length that exceeds the projection 945b of the feather member 945,
It is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in a front view.

In addition, the engaging portion 13965j has a support portion 13965j having a substantially C-shaped side view at its erected end.
1 is projected. The supporting portion 13965j1 is set so that the facing dimension inside the opening is larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the projection 945b. Also, the facing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (Fig. 1
The width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in 29(a) lateral direction) is set larger than the displacement distance of the projection 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b is formed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.
can be arranged.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the protrusion 945b is displaced along with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the feather member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of blade members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are connected to the plate member 9 .
51, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, drive unit 13960 and drive unit 957
By collecting the arrangement space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140). , the space can be used effectively.

130 and 131, displacement member 1496 in the thirteenth embodiment
6 will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 when viewed from the front. connecting hole 966b of member 14966
A case where the inner edge shape of 1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 130(a) and 131(a) show the winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment.
is a rear view of the. FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a), and FIG. 131(b) is CXXX of FIG. 131(a).
It is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line Ib-CXXXIb.

In addition, in FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of feather members 945 is illustrated with chain lines. 130(a) and 130(b) show the closed state of the pair of feather members 945, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the protrusions 94
The open state of the pair of feather members 945 when 5b is cut is illustrated. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther apart from the second winning opening 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 1 in the thirteenth embodiment
4966 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 9 at approximately the center position when viewed from the front.
66c is penetratingly formed in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 extends along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)) on one end side (FIG. 130(a)).
130(a) left-right direction), and the other longitudinal end side (FIG. 130(b) lower side) to the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85). ) and a bulging portion 14966b that bulges out.

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back base 941 side),
A laterally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion in rear view. connecting hole 149
66b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted.

The shape of the inner edge of the connecting hole 14966b1 when viewed from the front is set to be substantially square,
One side abutted portion 966b of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 130(a)))
2, and the other side abutted portion 96 on the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).
6b3.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed such that the distance L40 between the facing parts in the direction of gravity (from the contact part 966b3 on the other side to the contact part 14966b2 on the one side) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the direction of gravity. When the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e contacts the contact portion 966b3 on the other side.

In addition, the connecting hole 14966b1 extends from the separation distance L40 between the opposite sides in the gravitational direction (from the other-side abutted portion 966b3 to the one-side abutted portion 14966b2) to the width dimension L4 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravitational direction.
The dimension obtained by subtracting 1 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 from the end face 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 (L40-L41 )>(L42-diameter of game ball). Thereby, the displacement member 1496
6 falls to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the edge of the displacement member 14966 causes the second
It is possible to block the rolling passage of the game balls flowing in from the winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

Next, referring to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the projections 9 of the pair of feather members 945
45b is cut off. As described above, the separation distance L40 between the connecting holes 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the direction of gravity, and when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the other side cover is closed. The insertion portion 965e is inserted into the contact portion 966b3.
131(a) and 131(b), the pair of feather members 94
5 is cut off, the displacement member 14966 freely falls to one side in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the one-side abutted portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L4
0-L41)>(L42-diameter of the game ball), so that the displacement member 14966 is free-falling, so that the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 is blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966. can be done.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the pair of feather members 945 are arranged in the sliding groove 966 of the displacement member 14966 .
In the state of non-communication with a2 (the state shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), a part of the displacement member 14966 is placed in the path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 can be restricted from flowing down by the displacement member 14966. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 132 and 133, the drive unit 15 in the fourteenth embodiment
960 will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 980. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment,
132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13,
FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, referring to FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment section
A first accommodating portion 15962 and a second accommodating portion 963 formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other;
A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between the first housing portion 15962 and the second housing portion 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, the first housing portion 15962 and the second housing portion 963,
A transmitting member 965 pivotally supported by the housing portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 is mainly formed.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG.
41 side (see FIG. 85).

The drive unit 15960 is disposed in a space between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 9 pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964.
65.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. ) and a guide portion 15962b protruding toward the center.

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e and formed in a gate shape when viewed from the front, and a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e. 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)
), a second arm portion 15962j located on the other side of the pair of arm portions 15962e in the direction of gravity and projecting from the wall portion 962f, and the second arm portion sandwiching the wall portion 962f. 159
62j and a third arm portion 15962h protruding on the opposite side of 62j.

The arm portions 15962e extend from the opposite wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the rear base 941.
side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is bent to the other side in the direction of gravity (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side). In addition, the arm 15962e protrudes in the gravitational direction below the side wall 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed to be connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of opposing arms 962e. Also, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the second arm portion 15962
j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravitational direction is smaller than the dimension between the side walls 981b of the sorting unit 980 facing each other in the gravitational direction.
are inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

In addition, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set such that the outer distance in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance between the side walls 981b facing each other in the horizontal direction. As a result, when disposing the sorting unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning hole unit 930, the side wall portion 981b
Positioning can be performed by arranging the second arm portion 15962j inside the .

The third arm portion 15962h is set so that the distance dimension between the opposing arms 15962h is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arms 15962e. Further, the second arm portion 1 is attached to the third arm portion 15962h.
A protruding portion 15962h1 connected to the rear base 941 side end of 5962j is formed.

The projecting portion 15962h1 extends from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the rear base 941 (FIG. 85).
reference) side is set to be substantially the same as the dimension of the recess of the second recess 942c1. In addition, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed cutout portion 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined.
It is placed inside 2c1.

Therefore, the upstream end portion of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the rolling contact surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b is
Since the positions are different in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the steps on the bottom side and the timing at which the game balls pass through the steps on the side can be made different. Therefore,
Since the game ball is prevented from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface side and the steps on the side surface side at the same time, and the influences of these are dispersed, the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly accordingly.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both positioning of the front unit 940 and positioning of the sorting unit 980. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily allow size effects or installation tolerances.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball feeding portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment described above, the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second concave cutout portion 942c1 of the second ball feeding portion 942c. The projection 16942c2 of the side wall portion 16981b is a recessed portion 1698
It is placed inside 1b2. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, Fig. 13
4(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 according to the fifteenth embodiment has a standing front end surface that faces the winning opening unit when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. 93
0 of the second ball feeding portion 16942c.

In addition, the side wall portion 16981b has a recessed cutout portion 16981 that is recessed on the standing proximal end side of the standing distal end surface.
b2. The recess 16981b2 is formed at a position radially separated from the game ball in the direction of gravity from the rolling surface 981c1, and its recessed shape when viewed from the side is the shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball feeding portion 16942c which will be described later. is set to be substantially the same as

As a result, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. In addition, from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981 of the through hole 981c
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to c1 will be given later.

In addition, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the side wall portion 16
The inner surface of the standing proximal end side of 981b is inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be prevented from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the recessed end face of the recessed cutout 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game ball, the game ball that collides with the recessed end face of the recessed cutout 16981b2 can be pressed against the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface). Therefore, recessed cutout 1698
It is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced and bounced by the recessed tip surface of 1b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball feeding portion 16942c, and its outer shape in a side view is set to be substantially the same as that of the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is placed on the recessed portion 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. It is possible to suppress being caught inside. As a result, the rolling surface 98 of the sorting unit 980 from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down) to 1c1.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the rolling surface 9
Since the upstream end of 81c1 is formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side face side can be made different. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

Furthermore, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is located downstream in the rolling direction of the game ball.
is formed, and the projection 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the side downstream end of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the bottom downstream end of the rolling portion 943a are brought close to the side upstream end and the bottom upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. can be done. That is, the upstream side end of the second ball feeding portion 942c is the rolling portion 94
3a, the second ball-throwing portion 942c is positioned until the game ball reaches the side upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. A game ball can be guided by the projection 16942c2. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may be broken.
According to the embodiment, since the projection 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side of the passage direction of the game ball, even if the projection 16942c2 is broken, the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the side surface are connected to the upstream end of the game ball. A state in which the positions are differentiated in the passing direction can be maintained, and the timing at which the game ball passes through the steps on the bottom side and the timing at which the game balls pass through the steps on the side can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time, and the influence of these is dispersed, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes) accordingly.
can be made

In addition, since the projection 16942c2 is formed on the prize-winning unit 930 side and the concave cutout 16981b2 is formed on the sorting unit 980 side, the concave cutout 1698 is formed on the projection 16942c2.
By abutting the side surface of 1b2, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the sorting unit 980 to the upper side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling portion 943a. That is, at the step where the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is easily bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the reverse step, it is easy to hinder the smooth downflow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b can be prevented from being displaced upward in the gravity direction with respect to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball feeding portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the end of the second recessed cutout portion 942c1 of the second ball feeding portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. , but in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball feeding portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined when viewed from the side. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. In addition, Fig. 13
4(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a tip surface 1798
1b3 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the proximal side to the distal side. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball feeding portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 has a protruding tip surface 1
7942c3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a.
In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball-throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b in the state where the prize-winning unit 930 and the ball-throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. are placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. (sixth embodiment), the side wall portion 1798
A game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of 1b can be slid along the slope to make it difficult to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

In addition, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having the recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. , the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (hollow portion) of the injection molding mold can be moderated, so air bubbles (air entrapment) and insufficient filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. can be improved.

135-137, displacement member 1896 in the seventeenth embodiment
6 will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 has been described. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entered from the winning hole 140. - 特許庁In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment when viewed from the back, and Figure 135(b) is a schematic view of Figure 135(a). CX
It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line XXVb-CXXXVb. Figure 136
(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). Figure 137(b) is CXXXVIIb-C of Figure 137(a)
It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line XXXVIIb.

135 shows the closed state of the pair of feather members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of feather members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of feather members 945 forcibly opened. The states are illustrated. 135(a), 136(a) and 137(a)
, only the pair of feather members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning port 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b) and 137(b), only a pair of feather members 945, rear base 941, front base 943, displacement member 18966, transmission member 19958 and solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. be.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a substantially L-shaped bending shape when viewed from the rear, and includes a non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the direction of gravity and a non-transmission portion 18966a6 thereof.
The transmission part 18 is bent and extends from the lower end of the 8966a6 in the gravity direction toward the center in the left-right direction.
966a7.

Further, the displacement member 18966 has the through hole 966c1 arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity when the pair of feather members 945 are closed. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the game ball passing through the second winning hole 140
3a can be restricted from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is provided with a blade portion 1896g that slopes toward the front side as it goes downward on the inner peripheral edge of the through hole 966c1 on the upper side in the gravitational direction. The front side of the blade portion 1896g abuts against the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second ball feeding portion 942c. Namely
In a rear view, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the seventeenth embodiment, the rotational range of the distal end portion 965a side is set larger than that in the first embodiment when the solenoid 961 is driven. Namely
The displacement dimension in the gravitational direction on the side of the tip portion 965a is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896
g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the opening of the second winning opening 140 can be arranged inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in a rear view.

Further, when the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the projection 945b slides inside the slide groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 and then slides inside the transmitting portion 18966a7. In this case, the non-transmitting portion 18966
and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same.
slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 without changing its position relative to the rear base 942 when sliding the non-transmitting portion 18966a6. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second winning hole 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling portion 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of feather members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusions 945b of the feather members 945 slide on the transmission portion 18966a7, and the feather members 945 are rotated. In this case, as described above, the displacement member 18966 has a blade portion 18966g that extends from the second winning opening 140.
, and the side surface on the front side is in contact with the protruding tip of the rolling part 943a and the protruding tip of the second ball feeding part 942c, so that it displaces downward in the direction of gravity. As a result, between the blade portion 18966g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball feeding portion 942c,
A biasing object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning hole 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position to open the pair of feather members 945 to the position to close it, the displacement member 18966 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning port 140, The edge of the passage (the rolling part 943a and the second ball feeding part 942
Since the blade part 18966g is provided in frictional contact with the end part of c), it is possible to cut the urging object illegally inserted from the second winning hole 140 into the passage where the game ball is.

For example, the tip of a string is attached to a game ball, and the game ball is made to enter from the second winning hole 140, and passed through the rolling part 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), the other end of the string is manipulated (pulled out, drawn) to cause the game ball to reciprocate, causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the seventeenth embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered in a state where the feather member 945 is opened, the displacement member 18966 is slid, and when the blade portion 18966g crosses the path of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the blade portion 189 cuts the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball.
When 18966g is displaced together with 66g and pressed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second ball-throwing portion 942c, and 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball-throwing portion 942c, 1
The thread can be cut between 8966g and the rolling portion 943a or the edge of the second ball feeding portion 942c. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusions 945b of the pair of feather members 945 are cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the displacement member 18966
through-hole 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. This allows the player to use the pair of feather members 9
45 is forcibly opened, the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 .

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is connected to the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 9).
4), the tip portion 18965a side is urged in the direction of being displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction to block the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 are forcibly opened by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened as well. As a result, cheating by the player can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower restricting portion 175 and the upper restricting portion 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or in the rotation axis direction (when the driven member 163 is displaced). It may be arranged so as to face the driven member 163 in the direction intersecting the plane where the driven member 163 is driven.
In this case, a frictional force is generated between the driven member 163 and the driven member 1 by the frictional force.
63 can be slowed down.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lower restricting portion 175 and the upper restricting portion 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, at least one of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 is the driven member 163 .
When the driven member 163 needs to be decelerated, it is arranged to face the driven member 163 in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and at other timings, the driven member 163 may be configured to be retracted outside the displacement trajectory. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment described above, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 has been described, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven member 163 may be arranged at a position overlapping the driven member 163 when viewed in the displacement direction, or the upper regulation portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation shaft side of the driven member 163 than the lower regulation portion 175 is. Also good.

Further, the lower restricting portion 175 and the upper restricting portion 176 are not limited to being disposed on the left and right sides of the rotation shaft of the driven member 163, and one of the lower restricting portion 175 and the upper restricting portion 176 is disposed on the left side and the other is disposed on the left side. may be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 applies an electromagnetic force in the direction of pulling up the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force to push it up. Further, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163. FIG.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the light emitting means 181 is composed of LEDs has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a miniature light bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display screen may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the vibration transmission to the decorative board 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the decorative board 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, instead of closing the gap, the area between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electrical board 180 may be filled with a high-attenuation resin member. In this case, the transmission of vibration can be suppressed while narrowing the arrangement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electrical board 180 .

Conversely, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the electrical board 180 may be narrowed, and the filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote transmission of vibration to the decorative board 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 fluctuates in accordance with the vibration of the decorative board 180. can.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a punched metal having a plurality of through holes may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is configured in a thin plate shape has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the layout of the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front, it is possible to avoid the plate portion of the electrical board 180 from being visually recognized while exposing the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the lifting plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an endless gear belt may be used for transmission, or a cam mechanism may be used for transmission.

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or may have a rotation angle width only in one of the vertical directions with respect to the horizontal.

In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole portion 406 is a long hole in the horizontal direction has been described.
It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a long hole extending obliquely with respect to the horizontal direction, a curved long hole, or a long hole having a portion extending in the vertical direction may be used. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the pair of feather members 460 are in contact with each other to form a symmetrical shape, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a slight gap may be provided from the design stage. As compared with the case where the wing-like members 460 are in contact with each other, this makes it possible to eliminate the fatigue accumulated in the wing-like members 460 due to their contact.
60 durability can be increased. It should be noted that the pattern formed on the back side of the gap and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be visible to the player through the gap.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement amounts and the displacement speeds of the pair of feather members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adjusting the gear ratio by changing the size of the arc-shaped gear 462 of the wing-shaped member 460 on the left and right sides, the pair of wing-shaped members 460
may be configured to have different displacement amounts and displacement speeds. As a result, the pair of feather members 460
Even if the shapes of the sides that contact each other are left-right symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be shifted from the left-right center position.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the feather members 460 are visually symmetrical when in contact, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, most parts may be bilaterally symmetrical, but partially different. For example, the shape may be partially asymmetrical, the pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the wing-shaped members 460 are bilaterally symmetrical, the player can be made to think that the wing-shaped members 460 constitute a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case in which the mutually abutting feather members 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of feather-shaped members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction and come into contact with each other. In this case, in comparison with the shape of the rear case 310, the left wing-shaped member 460 can be formed to have a larger area than the right wing-shaped member 460. FIG.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wing-like members 460 that are supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the feather-like member 460 and a constant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape when viewed from the front. As a result, the feather-like member 4
Since the player can visually recognize the shape completed with only 60 and the shape completed with other predetermined members and the wing-like member 460, the presentation effect of the wing-like member 460 can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, the light emitting member LA1, the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are used to evoke the concept of "shellfish and pearls", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the luminous effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole hit into a wall, and the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured in a shape representing the momentum of the bullet. In this case, the shape of the feather-shaped member 460 can be used, and the light emitting member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 can be decorated or configured with different members having different shapes. That is, since a part of the members can be reused to configure a new operation unit, the development cost can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slidably displaced in the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 444 of the auxiliary arm member 444
d may be configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed position, and the lift plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable along an arcuate track centered on this axis.

Further, in the case where the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be fixedly arranged and pivotally supported, the lifting plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left and right direction so that the displacement of the circular arc gear portion 444b in the left and right direction can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing biasing means or an electromagnetic solenoid that biases the relative displacement member 442 toward the arc-shaped gear portion 444b in the left-right direction, the engagement between the arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

The arcuate gear portion 444b may be made of a flexible resin material such as that used in gear belts, instead of being made of a highly rigid resin material. In this case, deformation of the material can absorb lateral displacement of the arc-shaped gear portion 444b.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the window section defined in the central portion of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 has a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inner shape of the center frame 86 may be left-right asymmetrical in accordance with the size relationship of the feather members 460 . As a result, it is possible to provide the game board 13 with a function of hiding the rear side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical board 777 is arranged on the rear side of the light transmitting hole 60c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical board 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow-down surface forming member 91 can be brought close to each other. It is possible to execute an effect that causes (waves).

In other words, the portion that is displaced by driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operation unit 700 and is visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window section defined by the center frame 86 but also outside the window section. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the concave portions of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 777 are arranged below and to the left and right of the game area has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of game balls, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, may be arranged below the outer rail 62, or may be arranged inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You can

In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed from a resin material (high-rigidity resin material) with little bending has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be made of a rubbery resin material. In this case, the elastic deformation of the partition member 708 can bring the partition member 708 into close contact with the electrical board 705 and the thin film cover member 712, thereby preventing light leakage.

In the first embodiment, the distance between the position where the left and right load members 761 contact the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the reference O1 is the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged in front of the reference O1. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the left and right, the load member 7
61 may contact the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance from the reference O1 may be different,
The left and right load members 761 may be arranged differently with respect to the reference O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by displacing the load member 761 toward the front side, the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 may be configured in a positional relationship in which they abut. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced to the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 , the load applied from the front lid member 770 can return the position of the load member 761 to the rear side.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the left and right drive units 760 have substantially symmetrical shapes has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the ease of bending of the load members 761 can be changed by (locally) changing the density, thickness, or material of the vertical rod-shaped extensions 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. As a result, the left and right drive units 76
When 0 is the one-sided excitation state, the stopping posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be changed depending on whether the left or right drive unit 760 is driven. That is, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
The postures that can stop 30 can be increased.

Note that even if the left and right drive units 760 are left and right substantially symmetrical, the shape of the load receiving portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made left-right asymmetrical (for example, the load receiving portion 733 on one side can A similar effect can be obtained by providing an extra thickness on the lower bottom side of the .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-like displacement member 730 may be configured to be vertically displaced while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. Thus, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is easily bent and a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is difficult to bend.

In the above-described first embodiment, the projecting portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be assembled by fastening, engaging, fitting, inserting, sandwiching, or the like. may be configured separately. In this case, even if the projecting portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c can be reused, and only the projecting portion 761d needs to be replaced. In comparison, the size of maintenance members can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are the plate-shaped displacement member 7.
Although the case of positional deviation in the direction of the rotation axis of 30 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. FIG.

In this case, the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The change in the distance between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is measured by the hollow member 740.
It can be used to change the holding force of the hollow member 740 instead of changing the posture of the hollow member 740 .

That is, the gap between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed by increasing the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It can be used for sandwiching from. Therefore, it is possible to change the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

In this case, the clearance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the projecting columnar portion 743 and the clearance between the rear small receiving portion 735b and the projecting columnar portion 743 may be configured to be the same. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743 similarly increases, the posture of the hollow member 740 is lower than in the case where the side with the larger clearance is allowed to rotate about the side with the smaller clearance. Change can be easily suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portions 735 for supporting the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are arranged on the plate-like displacement member 730 separately before and after the reference O1 has been described.
It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be collectively arranged on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-like displacement member 730 may be configured to be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove elongated in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction. In this case, the slope of the front small receiving portion 735a and the slope of the rear small receiving portion 735b are provided on opposite sides with respect to the sliding direction. The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pivotally supported by the left-right direction shaft and displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a rotatable manner (for example, supported by a ball joint) on the longitudinal axis.

In addition, the plate main body of the plate-like displacement member 730 (
A long plate extending in the left-right direction may be supported so as to be mounted as a separate body. in this case,
Depending on the driving mode of the drive unit 760, the plate main body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be caused to undergo a combined displacement of the rotation of the left-right axis and the rotation of the front-rear axis.

Further, the shaft supporting portion may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is elongated in the vertical direction so that the supported portion 731 of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be displaced in the vertical direction. In this case, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
In addition to the rotational movement of 0, the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right supported parts 731 compared to the other (corresponding to the rotational displacement about the axis in the front-back direction)
can also be generated, the displacement modes of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 accompanying the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

In the first embodiment described above, the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a core extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to pass through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes as the load member 761 is displaced. (It may be configured so that the core material is pulled out). In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes depending on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent in accordance with the rigidity change.

In the above-described second embodiment, a case has been described in which one of the portions that decelerate the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, driven member 16
Both of the parts that decelerate 3 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the decelerating portions (the lower restricting portion 175 and the upper restricting portion 176) may be made of the same member.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the biasing spring SP21 does not directly contact the driven member 163 but applies the biasing force via the contact member 2190 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the biasing spring SP21 may be configured to directly contact the driven member 163 .

In this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the biasing spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be set arbitrarily. For example, a plurality of contact points may be provided between the (single or plural) biasing spring SP21 and the driven member 163, and the contact points may be arranged on the rotating shaft side and the rotating tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. They may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment, by extending the shape of the long hole portion 3406 in the displacement direction of the elevating plate 430, a section is formed in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the elevating plate 430. , the case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in that section is cut off has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sliding portion (angular region in which the gear teeth do not mesh) is provided between the circular arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441, and even if the circular-shaped gear portion 444b rotates, the rotary gear 441 does not rotate. may be configured to block the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 .

In the third embodiment, the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the rotating gear 3441 with arm. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the armed rotary gear 3441 is not a gear having gear teeth formed on the entire circumference, but is partially formed with a protruding portion so as to function as a cam, and the protruding portion applies a load to the relative displacement member 442. The relative displacement member 442 may be displaced by In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the projecting portion of the rotary gear 3441 with arm and the relative displacement member 442 .

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured to detect the thin overhanging portion 4761g which is a part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick projecting portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjusting member 5782 extends upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the adjustment member 5782 may be configured to protrude forward from the rear side of the load member 761 .

Also, for example, an opening is formed in the inner side of the load member 761, and the adjustment member 578 is inserted into the opening.
2 may enter and function as a core. In this case, the ease of bending of the load member 761 can be changed according to the degree of entry of the adjusting member 5782 .

In the first and fifth embodiments, the load member 761 is the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
Although the case of being driven by is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving device that drives the load member 761 may be configured by a motor such as a DC motor. As a result, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to a momentary driving mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the projection 945b is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the feather member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed to have an irregular shape when viewed from the rear or the slide groove 966a2 is formed to be curved, the protrusion 945b slides in the slide groove 966a2, thereby causing the inner wall of the slide groove 966a2 and the protrusion to slide. 945b changes. Therefore, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 94
5b, the protrusion 945b is more likely to move by the amount of the gap, and the feather member 945 is more likely to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a when the blade member 945 is opened and closed.
2 and the projection 945b can always be kept constant. Therefore, rattling of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the slide groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extension length of the slide groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening that accompanies the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2, and to improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG.

In the sixth embodiment, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other
Although a case has been described in which the screws screwed together are used to fasten and fix the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning hole unit 950 and the front unit 940 .

In the sixth embodiment, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detecting devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape.
It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape that expands in diameter as it separates from the entrance member 953 toward the passage member 955 side.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, etc., the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer periphery of the annular projection 953c. Wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by laterally displacing (slipping) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) (in a direction away from the axis of annular projection 953c in the radial direction).

In the sixth embodiment, the game area (front) of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980
Although the case where the side is visually recognized by the player has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this,
A sticker displaying information consisting of characters or figures may be attached to the game area (front) side of the sorting unit 980 .

In this case, the ball throwing path TR0, the first path TR1 and the second path TR of the sorting unit 980
Information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed on the game area (front) side of 2, so even if the sorting unit 980 is visually recognized through the front unit 940 (winning unit 930), the display can be used as a mark ( As a reference position), the position of the sorting unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player. The form of information display is not limited to attachment of a sticker, and printing with ink, two-color formation, or the like may be used.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is replaced by the first member 11967 and the second member 11
968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed in the second member 11968 having a greater amount of displacement than the first member 11967, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 is formed from one member, and the one member (the displacement member 1196
6) The amount of displacement by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is projected from the body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
When the pair of feather members 945 are in the closed state, power may be applied to the body portion 961a so that the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is drawn inside the body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. Drive unit 960 (solenoid 6
10) can be performed using the electromagnetic force. That is, since the displacement of the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 in the cutting direction (the sandwiching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut the illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the body portion 961a and the ring portion 961 of the drive unit 960
The coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the coil spring SP1 and the main body portion 961a. Although the case of being drawn into the portion 961a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in a stretched state between the main body portion 961a and the ring portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. You may displace in a direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut the illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times), including the pachinko machine (commonly known as double-rights and triple-rights). ) may be implemented. Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, arepachi, majang balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixed display is performed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of stopping is a specific one. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever,
For example, due to the operation of a stop button or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player on the lower receiving tray. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 138 to 181, an eighteenth embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 138 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth embodiment, FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 138, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 138). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 139) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 141) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 138). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 138). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 138).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 139) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball is lent according to the operation. done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 that are operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills (not shown), and rails 61. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 138). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 138). Mainly referring to FIG. 139, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 141) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 139) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 139) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 139). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only is it indicated whether the result of the lottery is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning).
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 141), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
A part of the third symbol display device 81 may light up the symbol reserve lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, through gate 67
is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Also, the first pattern display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls on hold, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 141), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (Refer to FIG. 141), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first prize winning port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning hole 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6
It will be in a state where it is easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. It is better to shoot the ball (so-called "right shot"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim to win a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640. , to the player's advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 148) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 140, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seals are made of a brittle material.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forced to open, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 141). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 141, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 390) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes
Payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, opening and closing driving to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1
11 but not connected to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 81.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in . Also, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, power failure (
It judges that the power failure, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111, NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

142 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 138).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 144).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

Fig. 143(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 143(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of Fig. 143(a), Fig. 144(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 144(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144(a).

143 and 144 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that FIG. 143 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (the initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 144, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of "press button") appears on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's viewpoint will be described. 145 is a front perspective view of operation device 300 viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 143, and FIG. 146 is a front perspective view of operation device 300 viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 145 and 146, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 146, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i gradually increases in the process of changing from the first state to the second state. 149) is visually recognized gradually, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of brightness) increases, and the difference between the first state and the second state increases. , the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 144) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. Thus (by rotating around the wrist), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 147, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

149 is a front exploded perspective view of operation device 300, and FIG. 150 is a rear exploded perspective view of operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the back side end of the page of FIG. 149), A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 An upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a driving device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the left-right direction and the rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of the tilting device 310, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, which is the tilting device 310. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal It is mainly provided with an opening 325 which is an opening formed by cutting a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. be.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, detection holes 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right and an insertion hole 321c drilled symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . In addition, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG. 154(b)), the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is wider than the vertical width from the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 149 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 147) such that the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 . As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . Disk cams 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove of 53R.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases detectable by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. FIG. 151(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 151(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 151(a), and FIG. FIG. 151(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 151(a). 152 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 153 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and a mode in which the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. , a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and a ring-shaped ring for fixing the case body 311 and the lid 312 indivisibly at the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312. and a ring member BR1.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left and right detection pieces 311gL and right detection pieces 311gR (see FIG. 152) extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, and an extension extending from the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player, the bottom plate portion 311a is supported by the lower frame member 3.
20 is a portion that abuts on the bottom plate portion 321 of the member 20. FIG.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 154(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340. Prepare.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL is about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 159) to the push end (see FIG. 159). 160)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extending portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 151(a)) and a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 151(c)). The structure is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhang projecting portion 311j projects perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 166 ), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321 a and the tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 153, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 143).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 143), because of its positional relationship, the cylindrical member 312c directs the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 into a cylindrical shape. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 144), such limitation is lifted and the light from the LED device 341f can be applied over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. FIG. 154(a) is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 154(b) is a side view of the driving device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 154(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-like sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second A release member 346 that abuts on the projecting portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary pawl member 347 that is coaxially and pivotally supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary pawl member 347 is tilted downward. A first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of releasing, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. and a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shaped motor housing portion 3 when viewed from above.
41a and a shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the opposing plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and which supports the disc cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a motor A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and has a portion that refracts light (
part that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is positioned inside the motor accommodating portion 341a in the U-shape.
A fixing member 342a is provided which is fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 152) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345b is formed so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 156 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 155) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly provide

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
43c is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 while forming unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface that faces the transmission gear 343b. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 degrees at the top.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. As a result, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 155).

In addition, the movable clutch 343c is normally engaged with the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2 so as to move away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. description of the right disk cam 344R is omitted.

157(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 155, and FIG. 157(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 157(a) and 157(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 157(a) and 157(b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disk, and is positioned at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. An engaging rib 344c projecting inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and having two radially outward projecting portions, and an outer rib between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d projecting in the direction of a cylinder and connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 155), and a detection hole 344eL drilled in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross-section whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 156), and whose outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 155). Configured. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 155) when the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 projects radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c3 extends at an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20°), and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 159). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

158(a) and 158(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 158(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 rotates with respect to the releasing member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 158(b) shows the releasing member 346. A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 172).

As shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 158(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is configured to be able to abut against the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 157) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). In the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. An elongated guide hole 347b is drilled along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the pin 346b), and the end of the second spring SP2. a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a; and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 155). Mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 158(a), the releasing member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotating claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 158(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 158(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

159 to 161 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a). 159 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 160 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 160 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 160 to the first state. 159 to 161 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly hitting the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 159, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG. As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 159).

In the state shown in FIG. 159, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 148).

As shown in FIG. 160, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 160) by about 3°. In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 159 and the state shown in FIG. 160 are alternately repeated. is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 161, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This will
A player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 167, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. Figures 162 to 167 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of Figure 143(a).

162 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 163, the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 164 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 166 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 165, and FIG. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. is illustrated. 165 shows the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 164 with imaginary lines, and FIG. 166 shows an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 in imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 162, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 163, from the state shown in FIG. 162 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 163). direction), the first protruding portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 presses down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 163). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The change in posture of the release member 346 causes the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d until the disc cam 344 rotates until it faces 6d, during which time the tilting device 310 rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 163).

162 and 163, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 164, when the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164) and the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, By the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 164). 162). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 164). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 163 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be emitted in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the lighting effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 165, from the state shown in FIG. 164, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 165), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( 165), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 165), so that the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Figure 162). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 166, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 165, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 165, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 166) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hooked portion 347d. Return to engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down shown in FIG. 165, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310. .

In the state shown in FIG. 166, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the lifting of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 161), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the end position of the push-in is to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 167, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves from the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of
As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 167, from the state shown in FIG. 166, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (reverse in FIG. The driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it clockwise) by a predetermined amount.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

166, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 166) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reverse rotation is performed. 166 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction to push up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 can be rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 166) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 171, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

168 to 171 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a). 168, disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 169 shows a state where the disk cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 168 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state, and FIG. 171 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 170 to the end position. 170, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 169 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 171, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 168, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 169, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 170, from the state shown in FIG. 169, the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169), and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction ( 169), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 170, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 170), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 170).

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 170 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, two types of vertical motions (tilting motions), namely, the vertical motion shown in FIG. 165 and the vertical motion shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after releasing the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation each time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 170, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 170, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 170, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 171) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310 so that the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hooked portion 347d. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 171) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174, the operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotary pawl member 347 after the pushing operation by the player will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

172 to 174 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a). 172 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 172) and the release member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 173, after the rotating cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) beyond the state shown in FIG. 174, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 172 to 174, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 171) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. It stops, and the rotary pawl member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

172, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 172) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

172, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 172), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 172), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 151) is controlled to stop the rotation of the disc cam 344 (stop the driving of the drive motor 342) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned ON.

In the state shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the player's hand is placed above the tilting device 310 so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward. A change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 172 to 174, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 155) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 176 is a partial cross-sectional view of manipulation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 175, the player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 176 shows the upper member of the body cover 351. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutches 343b2 and 343c2 are driven. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°).
20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while displaying, for example, a display on the third pattern display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case in which the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify the user to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first state, it can be specified that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. By resetting the initial phase, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are adjusted again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
This rotation control prevents the tilting device 310 from being displaced from the movement that the tilting device 310 is actually to perform. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 176, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

Figures 177, 178, 179 and 180 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of Figure 143(a). 177 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. 179 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 178, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CCW, tilting device 310 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 177 and moves toward the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 179 to the state shown in FIG. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, from FIG. 175 to the first state shown in FIG. 177 and FIG. is a different operation from either FIG. 178 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176), but the drive sound caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be changed. Due to the difference in change, the player will notice the mode of the control being performed, and the player will grasp the effect that will be executed from now on, which may diminish the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the driving motor 342, the load on the driving motor 342 increases, and the durability of the driving motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. Since only the direction is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 rotates, the player can confirm whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, it is possible for the player to understand the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 175) and is moved toward the first state by the driving motor 342. can be directed to watch over

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 181, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs the motion of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third motion mode). explain.

FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143(a). 181 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 181) by a predetermined amount from the first initial state (see FIG. 162) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 181) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

As shown in FIG. 181, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, it is possible to reciprocate the tilting device 310 up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 181) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 can be operated in the manner shown in FIG. In the vertical movement, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves to the first state (rotation). It is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310 and the vertical motion is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG.

182(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the nineteenth embodiment, FIG. 182(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 182(c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

183(a) and 183(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide nail member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide nail member 2348. FIG. .

FIG. 183(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the long guide hole 347b). state) (see FIG. 185).

As shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 184) includes a releasing member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and a rotating member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 184). and a slide claw member 2348 arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 interposed therebetween and configured to be slidable along an arc track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 184). , is mainly provided. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions as in the eighteenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b protruding in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 182), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 184(a)). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted to 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the eighteenth embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 183), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348d moves into the function slot 23
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding motion of the slide claw member 2348, and a long support hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 183 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the long support hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the projecting pin 2348d is inserted through the long support hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g. wobble can be suppressed.

The releasing member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 183, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. slide to move.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the releasing member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide pawl member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first circular arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along the circular arc centering on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. No movement. Therefore, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 184 to 186 are diagrams showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a). 184 shows a state in which the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 185 shows the state shown in FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 184) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. 185 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 184, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 exerts a large load on the slide claw member 2348 because the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the change in posture of the tilting device 2310. you will not be

As shown in FIG. 185, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 185). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 185) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the eighteenth embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

185, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by lifting the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the tilting device 2310 and the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising. 185, the player's hand is lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 187 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 187, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the eighteenth embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left detection piece 311gL in the eighteenth embodiment.

188(a) and 188(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. FIG. 188(a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 188(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 188(a) and 188(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. None (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

189(a) and 189(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG. 189(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 189(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. . 188(a) and 188(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 189(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 189(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Collision of the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up can provide a load for lifting the tilting device 3310 more effectively than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155), the upward speed of the tilting device 3310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 190 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 190, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 191) provided on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This portion is for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 191(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 191(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. It is shown passing down sensor 4321e. 191(a) and 191(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines, while each detection Sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 191(a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 191(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detecting piece 4311k detects the upper detecting sensor 4321d and the lower detecting sensor 4321d. 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the interval between the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 protrudes below the lower frame member 4320. Then, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that it is pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310 .

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is tilted while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
and the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

192(a) and 192(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. Note that FIG. 192(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 192(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

192(a) and 192(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 192(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 192(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 192(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 192(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation that repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 193 to 205, an operation device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment will be described.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit vibrations to the player pushing the tilting device 310. , a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 194 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, an operation device 5300 has a lower frame member 320 as a lower frame member 5320 and a drive device 5340 as a drive device 5340, unlike the operation device 300 in the eighteenth embodiment. Along with this, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350 . The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured similarly to those of the eighteenth embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

195 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 195, the vibration device 5400 contains a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a sector-shaped weight member 5412, the transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. and a flexible member 5420 formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, which accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in a partitioned manner, and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 and .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintaining portion 5423 in which fixing portion 5411a is embedded
and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the body portion 5421 in the form of a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the tilting angle of the flexible member 54.
The resolution of the 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

The accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in the assembled state.
412 are accommodated in the second accommodation portion 5432, and the first accommodation portion 5431 and the second accommodation portion 5
A groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connection surface of 432 is mainly provided.

The depth of the first receiving portion 5431 is increased by the flexible member 54 until the lower rib leg 5422 bottoms out.
20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

196(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 196(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 196(a), and FIG. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 196(a). In addition, in FIG. 196(a), a portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Also, in FIG. 196(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player pushes three degrees from the first state, The end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position of the push, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193).

As shown in FIG. 196(b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembly load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 196(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting legs 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 196(b)) when pushed. 196(b), the projecting leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 196(b).

As shown in FIG. 196(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a pair of through holes 5321d into which the projecting leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 196(b)) together with the projecting leg portion 5424 .

197(a) and 197(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 196(a). Note that FIG. 197(a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 197(b) shows the protruding leg portion 5424 when the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 196(a)). The assembled load state after being pushed inwardly of the first receiving portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load-released state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the projecting legs 5424 and the lower rib-shaped legs are placed. As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 197(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 194). Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 194), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the upper end, see FIG. 175) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 197(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430 . This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 197(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Constructed in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced horizontally from the central axis at uniform intervals. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, when the flexible members 5420 move downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like leg portions 5422 move to the left and right outward (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portions 5422). 197(b)). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. can be effectively absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

198(a) and 198(b) are cross-sectional views of transmission device 5410 and housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 196(a).

Figures 198(a) and 198(b) show the assembly load state, Figure 198(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and Figure 198 ( In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. 198(a) and 198(b) show the vibration device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

In other words, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 moves toward the second accommodation portion 543 .
2 abuts (rubs). Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 198(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward (along the movement direction of the tilting device 310). direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By combining the generated forces, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 during the period from when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424 until it moves toward the termination region S52 (see FIG. 196(a)). , and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 194), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) is tilted by the difference in detection timing. ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 provides the tilting device 310 with a It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so that it assumes a downward posture (see FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the lowering end of the driving motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotary shaft is raised by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 . As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 198(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 198(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 generates a force to push back the tilting device 310 by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 198(a)). It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 198(a) and 198(b), the weight member 5412 is activated only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the eighteenth embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the eighteenth embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

199 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 200(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 200(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the eighteenth embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R is separated from the disc portion by the circular rib 344 at its center position.
A support cylinder P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetric long hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder P1 to a position about half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and an axial end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion side along the axial direction. and a pair of holding arms A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the elongated concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 199). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arms A1 are arranged in a direction (
longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The holding arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
It has an engagement projection A1a projecting in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement protrusion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the circular arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 201). As a result, the radial overlap length (Fig. 202 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a side surface of the right disc cam 5344R on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction, and a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement protrusion A1a can be completed on the side of the support cylinder portion P1 (lower side in FIG. 200(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 202(b). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 200(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a, the length by which the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is determined by the e-ring. can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 202(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 201 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. FIG. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the eighteenth embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 across the , and a disc cam 534 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which is formed by the e-ring.
4 and the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a engages, is mainly provided. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

When the diameter is uniform, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 199) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is used to adjust the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

Due to the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 described above, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disk cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. It is inserted from the opposite end to the position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusions A1a are inserted into the engagement grooves 5343a4 to a position where the engagement protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them is increased. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 202(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. FIG.

FIG. 202(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and FIG. FIG. 202(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 202(a). 203(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and FIG. 203(b) is a right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 203(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

Note that FIG. 203 illustrates the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 202 and 203, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202(c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend along the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected. , the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a against axial tilting displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly pushes down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 199)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so as shown in FIGS. 203(a) and 203(b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 202(a).

204(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 204(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 204(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 204(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R, which is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343, is shown in solid lines, and the shaft is tilted due to an overload. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 204(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 204(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 204(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 204(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the arm member 345 is pivotally supported by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to be axially tilted in order to absorb this displacement.

204(a), the center Pb of the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt of the projecting tip side of the connecting pin 344d form a right circular shape. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 199), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 204(b), when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed, the disk cam 5344 and the releasing member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 204(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 205), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the releasing member 346 and the rotating pawl member 347 . In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disc cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of any of the second springs SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is displaced from the arm member 345). It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 205(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 205(b) is an operation viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 205(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. It should be noted that illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted in FIG. 205(b). In addition, in FIG. 205(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 205(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 199) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disc cam 5344R is pressed regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. , the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 204(b) and 205(b), according to this embodiment, the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 199) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the eighteenth embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven during the period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated. An overload is detected because the input to 353R does not change.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs before the occurrence of overload is detected.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that overload detection is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 203(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, there is a method using an informing device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 203(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated (see FIG. 202(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 202(b)). 203(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210, an operation device 6300 in the 23rd embodiment will be described.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. FIG.

206 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. 207 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. The configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the eighteenth embodiment, but since the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L, the left disc cam 6344L will be explained. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206, this embodiment differs from the eighteenth embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL as in the 18th embodiment, and includes a disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a, and the disc member 6344L1. It includes a disk member 6344L1 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the ring member 6344L2.

The disc member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the eighteenth embodiment arranged at the center of the disc portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g formed of a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the eighteenth embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

It should be noted that the end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of revolutions of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in a mode in which 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The auxiliary column member 6348 is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear fixed to its auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and the ring member 63
and a deceleration transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to Figs. 208 to 210, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is configured to have a plurality of types of lifting motions after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotating claw member 347. Figs.

Figures 208, 209, and 210 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of Figure 143(a). 208 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 173, and FIG. 209 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) by 1/3 rotation. is illustrated. 210 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 209, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

208, the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is moved by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It instantly rises and reaches the second state (see FIG. 171).

In the operation device 300 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released and the tilting device 310 moves upward instantaneously (without waiting for the disk cam 344 to rotate), the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 171).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can be changed, and the types of reachable positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

209, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 210). In this way, when the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 344 rotation) can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 210) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 171) when the degree of expectation is maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed.

Next, an operation device 7300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 222. FIG.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212, the characteristics of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described.

211(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the twenty-fourth embodiment, FIG. 211(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 212(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 212(a), and FIG. 212(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 211(a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 199) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and a disc member 7344R1. and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. and an engaging member 7344R3 having a

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at its center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
and the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member configured with a shape in which the portion between the retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and the first circular recessed portion 7 is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed portion 7420 which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter and axially deeper than the first circular recessed portion 7410, a first projecting portion 344c1, and a first retracting portion 344c2. and an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 formed in the radial direction between them, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430, radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1). and a fixing protrusion 7440 that is protrudingly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
A first elongated hole 7431, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a displaced position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second long hole 74, which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1
32 and the second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
A return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the 32 side is mainly provided.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is direction(
short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 212(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outwardly of the second elongated hole 7432 .

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 213(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 7344R2 is a side view of the ring member 7344R2. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 213(a) to 213(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 212(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 212(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. be able to.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

214(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 214(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 214(a).

As shown in FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 211(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. an arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 214(b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and the extension portion 7620 An engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 214(b)) from the extended distal end of the portion 7620 is disposed on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630. and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension part 7620 is a part inserted through the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension end has an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 212(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 215(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 215(a). 215(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 215(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 215(c), and FIG. 215(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 215(e).

215(a), 215(b), 215(c) and 215(d) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. ) and FIG. 215(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted in FIGS. 215(b), 215(d) and 215(f).

As a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the depth direction of FIG. Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional displacement of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 215(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is forced to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 215(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 215(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 215(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 215(f)) is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

After the engagement member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b) and 218 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. FIG. 216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b), and 218, the releasing member 7346, the rotating pawl member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the other Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the eighteenth embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 217(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the eighteenth embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 217(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b) and 218, the disk cam 744 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 216(a)). are shown in chronological order.

FIG. 216(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts against the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. 217A shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 217(b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 has further rotated backward from the state shown in FIG. 217(a), and FIG. The state after the 7344R rotates backward and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 216(a), 216(b), 217(a) and 217(b), the state ( small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 216(a), immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly projecting state.

As shown in FIG. 216(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 abuts against the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is moved in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. are placed (see FIG. 217(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 217(a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state. From 7346 , a load is applied to the engaging member 7344 R3 to push the engaging member 7344 R3 radially inward of the disk cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 216(b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 217(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 7522 to the different equally divided recessed portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 , and rotates relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 218, when the right disc cam 7344R rotates further, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward. , and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

216(a) through FIG. 218, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

The operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described with reference to FIG. 219(a), 219(b), 220(a) and 220(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. FIG. In FIG. 219, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 219(a) to 220(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 219(a)) in chronological order. FIG. 219(a) shows the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abut against each other, and FIG. FIG. 220(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 219(b), and FIG. (b) shows the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated from each other.

As shown in FIGS. 219(a) to 220(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 219(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. will only be available.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the contact of the engaging member 7344R3 to the releasing member 7346 until it is separated from the releasing member 7346. maintain the protruding state. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 219 and 220), similarly to the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to repeatedly perform an effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width. In the direction of rotation (see FIGS. 216, 217 and 218) that causes relative rotation, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed unlike the eighteenth embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 221) (the posture is kept constant).

As a result, the state in which the player does not pay attention (the state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 221 and 222 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. In FIG. 221, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 can be immediately shifted from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 222 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a displaceable phase relationship, and in FIG. 221 and 222, the state in which the equally divided recessed portion 7522 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one portion is illustrated, and in both FIGS. A contact state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

221, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range) when the fixation is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disk cam 7344) by the upward motion can be varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 316. FIG.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 223) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is the same in the description referring to the drawings before FIG. 223 .

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. FIG. Figure 223 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, Figure 224 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, FIG. 225 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened from the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened from the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 227 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed); FIG. It is a front view of. In FIG. 227, for the sake of convenience, the reference numerals for the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

As shown in FIG. 225, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 224, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 223, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the base end side of the front frame 14 for rotation. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 263) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front and rear sides of the body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 223). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12. - 特許庁Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 226, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and formed into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with double glazing. It is

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 223, a plurality of electrical decoration portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or flash in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, the illumination portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 223, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 in addition to the upper tray 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to enable information input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 229).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 226, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receptacle portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 229), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031 and 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 240) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is drawn rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, if the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 240), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 226). A connector for conductive wiring and a connector whose one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end side of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end side of the rotation.
0 (see FIG. 263) and the upper device in front and rear, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upward extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame . , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 233) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14
The part closest to the rotation base end of the front frame 14) and the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, which is part of the main body frame 14a. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward is provided.

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted into the inverted cup portion 178 and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat generated by the inverted cup portion 178
can pass through the inverted cup portion 178 as well as the elongated cover member 173
will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
The piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot discern it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window part 14c
(until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the front side) and the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply (without making the person who commits the fraud have suspicion that the insertion of the piano wire is not going well). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 227, the ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. A shooting rail 730 for guiding a game ball so as to be shot toward an area in between and a ball feeding device 720 are provided.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 226) onto the launch rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

As shown in FIG. 227, the disc passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper disc passage portion 161 and a main body side lower disc passage portion 162 . One end of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end of the tube is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end. be.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 226) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the disc passage forming member 160 . A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 227, the lower portion of the plate passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 for regulating the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to block outflow of the game balls and a permitting position for permitting the outflow of the game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to main controller 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the sound lamp control device 113. Since the object of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by using a separate board. according to.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 229 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, is the front side of the upper tray 17 and obliquely above the lower tray 50 to the right. An operation device 300 is provided at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a covering cover 370 is provided on the front side of the operation device 300 .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side; Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, a body curved portion 371 and a drooping portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72, is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. A left flat support portion 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right flat support portion 375 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 is supported from the rear side. Mainly provided is a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width is increased (tapered) toward the rear side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 223), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 17 in the front-rear direction, and the front-side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 connected to the rear left edge 371a. A back middle edge portion 371b abuts against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the back middle edge portion 371b is connected to the back left edge portion 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that abuts on the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported.
0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other) to prevent access to the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the drooping portion 372 is positioned closer to the front side than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
By screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. Both are arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 169). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 159), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 169), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then passes through. Pass through part 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 169) to the first state (see FIG. 159), the amount of light is increased (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 159). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 are provided in the upper panel unit 40.
0, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration part 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400 . for that reason,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part that fastens the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. 145 is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction,
Entry beyond 40 can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and back thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 226 and 228, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a laterally elongated plate member. A through hole 156 is drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws are drilled above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connection, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 vertically aligned in a portion (left end) overlapping the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation proximal end from the through hole 156. and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding toward the rear side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed in the connection portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the longitudinal direction. Here, the connection portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is positioned so as to coincide with the upper connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The projecting portion 148a, which has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and protrudes toward the rear side, is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position where it coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation unit back surface member 1 can be easily assembled by inserting a screw through the lower coupling insertion hole 158 and screwing it into the screw-in portion 148b.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140 .

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of coming into face contact with wall portion 158a in the assembled state (see FIG. 226).

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 227) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), and will be described later in detail. This has the effect of regulating the closing of the front frame 14 by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or is attached to the rear side from a separate member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. You may comprise from a metal part extended to. However, in the case where the open/close restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board support device 600 (see FIG. 227) formed of a metal member may Chipping or denting can be prevented. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 233) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted through a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 240) drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 194).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . At that time, the operation device 300 at a convenient position is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (see, for example, FIG. 150, transmission holes 321a and openings 325 correspond to the gaps). The concave portion 15a serves to temporarily store the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 150 and 154(b)), and is connected to wiring. 154(b) and 155), the drive motor 342 is exposed to liquid such as drinking water. It is possible to prevent it from being directly applied and broken down.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 150 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. FIG. 230 or 233 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

230(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 230(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 230(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 229) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180 respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to each of the electrical decorations 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 223) are once connected to the relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. , a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 233).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230 (a) At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions in top view and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183 A temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening is mainly provided.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portion is formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a portion to be fixed 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through-hole in the center through which a screw is passed, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the portion to be fixed 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 233(a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and is formed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened. 181e and .

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping down, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The area (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper portion 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle.
1c) can be ensured to have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer peripheral surface of e is fitted in the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 233).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 230(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 230(b)).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening portion 184a.
It mainly includes a small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 with the 84a interposed therebetween and having an opening width smaller than that of the large opening 184a (see FIG. 233).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 231(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 231(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 231(a). FIG. 232(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 232(b) is the front frame along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

231(a) and 231(b) show the state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range). In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with the vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 231 and the state shown in FIG. 232). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 will be deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 233(a) is a rear schematic view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, FIG. 233(b) is a top schematic view of FIG. 233(a), and FIG. 233(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233(c).

233(a) and 233(b) show one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIGS. 233(c) and 233(d) show the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 233, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c is formed.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180
2 along the shape. As a result, FIGS. 233(b) and 233
As shown in (d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 233(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

234(a) and 234(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. 234(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 234(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

234(a) and 234(b), the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 223) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 234(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. Since it corresponds to opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 233 ( b), see also FIG. 233(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 234(a) and 234(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route passing near the vertically elongated metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 233(d)) that constitutes the left portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame .

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 fit ( 233(b) and 234(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 228). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, by heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted and penetrated. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. The tips of the heated wires are pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate fixing portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 229) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 139) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

In addition, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 226) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 226) is disabled. Therefore, a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the bills or balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his/her own fraud. Therefore, it can act as a deterrent against fraud.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output, and the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed at the game machine shop. Thus, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

235 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 235, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 235, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the right and left sides at least once each are provided.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while securing a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223). The large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray run out, the balls are removed from the senryo box). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing the stress caused by being requested to replenish.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion. , provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 236 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 236, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na; Each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. The adjacent wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 236, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the improperly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 236, as an entry path for the illegally inserted wire HM, there is a conceivable path that advances upstream of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 from the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance. A person who commits fraud pushes the wire HM against the side wall of the front-door-side lower tray passage portion 142 while proceeding.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 with their left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 236 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 236, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead-end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward. Even so, the tip of the wire HM travels downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 or the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 .

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 139). It is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from gaining a fraudulent profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player and making it easier to fraudulently win a prize.

Returning to FIG. 235, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a protrudes toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-to-rear width of the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is larger than that of the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward in the upstream of the passage portion 145, so that the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from lining up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted in the left, right, up and down directions), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. from the inclined plate portion 146a that is inclined downward as far as the inclination plate portion 146a, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the direction in which the guide plate extends toward the back side is directed upward.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b moves the foul ball socket portion 146 to the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). A tool can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 237 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 238 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 237 and 238 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 255) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into left and right parts are aligned with the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being left and right separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 223).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 239 and 240, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 226) on the front side of the main body frame 14a and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are connected to the main body frame. 14a is shown disassembled.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 238), and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 259).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 238) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

241 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 241, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into the insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the body frame 14a. and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223).

242 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 244 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
245 and 246 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 245 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 246 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 242 to 246, the right panel unit 500 includes a left plate unit 500L and a right plate unit 500R that are stacked in the horizontal direction, and the plate unit 500.
0L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a vertically elongated plate-shaped support plate portion 510 is mainly provided, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 241).

The heavy plate unit 500 is fixed by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) by screws inserted through the body 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. In (see FIG. 223), a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. a plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512; a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512; and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens-side through hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the platform 511b can contact the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 252(b)). collapse can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b. While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The rear side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. abuts on the left side surface 511c of the .

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see Figure 244).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 244), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak through the light guide member. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the rear fastening portion 527 , the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 , the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . As a result, the projection 566
are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the left stacking unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223) and is made of a light-impermeable resin material. and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a transparent colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R has a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L.
and an outer lens member 550 which faces the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front side end is opposed in the front-rear direction and which is formed of a light-transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member. The light guide member 54 is arranged on the right side of 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 247 and 248 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. FIG. 247 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 248 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 .
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through the lens 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; The inner cover member 520 is an outer cover member 560 which is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530 .
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 521, and a plurality of rear fastening portions protruding on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b has an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into face contact (matches in shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 251). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
can be different for each

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 229) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window through which the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 251).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 247). This boundary part is designed in this embodiment, and the inner cover member 52
The surface (left side surface) of 0 corresponds to the portion projecting leftward (see FIG. 248). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively used. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed on the body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
A front end portion 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 246) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wavy rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. Namely
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side, and thus the width of the left and right becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is the tip when viewed from above). It is assumed to be a triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 242 and 244), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part for changing the light from the surface into a uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a so that the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer) can be exemplified. Among them, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light guide member 540 is formed in a corrugated shape in which the front end portion of the inner lens member 530 is slightly displaced toward the rear side from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and also are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
Although there is no particular limitation, the curved surface portion has a radius of curvature (R) of 200 mm or more and 700 mm
The following are preferred. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while reducing distortion after heat bending and maintaining good practical mechanical properties. .

Details of the wave shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 251), but the inner cover member 520
Positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and positioned rightward at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520) It has a wavy shape.

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As a method of thermal bending of the present invention, a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
This is done by pressing the substrate into a mold with a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and a body plate portion 541 of the body plate portion 541 .
A fastening part 542 extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, there is no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 projecting rightward through the outer cover member. A projecting portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion projecting from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and extending from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a projects toward the front side at the position where the curved line forming the wavy shape is switched to the front-rear direction, and is fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). A setting portion 551b is provided.

To the front side, on the opposite side of the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a,
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 252(a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right double plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which screws for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 are screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The surface of the body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved according to the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light guide member 540 and main body plate portion 551 are in surface contact (see FIG. 251(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
It is possible to prevent misalignment with the light guide member 540, and allow light to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper to-be-fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower side to be fastened has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the main body plate portion 561 .
26, and is formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting portion from the body plate portion 561 to the back side. and a plurality of protrusions 566 that are

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is
70 (see FIG. 229) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 223), the right panel unit 500 protrudes toward the front side due to the cover 370. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted therein (
formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, it is possible to narrow the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 , thereby suppressing an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 .

249 and 250, left stacking unit 500L and right stacking unit 500
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 249(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 249(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 249(a), and FIG. 250(a) is a side view of right panel unit 500, and FIG. 250(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250(a).

249(a) and 249(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. Part 55
1b is shown inserted through the support hole 531b.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the projections 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the projections 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting c into the support hole 531b and fitting them together, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, thereby blocking light by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front-side end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. The light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stack unit 500R,
Surfaces parallel to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship in which they can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left stacking unit 500L.
functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right panel unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 has the support plate portion 510 attached to the left stack unit 5 as described above.
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and at least two procedures are conceivable for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left stacking unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
In this method, the left stacking unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right stacking unit 500R and the support plate section 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker who performs maintenance or the like can use which procedure to install the right panel unit 50 according to the parts that need to be replaced.
0 can be disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be disassembled in order to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R.
must slide over each other in the plane direction. Protruding portions 551b and 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this manner, the projections 551b, 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted into the right panel unit 500 by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223). 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left panel unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 241). By making it difficult to disassemble the stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 251, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and the effects in presentation will be described. 251(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 251(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, in FIGS. 251(a) to 251(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 242) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 251(b)), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the upper three openings 524 have a larger vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 251(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the relationship between the magnitudes of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitudes of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a portion where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light can enter the opening 524 sufficiently. The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1-R4 shown in FIG. is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 251(c), the area K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in area KE, LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 251(c)).
), it advances in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 passes through the inner cover member 520
Therefore, even if the light condensing action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the area KE, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning ON 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, the projection 554 (Fig. 243
) can be sharpened.

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the corresponding part (the part corresponding to the area KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 243) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530 cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c.
31a (see FIG. 242), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the player's eye position is set by setting a high degree of expectation for the big win of the effect. , can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500 . As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 243) from the right side. Therefore, a player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but a clerk who is viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

FIG. 252(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb of (a);

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. Note that the maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the LED 512
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is reduced with a similar gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 248) is more LED5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 248).
Since the distance from the end surface on the side of 12a becomes longer, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is recessed toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portions, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that is arranged to face the support hole 531b
0, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a greater width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, so that the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to ensure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (difference in intensity can be reduced).

253 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 253, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 253, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 253, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed by the effect of the curved light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, both surfaces of the light guide member 540 can have different light emission modes (roughness and density, brightness and darkness). In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
0 is bent to the side of the player instead of right sideways (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. 252(b). The imaginary The line arrow
shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 237 and 238, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
, and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

254 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 255 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 254 and 255, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 237). The illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly provide 254 and 255, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit decorated with a model name, etc. on the front side.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the enclosed LED,
Perform a performance with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
01 to improve the workability of assembly.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed with the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

256 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 257 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 41. FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. 420, a right corner supporting member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side, and is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position projecting from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. and a lens member 440 that is restricted from coming off to the back side and that constitutes the electrical decoration part 8033 .

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. a support through-hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape;
and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) has an LED 14 at a position coinciding with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is arranged, and the light emission of this LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414. - 特許庁

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claw portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 242 and 243) of the right panel unit 500. ), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface where the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8031. In the fitted state (see FIG. 223), the upper panel unit 400 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 via the surface in which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (See FIG. 262(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2, 482 (see FIG. 259), and is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end, and the cross section L
A plurality of L-shaped extensions 423 formed in a letter shape and a plurality of extending portions 423 which are arranged at positions equidistant left and right from the center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically. and an opening 424 configured by a small-diameter through hole.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 260).
1 through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
A player can see the light radiated through the lens member 440 through the opening 414 .

258 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 259 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 258 and 259, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
Rear assembly 48 forming a space with front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 237)
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits an effect sound related to the game. A speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made up of a copper wire and a coating that coats the copper wire) passes through a through hole drilled in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 239), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 239), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223), so that the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 461
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the main body 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461 , a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 toward the back side, and the rear assembly 480. a plurality of fastening portions 468 to which screws are fastened and fixed; connecting holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) are inserted; A front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side is mainly provided at the lower end portion of the portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base-end main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 (left side)), and a distal end side main body portion 461T (left side in FIG. 258) connected to the center side in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body portion 461M. A space is continuously formed between the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T and the rear side assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 463
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e (see FIG. 239) and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
257) of the body member 411 through the through hole 463a.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 258 and 259, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through-hole 465 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, forming a curved passage (
260). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a body part 48 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 481
A wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the front and rear direction at the upper right corner of the body portion 481, and a cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
A plurality of through-holes 488 formed as through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H of
1H is provided.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 261(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 deviates from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same external shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 483
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e through the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 239), the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
0 through the through hole 463a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411 (see FIG. 238).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464 .
53, the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and an opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464. can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the sound.

The light passage through-hole 485 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a tortuous path (see FIG. 260) that bends. This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is attached to the front side wall portion 481H.
are formed at the front and rear ends and surface positions of the That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is located at the main body portion 48
1 back side plate. This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 467 is applied with a compressive force directed toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is compressed by the compressive force.
67 and 487 are elastically deformed in the longitudinal direction to close the gap (Fig. 261(b)).
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is sized to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (protrudes slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

260(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 260(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 260(a) and 260(b), for ease of understanding,
A speaker connection line 453 is shown in phantom lines, and a state in which a front assembly 460 and a rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded with their surfaces facing each other toward the front of the paper are shown. 260(a) and 260(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembly state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 237), the base end body 46 of the front assembly 460 is inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 260(a) and 260(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left. Rib portions 467a and 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) in
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 can be positioned at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the body portion 461. As shown in FIG.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While the vibration wave generated from the groove 467 travels linearly, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 260(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, like this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a curved path in the vertical direction, and the length of the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be longer than the lateral width of the space. can do.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 260(b), the passage-forming rib 487 serves as the wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 484 are formed on the inner side (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can increase the rigidity of the body portion 481. As shown in FIG.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of 60 are formed in the same shape in the front-rear direction, and arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2, 483b has an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so output from the rear side of the speaker 451 The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) seeks an exit and advances toward the distal end side body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip-side body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front-side recessed portion 471 and the rear-side recessed portion 491, and the opening 424 (see FIG. 257) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order. As a result, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47 .
1, 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 257), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is You can play back and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound that is in phase are transmitted to the recessed portions 471 and 491. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. This will
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 228), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 237) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are defined as the path of the vibration wave Ws. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be individually set for their arrangement and vertical extension length to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467c of the front assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
d and 487e are arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450, in addition to the above purpose.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 262(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are fixed.
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 467c and 467c are inserted.
By bringing the 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 48
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 239 and 262) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, the speaker assembly 45
0 recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482 is subjected to an upward load from the fastening portion 14 e 1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

261(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 261(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 261(c). 261(a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 261(a), and FIG. 261(d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG.
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG.
) and FIG. 261(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 261(c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 261(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 261(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 261(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped so as to fit with i in the assembled state. As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 261(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 261(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side body portion 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate body portion 461M. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 261(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 262(a) shows the front assembly 46 on line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 261(a).
0, a partial sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e;

As shown in FIG. 262(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is provided with through holes 463a,
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between them and the body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 262(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and is attached to the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other).
And, without the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At the lower position of the body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) is recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in 450L can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, the extended plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 262(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. Namely
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

In addition, the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is the same as that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
The side or front of 50 may also be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through-hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains unaffected by the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 260(a)) and the connecting hole 469.
A screw inserted through a through-hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction with the same shape as , and a through-hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is arranged. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41 is fixed.
0 indicates the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (Fig. 1
00) is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 262(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

Also, the same relationship as the above-described speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is
The same applies to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

263 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 264(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 264(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 264
(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting portions 12a,
12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 263, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a jointly
A tapered shape that expands to the side (to the right) where the game board 13 is arranged in the horizontal direction is formed. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 and 266. FIG.

Figures 265(a) and 265(b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXV of Figure 264(b)
266(a) and 266(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. is. 265 and 266 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 265(b) and 266(a) show the game board 13 immediately before being assembled to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 266(b) shows the game board 13 after being completely assembled to the inner frame 12. illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 265 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the drawing.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after adjusting the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13 is installed.
is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 265(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated around the axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265(b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (more
1 and the front surface of the game board 13), the game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. Namely
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 227). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces, are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 265(a) to FIG. 265(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
Workability can be improved when the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 without depending on the backward inclination of the 013. - 特許庁

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The slope of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 265(b), as shown in FIG. 266(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 has the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since the game board 13 is constructed so as to retreat from the entry route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 266(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60 is rotated.
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 . That is, the game board 13
, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 266 (a
) and FIG. 266(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the game board 13 near the right end is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates around the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 263). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed to the inner frame 12. Also, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 271(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 moves. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed in to close it with respect to the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted in vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state in which the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 266(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a which is connected to the wiring of the game board 13 and is supported on the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board which is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the board surface support device 600 on the lower side. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 140) and the like is connected on the back side is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13 .

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 263 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

267(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 267(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 268(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 268(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. In addition, Fig. 267
268(a) and 268(b), the game board 1 by the board support device 600 is shown in FIGS. 268(a) and 268(b).
A released state in which the fixation of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the board surface supporting device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

269 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 270 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the top, a front rotating claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotating claw member 620. A regulating front claw member 630 arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 inserted through and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the front rotation claw member 620. The post-rotation pawl member 6 is rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.
40 and .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , the plate portion 6 along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11 a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612 .
The inner frame 12 is secured by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted through and fixed to the frame 1a and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 264(b)). and a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side.
fixed to This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is the same, so the explanation is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
A pair of support holes 624 are formed so as to penetrate in a straight line in the rear side part of the part a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the rotation rear claw member 640.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion arranged opposite to the left and right, and has a longitudinally long long portion 621a1.
and an extension portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1 connect a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view and the upper edges of the plate portions 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extending plate 621c extending from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees, Part 621a
2, the hanging back plate portion 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a, and the hanging back plate portion 621d extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and a front side extension plate 621e that extends obliquely to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the plane.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 271(a)). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb moves toward the body plate portion 611.
begin to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226). The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in the shape of a letter in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 631, which is arranged to be opposed to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The obliquely extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged opposite to the front frame 14, and
is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 263), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 penetrating through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 266(a)). It is formed.

271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 271(a), 271(b), 272(a), and 272(b), the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. 271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 271(a), the released state of the board support device 600 is shown in FIG. 272(b).
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 272(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging rear plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
A change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 620 While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is arranged tilts, the front regulating claw member 630 rises in a manner to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is the front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
271(a) to FIG. 13
5( a )), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (Fig. 272(a) to Fig. 272
(b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised (from FIG. 271(a) to FIG. 272(a)
), even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end portion of the front regulation claw member 630, is applied to the regulation front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at this time is a change in posture toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load becomes excessive. Attitude change of 630 is restricted.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-rotation pawl member 620 by applying a downward load to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 .
can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 271(b), the game board 13 contacts the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
and the game board 13, rubbing friction occurs. As a result, the game board 1 in the state of FIG. 271(b)
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the recoil.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

Assuming that the board surface support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and that the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) can be closed in that state, the space between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223) and the front surface of the game board 13 The distance between the two becomes shorter, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 272(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 272(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 272(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
To solve the situation that the front frame 14 does not close even when it is installed stably in the splitting direction, and in this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600
When a load is applied to the board support device 600, the load can change the board support device 600 into a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 272(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate portion 621d. is given as a resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 272(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
can be suppressed from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

Between the state shown in FIG. 272(a) and the state shown in FIG. 272(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is arranged to face the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 272(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 272(a) and the state shown in FIG. 272(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Also, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
272(b), a curved surface whose radius gradually increases around the second shaft member P62 is formed.

272(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates to rotate the second shaft member P62.
is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 272(a), the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 271(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the front regulating pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 are not in contact with each other), the front regulation pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 271(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 266(a) and 271(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 abuts on the lower surface of the back-side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

It should be noted that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620, and the post-rotation claw member 64, which are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state, are controlled.
0 behavior is inconsistent. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 272( a ) and 272 ( b ), the pre-rotation pawl member 6 supporting the game board 13 is larger than the amount by which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 272(b)) to the released state (FIG. 13)
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 273 to 276, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 273 to 276 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 223. FIG. 273 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

273 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 274 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 276 shows the rotated state, and FIG. 276 shows the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in imaginary lines. be done.

273 to 276, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening/closing regulation portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. To facilitate understanding, FIGS. 273 and 1
275 and 276, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed at 37 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 273, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 273), the interference between the open/close regulating part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
While the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when it is disengaged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 274, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 274), the interference between the open/close regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 275, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, if the front frame 14 is placed at the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (clockwise direction in FIG. 275) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (FIG. 275).
Since the counterclockwise direction is opposite to the counterclockwise direction, the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 271(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a risk that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 275). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 276, in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 276), the open/close restricting portion 159 and , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 275) and the rotation direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (FIG. 13
8 (counterclockwise direction) is not reversed, and normal load can be easily pushed in, as described above (see FIG. 272(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG.
can be fixed, allowing the front frame 14 to be closed.

277 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 277 and 278 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to Figures 279-285. Figure 279(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and Figure 279(b).
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 280(a) and 280(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 280(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 280(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 280(b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. 279(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered, and an open state in which the front surface of the base member 710 is opened (see FIG. 23 (
a) See) a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotably supported between
and are mainly provided.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 that is bored to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction.
13, and a projecting portion 714 protruding toward the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and arranged to face the attracting force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 279(a)). and a defect determination convex portion 715 provided convexly.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 279(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. A facing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the left-right opposite side of the facing plane 714a and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, but the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711,
Switching is controlled to change the state between a regulation state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permitting state that permits the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) onto the launch rail 730. and a device 740 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and formed into a cup-like shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a bar P
8 (see FIG. 281). a cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740
6 and .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726 .
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743, a guide slanted portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and which is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and which is inclined downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide slanted portion 744. It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is the axial rod portion 72
6, and a regulating projecting portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 281) can be guided.
a, and a rib portion 724b which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and which extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, the extending tip surface of which is inclined downward toward the back side,
A left inner side surface 724 that is continuous with the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
and c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 281) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, sphere P8
flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in a lateral direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
25 is arranged in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw is passed.
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a). and a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 716 is selected. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be slid along the drawn straight line, thereby adjusting the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 223) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a.
0b and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted through a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732 formed.

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-section, and is shaped like a ball P8 (Fig. 283(b)
)) are configured to guide the sphere P8 upward by contacting two front and rear portions on the peripheral surface of ).

FIGS. 281(a) to 281(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 281(a) to 281
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

281(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (the power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 281(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 281(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 281(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 223), and is a ball stored in the upper tray 17. be.

282 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extending from
5c and .

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 283 and 284, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

283(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 283(b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 284(a) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit 112a viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in 46(a), FIG. 284(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 284(b) is FIG. 147(a). FIG. 285 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a, a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 283 and 14
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 283(a) and 283(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 283(a)). From this state, the firing solenoid 701 is energized, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 284(a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 283(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and the launch rail 730
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the upper blade It enters the lower side of the portion 725c and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 285). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 235), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 316. FIG. 286 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 287 and 288 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 286 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. is pivotally supported on the back plate 1100 and the arm gear 9
24, a drive-side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921, and a drive motor 92 that generates the drive force for driving the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the drive side arm member 910 slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal motion device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 connecting the 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 290 shows the petal motion device 80
0 and FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 291, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 289, the supporting base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 293), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 8 is located slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central body of the support base 801 .
01P is drilled, is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 289) is formed.

Central motor 804 of support base 801 (see FIG. 289) to which central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below (see FIG. 293).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically.
If the support base 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the operation space can be reduced.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged with a second gear 830G and a third gear 810 overlapping the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is interlockingly connected (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. They are arranged to the right through the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 289) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 292 and 293, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

294(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 294(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petal 802 is arranged on the round tip side (counterclockwise when viewed from the front, on the right side of the paper in FIG. 294(a)) from the position where it is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side from 2a (clockwise when viewed from the front, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 294(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear directions, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are separated from each other in the gathered position (see FIGS. 311 and 312).
Since the positional relationship can be such that b and b are overlapped in the front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 316) is made noticeable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 292).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS.
02, they are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (transverse direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 294(b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 .
02S is abutted from the front and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

295 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 296 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 292 and 293 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 295 and 296 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 .

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape. As shown in FIG. 296, substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 293) extend from the periphery of circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 293, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A threaded portion 813S having a threaded hole is formed integrally therewith.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 comprises a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Also, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since the sets each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two side slits 815 are arranged so as to come together inwardly. , are arranged more densely, and this also results in the slit member 81
0 has a compact profile.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the , the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 294, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. , a central portion that bulges out with a greater thickness than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 that is drilled in the extending portion, and the slide member 820 from the center to the front. A guide pin 822 protruding on the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side and pass through the slide member 820 back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the extending direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect each other at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed on the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is restrained by slide rib 803a so that it slides in a constant outward orientation without turning around 22. As shown in FIG.

297 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, FIG.
298(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 298(a). In addition, Fig. 16
292 and 293 are referred to as appropriate in the description of 0 and 298 .

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 297 and 298, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 297, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

From the position where the guide rail 832 is in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831,
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then arcuately further clockwise in the front view than the intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer circumference of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 312(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 298, on the rear side of the rotary plate 830, a second gear 830G is integrally formed extending rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 291 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 311(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further behind the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 298(a), the second gear 830G
A third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the pivot opening 831 and having a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G.
0a, there are screw insertion holes 810b at positions corresponding to the three threaded portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 293), and at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is drilled in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
Positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 293) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the screw portion 813S (see FIG. 1).
56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

299 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fit device 880, FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided at two locations on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is passed through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 to the central shaft member 8 .
51 , the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 299, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . central decorative member 868
, which has a specific color (yellow) but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center that can be screwed in. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing a screw into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

At four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, the body cylindrical member 8 is
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 286), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having a specific property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape with a peripheral wall standing upright on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As shown in FIG. 298(a), on the rear side of the third gear 810G, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and having a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed.
It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 880a
0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two threaded portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. there is

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 300) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) is screwed into place.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is in the doughnut-shaped concave portion 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 291).
1D (see FIG. 289), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped concave portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any posture, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) can be detected (minimum angle 7
2° detection can be performed, and rotations of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801 .
(See FIG. 289) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning notch (not shown), and the rear screw portion 853 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and screwing it.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base member 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted on the outside, and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted with the front side peripheral wall portion 8
12 is fitted on the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is provided at eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b bulge out locally, the slit member 810 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 linearly rather than surfacely. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted around the body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly rotatably supported.

FIG. 301 shows the petal motion device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
302 is a front perspective view of the backplate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by receiving a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 287 to 15 in the description after FIG.
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 225) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical straight line at the center position of the left and right. a rail fixing part 1130 arranged in the , and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 interposed therebetween, Mainly provide

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front side end, a screw-in portion 1111 formed as a pair of left and right holes into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper and lower screw portions 1111 on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 on the front side. a locating boss 1112 extending into the .

As shown in FIG. 301, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the back, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121 and a second accommodation portion 11 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 that accommodates an arm gear 924 that is arranged directly opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and that is fitted with the drive-side arm member 910 .
3 and .

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 287, not shown in FIG. 302), which is supported by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-to-rear direction and is slidable up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line.
The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 301, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

303 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 304 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stopping portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 303, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Protrusive streak portion 1005S protruding on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
and are mainly provided.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and supported elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed from the tip of the support projection 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. be.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. a portion 942;
Mainly provide

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 289). The shaft supporting support portion 941 is placed in the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is placed at the tip of the cover member 945 inserted into the shaft S.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 306), and is prevented from coming off from the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening the plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting radially outward within a range of a predetermined angle from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 are rotatably shafted. A support shaft 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and a substrate cover 1000C arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
00C, which is hidden in a front view, and a threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the part that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 when viewed from the front is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted by the screw-in portion 1006S.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 305 to 310, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. FIG. 306 is a front view of 1100, FIG.
71 and 310 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

305 and 306 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side long hole 932, and in FIGS.
is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 310, when the driving side arm member 910 is positioned at the end of its movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 fits inside the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 310). 288) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting convex portion 9
25 is displaced, and the drive-side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive motor 921 idles).

In FIGS. 307 and 308, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 307 and 308, in the range of FIGS. 309 and 310, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, so that the second effect member 940 moves to the position of the petal motion device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 311(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 311(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 312(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 312(b) is a petal motion device 8. FIG.
312(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 312(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 313(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 313(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 313(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 313(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 314(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 314(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
314(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 314(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 315(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 315(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 315(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 315(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 316(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 316(b) is a petal motion device 8. FIG.
316(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 316(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

313 and 314 from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS.
315 and 316 to the fully open position shown in FIG. 315 and FIG. 316, perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position, and then gather It is configured to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (collected position), as shown in FIG. 311(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 294) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and along with this, as shown in FIGS. in position and clustered together to form an open hibiscus flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (collected position) as described above, the central motor 804 drives the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as indicated by arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initiate the above-described rotary plate 830. FIG.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotor plate 8 is initially rotated.
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 313 and 314).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 312(a), the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in a front view as indicated by an arrow A11.
Along with this, the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 294) is guided by the guide rail 832 and is pushed outward along the radial direction.

At this time, the slide pin 823 moves along the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 311(d).
0 center slit 814 , the slide pin 823 moves along the center slit 814 while being linearly guided from the inner end to the outside.

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 moves toward the center slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14 .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the 10 central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

The more the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
is curved more arcuately toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the decrease in load on and the decrease in movement speed become more pronounced.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation can be prevented and power transmission can be ensured.
14, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is increased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the slide pin 823 is inserted
4 (see FIG. 315(d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position and enter the fully open state, completing the expanding operation.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to a position continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are viewed together as a single large hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized (see FIG. 311(b)). 315(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked at the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating counterclockwise in front view as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 315(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 315(b). Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

After completing the rotation operation, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G,
316(b), when rotated in the clockwise direction in rear view, the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state. b), as indicated by an arrow A15, it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, thereby performing the collecting operation in the direction opposite to the spreading operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 , to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit of the central slit 814 . 311 and 312, and return to the gathered state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Once again, the central motor 804 drives the first gear 804
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction shown by the arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as indicated by arrow A16 in FIG.

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by the arrow A17 in FIG. 311(b). rotate to Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, even from this gathering operation to the rotation operation,
It can be paused and transitioned after a pause, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 290), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , and the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating.

Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG.

317 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 319 and 320 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal structure of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stopper projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) toward the rear side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible cheating is described here.

Returning to FIG. 285, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the twenty-fifth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 319, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is weakly hit and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701), so that the ball P9 is vigorously moved. Even if the yarn Y8 is hammered out, the yarn Y8 will not be cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The previously shot ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the player's front side, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 139), etc., and gain illicit profits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 317). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153 .

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from suspicion, the person should hold the ball P8 near the body (for example, in the pocket of the trousers). ), it is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 223).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower tray 5 from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball ejected to 0 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it steps on the thread Y8 arranged in front of the ball guide opening 53, or collides with the thread Y8. ) flows down to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening arranged behind the ball extracting lever 52 . That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray Passage 9
The balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 early.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the yarn Y8 is pulled out before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines.
You can direct the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is the ball guide opening 5
3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. 1/3 of the width), and a boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 317, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right edge (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower tray passage portion 91 is formed by the space V9.
42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323. FIG. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d on all four sides with walls is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323. FIG.

Figures 321 to 323 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 321 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the top right, FIG. 322 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the top left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 321 to 323, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the twenty-fifth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is set to be approximately twice the radius Ra (see FIG. 317) of the sphere (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to protrude from the side surface on the back side of the . 321 and 322, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is protruded in such a manner as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 317)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8. The durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is passed through the thin plate blade portion 1.
0153, 10154 can be easily inserted into the clearance on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part constituting a forked blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, there is formed an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute-angled deep recess portion.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is caused to enter the acute recess 10155 and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand an upward load originating from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 327. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

324 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and FIG. 325 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the twenty-fifth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 2062a is formed and arranged close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 between which the ball can flow down. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 . When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) are supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, when considering the above-described fraudulent act of sticking balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c to make the thread Y8 enter the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of the state of the balls accumulated on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

326 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 326, a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Also, in the description of FIG. 326, FIG. 325 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
b1 is in contact with the base member 68b1, the long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted, and in this state it is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 326) is a guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increase section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about ⅓ lower side).

By configuring in this way, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the sphere, and collision between the lower tip of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the sphere can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
Incision 206 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screws B11 arranged deep in the cuts 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (Fig. 327 (
a) see). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 319) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, the O
It is arranged so as to be switchable between N-OFF.

Figures 327(a) and 327(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 327(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
The opening/closing portion 68a1 side of is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. again,
In FIG. 327(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button switch SW11 is turned ON. In FIG. 327(b), the button switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 327(a) is restored, the foul ball passage 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 327(a) can be restored by the timing when the ball is guided to 62c (after 0.6 seconds at the shortest).

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 328 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. Note that in FIG. 328, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 328 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below weight portion 68a2, and weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is turned off.
1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, a fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 224) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 327(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately. (see FIG. 327(a)), the period during which the ball is not put out from the payout device 133 can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging , if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly replaced. As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 cracks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent act prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , that the fraudulent party does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so the deterrence against fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twenty-ninth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 329 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 329, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 of this embodiment differs from the loose fitting device 880 of the twenty-fifth embodiment only in the rear cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 .
Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 and 331. FIG.

330(a) and 330(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, FIG.
4(a) and 331(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. 330 and 331 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order.
) shows the state at the same point in time.

Also, in FIGS. 331(a) and 331(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are shown.
S is seen in cross section. Also, in FIG. 330, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 332 and 333).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 330(a) and 330(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) counterclockwise in front view) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 331(b), the central slit 814
and a posture change to a tilted posture with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

By changing the attitude of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this manner, the restricting portion 28
The resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes while the load from 88 is deflected.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 331(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides.
The slide member 2820 can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814,815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG.
Since the 3Ts are abutted (pressed) respectively, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 331(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the slide member 28
20 reach the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
293) can exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 292). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 330(b),
Start to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

332 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 332, FIG.
The figure shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b).

As shown in FIG. 332, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 292). 332, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293).
293), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

333(a), 333(b) and 334 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 333(a), 333(b), and 334 show how the petals 802 move from the expanded position to the collected position in time series.

333(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 333(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the positions of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 293) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the gathered position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

In addition, the restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not contact the petals 802 at the gathered position or the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position.
can slip through the regulating portion 2888 by slightly changing its posture, and can prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 expand, it can be used as a mark to determine whether the petals 802 pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star pattern. It is possible to make a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes will change. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 335 and 336. FIG. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

335(a), 335(b), 336(a) and 336(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 335 and 336 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 335(a). again,
335(a), 335(b), 336(a) and 336(b), the rotary plate 83
0 guide rails 832 are shown in phantom lines.

Note that when rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. It is the same as in the twenty-ninth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the applied resistance, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

335 and 336, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are shown in cross section in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 335(a) (see FIG. 335(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is formed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 .
A central recessed portion 3814a that is recessed in such a manner as to increase the width of the central recessed portion 3814a, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the lateral width of both side slits 815, and a radial direction of both side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in front view Both slits 81 in the wall on the clockwise side in front view
5, and a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is located on the flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG.
3 slide rib 803a.

The central recessed portion 3814a is in the state shown in FIG. 335(a).
from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slit member 3810 toward the center of rotation of the slit member 3810 (Fig. 19
8(a) bottom).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located in the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG.
03 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (
It is formed continuously to FIG. 335(a) bottom).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG.
starts to rotate clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 335(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810, with the first contact point) as a fulcrum, rotate counterclockwise in front view (Figs. 336(a) and 336(b)
)reference).

The center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.
03, contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the threaded portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 336(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the abutting portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is removed.
moves counterclockwise in front view from the base end of the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 331).
(a)), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 330(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

In other words, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the attitudes of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 331(b) )), and until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 330(a)) rotate (rotate together with the slit member 3810). 332, 333(a) and 333(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 335 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 336(b)). That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 330(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (Fig. 335(a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or orientation) in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match that arbitrary state (phase or orientation) are rotated. From the position of the clamped petals 802, the slide member 2820 and plate member 2803 can begin to move toward the gathered position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 332) during the expansion process (see FIG. 335(a)), and then reach the collected position. (see FIG. 334), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified when the petals 802 gather and move, so the operation of the petal motion device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 340. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326 a to 8326 c are formed through the wall portion 8326 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 337, 338, 339(a) and 339(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirtieth embodiment. 337 and 339(a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 338 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 339(b) shows the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, in the operation device 8300 of this embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 of the above-described embodiments. There is, and the rest of the configuration is almost already explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and a first through hole 8326a formed on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause a player to stop the operation of the tilting device 300 when he/she feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a hindrance, or may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to interfere with the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 .
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151(b)) arranged at the end on the rear side, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the tilting position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be misaligned (deformed) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (variant) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (eg, a 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 can be displaced to either the left or the right (eg, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, the right side) is
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, and can be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-to-rear direction is also formed by the tilting device 310 using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to shift (deform) the gap V14, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is either left or right.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the center of the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 339(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended effect with the operation device 8300. Therefore, the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately. had to disassemble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 340(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340(b) is a front view of FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 on line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG.
FIG. 340(e) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 340(a).

The first through-hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 195). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). an inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310; 338), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. It is assumed that the size is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of approximately 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313, which are continuously arranged on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313, are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (mirror-finished members is fixed), the light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. Note that this effect is
The same applies not only to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c, but also to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 321.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in a direction along one plane. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 20).
3(a)), it is formed as a through-hole through which a coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while the device is in the standing state (orientation).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the worker can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 to expose the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 229). The covering cover 370 has a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 228) of the main body curved portion 371 fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 recessed by a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 226). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 340(b)). Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, the load from the front frame 14 is not applied. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

341(a) and 341(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the thirty-first embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. Note that FIG. 341(a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and FIG. is shown closed with respect to the In addition, the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified in FIG. 341(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 341(a) and 341(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the rear side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction;
52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear positions, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward
Prepare.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 341(a), it is retracted from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 341(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 341(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable between the rear position (see FIG. 341(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and is inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-back displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position.
52 is a slanted surface that continuously extends to the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when 52 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is positioned in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so that the vertical displacement member 2651
is positioned at the lower position, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclination angle and formation range are set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the rear side, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downflow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, that is to fix the game board 13 . At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the twenty-fifth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced, and the load required when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced. Since the force can be reduced, the operator's freedom of choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the thirty-second embodiment will be described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting it with a heated piano wire. A case has been described in which burning due to a heated piano wire is detected to detect fraud at an early stage. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

342(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the thirty-second embodiment, and FIGS. 342(b) and 342(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. In addition, FIG. 342(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. be done. 342(b) and 342(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front and rear of the main body box portion 2281. As shown in FIG.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box-like shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side.
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the opening on the rear side of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to form the reverse cup portion 217 .
8, a constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284. It is housed in a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the body box portion 2281 and a recess recessed from the back side in the left side wall portion of the body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end being the body box A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the first conduction a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can contact the upper surface of the portion 2286;
and a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 , is supported by the projecting portion 2285 , and is arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 141). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 342 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and the interruption of the conduction is used as an input and controlled to output an error signal.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 257), or the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 224) is stopped. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 342( a ) to 342 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 of this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left compared to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the reverse cup portion 2178. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged at the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
, the transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 342(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extended portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 342(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent act.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved so that the traveling directions of the light emitted from both sides are different. , the right panel unit 2500 in the thirty-third embodiment has concave portions with different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 343(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 343(b) is an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 343(a). FIG. 343(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing a portion 2543b, and FIG. 343(c) schematically shows a downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 343(a). FIG. 343(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically showing a light guide member 2540, and FIG. FIG. 343(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 343(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 343(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In addition, in FIG. 343(a), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 343(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both surfaces of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the twenty-fifth embodiment. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, the area CCVIb is arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, and the area CCVI is arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550.
The shape of the recessed portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVid arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 343(b), in the region CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343(a).

As shown in FIG. 343(c), a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the area CCVIc by hot-pressing a convex portion in the shape of a sphere divided into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343(a).

As shown in FIG. 343(d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343(a).

As shown in FIG. 343(e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 343(a).

The recessed portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the twenty-fifth embodiment (the inclination angle to the bottom surface is 45° and the diameter of the bottom circle is about 45°). 1 mm cone). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 343(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that the tilting device 310 is in the state of "the button that cannot be pushed" only after the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344 . In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the eighteenth embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the twentieth embodiment, the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed so that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the terminal end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the holding member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the projecting leg By setting the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430 can be switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a designated way as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player,
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a designated manner of pressing, and prevent the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member can 5412 may be formed in such a manner as to be arranged so as to be unable to abut on housing member 5430 . In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player to make the effect lively. Therefore, it is possible to produce a sense of premium that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other.
It is desired that both the 412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they can continuously contact each other. For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a large frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 compared to the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 abut against each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, the game board 13 can be run over the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a path that is long in the front-rear direction immediately behind the ball guide opening 53, because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the firing path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. can be made easier.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the path forming ribs 467 and 487 are used to form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance causes the speaker connection wire 453 to pull out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, even when a load of 100 psi is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H within a projection length range corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464, but the projection beyond that contacts the inner side surface 461Hi. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T can be A large speaker room may be configured with

In addition, although the base end side body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the tip end side body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or they may be configured with the same volume. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e that constitute the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions extend in the left-right direction (the proximal side body portion 461B and the distal side body portion 461T). The connecting direction, the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze. It is possible to suppress cheating by making it difficult to cheat by intruding the tip into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating. Here, the suppression of fraudulent activity includes suppression of fraudulent activity itself, suppression of gaining fraudulent profit from fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity), and the like.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 rotates not only during the rotating operation of the petal motion device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can be made As a result, the petal 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening/closing restricting portion 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the portion of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state or not is determined by the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board support device 600 on the lower side, and the board placed above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin collides with the board support device 600 made of metal, and the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of breakage of the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light emitted to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . In addition, by switching the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory projecting inside the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface faces the front side and the other surface Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the location near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side of the moving accessory emits light. When the surface faces the moving role, the moving role that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (wider range than the top opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting part, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory)
can change the light emission mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510).
While irradiating light with a narrow width), it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 are used to cut the thread Y8, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be affixed to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to provide a resin-made rubber sheet. The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T are provided with
A concave portion may be formed to the extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the thirty-third embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is changed to the direction to collect the light or the direction to spread the light. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is an upward sloping direction in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe. Towards, the light can be made easier to travel. As a result, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. FIG. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times), including the pachinko machine (commonly known as double-rights and triple-rights). ) may be implemented. Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, arepachi, majang balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixed display is performed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of stopping is a specific one. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever,
For example, due to the operation of a stop button or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player on the lower receiving tray. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 344 to 424. FIG. Note that the first control example will be described by partially changing the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments. are omitted.

FIG. 344 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 344, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, and rails 76. , 77, general ball entrance 63, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, sorting device 700, etc. (See FIG. 138). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The openings 710a of the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. Further, although the details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entrance 64 and a right second ball entrance 640r through which a ball can enter are provided. A ball that enters the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r (see FIG. 345).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 138). Mainly referring to FIG. 344, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 355) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 344) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 344) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 344). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance. When winning 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal mode by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpots (jackpots A and C), the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B), or the winning pattern, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot types determined here, 16R time-saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot (jackpot B2), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. ing. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of the variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R time-saving 100 times jackpot” (jackpot A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third pattern is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered pattern. After the round jackpot game, it shifts to a low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state. "16R probability variable odd number jackpot" (jackpot B1) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same odd number pattern, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. “16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot” (jackpot B2) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same even number pattern, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variable jackpot" (jackpot C) means that the third pattern is finally displayed in a combination of specific patterns (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds after the jackpot. (Until the next big winning game is executed) It is a probability variable big winning. It should be noted that, if the jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of Also, the "power supply state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the variation time of the second symbol is also set short. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 640 refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game state is neither variable probability nor time reduction (state that neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the electric sapo during the probability change (during the electric sapo game state) or during the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 640a is opened by winning the game. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and one hit that the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not set. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r (start winning). A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, the center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from contacting the game ball.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 355), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

Each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (see Fig. 344)) for a predetermined period of time. It performs a variable display that makes it possible. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the power support during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric power support and during the time reduction during the probability change, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change and during the time saving.

In addition, during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board 13 out of the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol reservation lamp may not be lit up.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a sorting device 700 is arranged in which balls can win. When a ball wins (enters) the sorting device 700 through the opening 710a, the entered ball is alternately sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. be done. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 355) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37a displays the result of the lottery. Also, when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on in the same manner as in the case of the right second ball entrance 640r. Then, due to the turn-on of the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 375) draws a jackpot lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided below the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 375), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by the first pattern display device 37b. Normally, the second ball entrance 640 prevents (difficult to enter) the game ball by regulating the entry of the game ball in a state in which the left and right electric accessories 640a configured in the shape of wings stand upright. ), and when a normal pattern to be described later is hit, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees in the outward direction as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern and becomes an inverted eight. A game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640 and is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r each pay out five balls as prize balls when a ball wins, and the second ball entrance 640 receives two balls as prize balls. It is also one of the prize-winning openings that are paid out as balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640r is set to a different number, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second right ball entrance 640r may be the same number.

The second ball entrance 640 is attached with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640 a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640 a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the electric sapo during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time taken to display the variation of the second symbol is short, so the variation of the second symbol In the display, the "○" pattern is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically enters the opening 710a. A jackpot lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

On the other hand, during the electric sapo during the variable probability or during the time saving, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball hole 640, the ball entering the opening 710a is distributed to the first ball hole 64 or the right second ball hole 640r. A jackpot lottery associated with the entry of the ball into the mouth 640 is also facilitated to be executed. Therefore, the chances of winning a big winning lottery are increased compared to the normal period, which is more advantageous to the player than during the normal period.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides a , can change the way the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable After the elapse of time), the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. , for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 138).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided through the exit 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114, payout controller 111 and launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 375) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 390) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like. there is

The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and sends the determined display mode to the command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 375). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the sorting device 700 will be described. 345 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 345, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 . A through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow passage portion through which a game ball entering the opening portion 710a flows down, and a flow passage portion through which a game ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 flows down. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Through-holes (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lower insertion holes (not shown) located below the through-holes and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. Formed by the Lord.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from a central position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both the left and right sides, a distributing member 762 arranged in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and a distributing member 762. and a ball-throwing port formed above.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a projecting outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and is inserted through the inside of the annular shape. and a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inner side of the circular ring of the distribution member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The projection 762a is a projection for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball that has passed through the opening 710a is thrown. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left and right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned (distribution member 762 ), and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by contact between the tip surface of the projection 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the downwardly displaced projection 762a comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throwing path KR3”) along which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-described distribution member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the lower side.

At the end on the lower side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed to be inclined in the direction of approaching the interposition member so that the thickness increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 passes through the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. can be thrown to More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second ball entrance 640r.

The intervening member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first ball entrance 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. A right second ball inlet 640r penetrating in the longitudinal direction and these first ball inlets 64 are mainly formed.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 r are formed on the front sides of the right and left end portions of the sorting member 760 and on the rear side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 . Therefore, the spaces at the left and right end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entrance 64 and is thrown to the through hole of the prize winning member 730, and the right second ball entrance 640r. , and a path for throwing the ball to the through-hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. A ball entering through the opening 710a is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760. FIG. A ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected.

On the other hand, a ball that is thrown along the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the . Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, game balls entering the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 are evenly distributed. It is possible to uniformly generate reserved balls by allowing game balls to enter the right second ball inlet 640r. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved balls can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to change at the same time. By configuring in this way, lotteries for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination results can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 375) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit B1", one of the odd numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is stopped and displayed in a grid. A variable display is performed. In addition, if it is a "jackpot A" or a "jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which one of the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned in a grid pattern. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, the chance number composed of the combination of "341" is displayed. It should be noted that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In the present embodiment, the chance number is configured to be displayed by a combination of specific third symbols. ) may be displayed as one or a combination of a plurality of them, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 354, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 346(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into two sub-areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which, when the held ball held in the main display area Dm is variably displayed (dynamically displayed), the held symbols to be changed are moved and displayed. be. The pending symbols moved to the execution display area are displayed as symbols larger than the pending symbols so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the variation is executed, by varying the color of the symbol or varying the pattern of the symbol, it is configured to indicate the lottery result of the varying special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. A character display area C is set in the small area Ds2 in which a character's advance notice effect image is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 346(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays an active pedestal symbol m0 indicating that it is an area in which the held ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is moved and displayed. When the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved patterns (circular patterns) displayed in the small area Ds2, the leftmost circular pattern indicating that the reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area A circle design having a larger diameter than the reserved design is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed after the reserved symbols displayed side by side are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved pattern was displayed. be done. When the reserved pattern moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the pattern being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to fluctuate, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and pattern of the pattern being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbols to start varying and the selected variation pattern from the symbols being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. can improve the interest of In addition, the pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of the fluctuation, but the effect of changing the special pattern within the period when the special pattern is fluctuating is also executed. For example, the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, or the ready-to-win display mode (the display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at the timing or the timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), in the small area Ds2, there is a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that it is an area where a reserved symbol indicating that the reserved order with the highest variation order is displayed. displayed on the left side. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, there are a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 that indicates that the reserved order is third, and a reserved order. 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is 5th, 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is 6th m6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is seventh, and the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is eighth are in a state where no reserved symbols are displayed. is also displayed.

Above the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, when a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggesting pattern P is formed in a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved pattern pedestal m5. Similarly, the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6 displays the character "6" indicating that the reserved order is 6th, and the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 displays the reserved order of 7. The variable lid shape is displayed with the character "7" indicating that it is the second, and the character "8" indicating that the reserved order is the eighth on the top of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is composed of the pattern of

As shown in FIG. 346(b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggesting pattern P extends over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed, and is constructed so that the player can recognize that the maximum reserved number is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of four is set for the first special design, and a maximum of four is set for the second special design. Also, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this way, it may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, there is displayed a character display pedestal C1 indicating that it is an area where a notice character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character is displayed even when the character for announcement is not displayed, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 347(a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area Dm (during the variable display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order A reserved pattern is displayed in . FIG. 347(a) shows the display of reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 347(a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved patterns are displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 347(b), when the number of reservations is 4, the variable cover pattern that displays the 5th reservation of the reservation number suggesting pattern P is hidden and displayed variably. . By configuring in this way, when the reserved pattern is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid pattern, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid pattern as a reserved pattern and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Also, as shown in FIG. 347(b), when the number of held balls reaches 4, not only is the variable cover design hidden in the display area for the fifth held ball, but a girl is displayed in the character display area C. It is configured so that a character pattern is displayed.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment indicating the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by using a speech balloon. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of pending balls reaches 7, the message "1 more ball" is displayed in the comment display. This suggests that the 8 held balls are in a memorized state. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit, the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the right By entering a ball into one of the second ball entrances 640r (a ball entrance corresponding to a special symbol that is not the upper limit of retention), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an overflow that is not retained and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the game ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 (the first ball entrance 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily accumulated alternately and evenly. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about the overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes seven. The game can be continued so as to enter the ball.

Furthermore, when the number of held balls reaches the upper limit, the character "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the number of held balls has been stored up to the upper limit, and the player can continues to shoot game balls and suppresses the problem of overflow of held balls.

In FIG. 348(a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the winning ball is determined by the look-ahead processing (Z320: see FIG. 386) in the starting prize-winning processing (Z105) of FIG. 385, and Information on the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the audio ramp control device 113, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a variety of super reach, the player The display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as an effect to make the player expect a big hit, and the fifth variable lid pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is also non- Display as it is without displaying it. Furthermore, an effect is executed in which a girl is displayed in the character display area C and the characters "as is" are displayed to suggest that the number of reserved characters should not be increased any further. Here, when the fifth held ball is memorized, as shown in FIG. In both cases, a notification is given as if an overflow had occurred. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the fourth held ball will be variably displayed. It is possible to suppress wasteful shooting and consumption of game balls by a player.

As shown in FIG. 349(a), in a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), when the number of 0 held balls is stored up to 4, at the timing when the 4th held ball is stored, The 5th and 6th figures of the variable cover pattern P of the reserved number suggesting pattern P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the character "early" is displayed, and the reserved period is reached. Since it is short, the information suggesting that the reserved number suggesting pattern P is specially changed and displayed is executed. Here, normally, when the number of reserved balls is four, the fifth variable cover pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is hidden, but 0 reserved balls are displayed within 5 seconds. Since the number has increased to 4, there is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable cover patterns are displayed as non-display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect to be executed depending on the period during which the number of held balls is increased or the interval at which the held balls are stored, and the player can be notified that the number of held balls has occurred in a short period of time of a predetermined number or more. is easily recognizable. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from the normal display mode, but this is not restrictive. It may be configured to vary the color, pattern, and shape of the reserved design.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349(b), a variable display example of the variable lid pattern P in the time saving game state will be described. In the time-saving gaming state (high probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), unlike the normal game state (low probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 349(b) 5, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover patterns P are hidden. Then, a character of a girl is displayed, and characters are displayed to urge the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the 6th reserved ball, saying "Put up to 6" in a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the success/failure determination probability of the normal symbols is set to a high probability, and the variation time of the normal symbols is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessories (electric sapo) 640a are easily set to the open state, It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time-saving game, overflow of the reserved balls is likely to occur. Therefore, during the time-saving game, unlike during the normal game, many variable lid patterns P are hidden, and the upper limit value of the reserved balls is 8. By urging the player to play the game so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of pieces, the game can be played so as to suppress the state in which the retained balls are stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. can. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the ball is the fifth ball, the variable lid pattern P of the seventh ball (m7) is hidden, and when the ball is the seventh ball, the variable lid pattern of the eighth ball (m8) is displayed. P is hidden.

In addition, in this control example, during the time-saving game, the seventh variable cover pattern P is hidden when the fifth ball is held. The configuration may be such that the first and eighth variable cover patterns P are maintained in the displayed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in an attempt to generate 6 or more reserved balls.

In addition, when the fourth reserved ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable cover patterns are hidden according to the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the reserved balls to the sixth ball. It may be configured to display the characters "Insert up to 6" suggesting . In this way, by notifying the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (probability variable win or normal win) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player will be motivated to accumulate reserved balls. can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to be variable according to the prefetch result (information indicated by the winning command) of the held ball stored. It is The example shown in FIG. 351(a) is an example in which a girl character normally displayed when there are four held balls is displayed, and the example shown in FIG. 350(b) shows four. Shown is an example in which a special girl character different from the normal one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the result of the lottery for the look-ahead result is a specific result when the eye ball is memorized. there is Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery that determines the type of girl different from the normal time, and if the result of the look-ahead is a big hit or a super reach, the winning probability is set high. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the level of expectations for a big win based on the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, with reference to FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), a description will be given of a display mode in the case where the number of pending prizes reaches the maximum value and then an over-win is made. In FIG. 351(a), when the number of pending items is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C displays a balloon comment indicating that the number of pending items is the upper limit value. characters are displayed. After that, when game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. is displayed, and the characters "Overflow" are displayed to indicate that it has overflowed. In this way, in the event of overflow, frequent occurrence of overflow can be suppressed by informing the player of the occurrence of overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character is changed and displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow. Depending on the type and the content of the comment, the result of the winning judgment of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, the prefetching result of the stored held ball (winning judgment result, etc.), and the current gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variable gaming state ) may be configured to notify the type. By constructing in this way, the player can enjoy various performances by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the player can generate the overflow which is disadvantageous to the player while enjoying it.

With reference to FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), the display mode when the in-reach pending effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 352 (a), when variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) to be the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 399) is executed, and by lottery When it is determined to execute the special holding effect, as shown in FIG. 352, when the ready-to-win display mode is set, the display mode of the pending effect during the reach is set. When the ready-to-reach suspension effect is executed, regardless of the number of suspended balls, the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and a balloon comment says, "Save up to 6. ' is displayed to suggest to the player to store 6 held balls while the reach is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 352(b), if up to 6 balls are actually held during ready-to-win display, the ready-to-win pattern of even number pattern "6" is advantageous to the player. Displayed as variable. In addition, a girl character J1 displays a character "Well done" in a balloon, and the color of the sixth pending pattern is changed (eg, from blue to red). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the shooting of the game ball and play the game even during the ready-to-win, and the profit of the game parlor side can be increased.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls becomes the specified number (6 pieces), an example of changing the reach pattern is shown, but the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even number pattern is shown. In some cases, instead of changing the ready-to-win pattern to odd-numbered patterns, the effect of swimming a shoal of fish from right to left in the main display area Dm is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is determined by the number, color, etc. of the fish. It is configured to perform an advance notice display suggesting the success/failure determination result such as "Congratulations".

353(a) to 353(b), the display mode of the lucky hold effect will be described. When a specific variation (variation that wins the advance notice lottery that executes the lucky suspension effect) is executed, the number of retained balls when the retained balls corresponding to the variation were stored in the previous big hit is stored. 353(a) is displayed on the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the number of held balls, and corresponds to the mark pattern n6 of "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 353(b), when up to 6 reserved balls are memorized during the lucky reserved effect, the characters "Well done" are displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area Dm is displayed. A character (announcement display mode) indicating that the probability variation jackpot is given in the special pattern during fluctuation called "probability variation fixed" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify even the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, it is configured so that the main effect is executed in the case of a big hit. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and the expectation of a big win may be made.

In the lucky holding performance, when the holding ball stored in the variable cover pattern P (5 to 8 holding) wins, the number of the holding balls is memorized, and the lucky prize is executed when the next big winning variation is executed. It is configured to appear as a pending number. By constructing in this manner, the player can be made aware of how many reserved numbers were stored when the previous big win occurred, and the player can keep the reserved numbers as large as possible and make the lucky reservation. A game can be played so that the performance can be easily executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 353 (a), the reserved design has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved number of the first special design and the second special design) (the number of reservations at the time of winning: Figure The number indicated by i shown in 353) is given and displayed. When the reserved pattern is digested (variation of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern is started), the number of reserved patterns at the time of winning is slid to the reserved pattern display area with a lower fluctuation order (variable). is displayed with the same number. By configuring in this way, even when the variation starts, it is possible to confirm the pending number at the time of winning in the variation.

In addition, in the event of a jackpot, the number of pending prizes for the jackpot game that is executed in the production during the jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production, etc.) is displayed by numbers, patterns, etc., and notified. It may be configured as

Next, with reference to FIGS. 354(a) and 354(b), a long-time winning (a winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a longer period of time than normal winning) is one of the winning types of normal symbols. ), the display mode of the holding effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 354(a), when a long-time winning game of normal symbols is won and a long-time winning game is started, a comment "Open" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that a long-time winning game is being executed, and the player can receive the first ball entrance 64 or the right second entrance without shooting a game ball during the long-time winning game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity for a game ball to enter the ball opening 640r. In addition, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during this long-time winning game, the reserved pattern corresponding to the entrance ball is black different from the normal time. It is displayed as a reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish between the held balls stored during a long-time game and the held balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 354(b), when the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols stored during the long winning game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronism. , a symbol of a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the words ``If the treasure chest opens, you have a great chance!!'' are displayed. It is suggested to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big win.

By constructing in this way, when a long-time win of a normal symbol is executed, the presentation of the reserved ball is varied, and a special presentation is also performed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. , the performance of the game can be greatly varied by executing the winning for a long time, and the game with freshness can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 344, the description continues. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbols performed with the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the variability ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is provided in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. As a result, the configuration is such that a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example. And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, game balls entering the opening 710a are alternately sorted by a sorting member 762 to A first ball entrance 64 and a second right ball entrance 640r are provided. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Then, due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, the main controller 110 draws the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is the second. It is indicated by the LED 37a of the 1-symbol display device 37. FIG. Also, the first ball entry hole 64 and the right second ball entry hole 640r are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three prize balls are generated, and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r, four prize balls are generated. The number of balls may be set larger than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64 .

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated the number of times set for the type of jackpot game to be executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 138).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 355) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 356, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (reach hit type, off other than reach (off length A, off short A), reach off type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 392). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided respectively, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the right second ball entrance 640r.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 957), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 392).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)) for special symbol low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C". One of "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2" and "jackpot C" is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 957. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low, and the random number "0 to 2" is a special symbol big winning random number table for when the probability is low. 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 3 among the total number of random number values of 958, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "3/958".

On the other hand, there are 27 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is high, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of special symbols is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 27 among the total number of random numbers of 958, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "27/958".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 359(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 referred to corresponding to the lottery of 2 special symbols is set respectively.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the lottery result in the variation is a jackpot, and the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in association with the big winning type.

FIG. 359(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the random number in the obtained special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 75", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "76 to 79", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "80 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is

In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the variation is a big hit. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

FIG. 359(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the random number in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 87", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "88 to 91", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "92 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the player can choose between the first special pattern and the second special pattern. can be of interest in which of the lotteries is being run. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special pattern is set low, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot being selected is set higher than in the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. there is

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 392) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 357b) that stores random values for determining the variation time of symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

As shown in FIG. 358(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in the game state (normal game state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is low. , and time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the winning/failure determination probability of normal symbols is high probability are set respectively. Further details will be given in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 360 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter A value of CS1 is assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360, when the win/loss determination result is a win, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "51 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 60”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "61 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 1 to 4, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , Outlier Short A (Variation No. 11) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 supersedes "0 to 198" When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the judgment is out, the number of held balls is small (if it is 1 to 4) and the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set to be easily selected, so during that time the second By entering the game ball into the 1st ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, it becomes easier for the ball to be held, and a period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped occurs (the lottery game is not performed). It is configured to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game due to the occurrence of a period. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low, when the number of held balls is large, variation of normal reach and super reach is executed, so that the player can see the success judgment result. can be expected to be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 361, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery results of special symbols, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 361, when the win/loss determination result is a hit, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "91 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 100”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "101 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for 1 to 2 pending balls, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 Normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198", and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 199" for the number of held balls 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198" When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the variation time (variation period) in the short deviation B variation pattern is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. there is As a result, when the result of the judgment is out and the number of pending balls is 3 or more, the out short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed a lot in a short time. , the period until a big win is determined (the period between big wins) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202c matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)) is for when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which normal symbols are in a normal state), and when the probability of winning normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, the normal winning of the normal symbol is in the normal game state (low probability game state), and in the jackpot game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the time saving period, during the variable probability period, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640a in the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time win is a win in which the action of opening the electric accessory 640a in an open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the variable probability period during normal winning is set to be the same as the opening operation during long winning. may be opened. Specifically, for example, the open state operation may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the ball more into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during a long winning period, and during the normal game, the variation in the second special symbol is possible. The execution of the display can be facilitated, and the change of the game performance can be enjoyed by the player by the variable display of the second special pattern in which a fresh advance notice display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358(c), when the probability of the normal design is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, the normal winning of the normal design is determined to be Also, if it is one of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a long-time hit of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal winning of the normal design. In addition, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the long-time hit of the normal pattern is not set, but when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as that of the long-time hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the players and increase the profit of the game parlor. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable probability period, which are high probabilities, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1/1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640r. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the variable normal patterns. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , the symbol "○" is illuminated. Then, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal win. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times". If the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entrance 640r is opened only "2 seconds×2 times" as a long win.

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 358(c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , and the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds. Since the open period becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the right second ball entrance 640r is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 380). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 392).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 355, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 392) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 357(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358), variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 358(b)), In addition to the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 359(a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, etc., in addition to the above.

FIG. 362 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. The winning command table 202e is determined in the pre-reading process (Z320: FIG. 386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the determination results such as the variation pattern selected at the start of variation of the stored held balls are determined. It is a table for determining a winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 362, when the result of the lottery in the look-ahead is a big win, a winning command corresponding to the determined big win type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thereby, not only the variation pattern type and the success/failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e for the variation pattern types of long loss A, short loss A, and short loss B as loss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 357(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, open number counter 203g, long open flag 203i, time saving medium counter 203j, variable execution It has a flag 203k, a variable probability flag 203m, a mid-jackpot flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see Z305 in FIG. 385). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see Z206 in FIG. 244).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z207 in FIG. 381 and Z306 in FIG. 385). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the right second ball entrance 640r, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See Z504 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 387).

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 389 Z503: No).

The number-of-opening counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the long time is in progress. This long time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the process of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: Figure 387), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game is executed for a long time, the variation of the next normal symbol is started is set to off).

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be performed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be performed. In this control example, variation is started in accordance with the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second right ball entrance 640r (the order that is reserved and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (Z204: FIG. 382) Based on the order data of the reserved storage stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203p to be described later, the fluctuation stored next is the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 382).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This variable probability flag 203m is, in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A ( Z1111: No), it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of Z220 in the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variation display of the special symbol that will be the big hit.

The jackpot middle flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game. The mid-jackpot flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the process of Z221 of the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the process of Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game end timing comes.

The change order storage area 203p is an area for storing the reservation order when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r and is stored as a reserved ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. Also, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, fluctuations are started in the order in which they were reserved and stored. As a result, even in the variation of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control unit 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 363(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a pending change selection table 222b, a pending effect mode selection table 222c, a pending lid range selection table 222d, and a pending lid command selection table. Table 222e, pending lid color change selection table 222f, lucky pending command table 222g, background mode selection table 222h, pending character selection table 222i, pending character change table 222j, balloon selection table 222k, during reach drawing lottery table 222m, reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky reservation lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The pending change selection table 222b determines whether or not the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be changed and displayed based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the content of the change. 2 is a selection table for obtaining a valid pending change value;

FIG. 364(a) schematically shows the contents of this pending change selection table 222b. In the pending change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the display of changing the pending symbol in the sub-display area Ds according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 348(a)) and a pending change value are set. Incidentally, the acquired pending change value will be described in detail in the pending effect mode selection table 222c, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the prize winning command type is out, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed from the normal reserved pattern. is determined and the pending change value gets zero. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved design is changed from the white circle design (the normal display mode of the reserved design) to the blue circle design (change A). and the pending change value gets 1.

If the winning command type is out of normal reach, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "51-100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any one of "101 to 198", it is decided to change the white circular pattern to a green circular pattern and display it, and 2 is obtained as the pending change value.

If the winning command type is out of super reach, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 30", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "31-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 20", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "21-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the super ready-to-win jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 10", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere from "11 to 100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets one. If it is anywhere from "101 to 189", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2; If it is any one of "190 to 198", it is decided to change the white circle pattern to a red circle pattern and display it, and 3 is acquired as the pending change value.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved pattern is changed and displayed according to the contents thereof, so that not only the special pattern being changed but also the reserved pattern being displayed are reserved and stored. It is possible to predict the success/failure determination result corresponding to the reserved design. In addition, since it is possible to inform the player in advance that the ready-to-win display mode will be displayed when the variable display is performed by the change B, even if the special symbol is in the state before the change, it is possible to hold and store it. In this case, the player can expect that the variation will start, and even if the variation of the special symbol that is to be missed is executed during that time, it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, even the same hold change can be developed into a ready-to-win production through different execution productions, and an unexpected production can attract the player. It is possible to attract.

The pending effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the pending changes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 364(b) schematically shows the contents of this pending effect mode selection table 222c. In the pending effect mode selection table 222c, the pending effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired in the pending change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 403). Specifically, when the pending change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. The normal mode is when all the reserved patterns being displayed are not changed (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the interval between the reserved patterns and the variable lid pattern P is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 347(b)).

When the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. Notice A mode is when any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the pending pattern being displayed (state), and if the number of pending balls is 4 or more, This is a holding effect mode in which the pattern and the display range of the variable lid pattern P are displayed without a gap (see FIG. 348(a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 348(a) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a pending effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the advance notice A mode, the contents of the displayed comment are different from those in the state of FIG. 348(a). In the advance notice A mode, when a reserved ball is generated after the reserved pattern whose color is changed and the reserved pattern is displayed, one variable cover pattern P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 348(a) By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from , the variable cover pattern P with the letter 5 is hidden), and the comment indicating the expectation of the big hit for the reserved pattern with the variable color Display is performed by a callout. In this way, in the advance notice A mode, after the colors of the reserved symbols are changed, the game is played so as to generate the reserved balls. It is configured to inform the degree of expectation of.

When the pending change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the pending effect mode. Notice B mode is when there is a change in the reserved pattern being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, any change in the reserved pattern being displayed (Change A , change B, or change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P is displayed without a gap. Or (see FIG. 348(a)), it is a mode in which a reserved design is displayed on the display range of the variable cover design P (see FIG. 348(b)).

By configuring in this way, not only the color of the reserved design can be changed, but also the display range of the variable cover design P can be changed in various ways according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls. It is possible to spread the enjoyment of playing and attract players. In addition, unlike the advance notice A mode, it is a holding effect that allows the player to continue the game so as not to generate any more holding balls. Expectations can be heightened by concentrating on the start of the variation (dynamic display) of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The reserved lid range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring the reserved lid range value necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. is set.

Here, the special effects performed during the normal mode will be explained. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a reach pending effect, and a lucky pending effect are provided.

The short-term winning effect is a effect that is executed when the required time from when the number of reserved balls is 0 to when the number of reserved balls is stored and changed to 1 and then to 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the interval between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved lid pattern P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. The number of reserved lid symbols P is changed and displayed so that the interval between the reserved lid symbols P and the reserved symbols is two, and a girl character J0 indicating a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production in which the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of pending balls has changed from 0 to 1 or more. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 404) when the number of reserved balls reaches 4 before the short-term prize winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time passes 5 seconds. ) to start execution (see FIG. 349(a)), and when the short-term prize winning timer 223q has passed 5 seconds, 0 is set in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 407), and the effect of ending the execution is.

Retention production during reach is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play the game so that the number of reservations is accumulated to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 352 (a)) during reach fluctuation. . In this ready-to-reach pending effect, when the variation type is ready-to-win, the possibility of execution is selected based on a ready-to-win effect lottery table 222m described later, and when the execution becomes possible, the reach start time calculation to be described later. The value of the pending effect start timer 223r, which is set based on the variation type by the table 222n, becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and at the timing when the ready-to-win effect starts, another special effect is executed. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the special effect status storage area is set to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 399) to start execution (see FIG. 352 (a)), and the It is a production that ends when the fluctuation ends.

Lucky pending effect is to store the number of pending balls (reserved patterns) when they are stored (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) occurs, the big hit is the held ball. A predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 353(a)) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time of entering the entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to that mark pattern. This is an effect for displaying a notice display mode for prompting the player to play the game. When reserved symbols are stored up to the mark pattern, as shown in FIG. An effect to notify the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky reservation performance, when other special performances are not executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), and a big win is achieved as a result of the success/failure determination of the start prize in the past, the value of the number of pending balls. is 5 or more, a lottery is drawn based on a lucky reservation lottery table 222p to determine whether or not execution is possible. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 398) to start execution (see FIG. 353(a)), and end at the start of the next variation.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no change in the hold, the hold effect related to the hold design can be set according to the time interval between the start winning prizes, the number of pending balls during reach fluctuation, and the result of winning or failing determination due to the past start winning prizes. Various presentations can be provided depending on the stored content and the like, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 365(a) is a diagram showing the structure of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reservation cover range selection table 222d includes a normal reservation cover range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode reservation cover range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode reservation cover range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning reservation cover range selection table 222d4, and a ready-to-win effect. A reservation lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal pending lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 365(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal reservation lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low probability game state (low probability of jackpot probability, non-time saving In the case of acquiring the pending lid range value in the game state)) (see Z2354 in FIG. 400), and in the case of the lucky pending effect (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3), the pending lid range value is acquired (FIG. 400 (see Z2346 of )).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice A mode pending lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice A mode. FIG. 365(c) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice A mode reservation lid range selection table 222d2. In the advance notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2, the reserved lid range value is acquired (see Z2351 in FIG. 400) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 4 is obtained as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "2", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice B mode pending lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice B mode.

FIG. 365(d) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice B-mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3. In the advance notice B-mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3, a reservation lid range value is acquired (see Z2349 in FIG. 400) for the value (range) of the number of reservation balls and the value (range) of the reservation advance notice counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the value of the pending lid range value of 4 is obtained when the value of the pending notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of pending balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the pending notice counter is "1 to 4", 4 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and the value of the pending notice counter is "5". In this case, 3 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 2 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the holding notice counter value is "6", and when the holding notice counter value is "7", 1 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the pending lid range value when the value of the pending notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 366(a)) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 366(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning reserve lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222d4, the pending lid range value is acquired (see Z2342 in FIG. 400) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", 1 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The during-reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 is a table used for acquiring the pending lid range value in the case of the during-reach pending effect. FIG. 366(b) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222d5. In the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222d5, the pending lid range value is acquired (see Z2344 in FIG. 400) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 8", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The reservation lid range selection table 222d6 for time saving is that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the reservation effect mode is the normal mode and the game state is the time saving state (the value of the counter during time saving is other than 0 ) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value.

FIG. 366(c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6. In the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6, a reservation lid range value is acquired (see Z2353 in FIG. 400) for the value (range) of the number of reservation balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 6", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", 0 is obtained as the retained lid range value.

By configuring in this way, the display range of the variable lid pattern P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the determination of success or failure at the time of starting winning and the holding effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a production effect that enhances participation by using.

The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 from the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222d. is a table used to select commands for

FIG. 367(a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lid command selection table 222e. The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the reserved lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the reserved lid range value (range) acquired from the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the reserve lid range value is "0", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes the shortest display (see FIG. 351(a)). When the reserved lid range value is "1", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). When the reserve lid range value is "2", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (reserved 7 to 8 area (see FIG. 349(a))). When the pending lid range value is "3", the pending lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (reserved 6 to 8 areas (see FIG. 350(a))). When the pending lid range value is "4", the pending lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 4 (reserved 5 to 8 areas (see FIG. 348(a))).

The setting of the reserve lid command is performed in the reserve lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the prize command reception process (Z2209) at the time of start winning, and in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting a display reserved lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 400) based on the reserved lid range value every time the number of reserved balls changes.

The reservation lid color change selection table 222f shows that when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the number of reservations shown in FIG. 4) is a data table for determining the reserved lid pattern P corresponding to the area where the reserved pattern is displayed when the reserved ball is generated. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally, the inside is white with transparency with a black frame, and the number indicating the number of reservations corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside Display mode) is changed to a specific color (internal color is green with transparency). In the reserved lid color change selection table 222f, the secondary display of the third design display device 81 is performed based on the reserved notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the reserved design whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of reserved balls. It is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the reserved cover design P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 367(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222f. The reserved cover color change selection table 222f specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the reserved notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls when the reserved effect mode is the notice B mode. A holding lid command is set (see Z2348 in FIG. 400) for changing the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green according to the change range (see FIG. 348(b)). do.

Specifically, if the value of the pending notice counter 223g is any one of "0 to 4", if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the pending lid command is Not set, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 5. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF11 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 6 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", the retained lid command is determined to be BF12, and the range of 5 to 7 retained balls is designated as the color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF13 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "5", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF21 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 7 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", BF22 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "6", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 7. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF31 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of seven to eight retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "7", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "8", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by varying the display mode in an area different from the reserved symbols varied by the determination of the winning/failure determination result in the previous winning (pre-reading determination), it is possible to further increase the attention of the player. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is to be increased depending on whether or not to stop hitting, so that the state of the reserved symbols and the later fluctuation notice effect can be widely enjoyed.

The lucky reservation command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for varying the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the target number of reserved balls.

FIG. 368 schematically shows the contents of the lucky pending command table 222g. In the lucky reservation command table 222g, when the lucky reservation effect is being performed, the area of the target number of reserved balls is stored by the lucky reservation storage value 223p, and the display reservation lid command is set based on the value (Fig. 398). (see Z2306 of ).

Specifically, when the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 5, the reserved lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of 5 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled. When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 6, the reserved lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of 6 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled (see FIG. 353(a)). When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 7, the reserved lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of 7 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 8, the reserved lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of 8 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by announcing the number of pending balls that resulted in a big win in the previous start-up prize, the interest in the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of pending balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. It is possible to work to encourage the player to win a prize, and to realize an effect that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 369(a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. The background mode selection table 222h selects the background mode for the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, background D (city background) is determined. .

The reserved character selection table 222i selects the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the reserved effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting (determining) by

FIG. 369(b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The pending character selection table 222i selects a pending character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode stored in the pending effect mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. is set (see Z2363 in FIG. 401). The reserved characters are J0 a girl with short hair (see FIG. 347(b)), J1 a girl with tied hair (see FIG. 350(a)), and J2 a girl with long hair (see FIG. 350(b)). ), and J3 is a blond girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 347(b)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 350(a)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 350(b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 150". In either case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, depending on the difference between the suspension production mode and the background that have changed since the start winning, by determining the suspension characters with high expectations, the display mode of the suspension production with high expectations can be displayed without spoiling the atmosphere of the background production. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize the announcement with high expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbols and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of jackpot hits, the number of times super reach is executed, and the patterns and characters to which the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game performance are acquired. It is also possible to store history information such as the number of points obtained by , and change the character to be selected in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the character to be selected can be changed, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Also, an RTC (real time clock) may be provided so that the selected character can be changed according to the date and time information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the selected character according to the passage of time after the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

The pending character change table 222j changes the contents of the pending character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 into the background, pending effect mode, current pending character, and effect counter 223h. Table for selection based on

FIG. 370 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The pending character selection table 222i includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode stored in the pending effect mode storage area 223m, the current pending character in the display mode, and the value of the effect counter 223h. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value and the over prize is won (Z2366: Yes), and the character command for display is set (see Z2267 in Fig. 401). . Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. (Variable) It becomes a mode that does not.

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is " 0 to 180”, J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 351(b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "Notice A" or "Notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 80" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

If the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", or "background D", if the pending effect mode is "normal mode", if the current pending character is "J0" , if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means of confirming the winning result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and the interest in the game can be increased. can. In addition, the pending characters to be changed are set to characters with higher expectations after the change than before the change, and if the pending production mode is other than normal mode, the percentage of pending characters to be changed is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending effect mode, the player can have a means of knowing the result of the win/fail judgment through the means of intentionally generating an over-winning, and it is possible to provide a game feature that enhances the operation. becomes.

The balloon selection table 222k includes a plurality of data tables for setting balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 348(a)) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 371(a) is a diagram showing the structure of the balloon selection table 222k. The speech balloon selection table 222k includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning speech balloon selection table 222k4, a ready-to-win presentation speech balloon selection table 222k5, a lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6, A time saving balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. The content of the speech balloon to be set is the content of the comment displayed by the reserved character in the character display area C. FIG.

The normal balloon selection table 222k1 is when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 347(b)), and the game state is the normal state. , is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 371(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, balloon contents are acquired (see Z2393 in FIG. 402) for the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is not acquired (see FIG. 347 (b)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". If the value of the number of pending balls is "6", two more balloons are acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 351(a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The announcement A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the announcement balloon when the suspension effect mode is the announcement A mode (see FIG. 348(a)).

FIG. 371(c) schematically shows the contents of the announcement A balloon selection table 222k2. In the announcement A balloon selection table 222k2, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2390 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the result of determination of whether the winning information command is correct.

Specifically, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 3", the content of the balloon is not acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the result of the judgment is not obtained. In the case of winning, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired, and in the case of losing, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result of the judgment is a win, and the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result is a loss. When the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 70%? is acquired, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 60%? is obtained. When the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expectation level of 80%? is obtained, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected level of 70%? is obtained. If the value of the number of pending balls is "8", and if the result of the win/fail judgment is hit, the contents of the balloon will be intense heat! is obtained, and if it is out, what happens to the speech bubble content! is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the value (range) of the effect counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the winning information command, and selects the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as an effect to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used for acquiring the content of the notice balloon when the suspension effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 348(b)).

FIG. 371(d) schematically shows the contents of the announcement B balloon selection table 222k3. In the announcement B balloon selection table 222k3, balloon contents are acquired (see Z2388 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the pending effect counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is acquired as is (see FIG. 348(a)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". In the case of , if the value of the pending effect counter is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is OVER (see FIG. 348 (b)) is acquired, and the value of the pending effect counter is "5" STOP is acquired as the content of the balloon, and if the value of the number of pending balls is “6”, if the value of the pending effect counter is any of “0 to 5”, the content of the balloon is OVER. When the value of the pending effect counter is "6", STOP is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the value of the pending effect counter is "0 to 6". In either case, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon, and STOP is determined as the content of the balloon if the value of the pending effect counter is "7", and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", , MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the prize winning when the change in the highly anticipated reserved pattern occurs by the content of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls is increased by continuing the hitting from the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the generation of useless launches, and make it possible to play the game efficiently. Moreover, even when a change in the highly anticipated reserved symbol occurs, the setting of the content of the balloon may be changed to continue the ejection.

The short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire the contents of balloons in the case of short-term winning (see FIG. 349(a)).

FIG. 372(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2382 in FIG. 402) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! (See FIG. 349(a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "6", the content of the balloon is very fast! is obtained, and the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! ! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "8", the content of the balloon is fast! ! ! is obtained.

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the extent to which the interval between the start prizes is short and the number of reserved balls has increased greatly by the balloon of the reserved character, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon during the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 352(a)).

FIG. 372(b) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5. In the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5, balloon contents are acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the pending effect counter is "0", if the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the contents of the balloon are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 352(a)) is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, and "7-8 ”, the content of the balloon is OVER, and if the value of the pending effect counter 223h is “other than 0”, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 4” , Save up to 6 balloon contents! is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is acquired (see FIG. 352(b)), and "7 8”, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the suspended character during the ready-to-win production, it is possible to encourage the launch when the number of pending balls is small, and in the ready-to-win production during the pending production, the balloon is changed. You can play the game without getting bored by changing it.

The lucky pending balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the lucky pending effect (see FIG. 353(a)).

FIG. 373(a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lucky balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky reserved balloon selection table 222k6, a value corresponding to the reserved ball number is set as a lucky reserved ball number (refer to Z2444 of Z268) when the result of winning in the past is a big win. , the value (range) of the number of retained balls, and the value (range) of the retained change value are obtained (Z2386 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p is "5", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the reservation change value is "0 to 3". In either case, the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 5, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "5", if the value of the pending change is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, If the hold change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is acquired as GOOD, and if the hold change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired as well, and the number of pending balls is any of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the balloon content.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "6", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 5", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is aimed at 6 (see FIG. 353(a)) is acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the value of the pending change is "0", the content of the balloon is OK. If the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is determined to be GOOD, and if the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired, If the value of the number of pending balls is any of "7 to 8" and if the value of the pending change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "7", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 6", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the speech balloon is acquired as aiming for 7, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the balloon is GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is “Good job” and the value of the number of pending balls is “8”. ', if the pending change value is any of '0 to 3', OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "8", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 7", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 8, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the speech balloon is acquired as GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired as well done.

In this way, by changing the contents of the balloon according to the difference in the number of reserved lucky balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to win. When the lottery result hits a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 reserved balls, the result of judging whether or not the number of reserved balls thus started winning a prize is a big hit, the display mode of the lucky reservation can be updated without getting bored. You can continue playing.

In the time saving balloon selection table 222k6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time saving state (the value of the counter during time saving is other than 0). This is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 373(b) schematically shows the time saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the balloon selection table for time saving 222k7, the content of balloon is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is obtained up to 6 (see FIG. 349 (b)), and the number of pending balls is "6 to 7". In either case, OK is obtained for the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the optimum number of reserved balls during time saving, and the player can grasp the transition state of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If you can maintain the optimum number of balls on hold, you can avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the time is inefficient due to the standby state, and the occurrence of over-winning when the number of balls on hold exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls held. It can be used as a criterion for determining whether a game can be played efficiently.

The during-reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the pending display effect during reach displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 352(a)).

FIG. 374(a) schematically shows the contents of the in-reach effect lottery table 222m. In the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not to execute the during-reach pending effect is determined with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (See Z2324 in FIG. 399) Specifically, when the value of the number of balls on hold is one of "0 to 3", when the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 99", during reach The pending effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", it is possible to display the pending effect during reach. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "4 to 5", when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the pending effect during reach is not displayed, and "141 to 199" is displayed. , it is possible to display a reach pending effect. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "6 to 8", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the pending effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the pending performance during reach when the number of pending balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to accumulate the pending when the pending is small.

The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n is a ready-to-win display mode (a display mode in which symbols in the left and right symbol columns are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the same third symbol) to be executed. It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the pending effect during reach in the time (period) to be the display mode. In the ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n, a holding effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the ready-to-reach holding effect (see FIG. 352(a)) acquired by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222m and the variation type.

FIG. 374(b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n is set by the pending effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the ready-to-reach pending effect acquired by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed (Fig. 399 (see Z2326 of ).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000ms, When the variation type is the super reach jackpot B, 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot C, the pending effect start timer is determined at 12000 ms, and the variation type is the super. When the ready-to-win jackpot D is reached, 12000 ms is determined for the reserved performance start timer, and when the variation type is the super ready-to-win jackpot E, the suspended performance start timer is determined to be 20000 ms and the variation type is the normal ready-to-win deviation A. In this case, 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer, and 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer when the variation type is normal reach out B, and when the variation type is normal reach out C, the pending effect A start timer of 10000 ms is determined.

The lucky reservation lottery table 222p acquires whether or not the lucky reservation effect (see FIG. 353(a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 374(c) schematically shows the contents of this lucky reservation lottery table 222p. In the lucky reservation lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky reservation effect can be executed is acquired (see Z2304 in FIG. 398) with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "0 to 2", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 99", the lucky pending effect is executed. is not performed, and if the value is any one of "100 to 199", execution of the lucky holding effect becomes possible. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "3 to 4", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed, and " 190 to 199", it is possible to execute the lucky holding effect. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "5 to 8", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of the lucky reservation effect to be high when the number of reserved balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is small.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 363(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , winning information storage area 223f, pending notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW valid time counter 223k, pending effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky pending storage value 223p, short-term winning At least a timer 223q, a pending effect start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 396). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 397), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 406). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (Z2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 395), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 3960), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see Z2506 in FIG. 406). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding , various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a reserved symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The reserved notice counter 223g changes the reserved number when the reserved color of the reserved design displayed on the third design display device 81 is changed (the display position of the reserved design whose reserved color has changed due to the digestion of the reserved ball). (Also changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed. The value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) which is executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. If there is (Z2403: YES), if the pending change value obtained from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) and there is a change in the pending symbol (see FIG. 348 (a) ), the reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403). For example, as shown in FIG. 348(a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of starting winning is 4, 4 is set to the reserved notice counter 223g. The set pending notice counter 223g is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) executed at the start of fluctuation, and the subtracted value is 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area (Z2226), the above-described pending effect mode is set to the normal mode.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 in the range from 0 to 198 and updated repeatedly. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a pending change selection table 222b, a pending character selection table 222i (holding character), a pending character change table 222j (holding character), a reach There are an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not a reach pending effect is executable) and a lucky reserve lottery table 222p (whether or not a lucky hold effect is executable), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Also, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronizing the update cycle of the effect counter 223h and other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), and the selection results are limited to I try not to be biased towards the selection results.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area in which numerical values necessary for distinguishing the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) whether it is in a standby state in which a demo screen is displayed (Z2801), and when it is determined that it is in a standby state (Z2801: Yes) , it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), 1 is added to the contents of the background mode storage area 223i and set (Z2804). Then, a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background images, different background images recognizable by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountains, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting the effective time (effective period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanying the depression of the frame button 22 that is performed while the special symbol is fluctuating. In the SW valid time counter 223k, when the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), a variation pattern accompanying pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed. If set (Z2803: Yes), based on the set fluctuation pattern, SW valid time is set (Z2804). If the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW When the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), if the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), and the notice display command for display is issued. is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The pending performance mode storage area 223m contains information for determining a plurality of pending preliminary announcement modes prepared according to the pending change when executing the preliminary announcement performance related to the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. remembered.

The pending effect mode storage area 223m is stored when the pending notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the pending effect mode is set (Z2404) by the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3" advance notice B mode is set.

The content of the pending effect mode storage area 223m is the value of the pending notice counter 223g that is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) that is executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the pending effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area 223m (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. The special effects include, as described above, a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349(a)), a ready-to-win pending effect (see FIG. 352(a)), and a lucky pending effect (see FIG. 353(a)). Yes, and a special effect is executed according to a change in the special effect status storage area 223n. Incidentally, the special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

The short-term winning effect is performed when the game state is normal (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of special symbols is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and a short-term winning timer that counts the time (5 seconds) generated from the time when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is 0 is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the execution of the short-term winning effect is started. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) , the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

Reach suspension production is performed when the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach suspension performance setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. When (Z2321: Yes), when the pending effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), by the reach during effect lottery table 222m When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the pending effect start timer 223r is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). With the passage of time, when the pending effect start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the pending effect management process during reach (Z2112), set the display command for notice to perform the pending effect during reach (Z2706) By doing so, the execution of the hold production during reach is started. During execution of the pending performance during reach, the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of ending the variation of the special symbol (Z2707: Yes), and the pending performance during reach is completed.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), the normal mode is in effect (Z2302: Yes), and the lucky suspension storage value is displayed. is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and if the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky reservation lottery table 222p is allowed (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307) is performed, and execution of the lucky suspension effect is started. During execution of the lucky pending effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation after the start of the effect, The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky pending effect ends.

Lucky reservation storage value 223p is stored at the time of winning corresponding to the reserved ball determined as the big win when the winning information command output at the timing of the start winning is determined as the big win (determined in advance). is a storage area in which the value of the number of held balls is stored. Lucky reservation storage value 223p is stored when the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes ), if the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky reserved storage value 223p (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the pending effect mode becomes the lucky pending effect, the pending lid command for display is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 398) based on the lucky pending stored value 223p, and the lucky pending effect is displayed. (See FIG. 353(a)).

The short-term prize winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of special symbols changes from 0 to 1 or more until it reaches 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as a timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), the short-term until it becomes 0 The winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). As described above, the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0 when the pending effect mode becomes the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349(a)). In this way, the short-term winning effect is performed in the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, so that the shorter (faster) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes. It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

Note that the short-term prize effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four prizes have been won. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within five seconds.

The pending effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing of executing the pending effect during reach (see FIG. 352(a)), which is the effect related to the pending symbol during the ready-to-win fluctuation of the special symbols.

Retention effect start timer 223r is, in the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) to be executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) to be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation. If there is (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and if the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach effect lottery table 222m (Z2325: Yes), a timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222n (Z2326).

When the timer value is set to the pending effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 ( In Z2701: Yes), when the pending effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted. Also, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), other special effects are not performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes ), by setting (Z2706) the advance notice display command for performing the pending effect during reach, execution of the pending effect during reach is started.

The sensor valid time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The sensor valid time counter 223s gives an advance notice when the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107). When effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is decremented (Z2824), during which touch sensor detection becomes valid. When the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: Yes) is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107), the touch counter 223t detects that the touch sensor 290 is activated. If it is ON (Z2825: Yes), 1 is added (Z2826), and if the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area for setting or storing various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 396) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 141). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 375, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 375 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 379) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 411).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 376) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 375, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 346) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boys" and "girls" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 reads the character data from the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of the normal symbol is produced and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. In this effect, the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Here, with reference to FIG. 377, details of the display data table will be described. FIG. 377 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 377) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 379), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various modes of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 378, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 378). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 378).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 380) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 380, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 411). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see Z4705 in FIG. 422(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 413(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b) Z3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 420 to 421(b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 422(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 422(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 379) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 379), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 379) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing (Z3303 in FIG. 420) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. reference), pointer update processing (see Z4305 in FIG. 421(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 379), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 420). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 423) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 423). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 423). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 424).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed (see Z4902 in FIG. 424) each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 413(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 380 to 393. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

380 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 381 to 393.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passage process associated with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 388 and 389. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (Z108), and further, other processing to be periodically executed is executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 381 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (Z104). This special symbol variation process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (Z201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big-hit flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big-hit is in progress. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not occurring (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (Z203). . After obtaining the value of each counter, the change execution determination process is executed (Z204). Details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 382, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining the special symbol that will be the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) If so, subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (Z206), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed to start the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), processes such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting variation of the first special symbol are executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not variation execution in special figure 1 (Z205: No), special figure 2 (second special (Z210). In addition, if it is not the variation execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: No), that is, since the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is a variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special symbol 1 reserved ball is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation. A number command is set (Z212). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z214). Incidentally, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 383 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the special winning type counter C2 It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C, and if it is a big win of the second special symbol, it will be a big win A according to the value of the special win type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot with a special design (Z218). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the variable probability flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is equal to or greater than 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the process of Z223 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 382 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to OFF ("0" as a value) to initialize (Z241), and the data in the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to variation execution with special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), the data in the execution area determines whether the variation is performed in the special figure 2 (Z246), and in the special figure 2 If the variation execution (Z246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of Z246, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 383 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, jackpot B2, and jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

When it is determined that the probability is changing (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 27 numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these If the winning random number matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, in the process of Z252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with special symbols (Z252: No), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As the random number value that becomes the special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low probability game state), three numbers of "0 to 2" are set, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number that is the hit of these When the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the process of Z255, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a Matches the set judgment value) is determined (Z255), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z255: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 Based on, the display mode at the time of the big win is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 359(b)).

In this process of Z256, the display mode (LED 37a lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or Z259 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z275 or Z259 is set (Z261). When the process of Z261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 384, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 384 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, the special symbols stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z272). Since it is in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these hits match. In that case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the process of Z272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers for the jackpot of special symbols, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match, the special symbol is selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275). Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271, to set the display mode at the time of the big hit (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "92 to 99" If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 359(c)).

In this process of Z276, the display mode (LED 37a lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 385, the start winning process (Z105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 385 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (Z105). This starting winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380) to determine whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various reserved random number counters.

When the starting winning process (Z105: see FIG. 385) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (Z303: No), an over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation area 1 to reservation area 4) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set to the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch processing (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640. Since the same processing is executed only by changing the processing for each case, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 It is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter similar to the first special symbol By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the first special symbol and The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead processing (Z320) will be described with reference to FIG. 386 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, a process of determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to winning/failure determination can be acquired when a ball is entered, and a counter not related to winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 386, the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the starting winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing this prefetch processing (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, based on the value of the obtained special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not it is determined at the start of the variation (Z351). In this propriety determination, the processing of Z255 in the above-described special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384) are executed. . It should be noted that this propriety determination is the propriety determination (discrimination) at the start of variation (Z255 processing in special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383), Z275 in special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384) (preliminary determination) performed prior to the processing of Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the processing of Z351 is a win (also called a specific determination result) (Z352). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (discrimination) (Z353). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z352, when it is determined that the result of the judgment is out (Z352: No), based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 The type is acquired (Z355). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, before the start of fluctuation, the result of the determination in advance is output as a prize winning command to the audio ramp control device 113 each time the ball is held on hold, so the audio ramp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of hit. Therefore, by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the advance notice effect that notifies the player of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball in advance (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed to the color that informs the winning judgment result Production such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. In addition, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 387, the normal symbol variation process (Z106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 387 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (Z106). This normal symbol variation processing (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z401). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (Z401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (Z402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding fluctuation display in normal symbols) (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (Z409), and this processing ends. In addition, although the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the win/fail determination is a hit, the process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessary 640a (movement pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the hit type, etc. Execute.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of Z437 or Z438 in FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variable time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 in FIG. The device 83 is set to stop display (light display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 392) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. 388, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of Z427, Z431, or Z435 of FIG. In this control example, it is configured to light up and display the "○" symbol even in the case of a long-time hit or a normal hit, but not limited to that, a symbol corresponding to the type of hit in the normal pattern is lit and displayed (for example, , If it is a long-time hit, it may be configured to be "◎", and if it is a normal win, it will be "○").

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (Z412: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process ends. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z412, when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the processing of Z430 or Z434 of FIG. 388 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408: see FIG. 388) to be described later, since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal symbol winning type is set, in Z413, the normal symbol winning type is configured to set open/close control corresponding to On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 388, the normal symbol variation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 388 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (Z408). This normal design fluctuation start processing (Z408) is the setting at the time of normal design fluctuation start executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 388) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380) It is a process for execution.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z421: Yes), the process proceeds to Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether it is during probability variation or time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probability variation nor time reduction (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

If it is during probability variation or time saving (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the normal winning obtained in the processing of Z407 in FIG. 387 Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 358(c)).

In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of special symbols, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of Z407 in FIG. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 358(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" , it is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 358(c)).

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640, as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65a A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, the number of held balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of Z423 or Z424 is a normal symbol hit (Z425), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (Z425: Yes) , It is determined whether the winning type of the normal symbol is a long time winning (Z426). The winning type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal winning type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) and the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the normal per type counter is in the range of 0 to 198, and is repeatedly updated at the timing synchronized with the other special per type counter C2, and the value of the normal per type counter obtained is If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time win, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal win.

When it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is long-time winning (Z426: Yes), the display mode for long-time winning is set (Z427). In the processing of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time open flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to Z430.

In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is normal winning (Z426: No), the display mode for normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432). Then, if it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z433). As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol misses. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of Z433, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the process of Z430, 2 is set in the open number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h.

In the process of Z432, if it is neither probability variation nor time saving (Z432:No), it will transfer to the process of Z434. In the process of Z432, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special pattern, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set in the open number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process moves to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress (Z436), and if the probability variation is in progress (Z436: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437) , the process ends. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not in the probability change (Z436: No), the change time of the change display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process ends. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are the same operation as when the normal pattern hits in the variable probability state and the time saving state. It may be configured to set

Next, the through gate passage processing (Z107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 389 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (Z107). This thru gate passage processing (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the thru gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503 : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store it in the area (Z505), and terminate this processing. In addition, in the process of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

390 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 391, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 391 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 345) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if not stored (Z905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process moves to Z913.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 392, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of Z911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the main processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 392 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in Z101 switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380) is determined. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 385). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the starting winning process and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 386). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). Details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of Z412 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 387), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, Z257 process or Z259 process of special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see Figure 383), or Z277 process or Z279 process of special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see Figure 384) When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 383) Z257 process or Z259 process, or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 384) Z277 process or When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of Z279 is completed, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 383) or Z258 process, or Z276 process or Z278 process of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 384), the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first symbol display device 37 Stop display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 388), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "o" and the symbol "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of Z410 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 387), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the current variation display, stop design (second design) in the second design display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of Z427 or the processing of Z431 of the normal design variation start processing (see FIG. 388) (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process moves to Z1001, and the above-described processes after Z1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of Z1008, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 390 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (Z1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of Z1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. We can start with the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (Z901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), processing can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 393 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control processing (Z1004) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 392), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 393), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special symbol variation process (Fig. 381) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), and the process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z1102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (Z1103). If it is time to start a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the time to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the processing of Z1106, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when a special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of Z1108, if it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 392). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing after a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. If it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1110, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the processing of Z1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (Z1111). If the big hit type this time is the big hit A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot A (Z1111: No), set the probability variation flag 203m to ON (Z1113), then set the jackpot medium flag 203n to OFF (Z1114), this End the process.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 394 to 410, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 394, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-off processing of Z2118 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 395), it executes power-off processing in Z2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the Z2118 was powered off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of the data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to Z2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, whether the startup process this time was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to Z2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs and during execution of the power-off process of Z1318. It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 395). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power failure process of Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (Z2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), an interrupt Permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because, for example, the startup process this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and Z2008 is started via the processes of Z2004 to Z2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), skip Z2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and shift the processing to Z2010. (Z2011) to shift to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z2012). It should be noted that this state command, in the process of Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 391) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-time hit based on the long-time open flag 203i. is a command. In the process of Z2012, if it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set based on the received state command, and this process ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that the long time hit is in progress, the long time open flag 203i is turned on, and if it indicates that the long time hit is not hit, the long time open flag 203i is turned on. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the process of Z2006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the current process of Z2101 was executed (Z2101), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (Z2101: No), the process proceeds to Z2113 without performing the processes Z2102 to Z2112. In the processing of Z2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed, because Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of Z2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of Z2112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Z2110), and the process proceeds to Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of Z2110 ends, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). Details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the processing of the pending effect management process (Z2112) during reach is executed. This reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process of setting a specific effect (announcement effect) for informing the player that the game will be played so as to accumulate up to is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 ends, command determination processing is executed (Z2113). Details of this command determination processing (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (Z2113), the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off processing is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When a variation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (Z2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, if no variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. .

In the process of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, if the pending ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). When the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process ends. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed, and a setting process is executed for executing each pending effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. On the other hand, in the process of Z2208, when the special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 397, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), will be described. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), based on the received variation pattern command, a detailed special pattern variation pattern (effect mode), an advance notice display mode, a hold notice display mode, and the like are set.

In the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 397), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, the previous notice display command for display is set in the variation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the notice display command for display is a command for instructing display of various notice effects (for example, comment notice suggesting the result of success/failure judgment, mini character notice, etc.) determined based on the variation pattern.

When the process of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the pending change value is set to 0, and the pending effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 350(b), even if an effect of changing the color of the reserved ball is performed based on the result of pre-reading determination, the value of the reserved notice counter 223g determines the value of the reserved ball. After the display position is changed according to the digestion and the change of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose color is changed is started, it is hidden due to the stop of the fluctuation, and the reserved change value can also be set to an initial value of 0. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started can be correctly notified to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 398, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) performed in the variation pattern reception process performed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 398 is a flow chart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), the number of pending balls at the time of winning a big hit in the past is determined, and processing such as setting a mark pattern (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the number of pending balls is performed. Execute.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 398), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the normal mode is in progress (Z2302). If the normal mode is not in effect (Z2302: No), this processing is terminated. In the processing of Z2302, if it is determined that the mode is normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky reserve storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky reservation storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this processing is terminated. Here, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of reservation balls at the time of winning of the special symbol determined as the big hit is not stored.

If it is determined that the value of the stored lucky reserve value 223p is equal to or greater than 1 (Z2303), it is determined whether or not the effect is possible based on the lucky reserve lottery table 222p (see FIG. 374(c)) provided in the ROM 222. Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky reservation lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the production counter 223h and determining whether or not to execute the lucky reservation production based on the determination value of the production counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of holding balls. is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether or not the lucky reservation effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), based on the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p, the display reservation lid command is set from the lucky reservation command table 222g (Fig. 368) (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect was executed in the previous variation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this process is performed. exit. Incidentally, in the process of Z2309, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process ends. In this way, the lucky pending effect is set at the start of the variation, and is ended by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky holding effect is performed during the period in which the special symbol is varied once, but it is not limited to this, and may be performed in the period in which the variation is performed multiple times. may The number of fluctuations of the special symbols to be executed at the start of the lucky reservation performance may be determined, and may be terminated when the variation of the number of times is executed, or a lottery may be conducted to decide whether to end the lucky reservation performance at each variation. is executed, and the effect may be terminated when the end lottery is won, or when all the reserved balls are consumed or a demonstration display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 397, the description continues. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the ready-to-win suspension effect setting process (Z2228: Fig. 399), when the variation of the special symbol to be the ready-to-win display mode is executed, the ready-to-win suspension to make the game to accumulate the reserved balls during the ready-to-win display mode. A process for executing an effect (one of the special pending effects) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 399, the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 399 is a flow chart showing the on-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228).

In reach holding effect setting processing (Z2228: FIG. 399), first, it is determined whether or not reach is fluctuating (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is fluctuating (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), the process ends. If the change is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value in the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. If the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process is terminated. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending effect is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent further overlapping of the pending effect. . If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), based on the number of pending balls and the value of the effect counter 223h, the during-reach effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 374(a)) is executed. Acquire whether or not the effect is possible (Z2324). Here, in the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, the determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of pending balls, and whether or not the during-reach pending effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

By the processing of Z2324, it is determined whether or not the on-reach pending effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). When it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol, the reach start time calculation table 222n (Fig. 374 (b)), the pending effect The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and the process ends.

In this way, according to the ready-to-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the ready-to-win display mode is determined, and other special pending effects are not executed. If so, a lottery is executed as to whether to execute the pending production during reach, and by winning the lottery, the timing of starting execution of the pending production during reach is set, so the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the ready-to-win display mode. When it is started, the execution frequency of the ready-to-win pending effect is set to be higher as the current number of pending balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the shooting of the game balls during the ready-to-win, and the game parlor's side. Profits can be increased. Also, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, return to FIG. 397 to continue the description. After executing the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the holding lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this reserved lid setting process (Z2229), necessary processes for displaying the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the reservation lid setting process (Z2229) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 400 is a flow chart showing this reservation lid setting process (Z2229).

In the reservation lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 400), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning pending effect), which is one of the special pending effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the short-term win-time suspension in the suspension lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365(a)) provided in the ROM 222 A reserved lid range value is obtained based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366(a)) (Z2342). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2342, a pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Thus, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349(a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning reserve lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366(a)), the display mode of the variable lid pattern P different from the normal time (normal time is reserved It is possible to set the display mode of displaying with the rule of displaying the pattern and the space of one reserved pattern, or the rule of displaying with the space of two reserved patterns.

Thus, when the period required for storing one to four held balls is within the predetermined period, the variable cover pattern P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time, so that the variable cover pattern P is displayed. Also from the display mode of P, it can be made to recognize that the period required for memorizing the held ball is a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so as to memorize the reserved ball more quickly, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the suspension effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 ( (See FIG. 366(b)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2344). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2344, the pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the holding lid command for display indicating the holding lid range value acquired in the ready-to-win production holding lid range selection table 222d5, the ready-to-win showing that it is the timing to execute the holding production during ready-to-win By receiving a notice display command for carrying out a middle reservation notice effect, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display reservation lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the ready-to-reach holding effect is determined, the mode of changing the display of the variable cover pattern P is set, and the display mode is set in accordance with the execution timing of the ready-to-reach holding effect. Since the variable cover pattern P is variably displayed in , it can be determined that a special holding performance different from the normal time is executed by the variable cover pattern P. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when it is determined in the action of Z2343 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). . That is, it is determined whether execution of a lucky pending effect, which is one of the special pending effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal reservation lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 365) in the reservation lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365) 365(b)), the pending lid range value is obtained (Z2344). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In this way, when the execution of the lucky holding effect (see FIGS. 353(a) and 353(b)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P (displayed A display mode in which one reserved pattern is vacated from the last reserved pattern that is displayed) is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is set (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 348(a) and 348(b), when there are four or more reserved balls and the colors of the reserved symbols are variable, the player is suggested not to enter any more reserved balls. It is determined whether or not a pending performance is being executed. If it is the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), the display showing the color change of the variable lid pattern P is based on the reserve lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 367(b)) provided in the ROM 222. A hold lid command for use is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 348(b), the reserved symbols are displayed in variable colors, and notice B notifies the player that the game will be played so as to restrict the number of reserved balls from increasing further. A variable cover pattern at a position where the variable cover pattern P and the displayed reserved pattern overlap when more reserved balls are stored in a mode (the number of reserved balls is four or more) being played. A setting is executed to change the display color of P to a different color (for example, green) from the normal display color. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize in an easy-to-understand manner that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game without memorizing the reserved balls.

After executing the process of Z2348, based on the advance notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365(d)), the reservation lid range value is acquired (Z2349), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this End the process. According to the notice B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365(d)), as shown in FIG. It can be constructed such that the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the item is displayed according to a special rule such that the variable cover pattern P is hidden but displayed. As a result, in the advance notice B mode in which the reservation effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of reserved balls, the variable cover pattern P is used to make the player feel as if the four reserved balls are the upper limit. can let Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the held ball is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2347 that the mode is not the advance notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the advance notice A mode (Z2350). That is, the number of reserved balls is four or more, the color of the reserved pattern is set or set in a variable manner, and the variable cover pattern P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved pattern. It is determined whether or not a holding performance to display without intervals is being executed.

If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the reservation lid range value is acquired based on the advance notice A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 365(c)) ( Z2351). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the advance notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (Z2352). Here, whether or not the game is in the time saving mode is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 . In the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, in addition to the variation type (out of reach, hit) data, the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state), or a probability variable gaming state (high Data indicating whether the state is a game state with probability power supply) or a normal game state (game state without low probability power supply) is also attached and output.

(Z2352: Yes) When it is determined that it is during time saving (state where the time saving game state or variable probability game state is set), based on the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 366 (c)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2353). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, during time saving (state with electric sapo), unlike the normal game state, in the state of 0 to 6 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is the 7th reserved ball and the 8th reserved pattern. is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved pattern is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. As a result, the variable cover pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state during the time saving with the electric sapo that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and in the state in which many reserved balls are frequently generated. , an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid pattern P is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (Z2352: No), that is, if it is determined that it is in the normal mode suspension effect, the normal suspension lid range selection table 222d1 (Fig. 365(b)), the pending lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 397, the description continues. After executing the pending lid setting process (Z2229), the pending character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this pending character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 401, the pending character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 397) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 401 is a flow chart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the holding effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one held ball is digested by newly starting fluctuation, the first ball entrance 64 which is the starting port , the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, the number of reserved balls was three (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223a). 223b is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing into a state.

When it is determined that the number of pending balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set pending effect mode and the effect counter 223h, a suspended character is selected from the suspended character selection table 222i (see FIG. 369(b)), a display character command is set (Z2363), and this processing ends. Thus, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved performance mode, and displayed. . As a result, the character displayed can be changed according to the background type and the pending effect mode, and the pending effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, it may be configured such that the determined character type is variable depending on the determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the success/failure determination result is a hit, depending on the character type, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is a hit during a special pattern during fluctuation or a hit while it is on hold. The player can recognize that the reserved balls that have been stored are stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set according to the character type when displayed with super reach, the display of that character will perform super reach, which is a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. can be expected early.

In addition, even in this control example, the notice A mode and notice B mode are set in the case of a variation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with high expectation of a big hit by predictive judgment, or a big hit as a result of the judgment in advance. Therefore, by displaying the characters J2 and J3, it is possible to make the player expect that the super ready-to-win type will be executed, that the success/failure determination result will be a big hit, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of held balls has not changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of held balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. In this way, the character is set to be non-display at the timing when the number of reserved balls becomes less than 4, so that the decrease in the number of reserved balls can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not over winning has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over-winning has occurred is determined by determining whether or not an over-winning information command output from the main control device 110 when the starting winning exceeds the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is received. be. When it is determined that an over winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode, and the effect counter 223h, the reserved character change table 222j is used to change. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and this processing is terminated. Incidentally, if it is determined at Z2366 that the over-winning has not occurred (Z2366: No), this processing is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when an over-win occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 370), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or when the expectation of a big hit is high in the variation pattern type, it is easy to set. is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. Further, when the character J2 is selected, or when the character J0 or J1, which is difficult to be selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, is selected, the character J2 or J3 is selected. designed to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set as a high degree of expectation in which a big hit or a variation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the pending performance by causing over winning. configured to be able to The change of this character corresponds to a privilege advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 397, the description continues. After executing the reserved character setting process (Z2230), the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), the process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C, etc. is executed.

Next, the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 402 is a flow chart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), first, it is determined whether or not 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning performance is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), short-term winning balloon selection in balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 371(a)) provided in ROM 222 Based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 372(a)), the contents of the balloon are obtained (Z2382). After executing the process of Z2382, the balloon command for display is set (Z2394) based on the contents of the acquired balloon, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 372 (b)) during the reach effect (Z2384), and the above Z2394 Execute the process and terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the lucky reservation balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 373(a)) (Z2386), and the process of Z2394 described above is performed. and terminate this process.

In the process of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the balloon content is obtained based on the advance notice B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 371(d)) (Z2388), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of Z2387, if it is determined that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), balloon contents are acquired based on the advance notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 371(c)) (Z2390), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the advance notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode (time saving game state or probability variable game state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time saving is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the time saving balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 373 (b)) (Z2392), and the processing of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

In the process of Z2391, when it is determined that the time saving is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon content is acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 371(b)) (Z2393), The processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, since the comment corresponding to each reservation performance mode is controlled so as to be selected, the content of the comment corresponding to the reservation performance mode can be displayed to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, winning command reception processing (Z2209), which is part of the command determination processing (Z2113: see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the variation type of the received command and the obtained value of the effect counter 223h, a pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 364(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402). .

Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice A mode or the advance notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is variable is set. When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), based on the pending change value, the pending effect mode from the pending effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 364 (b)) is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the pending notice counter 223g shows the current pending ball numerical value (special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b). ) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, short-term winning judgment processing is executed (Z2407). Details of the short-term winning judgment processing (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so), a process of setting the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is executed. Next, lucky reservation processing is executed (Z2408). Details of the lucky reservation storage processing (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. Set the execution of the lucky pending effect. Next, the pending lid setting process (Z2409), the pending character setting process (Z2410), and the balloon setting process (Z2411) described above are executed, and this process ends. Note that the reservation lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 400, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 402, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing this short-term winning judgment process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined to be in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state (during time saving) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of held balls is not four (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the period required until the establishment of the four reserved balls is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 is set to indicate that the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing this lucky reservation storage process (Z2408). This lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the winning prize is acquired from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big win (Z2442). When it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not a big win (2442: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of held balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). When it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of pending balls is set in the lucky pending storage value 223p (Z2444), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of balls on hold is 4 or less (Z2443: No), this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, Z2505 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (Z2504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z2505.

In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 407 is a flow chart showing this short-term prize winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term prize winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute a short-term prize pending effect is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of pending balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the process of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is less than 4 (Z2605). When it is determined that the number of held balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2604 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the process of Z2605 it is determined that the number of held balls is greater than 4. If so (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process ends.

In this way, when the short-term winning pending effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. In addition, not limited to that, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning reservation effect is completed (the timing when the remaining period has passed after 4 balls have been entered in less than 5 seconds) can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 408 is a flow chart showing the on-reach suspension effect start process (Z2112). In this on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the on-reach pending effect and setting the display mode of the on-reach pending effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pending effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702 ). When it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending effect start timer 223r (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), an announcement display command indicating execution of the pending effect during reach is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

In the process of Z2702, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing when the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the special symbol during fluctuation ends (the fluctuation period has passed (Z2707). When it is determined that it is time to end the fluctuation (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this processing ends. In this way, in the ready-to-win suspension performance, the special performance status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which is the ready-to-win variation mode, elapses, and the suspension performance is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 409 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the execution of the notice effect etc. is set based on the depression.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 409), first, it is determined whether or not a value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223k as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), if it is determined that the value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command for switching to a variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the process of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect). (Z2809). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. Set a command (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 410 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing (Z2813) which is one processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z1307: FIG. 409) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is decremented by the elapsed time and updated (Z2824 ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his or her hand close to it (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is displayed. A display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether or not the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set for the selected touch announcement effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 409, the description continues. In the process of Z2801, if it is not waiting (Z2801: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), the SW effective time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect) (Z2808). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. A command is set (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the sensor input processing (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 410, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z2808, if it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being performed (Z2808: No), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: No), the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 are skipped, and the sensor input process (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. is executed to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a variation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that a variation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), based on the set variation pattern, the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2812), and sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and terminate this process. In addition, in the process of Z2811, when the variation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, in the variation pattern, there are those in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and those in which it is not set. be done.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 424. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 411, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 411 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 412, boot processing (Z3001) will be described. FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing boot processing (Z3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of Z3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 412, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. A predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a by Z3101. and Z3102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may execute the processes Z3103 to Z3105 without executing the processes Z3101 and Z3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 411 . When the boot process is finished, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 422(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see Z4602 in FIG. 422(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 376 is drawn. Determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b)) and simple display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 413(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of Z3006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413(a). FIG. 413(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413(b). FIG. 413(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 379) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 413(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301). If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (Z3302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display setting process (Z3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Z3305), 379, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command; A stop type counter is compared with the stop type counter, and a stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 376) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. Move to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 414 to 419, details of the command determination process (Z3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 414 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414), as shown in FIG. 414, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401). (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern Execute command processing (Z3405) and return to processing of Z3401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (Z3405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process (Z3405: FIG. 415(a)), first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (Z3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of Z3505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the clock counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of Z3504 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 414 . In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (Z3406), If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

Details of the stop type command process (Z3407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (Z3407: FIG. 415(b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (Z3602).

Of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the processing returns to Z3401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , Z3602 offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop design set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of Z3406 that there is no stop type command for display (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the advance notice display command for display has been received (Z3408: Yes), advance notice effect display processing is executed (Z3409). Details of the advance notice effect display processing (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. Also, setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of a big win or the like is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 416(a). FIG. 416(a) is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect display processing (Z3409).

In the advance notice effect display process (FIG. 416(a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). Determines a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for advance notice set for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command for display, and sets it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by the clock counter. 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this manner, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the notice display and the display timing, but not limited to this, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description continues. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a switch command for display among unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). Details of this mode switching process (Z3411) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 416(b) (Z3411). FIG. 416(b) is a flow chart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbols are changing (Z3802: Yes), the background mode display data table buffer corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbols are changing, the display mode is switched to a changing pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbols are stopped, the background of the standby state display mode is set to be displayed in the set background.

Note that the process of changing the background etc. according to the background mode may be configured as follows.

A back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag to be set is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag to be set. Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the set back face image determination flag is used at that point in time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received first may be turned on, or A back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description continues. In the process of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserve lid command for display (Z3412: Yes), a reserve lid command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, with reference to FIG. 417, the pending lid command process (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing this pending lid command process (Z3413).

In the pending lid command process (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the pending lid of the display effect corresponding to the received pending lid command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other holding lids are set to ON (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3904 ), initializes the pointer 233f to 0, and (Z3905) returns to the command determination processing.

In addition, when the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is additionally set, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description continues. In the process of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no pending lid command for display (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a pending character command for display (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412: Yes), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the suspended character command process (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 417(b). FIG. 417(b) is a flow chart showing this suspended character command process (Z3415).

In the pending character command process (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the pending character of the display effect corresponding to the received pending character command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is processed. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined, read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other reserved characters are set to OFF (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4004 ), initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination processing.

When a pending character command is received, the display mode of the variable pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified based on the time data indicated by the pending character command, the set variable pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is additionally set, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description continues. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display reserved character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a balloon command for display (Z3416: Yes), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

Here, with reference to FIG. 418, balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described. FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In balloon command processing (Z3417: Fig. 418), first, a display data table for balloon of display effects corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table is set to OFF (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the balloon display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z4101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4104). , the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified. , set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is additionally set, but a new display data table may be set.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 414 . In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414). If (Z3414: Yes), execute error command processing (Z3415) and return to the processing of Z3415.

Details of the error command processing (Z3415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process (Z3415: FIG. 419), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (Z4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of Z4202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 414 . If it is determined in the process of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the process of Z3401.

In the process of Z3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes ), and the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processes Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 415 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 415 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of Z3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 420 and 421, the details of the display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 420, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the processing shifts to Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 421(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 420 . After the warning image setting process (Z4304), or when it is determined in the process of Z4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 421(b). FIG. 421(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of Z4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Z4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (Z4505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (Z4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 421 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of Z4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (Z4309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), return to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by Z4315, along with specifying the stop design of the variation production performed one before, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the fixed display flag is not off but on (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (Z4317), and then the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 376) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423, the details of the transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 422(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 have not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Execute the processing (Z4602), terminate the transfer setting processing, and return to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 422(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is turned off (Z4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 422(b). FIG. 422(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (Z4701). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to Z4703. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the processing proceeds to Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (Z4703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of Z4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 420 to 421(b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed in 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 (see Z4601: No in FIG. 422(a)) by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 423).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Also, in the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processes of Z4803 and Z4804 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z4805. In the process of Z4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (Z4806).

In the processing of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4806 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to Z4807. Also, as a result of the process of Z4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4807.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (Z4807). is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, details of the drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (Z3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, alpha blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of Z4902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 413(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

In the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. After that, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. and when the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (either the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it suffices to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connecting the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the control example described above, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a portion of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in this area. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. , a first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided thereon, and the MPU 231 may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By connecting the resident video RAM 235 to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the received image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. When the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately according to the received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 has been described as a case where its contents are kept without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above example of control, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the image data transfer from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 into the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written into the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 421(a)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

In addition, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when it is determined by the sound ramp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. Upon receipt of an error command conveying a magnetic field error from main controller 110 or audio ramp controller 113 , display controller 114 may display the warning image on third graphic display 81 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the error message image is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 to immediately inform the player of the magnetic field error. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with the addresses expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for the frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing. The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high-speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends is explained. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Also, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above control example, the explanation was given for the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop display the third pattern consisting of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a after the power is turned on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

Also, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, each sprite type can be associated with the sprite. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the sprite-type image data is stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, only the image data corresponding to the "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the control is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", changes with time was explained. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) obtained at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as the pending ball number command. Although the case of inclusion has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and information on various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 may notify you.

In the above control example, when the variable performance is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entrance 64, a second right ball entrance 640r, and a second ball entrance 640 as starting ports (ball entering means, starting means). By entering either ball, a lottery (judgment) is executed to win or lose with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (determination result) is hit (specific determination result), a jackpot game (privilege game advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and different benefits are given to the player depending on the types. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the winning type in which a high probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, the time-saving game state after a jackpot game (when the player's profit is smaller than in the first special game state) A second special game state) is set, and the winning type and the like are set.

The success/failure determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After a variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the determination result by stop-displaying in a display mode for showing the success/failure determination result (determination result). . When a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entered ball. Up to 4 balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (lottery of the first special pattern), the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r and the second ball entrance 640 (the second special A total of four balls are stored as the upper limit value for each symbol lottery).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved pattern (identification pattern, identification information) is displayed for one reserved ball. For the reserved ball, prior to the variable display of the special pattern indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball, the success judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special pattern. (Variation pattern type) is pre-determined to perform pre-discrimination. When the preliminary determination result is a specific determination result (for example, winning or super reach type is determined), the color of the pending symbol is changed (changed to a specific display mode) and displayed. When the colors of the reserved symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding pattern changes, further holding balls are generated, or by generating an overflow prize that enters the starting port more than the maximum number of holding balls, variable holding A comment display (announcement display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the expected degree of hitting against the ball, the type of variation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can enter more game balls into the starting hole, and the profit of the game parlor can be increased. In addition, by entering a game ball into the starting hole, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the judgment result, the variation type, etc. can be determined from the contents of the comment, so that the player can receive benefits (information that will be benefits). It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, as one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (announcement B mode) is set so that the game is played so as not to generate the reserved ball from the state where the color of the reserved ball is changed. In this holding performance, the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved pattern is displayed, and the position of the reserved pattern displayed when the variable lid pattern P wins next to the reserved pattern whose color is changed. By displaying , the player is notified that the game will be played so as not to cause the ball to be held. In addition, the content suggesting that the number of held balls is not increased is also displayed by the comment display.

In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and the total number of reserved symbols up to eight is the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). , and an area in which the reserved pattern is displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area where the reserved design is displayed, the pedestal design is displayed at the position where the reserved design is displayed, and even if the reserved design is not displayed in the area where the reserved design is displayed configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved patterns are displayed, four variable lid patterns P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved patterns are displayed even at normal times, and each variable lid is displayed. In the pattern P, numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls are displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable cover pattern P in this way, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 8 even in a state where the reserved pattern is not displayed by the numeric information of the variable cover pattern P. can do. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is also varied by generating the reserved ball and displaying the reserved pattern. In the holding effect which is the normal mode at the normal time, the variable cover pattern P displayed at the position where the fifth holding pattern is displayed is changed to non-display when the number of the holding balls becomes three. After that, similarly, the 6th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable cover pattern P is variably displayed so as not to be displayed, that is, the variable cover pattern P is variably displayed so that two reserved patterns are available for three or more reserved balls. be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbols is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

In addition, a special holding performance is executed in which the variable rule of the variable cover pattern P is changed according to the period during which the held ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variation type displayed variably. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that a special holding effect is being executed according to the variable rule of the variable cover pattern P. In addition, the special pending effect is also set according to the result of the judgment result of the pending preliminary judgment, the variation type, and the result of the judgment result of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner and the variation type being executed. By varying the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a win or predict the type of variation.

In addition, in this control example, even if the game ball is launched to the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, the second ball entrance 640 (motorized role) 640a is in the open state), but this is not the only option. Arrangement of nails or the like may be set so as to form a flow path that easily bends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a lottery operation using only the second special symbols, or to perform a game such as a game in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Furthermore, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 461. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured so that the first special symbol and the first special symbol are alternately varied, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol is prioritized. It is different from the first control example in that the state to be varied and the order of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are varied depending on the game state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 425 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when a ball enters from the opening 710a, the first ball entering Although the ball is distributed to the opening 64 and the second ball entrance 640, in the second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are used as they are. It is different in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 426 to 430, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the content of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The difference is that the content of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 428. FIG. In the first control example, the special symbols in which the start of variation is executed are configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the second control example, the second special symbol is preferentially varied. The difference is that it has been changed to execute.

Figures 426(a) and 426(b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when the special symbol variation continues the variation execution in the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 428(b), the effect display is continuous effect to run. A continuous effect is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on winning during execution of the continuous effect.

FIG. 428(a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 428(a), in the second control example, a small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81 displays the pedestal symbol m0 during execution. In the region Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and the reserved symbols are displayed. Characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing an effect having a story with these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Also, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. - 特許庁A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be given later with reference to FIGS. 427 and 429. FIG.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous production will be described. Figure 428 (c) (d) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 426(c), when the second special symbol variation is executed during execution of the first special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 426(d), in the first special symbol is interrupted, and a special performance with a second special symbol variation is performed during the suspension period. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 428(b) is a diagram showing how the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol is fluctuating during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 428(b), the ball on hold is displayed in red. Further, in the display area Dm, shellfish K1, shellfish K2, and shellfish K3 are displayed in a display mode with a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that it is the special effect execution period. Further, a white reserved design is displayed on the third reserved design pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved design pedestal m5. , the continuous effect period interrupted by the special effect period is resumed.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous production period will be described with reference to FIGS. 426(c) and (d). In the second control example, if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 even during execution of the variation with the first special symbol, the variation with the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in Figure 426 (c), while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2, the first special symbol as shown in Figure 426 (d) interrupts the continuous performance during the variation execution of , and executes the special performance during the variation execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and a special effect is started, the number of pending balls is configured to change color only during the special effect period. there is Shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a story-telling effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the player has entered the special presentation period from the continuous presentation period, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous performance with the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special performance with the second special symbol, and is restarted as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2 during the special performance period is completed, the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and the special performance period The interrupted continuous performance period is resumed.

The relationship between continuous effects and background display will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 427(a) to (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during special symbol variation and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous effect period. In the second control example, when the background mode in which the continuous effect is being executed is changed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 429 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous rendering period. As shown in FIG. 429, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol, the background mode is set to the mountain mode from the sea mode which was the period of the continuous effect. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. . In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous performance in the sea mode is being executed!", telling the player that the sea mode is in the continuous performance period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Also, in the display area Dma, "Push the button to change the background" is displayed so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is fluctuating.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 430(a). FIG. 430(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. This second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (Fig. 428(a)). In the winning information related process (see Z2255 in FIG. 437), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 437: Yes), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF If there is (Z5004 in FIG. 437: No), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 437) and used to determine execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 233).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of pending balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the prize information received this time are stored. Presence or absence of execution of continuous production is defined. Specifically, the greater the number of currently held balls, the easier it is for the continuous effect to be executed. It is defined so that the continuous effect is more likely to be executed than in the case of indicating .

By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to execute a continuous performance with a long execution period (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations to be executed), and when the continuous performance is executed, the player has a sense of expectation for a big win. can be raised. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with high expectations for the big win, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102 in FIG. 438: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 438), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 438: Yes), it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 438).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the continuous production even for a game ball newly winning during the execution of the continuous production, so that the frequency of executing the continuous production can be increased. In addition, since the period in which the continuous performance is executed can be made longer than the reserved upper limit number (four) of the special symbol 1, the player can be informed which reserved symbols the continuous performance is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In addition, in the present control example, the above-described contents of the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect are defined, but other contents may be defined. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the timing content of the clock means. may be specified.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), it is preferable that the continuous performance is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. With this configuration, even if the same continuous performance is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win varies depending on the timing (time) at which the continuous performance is executed, so that the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of. Furthermore, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guidance and notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect will be executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is preferable to provide a period reporting means for reporting. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be executed.

In addition, a means for discriminating the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the game ball shooting situation (or ball entering situation) are provided. It may be specified to change the rate at which the continuous effect is executed in association with the determination result, or the plurality of contents described above may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Furthermore, in this control example, stop command processing (see FIG. 438) using the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute continuous performance in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute continuous production, but when determining whether to execute continuous production with winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) and stop command processing (see FIG. 438) It is also possible to configure the selection table to be referred to differently. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) is a special symbol jackpot when the continuous effect is executed rather than the selection table referred to in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) It is good to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous performance is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the big win, and the more the game becomes more interesting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 430(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, an effect counter group 223aa, a continuous effect flag 223ab, a continuous effect in progress flag 223ac, a continuous effect interruption flag 223ad, a continuous effect update area 223ae, The difference is that an effect number counter 223af, an effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time reduction counter 223ai, a fluctuation number counter 223j, an operation invalid flag 223ak, and a state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The production counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of production counter means. This effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selection of effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selection of various advance notice effects, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa has a range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. A random value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHz) at least for each effect counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are used by the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the effect variation pattern (the variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various types of advance notice effect. The counter values are updated so that they are not synchronized. A plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated within the range of 0 to 149. Every second (every 1 msec), an update process is performed so that the values are different.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected within one main process. Even in such a case, the same counter value is referred to, and the selected effects are prevented from being biased. If it is desired to synchronize the aspects, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in this control example, a plurality of counters with different counter value update patterns are used. may be configured to select With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the production counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) of the audio lamp control device 113, when it is determined to execute the continuous effect (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes), the stop command processing of the audio lamp control device 113 ( In FIG. 438), when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5110 in FIG. 438: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 437), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 440) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) Z5204 of 441) is set to OFF when the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 of FIG. 442) is executed (see Z5401 of FIG. 442).

That is, the continuous effect flag 223ab determines whether to execute continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main controller 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is determined, and the fact that the determination result indicates that the continuous performance is to be executed is held until the next timing for setting the variation display corresponding to the variation of the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

In this control example, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437), it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 437). ), the continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed in the set state, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the continuous performance is to be started in the current variable display, and the continuous performance is based on the result of the lottery. may be configured to determine the variable display to start. By configuring in this way, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous effect is started are differentiated (the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64). After that, the continuous performance can be started with a variable display in which the continuous performance is not executed), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

Further, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance is started can be brought close to each other, so that the ball entering the ball to be the target of the continuous performance can be brought closer. It is possible to make the player easily comprehend. Therefore, in order to execute a continuous effect, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 enthusiastically during the fluctuation of the special symbol (during the execution of the fluctuation display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to a continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display being executed is determined, and the conditions under which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device Only when the variable display displayed at 81 has a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to see, the performance corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous performance. It should be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous performance is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 441) is executed to set the display continuous effect command. (Z5406 in FIG. 442), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 442).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 443), and in the stop command process (see FIG. 438), no more When it is determined that the continuous effect will not continue (Z5106 in FIG. 438: No or Z5110: No), it is set to OFF (see Z5116 in FIG. 438).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, a brief description will be given of an event in which the continuous effect is interrupted. In this control example, the game state is a normal state (not a probability variable state or a time saving state), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed. configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is digested. It is configured so that the game property (the type of special symbol variation to be executed) is different between the probability variable state and the time saving state in which the ball is likely to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, even if the game state is normal, in order to temporarily make it easier to receive the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit The electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640a and restricting the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640a is opened for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640a while performing continuous performance using a plurality of pieces of winning information relating to the first special symbol, There was a case where the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed in spite of the fact that the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. There is a problem that the content of the effect being executed differs from the result of the lottery for the special symbols, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol ( It is configured to restart the interrupted continuous performance when the variation of special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbols are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrustful.

This continuous effect interrupt flag 223ad is set when the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 443: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 443). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, the "waiting" display (interruption display mode in FIG. 428(b)) to indicate that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third pattern display device 81 ma) is set (Z5508 in FIG. 443). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 441: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5304 in FIG. 441 ).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first special symbol (special figure 1) is preferentially changed (lottery ) is performed when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, the continuous production is interrupted, and the timing when the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2 Since it is possible to resume the continuous production that has been interrupted at the timing when the fluctuation of is completed), the fluctuation of the first special design (special design 1) without being involved in the fluctuation situation of the second special design (special design 2) It is possible to execute continuous production corresponding to.

In addition, when the continuous performance is interrupted based on the fact that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the execution of the continuous performance, the player is notified that the continuous performance is suspended. is configured to inform the player of the continuous performance, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the sudden termination of the continuous performance and allowing the player to play while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, the background of the display screen is changed to the "sea background". ” is changed to another background (“mountain background”, “river background”), data for internally updating the continuous effect is stored.

As described above with reference to FIG. 224(a), in this control example, only when the "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the continuous effect is performed. configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, the state in which the special symbol variation is not executed (standby state), or immediately after the start of the special symbol variation ( During high-speed fluctuation), the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background of the display screen to "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 429), or "river background ( river mode)”.

Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect dedicated to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol can be varied based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. Various performances can be provided for the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the sea mode is being set and the sea mode exclusive variable performance (for example, continuous notice) is being executed. Then, a process of rewriting the display data relating to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after being variably set is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Therefore, if the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous effect and switches the background of the display screen from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data relating to the continuous effect is erased. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae, and after the background of the display screen is switched to other mode than the "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the background of the display screen is changed to "sea mode" again. mode", the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442), after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 442), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". If so (Z5405 in FIG. 442: No), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 442).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" (Z2871 in FIG. 445: Yes) in the effect return process (see FIG. 445) of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 444), The stored information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 445). After that, when the continuous effect ends, the information stored in the area (display data indicating the mode of effect) is erased (see Z5310 in FIG. 441).

The number-of-effects counter 223af is a counter for indicating a period during which continuous effects are executed (number of special figure fluctuations). This effect number counter 223af, when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command is set (Z5010 in FIG. 437). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440), when it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 441: Yes), continuous effect is set. Continuous effect setting processing for is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407 in FIG. 442) each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442) is executed. With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. The continuous performance can be executed by using the period from the variable display executed in the set state to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous performance.

In this control example, the above-described period is used to execute the continuous effect, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect. Continuous production may be started by varying the production mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1 ) is changed twice, the continuous effect may be executed. Further, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, when setting a new display mode of the variable display (when executing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. Execution determination means may be provided, and the continuous performance may be executed when the execution determination means determines that the continuous performance is to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous performance is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected performance.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This production setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 437) when it is determined that continuous production is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process (processing of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 437) for determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied by starting a new continuous effect while the player is watching the progress of the continuous effect. Then, in the stop command process (see FIG. 438), when it is determined that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 438: Yes), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 438).

In addition, in this control example, determination of whether or not to execute the continuous effect is made at the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, the timing at which the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5102 in FIG. 438: Yes) in the timing of receiving the stop command for termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 438) configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 438), it is also set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 438) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed.

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times the time saving state is set (remaining fluctuation number of special symbols) when the time saving state is set as the game state. This time saving counter 223ai is set to a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the number of time saving times to be set when a state command indicating that the game state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main controller 110. , In the stop command processing (see FIG. 438), when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 438) is executed during time saving processing (see FIG. 439) each time it is executed 1 is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 439).

Then, in the time saving process (see FIG. 439), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), fluctuation 5 is set to the value of the number counter 223aj.

The fluctuation number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed, the special effect (see FIG. 428 (b)) is configured to be performed. ing. This is because in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is intended to give benefits and grants. However, when the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state where the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 (a state where the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the reservation of the special figure 2 is acquired, There is a case where the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is executed in the normal state after the end of the time saving. If the special performance is executed even in such a case, the special performance becomes frequent after the end of the time saving, and it becomes difficult to give the special feeling of the special performance to the player.

To solve the above-described problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol which is executed within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations in the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. It is configured not to set a special effect when it is determined that As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the special performance is frequently generated after the end of the time saving.

In addition, in this control example, the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving is 5 times, that is, the value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set a predetermined number of times Because it is set as , even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (special figure 2) at the upper limit, a special effect is executed by the special figure 2 holding ball acquired during the time saving state. However, conditions other than the above-described control example may be set as conditions for not executing the special effect, for example, the number of balls held in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of time saving, special performance will be executed, so that the player will willingly hold the ball of special figure 2. It can be made to accumulate, and the operation of a game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the condition using the number of fluctuations of the special design is set as the condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special performance. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, if the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends and the game is played without changing the special symbol after it becomes a normal state is finished), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

In addition, game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. When it is determined that the ball has been hit, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as the variable display for the hit ball.

This variation counter 223aj is, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving process (see FIG. 439) (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), the execution of the special effect is restricted (prohibited) special A value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times of pattern variation is set (Z5153 in FIG. 439), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443) for setting the special effect, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is referred to, and when it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 449: No) , the effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 449).

The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during the period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is being executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, the player may mistakenly operate the frame button 22 during the period when the effect (special effect) that is difficult to be executed is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special performance is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443) (Z5504 in FIG. 443), and the first special symbol in the effect setting process (FIG. 441) (Special Figure 1) When setting the variable effect (Z5301 in FIG. 441: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5302 in FIG. 441). While the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the processing for changing the background of the display screen (the processing of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 444) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 240). Skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information indicating the current game state based on a state command output from the main controller 110 . Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 436) that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 436: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 436). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 outputs a state command indicating the current gaming state. etc.), the game state can be appropriately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 431 to 434. FIG. In this second control example, the special symbol variation process (Figure 381) is the special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 431), the special symbol 1 variation start process (Figure 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (Figure 384) are special. The starting winning process (Figure 385) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (Figure 433) and the look-ahead process (Figure 386) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (Figure 434) in the symbol variation start process 2 (Figure 432). This is the main difference.

With reference to FIG. 431, special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 432) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 for the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 432), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not occurring (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the obtained special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z331: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (Z332), and change the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter by calculation. A pending ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). By the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, when it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z331: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation A pending ball number command indicating a value is set (Z338). The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). Incidentally, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 432, special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: Figure 432) in the second control example, special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: Figure 383) and special symbol 2 variation start process (214: Figure 384) in the first control example The difference is that the processing of is collectively performed. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 433, the starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) in the second control example, Z308 and Z316 are not executed with respect to the starting winning process (Z105: FIG. 385) in the first control example. The difference is that the processing is collectively executed by the processing of Z360. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 434, the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is one process in the starting winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new prize winning information (Z361: No), this process ends. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol reserved ball storage area Each value of the counter CS1 is obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results defined in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, the winning determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d, a winning type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Winning information including hit determination result information indicating the acquired hit determination result, hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and variation type information for indicating the variation type determination result. A command is set (Z367), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 435 to 445, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, is performed in contrast to the first control example. The main points are that the process 2 (Z2151) is changed from the command determination process (Z2113) to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), and the variable display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). This is the difference.

Command determination processing 2 (Z2152) in main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination processing 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this process ends. do. Since the processing of Z2203 to Z2207 is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined in the process of Z2206 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information related process (Z2255) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning information related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2253, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the state information indicating the gaming state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of Z2256, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258).If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop. Execute command processing (Z2259). Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2258, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 437, the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not equal to or greater than 2 (Z5003: No), this processing ends.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the value of the read counter is It is set as the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 438, the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 438 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes), the time saving process (Z5115) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the processing during time saving (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is ON (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set OFF (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than 2 (Z5105: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more, winning information Read is executed from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information for a big hit (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no jackpot winning (Z5107: No), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to OFF (Z5116), and this process ends. When it is determined that there is jackpot winning information (Z5107: Yes), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and the execution of continuous performance is determined (Z5109). After executing the processing of Z5109, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the process of Z5116 described above is executed, and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the big hit is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is executed. finish.

With reference to Drawing 439, processing (Z5115) during time saving which is one processing in stop command processing (Z2259) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 in this 2nd example of control is explained. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving process (Z5115).

In the time saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the variation number counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is greater than 0 in the process of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the process of Z5153 is skipped and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 440, variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process in main process 2 (FIG. 435) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z5202, the extracted variation pattern is acquired (Z5203). Next, effect setting processing (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 441, the effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 441 is a flow chart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, in the process of Z5303, when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5303: Yes), the process of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (Z5305: Yes), a continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern without continuous effects is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF (Z5308: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5301, when it is determined that the current variation is not the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), special effect setting processing (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 442, the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 442 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to OFF (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the continuous effect final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background mode is currently set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous effect command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). ), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5408), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is on standby is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 443, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during working hours (Z5501). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). If it is set to ON (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5506). When it is set to OFF (Z5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5501, if it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5501: Yes), or in the process of Z5502, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), The production mode of the normal production corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the processing of Z5509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Also, in the process of Z5505, if it is determined that the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is turned off (Z5505: No), or if it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), skip the processing of Z5507 to Z5508 described above, execute the processing of Z5509, and end this processing.

Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 444 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151). This second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z2851, it is determined whether or not the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803-Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 445, an effect return process (Z2852) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. will be explained. FIG. 445 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production return process (Z2852).

In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether or not the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 444, the description continues. Effect return processing (Z2852) is executed, then sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

<Third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 446 to 449, the above-described third control example will be described. In the above-described third control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous performance is being executed, the continuous performance being executed is interrupted, and the variation of the special figure 2 A configuration is used in which the continuous performance that has been interrupted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol after the end of the is resumed. As a result, the continuous performance can be executed in correspondence with the variation of the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends), so whether the continuous effect is restarted Since it is not possible to make the player's heart beat faster, there has been a demand for further enhancing the presentation effect. On the other hand, in this third control example, based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous production, when the continuous production is interrupted It is configured to determine whether or not to resume the continuous performance in the middle, and to resume the continuous performance based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the continuous performance is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous performance will be resumed while enjoying the special performance executed as the variable performance of the special figure 2. You can increase the effect.

Furthermore, in the third control example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be the target of the continuous performance is a big hit, the continuous performance is configured to be easily restarted. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of times of special performance execution) executed while the continuous performance is interrupted, the easier it is to resume the continuous performance. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous performance to the restart is short, the continuous performance can be easily restarted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the object of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player does not have unnecessary expectations for the big win. In order to do so, it is configured to make it difficult for the continuous performance to be restarted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 446, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification. In this third control example, in addition to the RAM223 of the second control example described above, the difference is that a special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is added. Other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 449), and the value of the counter is referenced in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 448) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 447) (Z5602 in FIG. 448). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 of FIG. 448: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (of FIG. 448 Z5603). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is determined to be 3 or more (Z5602 in FIG. 448: No), that is, while the continuous production is interrupted, the second special symbol variation is executed 3 times or more. If so, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 448), and if it is determined that there is no (Z5605 in FIG. 448: Yes) , the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 448), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

That is, in the continuous production return process (see FIG. 448), when the interrupted continuous production is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the interruption of the continuous production is a predetermined number of times (3 times) or more. , Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to restart the continuous performance, and when the performance result of the continuous performance is out, the continuous performance is restarted. However, since this only disappoints the player, the value of the performance number counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous performance is not restarted. As a result, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player is given a sense of unnecessary expectation for the big win. In addition, when the continuous performance is restarted, expectations for a big win can be made, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding control processing by the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 447 to 449, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 440), is partially changed from the second control example. Mainly different. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of variable display setting executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. Effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 447) in the third control example differs from the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441) in the second control example in that the process of Z5310 is not executed and the special effect process (Z5311 ) and the addition of continuous effect return processing (Z5351). Other processing is the same as in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous production return process (Z5351), first, the reading of the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is executed (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 variation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). When it is determined that it is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is executed. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a win in the read win information (Z5605). When it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), then the process of Z5603 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, when it is determined that there is a win (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed, and this process ends.

The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: Figure 449) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processing is the same processing as in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 to 461. FIG. The fourth control example is different from the above-described control examples in that it has adjusting means for allowing the player to adjust the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 .

First, with reference to FIG. 450, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 450 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 450, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume are provided. They are different and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 will be explained. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and consists of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control section, and a register. Also, the RTC 292 is connected to a power supply for RTC. This power supply for RTC is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button type battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292 . The input/output port is interconnected with the audio lamp controller 113 . The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. The register includes at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

The clock register is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the clock information clocked in the clock register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time presentation.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area of the RAM 223. ) or to store the clock information stored in the time information storage area. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is depressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area. .

As a result, the pachinko hall clerk turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that each pachinko machine 10 can grasp the elapsed time since the power was turned on. can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time presentation can be matched. On the other hand, if the power to some of the pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the opening hours of the hall (for example, to cancel an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 must be depressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the clock information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the time performance from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIGS. 451 and X, a display screen regarding volume adjustment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. Figure 451(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and Figure 451(b) shows that no game is being played. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and X(a) is a special symbol variation executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. X(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the first special symbol variation after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. be.

As shown in FIG. 451(a), when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A comment "Please wait for a while" is displayed as the display mode S1 during recovery, and a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. This volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. 1” is displayed, and the hatched area corresponding to the set value “1” is displayed on the gauge. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451(b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. be. The volume switching display S3 includes a "switch" display indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume decrease display mode S3a indicating that the volume decreases when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a volume decrease display mode S3a which indicates that the volume decreases when the right volume button 23b is pressed. and a volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. The volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b while the volume switching display S3 is being displayed.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when performing a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally manipulating the control contents of the main control device 110 to aim for a big win), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once. Some turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent actions, there is a countermeasure that emits a loud sound when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

However, there are many pachinko machines 10 in recent years that temporarily emit a loud sound as a method of enhancing the performance effect. There was a problem that the store clerk at the amusement arcade would miss hearing. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the setting range of the volume that can be variably set by the player, from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed. It is also configured to output a small sound. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a game machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game emits an unnecessarily small sound, giving a sense of incongruity compared to the surrounding game machines. It can be made easy to be found by a store clerk in the game arcade.

Further, in this control example, since the player is not allowed to adjust the sound volume from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed, illegal It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10 by operating the volume button 23 after the power is turned on.

Specifically, as shown in X(a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. Configure. In this way, although a volume smaller than the volume setting value "1" is internally output, by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen, an illegal It is possible to prevent the player performing the action from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and perceiving that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-fraud measures.

Similarly, as shown in X(b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special symbol fluctuation in the first rotation after the power is turned on (the volume output is smaller than the set value "1"). , the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 453 to 455, the electrical configuration in this fourth control example will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example. The control examples described above are different from each other in that volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a and right volume button 23b) are provided, but otherwise are the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 454(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 454(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example differs greatly from the ROMs of the above-described control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. Other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table that defines volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 . Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 455 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 455, in the volume table 222ca, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power-on is satisfied. A set value (set value "A") that is set when the device is on is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) of the first rotation after the power is turned on is completed. When the set value "A" is set, a sound with a loudness of 15 db (decibel) is output. When the set value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound with a loudness of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 db (decibel) is output. When the set value "3" is set, a sound with a loudness of 85db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "4" is set, a sound with a loudness of 95db (decibel) is output. A sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and when the flag is set to ON, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Alternatively, the time when the power is turned on may be discriminated, and a different setting value may be set as the initial value based on the discrimination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change waiting flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The set sound volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set sound volume, which is set in the initial sound volume setting process (see FIG. 457) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 456). The set value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 457). Also, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 458) of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 459).

The volume operation disable flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is disabled. change) is disabled. This volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 253) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, from 10:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.) (Z6002 in FIG. 457: Yes), it is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 457) and referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) (Z6107 in FIG. 459). If it is determined that it is set to ON in the process of Z6107 (see Z6107 in FIG. 459), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 451(a)) is displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 451(b)). ) is set (Z6110 in FIG. 459). Then, it is set to off (Z5122 in FIG. 461) in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 461) executed in stop command processing 4 (FIG. 460). That is, when the special symbol variation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

The volume change waiting flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, first, it is necessary to press the volume button 23 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the volume switching display S3. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is erroneously pressed during a game.

In addition, when the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (depressed state) at the time of power-on, the maximum A sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at a volume or a volume higher than the maximum volume set by operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clearing and aiming for a winning random value.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to output the game sound at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation until one variation at the time of power-on is completed. When the special symbols are variably displayed at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to output a sound such as BGM or a sound effect (audio for performance), and the volume is set to the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加may be displayed, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23 . By configuring in this way, when a game is started at the opening of the amusement arcade after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the previous day's volume setting), resulting in a high volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by being output in . Furthermore, by setting the volume lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware of the low volume while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. It can be made aware that it is configured. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching the volume to a level lower than the minimum volume by switching to the demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on. Furthermore, after the game is started (variation of the special symbols starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume smaller than the minimum volume is continued, the changed special symbols The display color (volume pattern and volume button (volume up with right operation, volume down with left operation) pattern) on the volume setting screen is variable depending on the winning lottery result and the pending memory, but depending on the lottery result (prefetching result) It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for winning is notified by letting the player win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enjoy a game with a quiet volume until a change or storage with a high degree of expectation is made, and to increase the volume at the timing when the degree of expectation becomes high.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 456 to Z324, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In the fourth control example, compared to the first control example, initial volume setting processing (Z2051) is added to the startup processing, and volume setting processing (Z2171) and sound editing/output processing (Z2109) are added to the main processing. The main differences are the addition of processing and the addition of volume-related processing (Z5120) to the stop command processing, which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

Referring to FIG. 456, startup processing executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 456) in the fourth control example differs from the startup process (FIG. 412) in the first control example in that the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 457, the initial sound volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether it is during business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON. (Z6005), this processing ends.

Main processing 4 executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. FIG. The main processing (FIG. 458) in the fourth control example differs from the main processing (FIG. 395) in the second control example in that volume setting processing (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 459, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 458) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 459 is a flow chart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether or not the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to OFF (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation disable flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for showing the volume gauge and adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z6107, if the volume operation disable flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for showing the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this process ends.

Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 460 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command process 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 438) in the second control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 461, volume-related processing (Z5120), which is one processing in stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 461 is a flow chart showing the contents of volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation disable flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z5122), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is OFF (Z5121: No), the process of Z5122 is not executed and the present process ends.

<Regarding the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 462 to 482. FIG. In the fifth control example, control processing regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 142) will be described. Only differences with respect to the first control example will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the fifth control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the initial operation of the tilting device 310, error processing during the initial operation, control processing and error processing in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game Processing will be explained.

With reference to FIGS. 462(a) and 462(b), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. 462(a) shows that in the initial operation (tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 110) when the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223db of the tilting device 310, which will be described later, is set to 0 ( The display mode of the abnormality notification displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (error display).

As shown in FIG. 462(a), even if the operation period for completing the initial operation of the tilting device 310 has passed, the origin sensor of the operation device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position. The text "Button return error A, please call a staff member" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify hall employees or the like that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error display as shown in FIG. 462(a) is displayed. there is In addition, although the details will be described later, the normal game in which the player may interfere with the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding down the operation with the hand etc. In some cases, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not displayed immediately, but a predetermined specific condition (for example, every three fluctuations of the special symbol, the tilting device 310 is operated four times If an abnormality is continuously detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), an error is notified, and the progress of the game is continued even if it is not a mechanical abnormality. It is configured to be able to suppress defects that would otherwise interfere.

As shown in FIG. 462(a), the error display at the time of the initial operation is identifiable as "button return error A", so that mechanical (including control-related) abnormalities are displayed. It is designed so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 462(b), during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), after the tilting device 310 is operated in the game effect, the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the movement (movement) to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even after the movement to the origin position is completed, an error will not be displayed immediately, and an internal error will occur. is set to the status indicating the detected state, and thereafter, an operation to move to the origin position is performed every three fluctuations of the special pattern, and if it can be moved to the origin position four times in succession, the third pattern display device An error message is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 to inform players and hall employees that an error has occurred in the tilting device 310. be done.

Here, by displaying a character "button return error B" different from that during the initial operation, it is configured so that an abnormality during normal game can be easily identified. As described above, in this control example, the error display is executed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that interferes with the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured in such a way as to suppress frequently-executed failures. Also, when it is confirmed that the tilting device 310 does not have an abnormality by executing an error display during a normal game, the player is playing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 465, the relationship between the operation of tilting device 310, variation of special symbols, and touch sensor effects will be described. FIG. 463 shows a period during which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin 10 is a timing chart in an example in which detection is not made by the origin sensor even after the return is completed.

When the variable display of normal reach out A (variation time (variation period) 30000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later. and match the value of the effect counter 223h that has been acquired, a tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 470(a)), which will be described later, is determined. The tilting motion scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 470(a)) shows the position where the tilting device 310 descends to the position shown in FIG. , and the highest position (see FIG. 169) are repeated at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and then the operation of descending to the origin position shown in FIG. 159 is executed (set).

When normal reach out A is executed, 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (T1), the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol in the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol. temporarily stopped (stopped). In the ready-to-win display mode, a pattern simulating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Here, for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the tilting operation 320 was pressed and the frame button 22 was pressed, which will be described later. An operation valid period (T5) is set during which the detection is determined to be valid when detected by the detection sensor 324 that does.

As shown in FIGS. 463 and 470(a), after 18 seconds (18000 ms) (T1) from the start of the normal reach deviation A, the drive motor 342 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 159) by 210 degrees. By step rotation, the disk cam 344 rotates 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and moves to the cam release position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 470(a)). ). After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 470(a))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 167) by 20 steps, so that the disc cam 344 rotates counterclockwise 20 degrees to the unlocked position. (see FIG. 169) (see action pointer 3 (see FIG. 470) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaged position to the unlocked position, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise) as shown in FIG. As a result, the rotation claw member 347 is rotated clockwise, and the lock (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotation claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated by the torsion spring 315 . is raised by the biasing force of In this case, when the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, a force in the longitudinal direction is applied to the tilting device 320 to increase the lifting force and improve the lifting speed. The driving motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and the tilting device 320 waits until it moves to the highest position (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 470(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169), so that the disk cam 344 rotates counterclockwise 50 degrees and moves downward from the highest position (see FIG. 169) by 50 degrees. It is moved to the swung downward position (see FIG. 170) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 470(a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is again driven 50 steps in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 170) to rotate the disk cam 344 clockwise by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is moved again. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 470(a))).

After that, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven again from the highest position to the tilted-down position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 470(a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 moves from the tilted-down position to the maximum position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 470(a))). After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for one second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 470(a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 477) is executed, and driving is performed based on the later-described origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 471(a)). By driving the motor 342 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 169), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the driving force is applied in the direction in which the tilting device 320 descends to the origin position. is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 463, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so as not to be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already described in the 18th embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b is idly rotated so that the drive motor 342 is driven. Also, the disc cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 471(a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal (abnormal state not notified to the outside) tilting device 310 malfunction, which will be described later.

As described above, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position due to being held by the player, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be operated by the structure of the movable clutch 343c. Damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343b, etc. due to idling can be suppressed. Further, by configuring it so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that there is an abnormality in the return-to-origin operation, it is possible to internally identify an abnormal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 464, when the effect of raising tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 463) is executed, the origin sensor is is not turned on, and the control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" will be described. In FIG. 464, when the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three variations of the special symbol (special symbol) are performed. It is a timing chart when

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the driving motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three variations of the special symbol as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, until the origin sensor is detected, the value of the tilting operation status must be maintained at "4", and the origin sensor must be turned on by retrying four times (retrying every three fluctuations four times). , the error display shown in FIG. 462(b) is executed.

As a result, an effect in which the tilting device 310 rises is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation and the origin position is detected. Even if an abnormality occurs in which the movement to is not performed, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol variation is performed a specified number of times (three times) without immediately announcing the abnormality as in the case of the abnormality at the time of the initial operation. However, if it is determined that the player has not been able to continuously move to the origin position, an error is displayed. It is possible to suppress the problem of being busy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing when it becomes true will be described. FIG. 465 is a timing chart showing operations of the tilting device 310 that are executed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. A change in the special symbol is started, a notice effect is selected in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective, and an effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player puts his/her hand over the touch sensor 290 or the like. At the timing when it is determined that the operation is performed and the touch sensor 290 is detected to be ON, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 465 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has passed, the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status remains set to "4". . As a result, the retry operation is continuously performed every three fluctuations, and control for resolving the malfunction of the tilting device 310 can be performed.

The player normally operates the shooting handle with the right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with the left hand. When the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is conceivable that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand. By causing the tilting device 310 to perform the origin detection operation in , the origin detection operation is executed in a state in which the tilting device 310 is released from being held, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is on. The origin detection operation may be executed in such a manner that the origin detection operation is performed in a state in which the player's holding is more reliably released. In addition, not only the touch sensor 290, but also the frame button 290 may be used, and the third pattern display device 81 may execute an advance notice effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). Alternatively, an effect may be executed in which a three-dimensional code or the like is read by a mobile phone or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Naturally, the effect may be such that the user is instructed to use both hands by voice.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 466 to 471. FIG. FIG. 466 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting device 310 has the same structure as that already described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 222, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the locking of the tilting device 310 at the lower limit position to prevent the upward movement is released. When the locking is released, the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the driving motor 342, is assisted by the vibration force in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is lifted to the highest position by the biasing force of the spring. .

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the origin position by rotating the driving motor 342 in a direction opposite to the upward rotation. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 159), and the lifting of the tilting device 310 is restricted.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. , the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state). , it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position and the player further presses it down, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left detection sensor 324L and the left detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , the tilting device 310 can be determined to be operated at the lower limit position by the player.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position, but also when it is regulated at the lowest position. It can be used for various performances. For example, if the tilting device 310 is raised and the effect of pressing down is set to have a high probability of being executed during the variation of the special symbol in which the result of the success/failure determination is a hit, the tilting device 310 can increase the expectation of the result of the success/failure determination. can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the back side to the front side, vibrating the tilting device 310. , to execute an effect in which the player can feel vibration when touching the tilting device 310. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 is lifted, it is lifted by the urging force of the spring against the force of gravity. , the vibration from the voice coil motor 352 gives a lifting force, and the problem that the lifting force is weakened by its own weight can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example, the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 467(a). FIG. 467(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an operation effect selection table 222da, a tilting motion scenario table db, an origin detection motion A table 222dcc, an origin detection motion B table 222dd, and an initial tilting motion table 222de are added. are doing.

The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation details) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 469(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. The operation effect selection table 222da is set with a judgment value of the effect counter 223h for determining whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability according to the variation type of the special symbol. A tilt action scenario type is set for a determination value for executing an operation effect. The tilting action scenario includes an operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310. and an operation valid start time (operation valid start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid ends. That is, depending on the action data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is to be executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are determined. A valid period (T5) is set to effectively determine the operation when the button is pressed by the user.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach loss A", the value of the production counter 223h is acquired and the determination of whether to execute the operation production is operated. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the effect selection table 222da (when the value of the effect counter 223h acquired is any one of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. A tilting motion scenario A table 222bd1, which will be described later, is selected, the tilting motion timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, and the effective operation start time (T3) is set. ) is set to 23300 ms, and the valid operation end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach miss A", the value of the production counter 223h is acquired to determine whether to execute the operation production. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the selection table 222da (when the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 149"), tilting described later as an operation scenario of the tilting device The action scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilt action timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation presentation start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation valid start time (T3) is set to 41500 ms. is set, and 45900 ms is set to the effective operation end time (T4). In this way, according to the variation type of the special symbol, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting motion scenario table 222db sets origin detection motion tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da and the tilting motion scenario. A data table has been set up to

FIG. 469(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting motion scenario table 222db. The tilting motion scenario table 222db includes a tilting motion scenario A table 222db1, a tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection motion A table 222db3, and an origin detection motion B table 222db4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is a table that defines the motion contents in the tilting motion scenario A, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222da when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 470(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbol, the operation of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is started.

The operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is to read out the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 480) during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the time of the tilting operation timer 223db in order from "1" of the operation pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 480). ), the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes “10” (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (18000 ms) has come after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (210 steps in the backward direction for 2100 ms ) is executed, and the cam disengaging operation (the releasing member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 so that the second protruding portion 344c3 moves to the upper portion of the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 167). (ie, movement of the second protruding portion 344c3 to the upper portion of the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 167) without operating the rotary pawl member 347) to reach the disengaged position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped for 3000 ms) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer "3" (20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second projecting portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward to , rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the engagement with the tilting device 320), the disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocking position, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the motion data with the motion pointer of "4" (suspended for 500ms) is executed, waits for rising, and the motion data with the motion pointer of "5" (50 steps can be moved forward for 500ms). ) is executed to the position shown in FIG. 170, and the movement pointer is set to the position shown in FIG. The motion data with the motion pointer of "7" (movable 50 steps in the forward direction for 500 ms) is executed, and the position shown in Fig. 170 is reached again. 170, and the motion data of the motion pointer "9" (for 1000 ms 169 is executed, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 reaches the highest position. After performing the fanning motion, the motion of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 463, when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts to rise, the detection is considered valid. After being discriminated, the third symbol display device 81 displays a specific notice performance (for example, a performance notifying the degree of expectation of winning, etc.), and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also produce sound effects matching the notice performance. and the lamp lighting mode is lit. After the tilting device 320 starts to rise, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the operation effective period (T5) of 3.5 seconds elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation is executed by the operation A table 222db3, when the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by the pressing operation, and the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin is detected. An operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed to move the disc cam 344 to the initial position (origin position).

In addition, when the tilting device 320 is held by the player at a raised position or the like and the transmission gear 343b rotates idly, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is turned ON, so that the position of the disk cam 344 is determined to be the initial position. to the origin position is executed.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is a table defining motion details in the tilting motion scenario B, and stores motion data when the tilting device 310 moves when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting action scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222da when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 470(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbol, the operation of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is started.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 sequentially reads the action contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" (Z2953 in FIG. 480) during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223db. , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "11" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (38000 ms) has come after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (50 steps in the forward direction for 500 ms ) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (for 200ms 20 steps in the forward direction) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "4" (20 steps in the backward direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "5" ( 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "6" (20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer is "7". (movable 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (movable 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and this operation Three repeated motions from pointers "3" to "8" are set as a fanning motion, and the motion data of the motion pointer "9" (movable 120 steps forward in 1200 ms) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. , the operation data with the operation pointer "10" (stopped for 2000 ms) is executed, the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

By configuring in this way, the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion during the ready-to-win effect, prompting the player to operate, and changing the tilting motion according to the variation type, while the operation effect is being executed. Furthermore, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation is generated, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, the type of tilting motion scenario is set according to the type of variation pattern. may be configured to change and set the selection rate depending on the success/failure determination result by allocating and setting the determination value of the effect counter 223h. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario is executed in which the probability of being selected is set to be higher when the result of the win/loss determination is a hit than when the result is a miss, thereby allowing the player to see the result of the win/fail determination. can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type is set in which the tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, and then the robot is moved to the origin position without being raised to the highest position. good too. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set to be easily selected when the result of the right/fail determination is a hit, and when the result of the right/fail determination is a failure, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is set. By setting it so that it is easy to be selected, it is possible to raise expectations for a big win by performing a fanning action.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation data is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward in 1900 ms) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 is set when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is turned on (Z2957: Yes). Alternatively, when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No), based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3, set 1900ms as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db and set 3 to the tilting operation status 223da. By doing (Z2959), the contents of the operation of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 are read out (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation processing (FIG. 481, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The return-to-origin operation is performed until there is (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 at the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting motion scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation data is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward in 1900 ms) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222db4, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is turned on (Z2957: Yes). , or when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set to 1900 ms, and the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959). Until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0, the operation contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 are read (Z2974), and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), the return-to-origin operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeating the origin detection when the origin detection operation is not performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. there is

FIG. 471(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry motion table 222dc, similarly to the motion of the above-described tilting motion scenario table, the motion pointer becomes “2” (the tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”. This is performed until the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc terminates when the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2973: No) in the origin detection operation described above, sets the tilting operation status 223da to 4 (Z2975), 3 is set to the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2976), and 4 is set to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977). , When the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983). The operation time (900 ms) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986), and if the value after the subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection variation counter 223dc is Set to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 reaches the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 464, the above operation is set once every three times when the special symbol changes, and if the origin detection is not performed, it is performed up to four times.

The tilting initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 471(d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting initial motion table 222dd. In the tilting initial motion table 222dd, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”, and the tilting motion timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes). or until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms ) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting the operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 468, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 468 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example. In the second control example, unlike the first control example described above, a tilting operation status 223da, a tilting operation timer 223db, a detection variation counter 223dc, a detection check counter 223dd, a tilting operation flag 223de, and a The difference is that a timer 223df is added.

Information for determining the operation state of the tilting device 310 is stored in the tilting operation status 223da. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, and becomes the initial operation state.

The tilting action status 223da determines the process to be executed according to the value of the tilting action status 223da in the tilting device control process (Z2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting motion status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting motion is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is being executed after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting action status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting action is in the operation effecting state during the special symbol variation. When the value of the tilting action status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the production backtracking action process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting action is during the returning action after the scenario action.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is being retryed to detect the origin. If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", and the execution of this process ends, but the initial operation and return operation described above are performed. In this error state, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 478), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the start of the special symbol variation (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting action is in the state of operation production during the fluctuation action of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial movement process (Z2907: FIG. 479), 0 is set when the tilting movement timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2933: Yes) and when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2933: Yes). The tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation rendering process (Z2909: FIG. 480), when the tilting operation timer 223db is set to 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 ( Z2961: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation enters a standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation processing (Z2911: FIG. 481), when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2971: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilting operation is in a standby state, and this processing exit.

When the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 4, and the tilting operation is being retryed. becomes.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482), after the special symbol starts to fluctuate (Z2981: No), if there is an origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972 ), the tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 ( Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting motion timer 223db is a timer for counting the motions of the tilting device 310 . When the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223db is set to an initial operation time (Z2061), and is repeatedly updated by being incremented by one each time the main process (FIG. 473) is executed.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting motion status is "0", the motion time is set according to the tilting motion scenario table (Z2923). When the value of the tilting action status is "2", the tilting action timer 223db is set to 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting action flag is ON (Z2957: Yes) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin is reached. The time for the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. During the retry operation when the tilting operation status value is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc.

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 performs a retry operation when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection variation counter 223dc is tilted when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the production backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation.

During the retry operation, when the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols (Z2982: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. conduct. First, the detected variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and if the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the variation requires a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table. After setting (Z2985), if the result of subtracting 1 (Z2986) from the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (up to 4 times). , the detection variation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd is tilted when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the production backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

The tilting operation flag 223de indicates that when the tilting action scenario A or the tilting action scenario B is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pushed down by the player during the operation valid period and is moved to the origin position, and the rotating claw member is set. 347 is a flag indicating that it has been locked. The tilting operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed during the operation effective period by the processing of Z2956 of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223de is determined to be ON by the processing of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the return-to-origin operation is executed, it is set to OFF (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 has been pressed as a switch for effect when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, when it is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). This is a timer for determining the valid period for validly determining the detection of the switch 324 . When the variation pattern is determined, the advance notice effect using the tilting device 320 as a switch for effect is determined as the advance notice effect, based on the start timing of the effective period. Data corresponding to the defined validity period is stored. When data corresponding to the effective period is set in the depression notice effective timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 474), the cam disengagement operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 will be executed by the operation sound of the cam disengagement, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the pressing notice valid timer 223df is updated by being decremented by one by pressing Z2873 (see FIG. 474).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. Compared to the first control example, in the fifth control example, a part of the start-up processing (FIG. 472) and the main processing (FIG. 473) are added, and frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 409) was changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: Fig. 474), sensor input processing (Z2813: Fig. 410) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: Fig. 475), retry processing during touch input (Z2860 : Fig. 476), tilting device control processing (Z2891: Fig. 477), operation effect setting processing (Fig. 478), tilting initial motion processing (Z2907: Fig. 479), during operation effect processing (Z2909: Fig. 480), effect backward motion The difference is that processing (Z2911: FIG. 481) and retry operation processing (Z2913: FIG. 482) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 472, startup processing (FIG. 472) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example differs from the startup process (FIG. 394) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the startup process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013, the tilt initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 471(d)) provided in the ROM 222 Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and main processing (FIG. 473), which will be described later, is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 479) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game can be started in a state in which the initial operation is executed and the game machine is moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the turning on of the left side detection sensor 353L. Control can be stably performed.

Main processing (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing (FIG. 473) in the fifth control example, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing (FIG. 395) in the first control example. ) is changed to Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 474, regarding frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474) which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 473) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 474 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), first, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the special symbol determined to execute the pressing notice is currently changing (pressing notice is being set). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not execution of the advance notice of pressing has been decided. If it is determined that the press notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the press notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice is being executed, and whether the push advance notice valid timer 223df is greater than 0 or not. If it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in effect (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, it is determined whether the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player and the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display press-down notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. It should be noted that in the processing of Z2881, if the advance notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the processing of Z2884, if it is determined that the player has not pressed the button (Z2884: No). , skip other processes, and shift to the process of Z2890.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, if it is determined that it is not during the press notice effective period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notice valid period, which is the start timing of executing the press notice ( Z2886). A start timer (not shown) is set when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and the start timing of the advance notice is determined by the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is time to start the effective period (Z2886: Yes), the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the depression notice effective timer 223df is set, and the cam disengaging operation is 2100 ms. A backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam releasing operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 does not perform the upward motion, even if the advance notice is given, so that the player can expect the upward performance to be executed.

If it is not the time to start the pressing notice effective period (Z2886: No), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the advance notice effective period of pressing (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing notice effective period timer 223df is zero. If it is determined that it is time to end the pressing notice effective period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the pressing notice valid timer 223df is reset, and a 1500 ms backward rotation operation is set as the return-to-origin operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the process of Z2888, if it is determined that the effective period has not ended (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control processing (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 475, sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in this fifth control example will be described. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in the fifth control example, in contrast to the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410) in the first control example, processes Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed, and retry during touch input. It differs in that processing (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The retry processing during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing the contents of retry processing during touch input (Z2860).

In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 476), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not used for origin detection (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the one-step backward rotation direction (Z2864), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this processing ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing details of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the tilting action timer 223db. In the process of Z2901, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 0 (Z2904), operation effect setting processing (Z2905) is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed. To make it easy to return a tilting device 320 to the origin by retrying the origin return at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand for a shooting handle and the other hand for operating a touch sensor 290). can be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 478, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time rendering start time has not yet reached (Z2921: No), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting motion status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting action scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting action timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. When it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), tilting initial operation processing (Z2907) is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 479, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the details of the tilting initial motion process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial motion process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the initial tilting operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2931 whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the event of an abnormality during the return to origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, unlike during a game, an error is immediately displayed (abnormality processing), so that the malfunction of the tilting device 320 can be found at an early stage. can.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. In the processing of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the process during operation effect (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 480, the operation rendering process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 480 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909).

In the operation rendering process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this processing ends. When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the action content corresponding to the tilting action scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation valid period is not in effect (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing has been detected (Z2955), this processing ends. If it is determined that the depression has been detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2957 that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the processes of Z2958 to Z2960 described above are executed, and this process ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking action process (Z2911) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 481 is a flow chart showing the details of the performance backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2971 that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read out (Z2974), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting action status 223da is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection variation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. In the processing of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), this process ends.

The retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the contents of retry operation processing (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detected variation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detected variation counter 223dc is greater than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection variation counter 223dc to 3, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read out (Z2991), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined at Z2990 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2989, when it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In addition, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or depresses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately moves even if the unlocking operation is performed. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be lifted. As a countermeasure against this, by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward roll; required time 100 ms) as the motion data of the motion pointer 3 (see FIG. 470(a)), which is the unlocking motion, the unlocking motion is performed. is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 168, and the tilting device 320 is configured so as to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Furthermore, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or when the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pushed down by the detection switch 324 or the upper surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed. A touch sensor is arranged to determine whether the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if it is pressed), it waits without unlocking and waits until it turns off. may be configured to perform the unlocking operation at the timing when the switch is turned off. In addition, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed down or touched by the player, the tilting device 320 is released from the tilting device 320 by display notification, voice, etc. may be configured to notify the

<Sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 483 to 507, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, when a jackpot A is executed in which the probability of success/failure determination is set to a low probability (an electric sapo is given up to 100 times) after the jackpot game, the even-numbered symbols are displayed, Although it was notified that it was a jackpot A, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the jackpot will be executed first. The stop pattern of A, the performance during the big win, etc. are shown as if the big win B1 or the big win B2, and the performance as if a high probability game state (probability variable game state) is set even after the big win game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. In addition, in the sixth control example, even when the third pattern of the even-numbered pattern indicating the jackpot A is displayed, the jackpot type is actually set to the probability variable game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion performances for informing is set, the type of the promotion performance is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed after that according to the execution contents of the promotion performance (for example, the presence or absence of promotion, etc.) This is different from the first control example in that the types of effects are switched and set. Note that detailed descriptions of the same points as in the first control example are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 483, an example of the stop display mode of the special symbols of the win/loss determination result of the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 483(a) shows that the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved pattern h1 stored as the first reserved ball is a jackpot A, and the reserved pattern h2 of the reserved ball displayed as the third This is an example showing a case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. FIG. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, the even numbered symbols are normally displayed, but the odd numbered symbols are stopped and displayed at the start of the variation. The display is switched as follows. That is, the same stop symbols as when the variation of the special symbols for the big win B1 is executed are displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 483(b), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time by saying "Super jackpot!! Look forward to the next one!!" A notification as if it were a jackpot is executed. As a result, since the held ball that becomes the big win A is actually stored even when the big win A is executed, the performance as if the big win B1 was executed is executed even when the big win A is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the ratio of execution of the big win B1 is higher than the design value, thereby improving the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 484(a), a description will be given of an effect mode when the variation of the special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state (game state with low-probability electrical support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. FIG. 484(a) shows the state in which the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored (reserved pattern h2). It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the design display device 81 .

As shown in FIG. 484(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "during super time" are displayed when the variable probability gaming state is in spite of the time-saving gaming state. is displayed, and further, the characters ``Increase in the degree of expectation for big win'' are displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is displayed instead of actually setting the probability of success/failure determination to be high. As a result, the player is provided with a false notification that is different from the actual one, thereby suppressing a problem that significantly damages the player's trust. In this way, it is also possible to call the notification substantially similar to the variable probability gaming state as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 484(b) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 that was suspended in FIG. 484(a). The reserved symbol h2 is the result of judging whether or not the jackpot A is successful, and the reserved balls that will be the jackpot (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) are not stored. In the same way as in , the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is made is executed.

FIG. 485(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot A jackpot game is executed in the example shown in FIG. 484(b) is set. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode; FIG. As a display mode indicating the time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 485(a), the character "chance (100 times)" is displayed and the special symbol variation is changed 100 times and stops. It is notified that the game is set. In addition, the number (number of times) is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern is changed once.

FIG. 485(b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the big win game in the big win B1 or the big win B2 is executed. As a display mode suggesting that the variable probability game state is set, the characters "under super time (during variable probability)" are displayed to inform the player that the game state is the variable probability game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode is partially different between when the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored and when the variable probability gaming state is set. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the same characters (for example, only during supertime). In addition, the game state is notified by the background color without displaying the characters, and the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state are set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes the big hit is stored. , Similar colors (for example, red background color (probability variable game state), pink background color (time-saving game state in the state in which the retained balls that become big hits are stored))) may be configured to display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is as if it is a variable-probability gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 487, the promotion effect executed during the big winning game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 486(a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big win!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific prize winning port 65a is opened to inform the player that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 486(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-winning promotion effect is that 10 balls enter the specific winning port 65a in one round, which is the end condition for one round. Based on the fact that the game ball further wins the specific prize winning opening 65a during the period until the opening/closing door 65b is changed to the closed state, the promotion performance is executed in which the information on the jackpot type is reported.

In the over winning promotion effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Put the ball into the attacker and get the key!!" There is a display suggesting that the symbol will be displayed (given to the player). In addition, by displaying the text "Treasure box chance when 11 keys are accumulated!" is notified to the player. Since one key is displayed each time the specific winning opening 65a is won, one over winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, the "Treasure box chance!!" is executed by over-winning. Here, "Treasure box chance!!" stores a reserved ball that, when the treasure box is empty and a treasure is displayed, the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-described jackpot. It is reported that it is a big win A (promoted) in the state of being. Further, when no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. When the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot A, the effect of notifying the promotion is not executed. However, based on the memorization of the reserved ball that will become the big win during the big win game, the display mode (the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) informing of the promotion is displayed. may

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81 in the mid-round promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 487(a) shows that when promotion effect during a round is selected, in a specific round (fifth round in this control example), during the round game, "promotion chance!! If you press the button and a school of fish appears, you are lucky. !!” is displayed, a mid-round promotion effect is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (reported) that information regarding the jackpot game type is reported. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 487(b), the type of the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot B2 or a jackpot in a state in which the above-described reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is stored. If it is A, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability game state of "variable GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. be done. It should be noted that, in the case of the jackpot A in the state in which the above-described jackpot holding ball is stored, the characters "Variable probability GET!!" Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81 in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 487(a) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a of the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds have passed) is established)). It is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, FIG. 488(b) is an example of the display mode in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, at the end of the jackpot game (the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the closing condition of the specific prize winning port 65a of the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds elapsed) is established)) Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY!! Super chance time!!" A special display mode in which a shoal of fish swims (a school of fish) is displayed, and after the jackpot game, a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state in a state in which the above-mentioned reserved ball that will be the jackpot is stored. is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, control processing by main controller 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 489 to 490. FIG.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 489(a). The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 489(b). FIG. 489(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222df. A promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to report promotion as an over-winning promotion performance based on the value of a performance counter 223h acquired based on occurrence of over-winning to a specific winning port 65a during a round. This is a lottery table for Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm indicating that the player is suggested to execute the jackpot A as if the jackpot B2 was executed is on. , and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, an effect in which a treasure is displayed in a treasure box) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 490, the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, in contrast to the first control example, the winning fluctuating flag 223dg, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, the big prize counter 223di, the promoted flag 223dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223dk, and the pseudo probability change flag 223dm are respectively. The difference is that they are added. A detailed description of the same configuration as in the first control example is omitted.

The hit fluctuation flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the fluctuation of the special symbol to be the big hit A is being executed in a state where the reserved ball to be the big hit is not stored. When the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is on, if the variable display of the special pattern can be replaced at the timing when the holding ball that will be the big hit by the winning command is newly stored, the odd number pattern is set. A process of switching to a pattern is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that even if there is a variation in the special symbol that results in a big win A, it is a big win B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins a replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big win A is started, and if the reserved ball that becomes the big win is already stored. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop pattern to an odd numbered pattern. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is ON, the odd symbols are switched and set when the special symbols start to fluctuate.

The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big winning game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted effect (an effect of displaying a treasure from a treasure box) has been executed in the over winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress the problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promotion effect is executed.

The promotion performance type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which the type of promotion performance to be executed during the jackpot game is determined when the jackpot game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion performance is stored.

The pseudo-probability variation flag 223dm is such that, when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big hit A is started, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped at the odd-numbered symbol in a state where the reserved balls that become the big win are already stored. It is a flag indicating that the replacement lottery controlled to be displayed has been lost. A promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or a performance (see FIG. 484(a)) is executed as if the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variable game state.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the sixth control example>
Referring to FIG. 491, control processing by the main controller in this sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 393) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 491, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 393) in the first control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the big winning hole (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no incoming ball (Z1120: No), this process ends. With this ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the round, and can also determine over winning.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example>
Control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 491 to 503. FIG. In this sixth control example, command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 396) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493), and variation pattern reception processing (Z2202: FIG. 397) is changed to variation pattern reception. Processing 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 403) is changed to winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495), variable display setting processing (Z2114: FIG. 406) is changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114 502), frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 409) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503), stop pattern switching processing (Z2450: FIG. 494), Stop symbol change process (Z2460: Figure 496), jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: Figure 496), opening process (Z2282: Figure 497), winning ball process (Z2284: Figure 499), round process (Z2286: Figure 500), and ending processing (Z2288: Fig. 501) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 are added and the processes of Z2240 and Z2270 are changed. differ in

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 492, variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), which is one process in command determination process 2 (see FIG. 491) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be output from the main controller 110 attached to the variation pattern command. As the game state, a low-probability electric sapo no game state (normal game state), a variable probability game state (with an electric sapo), and a time-saving game state (a game state with a low-probability electric sapo) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, the display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the process of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the process of Z2431 is not executed, and the process proceeds to Z2227.

Referring to FIG. 494, stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494) which is one process in variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 493) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 494 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that there is no variation in the jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is that of the big win A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the process of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the player has won the replacement lottery (Z2454). When it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery is won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2452, if it is determined that there is no other win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the win fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this process ends. .

In this way, at the time when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big hit A is started, if the reserved ball that becomes the big win is stored, a lottery (discrimination) is executed to determine whether to replace the stopped symbol. determination), the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is lost, stop display is performed with an even number of random numbers, the jackpot game is started, promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or whether the probability variable game state is reached after the jackpot game. A special notification such as

With reference to FIG. 495, winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. Winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example differs from the winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 403) in the first control example in that stop symbol change processing (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 496, the stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 494) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 496 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 496), first, it is determined whether or not the hit fluctuating flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2461: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big win (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that it is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2464, if it is determined that the current period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed and the process ends.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the big hit A starts to fluctuate, even if the held ball that will become the big hit is not stored, the held ball that will become the big hit will be newly changed during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). , if it is the high-speed fluctuation period of the special symbol, replacement of the stop symbol (replacement of the odd-numbered symbol with the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without discomfort.

Incidentally, even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

Referring to FIG. 497, jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 497) which is one processing in command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example ) will be explained. FIG. 497 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), an opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, referring to FIG. 498, opening processing (Z2282: diagram 498) will be explained. FIG. 498 is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 498), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to Z2295.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a big win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a big win (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to "big win" (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing ends. In the process of Z2295, when it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the process of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2298), and the gaming state is changed to the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm. It is set during the jackpot game which is in the OFF state (Z2299), the processing of Z2300 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 497, the description continues. In the processing of Z2281, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the entering-ball command has been received (Z2283). When it is determined that the ball-in command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the big prize winning-ball process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 499, a big prize winning ball process ( Z2284) will be explained. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big prize winning ball process (Z2284).

In the big winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 499), first, 1 is added to the value of the big winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the type of promotion effect is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2312: No), a large winning command for display indicating the value of the big winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big win counter 223di is less than 10 (Z2314: No), a big win command for display indicating the value of the big win counter 223di corresponding to the over-win effect is set (Z2315), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm or the jackpot type, the promotion lottery table 222df A promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect is won (Z2317). When it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), the value of the big prize counter 223di and the large prize winning command for display indicating the winning of the promotion effect are set (Z2318), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large winning prize command for display indicating the discrepancy between the value of the big winning prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this processing is executed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 497, the description continues. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that the enter-ball command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the number-of-rounds command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 500, round processing (Z2286) which is one processing in the jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 500 is a flow chart showing the contents of round processing (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 500), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2331). When it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a round command for display corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and the SW valid time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. (Z2335), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332 : Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z2333 that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this process ends. .

Returning to FIG. 497, the description continues. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (Z2287). If the ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), ending processing (Z2288) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing ends.

Referring to FIG. 501, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example explain. FIG. 501 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: Fig. 501), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to OFF (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). When the jackpot type this time is the jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), an ending command for display indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2374: No), an ending command for display corresponding to this big hit type is set (Z2376). Incidentally, when it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the above-described process of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2374, when it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the process of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or Z2376, the game state is set to the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the state command for display is set (Z2378), and this processing ends.

Thus, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined during the jackpot game whether or not the content of the promotion by the over-winning promotion effect is notified, and if not executed, the ending promotion effect or the mid-round promotion effect is performed. The process of switching to is executed.

Thus, even if the over-winning promotion performance is determined, the promotion performance can be executed by switching to a different promotion performance even when the frequency of entering the specific winning hole 65a is low.

The variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, in contrast to the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406) in the first control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that the Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), the display stop type command is set (Z2513), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), the stop type is set with the odd jackpot symbol as the stop symbol (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2515), the processing of Z2513 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 503, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 in contrast to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 409) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831 and Z2840 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description is omitted.

In the process of Z2807, if it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). When it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), the display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, other SW processes are executed (Z2840), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2830, if it is determined that the effect setting is not in progress (Z2830: No), the above-described processing of Z2803-2804 is executed, sensor input processing (Z2813), other SW processing (Z2840) and terminate this process.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 507. FIG. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 414) is changed to command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 504 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example differs from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a pattern replacement command for display (Z3430). When it is determined that there is a symbol replacement command for display (Z3430: Yes), symbol replacement setting processing (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 505(a). FIG. 505(a) is a flow chart showing the details of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd jackpot symbol stop type table is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, the stop type table and the stop symbol counter are compared to set the stop symbol (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the description continues. In the process of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). When it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: Yes), game state setting processing (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 505(b). FIG. 505(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the game state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 504, the description continues. In the process of Z3432, when it is determined that there is no display state command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). When it is determined that there is a jackpot related command for display (Z3434: Yes), a jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 506, the jackpot related display processing (Z3435) will be described. FIG. 506 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for display has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that an opening command for display has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether or not the large winning prize command for display has been received (Z3463). When it is determined that the large winning command for display has been received (Z3463: Yes), the large winning processing (Z3464) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the big winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z3463 that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the command round number is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3465, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether or not the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table for the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3467 that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that a display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z3471), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 507, the big winning process (Z3464: FIG. 507), which is one process in the jackpot related display process (Z3435: FIG. 506), will be described. FIG. 507 is a flow chart showing the details of the big winning process (Z3464).

In the big win process (Z3464), first, in the process of Z3463 of the big win related display process (Z3435: FIG. 506), it is determined whether or not the received big win command for display wins the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the number of winning prizes indicated by the received command and the winning effect is set (Z3481), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). When it is determined that the received command is the loss of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), the display data table of over winning corresponding to the number of prizes indicated by the command and the loss effect is set (Z3483), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over winning effect (Z3484). When it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-win effect (Z3484: Yes), the over-win display data table corresponding to the number of wins indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the winning number indicated by the received command number is greater than 10 ( Z3486: No). When it is determined that the number of prizes won is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over prize effect is set (Z3487), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3486 that the number of wins indicated by the number of commands received is less than 10 (Z3486), this process ends.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 508 to 516. FIG. In the first control example, a winning opening that triggers a lottery (fluctuation) based on a first special symbol and a lottery based on a second special symbol that is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning opening that triggers (fluctuation) and the sorting device 700 that alternately wins the ball, the electric accessory 640a is placed when winning for a long time as a result of the determination of whether the second special symbol normal symbol is successful. It is configured to be open for a long period of time (two seconds) so that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加Then, when the normal pattern wins for a long time, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is made to win the ball in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加It was constructed so as to motivate players to play games (see FIG. 344).

Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. When the variation of the second special symbol is started at the beginning of the game, a special performance (see FIG. 428(b)) is executed to give the player a special feeling. Furthermore, in the second control example, for a predetermined period (for 5 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends, even if the normal state is set as the game state, the special effect is not executed. was configured to As a result, a predetermined number (maximum of 4) of the second special symbol reserved balls is secured (with the second special symbol reserved during the time saving state), and executed when the time saving state ends It is configured so that the above-described special effect is not executed in the second special symbol variation that is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special performance.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, when winning for a long time, the game is played using the normal symbol fluctuation time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the lottery result. It is different from the first control example in that an effect (long-time open effect) is executed to suggest that a person has won a lottery of normal symbols for a long time.

In addition, it is different from the first control example in that the performance mode of the long open performance is made different according to the timing of winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of normal symbols. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same points as those of the control examples described above will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 508, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes balls to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 in contrast to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or forms the surface of the game board 13) as a guidance display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot when a game (left-handed game) is played. If the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when playing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80, the guidance display mode ZR2 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot is "turtle". is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is acrylic resin with high transparency), and the player is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball should be shot to execute a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to see the game direction. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) that guides (a right-handed game or a left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that the player can easily grasp visually.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region (electric accessory If 640a is in the opening operation, the control nail ZK1 is planted so that the rate of the balls flowing down the second winning hole 640 is low. On the other hand, there is a difference in that the nails are planted so that the percentage of balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low when a right-handed game is played. By configuring in this way, aiming at the sorting device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) for varying (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and aiming at the second winning opening 640, the second A right-handed game (second game) in which only 2 special symbols are changed (lottery) can be provided to the player.

As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is difficult to open. When the left-handed game is generally performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player inevitably performs the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is performed further. Even if it does, it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special pattern (the right to draw (change) the special pattern), so a left-handed game can be played to acquire the reserved ball of the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509(a), in the present seventh control example, an effect mode displayed during the normal symbol fluctuation when winning the normal symbol for a long period of time will be described. FIG. 509(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, there is an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. is displayed, and an opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the game direction to instruct the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessary 640a is released to the player, so that the player can easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be played.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. A determination means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result of the determination means, a long opening effect and a third pattern are provided. A priority display determination means for determining which of the variable effects is to be displayed preferentially, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determination means. You can set it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially display an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the above example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (prioritized effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-prioritized effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of reduced display areas are prepared with different areas, and non-prioritized according to the game result indicated by the effect determined as the non-prioritized effect. It may be configured such that the size of the area for displaying the effect is variable. Also, the effect display on the side determined as the non-prioritized effect may be configured so as not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, in the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol during variation and the lottery result of the normal symbol during variation, the configuration for varying the display area of each effect (variation effect, long open effect) was shown. In addition to this, for example, a reserved ball number discriminating means for discriminating whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the discrimination result of the reserved ball number discriminating means It is also possible to change the display area of the long opening effect by using the

Next, with reference to FIG. 509(b), an effect mode during a long-time winning game of normal symbols (during long opening) will be described. FIG. 509(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time winning (effect during long opening). The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509(b), the characters "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening object simulating the electric accessory 640a in the opening operation. Mode Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 509(a), a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" is displayed to indicate the game direction to be instructed to the player, and the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is regulated will be described. FIG. 510 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the long opening effect is restricted among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during the long winning. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. In the state where it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning port 640 (when winning a long time with normal symbols), the state that is advantageous to the player (the first It is configured to surely notify the player of the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol which is likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the special symbol.

When configured in this way, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the normal symbol Even when winning for a long time, the above-described long opening effect is executed. Thus, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is long-opened and a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640, a new reserved ball is obtained. Therefore, there is a problem that the special feeling of the long opening effect cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, even if the normal symbol is elected for a long time during the predetermined period after the time saving state ends (the period until the special symbol is changed five times), the above-described It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect during the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for execution of the long opening effect.

As shown in FIG. 510, in the state where the long open effect is restricted, the long open effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as the game direction to be instructed to the player. In this way, even if the normal state is set as the game state, even if the normal pattern is won for a long time, the timing is for a predetermined period (after the time saving state ends, the special pattern changes 5 times. If it is within the period until it is executed), it is possible to surely suppress providing the meaningless long open effect to the player by preventing the long open effect from being executed. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the second control example in that a long release effect flag 223e1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example are the same, various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example are the same as those in the first control example described above. is identical to On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as those of the second control example except for the points described above. Therefore, the same parts as in the first control example are given the same reference numerals for the various control processes related to ball delivery, and the explanation thereof is omitted. , and the description thereof is omitted.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj has been described above in the second control example, detailed description will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when set (when special symbols are changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the variation number counter 223aj becomes zero.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is when a long-time opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 514: No) , is set to ON (see Z2907 in FIG. 514), and is set to OFF when the end command for a long period of normal design is received (Z2911 in FIG. 514).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main controller in this seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 387) is changed to the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 512). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 512, the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example differs from the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 387) in the first control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. . Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 512, when the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as those of the first control example are performed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not being varied in the process of Z402. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). This long-time open flag 203i is, as described above in the first control example, when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) that the normal symbol wins for a long time (Z426: Yes) , is a flag that is set on (Z428).

In the process of Z451, if it is determined that the long time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451: Yes), the long time open flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the long time end command is set. (Z452), the process proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is not ON (it is OFF) (Z451: No), the processes of Z403 and Z452 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z404. Then, the same processing from Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In other words, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to ON from the timing when the variation of the normal symbol won for a long time starts until the long-time win ends.

In the process of Z402, when it is determined that the normal symbol is currently fluctuating (Z402: Yes), the process of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then a long time hit A middle command is set (Z453), and this processing ends. The long-time hitting command set in Z453 is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 392) of the main controller 110. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the long-hitting command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current long-hitting (long open) is in progress, and transmits it to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the game is open for a long time on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509(b)).

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example>
Control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514. FIG. In the seventh control example, command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) is changed to command determination processing 4 (Z2181: FIG. 513), and long opening effect processing (Z2272) is changed from the second control example. The difference is that they are added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) in the second control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above are executed. If it is determined that a special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether a long-time pertinent command has been received (Z2271), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2208: Yes), a long release effect process (Z2272), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends. In this long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol wins for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that the related command has not been received for a long time (Z2271: No), Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 of the second control example (Z2152: FIG. 436) Similar processing from Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing ends. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command command) is received, an effect can be set to notify the player to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 514, the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272) will be described. FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272). This long open effect processing (Z2272) is for executing processing for setting the effect mode of the long open effect in the case of winning a long time per normal symbol, the current game state (normal state, time saving state Or, within a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving state), the production mode is set according to the operation state of the normal symbol (during fluctuation, during a winning game).

When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long time hit related command received this time is a long time opening command (Z2901). This open command per long time is a command that is set when winning a long time per normal symbol in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) of the main controller 110 . If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that it is a long-time open command (Z2901: Yes), then the current game state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted gaming state is in the time saving (the time saving state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z2903: Yes), the object to execute the long opening effect Since it is not a period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( Z2904). Since detailed description is given in the second control example described above, it will be briefly described, but this fluctuation number counter 223aj is a predetermined number (5 ) is set, and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display setting process is executed, and the period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation a predetermined number of times (5 times) is a counter that is referenced to determine

In the process of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, at least five special symbol variations are executed after the time saving state ends If it is determined that the game state is set to the normal state, it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed, so a long effect command for display is set (Z2906). , the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main processing (see FIG. 395) of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode showing a long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in the state where the variation of the special symbol is not executed 5 times after the time saving state ends If it is determined that there is, it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, so the left hitting long effect command for display is set (Z2905), and this End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main processing (see FIG. 395) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long opening effect is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 510).

In the process of Z2901, if it is determined that the long hit related command received this time is not the long hit release command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether or not the long hit middle command has been received (Z2908). . This long-time winning command is set after setting the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessary in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 512) of the main control device 110, and is during the long-time winning game. This command indicates that there is

In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command for a long hit has been received (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is determined. 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a display long open command is set (Z2910), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and this process ends. .

Here, processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the winning lottery at the timing of starting the variation of the normal symbols (the timing at which the normal symbol variation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning. (whether long open or not) is determined, and an open command for a long time is set at that timing. Then, after the normal pattern fluctuation time (3 seconds at the shortest, 30 seconds at the longest) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal pattern (second pattern) is set, and then the electric It is configured to start controlling the operation of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the open command for a long time and the command for a long time. In a state where the value of 223aj is greater than 0, the open command for a long time is set.

In the seventh control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the long opening command is received in the process when the long opening command is received. In a state where the opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, even if a long-hit medium command is received, the display long opening command is not set. By configuring in this way, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 510) suddenly changes to the effect of the display mode based on the long release command for display (FIG. 509(b)). ) can be suppressed from giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

Returning to FIG. 514, the description continues. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during the long hit is not received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911), and the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911: Yes), the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), the long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. FIG. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z3321). Command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) in the sixth control example in that processes Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the process of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no display long open related command (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long release related process (FIG. 516, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long release effect corresponding to the received long release effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long release effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The clock counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is difficult to execute) is set as the game state, the normal symbol per long time When winning, it is configured to execute a long opening performance during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a can be opened for a long time for the player, and the game in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640 can be played without fail.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired in the normal state, and a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. When it is within, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-described long opening effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege given to the player when the long opening effect is executed (the privilege to easily secure the reserved ball of the second special symbol).

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 of the long open effect process (see FIG. 514), after determining that Z2903: No, a process is provided to determine whether the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON. When it is determined that the effecting flag 223ac is set to ON, the processing may be terminated without executing the long open effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without changing the order of priority with other effects to be executed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or when the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long open effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is made to perform a right-handed game in order to win the ball, and when the long open effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to perform a left-handed game in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the left-handed game is aimed at the first winning opening 64 and the second right winning opening 640, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. can be made to play a game aiming at the second winning hole 640 by a right-handed game.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the game board 13 is changed so that the easiness of the ball flowing down to the distribution device 700 and the second winning hole 640 is different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, by shooting a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning hole 640, and a strong left-handed game can be performed. Then, the game board 13 may be configured so that the balls can easily reach the sorting device 700 . As a result, the game result can be greatly changed by slightly changing the operation of the shooting device, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the seventh control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above, but the control of the main controller 110 used in the first control example described above Without being limited to the content, the control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, even if it is used in a game machine of the type that executes the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol with priority over the first special symbol good.

In addition, at the end of the game state with electric sapo (game state with low probability electric sapo (time-saving game state) or high probability electric sapo (variable game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls Under the condition that the second special symbol is memorized, the performance of the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed) or the performance of prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加It may be configured to switch to and execute. By constructing in this way, even when switching to the normal game state, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is small, it is possible to perform the effect of winning the normal symbols for a long period of time, and the player is given a second chance. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the player of the opportunity to win a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal game state, until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times), the effect of the normal symbol for a long time is not performed, or the normal symbol is not produced. is configured to switch to a different effect, but regardless of the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), a long period of normal symbols It may be configured such that the win effect is not performed or the effect is switched to a different effect from the normal time. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to play an advantageous game in accordance with the game state. Furthermore, as a condition for not performing a long-time performance of a normal symbol or switching to a different performance from the normal time, regardless of the number of balls held in the second special symbol, if a specific variation pattern is executed (for example , a variation pattern of a big hit, or a variation pattern of super reach) or the like. Alternatively, time information may be obtained from the RTC, and a switching condition may be set at a specific time close to closing (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 557. FIG. In the eighth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the game machine is turned on (see FIG. 376) and the operation of the frame button 22a, The control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when changing the background mode by pressing, and the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (8, which is the upper limit number). The difference is that a detailed description has been added about the different points, the control content of the sound lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22, and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 517, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example has a plurality of operating means (frame button 22a, left button 22b, right button 22c), the configuration shown as frame button 22 in the first control example is referred to as frame button 22a. A detailed description of the button 22a is omitted. Therefore, in each of the control examples described above, various technical ideas explained using the frame button 22 are also applied to the frame button 22a of this control example.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 391), start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 394), is executed, and during the period (power-on period) during which each start-up process is being executed, as described above with reference to FIG. In addition to displaying, a notification (during power-on period notification) for indicating that the power is currently being turned on (executing each startup process based on power-on) is performed using the audio output device 226 had configured.

In the first control example configured in this manner, for example, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbols, and then the power is turned on (turned on), the main controller 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol variation is resumed from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and output from the voice output device 226 Since it is structured so as to emphasize and notify the player that the notification sound is in the power-on period, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the notification sound is executed before the power is turned off. There is a problem that it makes the user think that the special symbol variation that has been used has been erased.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, when the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, when the power is turned off When the executed special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is restarted after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol variation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is varying during the power-on period is output. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp that the special figure variation that has been executed at the time of power failure has been restarted. In addition, rather than creating data of a display image (variation image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processing is smaller, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbols are changing immediately after the power is turned on. Details of the audio output control at the time of power-on will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22a even while the special symbols are changing. In addition, the timing of changing the background mode is made variable according to the changing speed of the special pattern (third pattern) when the player operates the frame button 22a to change the background mode. . Specifically, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbols, the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display period of the special symbols. The variable display speed is made variable, and when the frame button 22a is operated while the variable display speed of the third pattern is fast, the background mode is immediately changed and the third pattern is changed. When the frame button 22a is operated during the low speed fluctuation, which is slower than the high speed fluctuation, the background mode is switched after the special pattern is finished (after the special pattern is stopped or when the next special pattern is started). configured to change.

In general, the variation display of the third symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it varies at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of variation, and then varies at low speed (second half period). Using the period in which the three symbols are variably displayed at a low speed, a suggestive performance for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols is executed. Therefore, even if the frame button 22a is operated during the low-speed fluctuation of the third pattern as in the eighth control example, the background mode is not changed, so that a special effect corresponding to the currently set background mode can be achieved. While the (suggestive performance based on the lottery result of special symbols) is being executed, the background mode is changed, and a situation occurs in which the player cannot see the performance contents (result of performance) of the suggestive performance. can be suppressed.

In addition, since it has a variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed variation or a low-speed variation, the background mode is shifted at the present stage. When the operation is performed, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner at which timing the background mode is switched. In this control example, the variation speed of the third symbol is configured to be able to be notified to the player. It may be configured to notify the player.

Furthermore, the variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed variation or a low-speed variation is provided during the execution period of the effect (operation effect) using the operation means. It is configured to also execute notification for letting the player know whether or not there is. As a result, when an operation effective period, which is a period in which the operation means can be operated, is set, whether the operation effective period is the operation effective period set by the execution of the operation effect or not is changed to the background mode. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not it is an operation effective period in which the operation for causing the operation is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended display mode from appearing when the player operates the operating means.

In the eighth control example, the above-described variation notification means is provided in the operation means (frame button 22a) operated by the player when switching the background mode (provided near the operation means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22a to switch to the background mode, the player can easily confirm the notification mode of the variation notification means.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches a specific number (for example, 8, which is the upper limit number), it corresponds to the specific number of winning information (reserved symbols) that is reserved and stored. It is configured to execute a specific period performance (8 pending performances) using the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a period production using a longer period than the production executed corresponding to one variable display period of the special symbol, so that various productions can be executed. This makes it possible to enhance the production effect. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to a specific number and the performance is executed for a specific period.

Here, in the case where the period effect is executed within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information held and stored) as in the eighth control example , As described with reference to FIG. 346(b) in the first control example, the third symbol display is performed to inform the player of the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol (upper limit number: 8). A first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to an eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 are formed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the device 81, and sequentially from the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Displaying the reserved design (see FIG. 347 (a)) If the configuration is used, the reserved design corresponding to the winning information newly acquired during execution of the period effect will be displayed in the small area Ds2. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the period until is the target of the period effect, and the player is provided with an effect that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the period effect is not executed, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 in the same manner as the first control example described above, and the period When the effect is executed, only the number of reserved balls to be the object of the effect during the period is displayed in the small area Ds2 as the effect reserved pattern. With this configuration, even if new winning information is acquired during the period effect, the effect pending symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 do not increase, so that the player can receive the pending symbol to be the object of the period effect. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Details of the period effect in the eighth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528. FIG.

Furthermore, it is constructed so that the player can be notified of the current number of reserved balls of special symbols by using a display area (light emitting area) different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls even while the period effect is being executed.

In addition, the eighth control example is configured such that when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22a, the operated (pressed) frame button 22a vibrates. It is configured so that the amount of vibration can be varied. By configuring the frame button 22a to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22a, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who presses the frame button 22a, thereby enhancing the performance effect. can be done. Furthermore, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration to be executed when the frame button 22a is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of providing an unexpected performance to the player by vibrating the frame button 22a when the player presses the frame button 22a. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, until the player presses the frame button 22a, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22a is pressed. There is a problem that the user cannot actively operate (depress) the frame button 22a.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, whether or not vibration is applied when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22a before operating (depressing) the frame button 22a is determined. It is configured to be able to suggest the vibration level at the time of vibration. With this configuration, the player can operate the frame button 22a in a state in which the vibration mode when the frame button 22a is operated (depressed) is predicted. can operate (depress) the frame button 22a.

Furthermore, since the vibration level of the frame button 22a is variable, even if a predetermined level of vibration is given when the player presses the frame button 22a, the frame button 22a is operated (depressed) after that. By doing so, it is possible to vibrate the frame button 22a at a vibration level equal to or higher than the predetermined level. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22a a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, a plurality of background modes can be displayed. , the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be variable. Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (an operation of placing a hand over the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is notified.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that changes the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, the frame button 22a is pressed). In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the background mode has changed. ) is in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In order to solve this problem, for example, a technique of always displaying the currently set background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is conceivable. Since a part of the limited area of the display screen is used only for notifying the background mode, the area used for various effects executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered. In addition, the background mode is performed while the specific effect (for example, effect suggesting that the special symbol lottery result is highly likely to be a big hit) is being executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is displayed, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, by operating the operation means (touch sensor 2900), it is possible to notify the background mode only for an arbitrary period desired by the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance effect of various performances executed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81 is lowered. Further, in the eighth control example, since the present background mode is notified by using display means (light emitting means) different from the third pattern display device 81, the display of the third pattern display device 81 The limited area of the screen can be effectively utilized for various presentations.

In addition, in the eighth control example, an effect (operation effect) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be executable, and the touch sensor 2900 plays a role as an operation means for notifying the background mode and an operation means. It is configured to play both a role as an operation means for executing the production (participating in the operation production). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is changed according to the situation. Then, for example, even while an operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, by executing a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c), the operation can be performed. It is configured so that the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the effect. Therefore, even if the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for a plurality of purposes, the player can operate the operation means in an operation mode that matches the purpose desired by the player.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Eighth Control Example>
First, referring to FIG. 517, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. Fig. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. ) in that the operation means that the player can operate is changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above is provided with the frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. As described above, a frame button 22a, a left button 22b, and a right button 22c are provided as operating means. The frame button 22a is an operating means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. This is an operation means used for changing the background mode or for switching the background mode. Since the specific contents of the frame button 22a are the same as those of the frame button 22 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, like the frame button 22 of the first control example described above, the frame button 22a is also configured to change its mode by driving the tilting device 310. Since it is the content, detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

The left button 22b and the right button 22c are operation means provided on the left side of the frame button 22a, and are mainly used as adjustment means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In this eighth control example, the left button 22b and the right button are pressed during a period in which the third symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and during a period in which the variation speed of the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed. The sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by operating 22c. Note that the detailed contents of volume adjustment are the same as those of the above-described fourth control example (see FIG. 313), so description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this control example, by operating the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the low speed variation of the third symbol, it is possible to partially invalidate the operation of the other operating means (touch sensor 2900). It is configured as follows. In this way, among the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation can be performed only in a state where a specific condition is established (a state in which the third symbol does not fluctuate, or a state in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed). One operation means can be used for multiple purposes by configuring the operation means for executing control (volume adjustment) based on the above to be used for another purpose when the operation means is operated in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied. Since it can be used, the number of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 518 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 518, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is different from the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that an LED 900 is provided, mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and a touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third pattern display device. , are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of special symbols, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a reserved ball number command indicating that the number of reserved balls of special symbols output from the main controller 110 will increase or decrease. Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command shown, the lighting is controlled in correspondence with the special symbol reserved ball number after the increase and the decrease.

By providing an area for notifying the number of reserved balls of special symbols outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this way, the reserved symbol display (FIG. 519) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (b) reference) can be temporarily deleted or used for another purpose, the number of pending balls of the current special symbol can be reliably reported. Although detailed description is omitted, this holding LED 900 uses a full-color LED, and is configured to be able to emit at least three colors or more. And, the holding ball of the special figure 2, lighting is controlled so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect executed based on the result of pre-determination (pre-reading) performed on the pending stored winning information, when changing the color of the reserved design, LED at the corresponding position of the reserved LED 900 is controlled to emit light in a different color than normal. Furthermore, the display mode (light emission mode) of this pending LED 900 is configured to be less conspicuous than the pending symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the eighth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player, for example, it may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 . In addition, in the eighth control example, since it is configured so that it is possible to store a maximum of 8 reserved ball numbers of special symbols, the same 8 LEDs as the upper limit number of reserved storage are stored in the reserved LED 900 is used, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of special symbols with four LEDs. Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the LED 900 for reservation is controlled to always display the number of reserved balls of special symbols. When the reserved symbols to be displayed are erased or used for another effect, that is, the state in which the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbols only by the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When it becomes, it may be configured to execute lighting control for the holding LED 900 .

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variable performance (the variable performance of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special figure lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, a "sea mode" in which a display mode simulating the sea (for example, a display mode simulating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device, and the display of the third pattern display device 81 The player can select any one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode simulating a mountain (for example, a display mode simulating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in a light emission mode capable of informing the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third design using the entire display screen of the third design display device 81 is executed, and the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 are grasped Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the lighting modes of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the first half of the special figure fluctuation (the third pattern is fluctuating at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a light emission mode that informs the current background mode. , In the latter half of the special figure fluctuation (the period from the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are not in the current background mode, but in a suggesting mode that suggests the lottery result. configured to emit light. Then, even in the second half of the special figure fluctuation, the player executes a specific operation on the operation means (frame button 22), so that the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a notification mode to notify the current background mode. It is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to control the light emission of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d in correspondence with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special figure lottery result), so information useful to the player can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operation means) having a predetermined detection range, and detects when the player's hand is intruded (placed) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period of time. When it is detected, it is determined that an operation has been performed by the player. A player cannot directly see the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, but a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. Displaying this makes it easier for the player to operate the touch sensor 2900 (make it easier for the player to enter the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be able to determine the movement (direction) of a hand entering (arranged) within the detection range. By moving from right to left or from bottom to top, a performance display corresponding to the movement of the hand is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to execute a performance operation corresponding to the player's operation operation on the operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can be made to play the game while being interested.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 519(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present eighth control example are changed and displayed in synchronization with the third symbol (special symbol) with respect to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described first control example. The scrolling direction of the decorative pattern) has been changed from vertical to horizontal (from right to left), and the number of effective lines to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern has been reduced to one (see Fig. 346(a)). ) to 5 (see FIG. 519(a)), and the difference is that the reporting mode of the information related to the game is different. Also, there are some elements that are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 519(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "1" to "9" are added.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each identification information modeled on numbers. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are arranged so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. In the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed vertically and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed obliquely. In the state where each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example), A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (the middle symbol row V2 in this control example) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player can hardly distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 519(b). As shown in FIG. 519(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By thus providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth pattern is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 519(b)) to show that the special symbol is fluctuating. 519 (b) small display area Dm2 reference), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth pattern, a plurality of colors By using the display mode that shows that the special pattern is changing depending on the number and the display mode that changes the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode that shows the specific pattern and color, the lottery result of the special pattern may be configured as shown.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 519(b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery situation is displayed is displayed as the main display. Although an example of forming the upper left side and the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area formed can be changed depending on the effect of the variable effect executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. You may make it differ according to a mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. is partitioned into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and in the small area Ds1, the in-execution area Ds1a and a waiting area Ds1b. The display contents of the in-execution area Ds1a are the same as those of the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and normally, reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols are displayed as in the first control example described above. are doing. On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the reserved symbols are displayed on the pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbols reaches the upper limit value (8), the reserved and stored eight reserved symbols is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using (see FIG. 526). While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b does not have reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols, but a period during which the period effect is executed (a reserved pattern targeted for the period effect). It is configured so that the pending design for production showing only the .

With this configuration, even if a new reserved ball is obtained during the period production, the new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can understand how long the period production will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 519, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 also displays a display mode showing the following display contents. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area, there are a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for guiding the player to play a left-handed game. It is configured to display a “left-handed” display mode, and the “right-handed” display mode is a game state in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a variable probability state, a time-saving state. And, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). is configured so that the display mode of is displayed.

<Regarding the effect content in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 520 to FIG. 529, among the various effects executed in the eighth control example, characteristic effects will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 520 and 521, description will be given of the contents of the presentation when the power is turned on. FIG. 520 is a timing chart showing the flow of sound production when the power is turned off (power is cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating according to the fluctuation pattern A, and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, power outage occurs during special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation), and then, when the power is turned on, while executing the start-up process of the main control unit 110 and the audio lamp control unit 113 (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is being turned on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 521(a)). And, when the special symbol variation is executed during the return processing period, the BGM during the special symbol variation is output from the voice output device 226. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure variation is being executed during the return processing period.

More specifically, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if power is cut off. It is configured to execute power interruption processing for storing previous game information (variation pattern for effect, BGM information, background mode, remaining variation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-described storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off, The game information is stored in the storage area only when power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part ("B" in FIG. 520) output at the time of power failure is stored, and the BGM part ("B" in FIG. ) to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 520, the progress of the BGM that was being output when the power was cut off is stored, and the BGM is reproduced from the point where it was stopped when the power was cut off. The BGM part output at the time of disconnection may be reproduced from the start position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the storage processing to the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Furthermore, in this control example, game information (selected variation pattern , residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, when the start-up process is completed (when the command indicating completion of initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 521(a)) to the normal screen. (See FIG. 521(b)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure variation that was being executed before the power cut has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 521, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 521(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 521(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial setting is completed. Note that the content shown in FIG. 521(a) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. If the special figure variation is performed while this initial setting screen is displayed, the BGM (variation sound) corresponding to the variation pattern is output from the continuation of the power outage (see Figure 520 ).

Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 520(b), a return-only variation pattern based on the remaining period of the special figure variation being executed is executed. In this control example, a first determination is made to determine whether the residual variation time at the completion of initial setting is less than 2 seconds, a second determination is made to determine whether it is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. and a third determination to determine whether or not.

Here, by the first determination, if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds, without setting the return-only variation pattern, until the remaining variation time elapses (until the special figure variation being executed ends), the initial The setting screen (see FIG. 521(a)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the short-time variable display, which is difficult for the player to identify, from being executed.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the ready-to-win state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol on the active line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed variably). state), a return-only ready-to-reach effect is executed in which a variable display is executed. This return-only ready-to-win performance is a performance using the variation data of the variation pattern set to have the lowest ratio of the big hit among the normal ready-to-win, that is, the ready-to-win variation pattern among the normal variation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. By constructing in this way, when the special figure variation being executed when the power is turned on is a big win, the player can be notified of the winning of the big win with a variation pattern that is usually difficult to encounter, thereby providing added value to the player. be able to. In addition, by using image data that is rarely used (image data showing a variation pattern that becomes a big hit in normal reach) among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522 to FIG. 523, the change operation content of the background mode during the special figure fluctuation will be described. Figure 522 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during special figure fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 522, in this eighth control example, in the variation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation, the variation speed is configured to be variable. Specifically, the variation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, and low speed". As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol will stop. In the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is a loss. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (background change is possible) by the player operating the frame button 22a during the variable display of the special symbols. The timing at which the background is changed is varied according to the timing at which the user operates the frame button 22a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 522, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high speed, the background change The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in Figure 522 (a), the current background mode is "sea", and when the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, when the background change operation is performed, the background change immediately after that is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 523(b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 522 (b), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure is not a high speed fluctuation (medium speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special figure The background change is not performed until the end of the background change, and the background change is performed at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 523(a), "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. In the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the display area Dm1a, characters of "background change with next change" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the background change operation was performed during the special figure fluctuation (that the pachinko machine 10 officially accepted the background change operation), so the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly performed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, for the background change operation during the special figure fluctuation, the timing of performing the background change is different according to the fluctuation state of the special figure (fluctuation speed of the third symbol). It is configured so that As a result, for example, while suppressing the fact that the background change is performed while the effect (for example, the reach effect) is being executed with a high possibility that the lottery result of this special symbol is a hit, this time If it is a period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is difficult to execute, the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various performances (backgrounds). be able to.

It should be noted that, in the flow of the background change described with reference to Figure 522, if the background change operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation and during the special figure high speed fluctuation, the next special figure fluctuation is started Although an example of executing a background change at the timing is shown, it is not limited to this, for example, a stop display in a stop display mode (combination of three third patterns) for showing the lottery result of the special figure with the third pattern It may be configured to execute the background change at the timing (the timing at which the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation and other than the high speed fluctuation of the special figure, at least the background until after the result of this special figure lottery is stopped and displayed Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured to suppress the fact that the effect that suggests the result of the special drawing is difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. The background change may be delayed until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special figure is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special figure switches to low speed fluctuation. .

In addition, when the background change operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation and other than the special figure high-speed fluctuation, the timing at which the background change is performed is configured to be switched based on the result of this special figure lottery. may be, for example, if the special figure variation during variation is a jackpot variation, than if the special figure variation is a deviation variation, a predetermined timing during the variation period (for example, timing to switch to low speed variation) It is good to configure it so that background change can be easily executed with. Furthermore, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, it may be configured to switch the timing of executing the background change based on the result of the special figure lottery of this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and to motivate the player to perform the background change operation. .

In addition, in FIG. 522, as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, the variation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used, but not limited to this, For example, the process of the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and according to the process of the effect display at the time of the background change operation It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "fluctuation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". For example, the "fluctuation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the special figure fluctuation state "high speed fluctuation" of the eighth control example, and the "reach effect period" and "development effect period" ', and 'effect result notification period' may be configured to correspond to the variation states 'medium speed variation', 'low speed variation', and 'stop' of the special figure of the eighth control example.

As described above, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is varied according to the degree of progress of the effect display instead of the variation speed of the third symbol (special symbol), this control example and the A similar effect can be obtained.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation and other than during the high speed fluctuation of the special figure, the background change is executed after the result of this special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured to do, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation next to the special figure fluctuation that performed the background change operation), and the following special figure fluctuation Based on the result of the lottery (preliminary determination (prefetch) result for the prize information retained and stored), whether or not to execute the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be configured to be variable. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. By having the player willingly execute the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, the contents of the variable effect (touch effect) for varying the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing the variation speed of the third symbol and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in FIG. 524, in this control example, the third symbol is configured to be variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while varying the variation speed corresponding to the variation period of the special figure variation. are doing. Then, during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, the touch effect (see FIG. 525(a)) is configured to be executed.

If the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the period during which this touch effect is being executed (during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol) 525(b)), the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) in which the third symbol changes at a low speed is executed (see FIG. 525(b)).

That is, in this control example, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, the variation speed of the third symbol can be forcibly switched to low speed variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the variable performance (performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low speed fluctuation, so that the player can receive the variable performance can be of interest.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a can be operated during the period during which the touch effect is being executed to shift the background mode. is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, and when the player grasps that the ready-to-win effect is executed by the change, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the button 22a and then operating the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the ready-to-win effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the above-described touch effect will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 525 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the touch effect is executed (timing of Figure 524 (a)), Figure 525 (b) is a touch effect touch sensor FIG. 524B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen after operating 2900 (timing in FIG. 524(b)).

As shown in FIG. 525(a), when the touch effect is executed, the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed on the display screen of the third pattern display device (represented by the leftward arrow in the figure). ), in a small area Dm3 on the left side of the variable display area during high-speed variation (approximately 1/3 left of the main display area Dm), a touch effect is being executed so as to cover the variable display of the third symbol. The touch indication shown is executed. Specifically, a touch point guide display mode Dm31 for guiding a point where the player holds his or her hand, and a period display mode Dm32 for indicating the effect period (operation valid period) of the touch effect are displayed. , a comment “touch” is displayed to prompt the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900 .

As shown in FIG. 525, while the third symbols are changing at high speed, the individual third symbols are changing at such a speed that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize them. Even if the touch display is performed, an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (an effect that the player cannot grasp the third symbol during the variable display) is not performed.

Then, during the effect period of the touch effect indicated by the period display mode Dm32, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900, as shown in FIG. A ready-to-win effect using the entire display area Dm (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) is executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when the player operates the operation means (touch sensor 2900) while the third symbol is changing at high speed, the variation speed of the third symbol is forcibly changed to a low speed. It is configured so that it can be switched to By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the variable performance (performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low speed fluctuation, so that the player can receive the variable performance can be of interest.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a can be operated during the period during which the touch effect is being executed to shift the background mode. is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, and the player grasps that the ready-to-win effect can be executed by the change, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the frame button 22a and then operating the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the ready-to-win effect in the desired background mode, and the player quickly gets tired of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, the content of the treasure box presentation (8 pieces pending presentation) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit of 8, an 8-holding effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using the 8-holding, is configured to be executed. are doing. This 8 reserved effect is a dedicated effect using 8 reserved patterns, and as the reserved pattern for effect corresponding to each reserved pattern, a reserved pattern for effect in a display mode imitating a treasure box is displayed in the standby area Ds1b. is displayed (see FIG. 526(a)).

Then, when the special figure variation corresponding to the reserved symbols to be subjected to the eight reserved effects is executed, as shown in FIG. Among them, the contents tb10 of the treasure box indicating the lottery result of the variation are displayed. Although the details will be described later, this content tb10 is configured so that different colors are displayed according to the lottery result of the special figure.

After that, during the period in which the 8 pending effects are being executed, if new winning information is held and stored, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIGS. A new reserved pattern 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying a reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information in the waiting area Ds1b. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (performance period) during which the 8 reserved performances are continuously executed.

Then, when the last special figure variation to be the target of the 8 pending effects is executed, as shown in FIG. Reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed. In other words, when there are no reserved symbols to be subjected to the 8 reserved performance, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently reserved and stored are displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled because he or she does not know the number of reserved balls currently acquired at the end of the 8-ball reserved presentation.

In addition, in this control example, the 8 pending effects shown with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528 are executed. Even during the period in which the reserved symbols are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, if the player performs a specific operation on the operation means, the current reserved symbols are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b instead of the reserved symbols for effect. It may be configured to display a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is prize winning information for winning a jackpot in advance determination processing executed during the eight pending performance, the eight pending performance is continued until the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this control example, in the period production (8 pieces pending production) in which a series of fluctuation production is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (reserved design), the lottery result corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed However, it is not limited to this, and whether the winning information for winning a jackpot is included in the reserved symbols to be the target of the period production Whether or not is discriminated (prefetched) in advance before the execution of the special drawing lottery based on the reserved pattern, and based on the prediscrimination result (prefetched result), the production mode of the period production is set. You can In this case, for example, the degree of expectation for winning the big prize may be set in a plurality of stages, and a presentation mode may be set so that the degree of expectation for winning the big prize does not drop during the performance period. As a result, it is possible to heighten the expectation for the big win in accordance with the progress of the period performance, and to keep the player's eyes on the period performance until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, display contents during presentation using touch sensor 2900 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 529(a) is a display screen showing a display example when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the touch effect executed during the low speed variation of the third symbol (during the ready-to-win display), and FIG. ) is a display screen showing a display example when a special operation is performed during the touch effect executed during the low speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the ready-to-win display).

As shown in FIG. 529(a), when the touch effect is executed during the low speed variation of the third symbol (during the ready-to-win display), the main display area A small area Dm3 is formed in about one-third of the left side of Dm, and touch display is performed. In the state of FIG. 529(a), since the third symbol is in the process of low speed fluctuation (ready-to-win display), the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win display mode only in the display area of the main display area Dm which is not covered with the small area Dm3. It is reduced and displayed in a possible state, and the touched point guidance display mode Dm31 is displayed in a mode indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (indicated by diagonal lines in the figure).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, a comment of "great chance", which is the effect result of the touch effect, is displayed. In this control example, the touch effect can be executed during the reach display of the third symbol, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed is a big hit. Since an effect (comment display) suggesting whether or not is performed, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while expecting that a comment (for example, a big chance) that is highly likely to be a big win will be displayed. It is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation presentation.

It should be noted that, if the player wants to quickly perceive the lottery result of the special symbol, by executing the above-described touch effect, the touch sensor 2900 is positively operated, and the touch effect is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. I want to actively display the comment, which is the result of the production, but on the other hand, I want to enjoy the production mode of the variable production of the 3rd pattern (Until the 3rd pattern is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special pattern is suggested. A player who thinks that he/she does not want to execute other effects to be executed should not display a comment suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the comment display area Dm2a without operating the touch sensor 2900 even if the touch effect is executed. It is conceivable to play a game to make

In this case, it is said that the current background mode cannot be grasped by operating the touch sensor 2900 during execution of the touch effect (during the effective period of operation of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect). I had a problem. Therefore, in the eighth control example, by operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c (see FIG. 517) arranged on the left side of the frame button 22a, It is configured so that the current background mode can be notified even if there is. With this configuration, even if the operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) is duplicated, the player can easily perform only the desired operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 529(b), when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed while the third symbol is fluctuating at low speed (during the ready-to-win display), In the lower frame of 529(b), the left button 22b and the right button 22c are represented by being filled in), and the comment "Pay attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. As a result, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at the current stage, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current background mode is being notified instead of displaying the effect result of the touch effect. can. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in that state, the currently set background mode is selected from among the mode lamps 1910 for notifying the background mode instead of the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed. The corresponding mode lamp 1910a is illuminated.

In this control example, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed while the third symbol is changing at low speed (during the ready-to-win display), the touch Even if the sensor 2900 is operated, the effect result of the touch effect is not displayed. It may be configured to forcibly end the touch effect. In other words, it may be configured such that the operation effect being executed is canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 530(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this eighth control example, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223; FIG. In the eighth control example, in addition to the above-described first control example, an eight-piece pending lottery table 222fa, a special effect selection table 222fb, and a vibration pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, and a next background change flag 223fa and a hold are added to the RAM 223. The difference is that an effect execution flag 223fb and a pending effect counter 2223fc are added. Other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa is a data table used when performing a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece reservation effect (treasure box effect), and is a reservation number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540). , the value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter) is the upper limit value. 8" (Z2473 in FIG. 540: Yes), it is referred to determine whether or not to execute the 8 pending effect (Z2475 in FIG. 540). When execution of the 8 pending effects is determined, the 8 pending effects described above with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528 are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 531(c), the contents of the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa will be described. FIG. 531(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 531(c), the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa shows the lottery result (hit winning) advantageous to the player within the reservation of the special figure (within the reservation used for the 8-piece reservation effect). It is configured to discriminate whether or not information is included, and to vary the execution probability of the 8 pending effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning within the reservation of the special figure (when the determination result within the reservation is "hit"), the value of the acquired reservation effect counter 223fc is "0 to 140". In the case of "141 to 198", it is stipulated that the 8 pending effects are executed and the 8 pending effects are not executed. On the other hand, if the on-hold determination result is "off only", if the value of the acquired holding effect counter 223fc is "0 to 90", 8 holding effects are executed, and if it is "91 to 198" It is stipulated not to execute 8 pending effects.

In other words, in this control example, the case where winning information indicating a lottery result (hit winning) that is advantageous to the player is included in the holding that is the target of the 8 holding effect is better than the case where it is not included. It is configured so that the 8-hold performance can be easily executed. As a result, the execution of the 8-hold performance can make the player think that he or she will soon win the jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit number of 8, whether or not to execute 8 reserved effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using 8 reserved Although it is configured to perform the lottery, it is not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, but when it reaches a predetermined number (for example, 7), whether continuous production (period production) is executed. You may comprise so that a lottery may be performed. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 pending effect may be varied between the case where the number of pending balls corresponding to one special symbol type is 3 and the case where the number is 4 among the 7 pending.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, the bonus (the number of winning balls, the game state set after the jackpot game) given to the player in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is large. The pre-determined results of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is likely to be executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided, and the execution probabilities of the 8 reserved performances are set to be different. In this case, when there is winning information indicating winning of a jackpot in the holding of advantageous special symbols, it is preferable to make it easier to execute the 8 holding performance than other conditions. As a result, the degree of expectation of the player for the 8-hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated according to the lottery result of the special symbol, result), different vibration amounts are set.

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIG. 531(a). FIG. 531(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 531(b) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of vibration pattern data 222fc having (vibration type).

In the eighth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be varied in three steps. It is Further, the frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger amount of vibration when the special symbol lottery result or the special symbol preliminary determination result is advantageous to the player. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to be driven when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, unless the player presses the frame button 22, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates, and the amount of vibration when it vibrates. be able to. Furthermore, this control example is configured so that the vibration amount corresponding to pressing the frame button multiple times is defined as one vibration amount scenario (vibration type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger amount of vibration. This allows the player to intentionally press the frame button 22 multiple times.

In this eighth control example, when the sound lamp control device 113 sets the variation pattern for the variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 543), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence/absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) for vibrating the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed, A vibrating operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set vibration type is executed.

The special effect selection table 222fb, as shown in FIG. 531(a), is a case in which a hit is included in the reservation of the special symbol, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79". "Vibe A" is defined as (vibration type), "vibration B" is defined as the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in the range of "80 to 139", and the vibration amount scenario is defined in the range of "140 to 175" “Vibrator C” is defined as the (vibration type), and “vibration D” is defined as the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in the range of “176 to 198”.

In addition, when the hit is not included in the suspension of the special figure (only off), and the value of the production counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is used as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). "Vibe C" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "50 to 90", and "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibrator type) in the range of "91 to 198". stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531(b), detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be described. As shown in FIG. 531(b), in this eighth control example, four types of vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of PUSH ) is specified.

Specifically, the vibration type "vibration A" specifies "none (no vibration)" for the first PUSH and "strong" for the second to fourth times, and "vibration B" specifies PUSH. The first push is "weak", the second is "medium", and the third and fourth are "strong". "weak", "medium" for the third time, and "strong" for the fourth time, and "vibration D" defines "weak" for the first PUSH and "medium" for the second to fourth times. ing.

In this way, by varying the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated according to the set type of vibration, and by varying whether or not the amount of vibration is variable according to the number of pushes, Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed next time, the amount of vibration the frame button 22 vibrates can be entertained. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation presentation, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the amount of vibration specified for each type of vibration is configured to increase (not decrease) as the number of pushes increases, but it is not limited to this. , the vibration amount may be reduced. In this case, if the special figure variation being executed is a big win variation, or if there is winning information indicating a big win winning in the special figure pending, the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 tends to decrease in the middle of the special performance. It is better to configure it so that Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount becomes small.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific PUSH number of times (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set. Instead, the number of pushes for setting the vibration amount may be varied according to the type of vibration.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the eighth control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (effect of having the player operate the frame button 22 multiple times according to the process of the variable display (reach fluctuation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, only by operating the frame button 22 along with the effect (operation effect) of the variable display executed by the third pattern display device 81, the frame button can be operated a specified number of times (4 times). can be executed.

In addition, this eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to a special effect. The display effect dedicated to this special effect has a step-by-step display mode (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure fluctuation period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the special figure fluctuation starts). A step-up possible production is executed. This effect is configured in a mode of effect that can suggest that the frame button 22 is pressed and the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is varied (increased).

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can be made to actively operate the frame button 22 while expecting the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 to further increase. In addition, even though the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount specified for the set vibration type. It is possible to suppress the end of the special performance without causing the special performance to end.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based on the lottery result of the variation as well as the type of the set vibration, and the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is set. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though it is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be explained. , “amplitude indicating amplitude of vibration” and “indicating time required for one unit of vibration (period)”, the amount of vibration is defined based on the magnitude of amplitude. Therefore, since the amplitude of the vibration felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, it is possible for the player to easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In addition, in the above-described special effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times, the player may feel different vibrations. A period from when the frame button 22 is pressed to when the vibration starts) may be varied, and they may be used in combination. In addition, by providing a plurality of vibrating means (such as motors) capable of imparting vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) and controlling the driving of the plurality of vibrating means, the frame button 22 can be vibrated. The position of the source may be varied, or the mode of vibration felt by the player may be varied by varying the drive start timing of each vibration means. In addition, it may be configured such that the variable content of the vibration mode can be selected by the player.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured so as not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 while the special effect is set. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be vibrated with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set in the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special effect is currently being performed.

The vibe pattern data 222fc is a data table storing the contents of each of the vibe types (vibe A to vibe D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. The contents are omitted since they have been described above in the explanation of the special effect selection table 222fb.

Next, with reference to FIG. 530(b), the content defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. . As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example in that the next background change flag 223fa, the pending effect execution flag 223fb, the pending effect counter 2223fc, and the SW special effect counter 223fd are added. is different.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background is changed depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, a time lag occurs between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (transitioned). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is met, the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548), the fluctuation state of the special figure at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed (the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol) If it is determined that the high speed fluctuation is not in progress (Z2964 in FIG. 548: No), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 548). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON in the variation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) executed when a stop command indicating the stop of the special figure variation is received ( Z2266 of Figure 539: Yes) then determines whether or not there is a pending storage of Toku-zu (Z2267 of Figure 539), and if it is determined that there is no hold (Z2267 of Figure 539: No), Stop of Toku-zu fluctuation Background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special figure pending (Z2267 in FIG. 539: Yes), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 538).

The pending effect executing flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that the 8 pending effect (see FIG. 526) is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8 pending effect is executed. . Then, when the 8 pending effect is completed, it is set to OFF (see Z2534 in FIG. 543). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while this pending effect execution flag 223fb is set to ON, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a and the special symbol Even if the value obtained by summing the value of the 2-reserved ball number counter 223b) reaches the upper limit number (8), it is configured not to execute a lottery for executing a new 8-reserved effect.

Specifically, in the reserved ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540), when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter is 8 (Z2473 in FIG. 540: Yes), then the reserved effect It is configured to determine whether the in-execution flag 223fb is set to ON, and when it is determined that it is not set to ON (is OFF), the processing of Z2474 and Z2475 in FIG. 540 is executed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the 8-piece reservation performance for an unnecessarily long time, so that the sense of value of the 8-piece reservation presentation can be enhanced. In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 reserved performance, it is determined whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the initial lottery for determining whether or not to execute the 8-piece reservation performance as the lottery for whether or not to execute the new 8-piece reservation performance. Concretely, it is preferable that the new 8-piece reservation effect is more likely to be executed than the first 8-piece reservation effect when the target reservation includes a big win. As a result, when the 8 reserved performance is executed for more than 8 special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the big win can be further enhanced. In addition, even during the 8 ball reservation performance, the game can be motivated to accumulate the reserved balls up to the upper limit again.

The pending effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and each time the main process (see FIG. 536) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond) ), the update process is performed so that the values are different. The value of this pending effect counter 223fc is obtained when drawing lots with reference to the 8 pending lottery table 222fa to determine whether or not to execute the 8 pending effect in the pending number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect processing (see Z2841 in FIG. 547). (See Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (See Z2945 in FIG. 547). Here, in this control example, no matter what kind of special effect is set, the special effect corresponding to four frame button operations is set, so a value of 4 is set to the SW special effect counter 223fd.

Each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 547), and corresponds to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after subtraction. SW motor data is set in order to execute the effect (see Z2947 in FIG. 547).

The return state storage area 223fe stores remaining time information of the return fluctuation (special figure fluctuation in which the power is cut off during execution) included in the return command received from the main controller 110 when returning from the power failure state. This is a storage area for Specifically, it is used in the process (Z2281 in FIG. 541) of storing the remaining fluctuation time information included in the received return command in the fluctuation return process (Z2252 in FIG. 541).

In this control example, it is configured to set the display mode (variation display mode) after the recovery process is completed based on the remaining variation time of the special figure variation stored in the recovery state storage area 223fe after the power is restored. Details will be described later, but if the remaining variation time after the end of the return process is longer than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the remaining variation time is executed, and the predetermined time (2 seconds) is displayed. seconds) or less, the recovery processing screen is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the special figure fluctuation after the power return in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

During the return fluctuation flag 223ff is a flag for indicating that the special figure fluctuation interrupted at the time of power failure is fluctuating (return fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to ON when the return fluctuation is in progress. It is a thing. This return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to ON (Z2284 in FIG. 541) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is set in the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 541) (Z2283 in FIG. 541), After the display command corresponding to the return fluctuation is set, it is set to OFF (Z2296 in FIG. 542).

The remaining variation time counter 223fg is a counter for counting the remaining time of variation of the third symbol. The value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern acquired in the fluctuation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) (Z2511 in FIG. 543), and the counter update process (see FIG. 552). is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), 1 is subtracted.

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to ON when the high-speed fluctuation is in progress. This high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON (Z2863 in FIG. 552) when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg indicates the high-speed fluctuation period in the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 552), and the high-speed fluctuation It is set to OFF when no period is indicated (Z2865 in FIG. 552). Also, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined as ON) (determined as Z2825: Yes), it is also set to OFF when the variation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed (Z2833 of Z549). In addition, the setting status of the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is referred to when determining the timing of switching the background mode in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) (see Z2964 in FIG. 549).

The special operation flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation on the operating means (left button 22b, right button 22c), and is turned on when the player has performed a special operation. is set to Specifically, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed in the left and right button input processing (see Z2843 in FIG. 546) executed in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545). (Z2851 in FIG. 546: Yes) When the flag 223fh during high-speed fluctuation is off during fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2853 in FIG. 546: No), it is set to ON (Z2855 in FIG. 546).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 549), and if it is set to ON (Z2831 in FIG. 549: Yes), the process related to the touch effect is executed. Mode identification processing (Z2968 in FIG. 549) is executed without execution. In this control example, while the player continuously operates (presses) the left button 22b and the right button 22c, the special operation flag 223fi is set to be ON, and the left button 22b and the right button 22c are set to be on. is stopped, the special operation flag 223fi is set to OFF (see Z2857 in FIG. 546). That is, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated while the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed, the currently set background mode does not change based on the operation result. Notification is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 517, the left button 22b and the right button 22c are arranged at a distance (approximately 3 cm) that allows the player to operate them simultaneously with one hand. It is Therefore, while the left button 22b and the right button 22c are operated with one hand, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand. It should be noted that the arrangement relationship of each operation means is not limited to the arrangement relationship of this control example, and for example, the left button 22b, the right button 22c, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated simultaneously with one hand. Alternatively, the left button 22b and the right button 22c may be configured so that they can be operated with one hand operating the operating handle, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533. FIG. In the eighth control example, the contents defined in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the contents defined in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from those in the first control example described above. are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 532 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 532, in the work RAM 233 of the eighth control example, an 8 display setting flag 233fa, an 8 display effect counter 233fb, a display pending ball number storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd are added. is different from the first control example described above.

The 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag for indicating that the 8-piece pending effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8-piece pending effect is executed. While this eight display setting flag 233fa is set to ON, in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 521 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol Instead of the number of pending balls, the remaining number of pending symbols (retained symbols for effect) to be the object of the 8 pending effect is displayed (see FIG. 528). As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the 8 pending effects, which are continuous effects (period effects) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In this eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the eight reserved effect and the number of reserved symbols for effect are displayed in synchronization with each other, but the eight reserved effect is displayed. It is sufficient to display the number of reserved patterns for effect so that the player can easily understand the execution period of , for example, the third pattern stops or temporarily stops during the 8 reserved effect. The number of reserved symbols for use may be set, or one reserved design for performance may be set for two or more special figure variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the 8 pending effects (what number of pending symbols is currently being displayed in a variable display).

The display 8 effect counter 233fb is the number of pending patterns for effect to be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 521(b)) of the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the 8 pending effect. is a counter for measuring In this control example, since it is configured so as to vary the number of pending symbols for performance corresponding to the remaining number of pending symbols to be subjected to the 8 pending performance, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs 8 performances for display. In the 8 display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) executed when the pending command is received, the counter value is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 555).

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) that is executed when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 554), and after subtraction is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 554). When the value of the 8 display effect counter 233fb becomes 0, it means that all of the reserved symbols that are the target of the 8 reserved effect have been used. It is set to OFF (see Z3525 in FIG. 554), and in the pending display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556), a pending design is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 528). Thus, when the last special figure variation targeted for the 8 reserved performance is executed, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the 8 reserved performance is completed. When doing so, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives a display reserved ball number command output from the audio lamp control device 113. If so, the number of pending balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and each time the display control device 114 command determination processing (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is executed, a different value and The update process is executed so that The value of the display effect counter 233fd is obtained when drawing lots with reference to the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa to determine whether or not to execute the 8-piece reservation effect in the number-of-holds control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 532, the NAND flash memory 234a of the eighth control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234a of the first control example in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 are added. ing.

The 8-pieces effect scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the effect result of the 8-pieces reserved effect, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the 8-pieces reserved effect and the lottery result of the special symbols. It is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the 8 reserved performances.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8 effect scenario selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 533 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8 effect scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, in the eighth control example, when the special figure variation is started when the 8 holding effects are executed, the treasure chest displayed in the running area Ds1a is open. , and the suggestive mode is configured to be selected by referring to the 8 effect scenario selection table 234a3.

In this 8 effect scenario selection table 234a3, the variation result (lottery result of the special figure variation to be executed this time) is a hit (jackpot), and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4". In other words, when 4 to 7 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the value of the display effect counter 233fd is in the range of "0 to 50" and the suggested mode "rainbow". Is defined, the suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "51 to 90", the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91 to 150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151 to 198" stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter The value of 233fd is defined in the range of "0 to 89" as the suggested mode "rainbow", in the range of "90 to 149" as the suggested mode "red", and in the range of "150 to 179" as the suggested mode "blue" ” is defined, and “white” is defined in the range of “180 to 198”.

On the other hand, if the variation result (lottery result of the special figure variation to be executed this time) is out and the value of the 8 display effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, a treasure box is simulated in the standby area Ds1b. When 4 to 7 reserved patterns for effect are displayed, the value of the display effect counter 233fd is defined in the range of "0 to 39" as the suggested mode "red", and in the range of "40 to 149" A suggestive mode of "blue" is defined, and a range of "150 to 198" is defined as "white". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter The value of 233fd is defined as "red" in the range of "0 to 59", the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198" stipulated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the 8 pending effect, there is a win suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a win. When the suggestion mode "rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure variation is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the smaller the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb, that is, the more the 8 pending effect progresses, the easier it is for various colors to be displayed as the suggestive mode of the 8 pending effect. It is possible to enjoy the performance without getting bored until the end with respect to the 8 pending performances which are continuous performances executed across the special figure fluctuations.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when the 8 reserved effects are executed, a reserved pattern for effect (treasure box) for indicating the target special figure variation is displayed in the standby area Ds1b, and is the target of the effect. When the special figure variation is executed, the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the variation is displayed while the treasure box displayed in the running area Ds1a is open. However, for example, when displaying reserved symbols for effect (treasure chest) in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure box may be set based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved symbol. Also good.

Specifically, when the prize information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a big win, it is possible to set multiple colors for treasure boxes that are more likely to be selected than when information indicating a big win is not included. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the special figure variation executed during the eight pending performance from the stage before the special figure variation is performed.

In addition, an effect (read-ahead effect) in which the state of the pending pattern for effect (color of the treasure box) displayed in the waiting area Ds1b is changed, and an effect in which the display state of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the active area Ds1a is changed. (the variable effect) and are executed in combination, it is preferable to set the variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect to be executed later than the look-ahead effect to be executed first. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may be set in advance, When selecting the variable performance, the variable performance may be selected based on the performance mode of the look-ahead performance set for the reserved pattern corresponding to the current variable performance. As a result, it is possible to associate the performance mode of a plurality of performances (read-ahead performance, the variable performance) executed at different timings with respect to one reserved pattern (winning information), thereby making the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute a continuous performance without giving.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 534, start-up processing 8 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 in the eighth control example is powered on will be described. FIG. 534 is a flow chart showing this start-up process 8. FIG. The start-up process 8 in this eighth control example executes the process of Z910 for the start-up process in the first control example, and then sets a fluctuation return command indicating the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation being executed. (Z951) The difference is that processing is added. In the eighth control example, a command indicating the remaining remaining time of return fluctuation is set. Since other processing is the same as the start-up processing in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 535 to 552, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the start-up process (see FIG. 394) is changed to start-up process 8 (see FIG. 534), and the main process (see FIG. 395) is changed to main process 8 (see FIG. 536). ), command determination processing (2113 in FIG. 396) as command determination processing 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537), variation pattern reception processing (Z2202 in FIG. 397) as variation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538), variation display setting Processing (Z2114 in FIG. 406) is changed to variable display setting processing 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543), pending number display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. 395) is changed to pending number display update processing 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 544), frame button input monitoring/ Effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 545), and as new processing, fluctuation recovery processing (Z2252 in FIG. 541) and display startup processing (Z2245 in FIG. 542) , left and right button input processing (Z2843 in FIG. 546), SW effect processing (Z2841 in FIG. 547), background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 548), mode identification processing (Z2968 in FIG. 550), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in FIG. 551) ) and counter update processing (Z2176 in FIG. 552) are added. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 535, the start-up process (see FIG. 535) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the above-described start-up process of the first control example (see FIG. 394) in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 394) when a state command is received is deleted. . Furthermore, the difference is that the contents of the processing executed in the initial setting (Z2001) are changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 535) is executed, processes Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process ends. Here, regarding the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example, differences from the first control example described above will be described. In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, during the period during which the initial setting is being performed, if the special figure variation is being performed, the BGM of the special figure variation is output. It consists of That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535), the process of reading the game information at the time of power failure is executed, and the game information at the time of power failure read by the process is in special figure fluctuation. When it is determined that there is, a variation command for sound is set for outputting the special figure variation BGM from the sound output device 226 .

Although the details will be described later, in the eighth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, power is supplied from the internal power supply provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the power is supplied. The game information at the time of disconnection (presence or absence of special figure fluctuation, lottery result of the fluctuation, BGM for fluctuation, remaining fluctuation time, etc.) is temporarily stored in the display storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to read the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535).

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the main process 8 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram showing main processing 8 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the eighth control example.

The main processing 8 of the eighth control example replaces the main processing of the first control example (see FIG. 395) with the pending quantity display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. Z2171 in 544) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 395), and frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 544) is replaced with command determination processing (Z2113 in FIG. 395). The command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537) is replaced with the variable display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 395), and the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543) is provided. Z2111 in), during reach retention effect management processing (Z2112 in FIG. 394) is deleted, and lamp setting processing (see Z2173 in FIG. 536) is added. Other processes are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 536) is executed, first, the same processes Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of Z2105 is finished, next, the pending number display update process 8 is executed (Z2171). The detailed content of this pending number display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of Z2171 is completed, the processing of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 is then executed (Z2172). Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processing of Z2172, the same processing of Z2108 to Z2110 as the main processing of the first control example (see FIG. 395) is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit . Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing the processing of Z2173, next, counter update processing (Z2176) is executed. Details of this counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: No), command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then variable display is performed. Setting processing 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the first control example described above is executed. Details of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537, and details of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 537, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z2174). This command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the pending ball count command output from main controller 110 for the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the first control example described above. the content of the process executed when the stop command is received from the main controller 110 is added; The difference is that a process to be executed when a display rise command to be set is received and a process to be executed when a fluctuation return command is received are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

It should be noted that the processing (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the illustrated stop type command is received in the command determination processing (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the first control example described above is described in the eighth control example. Although the same processing is executed in the control example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the processing (Z2261 in FIG. 537) corresponding to other commands is executed.

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, first, it determines whether the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: Yes), then the variation pattern reception process 8 is executed (Z2241), and the process ends. The detailed contents of this fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. The difference is that it is configured to execute processing for background change in .

Returning to FIG. 537, the description continues. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and if it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes ), the fluctuation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing ends. This fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs the process of setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the process of executing the background change when the special symbol is stopped. The detailed content will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), then it is determined whether or not the command for the number of pending balls has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has been received. If so (Z2205: Yes), the pending number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process ends. Details of this pending number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 2205 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z2205: No), Z2207 and Z2208, which are the same as the command determination process of the first control example (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), After the process is executed, it is determined whether or not the variable return command is received (Z2251). When it is determined that the variable return command is received (Z2251: Yes), the variable return process is executed (Z2252), and this process is performed. exit. The detailed content of this fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2251 that the fluctuation recovery command has not been received (Z2251: No), then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display start-up command is set when the display control device 114 completes the initial setting processing after the power is turned on. to the audio lamp controller 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command is received in the process of Z2244, that is, the initial setting process of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third pattern display device 81 based on the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 If it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen (Z2244: Yes), display startup processing is executed (Z2245), and this processing ends. Details of the display startup process (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2245, the game information (audio data) stored in the display storage area is read out and the audio data is output to the audio output device 226 when the power is turned off. Thereby, as described above with reference to FIG. can output sound based on the sound data stored in the display storage area.

In addition, in this control example, as the game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is fluctuating (information during the special figure fluctuation), which is being executed during the special figure fluctuation Information indicating the type of sound (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting the sound data in the process of Z2245, read the special figure fluctuation information and BGM type information, Based on this, rising voice data is set.

In the process of Z2244, if it is determined that the display startup command has not been received (Z2244: No), the process corresponding to other commands (including the process when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241). This variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) deletes the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 from the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) of the first control example described above, and processes the background change at the start of variation. The difference is that the Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed, the same Z2221 to Z2224 processes as the fluctuation pattern reception process of the first control example (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) are executed, and then the next It is determined whether the background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256). Here, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256: Yes), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2257). A display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to OFF (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed fluctuation period during the special figure fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed while the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON. When done, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special figure fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2256 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (Z2256: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 539, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) will be described. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2266), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether there is a pending special figure ( Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are read out for determination. In the process of Z2267, if it is determined that there is no special figure pending (Z2267: No), the next special figure variation despite the fact that the conditions for executing the background change in the next special figure variation are satisfied Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change triggered by the stop of this special figure fluctuation, add 1 to the background mode and set it in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2268), and set the background mode A display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to OFF (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2266, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (Z2266: No), or in the process of Z2267, if it is determined that there is a pending special figure (Z2267: Yes ) does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (variation stop timing of the special figure), skipping the processing of Z2268 ~ Z2270 and proceeds to the processing of Z2271.

In the process of Z2271, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2271), that is, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the return fluctuation. If it is determined that the return fluctuation flag is ON (Z2271: Yes), the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to OFF (Z2272), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is not ON (Z2271: No), the current fluctuation is not the return fluctuation, so the processes of Z2272 and Z2273 are skipped and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, if the next background change flag 223fa is turned on and the conditions for the next special figure variation to be executed are not established (at the timing when this special figure variation stops If there is no), it is configured to execute the background change at the timing of stopping the special figure fluctuation this time, so the background mode after switching is provided early to the player who wants the background change. can be done.

Moreover, you may make the ON state of next background change flag 223fa continue, for example, until the next special figure fluctuation|variation is performed, without restricting to the structure of this control example mentioned above. In this case, set a predetermined effective period (for example, 1 minute) as the period until the next special figure fluctuation is started, and if the next special figure fluctuation is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the next background It is preferable to configure so that the change flag 223fa is set to OFF.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to suppress the execution of the background change immediately after.

Next, with reference to FIG. 540, the contents of the pending number control process (Z2243) will be described. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending number control process (Z2243). In this pending number control process (Z2243), based on the information contained in the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110, the processing for managing the special figure pending ball number on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the special figure Execution processing of an effect (eight pending effect) whose execution condition is that the number of pending balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the reserved number control process (Z2243), first, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball Stored in number counter 223b) (Z2471), and sets a display reserved ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved number counter stored in the process of Z2471 (Z2472). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is 8, which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

In the process of Z2473, if it is determined that the value of the counter (the number of special pending balls) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the production counter 223h is obtained (Z2474), and the value of the production counter 223h obtained is Based on this, the lottery result is acquired from the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222fa (Z2475), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result indicates that the 8-piece reservation effect is to be executed (Z2476).

When it is determined that the lottery result indicates that the 8 pending effects are to be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding 8 pending effects are set (Z2477), and the 8 pending effects commands for display are set (Z2478). ), the pending effect execution flag 223fb is set to ON (Z2479), the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is set to 8, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2476, when it is determined that the lottery result indicates that the 8 pending effect is not executed (Z2476: No), the process of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped because the 8 pending effect is not executed. to terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 541, the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described. FIG. 541 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252). In this fluctuation return process (Z2252), based on the return fluctuation command received from main controller 110, the process of updating the remaining time of the return fluctuation is executed.

In the fluctuation recovery process (Z2252), first, the remaining fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation recovery command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the recovery state storage area 223fe (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is 0, that is, whether or not it is in recovery fluctuation (Z2282). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2282: No), a value corresponding to the remaining variation time counter 223fg is set (Z2283), and the return variation flag 223ff is set to ON (Z2284). Next, from the backup area of the RAM 223, the BGM information indicating the reproduction position of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the time when the power failure occurred is read (Z2285), and the special figure fluctuation BGM is reproduced from the reproduction position indicated by the read BGM information. is set to start (Z2286), and this process ends. On the other hand, the remaining variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2282. That is, when it is determined that it is time to end the return fluctuation (Z2282: Yes), this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541), when the power is restored and the fluctuation display is being executed, the special figure fluctuation BGM is resumed from the BGM playback position at the time when the power was cut off. be able to. As a result, when the power is momentarily cut off during the execution of the special figure fluctuation (so-called momentary power failure, etc.), the BGM after the power is restored will be the BGM from the continuation of the BGM at the time of the power cut off. can be output. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the lottery situation at the time of power cut-off is maintained as it is even after the power cut-off. Therefore, even if the power supply is cut off momentarily (temporarily) during the special figure variation, the player may not be able to discard the special figure variation being executed. Since it is possible to suppress suspicion such as whether or not there is a problem, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of power failure is backed up in the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main controller 110, in addition to the remaining variation time information of the special figure variation being executed, at least the information of the variation type (variation time) may be included in the variation return command. Then, from the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation under execution and the remaining fluctuation time information, the period during which the BGM has been reproduced (the fluctuation time that has passed before the power failure occurred) is calculated, and the total reproduction time of the BGM By calculating back the BGM playback position at the time when the power failure occurred from the difference between the BGM playback positions when the power is restored, the BGM playback position at the time of power recovery may be specified. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide backup means in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the structure of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 542, the contents of the display startup process (Z2245) will be described. FIG. 542 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display startup process (Z2245). In this display start-up process (Z2245), when the display start-up command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the remaining variation time is handled based on the value of the remaining variation time counter. Executes the processing for setting the displayed variation pattern command.

In the display start-up process (Z2245), first, it is determined whether the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON, that is, whether the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is not ON (Z2291: No), the process is terminated as it is because the return fluctuation is not in progress. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2291: Yes), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2292), and the process proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time read out in the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: Yes), using various display variation patterns held in the variation pattern selection table 222a, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the remaining variation time is issued. Set (Z2294), and start up and set the set audio data (Z2295). Next, the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to OFF (Z2296), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2293 that the remaining variation time is not longer than 5 seconds (Z2293: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or longer (Z2297). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: Yes), the display variation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining variation time, and the display variation pattern command is set (Z2298) Z2295 described above, Then, the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2297, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not longer than 2 seconds (Z2297: No), a display command for displaying the recovering screen is set until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (Z2299 ), the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the display variation pattern command for the return variation is set in correspondence with the remaining variation time, and the voice data is set to inform the player of the result of the return variation without discomfort. can do. In this eighth control example, the variation pattern table that is specified also at the time of return fluctuation is used to set the display variation pattern command. A display variation pattern command may be set using a return variation pattern table. By configuring in this way, more variation patterns can be provided to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 543, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described. FIG. 543 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). This variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) is different from the variable display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) of the above-described first control example. The difference is that the processing for setting is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the fluctuation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, it is first determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501). (Z2501: No), skipping to the process of Z2505 as in the first control example. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is greater than 0 (Z2531), and is greater than 0 (Z2531: Yes), the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the pending effect counter 223fc after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

In the process of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is 0 (Z2533: Yes), since it is the end timing of the eight pending effects, the pending effect executing flag 223fb is set to OFF (Z2534 ), the process proceeds to Z2502, which is the same as in the first control example described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2531, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2531: No), it is not currently in the eight pending effects, so Z2532 ~ Skip the processing of Z2534 and shift to the processing of Z2502.

In addition, in the processing of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), the 8 pending effect is being executed and it is not the end timing of the 8 pending effect. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When shifting to the processing of Z2502, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the fluctuation display setting processing of the first control example (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) is executed, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation pattern is left. The variable time counter 223ff is set (Z2511). Then, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the variable display setting processing (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the eighth control example, when the process of Z2511 ends, next, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2535), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, the content of the pending number display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described. FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending number display update process 8 (Z2171). In this reserved number display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the reserved LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols is performed.

When the reserved number display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) Hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then a display hold ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b) is issued. Set (Z2632) and terminate this process.

In addition, in this control example, in the processing of Z2631, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 are made to correspond to the total value, and the LED 900 for holding is lit in the same manner. Although it is configured to make settings, it is not limited to this. Lighting may be set so as to light up, or according to the current gaming state, lighting setting may be performed so as to light up the LED 900 for holding corresponding to only the number of reserved balls of one of the special figures. You can

Furthermore, in this control example, the LED 900 for reservation is configured to always perform the lighting setting indicating the special figure reservation ball, but without being limited to this, a period in which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example, The period during which the 8 pending production is executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for production is moved so that the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is difficult to see, and the display of the third pattern display device 81 Only during the period when the variable display is performed using the entire screen, it is difficult to visually recognize the number of reserved balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81). can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 545, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described. FIG. 545 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed in contrast to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed, the processing content that is executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the processing that is executed when the left and right buttons are input is added. Other than that, they are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/rendering process 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processes Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring/rendering process (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above are executed, and Z2805 If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2805: No), the processing relating to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the process of Z2843, the process for the operation of the left button 22b or the right button 22c (hereinafter referred to as the left/right button 22) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2805 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed when the switch to be contacted when the frame button 22 is pressed continues to output ON for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). In other words, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed to turn on the switch (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to its initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds during the recovery operation. Configure.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is kept on for at least 0.15 seconds at the shortest. If the detection continues for a predetermined period of time (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination that the frame button 22 has been pressed when an output indicating the ON state for a short period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the contents of the left/right button input process (Z2843), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (Z2172), will be described. FIG. 546 is a flow chart showing the contents of left/right button input processing (Z2843). In this left/right button input process (Z2843), a process for switching the operation mode of the left/right button 22 is executed by determining whether the special symbol is changed at high speed or low speed.

In the left/right button input processing (Z2843), first, it is determined whether or not the left button 22b or the right button 22c has been operated (Z2851). When it is determined that the left/right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is 0 or more, that is, whether the special symbols are varying (Z2852). When it is determined that the special symbols are fluctuating (Z2852: Yes), it is determined whether or not the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is on (Z2853). If it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is ON (Z2853: Yes), the sound volume level is set according to the operation result of the left/right button 22 (Z2854), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2853 that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is OFF (Z2853: No), the special operation flag 223fi is set ON (Z2855), and this process is terminated. By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 according to the fluctuation state of the special symbols.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2851 that the left/right button 22 has not been operated (Z2851: No), it is determined whether the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is ON (Z2856: Yes), the special operation flag 223fi is set to OFF (Z2857), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2856 that the special operation flag 223fi is off (Z2856: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed in the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 547 is a flow chart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), a control process related to a special effect of vibrating the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, a background change process of changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22, and the above-described The same processing as part of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example is executed. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same processing as part of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when setting the variable pattern command for display in the process of Z2504 of the variable display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 543), a variable pattern including a special effect is set as the SW effect, and In the processing of Z2804 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), it is determined whether or not the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set.

In the processing of Z2941, when it is determined that the special effect is performed (Z2941: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 this time is the operation of the frame button 22 during the special effect, so control processing for the special effect. (Z2942 to Z2947) are executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether or not the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (Z2942).

The value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first operation of the frame button after the special effect is set. is. If it is determined that the value of the counter is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of Z2942 (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2943), and based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223h Then, a special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, no matter which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four. be.

Next, a special effect command for display corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2942, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special effect is already being executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 1 After subtraction (Z2948), the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is executed corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction, and this processing ends.

Here, the processing of the special effects described above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, the frame button 22 is operated for the first time in a state where the current variation pattern includes a special effect, and the type of special effect (vibration type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, in the process of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4, and in the process of Z2447, the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set (Fig. 531 ( b) see).

In addition, in the process of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the button A push-suggestion display mode for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to this special figure variation and the type of the selected special effect, for example, the following frame button During operation, if a larger vibration is applied than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated this time, a large vibration is applied if a vibration larger than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated It is configured such that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than when the suggestion is not provided.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the special drawing lottery result of this time is a big win, it is configured to make it easier to display the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion than when the lottery result is not a big win (loss). When the next frame button is operated, when a vibration larger than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated this time is applied, and when the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot, the next frame button operation is the most It is configured such that the emphasized display mode is easily displayed.

As a result, it is possible to predict the current special figure lottery result based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the amount of vibration generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated when the next frame button is operated becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated when the frame button is operated this time, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set production can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button is operated for the second time during the special effect, in the processing of Z2942, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (3) (Z2942; Yes), and the SW special effect is determined. 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 223fd. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2 is set in the SW motor data. Thereafter, similar processing is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes zero. When the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is finished with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). is configured to In addition, in this control example, since it is configured to be able to set a special effect as a SW effect by making the variation pattern correspond to the setting, the execution period of the special effect is configured to fit within one special figure variation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the variation pattern (regardless of the special figure variation period). It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute, and the special effect is set based on the determination result. Further, it may be configured such that a special effect is set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a special effect without being involved in the fluctuation time of the special figure to be set. In addition, the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special figure lottery being changed, the winning information in the hold, and the set game state.

Returning to FIG. 547, the description continues. In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the set SW effect is not a special effect (the SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), next, frame button input monitoring of the first control example described above is performed. - The same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810 and Z2811 of the effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the present is the timing at which the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: No), and since the current frame button 22 is a background change operation for changing the background mode, background change processing is executed (Z2949), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the background change processing (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 548 is a flow chart showing the contents of the background change processing (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (an operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed. A process for varying the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548), first, the timing at which the background change operation is executed is whether the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is greater than 0, that is, the variation period of the special symbol (special symbol (Z2963), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is greater than 0 (Z2963: Yes), next, whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on. That is, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not a high-speed fluctuation period (medium-speed period, low-speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: No), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag is set. 223fa is set to ON (Z2965), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2963, if the value of the remaining variation time counter is not 0 or more (Z2963: No), and the current is not the variation period of the special figure (for example, it is a customer waiting period) (Z2963: No ), or if it is determined in the processing of Z2964 that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately, so the background mode is incremented by 1 and the background mode It sets in the storage area 223i (Z2966), sets a display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode (Z2967), and terminates this processing.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (Z2172) in FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the contents of sensor input processing 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 are executed.

In contrast to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example, this sensor input process 8 (Z2842) has the special operation flag 223fi turned off and the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s set to 0. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the advance notice effect display is not set, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the above-described first control example, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is greater than 0. The difference is that the sensor effective time counter 223s is used to measure the effective period corresponding to the effect set based on the variation pattern, among the periods in which the operation to the sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Therefore, even if the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Also in the eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided to provide a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined as in the first control example described above, but description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is not on (Z2831: Yes). , the same processing from Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input processing (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is ON in the processing of Z2831 (Z2831: Yes), or if it is determined that the advance notice effect display is not set in the processing of Z2822 (Z2822: No), mode identification processing is performed. is executed (Z2968), and the process ends. In this mode identification process (Z2968), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 550, a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is executed. be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted (Z2824), and it is determined whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: Yes), a command is set to change the variation speed of the third symbol at low speed (Z2832), and the high-speed variation flag 223fh is set to off ( Z2833). Next, the touch sensor valid time is reset (Z2829), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 550, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described. FIG. 550 is a flow chart showing the contents of mode identification processing (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, it is first determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969). A mode display command is set (Z2970), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2969 that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated (Z2969: No), the process of Z2970 is skipped and this process ends.

That is, in the eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player simply by operating the touch sensor 2900 . With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode within the limited space of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A wide area can be secured for effecting the variable display.

In the eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 523(a)). However, without being limited to this, at the timing of displaying the current background mode based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed is determined, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the effect is determined. A display area where is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in that display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Next, the content of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting mode of the frame lamp (lamp for lighting the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 518) according to the game situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is in the special figure fluctuation (Z2131), and if it is determined that it is not in the special figure fluctuation (Z2131: No), the frame lamp A frame lighting command for lighting green is set (Z2135), then a mode lighting command for lighting the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d is set so as to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and this processing is performed. exit.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) is embedded in the frame button 22 as light emitting means, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be illuminated in any color by turning on the light emitting means. ing. Various information is notified to the player according to the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is in high speed fluctuation. There, red is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is fluctuating other than high speed fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (fluctuation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Furthermore, since the surface of the frame button 22 to be operated when executing the background change operation (the surface in contact with the player) is caused to emit light by the frame lamp, the player who intends to execute the background change operation is instructed to: Since the current special figure fluctuation state (variation speed of the third pattern) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure fluctuation state when the background change operation is performed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the timing of executing the background change is varied according to the variation speed of the third symbol. To solve the above-mentioned problem by varying the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure variation state (variation speed of the third symbol). can be done.

In this control example, the structure in which the frame lamp directly emits light from the surface of the frame button 22 is used, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this. Any position is acceptable. For example, a frame lamp may be provided near the frame button 22 .

Returning to FIG. 551, the description continues. In the process of Z2131, if it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), then it is determined whether the high speed fluctuation flag 223fh is ON (Z2132), and the high speed fluctuation flag 223fh is ON If so (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is lit in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high speed fluctuation (Z2131: No), set the frame lamp to red (Z2136), then all mode lamp lighting command for lighting all is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 552, counter update processing (Z2176), which is one processing in the main processing (see FIG. 536), will be described. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the details of the counter update process (Z2176). In this counter update process (Z2176), a process of updating the values of various counters is executed.

In the counter update process (Z2176), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861). When the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is decremented by 1 (Z2862), and the process proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is not 0 or more, that is, it is 0 (Z2861: No), the process of Z2862 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2863.

In the process of Z2863, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg read out in the process of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed variation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863). If it is determined that it is in the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: Yes), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON (Z2864), the other counter values are updated (Z2866), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is not the high-speed variation period of the special symbol (third symbol) (Z2863: No), the high-speed variation flag 223fh is set to OFF (Z2865), and the above-described Then, the process of Z2866 is executed, and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 553 to 557, control processing of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described. In this eighth control example, in place of the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is replaced with the variation pattern command process (see Z3302 in FIG. (see Z3405 in FIG. 554), the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422(b)), and the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631 in FIG. 557) ) is executed, and 8-piece display setting processing (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) and pending display setting processing (see Z3495 in FIG. 556) are added. Other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 553, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z3302) will be described. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), in contrast to the above-described command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), the process executed when receiving the 8 effect pending command for display and when looping this process Add a process to update the value of the display effect counter to , and the contents of the process executed when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, and the contents of the process executed when the pending ball number command is received. , is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same processes of Z3401 to Z3404 as the command determination process of the first control example (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) are executed, and in the process of Z3404, the display fluctuation pattern If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command processing 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to Z3496. The detailed content of this variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In this eighth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated each time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed. This command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of command (display command) received by the display control device 114. FIG. Therefore, the timing at which the processing of Z3496 is executed can always be made irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3496 is finished, the processing shifts to Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z3404 (Z3404: No), the same processing of Z3406 to Z3411 as the above-described command determination processing (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is executed. , the process proceeds to Z3496 described above. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the switching command for display has not been received (Z3410: No), then it is determined whether or not the command for holding eight effects for display has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that it has been received. If so (Z3492: Yes), the 8-piece display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to Z3496.

This 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data relating to the 8-piece pending effect (see FIG. 526), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of Z3492, if it is determined that the display 8 effect pending command has not been received (Z3492: No), then it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received (Z3414), and the pending ball number command is issued. If it is determined that it has been received (Z3414: Yes), the pending display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to Z3496. This pending display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Details thereof are shown in FIG. will be described later with reference to

In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z3414: No), the same processing of Z3418 to Z3420 as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496.

Next, with reference to FIG. 554, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is different from the above-described variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) in that a control process is added when eight pending effects are being executed. Elements other than are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same Z3501 to Z3506 processes as the above-described variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set It is determined whether it is set to ON (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the 8-hold effect is not being executed (Z3521: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z3521: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the 8 display effect counter 233fb (Z3522), and the 8 display effect after the subtraction Referring to the counter, the player selects the effect mode (the contents of the treasure box) using the 8 effect scenario selection table 234a3 (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the 8-display effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the 8-display setting flag 233fa is set to OFF (Z3526). , the process ends. Also, in the process of Z3525, the value of the display 8 production counter 233fb is not 0, that is, even if the 8 pending production continues even in the next and subsequent special figure fluctuations (Z3525: No), this processing is executed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the contents of the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493). When the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5701), the 8-piece effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the data table for the set eight effects display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), time data is set to the clock counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the display 8 effect counter. , the process ends.

Next, the content of the pending display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending display process (Z3495). When the pending display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of pending balls is set in the display pending ball number storage area 233fc based on the information contained in the pending ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5802), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z5802: Yes), the 8 display setting flag 233fa is currently in the pending effect, A pointer corresponding to the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is set (Z5803), and this process is terminated. That is, while the 8 reserved effect is being executed, the number of reserved symbols for effect (treasure box) in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the value of the 8 displayed effect counter 233fb. is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5802 that the 8-ball display setting flag 233fa is not set to ON (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display pending ball count storage area 233fc is set (Z5804). , the process ends. That is, while the 8 pending effect is not being executed, a pending symbol (circle) corresponding to the number of pending balls of the special symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 557, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of resident image transfer setting processing 8 (Z4631). This resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) sets a command (display start-up command) for indicating that all resident target image data has been transferred. is different from Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same processes Z4701 to Z4705 as the above-described resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422(b)) are executed. , set a display startup command (Z4721), and terminate this process. In this way, a command (display By configuring the audio lamp control device 113 to output the start-up command) to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 side can grasp the timing when the display control device 114 becomes operable normally.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226). Therefore, by outputting a display start-up command from the display control device 114, an instruction to display a normal screen after power-on and an instruction to output various sounds (BGM) can be synchronously executed.

In the eighth control example, while the dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols that are reserved and stored is being executed, the period during which the period effect is executed (period It is configured so that the reserved design for production showing only the reserved pattern to be the object of production is displayed. That is, during execution of the period performance, even if a new starting prize is detected, a new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the look-ahead result based on the new starting prize is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach or a jackpot lottery result, etc.), a hold indicating the startup prize corresponding to the specific lottery result It may be configured such that the display range of the pending design for effect is expanded (or the ratio of expanding the display range is increased) to the design. By constructing in this way, when the display range of the reserved design for effect is expanded, the player can be made to recognize that the reserved ball corresponding to the specific lottery result is included. It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, among the reserved symbols that are the target of the period production, a holding corresponding to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a lottery result of a big hit, etc.) Even when a new starting prize is detected in a state where the pattern is included, the display range of the pending pattern for production is expanded (or the display range is expanded) to the reserved pattern corresponding to the new starting prize. It may be configured so that the ratio of By configuring in this way, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to have a configuration in which a specific lottery result can be obtained within the range at the beginning of the start of the period production, so that when the variable display corresponding to the specific lottery result is displayed. It is possible to realize a playability that does not know whether or not it will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth control example, even during the execution of the operation presentation using the touch sensor 2900, when a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c) is executed. , it is not handled as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation effect, but is handled as an operation for notifying the background mode. It may be configured so that it is not treated as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 (becomes difficult to handle). More specifically, for example, when an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected in a state in which either the left button 22b or the right button 22c is pressed during the execution period of the operation effect, It may be configured not to be treated as an operation (not treated as a touch operation in a touch effect). With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates only the left button 22b and the touch sensor 2900 or only the right button 22c and the touch sensor 2900 to perform a special operation, the player may Developing into a ready-to-win effect using the entire main display area Dm of the 3-symbol display device 81 (low-speed fluctuation display of the 3rd pattern) (operation of the touch sensor 2900 is determined to be an operation for the touch effect). can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of an effect mode contrary to the intention of the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d do not change the lighting mode, the player who has made an erroneous operation while intending to perform a special operation can be easily made aware of the erroneous operation. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. Furthermore, even if the player who tried to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for the touch effect erroneously operates either the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900, It is possible to avoid the display of the background mode by the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d against the intention of the player. Therefore, the player who has mistakenly operated the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900 in an attempt to participate in the touch effect will feel discomfort due to the display of the display content against his/her will. You can prevent it from happening. In addition, since the erroneous operation does not cause any change in the display mode, the player can be easily made aware of the erroneous operation. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the eighth control example, in the special effect involving the vibration of the frame button 22a, each time the frame button 22a is pressed, the type of vibration (vibration type) that occurs is determined by lottery, and a big win is made during the hold. A mode (vibrator type) in which the presence is confirmed and a mode in which the expectation of a big win is increased are provided, but the vibrator type in the special effect may be notified to the player by means other than vibration. That is, for example, when the player operates the frame button 22a continuously at short intervals in a special effect, it may become difficult for the player to perceive the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. There is In this case, for example, even though the special performance of the aspect (vibration C) in which the possibility of winning a big win is relatively high, the special performance of the aspect (vibration A) in which the big win is confirmed is performed, but the player misunderstands that the special performance is performed in the aspect (vibration A). There is a risk that the player will feel distrustful of the player. This problem can be solved by providing means for notifying the type of vibration executed in the special effect, other than the mode of vibration transmitted to the finger of the player who presses the frame button 22a. More specifically, for example, the third symbol display device 81 displays the correspondence (vibration history) between the number of times the frame button 22a is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the pressing. may be configured. With this configuration, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misunderstands it, the player can easily check the history of the vibration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can identify the type of vibe this time. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand. Further, instead of displaying the history, for example, a graph may be used to display changes in vibration intensity over time. With such a configuration, the transition of the vibration intensity can be easily understood by the player, so that a more comprehensible mode of presentation can be realized. The history and graph display on the third symbol display device 81 may be performed each time a special effect is executed, or if the operation interval of the player is less than a predetermined interval (for example, it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). 0.5 second interval or less). Further, for example, even after the specified number of times of pressing (4 times) in the special effect is completed, the vibration pattern is set again from the beginning each time the frame button 22a is pressed (the vibration pattern is repeated every time the frame button 22a is pressed 4 times). After the predetermined number of times of pressing (4 times) is completed, the frame button 22a is kept pressed (so-called long pressing), so that the frame button 22a can be It may be configured such that the vibration pattern is repeated. In other words, even after the execution of the vibration mode (vibration type) corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22a is completed, the vibration mode (vibration type) can be reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22a. can be configured. By configuring in this way, a player who has not been able to identify the type of the vibe can easily reconfirm the type of the vibe, so convenience for the player can be improved. .

In this eighth control example, if the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is immediately changed. , the background mode is changed at the start of the next variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the background mode may be changed immediately when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, after the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation display mode in which the high-speed fluctuation is executed is executed again (for example, when normal reach occurs and the medium-speed fluctuation After the period expires, when it develops into super reach and returns to high speed fluctuation again), the background mode will be changed immediately according to the background change operation until the high speed fluctuation period when developing into super reach. may be configured. With this configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the background mode change is immediately executed by the background change operation during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, thereby determining whether or not the super ready-to-win effect develops. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which it is possible to know in advance. Therefore, the player can actively perform the background change operation during the medium-speed fluctuation period and the low-speed fluctuation period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is only changed at the start of the next fluctuation display. It is not something that can be done. For example, when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, instead of carrying over the background mode change until the start of the next fluctuation display, a predetermined notification is given at a predetermined rate. may be By configuring in this way, the change of the background mode is carried over until the next change, and it is suppressed that stress is given to the player because it takes time to change to the background mode in which the game is desired. can do. In this case, the content of the notification includes, for example, the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable display during execution, the degree of expectation for developing into super reach, and the degree of expectation that a big win (or variable display corresponding to super reach) is included in the hold , the degree of expectation and the like for the so-called latent probability change state. With such a configuration, by purposely performing the background change operation during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to realize a game that is different from usual, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

In the eighth control example, three periods with different speeds of the variable display of the third symbol are provided. good. Conversely, as the variable display speed of the first symbols, at least a high-speed variable period, a medium-speed variable period, and a low-speed variable period are provided, and the speed of the variable display of the third symbols is set to that of the variable display of the first symbols. It may be configured to synchronize with the speed.

In the eighth control example, it was configured to execute a specific period effect based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaching the upper limit (8), but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily the upper limit reserved ball The number is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. As the number of reserved balls, which is an execution condition, is reduced, the opportunity to execute the period effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be further improved. In addition, the more the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, the more likely the execution period of the period effect is to become longer. Similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to the case where all the balls held at the start of the period effect are consumed, and may be arbitrarily determined.

<Ninth control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 to 566. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example has volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example (see FIG. 451). is provided, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113, and part of the control contents are different from the eighth control example described above, and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the eighth control example described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing of changing the background mode (executing the background change) corresponds to the operation timing. (timing) can be made variable, for example, it is possible to suppress the situation where the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to perform the background change operation with peace of mind, and can be made to actively perform the background change operation.

However, in the technique of the eighth control example described above, only the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is different, and since the effect modes executed are the same, the background change operation executes There is a problem that the player gets bored with the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the background notice effect suggesting the background mode after transition is executed after the background change operation is executed and before the background change is actually executed. And, it is configured to vary the effect mode of the background notice effect according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, during special figure non-fluctuation timing, during special figure fluctuation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a different effect mode depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the executed effect. .

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the background change operation to see the background announcement effect.

Further, in the ninth control example, as in the above-described fourth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure variation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). there is Here, the conventional pachinko machine is a game state (for example, time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)) in which special figure fluctuations are easily executed, and a game state in which special figure fluctuations are difficult to be executed (For example, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design)) and can be configured, and further, if the time saving state is set, if the normal state is set It was configured to make it easier to set a shorter variation time as a special figure variation time than.

In other words, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if there is a period during which the special figure variation is not executed during the time saving state, a new special figure variation is likely to start immediately, and the period when the special figure variation is not performed during the normal state If occurs, it becomes difficult to start a new special figure fluctuation than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the customer waiting display (for example, the name of the gaming machine title display) and functions during the customer waiting period (for example, volume control function, light amount control function) are executed, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are switched unnecessarily during the time saving state. However, there is a problem that the player is provided with a display that is difficult to understand. Moreover, there is a problem that the processing for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is executed in a complicated manner, increasing the control load of the pachinko machine 10 . Furthermore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute special figure fluctuations by continuously firing the ball, so even during the customer waiting period functions (volume control function, light control function) Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure variation is started before the adjustment operation using the function is completed, giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the special figure fluctuation is stopped and a new special figure fluctuation is not executed, so as to enable the function during the customer waiting period described above Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, when a player who is playing a game in the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light, it is necessary to stop the game for a predetermined period. In addition, a new problem arises that the operation of the game is lowered.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in this ninth control example, the period from when the special figure variation is no longer executed until the function becomes executable during the customer waiting period is varied according to the set game state. It is configured so that Thereby, for example, during the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal design in which the special figure fluctuation is likely to be executed, the customer waits after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special figure fluctuation is no longer executed. The function can be executed during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern in which the special figure fluctuation is difficult to execute, the function can be executed during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure fluctuation is no longer executed. can.

<Regarding the effect contents of the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 560, the background announcement effect among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 560(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 560(b) is a display in the state where the background mode shifts with the next change. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen. Among the elements of the display screen, the elements that are the same as those in the eighth control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed, the advance notice effect suggesting the destination background mode is executed before the background mode is switched. Specifically, the display mode of this notice effect will be described as follows: "mode display", which is a display mode that indicates the destination background mode with a comment immediately before the background mode shifts; A "silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is indicated by the silhouette of the character, can be displayed.

Then, when the timing of executing the background change operation is outside the special figure fluctuation period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and if it is during the special figure fluctuation period, "mode display" and "silhouette display" are selected. By configuring in this way, the effect (background notice effect) to be executed can be changed according to the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player can perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, if the background change operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation period, the selection ratio between "mode display" and "silhouette display" must be different according to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. I'm letting In addition, when a pattern display mode is selected in which the background mode suggested by the background notice effect is different from the background mode to which the actual transition is made, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased. (to be higher than the display mode of other background announcement effects). Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by positively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with effects corresponding to various background modes, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. .

On the display screen shown in FIG. 560(a), the background mode is shifted to the sea mode by the background change operation, and a silhouette K100 imitating a fish is displayed as a background notice effect suggesting the sea mode. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode. It is configured so that the mode and the actually shifted background mode can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 560(b), the comment "Background change with next fluctuation" indicating that the background change operation is executed and the background mode will shift at the start of the next special figure fluctuation is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. is displayed in A silhouette K100 imitating a tree is displayed as a background preview effect suggesting a mountain mode. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 560(b) is the state where the current mode is “mountain mode” and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) at the next fluctuation, suggesting the background mode after the shift. This is a state in which a silhouette K100 suggesting a mountain mode is displayed as an advance notice effect. In this way, when there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestive display mode of the background notice effect, there is a high possibility of winning a big prize due to the change.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 and 559. FIG. FIG. 558(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and FIG. 558(b) is the 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents defined in a RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 558(a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example in that the vibration pattern data 222fc is deleted and the background announcement selection table 222ga is added. but the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The background announcement selection table 222ga is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the background announcement effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 559, the contents of the background announcement selection table 222ga will be described. FIG. 559 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the background announcement selection table 222ga.

As shown in Figure 559, the background notice selection table 222ga is the result of the propriety determination (the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed at the time of executing the background change operation), the value of the obtained effect counter 223h, and after the transition Background notices of different display modes can be selected according to the background mode.

Specifically, if the win/fail judgment result is a hit and the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69", and "Silhouette A" is in the range of "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is defined in the range of "160-169", "Mountain mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198", and "Sea mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198". is "mountain mode", "Silhouette B" is in the range of "0 to 69", "Silhouette A" is in the range of "70 to 159", and "Silhouette A" is in the range of "160 to 169". "sea mode display" is defined in the range of "170 to 198", and "mountain mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198".

On the other hand, if the pass/fail judgment result is out of line and the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119" and the value of "Silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". , and when the background mode after transition is the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", and "Silhouette A" is in the range of "120 to 198”, the “mountain mode display” is defined respectively. Furthermore, if the timing at which the background change operation is executed is during the customer waiting period, if the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h will be within the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after transition is the "mountain mode", the "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the value of the effect counter 223h.

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background announcement effect will be described. In this control example, as the display modes of the background notice effect, a "silhouette display" that displays a silhouette of a character suggesting the background mode after transition, a "mode display" that displays characters indicating the background mode after transition, is configured to be configurable.

Of the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is the silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting the mountain mode shown in FIG. 560(b), and "silhouette B" is the A silhouette of a fish-like character suggestive of the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed of a still image. For example, immediately after the suggestive display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is being suggested. The transition destination background mode may be gradually changed to an easy-to-understand display mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, it is configured to be able to display "silhouette display" and "mode display". It is configured so that only "mode display" is selected when the change operation is performed, and "silhouette display" is selected when the background change operation is performed during the period when the special figure is fluctuating. . Thereby, by executing the background change operation during the special figure fluctuation, a special production mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, as the background notice effect, it is possible to set a display mode that suggests a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination, and that display mode is selected only when the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit. It is configured so that Therefore, by making the content of the background notice performance and the actual background mode transition situation feel unnatural, it is possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result advantageous to the player in advance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Although this control example uses two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode), the number of background modes may be three or more. It may be set randomly. Also, as a result of performing the background change operation, the background mode may be changed to the same background mode as before the change. By configuring in this way, based on the background mode before transition and the suggestive contents of the background mode after transition displayed in the background notification effect, the display mode of the background notification effect this time and the background after transition It is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether the mode matches or not.

In addition, in the ninth control example, similarly to the eighth control example described above, the period from when the background change operation is performed until the background mode transitions is varied according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed. It is configured as follows. The above-described background notice effect is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the display period during which only the background announcement effect is displayed according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed.

In addition, in the ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, it is configured to select the display mode based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed, but it is limited to this. None, for example, it may be configured to select the display mode based on the result of pre-determination of the winning information included in the special figure reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be shifted (changed) during the special figure fluctuation that performed the background change operation, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is shifted (changed) in the next special figure fluctuation of the executed special figure fluctuation, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure fluctuation. It should be configured as follows.

Returning to FIG. 558(b), the description continues. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the ninth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223ga and a delay counter 223gb are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current time is the customer waiting period, and is set to ON when it is the customer waiting period. This customer waiting flag 223ga is, when the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), customer waiting executed in fluctuation stop processing 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) (see Z2734 in FIG. 565). In addition, if the game state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), customer waiting In effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566), it is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 566). And, it is set to off when special figure fluctuation is started.

In the ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period in which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON, and the player is notified that the volume has become adjustable. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating the period during which the volume can be adjusted. Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON is varied according to the set game state, and when the game state is the normal state It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223ga is less likely to be set to ON in the case of the time saving state or the variable probability state than.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the variable probability state or the time saving state. can. In other words, the time saving state and probability variation state are configured to be easily set special figure variation time shorter than the normal state, there is a case where the period during which the special figure variation is not temporarily executed is set. However, since the time saving state and the probability variable state are also game states in which new special figure variations are more likely to be performed than in the normal state, the period in which special figure variations are not performed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to ON, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are switched intricately, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in this ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is configured not to be set to ON unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probability variable state during which the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, the above problem can be solved. In addition, as a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required for setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to ON during the time saving state or the variable probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol (electric It is preferable to set a period longer than the period from when the accessory 640a is opened until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the customer waiting flag 223ga from being set to ON just by continuing to play the game during the variable probability state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation until the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the variable probability state and the time saving state. This is for delaying the timing of

This delay counter 223gb is, in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) executed when the special figure fluctuation stops, the game state is a definite variable state Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set in the time saving state (Z2733 in FIG. 565). Then, each time the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 566) is executed, it is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 566), and when the counter value becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON ( 566 Z2761). Thereby, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the variable probability state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the normal state.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device of the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 561 to 566, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. In this ninth control example, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566) is performed instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main processing 9 (see FIG. 561) in contrast to the eighth control example described above. , in that frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 is executed instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8, and command determination processing 9 (Z2174 in FIG. 562) is executed instead of command determination processing 8; are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 9 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 9. FIG. As shown in FIG. 561, main processing 9 includes customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), frame button input monitoring and effect processing 9 (Z2182), and command determination processing 9 ( Z2183) is different, but the others are the same.

Note that the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (Z2182) is different from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545) in the eighth control example described above. Z2949 in )) instead of background change processing 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 563). Description will be made with reference to FIG. 563, and illustration of other control contents (the same control contents as in the eighth control example) will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 562, the contents of command determination processing 9 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) adds a process of setting the customer waiting flag to off when a variation pattern command is received, to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the eighth control example described above. 539) is changed to fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 562). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

It should be noted that the processing (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the illustrated stop type command is received in the command determination processing (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the first control example described above is described in the eighth control example. The same processing is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the processing (Z2261 in FIG. 562) corresponding to other commands is executed.

When command determination processing 9 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: Yes), the customer waiting flag 223ga is on. (Z2253). When it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is ON (Z2254: Yes), the variation pattern command is received, and since it is the timing for ending the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to OFF (Z2254), The value of the delay counter 223gb is set to 0 (Z2255), the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2253 that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not ON (Z2253: No), the process of Z2254 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (Z2203). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is executed, and this processing ends. The details of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 562, the description continues. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and if it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes ), the fluctuation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing ends. This fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) includes a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a process for executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped, and a customer. The processing for setting the waiting effect is performed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 564 .

In the process of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), Z2207 to Z2261 which are the same as the command determination process (Z2174 in FIG. 537) of the eighth control example described above are executed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541) will be described. FIG. 563 is a flow chart showing the contents of background change processing 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) is for the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that processing for setting the display mode of the background announcement effect is added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes Z2963 to Z2967 as the background change process described above (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2978). Then, based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223h, the effect mode of the background effect is selected using the background effect selection table 222ga (Z2979). Then, the background notice command for display indicating the presentation mode selected in the process of Z2979 is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display switching command set in the process of Z2967 and the display background notice command set in the process of Z2980 are set in the same process. Although they are output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the background notice command for display, and then, for 0.5 seconds. It is configured to perform display using image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed prior to the transition to the background.

Next, with reference to FIG. 564, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). This fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) is different from the above-described fluctuation stop process (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) of the eighth control example, after the processes of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 are completed, the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed. are different in that they execute The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 565 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), the process for setting the customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure reservation (Z2731). In this process of Z2731, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are both zero.

In the process of Z2731, if it is determined that there is a special figure pending (Z2731: Yes), the next special figure fluctuation is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731, if it is determined that there is no special figure pending (Z2731: No), then the current gaming state is a time saving state, or a probability variable state is determined (Z2732), If it is determined that the time saving state or the probability variable state is not (normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2732, if it is determined that the current time-saving state or variable probability state (Z2732: Yes), then set a value corresponding to 5 seconds to the delay counter 223gb (Z2733), and end this process do. The value of the delay counter 223gb set here is decremented in the main process executed every millisecond.

Next, the content of the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 566 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) is subtracted, and when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0, A process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to ON and a volume control process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON are executed.

In the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2751). Among them, it is determined whether the right button (up button) for increasing the volume has been operated (pressed down) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level increases by 1 (Z2753), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2754). , the process ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z2764 that the right button is not pressed (Z2764: No), it is determined whether the left button (down button) for decreasing the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2764: No). Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2757). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2751, if it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( Z2758), when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2758: No), since the special figure fluctuation is not currently stopped, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay counter 223gb (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223gb after subtraction is obtained. is 0 (Z2760). If it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is a variable probability state or a time saving state, and 5 seconds have not passed since the last special figure fluctuation stopped If so (Z2760: No), this process ends.

In the processing of Z2760, if it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 (Z2760: Yes), the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, 5 seconds after the last special figure fluctuation has stopped is the elapsed timing, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2761), a display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: Yes), the processing of Z2764 described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2763 that the left or right button has not been pressed (Z2763: No), this process ends.

<Tenth control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 578. FIG. In contrast to the ninth control example described above, the tenth control example executes an operation effect (cracking effect) that changes the effect mode based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player; The third pattern (special pattern (special pattern)) stopped and displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 is variably displayed in synchronism with the variation, and the special pattern lottery result is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the stop display mode. The difference is that an effect (background change effect) for shifting (changing) the background mode is executed based on the stop display mode of the decorative pattern for the purpose, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the production contents of the tenth control example>
Here, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the content of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, unlike the control examples described above, a cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbols are executed.

First, the crack effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 569. FIG. The cracking effect is an operation of stepwise changing the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22a) a plurality of times within a predetermined effect period. It is a performance. In the tenth control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means in order to execute the performance in various modes of performance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 567, the flow of the crack effect in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 567 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the crack effect. In this control example, a crack 820, which is a variable display mode, is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the operation means is operated during a predetermined effect period, and the operation means within the effect period. A crack effect is executed in which the number of cracks 820 is variable (increased) based on the operation content (the number of operations). The variable display mode is configured to be variable based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) and the number of times of operation during the performance period described above.

Specifically, in the variation pattern of 60 seconds, for 15 seconds after 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of variation, an operation valid period (button effect period ) is set. Then, when the button effect period is reached, a crack effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 568(a)).

A first period, which is the first half period, and a second period, which is the second half period after the first period, are set as the button effect period during which the crack effect is executed. By operating the frame button 22a during the period, one crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 568(b)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. By configuring in this way, the period for which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22a during the first period, based on the pressing timing, the condition for displaying the crack 820 of transition to the second line during the second period, that is, the crack displayed as a variable display mode. The frame button 22a for varying the number of 820 is configured to vary the number of times of operation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing of the operating means and the number of times of operation, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set, even if the second period is set long, the second and subsequent cracks 820 are displayed based on the operation timing (frame As the number of operations on the button 22a), there are cases where a condition with a large number of operations is set, so operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set causes more cracks 820 to be displayed. There is no direct connection to that.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the operation presentation while entertaining the player as to when to operate the frame button 22a during the first period. In addition, in the tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the crack effect, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that the variable pattern of the subsequent variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the second and subsequent frame button operations. Further, in this control example, all variable patterns (variable scenarios) of the variable display mode during the performance period are configured to be selected depending on the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Then, when the second period is set, a display screen for prompting the player to perform the operation of the frame button 22a multiple times is displayed (see FIG. 568(b)), and the first period ends. When the display condition (the condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is satisfied, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and after the second period (20 569(a)).

Note that in the cracking effect of this control example, when the first operation of the frame button is executed, which is a factor for selecting the display condition (variable scenario) for increasing (variable) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode), , one crack 820 (in the same variable display mode) is displayed regardless of the timing at which the frame button operation is performed. That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the cracking effect has been executed by the first operation of the frame button, and based on the first operation of the frame button. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to how the cracking effect develops. In addition, in the cracking effect of this control example, the rate at which the variable scenario of the variable display mode is selected is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the cracking effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22a) (the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid) is the first period (5 seconds). and a second period (10 seconds) after the lapse of the first period. An operation (first frame button operation) is executed, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected. Therefore, when the frame button operation is not executed during the first period, the cracking effect is terminated at that time (clears the setting of the operation valid period during the second period, and switches to an effect other than the operation effect). (See FIG. 567(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22a from being notified of an effect prompting the user to operate the frame button 22a for a long period of time.

Here, the flow of effects when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 567(b). ) has elapsed, a display screen (see FIG. 568(a)) prompting the user to operate the frame button 22a is displayed. A display mode (sorry display) indicating that the button has not been pressed even once is displayed until a predetermined second period (10 seconds) elapses (see FIG. 569(b)). After that, an effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (no crack) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once is displayed until the second period (10 seconds) elapses. Without being limited to this, for example, a display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a was not pressed even once is displayed only for 2 seconds at the start of a predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then , the effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (no crack) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the period during which the regret display is displayed can be shortened, so that if the player intentionally does not operate the frame button 22a during the first period, the player feels uncomfortable. can make it difficult to give

Also, if the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is performed during the first period, immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first effect period), second and subsequent frame button operations will be accepted. Configure. As a result, the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect can be given continuity, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 568 and 569, an example of display contents displayed during the crack effect will be described. FIG. 568(a) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed immediately after the crack effect is started, and FIG. It is a display screen which showed an example of the display content displayed when operating. Also, FIG. 569(a) is a display screen showing an example of the contents of the effect executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 being displayed, and FIG. 569(b) is a crack effect. 10 is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22a during the first period.

When the cracking effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 568(a), the effect to be executed this time is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means (frame button 22a)). In order to inform the player that the seconds) is displayed.

Here, the button display mode Dm5a is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the drawing) for prompting the user to press the frame button 22a a plurality of times (repeatedly) instead of pressing the frame button 22a only once. In the remaining period display mode Dm5b, the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the figure) is dynamically displayed with respect to the indicator indicating the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, a comment "Break the screen by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect that destroys the display screen will be executed by operating the frame button 22a a plurality of times during the current operation effect. In addition, a small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and is configured to display the progress of the current crack effect (the number of cracks) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Note that in FIG. 568(a), the crack effect has just been executed and the frame button 22a has not been operated even once, so the small display area Dm4 displays " 0” is displayed.

Then, when the frame button 22a is operated during the first period of the crack effect, as shown in FIG. 568(b), one crack 820 is displayed in the main display area Dm and the progress of the small display area Dm4. "1" is displayed as the display mode Dm4a. Since the first period ends and the second period is set by operating the frame button 22a during the first period, the remaining period display mode Dm5b for indicating the remaining period of the first period is changed. Then, a remaining period display mode Dm5c for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed. In addition, a comment "Try more repeatedly" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a.

When the display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is established by operating the frame button 22a a plurality of times (continuously hitting) while the display screen of FIG. 568(b) is displayed, the number corresponding to the display condition is established. A crack 820 is displayed on the display screen. Then, when the number of cracks 820 is three at the time when the second period of the button presentation period ends, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which a large number of characters 822 imitating the . In this control example, the progress display mode Dm4a is displayed in the small display area Dm4 even after the button effect period ends. A value of "3" is displayed to indicate that the This makes it possible for the player to easily understand what the effect result of the crack effect corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time was.

In addition, as described above, based on the effect result of the first effect (cracking effect), it is possible to set the effect mode of the second effect to be executed after the first effect, and when the second effect is executed In the case of using the configuration for displaying the effect result of the first effect, for example, the effect result display of the first effect may be configured to display a effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. can be In this case, when the lottery result of the special figure variation is a big hit, it is preferable to display the effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that gives a sense of incongruity, and to make it easier to win a jackpot when the performance with a sense of incongruity is executed, so that a novel performance can be provided.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period of the crack effect, as shown in FIG. "0" is displayed as the progress display mode Dm4a, a button display mode Dm5a that does not prompt the operation of the frame button 22a is displayed, and a remaining period display mode of 0 is displayed as the remaining period display mode Dm5b. Then, a comment "Unfortunately, end" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a, and a display screen is displayed to inform the player that the cracking effect has ended with the end of the first period.

Note that, in this control example, when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period, even if the player who does not like the operation of the frame button 22a is playing the game, the player does not feel uncomfortable. 569(b) is displayed at the end of the first period, and the button effect period (operation effective period) is ended. The number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery at the end of one period, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. As a result, effects corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820 can be provided even to a player who does not operate the frame button 22a. Also, in this case, it is preferable to display the number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to display when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times during the first period. As a result, the player can be made to consider whether or not to operate the frame button 22a during the first period in order to experience various effects, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game. be able to.

Next, the background change effect is the effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives a stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols) is configured to determine

Therefore, the background change pattern type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured so that the voice lamp control device 113 can receive it, and when the background change pattern type command is received, It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped pattern information stored. By configuring in this way, even if the lottery result of the special figure is lost, the player can be interested in which stop mode the loss is displayed, so the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to enjoy the performance executed on the display screen of the display to the end.

Further, it is determined in advance whether or not the background mode is to be changed, and based on the result of the determination that the background mode is to be changed, the player is notified of the change of the background. Unlike conventional pachinko machines such as stopping display of the 3 symbols (stopping display of the background change notification pattern), it is determined whether to execute the background change according to the stop mode of the 3rd pattern that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, it is configured so that the stop mode of the third symbol triggers the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set game state, it is possible to easily perform control such as changing the easiness of background change or changing the background change destination. .

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol. By operating the operating means, it may be configured such that the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be variably selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the stop mode based on the player's operation result, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, in this case, it is preferable to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. As a result, the player can be more motivated to participate in the production.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 570 and 572. FIG. FIG. 570(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents defined in a RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 570(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is used when selecting the effect mode of the crack effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the ninth control example. The difference is that a crack effect selection table 222ha is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The crack effect selection table 222ha is used when selecting the effect mode of the crack effect (display condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks), which is one of the operation effects for executing the operation to the operation means (frame button 22a). In the data table referred to in the SW effect processing 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 577) executed when the frame button 22a is pressed, it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is the crack effect. If so (Z7101 in FIG. 577: Yes), it is referred (Z7105 in FIG. 577).

Here, with reference to FIG. 572, the contents of the crack effect selection table 222ha will be described. FIG. 572 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the crack effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 572, the cracking effect selection table 222ha includes the lottery result (validity determination result) of the special figure fluctuation in which the cracking effect is executed, and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect and the value of the acquired SW special effect counter 223ha, a different crack effect effect mode (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) is defined.

Specifically, if the success/failure determination result is a hit (big hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha Effect type A is defined in the range of "0-39", effect B is defined in the range of "40-89", and effect C is defined in the range of "90-99".

Here, specific contents of each effect type defined in the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described. For effect type A, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "10". This is a scenario, with effect type B, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the given scenario, for effect type C, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is "10", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is "25". This scenario is set to

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations is varied according to the performance mode of the cracking performance set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is executed to change the crack, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Note that the crack effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 572 shows only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times. An effect type in which the second crack is not displayed no matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, and an effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also defined. In this way, by defining the performance type in which the crack is difficult to change and the performance type in which the crack is not variable, even if the performance type in which the crack is not variable is set, the frame button is operated with expectation until the end. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 572, description will be made. The success/failure determination result is a hit (jackpot), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds) In the case, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is defined in the range of "0 to 19", the effect type A is defined in the range of "20 to 79", the effect B is defined in the range of "80 to 99" , production C are defined.

Also, if the success/failure determination result is out of range and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is "0 to 29". Effect type A is specified in the range, effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, if the result of the success/failure judgment is out of line and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 to 3 seconds and 4 to 5 seconds) , the value of the SW special effect counter ha is defined in the range of "0 to 4", the effect type A is defined in the range of "5 to 79", the effect B is defined in the range of "80 to 99", Production D is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 571, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 571, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example has a SW effect counter 223ha, a button depression counter 223hb, and crack information storage in comparison with the RAM 223 of the ninth control example. The difference is that an area 223hc is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used for selecting a crack effect, and is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 each time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 573) is executed and repeated. Updated. The detailed contents are the same as those of the effect counter 223h described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button depression counter 223hb is a counter for counting the number of depressions of the frame button 22, and is incremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the tenth control example, an effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button depression counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the Control Contents of the Sound Lamp Control Device of the Tenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 573 to 577, the control contents of the sound ramp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the control content same as each control example mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 573, the main processing 10 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 573, in main processing 10, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 in contrast to main processing 8 of the eighth control example described above, and command The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the rest is the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 574, the contents of command determination processing 10 will be described. 574 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. FIG. This command determination process 10 is different from the above-described command determination process 8 in that a control process when a display background change pattern command is received is added, and the rest is the same. Details of the display background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and the third symbol stop mode to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It contains information for indicating (combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop).

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes Z2201 to Z2208 as the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display background change pattern command is received (Z7201). In the processing of Z7201, when it is determined that the display background change pattern command is received (Z7201: Yes), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z7202), and the background mode corresponding to the set background mode is set. A command for switching display to a variation pattern is set (Z7203), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the tenth control example, based on the third symbol stop mode set by the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to change the background mode. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special figure lottery is out, which The player can be made to pay attention to whether the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 575, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 will be described. 575 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10. FIG. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 described above in that the SW special processing to be executed is changed to the SW effect processing 10, and the rest is the same. be. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the crack effect ending process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 576 is a flow chart showing the contents of the crack effect ending process (Z2896). In this cracking effect ending process (Z2896), when a specific period of time has elapsed in the cracking effect, a process for setting subsequent effects is executed.

When the crack effect ending process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the crack effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is checked. It is determined (Z7002), and if it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: No), then it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed (Z7006: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is greater than 0 (Z7003). If it is determined (Z7003: No), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), the values of the SW effective time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb are cleared (set to 0), and this End the process.

If it is determined in the process of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223b is greater than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is cleared. (Z7008), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 577, the contents of SW effect processing 10 will be described. FIG. 577 is a flow chart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. FIG. This SW effect processing 10 differs from the above-described SW effect processing in that a process related to a crack effect is added. Other than that, since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set SW effect is the crack effect (Z7101). The same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7101 that the set SW effect is the crack effect (Z7101: Yes), then information ( data) is stored (Z7102).

In the process of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the crack effect is already stored in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7102: Yes), the value of the button press counter 223hb is incremented by 1. Then (Z7106), the crack effect type set in the crack information storage area 223hc is read (Z7107), and the effect mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb (variable crack number effect, Set a display effect command for showing a fan effect), and terminate this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the process of Z7102 (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is acquired, the crack effect selection table 222ha is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed Based on the valid time counter value and the acquired SW effect counter 223ha value, the corresponding crack effect type is determined and set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , the process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 578, control processing of the display control device 114 in the tenth control example will be described. The control contents of the display control device 114 of this control example differ from the control contents of the eighth control example described above in that the stop type command processing 8 is changed to the stop type command processing 10, and the rest is the same. is. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop type command processing 10 (Z3496). In this stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change pattern command) for outputting information about the stop pattern set in the sound lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3601 and Z3602 as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop pattern set in the process of Z3602 is changed to the background change. (Z8001). In the process of Z8001, if it is determined that the background change is not a stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z8001 that the stop pattern indicates a background change, the display background change pattern command is set (Z8002), the stop pattern determination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this process is performed. exit.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, an eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 579 to 592. FIG. In each of the control examples described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is represented by a liquid crystal presentation using the third symbol display device 81 and a role presentation using a movable accessory (for example, the tilting device 310) that moves the frame button 22. , is used to execute a suggestive effect to suggest to the player.

Specifically, the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command containing information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command Based on the information indicating the lottery result of the included special figure, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the character object effect.

The liquid crystal effect set here is output to the display control device 114 as a display effect command, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, for performance effects, a driving scenario for driving the movable role in a predetermined operation is set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the movable role (for example, the tilting device 310) is set based on the set driving scenario. ) to move the driving means (for example, the voice coil motor 352).

In this way, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal presentation and data for character presentation are created respectively, and based on the created data, a plurality of presentation devices (second 3-symbol display device 81, movable accessory), by synchronizing the effects executed by each of the effect devices, it is possible to execute a more interesting effect. , In each control example described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 outputs data related to each effect to each effect device (display control device 114 and tilting device 310), the effect content executed by each effect device There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize

In particular, in a role production that moves a movable role that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position like the tilting device 310, the movable role is moved in order to execute a specific role production. Since it is necessary to perform a preparatory action to move from the initial position to the production start position, and an end action to move the movable role object to the initial position after the role object production is finished, one piece of information (variation pattern command) When the performance is executed for a plurality of performance devices based on the command, if the performance is executed without considering the position of the movable role at the time when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed, the liquid crystal performance, There was a problem that it deviated from the performance of the character.

Therefore, in the eleventh control example, the content (performance mode) of the combined effect executed by combining the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character object effect (driving effect) is set to the movable character object at the execution timing of the compound effect. is configured to be set based on the operational status of the Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position (initial position). By configuring in this way, even if the control instruction for the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the control instruction for the character effect (movable effect) are separately executed, the display effect and the character effect are out of sync as a combined effect. It is possible to suppress the fading of the image, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect moves to the initial position. When the execution timing of the composite performance arrives in a situation where the player has not returned, the display performance showing the performance result equivalent to the performance result of the composite performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the game is continued without the player being able to recognize the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the composite effect.

Here, in the eleventh control example, the above-described composite effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The details of the effect will be described later, but by executing the composite effect (last effect) during the ending period, the next jackpot will be won immediately after the jackpot game ends (high possibility of winning). is configured to suggest (notify) to the player.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the above-described composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed. A function of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variable state. It is configured so that a product effect (probable variable promotion effect) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be drivable as a decorative performance for enlivening the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various motion patterns (motion scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during a jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for multiple purposes. , the production effect can be efficiently enhanced.

However, as described above, the more the performance effect is efficiently enhanced, the easier it is to set another role performance during the period in which the movable role is driven (the period during which the performance of the performance is extended). There is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character productions is fixed in advance so that the character productions using the movable accessories are not executed in duplicate, the character production will become monotonous. There is a problem that the effect is lowered. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one character effect is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). Configure. As a result, even if it is possible to set the contents of the performance so that the execution periods of the role performance can overlap, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance and to execute various performances of the role. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 579, the flow of setting the composite effect in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 579 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display effect and the accessory effect (operation effect) during the jackpot game. Of the flow of effects shown in FIG. 579, the contents of the OP effect displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effect displayed during the normal round game period, and the interval effect displayed during the interval period. is the same as the contents explained in each of the above control examples, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 579, in this control example, a plurality of accessory effects (operation effects) are executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (one of rounds 1, 8, and 16) of the jackpot game, an operation of opening (raising) the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) associated with the frame button 22a is executed, When the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), the tilting device 310 attached to the frame button 22a (see FIG. 142) is opened during the first operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 and the ending period of the jackpot game. A second operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) by executing the (raising) motion.

Here, the first operation effect is an effect in which the effect result for notifying the player whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the variable probability state is given. The operation effect is to inform the player whether or not there is winning information indicating that the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 (see FIG. 359)) in the reserved memory of the special symbols. A holding continuous effect, which is a effect in which the effect result of is provided, is configured to be executed.

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 579(a), the 16th round (last round) of the jackpot game, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed. Here, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is a first effect period (about 6 seconds) that incites whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is completely opened (up), and a first effect period During the second rendering period (approximately 2 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) and the player can press the frame button 22, the player presses the frame button 22 during the second rendering period. or when the second effect period has passed, a third effect period (about 2 seconds) for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position.

On the other hand, the round game during the jackpot game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, depending on the winning condition during the round game, as shown in FIG. is not located at the initial position). In addition, for example, even if the first operation effect is forcibly terminated even if it is in the middle of the stage when the end condition of the 16th round (final round) is met, the forcibly terminated state will be displayed. Since a period of time is required to move the tilting device 310 to the initial position, the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of 16 rounds (the final round).

Thus, at the end of 16 rounds (final round) or at the start of the ending period, if the movable object (tilting device 310) to be the target of the operation effect is not positioned at the initial position, the ending period Even if the condition for executing the holding continuous effect (last effect) which is the second operation effect is satisfied during the operation, the third pattern display device 81 is used without executing the operation effect using the tilting device 310. It is configured to execute the last effect only with the display effect.

As a result, the operation effect corresponding to the first operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) is not completely finished (the movable accessory (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation effect is not positioned at the initial position). Thus, even when it is time to execute the continuous continuous performance (last performance), the last performance can be executed using only the display performance, so that the player can experience the continuous continuous performance.

In addition, in this control example, the second operation effect that is executed later than the first operation effect that is executed earlier is executed so that the effect can result in an effect in which a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given. It is configured as follows. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, depending on the execution status of the first operation effect to be executed first, the second operation effect is executed which can result in a more advantageous effect effect for the player than the first operation effect. It is possible to suppress the problem that the second operation effect is lost or that the effect of the second operation effect is degraded due to a deviation between the operation effect and the display effect.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, execution conditions for each effect are set so that the holding continuous effect is more difficult to execute than the variable probability promotion effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the performance that is easy to perform hinders the performance of the performance that is difficult to perform.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 579 (b), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the probability change promotion effect is performed using a predetermined period from the first round. After that, since 16 rounds (final round) can be ended with the tilting device 310 positioned at the initial position, the holding continuous effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be replaced by the movable accessory ( The second operation effect using the tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third pattern display device 81 can be synchronized and executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game described above are executed will be described. do. An example to be described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582 shows a display example during a big win game based on a big win B2 (16 round probability variation, even numbered symbol (666) big win). 580 to 582 show an example of the display screen during the big win, only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described, and the display during the big win game explained in each control example described above. Each element displayed on the screen (for example, the number of winning balls during the jackpot, the variable probability state, or the element indicating the cumulative number of times the jackpot was won during the time saving state (number of consecutive wins)) has the same content. Therefore, its description is omitted.

Figure 580 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first effect period of the probability variation promotion effect, Figure 580 (b) is a probability variation promotion effect It is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the second effect period of. And FIG. 581 is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22a during the second effect period of the variable probability promotion effect.

First, when the variable probability promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the comment "Chance if the button pops out". Then, as shown in the frame line, the tilting device 310 is swung in small steps in the opening direction (upward direction) and the closing direction (downward direction) (inside the frame line in FIG. 580(a), the explanation For the sake of convenience, the state in which the frame button 22a swings up and down is shown).

Then, when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) from the state of FIG. 580(a), the raised frame button 22a is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 580(b). The button display mode shown in FIG. 580(b), for convenience of explanation, the frame button 22a is completely protruded, so that the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) and the player presses the frame button 22a. This indicates that the button can be pressed.

When the player presses the frame button 22a in the state shown in FIG. The character "super" is displayed in the vicinity until the jackpot game ends. Then, the characters "Lucky" are displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 581). When the frame button 22a in the protruding state is pressed, the frame button 22a is positioned in the initial state (down state) as shown within the frame line in FIG. By constantly displaying the variable probability promotion mode ("super") on the display screen in this way, the player is informed that the variable probability state is set after the end of the current jackpot game. After that, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, the display mode in which the character "Super" is attached is used as the variable probability promotion mode, but it is not limited to this. Display color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is set, or display color (for example, rainbow color) display mode (for example, character) may be displayed. In addition, in this control example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot is not changed, but a variable probability promotion mode is attached, so that the game can be played in which third symbol display mode the jackpot has been won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed to a display mode (for example, "777") indicating that it is a probability variable jackpot. It may be configured to allow

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the current jackpot is jackpot A (16 rounds, 100 times of short time), the above-mentioned variable promotion effect is configured to be executed. In this case, since the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, when the player presses the frame button 22a in the state of FIG. 580(b), the display screen shown in FIG. , The word “sorry” is displayed to indicate that the variable promotion effect has failed. In addition, even in a part of the case of the jackpot B2 (16-round probability variation and even number pattern (666) jackpot), even if it is configured to display the characters “sorry” indicating that the probability variation promotion effect has failed good. As a result, even if the variable probability promotion effect fails, the variable probability state may be set after the end of the big win game, so that the player can play the game while having expectations until the end of the big win game. .

In addition, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the variable probability promotion effect, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) to incite whether or not to completely open (rise). Only the effect is executed, and then the tilting effect of moving (retracting) the tilting device 310 to the initial position is executed. And this fanning production is a production condition other than the execution condition of the variable promotion production (for example, when winning the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game, or more than a predetermined number in the specific winning opening 65a during the round game It is configured to be executed also when a ball wins or when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable probability promotion performance is executed, and at the time when the fanning performance is executed, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised). , the player can have expectations. Moreover, since the frequency with which the fanning effect is executed can be increased, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this case, during the first effect period of the variable probability promotion effect, that is, during the fan effect, the effect fusion pattern that executes the display mode (incit effect display) shown in FIG. 310) can be configured to be executable. As a result, whether this fanning production is part of the probability variation promotion production, production conditions other than the execution conditions of the probability variation promotion production (for example, if you win the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game, It is executed when a condition established when a predetermined number or more of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game) is established. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a fanning performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the holding consecutive effect will be described. FIG. 582(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilting device 310 is in a completely opened (raised) state during the holding streak effect, and FIG. 582(b). [Fig. 582] Fig. 582(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of Fig. 582(a).

In this control example, at the timing when the jackpot ending period starts, the pending and stored winning information is analyzed (determined), and as a result of the analysis (determined), information indicating that the probability variable jackpot is won is retained and stored. If it is included in the winning prize information that is stored, it is configured to execute the holding consecutive effect. When this holding consecutive effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 582(a), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is completely opened (raised) during the ending period (see the framed line in FIG. 582), In the display screen, a button display mode showing the completely raised frame button 22a and characters of "press" for prompting the player to press the frame button 22a are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 582(a), characters of "ENDING" are displayed on the upper left of the display screen to indicate that the state during the jackpot game is the ending period.

When the frame button 22a is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 582(a), the characters "super lucky" are displayed to indicate that the holding consecutive effect has been successful, and many fish-like characters appear on the display screen. A video is played across the screen. In addition, the edge of the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot is changed to the success display mode indicating the success of the holding continuous effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the success of the holding continuous effect (that there is a probability variable jackpot in the holding memory) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, it is set as an execution condition of the holding continuous effect that it is determined that there is a probability variable jackpot in the holding memory, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a probability variable jackpot. It is assumed that the holding consecutive production can be executed. As a result, for example, even if the probability variable promotion performance is executed and fails during the jackpot game (even if there is a high possibility that the current big win is not the probability variable jackpot), the possibility of executing the pending continuous performance is left. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectations until the end. In addition, if the probability variable promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is successful, the probability variable state in which the probability of the jackpot is high after the jackpot game ends is set, so that the winning information to win the probability variable jackpot is stored in the reserved memory. easier to include. Therefore, a player who succeeds in the variable probability promotion effect during the big win game can play the game until the end of the big win game while increasing the expectation of execution of the holding continuous effect.

In this control example, the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is that there is a certain variable jackpot in the holding memory at the time the ending period starts, but not limited to this, for example, at the start of the jackpot game, or when a specific round game At a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, such as the time when the jackpot is started or when it ends, or at the timing when the special figure variation for winning the jackpot is stopped, it is confirmed that there is a certain variable jackpot in the reserve memory held and stored. It may be set as an execution condition. In addition, when there is a plurality of pieces of prize winning information indicating a big win in the holding memory, even if the big win is not a variable jackpot, the holding consecutive production may be executed. , may be configured to be variably set according to the number of winning information indicating the jackpot contained in the reserved memory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 583 to 587. FIG. In the eleventh control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are added to the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. , and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 583, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 583, the ROM 222 of the eleventh control example is different from the above-described ROM 222 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 467) in a special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia and a special prize during tilting action scenario table 222ib. , and an operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic are added. Since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) during the jackpot game and the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, In this control example, whether or not to execute the variable probability promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the performance mode of the variable probability promotion effect (the effect mode in which the frame button 22a is progressed to a state where the frame button 22a can be pressed, or the frame button 22a cannot be pressed) It is referred to when selecting the end fan effect mode).

Here, the contents of the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia will be described with reference to FIG. 585(a). FIG. 585(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 585(a), in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia, different tilting motion scenarios are defined based on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the value of the effect counter 223h obtained. .

Specifically, the jackpot type is “jackpot A (16 rounds, short time win)”, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined as “0 to 9” in “tilting operation scenario B”, and “10 to 99” defines a “tilting operation scenario C”. The range of "100 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario.

Here, the tilting motion scenario defined in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia will be briefly described. This tilting motion scenario defines a motion scenario for driving the tilting device 310, which is a movable accessory. The operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1, which is a timer value for determining the timing for starting the driving of the tilting device 310 after the tilting action scenario is set, and the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310 ) is set for the tilting operation timer 223db. In other words, depending on the operation data (scenario) selected from the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and when it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 is determined. , operation presentation content, and are set.

Although the details will be described later, each tilting operation scenario has information for varying the operation mode of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device can be tilted in various operation modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above. 310 is operably configured.

Returning to FIG. 585, the description continues. The jackpot type is ``jackpot B1 (16 rounds, variable odds, odd symbol jackpot)'', and the acquired value of the production counter 223h is defined to be in the range of ``0 to 199'' so as not to set the tilting action scenario. That is, in this control example, as the operation effect to be executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to be able to execute the variable probability promotion effect (see FIGS. 580 and 581). This is an effect for suggesting (informing) the player that it is a jackpot with a set state.

In other words, at the time of the big hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big win), the third symbol is stopped and displayed with an odd number design, which is a display mode indicating that the probability variation jackpot. In "jackpot B1", Even if the probability variable promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, it only provides a meaningless effect to the player, and there is a risk of causing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. tilt motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of meaningless effects.

Next, the jackpot type is "jackpot B2 (16 rounds, probability variation, even number symbol jackpot)", and the value of the acquired production counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as "tilting motion scenario B", and "50 ˜149” defines the “tilting motion scenario C”. The range of "150 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario. Also, the jackpot type is "jackpot C (2 rounds, variable probability)", but the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, "no tilting action scenario setting" is defined in the entire range. ing. This "jackpot C" is set so that the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is smaller (two rounds) than other jackpot games, and in this control example, the number of rounds (two rounds) is set. After the big winning game is executed, the variable probability state is always set.

Therefore, the "jackpot C", like the above-described "jackpot B1", by grasping the game mode of the jackpot game, since it is a clear jackpot that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special prize The middle operation effect selection table 222ia is used so that the operation effect (tilting motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of meaningless effects. Further, by executing the operation performance within a small number of rounds, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the performance mode during the jackpot game.

Here, the contents of the tilting motion scenario types defined in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia will be briefly described. In addition, among the contents of the tilt motion scenario, the detailed description of the same parts as in the above-described fifth control example will be omitted. In this control example, the tilting action scenario B and the tilting action scenario C are provided as the tilting action scenario types defined in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222ia. In the tilting operation scenario B, the tilting device 310 is moved by the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the control example of the fifth control example. a preparation period for moving the tilting device 310 three times in the vertical direction (opening/closing direction); A scenario is defined for moving the tilting device 310 such that a period of time is set.

On the other hand, the tilting operation scenario C defines an operation scenario in which only a part of the above-described tilting operation scenario B is executed. A scenario is defined in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after the tilting effect period for executing the tilting drive for moving the tilting device 310 repeatedly three times in the direction (opening/closing direction) is set. In other words, when the tilting action scenario B is set, during the jackpot game, the variable probability promotion effect (see FIG. 580(b)) is executed in which the player presses the frame button 22a, and the tilting action scenario C is set. In this case, it is configured such that a fan effect (see FIG. 580(a)) is executed to prevent the frame button 22a from being pressed during the jackpot game.

Then, as described above, the preparatory drive (preparation period) and the fanning drive (fanning effect period) for the tilting device 310 that are executed when the tilting motion scenario C is set have the same contents as the tilting motion scenario B. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the frame button 22a can be pressed after the tilting drive (tilting effect) of the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the trip in which the fanning production is executed have expectations for the variable promotion production.

Further, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, similarly to the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above, an operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 and a tilt A timer value T2 of the tilting action timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the device 310 is defined. 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds) is defined as the value T2, and in the tilting motion scenario C, 1000 milliseconds (1 second) as the operation effect start time TI and 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds) as the timer value T2. stipulated. That is, the period set as the operation effect start time TI is defined to be shorter than each tilting action scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above.

That is, the production using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected with reference to the operation production selection table 222ia is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 Since it is necessary to move the movable accessory along with the variable display executed on the screen, it is necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation effect start time TI. Since the production using the movable accessory based on the tilting action scenario selected with reference is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), even if it is executed immediately after the start of the round game, the player feels uncomfortable. This is because there is no way to give By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the effect of moving the movable accessory immediately after the round game is started, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. Further, by executing the effect of moving the movable accessory early, it is possible to easily end the effect using the movable accessory within a specific period (round game period).

As described above, in this control example, the tilting action scenario B is selected as the tilting action scenario selected using the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia. It is designed to be higher in the case of "jackpot B2" than in the case. Specifically, the selection ratio is configured to be five times higher. By configuring in this manner, when the tilting action scenario B is set and a state in which the frame button 22a can be pressed is provided, it is possible to increase the possibility that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot.

Therefore, when the fanning effect is executed during the jackpot game, the fanning effect (see FIG. 580(a)) progresses and the frame button 22a shifts to the depressible state (see FIG. 580(b)). It is possible to make the player play a game during the big win while making the player expect the . Furthermore, when the frame button 22a becomes depressible, the variable probability promotion performance can be successfully performed with a high probability, so that the frame button 22a can be motivated to be pressed, and the player's willingness to participate in the performance is increased. can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, in addition to selecting the tilting action scenario C with reference to the above-described special prize operation effect selection table 222ia, when a specific effect condition is established (for example, When winning a performance lottery executed at the start timing of a round game, when a predetermined number or more of balls win in a specific winning hole 65a during a round game, or when a player touches the frame button 22a during a jackpot game. The tilt motion scenario C can be set when, for example, a specific operation is performed. Thereby, in addition to when the probability variable promotion effect is set (when the tilting motion scenario is selected by the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize), it is possible to execute the fan effect, so the probability variable promotion effect is the fan effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game ended with , or whether the fanning performance other than the variable promotion performance was executed. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the effect that the variable probability promotion effect succeeds will be executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize tilting operation scenario table 222ib is a data table storing the operation contents for the tilting device 310 executed during the jackpot game. With respect to the specific contents, the detailed description of the same parts as in the fifth control example described above will be omitted, but the tilting motion selected in the tilting motion scenario table 222ib during the grand prize and the operation effect selection table 222ia during the grand prize A data table is set for setting the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the scenario type and the tilting operation scenario.

Here, the contents of the tilting motion scenario table 222ib during the prize will be described with reference to FIG. 585(b). FIG. 585(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario table 222ib during the special prize. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the tilting motion scenario table 222ib during the grand prize includes a tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1, an origin detection motion B table 222db4, and an ending scenario table 222ib2. there is Of these, the tilting motion scenario table 222ib during the special prize and the origin detection motion B table 222db4 have the same contents as those of the above-described fifth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 defines a motion scenario in which the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) moves to the initial position after executing a tilt effect in which the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) swings in small increments in the vertical direction. The operation scenario defined in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 of the fifth control example described above is partially diverted.

Here, the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 will be described with reference to FIG. 586(a). FIG. 586(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1. This tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 is set by a lottery of the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize at the start of the jackpot game. When the operation effect start time set in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia elapses after the tilting motion scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 is started.

The tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 reads out the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer in order from "1" for the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223db (see Z2953 in FIG. 480). Then, the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "10" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation rendering start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the movement data with the movement pointer of "1" (50 steps can be moved forward in 500 milliseconds) is executed, and the lock is released. , the motion data with the motion pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, waits, and the motion data with the motion pointer "3" (20 steps can be moved forward for 200 ms) is executed. Then, the motion data with the motion pointer of "4" (movable 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer of "5" (20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed. movement) is executed, the movement data with the movement pointer of "6" (20 steps can be moved in the backward direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the movement data with the movement pointer of "7" (20 steps during 200 ms) is executed. (movable in the forward direction) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "8" (movable 20 steps in the backward direction during 200 ms) is executed, and this motion pointer "3" to "8" is executed three times. The repeated motion is set as a fanning motion (flashing effect), and the motion data with the motion pointer of “9” (50 steps can be moved backward in 500 ms) is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position, The operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

By configuring in this way, the tilting device 310 performs a tilting action (tilting effect) during the jackpot game (during the round game) (see FIG. 580(a)), and the tilting device 310 can be suggested to be completely opened (rising), and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, only a specific fanning motion (motion pointers "3" to "8") is specified as the fanning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a plurality of fanning effects with different positions (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, among the probability variation promotion production, the success production (see FIG. 581) is executed. By setting the effect mode of (1), the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the fanning effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the contents defined in the tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 are identical to the contents defined in the tilting action scenario B table 222db2 up to the first half (the part where the fanning effect ends). It is configured so that the subsequent definition contents are different. Specifically, it is defined that the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position as it is after the end of the fanning effect.

By configuring in this way, until the middle of the fanning production is being executed, whether the current fanning production is a highly anticipated probability variable promotion production (a probability variable promotion production that allows the frame button 22a to be pressed) or the expectation Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a low probability variable promotion performance (probability variable promotion performance in which the frame button 22a cannot be pressed), it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the performance result first. By suppressing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

Also, unlike the tilting action scenario B table 222db2, the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) waits at a specific position (most open (raised) position) corresponding to the period for the player to press the frame button 22a. Since there is no need to keep the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1, an motion for returning the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) to the initial position can also be defined. Therefore, the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) from the start to the end of the operation can be executed based on a series of action scenarios, and the accessory action can be executed smoothly. In this control example, the tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 is configured to return the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22a) to the initial position. A motion scenario for returning to the initial position (original position) may be separately provided in the same manner as the accessory motion described above.

Returning to FIG. 585(b), the description continues. The ending scenario table 222ib2 is a scenario table that defines the operation contents of the tilting device 310 for the operation performance executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a predetermined performance condition is established at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game. (when the holding memory contains winning information indicating a variable probability jackpot and when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is positioned at the initial position), it is set.

This ending scenario table 222ib2 is different from the various tables of the above-described tilting action scenarios, and since the operation effect start time T1 is not set, when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 592), the tilting action timer 223db is set. is set, and the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 589).

The ending scenario table 222ib2 reads out the action contents corresponding to the action pointer (see Z2953 in FIG. 480) for the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting action timer 223db in order from the action pointer "1". , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "6" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as the partial operation contents of the tilting operation scenario A222db1 of the fifth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 rotates backward (to the right in FIG. 159). 159), the disk cam 344 rotates 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position shown in FIG. 159), and is moved to the cam disengaged position shown in FIG. (b))). After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 586(a))). After a stop period of 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 167) by 20 steps, causing the disk cam 344 to rotate counterclockwise 20 degrees and lock. It is moved to the release position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 586(b)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaging position to the locking disengaging position, the releasing member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise direction) as shown in FIG. As the member 347 is rotated clockwise, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . In this case, when the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, a force in the front-rear direction is applied to the tilting device 310 to increase the lifting force and improve the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and the period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 586(b))).

After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586(a))), and the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position. After that, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167) for 1.9 seconds, thereby moving (lowering) the tilting device 310 to the initial position (origin position). and the driving force is transmitted.

Thus, in this control example, as in the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 of the fifth control example described above, the rising speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved. The character performance using (the tilting device 310) can be a powerful performance. Also, within a limited period of the ending period, the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be quickly moved (raised) to the highest position. The period of performance can be lengthened, and various performances can be executed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period has started. It may be configured so that the operation of the action pointer 2 of the ending scenario is completed at the start of the ending period. By configuring in this way, the period from the start of the ending period to the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to the highest position can be further shortened.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, by setting the ending scenario table 222ib2, the operation of the tilting device 310 is started (operation from the initial position (origin position)) and ends (to the initial position (origin position)). ), but is not limited to this. For example, a scenario table for starting an operation and an operation A scenario table for ending may be provided separately.

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, the three seconds during which the tilting device 310 is waiting at the highest position is set as an operation effective period during which the player can press the frame button 22a. When the player presses the frame button 22a during the effective period, the operation effective period is cleared, and the value of the tilt action timer 223db corresponding to the ending scenario table 222ib2 is subtracted to the value at which the standby state of 3 seconds ends. It is configured to By configuring in this way, when the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22a during the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period ends without pressing the frame button 22a during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be changed according to the passage of time. When is completed, the end operation of the movable accessory can be executed using a common scenario.

Returning to FIG. 583, the description continues. The operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic is a data table for determining at what timing (round game) during the jackpot game the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is to be executed, and is referred to at the start of the jackpot game ( Z8301 reference of Figure 590), the execution timing of probability variation promotion production is selected. The execution timing selected here is stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223ib, and when the jackpot game progresses and the round game set as the execution timing is reached, the variable probability promotion performance is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 587, the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic will be described. FIG. 587 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic. As shown in FIG. 587, the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic defines different execution timings corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the production timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 39", and the execution timing of "first round" is in the range of "40 to 109". , "8th round" is defined as the execution timing, and "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "110 to 199". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", when the operation effect (variable promotion effect) is executed, the rate of 20% in the first round, the rate of 35% in the eighth round, 45% It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at a ratio of .

By configuring in this way, since it is configured so that the variable probability promotion performance is easily executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), the failure performance is executed as the variable probability promotion performance in the first half of the jackpot game. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play during the remaining period of the jackpot game. In addition, since the timing at which the variable probability promotion performance is executed can be set throughout the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the variable probability promotion performance will be executed.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the variable probability promotion effect only once during the jackpot game. The selection table 222ic may be configured to define a plurality of execution timings. In this case, for example, in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia, a plurality of effect modes of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game can be selected, and the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game. should be configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse probability-varying promotion performances at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 587, the description continues. When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1", the value of the obtained effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, in the entire range, the execution timing is defined so as not to be set. . That is, in this control example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia, the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is not selected, so the operation effect execution timing The selection table 222ic is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the variable probability promotion performance is selected in spite of the ``jackpot B1'', the execution of the variable probability promotion performance can be reliably prevented. can.

Next, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2" and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is "first round", and in the range of "20 to 99", “8th round” is defined as the execution timing, and “16th round” is defined as the execution timing in the range of “100 to 199”. In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2", when the operation effect (variable promotion effect) is executed, 10% in the first round, 40% in the 8th round, 50% It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at a ratio of .

In other words, in the ``jackpot B2'' in which the success performance is executed in the variable probability promotion performance, the variable probability promotion performance is more likely to be executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned ``jackpot A''. Therefore, the later the timing at which the variable probability promotion effect is executed, the more the players can expect that the big win this time is the variable probability big win (“jackpot B2”).

In addition, in this control example, the execution timing (1, 8, 16 rounds) of the probability variation promotion effect based on the "jackpot A" and the execution timing (1, 8, 16 rounds) of the probability variation promotion effect based on the "jackpot B2" , the execution timing is selected from the same number of rounds, but without being limited to this, the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can only be executed with the variable promotion effect based on the "jackpot B2" is set. It may be configured to set By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to pay attention to at what timing the variable probability promotion effect is executed. Furthermore, when the "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the execution timing is not set as in the case of the "jackpot B1" described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 584, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 584 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 584, the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 223 in the fifth control example (FIG. 468) in that an effect timing counter 223ia and a special prize operation information storage area 223ib are added. are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The performance timing counter 223ia is formed of a loop counter similar to the performance counter 223h described above, and its value is updated each time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). It is a thing. The production timing counter 223ia acquires the value of the production timing counter 223ia (Z8314 in FIG. 590) in the opening process 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 590) executed at the start of the jackpot game, and according to the acquired value, The execution timing of the operation performance during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation performance execution timing selection table.

Note that the effect timing counter 223ia and the effect counter 223h are both formed of loop counters that update the range of "0 to 199" every 1 millisecond, but it becomes difficult to obtain the same value. As you can see, the update content is different. Specifically, the values added by one update are configured to be different prime numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the value of the effect counter 223h from being updated in synchronization with each other.

The operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize stores, as an operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) executed during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect set at the start of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect. This is a storage area for temporary storage. Specifically, the tilting motion scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 590) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 590) and the execution timing of the selected tilting motion (see Z8315 in FIG. 590) are stored. (See Z8316 in FIG. 590).

Then, it is read in the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) executed during the jackpot game (see Z8411 in FIG. 591), and when determining whether this round game is the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect (see Z8412 in FIG. 591), and when it is determined that it is time to execute, an action based on the effect mode (action scenario) stored in the special prize action information storage area 223ib is started.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 588 to 592, the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, the tilting device control process (see Z2891 in FIG. 477) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (Z2161 in FIG. 474) is during the operation effect in contrast to the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the content of the processing (see Z2905 in FIG. 478) is changed, and the processing content that is executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination processing (Z2113 in FIG. 472) is changed. ing. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 588, the contents of the processing 11 during operation rendering (Z2989) will be described. FIG. 588 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 11 during operation rendering (Z2989). This process 11 during operation rendering (Z2989) is executed when the tilting motion status is set to 2. And, it is different in that an ending process which is executed when the jackpot ending is in progress is added to the operation effect process (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above.

When the operation rendering process 11 (Z2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2951), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), next, it is determined whether the current period is during the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and if it is determined that it is during the ending period (Z2991: Yes), the ending process is executed. (Z2992), and shifts to the processing of Z2952. On the other hand, in the process of Z2991, when it is determined that the ending period is not in effect (Z2991: No), the process of Z2992 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z2952.

Details of the during-ending process executed in the process of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. The processing for the case is executed.

Returning to FIG. 588, the description continues. When the processing of Z2991 and Z2992 is finished, the processing of Z2952 to Z2956 which is the same as the processing during operation rendering (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then the command for display corresponding to the operation to be executed this time is set. (Z2993), and the process ends. In the process of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (the most opened position) by the action based on the set tilting action scenario table, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 580(b)) to indicate that the frame button 22a is ready to be pressed, or the tilting device 310 is tilting. In this case, a display command for displaying the button display mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the contents of the operation is set.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (setting the display command) based on the actual operation contents of the tilting device 310, the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be easily synchronized with the display mode of the effect display, and a highly effective effect can be executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (Z2951: No), it is the same as the process during operation presentation of the fifth control example (Z2905) described above. Z2957 to Z2961 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 589, the content of the ending process (Z2992) will be described. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2992). When the ending process (Z2992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201). Yes), 3000 is set to the value of the SW valid time counter 223k (Z8202), and the process proceeds to Z8202.

That is, when the value of the tilting action timer 223db reaches "3190" while the ending scenario (see FIG. 586(b)) is set, the tilting device 310 enters the justified state for 3 seconds. An operation validity period is set during which the operation of 22a is valid. In this manner, by setting the operation effective period of the frame button 22a in accordance with the progress of the operation scenario of the tilting device 310, the operation effective period can be easily set in accordance with the timing when the tilting device 310 is positioned at the highest position. can be set.

In this control example, the operation status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress of the operation scenario (determined based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223db). ), without being limited to this, detection means ( For example, a movable role object position detection sensor) may be provided, and the operation status of the tilting device 310 may be managed based on the fact that the detection means detects the normal operation of the movable role object.

With this configuration, for example, the period required for the tilting device 310 to move to the highest position (in the ending scenario of this control example, 0.5 seconds corresponding to the operation pointer 4) has elapsed. When it is determined that the tilting device 310 has not completed the movement to the highest position, updating of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is stopped, and a retry period of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) can be set. can. Then, when the tilting device 310 completes the movement to the highest position during the retry period, updating of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db can be resumed, and an operation valid period for the frame button 22a can be set. .

As a result, for example, while the tilting device 310 is performing a lifting motion (opening motion using an elastic member), the player applies a force that resists the lifting motion of the tilting device 310 (e.g. Even if the tilting device 310 cannot move to the highest position within a specific period (within 0.5 seconds), the tilting device 310 will rise to the highest position within a predetermined period (1 second) thereafter. When the player moves to the position, the valid operation period can be set according to the timing, and an appropriate effect can be executed for the player. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the predetermined period of time (one second) has passed, another effect (pressing the frame button 22a) is performed without setting the valid operation period. You can also switch to a production that does not let you.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z8201 that the current value of the tilting action timer 223db is not 3190 (Z8201: No), the process of Z8202 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z8203.

Next, in the process of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z8203: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set. It resets to "190" (Z8204), sets the value of the SW valid time counter 223k to "0" (Z8205), and terminates this processing.

In other words, when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation effective period set in the current operation effect (while the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is greater than 0), and the tilting operation flag 223de is turned on. , the value of the tilting action timer 223db is changed from the waiting state of the ending scenario, ie, the state of the action pointer 5 (see FIG. 586(b)), to a value that immediately shifts to the action pointer 6, and the operation effective period is changed. , the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is changed to "0". As a result, even if the player presses the frame button 22a at any timing during the operation valid period, the period (3 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position can be skipped. In addition, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problems, even when the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22a or when the operation valid period ends due to the passage of time.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period, the value of the tilting action timer 223db is changed so that the action pointer of the ending scenario is shifted from "5" to "6". , the operation for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position (original position) is executed after the frame button 22a is pressed. Thus, when using a configuration in which the tilting device 310 moves to the initial position (original position), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db may be varied up to "0". This makes it possible to omit unnecessary operation processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8203 that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z8203: No), then it corresponds to the currently set action scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222ib2). (Z8206), then it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z8207), and if it is greater than 0 (Z8207: Yes), then the frame button 22a is pressed (Z8208).

If it is determined in the process of Z8208 that the frame button 22a has been pressed (Z8208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22a has been pressed during the valid operation period in which the ending scenario is set, so a very lucky display is displayed. (See FIG. 582(b)) is set (Z8209), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8210), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8207 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (Z8207: No), or if the frame button 22a is not pressed in the process of Z8208, If it is determined (Z8208: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590, processing of opening processing 11 (Z8301) executed by sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of opening processing 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is a process executed when an opening command for a jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336). In addition to the process of setting the opening command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81, whether or not to execute the operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) during the current jackpot game, and the probability variable promotion effect is executed, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.

When the opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z8311), and the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the jackpot type of this time. A more tilting action scenario is selected (whether or not to be executed, and the scenario type is selected) (Z8312). Then, in the process of Z8312, it is determined whether the tilting motion scenario is selected (Z8313), and if it is determined that it is selected (Z8313: Yes), then the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is acquired (Z8314), and the acquired Based on the value of the production timing counter 223ia and the big hit type of this time, the execution timing of the tilting action (probability variable promotion production) is selected from the operation production execution timing selection table 222ic (Z8315).

When the processing of Z8315 is finished, next, information for indicating the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the processing of Z8312, and information for indicating the execution timing of the tilting motion (variable promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315. is stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223ib (Z8316), an opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z8313, if it is determined that the tilting motion scenario is not selected as a result of the process of Z8312 (Z8313: No), this process ends.

Next, the contents of round processing 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 591 is a flow chart showing the contents of round processing 11. FIG. This round process 11 is a process executed when a round command indicating that a new round of the jackpot game is started is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336). , In addition to the processing of setting the display command corresponding to the number of rounds, the determination processing of whether or not to execute the tilting action (probability variation promotion effect) is executed.

When the round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information (information indicating the type of the tilting action scenario and information indicating execution timing) stored in the action information storage area 223ib during the special prize is processed. Read (Z8411), determine whether the round game this time is a round for executing tilting action (probability variation promotion effect) (Z8412), and if it is determined that it is the execution timing (Z8412: Yes), stored A tilting motion scenario corresponding to the existing tilting motion scenario type is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds this time is set (Z8414), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z8412, when it is determined that the current round game is not the execution timing of the leaning action (probability variable promotion effect) (Z8412: No), the process of Z8413 is skipped and the process of Z8414 is performed.

Next, the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303) will be described with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when an ending command of a jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336). In addition to the process of setting the ending command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, the process of determining whether or not to execute the operation effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period is executed. be done.

When the ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (the winning information stored on hold) is read out (Z8511). It is determined whether or not winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot is included (Z8512). Here, if it is determined that the winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot is included (Z8512: Yes), then it is determined whether the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position (origin position) (Z8513), If it is determined to be at the origin position (Z8513: Yes), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, the tilting operation status is set to "2" (Z8515), the display command corresponding to the determination result of this time is set (process 8516 of Z2952), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z8513, when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not positioned at the origin position (Z8513: No), an ending command for display indicating that there is a probability variable jackpot is set (Z8517). , the process ends. Also, in the processing of Z8512, if it is determined that there is no prize winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot in the prize winning information (Z8512: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, the content (effect mode) of the combined effect executed by combining the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character effect (driving effect) is determined at the execution timing of the combined effect. It is configured to be set based on the operation status of the movable accessory. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction for the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the control instruction for the character effect (movable effect) are separately executed, the display effect and the character effect are out of sync as a combined effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is overwhelmed, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, at the timing of executing the composite production, in a situation where the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position, that is, in a situation where the movable accessory driven by the previously executed role product production has not returned to the initial position, the composite production is performed. When the performance execution timing arrives, the display performance showing the performance result equivalent to the performance result of the composite performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably suppress the situation where the game is continued without the player being able to recognize the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the composite effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the above-described composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, a role product effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed. A function of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, or a normal state (time-saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variable state. It is configured so that a product effect (probable variable promotion effect) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be drivable as a decorative effect for enlivening the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various motion patterns (motion scenarios). In this way, one movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be used for multiple purposes by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during a jackpot game. , the production effect can be efficiently enhanced.

However, as described above, the more the performance effect is efficiently enhanced, the easier it is to set another role performance during the period in which the movable role is driven (the period during which the performance of the performance is extended). There is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character productions is fixed in advance so that the character production using the movable accessories is not executed in duplicate, the character production will become monotonous. There is a problem that the effect is lowered. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one character effect is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). Configure. As a result, even if it is possible to set the contents of the performance so that the execution periods of the role performance can overlap, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand, and to execute various performances of the role. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the variable probability promotion effect is executed only once during the jackpot game. . In this case, for example, in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia, a plurality of effect modes of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game can be selected, and the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game. should be configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse probability-varying promotion performances at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the content of the effect (composite effect) executed by combining the liquid crystal effect and the character effect is set differently according to the position of the movable character, for example, the movable character is positioned at the initial position If it is determined that it is, a predetermined composite effect (for example, a composite effect that is executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position within 1 second. If it is determined that it is in a position (state), a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is delayed by 1 second and executed, and the movable accessory is within 1 second. When it is determined that the player is in a position (state) in which it is possible to move to the initial position, various effects may be set such that the movable accessory is not moved and only the liquid crystal effect is executed. As a result, various effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, as a role production for moving the movable role, a first role production is executed with a predetermined first position as an initial position and a second position different from the first position as an end position; A pachinko machine capable of executing at least a second role performance performed with the first position and a third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-described second position as the end position, and a combined performance Based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the content of , it may be determined whether to execute the first role production or the second role production.

Also, in this case, regardless of the special figure fluctuation, it is preferable to configure so as to be able to execute a fan effect that brings the movable accessory closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite performance desired by the player, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In this control example, an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect for suggesting the jackpot type won during the jackpot game has been described. The technical idea used in this control example may be applied to the production for suggesting (fluctuation production) and the production for suggesting the lottery result of normal symbols (normal pattern fluctuation production). In addition, in this control example, the tilting device 310 arranged near the frame button 22a as a movable accessory is used as an example, but at least a predetermined first position (initial position) and a different position from the first position are used. Any movable accessory (movable member) configured to be movable between the second position (movable position) and, for example, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) disposed in the variable display unit 80 Alternatively, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 may be used.

In addition, in this control example, as conditions for operating the movable member (tilting device 310), a first operating condition that can be established during a big win game and a second operating condition that can be established based on the lottery result of special symbols are set. However, without being limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is established when a predetermined time comes, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22a, or a pending operation condition is established. A fifth operating condition or the like, which is established when the stored number reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight), may be set as the condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). By setting a plurality of operating conditions for the movable member (tilting device 310) in this way, the movable member can be moved at various timings, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this way, even if the opportunity to move the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the presentation display is increased for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, according to this control example, the accessory using the movable member It is possible to provide a player with a composite effect combining the effect and the display effect using the third pattern display device 81 without causing discomfort to the player.

In addition to the configuration of this control example, the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a jackpot game) regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It is also possible to provide an effect (inciting effect) to encourage the player to operate the operating means willingly. In this case, since the position of the movable member becomes undefined when executing the above-described suggestive effect, a situation is likely to occur in which the movable member is not positioned at the initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period. However, by using the technical idea of this control example, it is possible to execute a composite effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the promotion performance in which whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is the probability variable jackpot is notified by operating the operation means, It is configured to determine whether or not a holding continuous performance (last performance) is to be executed, and when it is determined that the holding continuous performance (last performance) is to be executed, to execute a holding continuous suggestion performance suggesting that effect. You can As a result, even if the promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game when the holding consecutive suggestion performance is executed, the suspension using the movable member is performed without operating the operation means (the movable member is prevented from moving). It is possible to make it easier to execute a continuous performance. In this way, by executing the holding continuation suggesting performance, intentional movement of the movable member is prevented in one performance (promotion performance), and the movable member is made easier to move in another performance (holding continuation performance). becomes possible. Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the effect to be executed can be made more diverse, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, a twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 593 to 603. FIG. In the eleventh control example described above, in the case of executing an effect (composite effect) in which the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character object effect are executed together, the movable member ( When it is determined whether the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, and when it is determined that it is located at the initial position, it is configured to execute a composite effect, and when it is determined that it is not located at the initial position. was configured so as not to execute the composite rendition. As a result, when executing a composite effect, the control means (audio lamp control device 113) that controls the effect is controlled by the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display effect, and the driving means that operates the movable accessory ( Even if a command (command) relating to a composite performance is output independently to a drive motor) and (hereinafter referred to as each device), the performance executed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be obtained. was able to increase

However, in the technique used in the eleventh control example described above, in order to output a command (command) for simultaneously executing a composite effect to each device, for example, the movable member is moved to an initial position corresponding to the composite effect. An action (preparatory action) for causing the effect is executed after receiving a command (command) for causing the composite effect to be executed. In other words, when executing a composite effect using a plurality of devices (movable members, liquid crystal devices, etc.), the preparation operation for making the composite effect executable is completed by each device (preparation period) should be included in the first half period of the composite presentation.

If such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect that synchronizes the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character effect, but it is necessary to set a long preparation period, There is a problem that the effect period in which the actual composite effect (the effect executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set becomes short when the composite effect is executed by In addition, there is a problem that the player notices the effect contents of the compound effect executed according to the movement state (preparatory action) of the movable accessory during the preparation period, which is the stage before the compound effect is performed.

In particular, as a composite effect, a first composite effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and a role product effect is performed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. and a pachinko machine configured to change the selection ratio between the first and second composite effects according to the lottery result of the special symbols, the pachinko machine can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the accessory moves to the first position or the second position, it is easy for the player to discriminate even the lottery result of the special symbol, and the production effect ( There is a problem that the performance effect of the composite performance is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, at the time before setting the composite effect (before the determination of whether or not the composite effect is executed) , control for executing a preparatory action for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by setting the preparatory motion separately from the setting of the composite performance, when the preparatory motion of the movable role is executed for the player, the composite performance (personal performance) is performed. It can make you think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparation operation is executed regardless of whether or not the composite effect (role effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the execution of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special pattern will be determined according to the movable state of the movable role during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is discriminated.

In addition, in the eleventh control example described above, since the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310) are configured to be controlled by the sound ramp control device 113, Round period, fluctuation period of special symbols), for the display effect that is continuously performed, a display command indicating the effect mode of the display effect to be executed within the effect period (for example, display round command, display fluctuation pattern command) is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the production period, and in the predetermined production period (round period of the jackpot, fluctuation period of the special symbol), For a character performance in which the performance is performed only for a specific period (for example, a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the performance period), after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the performance period, the movable member (tilting device 310) Then, it is necessary to output a command to perform a preparatory operation (for example, a preparatory period of 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (such as a timer) is provided for measuring the timing of outputting a command to the movable member on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In order to be able to execute character effects using movable members at a plurality of timings, it is necessary to design the measuring means so that a plurality of periods can be measured, which increases the processing of the sound ramp control device 113. There was a problem that

On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, a role object control device 229 is provided for executing motion control for a movable member, and a movable member (for example, the tilting device 310 ) is configured to output a command to move the Then, a command (a role object command) is configured to include information indicating the timing of outputting the command.

With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 only outputs the display command corresponding to the predetermined presentation period to the display control device 114 at the start of the presentation period, thereby preparing the movable member at an appropriate timing. can be made to act. In addition, even if a plurality of execution timings of the composite effect can be set and the timing of executing the preparatory motion is changed in accordance with the set execution timing of the composite effect, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the role item command to be included in the voice lamp control device 113, the need for providing a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods can be eliminated. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 593, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 593, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above is added with a role control device 229 that executes the motion control of the movable role. , and that the display control device 114 can output an operation instruction (command) to the character object control device 229 and the audio output device 226, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, in the block diagram of FIG. 593, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configuration of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the electrical configuration that is not described (for example, The power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.) have the same configuration as in the eleventh control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 593, in this twelfth control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third pattern display device 81, and , to the role product control device 229 to output a command for operating the movable role product. Here, as shown in FIG. 593, the character object control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and data (various commands) output from the display control device 114. an input port y304 for inputting commands), an MPUy301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device, and an output port y306 for outputting data related to operations to various movable accessories (the tilting device 310 and other devices 228). and is equipped with. The MPUy 301 stores a ROMy 302 storing predetermined program information (operation scenario (preparatory operation scenario, etc.) for operating a movable accessory) upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPUy 301, and various A RAMy 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, etc., is incorporated.

The MPUy301 of the character object control device 229 is electrically connected to the input port y305 and the output port y306. When a command designating movable data for moving a movable character is received from the display control device 114 to the character object control device 229, the command is sent to the MPU y301 via the input port y305 and the bus line. is entered. Also, an action pattern (action scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROM y 302, and an action instruction corresponding to the read action pattern is sent to various movable accessories via the output port y 306. output as

Furthermore, this control example is configured so that the accessory control device 229 can determine the operation status of the tilting device 310 . Specifically, whether or not a driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven is determined by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, an operation instruction is received from the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the state in which the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not moving, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, both the sound lamp control device 113 and the character object control device 229 provide motion data for moving the movable character object (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). (corresponding electrical signal) is output to the movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario is configured to be output to the role product control device 229, and only the role product control device 229 sends motion data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the motion scenario) to the movable role product. corresponding electrical signals). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent operation data from being output from a plurality of control devices to the movable accessory, thereby preventing the operation control of the movable accessory from becoming complicated.

In this control example, the output port 239 of the display control device 114 is also configured to output data (commands) related to audio output to the audio output device 226 . Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114 . Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the audio output device 226 is configured to be able to receive data (commands) related to audio output from the audio lamp control device 113 as in the control examples described above.

As shown in FIG. 593, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPUm 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. In the MPU m301, a ROM m302 storing predetermined program information (operation scenario (preparatory operation scenario, etc.) for operating a movable accessory) upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPU m301; A RAM m 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPU m 301, is incorporated.

The MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port m305 and the amplifier section m306. When a command designating audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU m301 via the input port m305 and bus line m304. be done. Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM m302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the amplifier m306. For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sound is output to CN3. Then, it is amplified by the amplifier section m306 and input to the speaker section 450 . Accordingly, various sounds designated by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450 .

Here, the configuration of the ROMm302 provided in the MPUm301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMm302 of the MPUm301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the display control device 114, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read out from the audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier section m306.

Specifically, in an audio file storage area (not shown), music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sound, and simulated sound generated during preparatory drive for character action are stored. and pseudo-voice data relating to the reproduced pseudo-voice are stored. In this control example, it is possible to output the above-described pseudo sound during the preparation period in which the movable accessory can execute preparation driving.

With this configuration, the same pseudo sound is output whether the preparation drive is actually executed during the preparation period or not, so that the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, similarly to the above-described eleventh control example, it is configured so as to execute a role performance that moves the tilting device 310 as a movable role. If it is a role product presentation executed during the ending scenario table 222ib2, the operation contents of the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 586(b)) correspond to the preparation drive.

Here, the action contents of the action pointers "1" and "2" specified in the ending scenario table 222ib2 (see FIG. 586(b)) are actions to move the mechanism (cam etc.) inside the tilting device 310. For this reason, the player cannot see the action, but since the drive motor is driven when the preparatory drive is performed, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is disengaged reach the player. There is a possibility that

Therefore, as in this control example, by outputting a pseudo sound generated during the preparatory drive in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, the player can be notified whether or not the preparatory drive has been executed. can be difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the performance of the role product that requires the preparation drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the performance mode of the operation performance to be executed for the player while the preparation drive is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the operation performance is lowered.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, even if the preparatory drive is not actually executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is being executed. However, it is acceptable as long as the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is being executed. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the sound generated when the preparatory drive is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is (has been) executed, and the same effect can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, this control example uses a configuration in which it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being performed. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed, in addition to the output of a pseudo sound, the preparatory drive is executed It is necessary to take measures so that it is not visually determined that the In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive can be executed is set, regardless of whether or not the preparatory drive is executed, a covered movable member is provided to cover the member that is movable by the preparatory drive so that the player cannot see it visually. It is good to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and aurally determining that the preparatory drive is to be executed.

<Regarding the flow of effects during the jackpot game in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 594 to 596, the flow of effects during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the eleventh control example described above, the display control device 114 is configured to output an effect execution command to the character control device 229 and the audio output device 226. The contents of control for the effects executed during the final round (16 rounds) and the contents of controls for the effects executed during the ending period are different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 594, a description will be given of the flow in the case of executing the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 594 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case of executing the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, during the ending period of the jackpot game. As shown in Figure 594, when the jackpot game (jackpot game period) is started, at the timing when the specific period (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) forming the jackpot game period is started, A display command is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 to indicate the display mode of the effect contents (liquid crystal display) during the specific period.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command from the audio lamp control device 113, it creates image data based on the received display command, and displays liquid crystal (opening display, round display) on the third pattern display device 81. Display, interval display, ) is executed. The detailed control contents for the display control device 114 to cause the third pattern display device 81 to perform various displays are the same as those of the control examples described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The sound lamp control device 113 sets a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of the round game) to the display command as a display command (display final round command) corresponding to the final round (16 rounds). Set including specification information for specification. When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, it executes the liquid crystal display during the final round, and at the specific timing specified by the specified information included in the final round command for display, the character product control device 229 , and outputs commands (operation commands) to the audio output device 226 .

When the character object control device 229 receives an action command (a character object command) output from the display control device 114, it performs preparatory driving for the movable character object (tilting device 310). Also, the audio output device 226 outputs a pseudo-audio upon receiving an operation command (audio command) output from the display control device 114 . That is, based on the designation information included in the final round command for display, preparation driving (preparation period of 2 seconds) for a composite effect (last effect) that can be executed during the ending period is executed.

Here, the specific timing designated by the designation information included in the final round command for display is set to be two seconds before the timing at which the final round can end. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is the same as the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the control examples described above. , the second condition that 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round game, the round game is configured to end when any of the second conditions is satisfied. Therefore, in this control example, the timing obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the timing at which the first condition can be established (the timing at which 10 seconds have passed since the round game was started) (the timing at which 8 seconds have passed since the round game was started) timing) is set as the timing specified by the specified information.

During this preparatory period, the character object control device 229 executes preparatory driving for the tilting device 310, and the sound output device 226 outputs pseudo sound to the speaker 450 during the preparatory period. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the round display of the final round is continuously executed (standby state) so as not to discriminate to the player that the game is currently in the preparation period. After that, when the round game of the final round ends and the ending period starts, the voice lamp control device 113 discriminates whether or not to execute the composite performance (last performance) during the ending period, and determines the last performance. When it is determined that the (holding continuous effect) is to be executed, an ending command for display including execution of the last effect is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command including the execution of the last effect, it causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last effect, and the character control device 229, Outputs a role item command for executing an operation effect corresponding to the last effect. Then, when the character object control device 229 receives the character object command for executing the operation effect corresponding to the last effect, the character object effect corresponding to the last effect is transmitted to the tilting device 310 whose preparatory drive has been completed. Operation data for execution (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors defined in the operation scenario) is output.

As described above, in this control example, the preparation drive for the role production (driving the production) of the movable role (tilting device 310) executed as the composite production during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the ending period starts, the tilting device 310 completes the preparatory drive, that is, the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586(b)). Therefore, compared to the case where the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period, it is possible to set a longer operation effect period during the ending period in which a predetermined period is set.

In addition, the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 outputs the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since it is configured to output a command for use, the sound lamp control device 113 side measures the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, and when the execution timing comes, the preparatory drive is performed for the movable accessory. There is no need to output a role item command to execute . Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to output the command for the character product to the character product control device 229 and simultaneously output the command for sound to the audio output device 226, so as to correspond to the execution period of the preparation driving of the movable character object. Since a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the sound generated during the preparatory driving of the movable accessory.

In this control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, whether or not to execute a combined effect (last effect) during the ending period is determined at the start of the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16 rounds), which is the timing before the start of the ending period, it is not determined whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed. In such a state, that is, in a state in which it has not been decided whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is to be executed during the ending period, by designating the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, The preparation driving is executed regardless of whether the composite effect (last effect) is executed or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the composite effect (last effect) will be executed during the ending period, depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595, a description will be given of the flow in the case where the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 595 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Fig. 595 is the same as Fig. 594 described above except that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. A detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 595, when the ending period starts, as a result of the determination performed by the audio ramp control device 113, if it is determined that the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not to be executed, the audio ramp control is performed. A display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the device 113 to the display control device 114 . In this case, for example, similar to the eleventh control example described above, if the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are not established (there is no winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot in the reserved pattern), the normal ending When the display is executed and the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are met, but the combined effect cannot be executed due to the operating status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the holding continuous effect is displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute effect display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, a description will be given of the flow when the preparation drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparation period set during the final round (16th round) of the jackpot game. FIG. 596 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not preparatory driven in the preparatory period set during the final round (16th round) of the jackpot game. FIG. 596 differs from FIG. 595 described above only in that the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not preparatory driven during the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds). Otherwise, they are identical. A detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 596, in the final round (16th round), an operation effect for moving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed (round effect drive is executed), and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. When the role product control device 229 receives the role product command output from the display control device 114 during the moving operation (return operation), the movable accessory (tilting device 310 ) is determined to be unexecutable, and the preparatory drive is not executed. Even in this case, the voice output device 226 outputs pseudo voice.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. Also, since the preparation drive was not executed during the final round (16 rounds), the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. Also in this case, similar to the pattern described with reference to FIG. is not executed, a display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 . In this case, for example, similar to the eleventh control example described above, if the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are not established (there is no winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot in the reserved pattern), the normal ending When the display is executed and the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are satisfied, but the combined effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the holding continuous effect is displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute effect display.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for a specific operation effect that can be executed during a specific effect period (ending period) is performed even if it is not determined whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed. configured to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

In addition, a preparation period in which the preparation drive is executed is set in advance, and the preparation drive is executed as interference means for making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is being executed during the preparation period. It has a pseudo-sound output means for outputting a pseudo-sound generated in the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed according to the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a predetermined execution prohibition condition is satisfied during the preparation period, the preparatory drive is not executed. The sound output means is configured to output a pseudo sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed according to the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

<Regarding control processing in the sound ramp control device of the twelfth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 597, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The twelfth control example differs from the eleventh control example described above in that round processing 12 (see Z8352 in FIG. 597) is executed instead of round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591). Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

FIG. 597 is a flow chart showing the contents of round processing 12 (Z8352). This round process 12 (Z8352) is a process of determining whether the newly executed round is the final round (16 rounds), in contrast to the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that processing for setting a display command dedicated to the final round (16 rounds) is added when the final round (16 rounds) is determined.

Specifically, when round processing 12 (Z8352) is executed, Z8411 to Z8413 identical to round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above are executed, and then newly executed. It is determined whether the round to be played is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451). In the process of Z8451, if it is determined that the final round (16 rounds) is reached (Z8451: Yes), then the final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the round process 11 of the eleventh control example described above (Fig. Z8414 processing identical to Z8302 of 591) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8451 that the round is not the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: No), this process ends.

Here, in the processing of Z8452, information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16 rounds) and information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory driving of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) are included. The final round command for display is set. In this way, by including the information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory drive in the display final round command set at the start timing of a new round, the audio ramp control device 113 can be operated as a movable accessory (tilting device 310).

Further, when the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, and the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the display data table is stored in the clock counter 233h. Since the effect display corresponding to the set and updated value of the clock counter 233h is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the timing of executing the preparation drive for the final round command for display. By including the information for indicating, it is possible to determine the timing to execute the preparation drive by diverting the time information of the time counter 233h used for displaying the image on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a new measuring means (timer) for determining the timing for executing preparatory driving, and manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the twelfth control example>
Next, control processing of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 598 and 599. FIG. In the twelfth control example, instead of command determination processing 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367), command determination processing 12 (See Z3392 in FIG. 598).

Here, the contents of command determination processing 12 (see Z3392) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 12 (see Z3392). When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes from Z3401 to Z3419 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) are executed, and it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Z3418. If so (Z3418: No), then it is determined whether there is a final round command for display (Z3491).

In the process of Z3491, if it is determined that there is a final round command for display (Z3491: Yes), the final round process is executed (Z3492), the process moves to Z3401, and it is determined that there is no final round command for display. If so (Z3491: No), the process proceeds to Z3420, which is the same as the above-described command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367).

Next, with reference to FIG. 599, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in command determination process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 598) will be described. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting the display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting the command to the character object control device 229 and the audio output device 226 and is executed.

When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), and then the standby display timing set in the display data table A process for outputting a character object command for causing the character object control device 229 to perform preparatory driving and an audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output pseudo-audio is set according to (Z3496), this processing ends.

As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h reaches a value indicating the standby display timing (the start timing of the preparation period), the character object command and the voice command can be output in synchronization.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device of the twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU m 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 600 and 601. FIG. In the twelfth control example, the audio command set by the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output processing of the audio lamp control device 113 or the command output processing of the display control device 114. The audio output device 226 is configured to output audio data corresponding to the received audio command.

Thus, various display commands output to the display control device 114 and voice By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of production modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (a production display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (visual display mode) and effect sound mode (auditory sound mode) output from the speaker 450 via the audio output device 226 can be set in a centralized manner. Therefore, when a plurality of performance modes are executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each performance mode and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It is sufficient if it executes the production for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle), or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, a plurality of types of performance modes are appropriately combined to execute one performance, so that performance modes to be executed for indicating the lottery results of special symbols can be set in various ways.

Further, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set an audio command (a command for outputting pseudo-audio) to be output to the audio output device 226 . By configuring in this way, since the display control device 114 can output the sound in accordance with the timing of actually creating the display data, the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, An effect that is more synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 450 can be executed.

In addition, for example, if the effect display is not properly executed due to an abnormality in the control processing of the display control device 114, the audio command is not output to the audio output device 226, so even if the effect display is not executed. Regardless, it is possible to suppress the output of only the sound and the occurrence of a lag between the performance display and the sound execution timing.

First, the main processing executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 600(a). FIG. 600(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (Z8501). Details of this command determination processing (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for outputting a voice corresponding to the voice command is executed. After the processing of Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In the processing of Z8502, processing for reproducing audio data and updating the value of the music pointer is executed.

When the processing of Z8502 is completed, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM m303 (Z8503). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z8503 (Z8503: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z8505), and the power-off processing is executed (Z8506). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z8503 (Z8503: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM m303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM m303 (Z8504), and the RAM m303 is destroyed. If not (Z8504: No), the process returns to Z8501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMm 303 is destroyed (Z8504: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processing.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU m 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 600(b). FIG. 600(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 600(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM m303 (Z8601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 601, the command determination process (Z8501), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 600(a)) executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 601 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z8501), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701). End the determination process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z8702). , the command type is analyzed (Z8703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice command output from the display control device 114, that is, a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704). (Z8704: Yes), the voice file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area of the ROM m302. Next, set a value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo-audio is played back to the music pointer value, set a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo-audio data, and set playback of the pseudo-audio data. (Z8706), the process proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, in the process of Z8704, if it is determined that there is no audio command output from the display control device 114 (Z8704: No), or if the above-described process of Z8706 is executed, then other audio It is determined whether or not there is a command, that is, a voice command received from the voice lamp controller 113 (Z8707).

In the processing of Z8707, for example, BGM for music corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation effect and the jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, the stop sound sound corresponding to the stop display timing of the special symbol (third symbol), and the frame button 22a It is determined whether or not a voice command for indicating a pressing sound voice corresponding to the pressing timing of , an error voice corresponding to an error notification, or the like has been output from the voice lamp control device 113 . Here, when it is determined that there are various audio commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 (Z8707: Yes), an audio file (music data) corresponding to the audio (music) indicated by the received various audio commands group) is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (music data group) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the audio data indicated by the various received audio commands is set in a predetermined timing means (timer), the reproduction of the various audio data is set (Z8708), and the process proceeds to Z8701. Transition.

In the processing of Z8707, when it is determined that there is no other audio data (Z8707: No), other command processing is executed (Z8709), the process proceeds to Z8701, and the above control is repeatedly executed.

<Regarding the control process of the accessory control device 229 in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 602 and 603, the control processing contents of the role product control device 229 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the role product command set by the display control device 114 is output to the role product control device 229 by the command output processing of the display control device 114, and the role product control device 229 outputs the received role product Operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors defined in the operation scenario) corresponding to the command for use is output to the corresponding movable accessory.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 that receives the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the display control By setting various role product commands that the device 114 outputs to the role product control device 229, a plurality of effect display modes (displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol It is possible to operate the movable accessory in synchronization with the effect display mode (visual display mode) to be performed.Therefore, various devices (third symbol In the case of executing a composite effect combining the display device 81, the movable accessory, and the speaker 450), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode set by each of the various devices. You can increase the effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. What is necessary is just to perform the production|presentation for showing the lottery result of a special design with respect to. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle), or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, a plurality of types of performance modes are appropriately combined to execute one performance, so that performance modes to be executed for indicating the lottery results of special symbols can be set in various ways.

First, referring to FIG. 602(a), the main processing executed by the MPUy 301 of the character product control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the role product control device 229 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is executed (Z9001). Details of this command determination processing (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for outputting the motion data that has been set is executed. After the processing of Z9001, other processing is executed to reproduce the motion data and update the value of the motion timer for updating the motion scenario (Z9002).

When the processing of Z9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAMy 303 (Z9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z9003 (Z9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z9005), and the power-off processing is executed (Z9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z9003 (Z9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAMy 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAMy 303 (Z9004), and the RAMy 303 is destroyed. If not (Z9004: No), the process returns to Z9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMy 303 is destroyed (Z9004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 602(b), command interrupt processing executed by the MPUy 301 of the character product control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 602(b)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the display control device 114 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMy 303 (Z9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 603, the command determination process (Z9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 602(a)) executed by the MPUy301 of the accessory control device 229, will be described. FIG. 603 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination processing (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control according to the types of various commands received from the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201). End the determination process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z9202), and then the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are All the commands are analyzed for their command types (Z9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a role item command (S9204), and if it is determined that there is a role item command (Z9204: Yes), then this time It is determined whether or not the movable accessory to be operated by the received accessory command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the processing of Z9205, first, it is determined whether the command for the character item received this time is a command indicating an action scenario for which movable character item. If the command indicates , the change in the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is discriminated. If this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, it means that the drive motor is being driven, so it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation.

In this way, by configuring so as to directly grasp the driving status of the drive motor, even when using a configuration in which motion data is output from a plurality of control devices, the movable status of the movable accessory can be reliably determined. can grasp.

In the process of Z9205, if it is determined that the target movable accessory is in motion (Z9205: Yes), the action based on the command for the accessory received this time cannot be executed. Without outputting data, the command for accessory received this time is discarded (Z9206), and the process proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, if it is determined that the target movable role object is not in motion (Z9205: No), action data (ending scenario table 222ib2 586(b))) is output (Z9207), and the process proceeds to Z9201.

Also, in the processing of Z9204, if it is determined that there is no accessory command (Z9204: No), other command processing is executed (Z9207), and the processing shifts to Z9201.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 is provided for executing the motion control for the movable member, and the movable member (for example, tilting It is configured to output a command for moving the device 310). Then, a command (a role object command) is configured to include information indicating the timing of outputting the command.

With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 only outputs the display command corresponding to the predetermined presentation period to the display control device 114 at the start of the presentation period, thereby preparing the movable member at an appropriate timing. can be made to act. In addition, even if a plurality of execution timings of the compound effect can be set and the timing of executing the preparatory motion is changed in accordance with the set execution timing of the compound effect, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the role item command to be included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, this control example is configured so that the accessory control device 229 can determine the operation status of the tilting device 310 . Specifically, whether or not a driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven is determined by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, an operation instruction is received from the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the state in which the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not moving, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, both the sound lamp control device 113 and the character object control device 229 provide motion data for moving the movable character object (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). (corresponding electrical signal) is output to the movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario is configured to be output to the role product control device 229, and only the role product control device 229 sends motion data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the motion scenario) to the movable role product. corresponding electrical signals). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent operation data from being output from a plurality of control devices to the movable accessory, thereby preventing the operation control of the movable accessory from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in this control example, by outputting a pseudo sound generated during the preparatory drive in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, the player is informed whether or not the preparatory drive has been executed. can be made difficult to discriminate. As a result, in the case of executing the performance of the role product that requires the preparation drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the performance mode of the operation performance to be executed for the player while the preparation drive is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the operation performance is lowered.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, even if the preparatory drive is not actually executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is being executed. However, it is acceptable as long as the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is being executed. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the sound generated when the preparatory drive is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is (has been) executed, and the same effect can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, this control example uses a configuration in which it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being performed. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed, in addition to the output of a pseudo sound, the preparatory drive is executed It is necessary to take measures so that it is not visually determined that the In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive can be executed is set, regardless of whether or not the preparatory drive is executed, a covered movable member is provided to cover the member that is movable by the preparatory drive so that the player cannot see it visually. It is good to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and aurally determining that the preparatory drive is to be executed.

As described above, in this control example, the preparation drive for the role production (driving the production) of the movable role (tilting device 310) executed as the composite production during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the ending period starts, the tilting device 310 completes the preparatory drive, that is, the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586(b)). Therefore, compared to the case where the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period, it is possible to set a longer operation effect period during the ending period in which a predetermined period is set.

In addition, the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 outputs the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since it is configured to output a command for use, the sound lamp control device 113 side measures the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, and when the execution timing comes, the preparatory drive is performed for the movable accessory. There is no need to output a role item command to execute . Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to output the command for the character product to the character product control device 229 and simultaneously output the command for sound to the audio output device 226, so as to correspond to the execution period of the preparation driving of the movable character object. Since a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the sound generated during the preparatory driving of the movable accessory.

In addition, in this control example, the composite effect executed during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but the timing at which the composite effect is executed is not limited to the jackpot game. It may be during special figure fluctuation. In this case, when using the technical idea of setting the character performance and the preparation operation differently as the variation performance to be executed during the special figure variation, for example, the reserved and stored winning prize information is determined in advance. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, for example, when it is determined to execute the composite performance in the special figure variation executed after 2 fluctuations, or the composite performance is not executed in the special figure fluctuation executed at the degree of 2 fluctuations. It is better to set the advance preparation operation so as to execute the preparation operation before the special figure fluctuation after the 2 fluctuation is executed in a part of the case where it is determined.

Further, when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (the frame button 22), a determination means is provided for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory action, and when the determination means determines to execute the preparatory action. You may configure so that the preparatory operation is executed at . In this case, it is preferable that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, it is possible to change the probability of execution of the composite effect depending on whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be made to operate the operation means more positively. Furthermore, the operation timing to the operation means for which the determination means described above is used, for example, the operation means as a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation executed before the special figure fluctuation in which the operation production is executed As a result of operating the operating means, when the effect is executed that suggests that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out, the determining means decides to perform the preparation operation. Good to configure.

With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operating means for performing the preparatory action without any sense of incongruity. In addition, since it is possible to execute the preparation operation of the movable role while the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the front special figure variation is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 615. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth control example (and eighth control example), when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure variation, when the power is cut off, it is played along with the special figure variation. The playback position of the BGM is backed up, and when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is resumed, the playback of the BGM is started from the backed up playback position. As a result, the player can easily understand that the special figure variation that was being executed before the power was turned off was resumed after the power was turned on again. was

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off during execution of the special figure variation, and then the power is turned on again and the special figure variation is restarted, the initial stage of the display control device 114 After the setting is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed in the third symbol display device 81), the variation display effect corresponding to the special figure variation that has been interrupted due to the power cut is started in a pseudo manner. It was configured to This pseudo fluctuation display production is also executed when the restarted special figure fluctuation based on the re-supply of the power ends before the completion of the initial setting. That is, during a predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, without synchronizing with the variation start timing and stop timing of the actual special figure variation (variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37), the first The configuration is such that the 3-symbol display device 81 executes a variable display performance in a pseudo manner. By configuring in this way, by confirming the pseudo variable display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variable display executed when the power supply is cut off can be displayed in the game. It is easy for people to understand. In accordance with this, in this thirteenth control example, the BGM reproduction start position at the time of power-on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure variation BGM ends when the initialization is completed. bottom. By configuring in this way, at the timing of starting the pseudo-variation, it is possible to reproduce from the first part of the special-figure variation BGM. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be shown as if it were a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display executed before the occurrence of the power failure can be notified without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, when the background change operation (pressing operation on the frame button 22a) is executed during the execution of the special figure variation, the "silhouette display" is displayed at a predetermined rate. It was configured so that it could be selected. This silhouette display is basically configured so that it is easier to set when the variation is a big hit variation than when it is a misalignment variation. A novel game property is realized in which a player who wants to make a prediction can positively perform an operation to change the background mode during execution of the special figure variation. In other words, since it is configured to allow the player to actively change the background mode, as a result of frequently changing the effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special figure fluctuation, It was possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is common to the ninth control example up to the point that the silhouette display can be set by executing the background change operation. is different from the ninth control example. More specifically, in the thirteenth control example, silhouettes having a plurality of shapes (display modes) are provided. It is possible to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the second half (predetermined period) of the variable display. By configuring in this way, the type of the notice effect can be known in advance before the start of the notice effect, so that the player can positively execute the background change operation. In addition, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect will develop. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Note that, in the thirteenth control example, the effect using the silhouette display is referred to as "silhouette announcement effect".

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 9 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 604, in the present thirteenth control example, the BGM and the transition of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation explain. Figure 604 (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the variation time of the special figure variation restarted after power-on passes after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604 (a), in this thirteenth control example, of the special figure fluctuation BGM composed of A melody, B melody, and C melody, the end timing of C melody and the initial stage of display control device 114 The playback start position of the special figure variation BGM is set so that the end timing of the setting matches. In Figure 604, by starting the special figure fluctuation BGM from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end timing of the C melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM are matched. ing. By setting the BGM playback start position so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody of the BGM match, after that, just loop playback of the special figure fluctuation BGM until the end of the fluctuation as usual. Then, at the timing when the display control device 114 returns, the BGM can be started from the beginning of the special figure variation BGM. That is, the timing of starting the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed and the timing of reproducing the BGM from the beginning of the special symbol variation BGM can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to reproduce the BGM in the special figure variation effect executed in the remaining variation time at the end of the initialization in a natural voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable sound mode. In addition, since it is not necessary to set playback from the beginning of the BGM at the end of the initialization, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the initialization of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes according to the progress of the special figure variation. The display control device 114 performs control to transfer images used for various effects to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while initial settings are being performed. Here, if the special figure fluctuation is not executed, only the transfer of the resident image should be executed, and the initial setting time is relatively short, but if the special figure fluctuation is executed, the end of the initial setting Sometimes it is necessary to prepare the image data used for the variable display effect. For this reason, the more image data used for the special figure variation, the longer the period required for initial setting. In this thirteenth control example, the display mode of the special figure fluctuation is before reach development with relatively less image data to be used, after normal reach development with relatively more image data to be used, or super The time required for initial setting varies depending on whether the reach has been developed. Specifically, if it is before reach development, the initial setting will be completed in 1 second, but after developing into normal reach, it will take 2 seconds to initialize, and if it is after super reach development, the initial setting will be completed. It takes 4 seconds to complete. Therefore, in the thirteenth control example, the state of development of the fluctuation display when the power is turned on is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation type, the period required for the initial setting is predicted, and the predicted initial setting period is used. It is configured to set the start timing of the special figure variation BGM. As a result, the end timing of the initialization and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be reliably matched.

Figure 604 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the special figure variation that was interrupted at the time of power failure and resumed after the power was turned on ends before the initial setting is completed. FIG. 604(b) illustrates the case where the special figure variation is executed under the condition that at least one ball is held when the power is cut off. As shown in FIG. 604 (b), when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is resumed, the end timing of the initial setting is predicted, and the BGM is finished in accordance with the predicted end timing. playback start position is set. That is, as in FIG. 604(a), by starting the reproduction from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initialization matches the end timing of the C melody.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604 (b), during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, when the special figure fluctuation is completed, the special based on the held ball (held ball 1) that was held at the time of power off Figure variation (variation display of the first symbol on the first display device 37) is started. FIG. 604(b) illustrates a case where the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation display based on the held ball 1 (holding 1) is later than the end timing of the initialization of the display control device 114 . The variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the holding ball 1 at the time of power interruption continues across the end timing of the initialization of the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. 604(b). do. On the other hand, as the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. Based on the completion of the initial setting (it is possible to display a normal image), first, a pseudo deviation display for one second is executed. This is a variation for simulating the result of the variable display (the result was shown in the first symbol display device 37 during the initial setting) interrupted when the power was cut off, on the third symbol display device 81. It is a display performance. By executing this pseudo-variation effect, the result of simple variation display by the power-on variation image on the first pattern display device 37 and the power-on variation image on the first pattern display device 37 that ended during the execution of the initial setting (comparison The result of the variable display in a form that is difficult to visually confirm can be notified to the player who has overlooked the result of the variable display in a form that is easier to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand the result of the special figure variation being executed when the power is turned off. In addition, if the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off was a big hit, the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation that was restarted after the power was turned on has passed (that is, during the execution of the initial settings ) Since the jackpot will start (there is no room to execute the pseudo-fluctuation), even if the pseudo-fluctuation is not executed, it is unlikely that the player will have suspicion that the lottery results have been discarded due to the power failure. do not have.

As shown in FIG. 604(b), after the one-second pseudo variable display is completed, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining variable time. With this configuration, both the result of the variable display that ended during the execution of the initial setting in the display control device 114 and the result of the variable display that started during the execution of the initial setting can be sent to the player. can be easily understood.

In addition, if the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that was started during the execution of the initial settings is less than 1 second (the fluctuation time has passed while the pseudo fluctuation is being executed), the fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off After the 1-second pseudo-variation corresponding to the display is performed, the 1-second pseudo-variation corresponding to Power Down Hold 1 is performed. In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display started during execution of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation display that was being executed at the time of power failure is executed over the remaining fluctuation time. Later, a 1 second pseudo-variation corresponding to hold 1 on power down is performed. By configuring in this way, the pseudo fluctuation can be executed more preferably.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 605(a). FIG. 605(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 605(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558(a)), with the background announcement selection table 222ga deleted. The difference is that a silhouette announcement selection table 222ja is provided instead. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette announcement selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the silhouette announcement effect in the thirteenth control example. Here, as described above, the silhouette forewarning effect in the thirteenth control example is performed in the second half of the variable display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed in accordance with the background change operation during execution of the variable display effect. It is an effect that suggests (informs) the type of advance notice effect (type of ready-to-win effect) to be executed in (predetermined period). More specifically, as aspects (shapes) of silhouettes that can be displayed in the silhouette announcement effect in the thirteenth control example, a bubble-shaped silhouette imitating the shape of a bubble and a fish-shaped silhouette imitating the shape of a fish (Fig. 560 (a )), a wooden silhouette imitating the shape of a tree (see FIG. 560(b)), and a volcano silhouette imitating the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes indicates the type of advance notice effect (prediction type) to be executed in the second half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that a bubble forewarning effect will be executed in which a large number of bubbles are generated in the display screen when developing into super reach, and the fish-shaped silhouette will develop into super reach. This suggests that a fish school forewarning effect will be executed in which a school of fish crosses the display screen when the tree moves, and the tree shape silhouette is a wind that displays a display mode in which trees sway due to strong winds when developing into super reach. This suggests that a forewarning effect will be executed, and the volcano-shaped silhouette suggests that an eruption foreshadowing effect will be executed in which the display mode of the mountain erupting is displayed when developing into Super Reach. be.

In addition, the bubble preview effect and the fish school preview effect are exclusive preview effects when the background mode is set to sea mode, and the wind preview effect and eruption preview effect are exclusive to when the background mode is set to mountain mode. It is a preview performance of. The fish school notice effect is a notice effect that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the bubble notice effect (the rate of selection in the case of a change in deviation is low), and the eruption notice effect is a notice effect that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the wind notice effect. is. Then, the bubble warning effect and the wind warning are configured to have the same level of expectation for the big hit when they are executed, and the fish school warning effect and the eruption warning effect are also configured to have the same level of expectation for the big win. ing. For this reason, if the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect with the bubble preview effect set to change to the mountain background, it will switch to the variable display effect with the wind preview effect, and the wind preview effect will be set. When the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect to change to the sea background, the variable display effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect is switched. Also, if you perform a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect with the fish school preview effect set and change to the mountain background, it will switch to the variable display effect with the eruption preview effect, and the change with the eruption preview effect set. When the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the display effect to change to the sea background, the effect is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the fish school advance notice effect. Details of the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja for selecting the effect mode of the silhouette announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 606 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 606, the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example defines the type of silhouette announcement effect to be selected in association with each value range of the effect counter 223h. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 606, for the variable display effect for which the advance notice type that does not involve development to super reach is set, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation, A silhouette notice "none" is defined in association with the entire possible range of the effect counter 223h. Therefore, when the player performs the background change operation while the variable display effect of the effect mode not accompanied by development to super reach is being executed, the silhouette announcement effect is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 606, the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode, and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the bubble warning super reach. The value of 223h in the range of "0 to 149" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and the range of "150 to 198" is defined in correspondence with the silhouette announcement effect of "bubble silhouette". there is Therefore, if the background is changed to the sea mode and the variable display is accompanied by foam warning super reach, a silhouette preview effect in which a bubble silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199) is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning effect, the player can understand that the game will develop into a super reach with bubble foretelling, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who desires to check the silhouette announcement effect positively change the background mode.

As shown in FIG. 606, when the background mode changed by the background change operation is the sea mode and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the fish school advance notice super reach, the production counter 223h The value range of "0 to 179" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and the value range of "180 to 198" is defined in association with the silhouette announcement effect of "fish silhouette". Therefore, when the background is changed to the sea mode and the variable display is accompanied by a school of fish notice super reach, a silhouette notice effect in which fish silhouettes are displayed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning performance, the player can be made to understand that it will develop into a super reach with a fish school forewarning, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved. In addition, by configuring the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect to be lower than the super reach effect accompanying the fish school notice effect, which is expected to be a big hit, is lower than the super reach effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect, the silhouette notice effect is not generated, it can be expected that the fish school forewarning effect will be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the silhouette effect is executed and the type of the silhouette, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 606, the background mode changed by the background change operation is the mountain mode, and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the wind warning super reach. The value range of "0 to 99" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and the value range of "100 to 198" is defined in association with the silhouette announcement effect of "wooden silhouette". Therefore, if the background is changed to the mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by wind warning super reach, the wooden pattern silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette foretelling effect, the player can understand that the game will develop into a super reach with wind foretelling, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect against the wind notice super reach is higher than the occurrence ratio of the silhouette notice effect against the foam notice super reach in the sea mode, so you can see more silhouette notice effects. A player who desires to change the background to the mountain mode can be actively made to perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 606, the background mode after the background change operation is the mountain mode, and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the eruption warning super reach. A value range of "0 to 149" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and a value range of "150 to 198" is defined in association with a "volcano silhouette" silhouette announcement effect. Therefore, if the background is changed to mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by an eruption warning super reach, the volcano silhouette will be displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning performance, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach with an eruption forewarning, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is configured so that the rate of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the eruption notice super reach is higher than the occurrence ratio of the silhouette notice effect for the fish school notice super reach in the sea mode, you can see more silhouette notice effects. A player who desires to change the background to the mountain mode can be actively made to perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the player performs the background change operation during the execution of the variable display effect in which the notice effect of a specific type is executed, the predetermined amount is determined for each type of notice effect. A silhouette foretelling effect that suggests execution of the foretelling effect is executed at a ratio of By configuring in this way, it is possible to know whether or not the notice effect is executed and the type of the notice effect before the start of the notice effect. background change operation. In addition, in the thirteenth control example, when the silhouette forewarning effect occurs, it is determined that the game will develop to super ready-to-win with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. You can improve your expectations. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is changed only according to the type of the announcement effect. In other words, regardless of whether the change is a big win or a loss, the silhouette announcement effect is selected. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette announcement effect is not executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's sense of expectation for the big win to be spoiled. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. there is As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect that the player likes and performs the game. In addition, since it is configured to inform in advance the type of super reach announcement effect to be executed thereafter by the silhouette announcement effect, after knowing the type of announcement effect by the silhouette announcement effect, the background mode is maintained to silhouette. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), it corresponds to the changed background equivalent to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is made different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect may be made common. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the defined contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, whether or not to execute the silhouette announcement effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only depending on whether or not the specific type of announcement effect is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is varied depending on whether or not the game is a big win. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the silhouette announcement effect, so that the player can be made to more positively perform the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 605(b), details of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 605(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirteenth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example (see FIG. The only difference is that a counter 223jb and a silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc are added.

The pseudo-variation counter 223ja counts the number of variable displays for which the third symbol display device 81 has not executed the variable display of the third symbol (excluding the variation image at power-on) among the variable displays performed after the power is turned on again. It is a counter for counting (the number of pseudo fluctuation executions). This pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is incremented by 1 (see Z2277 in FIG. 607) every time a stop command is received during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 (at fluctuation stop timing), and the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed. The value is decremented by 1 each time it is executed (see Z2316 in FIG. 610 and Z2560 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223j is 1 or more, a new pseudo-fluctuation is executed each time the fluctuation or pseudo-fluctuation is completed.

The pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation production. This pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is set with a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation at the start of the pseudo fluctuation (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 610, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223jb becomes 0 and the value of the above-described pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 1 or more, execution of the pseudo-variation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb becomes 0 during the execution of the variation display, the normal variation display is performed during the remaining variation time, and the pseudo-variation time counter When the value of 223jb becomes 0, the change stops as it is.

The silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc is a flag for indicating whether or not the lottery using the silhouette advance notice selection table 222ja has been executed in one variation display. If the silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc is on, it means that the lottery using the silhouette advance notice selection table 222ja has already been executed in the variable display being executed, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed. means. The silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc is set to OFF as an initial value, and is set to ON at the timing when the background change operation is performed for the first time during execution of the variable display (see Z2986 in FIG. 613). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops (see Z2280 in FIG. 607).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 607 to 615, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 607, the fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) in the thirteenth control example will be described. This fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process that is executed instead of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example. This is the processing for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 .

In the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, each processing from Z2265 to Z2269 is the same as each processing from Z2265 to Z2269 in the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example. process is executed. Also, in the fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265), and the process proceeds to Z2266. When the process of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223fa is set to OFF (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2273.

In the process of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2275). In the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is off (Z2275: No), the process proceeds to Z2280. On the other hand, in the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the returning fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2275: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit stop symbol is set (Z2276). In the process of Z2276, when it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is set (Z2276: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is cleared to 0 (Z2278), and the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off ( Z2279), and the process shifts to Z2280.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2276, if it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is not set (Z2276: No), it is determined that the first off symbol has been stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, 1 is added to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja (Z2277), and the process proceeds to Z2280. In the process of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to OFF (Z2280), and the process ends.

By executing this fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607), the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja can be incremented by 1 each time the first pattern that is out of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately execute the pseudo-variation effect for the number of times of deviation fluctuations executed during the initial setting after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the completion of the initial setting, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable display of the third symbol for the same number of times as the variable display that was being executed when the power was turned off and the variable display based on the ball held when the power was turned off. can be executed in As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having suspicion that the lottery results have been discarded due to power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, the fluctuation recovery process 13 (Z2262) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This fluctuation recovery process 13 (Z2262) is a process that is executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example). ), this is a process for executing control according to the return fluctuation command received from main controller 110, similar to the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 541).

In each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284 of the fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, Z2281 to Z2281 to Z2284 of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example) The same processing as each processing of Z2284 is executed. Further, in the fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2284 is finished, next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation recovery command and the fluctuation type (fluctuation time) By, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time corresponds to normal reach production (Z2331), and if it is determined that it is the remaining variation time corresponding to normal reach production (Z2231: Yes), special figure fluctuation is set to be reproduced from a reproduction position corresponding to two seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2331, if it is determined that the remaining variation time does not correspond to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2331: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time corresponds to the super reach effect. If it is determined (Z2333) and it is determined that it is in the super reach production (Z2333: Yes), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 4 seconds before the end of the song ( Z2334), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2333, if it is determined that the super reach effect is not being executed (Z2333: No), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is played from the playback position corresponding to one second before the end of the song is set (Z2335), and this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 608), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. That is, the display mode of the special figure fluctuation is before reach development with relatively less image data to be used, after normal reach development with relatively more image data to be used, or after super reach development with the most image data to be used By making the start timing of the special figure variation BGM different depending on whether, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be reliably matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 609, display startup processing 13 (Z2247) in the thirteenth control example will be described. This display start-up process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed instead of the display start-up process (see FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example). ), similar to the display startup process (see FIG. 542), when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, it is a process for setting the variable display of the third symbol according to the value of the remaining variable time counter. .

In the processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 of the display startup processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, the display startup processing in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) (FIG. 542) ), the same processes as Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 are executed. Further, in the display start-up process 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON in the process of S2291 (Z2291: Yes), then the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z2301), and if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (Z2301: Yes), Since it means that the special figure fluctuation has ended one or more times during the initial setting, the pseudo fluctuation start process for starting the pseudo fluctuation production showing the result of the special figure fluctuation finished during the initial setting Execute (Z2302) and terminate this process. The details of this pseudo fluctuation start process (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2301: No), the process proceeds to Z2292.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, details of the above-described pseudo fluctuation start processing (Z2302) will be described. This pseudo-variation start process (Z2302) is, as described above, a process for starting the pseudo-variation production showing the result of the special figure variation that has ended during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 610, when the pseudo fluctuation start process (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2311), and the residual value specified from the read value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312).

In the process of Z2312, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2312: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). Then, when it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2313 (Z2313: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2312 (Z2312: Yes), 1 The start of the second pseudo-fluctuation effect is set (Z2314), and the counter value corresponding to one second is set to the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2315). Next, the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is updated by subtracting 1 from it (Z2316), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2313, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: No), then it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317). If it is determined that the time is 1 second or less (Z2317: No), it means that the remaining fluctuation time is not enough to perform pseudo fluctuation, so the power recovery screen (power-on image) continues to be displayed. is set (Z2318), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (Z2319), and the process proceeds to Z2321. On the other hand, in the process of Z2317, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: Yes), if the pseudo fluctuation of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the pseudo fluctuation is 1 second or less, and there is not enough time left to perform the special figure fluctuation, so the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2320), and the process moves to Z2321. In the process of Z2321 executed after the process of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the residual fluctuation time is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2321), and this process is finished.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation start process (see FIG. 610), the result of the special figure fluctuation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the form of pseudo fluctuation production by the third symbol after the end of the initial setting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 611, details of the variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) in the thirteenth control example will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example). 8 control example), similar to the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543), this is a process for executing control according to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. FIG.

In each of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of the fluctuation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, the fluctuation in the ninth control example (and eighth control example) The same processes as Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) are executed.

Further, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, next, a detailed variable display mode corresponding to the variable pattern command is determined, and the determined variable display mode is determined. A variation pattern command setting process for setting a display variation pattern command corresponding to the mode is executed (Z2521), and the process proceeds to Z2535. Details of this variation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command setting process (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg (Z2551), and then the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is set. It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552), and if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2552: Yes), the variation according to the extracted variation pattern A display mode is selected (Z2553), a display variation pattern command indicating the selected variation display mode is set (Z2554), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2552, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time indicated by the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555), and if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds (Z2555: No), if you set a pseudo-fluctuation effect for 1 second, after the pseudo-fluctuation ends Since the remaining variable time is not long enough to perform the variable display effect, a variable pattern command for display indicating the start of the pseudo-variable effect of the variable time over the remaining variable time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2555, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555: Yes), even if the pseudo-fluctuation effect for 1 second is executed, sufficient (at least 1 (longer than a second) can be secured as the fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of pseudo fluctuation for one second is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2559), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2560), and this processing ends.

By executing this variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 612), the variation display mode can be preferably set in consideration of the remaining number of times of pseudo variation at the start of variation.

Next, background change processing 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, and is similar to the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example. In addition, when a background change operation is performed, the background change is set according to the timing of the operation.

In the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 in the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example. process is executed. In the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2967 or the process of Z2968 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is ON (Z2981). , If it is determined that the silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc is off (Z2981: No), it means that the lottery for the silhouette preview effect has not been executed in the variable display being executed this time. and processing for setting (each processing of Z2982 to Z2986). More specifically, the value of the production counter 223h is acquired (Z2982), and the silhouette announcement mode corresponding to the acquired value of the production counter 223h is selected from the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja (Z2983).

When the process of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette lottery completion flag 223jc is then set to ON (Z2984), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the silhouette previous notice effect by the process of Z2983 indicates the execution of the silhouette previous notice effect. (Z2985). In the processing of Z2985, when it is determined that the lottery result indicates execution of the silhouette advance notice (Z2986: Yes), a silhouette advance notice command for display indicating execution of the selected silhouette advance notice effect is set (Z2986), and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, in the process of Z2985, when it is determined that the result of the lottery indicates "no" for the silhouette announcement effect (Z2985: No), the process of Z2986 is skipped and the present process ends.

By executing this background change processing 13 (see FIG. 613), it is possible to execute a lottery for the silhouette announcement effect based on the first background change operation during execution of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who confirms the silhouette announcement effect feel a sense of anticipation for the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 614, the details of the counter update process 13 (Z2177) in the thirteenth control example will be described. This counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process that is executed in place of the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example). ), similar to the counter update process (see FIG. 552), this process is for updating various counters.

Of the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, Z2861 to Z2866 of the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example) The same processing as each processing of Z2866 is executed. In addition, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, after the process of Z2864 or Z2865 is completed, the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is greater than 0 (1 or more). (Z2871), and if the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is 0 (Z2871: No), the process proceeds to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2871, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is subtracted by 1 (Z2872 ), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223jb after the subtraction has become 0 (Z2873). In the processing of Z2873, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z2873: Yes), whether to execute pseudo fluctuation or to execute normal fluctuation display according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is executed (Z2874), and the process proceeds to Z2875. The details of this pseudo change setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo variable time counter 223jb after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: No), the process of Z2874 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2875.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, details of the above-described pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874) will be described. This pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) is, as described above, a process for determining whether to execute pseudo-variation or normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja. In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2881), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2882).

In the process of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the read pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2882: Yes), then whether or not the residual fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read out in the process of Z2881 is 0 is discriminated (Z2883). In the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2883: No), set the execution of the variation display over the remaining variation time (Z2884), set the start of the special figure variation BGM ( Z2885), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0, it means that the actual game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuation stop state. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is not 0 (is 1 or more) (Z2882: No), then whether the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2886), and if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time is 0 (Z2887). In the processing of Z2887, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2887: No), the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the residual fluctuation time is set (Z2888), and the residual fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb. is set (Z2889), and the process proceeds to Z2893.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2886 (Z2886: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2887 (Z2887: Yes) , sets the start of the pseudo-fluctuation effect for 1 second (Z2890), and sets a counter value corresponding to 1 second for the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja (Z2892), and the process proceeds to Z2893. In the process of Z2893, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2893), and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 615), when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation has passed, the pseudo fluctuation is set again according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja, or the normal fluctuation display is performed. You can decide exactly what to do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, the power is cut off during execution of the special figure variation, and then the power is turned on again to perform the special figure variation (the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37). When the variable display) is resumed, after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is resumed when the power is turned on. It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo variation display effect showing the result of the special figure variation. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation effect asynchronous with the variation period of the first symbol variation display restarted based on power-on. By configuring in this way, by confirming the pseudo variable display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variable display executed when the power supply is cut off can be displayed in the game. It is easy for people to understand. In accordance with this, in this thirteenth control example, the BGM reproduction start position at the time of power-on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure variation BGM ends when the initialization is completed. bottom. By configuring in this way, at the timing of starting the pseudo-variation, it is possible to reproduce from the first part of the special-figure variation BGM. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be shown as if it were a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display executed before the occurrence of the power failure can be notified without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special figure variation interrupted by the power cutoff is executed without being discarded after the power is turned on again, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the execution of the variable display, if a specific condition is established, a predetermined silhouette announcement effect that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition is given. It was configured to be executable at a ratio of More specifically, whether or not to execute a silhouette announcement effect that suggests (informs) the type of announcement effect (type of ready-to-win effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display by the display mode of the silhouette display is changed by the background change. A lottery is performed based on the execution of the operation. By configuring in this way, when the silhouette announcement effect is executed, the type of the announcement effect can be known in advance before the start of the announcement effect, so that the player can be positively informed. A background change operation can be performed. In addition, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect will develop. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is changed only according to the type of the announcement effect. In other words, regardless of whether the change is a big win or a loss, the silhouette announcement effect is selected. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette announcement effect is not executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's sense of expectation for the big win to be spoiled. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. there is As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect that the player likes and performs the game. In addition, since it is configured to inform in advance the type of super reach announcement effect to be executed thereafter by the silhouette announcement effect, after knowing the type of announcement effect by the silhouette announcement effect, the background mode is maintained to silhouette. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), it corresponds to the changed background equivalent to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is made different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect may be made common. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the defined contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222ja, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, whether or not to execute the silhouette announcement effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only depending on whether or not the specific type of announcement effect is to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is varied depending on whether the game is a big win or not. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the silhouette announcement effect, so that the player can be made to more positively perform the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In this thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure fluctuation and the power is turned on again, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end of the special figure fluctuation BGM are reproduced. In order to match the timing, the end timing of the initial setting is determined when the power is turned on, and the playback start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM is adjusted (varied) according to the determination result. It is not something that can be done. For example, the reproduction start position may be adjusted so that the special figure variation BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special figure variation restarted when the power is turned on.

In this thirteenth control example, the number of times of the special figure variation that has been completed during the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the initial setting is completed, a pseudo variation display effect for the count number is Although the 3-symbol display device 81 is configured to execute sequentially, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the initial setting is completed, the result of the special figure fluctuation for the count number may be collectively notified by one pseudo fluctuation display effect. More specifically, for example, the display screen in the third symbol display device 81 is divided by at least the number of counts, and in each of the divided display areas, the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is displayed. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation display shown. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to shorten the performance time of the pseudo-variation performance for notifying the result of the special figure variation that has been completed during the execution of the initial setting, the variation of the normal third symbol can be made earlier. The display can be restored to an executable state.

In the thirteenth control example, the silhouette forewarning effect is developed into a specific type of reach effect (bubble forewarning super reach, fish school forewarning super reach, wind forewarning super reach, eruption forewarning super reach) in the variable display being executed. Although it is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying in advance, the object to be notified by the silhouette foretelling effect is not limited to this. For example, not only in the variable display being executed, but also in the case where there is a pending ball that develops into a targeted ready-to-win effect in the variable display being held, the silhouette advance notice effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, not only the variable display being executed at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed, but also the reserved ball at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed can be given a sense of expectation, so the game can be played. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the player for the big win for a longer period of time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this thirteenth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is restarted based on power-on, the period required for the initial setting of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the special figure fluctuation BGM is completed in the predicted period. , It was configured to set the start position of the special figure variation BGM when the power was turned on, but in addition to this, if the actual end timing of the initial settings deviated from the prediction result, the initial screen (display of the image at power on) Period) may be extended to match the end timing of the special figure variation BGM. By configuring in this way, the end timing of the special figure variation BGM and the end timing of the initial screen can be matched more reliably.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 to 625. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example described above, the display control device 114 controls the character object control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member, and the tilting device 310 for moving the movable member. It was configured to output instructions (commands). Then, at the start timing of the production period, the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is a command (a role object command) is included, and the display control device 114 is configured to determine whether or not it is time to execute the preparatory operation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example, the timing of outputting a command for executing a preparatory operation is defined in advance in the display data table, and when drawing contents are read out from the display data table, , and information indicating the output of the command is read out, thereby outputting the accessory command. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a timer means or the like for timing the output of the accessory command, so the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified.

Further, in the 14th control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is configured to be executable. This reach line suggesting effect is a effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the reach line will occur and the line of the reach line before the ready reach effect occurs. The occurrence of the ready-to-win performance increases the expectation of the big win, and the more the ready-to-win line increases, the higher the expectation of the big win. can be done.

First, with reference to FIGS. 616 and 617, the content of the reach line suggesting effect will be described. This reach line suggestion effect is a effect that can be executed during the high speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 616(a), when the reach line suggestion effect is executed, first, a character imitating a dinosaur is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 behind the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation. 810 is displayed, and on the right side of the character 810, a balloon image 810a resembling a balloon is displayed. In the balloon image 810a, a message "The more same numbers are arranged, the higher the expectations!" is displayed. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the advance notice effect in which the numbers are arranged is executed and that the degree of expectation changes depending on how the numbers are arranged. Note that, in this reach line suggestion effect, a effect is executed in which nine numbers are divided into three times and displayed inside the balloon image 810a. Out of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, two numbers are aligned vertically to give a level of expectation higher than that of the double-line ready-to-reach performance (a performance with a higher level of expectation than the single-line ready-to-reach performance). It is determined that it will develop into a production of or will be a big hit. In addition, by vertically aligning three of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, a triple-line ready-to-reach effect (a more anticipated effect than the double-line ready-to-reach effect) develops. or it will be a big hit. Furthermore, when three numbers are aligned horizontally, it is determined that a big win will occur. In this way, the reach line suggestive effect can suggest the reach line, etc. of the reach line suggestive effect that develops thereafter, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of the reach line suggestive effect. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, in the following drawings, description of an image (leftward dashed arrow) showing the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is omitted in order to make the content of the effect easier to understand.

FIG. 616(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of the nine numbers are displayed in the reach line suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 616(b), the first three numbers are displayed side by side above the balloon image 810a. FIG. 616(b) illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

FIG. 617(a) is a diagram showing a state in which all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are aligned vertically. As shown in FIG. 617(a), when the same numbers are arranged, an effect image 810b surrounding the same numbers is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the numbers are aligned and the number of aligned numbers. Incidentally, when two or more numbers are collected in the reach line suggesting effect, a transition is made to a dedicated background mode according to the number of collected numbers. Specifically, by aligning two identical numbers vertically, there is a "super sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestive effect is sea mode), which corresponds to the effect of expectations higher than the reach effect of the double line. ), or shifts to the "super mountain mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the mountain mode). In addition, by aligning three identical numbers vertically or horizontally, there is a "premium sea mode" that corresponds to the production of expectations higher than the reach production of the triple line (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion production is the sea mode). case) or “premium mountain mode” (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestive effect is mountain mode). In addition, in "Super Sea Mode" and "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability that it will develop into a single line reach effect that is less expected than a double line reach effect, but this background mode and the reach that occurs A pattern inconsistent with the type of is selected only in the case of a big win. Similarly, even if it does not develop to triple reach (develops to single reach or double reach) even though it has shifted to "premium sea mode" or "premium mountain mode", the jackpot is confirmed. In this way, the single reach production and double reach production, which usually have a relatively low jackpot expectation, will be confirmed when the jackpot occurs under specific conditions, so the reach after the background mode is promoted in the reach line suggestion production A game can be played by paying attention to the number of lines. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 617(b) shows a display mode in the case of shifting to the premium sea mode when three numbers are arranged vertically in the reach line suggestive effect executed in the sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 617(b), characters "premium sea mode" are displayed in the mode display area Dm1a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 617(b), when shifting to the "premium sea mode", three effective lines, the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the upward-sloping effective line L2, and the downward-sloping effective line L3, It develops into a triple reach production that takes reach. As described above, the triple reach production is a production that has a higher degree of expectation that it will be a big hit than the single reach production and the double reach production (the rate of selection in the case of failure is low), so the player's expectation for the big hit can be improved. In this way, the reach line suggesting effect is not only a effect suggesting the number of reach lines, but also a effect suggesting promotion of the rear mode (mode promotion effect).

<Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 618, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 618 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 618, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 14th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 584) only in that a mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is added. do. This mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is a data table referred to for selecting the effect mode (the number of the same numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect). Details of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620. FIG.

FIG. 619(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 619(a), the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka includes a win table 222ka1 for selecting whether or not the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect mode in the variation display of the big win. , and at least a failure table 222ka2 for selecting whether or not a mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) can be executed in the change display of failure, and a performance mode.

First, with reference to FIG. 619(b), the prescribed contents of the winning table 222ka1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 619(b), in the win table 222ka1, the value range of the effect counter 223h and the effect mode (the number of numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) are stored for each reach line number when the reach effect develops. aspect) is defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which single-line reach occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 149". are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 149", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) is not executed in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "none" is 150, so in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 75.4% (150/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the winning variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "150 to 192", and the effect mode corresponds to "discrete eye". It is stipulated with In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "150 to 192", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed vertically. A mode (separate stitches) that are not even arranged horizontally is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "random number" is 43, so the jackpot with single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of randomized mode promotion effects is about 21.6% (43/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "193, 194", and the effect mode is "Vertical 2 pieces". are defined in association with each other. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "193, 194", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertically double" is 2, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the jackpot variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is about 1% (2/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h "195" is defined in association with the effect mode of "vertical 3 pieces". ing. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "195", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same three numbers are aligned vertically. Aspects are displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical three" is 1, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the big hit variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with three vertically aligned is about 0.5% (1/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h "196 to 198" is associated with "horizontal three pieces" as the effect mode. stipulated. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "196 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed horizontally by 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3 pieces" is 4, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the big hit fluctuation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with the horizontal 3 pieces is about 2% (4/199).

Thus, in the ready-to-win effect in which single-line ready-to-win occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 3/4 (the mode promotion effect is difficult to execute). Therefore, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect that the double line or triple line ready-to-win effect with high expectation for big win will occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which the double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 99", and the mode promotion effect "no" is associated. stipulated. In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99" in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "none" is 100, so in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 50.2% (100/199).

In addition, in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined to be in the range of "100 to 119", and the effect mode is defined to correspond to "discrete eyes". In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 119" in the jackpot variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (reach-line suggesting effect) is executed and the odds are displayed. be. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, there are 20 counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "distribution", so a big win with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of randomized mode promotion effects is about 10% (20/199).

In addition, in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined to be in the range of "120 to 189" with the effect mode of "vertically double". In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "120 to 189", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 70, so a big hit with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with the vertical doubles is executed is about 35.2% (70/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is "190", and the effect mode is defined to correspond to "vertical 3 pieces". In other words, when the value of the performance lottery counter 223h is "190" in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win performance is generated, the mode promotion performance (ready-to-reach line suggesting performance) is executed, and the same three numbers are aligned vertically. Aspects are displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 1, so a big hit with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined to be in the range of "191 to 198" with "horizontal 3 pieces" as the effect mode. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "191 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is set to 3 horizontally. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 8, so a big hit with a double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the horizontal three-piece mode promotion effect is executed is about 4% (8/199).

In this way, in the winning variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is higher (approximately 25%→approximately 50%) than in the winning variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs. Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the vertical two effect mode is selected at a high rate, but the split mode is also selected at about 10%. Therefore, even when a random number is displayed, the player can expect an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the ready-to-win effect of the double line.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in the hit variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 49" and the mode promotion effect "none" is associated. stipulated. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "no" is 50, so in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 25.1% (50/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "50 to 69", and the effect mode is defined to correspond to "discrete eyes". In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "50 to 69" in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed and the odds are displayed. be. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, there are 20 counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "distribution", so a big win with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of randomized mode promotion effects is about 10% (20/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "70 to 99", and the effect mode is defined to correspond to "vertically double". In other words, in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "70 to 99", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 30, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is about 15.1% (30/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined to be in the range of "100 to 189" with the effect mode of "vertical three aligned". In other words, in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 189", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 90, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with three vertical lines is executed is about 45.2% (90/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "190 to 198" is defined in association with "horizontal 3 pieces" as the effect mode. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "190 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed horizontally by 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 9, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the horizontal three-piece mode promotion effect is executed is about 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is higher (approximately 75%) than in the hit change in which the ready-to-win effect of the single line or double line occurs. In addition, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the effect mode of vertical 3 is selected at a high rate, but the mode of split eyes and vertical 2 is also selected about 25%. Therefore, even when the mode promotion effect of split eyes or two vertical lines is displayed, the player can expect the ready-to-win effect of the triple line.

Next, with reference to FIG. 620, details of the losing table 222ka2 forming the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described. As described above, the loss table 222ka is a data table that is referred to by lottery for whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect mode in the case of execution in the loss fluctuation. Similar to the winning table 222ka, the winning table 222ka defines the correspondence relationship between the value range of the effect counter 223h and the effect mode for each line number of reach.

As shown in FIG. 620, for the non-reach variable display effect that does not generate reach, the mode promotion effect "none" is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223h. there is Therefore, the mode promotion effect is not executed in the variable effect in which reach does not occur.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the single-line ready-to-win effect, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 155" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The rendering mode of "separate eyes" is defined in association with the range of "156 to 198". That is, in the single line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the "discrete eye" mode is performed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). Promotion production is executed. In other words, regardless of whether the game is a win or a loss, the rate of selecting the "random eye" is the same (21.6%). In addition, the percentage of the selected pattern (approximately 3.5%) of the fixed hit pattern (a production pattern that develops into a single reach with 2 or 3 vertical lines, or a production pattern with 3 horizontal lines) is selected. The execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is lower in the reach effect of the single line. In other words, when the production mode of "unbalanced eyes" is set and develops into a single-line reach production, it becomes difficult to guess the degree of expectation for a big hit from the mode promotion production mode, so the result of the ready-to-win production You can keep an eye on it until the end. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the double line ready-to-win effect, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 108" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The range of "109 to 128" is defined in association with the production mode of "separate eyes", and the range of "129 to 198" is defined in association with the production mode of "double vertical". It is That is, in the double line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 54.8% (109/199), and the mode promotion effect of "discrete eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). is executed, and the effect mode of "vertically aligned two" is executed at a rate of about 35.2% (70/199). That is, in the double-line ready-to-win effect, the selection ratios of "separate eyes" and "vertical double alignment" are common for both winning and losing. Therefore, in the case where the mode promotion effect of “separate eyes” or “vertical two pieces” is executed and develops into a double-line ready-to-reach effect, it is difficult to guess the degree of expectation for a big hit from the aspect of the mode promotion effect itself. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the contents of the suggestion in the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the ready-to-win effect of the triple line, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 58" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The range of "59 to 78" is defined in correspondence with the production mode of "separate eyes", and the range of "79 to 108" is defined in association with the production mode of "vertical double". , and the effect mode of "vertical three" is defined in association with the range of "109 to 198". That is, in the triple line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 29.6% (59/199), and the mode promotion effect of "discrete eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). is executed, and at a rate of about 15.1% (30/199), the production mode of "Vertical 2" is executed, and at a rate of about 45.2% (90/199), "Vertical 3" A presentation mode is executed. In other words, regardless of whether it is a win or a loss, the ratio of selecting each of the "discrete eyes", "vertical double alignment", and "vertical triple alignment" is common. Therefore, when the mode promotion effect of "separate eyes", "vertical double alignment", and "vertical triple alignment" is executed and develops into a triple line ready-to-reach effect, the mode promotion effect itself is a jackpot. Since it becomes difficult to guess the degree of expectation, the game can be played while paying more attention to the contents of the suggestion in the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this way, in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect is configured to be able to suggest the effect mode (reach line of the reach effect) to be executed in the second half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in the reach production, the higher the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so the result of the mode promotion production is calculated in the expectation that the production mode will suggest more reach lines. can be confirmed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the specified contents of the display data table in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round involving preparation driving of a character in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 621, the display data table in the fourteenth control example defines commands to be output to other control devices (for example, the character object control device 229) in addition to drawing contents. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 621, a preparation drive command is defined as a role item command for the end of the drawing content stored at the address “00FAH”. Therefore, when the value of the pointer 233f, which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds), becomes the pointer value corresponding to the address "00FAH", the address " 00FAH”, a preparation drive command is read out. When the preparation drive command is read out, the display control device 114 outputs the preparation drive command to the accessory control device 229 . By configuring in this way, the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed together, so the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 622 and 623, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 622, the variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the fourteenth control example will be described. The variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the fourteenth control example is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the twelfth control example (and the first control example). Similar to the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the example (and the first control example), this is a process for determining the aspect of the variable display effect according to the variation type (variation time) notified by the variation pattern.

In each of the processes Z2501 to Z2513 of the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the 14th control example, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the first control example) The same processing as each of Z2501 to Z2509 is executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the fourteenth control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, next, the possibility of execution of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) and the effect mode are selected by lottery. A mode promotion effect lottery process is executed (Z2571), and the process proceeds to Z2504. Details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing mode promotion effect lottery processing (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined to be a jackpot variation pattern (Z2771: Yes) Next, the win table 222ka1 (see FIG. 619(b)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is read out (Z2772), and the process proceeds to Z2774. On the other hand, in the process of Z2771, when it is determined that it is not a big hit variation pattern (that is, it is a deviation variation pattern) (Z2771: No), the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is out of the table 222ka2 (see FIG. 620) ) is read out (Z2773), and the process proceeds to Z2774. In the process of Z2774, from the table read out by the process of Z2772 or Z2773, the effect mode (the number of reach lines) set for the current variation pattern and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223h are determined. (Z2774) to terminate this process.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 623), depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect, whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed, and effect Aspects can be suitably selected by lottery.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the fourteenth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 624, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in the 14th control example will be described. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process that is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the twelfth control example (and the first control example). ), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third pattern display device 81 This is a process for specifically specifying the .

Of the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in the 14th control example, the processes of Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 respectively correspond to the display setting process (FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the first control example). Reference), Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 are executed. In addition, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in the fourteenth control example, when the process of Z4305 is completed, next, drawing content acquisition processing for acquiring the drawing content for one frame from the content of the display data table is performed. is executed (Z4331), and the process moves to Z4307. Details of this drawing content acquisition processing (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing drawing content acquisition processing (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether or not the specified content indicating the command for the role item is included in the acquired drawing content (Z4352), and if it is determined that the content indicating the command for the role item has been acquired (Z4352: Yes) , the command for the acquired content is set so as to be output to the role product control device 229 (Z4353), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z4352, if it is determined that the content indicating the accessory command is not acquired from the display data table (Z4352: No), the process of Z4353 is skipped and the present process ends.

By executing this drawing content acquisition processing (see FIG. 625), the control processing for acquiring the drawing content and the processing for outputting a command can be performed together, so that the control processing can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f provided to acquire the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example is configured to be able to execute the mode promotion effect as one of the entertainment effects. In this mode promotion effect, before the ready-to-win effect occurs, the effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur, the number of lines of the reach line, etc., and the actual ready-to-win effect is performed. It is possible to improve the expectation for a big win before the is executed.

Further, in the 14th control example, a command output instruction to the character object control device 229 is included in the defined contents of the display data table that defines the drawing contents in various effects for each frame. When the drawing content is acquired from the display data table, if the command seed and the force instruction are acquired, the display control device 114 outputs the command together with the acquisition of the drawing content. . By configuring in this way, control processing of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f provided to acquire the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<A1 embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to Figures 626 to 703, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as the A1 embodiment. 626 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in Embodiment A1, FIG. 627 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 626, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 which is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and has and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 626). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 627) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 629) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 626), and the front frame uses the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an axis for opening and closing. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 626), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 637). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 627) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 626).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 627) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always urged rightward, and by sliding it leftward against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 627, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the exit 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. 626). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 626) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 627, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 626). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 629) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 627) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 627) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 (37A, 37B) are provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 629), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. will be In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) determines whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), It is configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 or not. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 627, in the present embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when referring to both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the term "first ball entrance 64" will simply be used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state, the latent probability state, or the normal state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable state. It is indicated by the state, whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, the missing pattern, or the small winning pattern is indicated by the lighting state, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state. At the same time, the 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R potential jackpot, a 7R potential jackpot, and a 15R potential jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are shifted to (set), and the predetermined fluctuation It is a jackpot that is set between the number of times (for example, 100 times), and "2R latent probability jackpot" is a high probability state of special symbols after the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds, and a low probability state of normal symbols. It is a jackpot that is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after shifting to (setting) a certain latent state. In addition, the "7R potential jackpot" is a jackpot set for a predetermined number of fluctuations in the potential state after the maximum number of rounds hits 7 rounds, and the "15R potential jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds. is a jackpot in which the latent state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after 15 rounds of jackpot.

In addition, "special symbol high probability state" is a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, in other words, a game state that easily shifts to a special game state. The "normal symbol high probability state" is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a game state in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which "high probability state of normal design" is set not only increases the probability of winning the normal design (second design), but also lower first entrance 64b2. As the time during which the electric accessary 64a associated with is released, a longer time is set than in the game state (potential state, normal state) in which the "normal symbol low probability state" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win prizes. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 during the variable probability state or the time saving state, or in addition to changing the opening time, once A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 64a is opened by winning, compared to during the normal state. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and one hit. At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with that in the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger (opportunity) to display the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided, which is composed of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 629) to display three patterns, for example, top, middle and bottom. columns are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 629). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

In this way, the decorative third pattern is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first pattern (special pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, and the dynamic display of the third pattern is performed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified ( For example, even if the processing load of the main controller 110 is reduced by a blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated in units of 0.1 seconds, the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 For example, by variably setting the target display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (the second Effect mode using 3 symbols) can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 .

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. It performs a variable display that makes it possible. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is displayed. is activated for a predetermined time (activated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (dynamic display period) is higher than the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of the normal symbol as the game state. set to be shorter. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than in the low probability state of the normal symbols. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the variable probability state, it can be set as a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state and when the time saving state is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The same display mode is set as the background mode to be displayed in , making it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the current game situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. is configured to set the display mode of Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the current game state by the operation state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the variable probability state, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set shorter than during the normal state during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the probability may be constant regardless of the game state. Also, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessary 64a for one hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured to allow some of the balls that flow down the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, the through gate 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be installed below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol reservation lamp may not be lit up.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A1 embodiment will be briefly described. In the present A1 embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special design, and low probability state of normal design), variable state (high probability state of special design, and low probability state of normal design), potential state Three game states (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols) are provided. And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent state is set, the variation time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, and another game state is set. By defining the period to be shorter than when it is set, the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the present A1 embodiment, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the second variable The second specific prize winning port 65ab of the prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (0.6 seconds×2 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if the player does not win the jackpot, many opportunities are given to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 65ab to win the prize ball. Better than lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the result of the losing lottery in which the second specific prize winning opening 65ab is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In the lottery for the second special pattern, the second special prize winning port 65ab is opened when a small win is achieved, thereby continuing to increase the number of prize balls in a latent state in which the variation time of the second special pattern is short. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of the latent definite state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

Furthermore, in the present A1 embodiment, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will indicate the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during the execution of the big win or the small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the win or the small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 627, various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of balls shot toward the game area in the present A1 embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 627, the game board 13 of the present embodiment has a first area, which is a game area on the left side of the variable display unit 80, by means of the variable display unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. (hereinafter referred to as a left area) and a second area (hereinafter referred to as a right area) which is a game area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 .

In this embodiment, the shot ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate). A ball is fired with a moderate firing intensity. Therefore, the shot ball finally flows back through the shooting channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball flowing backwards passes through the start position of the launch channel (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 627) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 626). (not shown) flows down and is circulated to the top plate 17 . With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball with a desired launch intensity, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. can be suppressed from interfering with

Next, when the amount of operation (amount of rotation) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (from 81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the right side area.

In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that it is possible to change the region where the ball flows down based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the present A1 embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left area. A game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed instead of a game performed by adjustment (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can keep the operating handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees) while the game state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the present A1 embodiment, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols: low probability state of normal symbols), a variable state (high probability state of special symbols: high probability state of normal symbols ), latent state (high probability state of special symbols: low probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set. In addition, the first privilege game (jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result of the special pattern wins the jackpot, and the second privilege game (small win) that is executed when the lottery result of the special pattern wins the small win game) and are configured to be set.

Among them, when the normal state and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a left-hand hitting game in which the ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13. The game method is guided to the player by using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and when the latent state is set, the player is made to play the right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13. As described above, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the game method to the player. In addition, during the big win game state or the small win game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before winning the winning.

As a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only when the game method is switched, after switching It may be configured to display the game method. Also, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, the game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is set as the normal game, and when the game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured such that the game method is always displayed as guidance, and the guidance display is not performed when a left-handed game is to be played.

As in the present embodiment, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the game methods. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the game method to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the game method may be notified to the player by not displaying a specific display mode, or may be notified to the player using sound or a lamp.

A through gate 67 and a general prize winning opening 63 are arranged in the left area of the game board 13 . An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can be entered. A lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the electric accessory 64a wins the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) to hit the ball, to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) to hit the ball into the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the present A1 embodiment, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the state where it is not done), the lottery of special figure 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 serves as a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

Also, in the state where the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery cannot be newly executed (the variation of the special figure 1 has already been executed, or the jackpot game or small hit game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, storage means for storing (holding) the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (4). (holding means).

Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, only the first special symbol is provided with storage means (holding means) for storing (holding) the right to which the ball enters.

100% of the balls flowing down the left area (first area) in a left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% (8 out of 100 balls) of the balls launched enter the upper first area. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so that the ball can enter the ball opening 64b1. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (second state) in which the game ball cannot pass, the number of balls entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and the electric accessory 64a The ball flow path is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 in the open state (first state) through which game balls can pass. That is, the ball is difficult to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be

As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. It is constructed so that four prize balls are paid out to the player each time one ball is entered. The upper first ball entrance 64b1 is configured so that a ball can be entered at all times. In this embodiment, the same number (four) of prize balls is given when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. However, without being limited to this, a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 650, and a second variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area (second area) of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The second ball entrance 640 is configured such that a game ball can always enter, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. A sorting device 700 is provided above the second ball entrance 640 . The sorting device 700 has a flow path formed by a plurality of nails or the like so that 100% of the game balls that have flowed down the right side area (second area) of the game board can be received by the receiving portion. When the game ball is received by the receiving section, the sorting device 700 rotates leftward by the weight of the game ball and guides the game ball to the second ball inlet 640 . Furthermore, when the game ball that has flowed down next is received by the accommodation part, this time the weight of the game ball rotates to the right and guides the game ball to the second variable winning device 65 side. Therefore, the sorting device 700 sorts in order such that 50% of the balls flowing down the right side area of the game board enter the second ball entrance 640 and 50% flow down toward the second variable winning device 65. .

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the latent state (RUSH), the player is shown the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state. As described above, by providing the sorting device 700 in the right area of the game board 13, the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable winning device 65 are alternately played without missing game balls that have flowed down during the latent state. can be made to enter the ball. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to calculate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state.

In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (fluctuation time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until the lottery result is displayed. , a long (10 minutes) variable time is set, and a short variable time (1 second) is set when the latent state is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery for the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is low. it gets really bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and as described above, the distribution device 700 at a rate of about 50% Even if the ball launched in the right-handed game is entered into the second ball entrance 640, the next launched ball is distributed to the second variable winning device 65 side, so the number of balls may increase. None.

Furthermore, when the variable probability state is set as the game state, it becomes a high-probability state of normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a becomes a state where it is easy to open. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols for opening the electric accessary 64a, is provided only in the left area, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 more easily than in the normal state. It is configured to make the player play a left-handed game in order to enter the ball into the ball.

On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the present A1 embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so as to win a small hit (winning probability of about 98%). When winning a small prize, the second specific prize winning port 65ab of the second variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small prize game, and the ball enters the second specific prize winning port 65ab. It is constructed so that 15 prize balls are given to one ball.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, the player continues to execute the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small hit, a small win game, can be executed consecutively.

As shown in FIG. 627, a first variable winning device 650 is arranged in the upper right part of the game area. The first variable prize winning device 650 operates to open the rotating door 650f toward the front side and open the first specific prize winning port 650a so that a ball can win a prize when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols. It is what is done. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained is displayed even when a jackpot is won during the latent state, as will be described in detail later. The first variable prize winning device 650 is configured to allow a ball hit to the right during a jackpot game to enter the first specific prize winning port 650a without missing a ball. That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate the number of won prize balls without any difference, so that it is possible to prevent the problem that the number of prize balls and the actual number of prize balls are different.

When the ball enters the above-described first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. ) is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 629) draws a jackpot due to the turn-on of the first entrance switch, and the display corresponding to the drawing result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. be

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, main control device 110 (see FIG. 629) draws a large winning lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 receives one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings for paying out prize balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are set to be the same (both four), and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (1) is different, but a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball is hit may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, and the number of prize balls in the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter is set. When the ball is in the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is increased, and the lower first ball entry becomes easier when a specific game state (probability variable state) is set. Even if balls enter the opening 64b2 frequently, the player may not receive an excessive number of prize balls. The number of prize balls of 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability variable state) is set, the player may be provided with a large privilege.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same number (for example, both are 5). may be configured as a single unit).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. This electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state in which game balls cannot enter), and the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2. It is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of normal symbols) triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

As described above, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the variable display of the second symbol. , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 than during the normal state.

In addition, as described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which the ball is likely to enter according to the set game state, A state (second state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball can be set. In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery of winning the jackpot with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. , When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when the jackpot is won is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment instructs the player to select the method of shooting the ball (game method) as “left-handed (left-handed game)” or “right-handed” according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . It can be changed to "beating (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

In addition, in the “left-handed game (left-handed game)”, the launched game ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 and the general prize winning opening 63 . On the other hand, in the "right-handed game (right-handed game)", the shot game ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640, the first variable winning device 650, and the second variable winning device 65. ing.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 626).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the out opening 66 as shown in the figure. It is guided to the ball ejection path that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the first lower ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in the present A1 embodiment, the game area is configured to have one out port 66, but a configuration other than this may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally concentrating the balls shot into the game area at one location (the location where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices that constitute the game area. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the left side area and an out port dedicated to the ball that has flowed down the right side area. Also, when a plurality of outlets are provided, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player that the ball entrance is the outlet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a situation in which no privilege is granted even though the ball enters the ball entrance (actually the exit) provided in the game area. be able to.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 628, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114, payout controller 111 and launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 629). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 629) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 629, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 629 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see S2015 in FIG. 674) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 672) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected as a shaft. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 628). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 628) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 630, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 630 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 630(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 630(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of rear patterns imitating various animals with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 630(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this embodiment) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (not shown). ). A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball is entered. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 . In this embodiment, the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of ball entries is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be reserved, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 630(b), an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 630(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, three third symbols in a simple manner, each consisting of only one of the numerals "1" to "9", are varied and displayed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically in the normal state and the variable state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the beginning of the game, and there is almost no opportunity for the lottery for the second special symbol to be executed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds) is called the main variation, and in each game state The variable display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called a secondary variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols imitating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the respective reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the number of ball entries into the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower second ball entry port 64b2 is configured to be suspended up to four times. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In this embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is not suspended, but the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 may be suspended. Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, referring to FIG. 631, the structure of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f of the second variable winning device 65 in the present A1 embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 631(a) is a front perspective view of the second variable prize winning device 65 in a closed state (first state) in which the opening/closing door 65f cannot enter the second specific prize winning port 65ab. FIG. 631(b) is a front perspective view of the second variable winning device 65 in a state (second state) in which the opening/closing door 65f is open so that a game ball can enter the second specific winning port 65ab. .

As shown in FIG. 631(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f is provided with projections 65fa to 65fc for preventing game balls from flowing down. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f is prevented from flowing down by the projections 65fa-65fc, it flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f along the outer periphery of the projections 65fa-65fc. In other words, the flow path f is formed on the opening/closing door 65f by the protrusions 65fa to 65fc. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the liquid to completely flow down on the opening/closing door 65f compared to the case where the projections 65fa to 65fc do not have the projections 65fa to 65fc.

In this embodiment, each convex portion 65fa to 65fc is provided on the open/close door 65f, and the game ball is configured to bypass each convex portion 65fa to 65fc, and the required time when the game ball passes through the flow path f However, it is not limited to this, and for example, an elastic member or the like may be used, or the surface of the opening/closing door 65f may be uneven. Also, it may be configured so that the passage can be passed straight and the required time is shortened. By configuring in this way, various playability can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 631(b), the second variable winning device 65 in a state where the opening/closing door 65f is opened will be described. FIG. 631(b) is a front perspective view of the second variable prize winning device 65 in a state in which the opening/closing door 65f is opened so that the game ball can enter the second specific prize winning port 65ab. The opening/closing door 65f of the second variable prize winning device 65 is designed to perform an opening operation of 0.6 seconds twice after a closing period of 0.4 seconds when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. It is configured. When the opening/closing door 65f is opened, a ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 65b (second specific winning opening 65ab) provided in the second variable winning device 65.

The opening/closing door 65f of the second variable prize winning device 65 is opened when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, as described above. Details will be described later, but the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second. Since game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the next game ball reaches the sorting member 700 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 . Then, it takes about 0.4 seconds for the game ball to reach the second variable winning device 65 from that point. Therefore, it takes about 1 second for the next game ball to reach the second variable prize winning device 65. Therefore, when a small prize is won after the variable time has passed, the open/close door 65f is opened and the right specific prize winning port is opened. It is configured to enter the ball at 65a. In other words, since the ball hit to the right during the latent probability state almost certainly enters the right specific winning hole 65a, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained and the number of actually obtained prize balls are calculated without difference. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can grasp the specific number of expected prize balls, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, it also leads to the goal of ensuring that the expected privilege is obtained, and the desire to continue playing the game can be enhanced.

In addition, if the ball cannot enter the right specific winning hole 65a in the first opening operation due to a malfunction of the opening/closing door 65f or the sorting device 700, the ball flows down the flow path f and enters the left specific winning hole 65b. Ball enters. Since the time required for the game ball to flow down the flow path f is 0.4 seconds, it is almost certain that the ball will enter the left specific winning hole 65b when the second opening operation is executed. It becomes possible. Thus, by providing two specific winning holes, it is possible to win game balls without missing them, and it is possible to calculate the number of expected winning balls and the actual number of winning winning balls without any difference. can. In the present embodiment, two specific winning holes are provided in order to allow game balls to enter the specific winning holes without missing a game ball, but the number of specific winning holes is not limited to this, and may be one or three or more specific winning holes. may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, the game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the present A1 embodiment will be described. FIG. 632 is a schematic diagram schematically showing how to shift from one game state to another game state with respect to the three types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to be in a game state divided into three stages (three types), and a normal state (low probability state of special symbols: normal symbol state) which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. low probability state), a variable state that is advantageous for the player (high probability state of special symbols: high probability state of normal symbols), and a potential state that is the most advantageous gaming state for the player (special symbols High probability state: It is composed of three stages of game states with high probability state of normal symbols).

First, a description will be given of how to transition to the game state when staying in the normal state. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122 at the start of business of the hall, etc., the normal state (low probability state of special symbols: low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state. The normal state is a low-probability state of special symbols in which the total number of random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, which is a jackpot of special symbols, is set to be small, and a second winning random number counter, which is a winning of normal symbols. It is a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols in which the total number of values of C4 is set to be small is set.

In the normal state, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol is 8 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the maximum, although the details will be described later. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a longer variation time (dynamic display period) of 10 minutes is set compared to the variation time (dynamic display period) for the first special symbol. And as described above, when the game ball is shot toward the upper first ball entrance 64b1 (left-handed game), about 8% (8 balls out of 100 balls) enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. Since it is configured to enter the ball, when the player shoots 250 rental balls for 1000 yen toward the upper first ball entrance 64b1, about 20 balls enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. Therefore, 20 lotteries for 1000 yen can be executed in about 160 seconds (8 seconds×20 times) at the shortest. Since the jackpot is won once in 240 times, the game can be executed in the shortest about 1920 seconds (8 seconds×240 times) to execute the lottery of the first special symbol 240 times. , efficient play is possible.

On the other hand, when the game ball is launched toward the second ball entrance 640 (right-handed game), the sorting device 700 makes it so that one out of two balls (50%) enters the second ball entrance 640. Although it is configured, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes is set for the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. For this reason, even if a game ball for 1000 yen (250 balls) is launched and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed 125 times, it will take about 1250 minutes (20 hours and 50 minutes) at the shortest. The opening hours of the hall will end in the middle of. Furthermore, since the number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second ball hole 640 is set to 1, even if 250 balls are hit, only 125 prize balls can be obtained, and the number of balls in possession does not increase. do not have.

Also, as described above, the winning probability of the jackpot in the normal state is set to about 1 in 240 times. If the lottery for the second special symbol is executed 240 times in the normal state, it will take about 2400 minutes (40 hours) at the shortest, resulting in an inefficient game method.

Therefore, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is advantageous for the player to execute the left-handed game aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 because the game can be played efficiently. It becomes a game method. In addition, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, a small hit is not drawn. state.

In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbols. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 640(a). As shown in YZ1 in FIG. 632, when the jackpot is determined in the lottery of the first special symbols from the normal game state ST1 (normal state), the game state is changed to the jackpot A determined at a rate of 32%. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation gaming state) shown in YZ2.

In addition, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, if one of the big wins B to D determined at a rate of 68% in total, after the big win ends, the to the latent probability variable gaming state ST3 (latent probability state (RUSH)) shown in YZ3. Although the details will be described later, in the latent state, a small winning lottery is made at a rate of about 98%, which is the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring that the game state is shifted to the latent state.

In the normal state, as described above, it is normal to play a game aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b by hitting left. There is a risk of executing a game that is unfair. In this pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent the normal game method from being executed and the irregular game method to be executed, the jackpots E to G won in the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal state are After the jackpot game is over, it is configured to shift to the variable probability state at a rate of 100% in total. In this way, in the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, only the jackpot type that shifts only to the variable probability state that the player does not desire is provided, thereby preventing the irregular game method from being executed. Since the demerit of the game can be increased, it is possible to prevent fraud such as execution of an irregular game method.

Also, when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state and a ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 is detected, an error notification indicating an abnormality in the game method is executed to the player. This error notification may be presented to the player in a visually recognizable display mode on the third symbol display device 81, or may be presented to the player by sound from a speaker (not shown). In this way, by giving an error notification, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand guidance to the player who has executed the wrong game method, and to prompt him/her to execute the correct game method.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot type that is won in the normal game state, there is no jackpot type that does not change the game state (that is, from the normal state to the normal state), but not limited to this, the game state does not change. You can set a jackpot. However, if a jackpot type in which the game state does not shift from the normal state is provided, the fact that the game state has not shifted after the jackpot is ended is determined by the opening and closing frequency of the electric accessory 64a, and the player can play the game early. There is a risk of quitting. In order to prevent this possibility, when a jackpot type in which the game state does not shift is provided, the electric accessory 64a may not be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game early.

Next, the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state) shown in YZ2 of FIG. 632 will be described. The probability variable state is a game state set after the end of the jackpot game when either the jackpot A in the lottery of the first special symbol or the jackpot E to G in the lottery of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. is. Specifically, it is a high probability state of special symbols in which the total number of random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, which is a jackpot of special symbols, is set more than when the probability is low. The total number of values of the second per random number counter C4 is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols set more than the low probability is set.

At the time of the variable probability state, the game is executed aiming at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (left-handed game). As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is a starting port for executing the lottery of the first special symbol, and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol during the variable probability state is 12 seconds. is set. On the other hand, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, in order to execute the lottery of the first special symbol in the same way as in normal times, it is possible to execute the left-handed game in a short time, so that the number of lotteries of special symbols can be increased in a short time. Hitting game is the basic game method.

In addition, in the variable probability state, the total number of values of the first random number counter that is a special symbol jackpot compared to the normal state is set more than the total number of values that are the jackpot of the first random number counter at normal times. Since the probability of winning a special symbol is increased, the game state is advantageous compared to the normal state, but compared to the latent state, there is no winning of prize balls due to small hits, so the game state is disadvantageous. become. In the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is lost continuously over the lottery of special symbols of the specified number of times (100 times) after becoming a variable probability state, YZ1 in FIG. 632 to the normal game state ST1 shown in .

Then, as shown in YZ2 of FIG. 632, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the variable probability gaming state ST2 (variable probability state), the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type at a rate of 32%. After the jackpot game (privilege game) of the jackpot A is finished, the probability variable state is configured to loop again. In addition, when winning jackpots B to D determined at a rate of 68% in total, after the jackpot game (privilege game) ends, the state shifts to the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state) shown in YZ3 in FIG. .

In addition, as described above, the left-handed game is the basic game method even during the variable probability state, but as in the normal state, the player can perform an irregular game method such as playing the right-handed game. In order to prevent this, the jackpots E to G won by lottery of the second special symbols in the variable probability state are configured so that the variable probability state is looped after the jackpot game (privilege game) ends. In this way, by setting a jackpot that does not shift to the latent state desired by the player and enlarging the demerit, it is possible to prevent fraud such as irregular hitting by the player.

Next, the latent probability variable gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) shown in YZ3 of FIG. 632 will be described. The latent probability variable gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) is the first special when winning one of the jackpots B to D that is elected at a rate of 68% in total in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state, or the first special in the probability variable state. This is a game state to be shifted to when one of the jackpots B to D is won at a rate of 68% in total in the lottery of symbols. Specifically, it is a high probability state of special symbols in which the total number of random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, which is a jackpot of special symbols, is set more than when the probability is low. The total number of values of the second per random number counter C4 is a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols set to be less than the high probability time is set.

During the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol is set as short as 1 second. On the other hand, since the winning variation of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed more efficiently. Further, as described above, the sorting device 700 is configured so that one out of every two balls enters the second ball entrance 640 . That is, when 250 game balls are hit, 125 balls enter the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed with the entry of the balls as a trigger, can be executed in 125 seconds. Therefore, the game can be executed efficiently. Therefore, during the latent state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting. In addition, in the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state), when it is lost continuously over the specified number of times (100 times) of special symbol lotteries mainly after entering the latent probability state, the game state is changed to another game state. and migrate.

Specifically, as shown in YZ3 in FIG. 632, if the latent state is set and the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (100 times) is continuously lost, after the specified number of times has passed, the normal It shifts to game state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state where the game is played with the right hand (the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed) and the jackpot is won, basically after the big win (specified during the big win) If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 650a), the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the potential probability state, by continuing to win the jackpot before losing 100 consecutive times, an advantageous probability probability state and a big win in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained are repeated. The game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Although the details will be described later, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed in the latent state (high probability state for special symbols), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. In the 1/80 jackpot lottery, the probability of losing 100 times in a row is about 18% (79/80 to the 100th power), so the probability of winning the jackpot within 100 times in the latent state is about 82%. Therefore, once it enters the latent definite state, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the big win and the latent definite state loop at about 82%.

In addition, since it is normal to play the game with the right hand in the latent state, basically the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 and the first special symbol is displayed. The lottery is not executed, but if the player makes a mistake in the launching direction, or if the state shifts to the latent state while the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains in the normal state, etc., the latent state. Even if it is, there is a possibility that the first special symbol lottery will be executed. However, even when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the latent definite state is set again after the jackpot. In this way, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, even after the end of the jackpot won in the lottery of the main special game, the latent state is set again before moving to the latent state. To reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous variable probability state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the shift to the latent probability state and the jackpot is achieved by the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has been accumulated. is.

In addition, immediately after the transition to the latent state, the lottery of the first special pattern that has been reserved is performed and becomes a big hit, and if it shifts to the variable state, it will be disadvantageous without benefiting from the latent state. Since it falls into a state, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered. On the other hand, in the present A1 embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit in an advantageous latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is set to loop after the big hit. As a result, even if a big win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the advantageous latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is set again at a rate of 100%. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation for playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 633, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 633 is a timing chart showing the flow of display of the number of remaining probability variations and the number of remaining winning balls executed corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the status of the special figure variation. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is capable of executing the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation).

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state shown by YZ1 in FIG. When one of the winning jackpots B to D is won and the jackpot game (privilege game) is executed, after the jackpot game (privilege game) is completed, the latent state (special symbol high probability, normal pattern low probability state). In the latent state, as described above, the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short (1 second), and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more. It becomes an easy period (special figure 2 game advantageous period).

In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbols, the odds of winning are about 98%, so it is the most advantageous condition for the player to obtain many benefits. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of remaining probability changes is indicated, and the timing of the end of the latent probability state is easy to understand. There was a problem that it was difficult to understand.

To solve this problem, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts to the latent certainty state, information indicating the privilege that can be obtained during the latent certainty state is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easier to understand. Specifically, at the ending of the jackpot that shifts to the probability state, a process of setting the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the probability state set this time is executed (see S4615 in FIG. 685). Then, in the third guide display area Dm5 of the third pattern display device 81, the value is displayed as information that can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 634(a)).

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is configured so that a small hit is won at a rate of about 98%. And since it is set so that about 2% will be a big hit, the special symbols will not come off during the latent certainty state. In addition, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol in the latent state is set to 1 second, and the next game ball from the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is the second variable winning device The time required to reach 65 is also set to about 1 second. That is, at the timing when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the opening/closing door 65f of the second variable prize winning device 65 is in an open state in which the ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65ab, the game ball is hit to the right and flows down. reaches the second variable prize winning device 65, it is possible to win the game ball to the second specific prize winning port 65ab without missing it.

Also, the second variable prize winning device 65 is provided with two prize winning ports (a right specific prize winning port 65a and a left specific prize winning port 65b). The game ball that has flowed down is configured to first enter the right specific winning hole 65a, but there is a possibility that it cannot enter the right specific winning hole 65a due to a malfunction of the sorting device 700 or ball clogging.

In this way, in order to prevent a difference in the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained due to a malfunction or the like, if there is no winning in the first opening operation (0.6 seconds), After a closing period of 0.4 seconds, an opening operation (0.6 seconds) is set for the opening/closing door 65f so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning hole 65ab. During the closing period of 0.4 seconds, the game ball flows down the flow path f of the second variable prize winning device 65, and the game ball enters the left specific prize winning port 65b during the second opening operation. Configure. In other words, by providing two specific winning openings (the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 65b), it is possible to win the second specific winning opening 65ab almost without failing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state without any difference, and it is possible to prevent erroneous information from being presented to the player.

In this embodiment, when the latent state is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times. The number of prize balls for a small hit is stipulated to be 15. If all of the prescribed number of times are small hits, 1500 prize balls (100 times×15 balls) are expected at least. In addition, since one prize ball can be obtained each time the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a total of 100 balls can be obtained as prize balls. In other words, the expected number of winning balls set here is the number of prize balls per small hit multiplied by the maximum number of times the latent state has continued (15 balls x 100 times), Since the number (1500 + 100) is set by adding the number of prize balls (100 balls) for entering the ball, in this embodiment, when shifting to the latent state, it is for indicating the privilege information to be obtained. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the acquisition point "1600pt".

Here, with reference to FIG. 634(a), the display screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot that shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 634(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot that shifts to the latent certainty state. As shown in FIG. 634(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot that shifts to the latent state, the comment "RUSH rush!!" It is displayed in the display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 displayed during the variable probability state or the latent probability state is displayed. Since this character 811 is set not to be displayed when the game state is the normal state, by displaying this character 811, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the game state has changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand.

Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, characters of "Right shot" indicating the game method in the latent state are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that a right-handed game aiming at the right side area (second area) of the game board will be performed when the potential state is set. In addition, in this embodiment, since the second variable winning device 65 that is opened during the small winning game is arranged in the right side area (second area) of the game board, during the latent state, the right side area of the game board A right-handed game aiming at (second area) is an advantageous game method for the player.

Then, in the second guide display area Dm4, the characters "remaining 100 G" are displayed, and the remaining specified number of times (100 times) of the special figure lottery in the latent state is displayed. This prescribed number of times is subtracted each time a special drawing is executed during the latent state, and when the number of lotteries reaches the prescribed number of times, "remaining 0G" is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp how long the latent state will last, and can continue the game with peace of mind.

In addition, as described above, the prescribed number of times displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 is displayed after being subtracted each time the lottery for the special figure is executed. is not incremented or decremented, but the number of remaining display times may be decremented at another timing. Moreover, it may be configured such that it is not only subtracted, but is added at a predetermined trigger. By constructing in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that the remaining number of times will increase, and play the game while having a thrilling feeling that the remaining number of times will decrease at the same time. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 display area Dm1 and a special figure 2 display area Dm2 are formed, and the lottery results of the respective special symbols are displayed. According to the example of FIG. 634 (a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, "777" corresponding to the lottery result of this big hit is displayed, and this time the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. is shown to the player. Furthermore, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has not been changed since the power is turned on is displayed. By displaying in this manner, the past fluctuation history can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and a transparent game can be provided.

Further, in the third guide display area Dm5, characters "1600 remaining expected acquisition points" are displayed to indicate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be acquired in the current latent state game. 1600pt set here is the specified number of times of the latent state in this embodiment, which is 100, which is the specified number of times of the latent state for winning balls (100 balls) for entering the second ball entrance 640. It is set based on the value (1600 balls) obtained by adding the prize balls (1500 balls) for the small hits. As a result, the number of winning balls that can be expected in the current latent state can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can have a sense of anticipation for the future game. Although details will be described later, the remaining number of expected winning prize balls displayed in the third guidance display area Dm5 is subtracted when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery.

Returning to FIG. 633, the description continues. After the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to the probability state, and when the variation of the special figure is executed, the number of remaining probability changes is displayed with the number of remaining acquisition balls subtracted each time a small hit is won (Fig. 633 (b) reference). Here, the value of the number of remaining winning balls to be subtracted for one variation is the number of prize balls (one ball) for entering the second ball entrance 640 and the number of prize balls for one small hit. is the value (16 balls) added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 634(b), the display screen during the latent state (during RUSH) will be described in detail. FIG. 634(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen during the latent state (during RUSH). As shown in FIG. 634(b), during the latent state (during RUSH), the sub-display area Ds indicates that the game state is advantageous for the player to obtain a privilege. Appears to scroll to the left. Further, in the example of FIG. 634(b), the second guide display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm displays the characters "96G remaining", and after the game state shifts to the latent state, special symbols are displayed. It is clearly shown to the player that the lottery of has been executed four times.

In the center of the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed to run comfortably, indicating that the game is progressing smoothly. In addition, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a small winning design of "246" is displayed, which indicates that the lottery result of this special design was a small winning. As a result, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the number of prize balls for entering the second ball entrance 640 in this lottery (1 ball) and the number of prize balls for one small hit (15 balls) are displayed. A point 813 of "-16pt" indicating that 16 prize balls, which is the value obtained by adding "Remaining Expected Acquisition Points 1554pt" is displayed.

In this way, by subtracting the display of the remaining expected acquisition ball number according to the lottery result of the special symbols, it is possible to show the player that the game is progressing smoothly, and the player is relieved. can give you a feeling. Furthermore, since the number of remaining winning balls is displayed, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that this many winning balls can still be obtained, and to motivate the player to continue playing the game. .

Returning to FIG. 633, the description continues. In this embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit at a rate of about 98%. Also, the second variable winning device 65 is configured to allow the second specific winning port 65ab to win without missing a game ball when it is opened by a small win. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and 16 is subtracted from the number of remaining expected winning prize balls each time a small win is won. However, due to a malfunction of the distribution device 700 or clogging of the balls, the flow of the game balls is delayed and the second variable winning device 65 misses the balls (see FIG. 633 (c)), and the special figure 1 game is executed. In the case where the ball is closed, it may not be possible to win the prize in the second specific prize-winning port 65ab, and the prize ball may not be obtained. In such a case, it is necessary to further subtract 15 from the number of remaining expected winning balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 635(a), the display screen when there is no winning in the second specific winning opening 65ab during the small winning game will be described. FIG. 635(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen when there is no winning in the second specific winning opening 65ab during the small winning. As shown in FIG. 635(a), when the player misses the expected number of winning balls during the small winning game, first, the character "Unfortunate" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the center of the main display area Ds, the character 811 stumbles over the stone 812 and appears to be about to fall. Furthermore, a point 813b indicating that the privilege could not be obtained is displayed with the characters "-15pt" as if falling from the character 811's hand. By displaying two points 813 indicating negative points in this manner, the player can easily recognize that the player has missed the winning ball, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, during the latent state, the player intentionally shoots a game ball aiming at the left area (first area) of the game board 13 (left-handed game), etc. A game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 However, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the lottery for the first special symbol does not win a small prize, so the number of prize balls cannot be obtained as planned. In this case, as in the case where the second specific winning port 65ab is not won during the small winning game, the expected winning prize is added from the remaining expected winning points shown in the third guide display area Dm5 of the third symbol display device 81. You need to subtract the number of balls. In this way, if the number of prize balls due to a small hit cannot be obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, subtraction is performed for each reason why the number of prize balls could not be obtained. The display mode may be changed, such as by changing the color of the point 813b indicating . By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand the reason why the prize ball was not obtained, and to provide a transparent game.

Returning to FIG. 633, the description continues. As shown in FIG. 633(d), the game continues in the latent probability state, and when the number of lotteries for special symbols reaches the specified number of times (100 times) without winning the jackpot, 0 is displayed as the number of remaining probability variations, 0 is also displayed for the number of remaining expected winning balls. Here, with reference to FIG. 635(b), the display screen showing the end of the latent state will be described. FIG. 635(b) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen indicating the end of the latent state. First, in FIG. 635(b), a chagrin character 811 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "remaining 0 G" are displayed in the second guide display area Dm4. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the latent certainty state has ended. Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, the characters "Right-handed" are changed to "Left-handed", indicating that the game mode has been changed since the game state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state. Further, the sub-display area Ds displays the text "Unfortunately, please switch back to left-handed". In this way, by indicating that the game method has been changed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the sub-display area Ds, the player can almost certainly grasp the change, and there is a possibility of executing the wrong game method. becomes extremely low.

Then, in the third guide display area Dm5, the characters "Remaining Expected Acquisition Points 0pt" are displayed, indicating that there are no prize balls that can already be acquired. The fourth guide display area Dm6 displays the difference between the expected number of winning balls and the number of uncollected winning balls. In the example of FIG. 635(b), the characters "Difference from Expected Acquisition Points 32pt" are displayed, and it is possible to easily grasp that 32 balls could not be obtained as expected.

In this embodiment, the fourth guidance display area Dm6 is configured to display the difference between the number of expected winning balls and the number of winning balls that could not be taken during the latent state. Even when the number of prize balls more than the expected number of prize balls to be obtained is obtained, such as when the second specific prize winning opening 65ab is over-won during the winning game, the difference may be displayed. By displaying the number of prize balls obtained more than planned in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining even if the latent state shifts to the normal state. The game can be continued while yearning to shift to the latent state.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected by winning a small hit during the latent state (during RUSH) is displayed. When a jackpot is won during this latent probability state, the number of winning balls that can be expected for the jackpot is also displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 636(a), the flow of the game when winning the jackpot during the latent state will be described. FIG. 636(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a jackpot is won during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 636(a)(1), when the big hit variation is started during the latent state, the character "+V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 636(a)(2). It is displayed to suggest to the player that the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained will increase (see FIG. 636(a)(2)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 636(b), when winning in the second special symbol lottery during RUSH (during the probability state) and winning the jackpot F which is the jackpot type in which the probability state is set again will be described. FIG. 636(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen when the jackpot F is won during RUSH. When a jackpot is won during RUSH, a happy character 811 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm next to a treasure box 814 with a V popping out of it. In the secondary display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations!!" are displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, "222" indicating the lottery result of this time is displayed. This indicates to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot has been won.

Then, in the third guidance display area Dm5, characters of "Remaining Expected Acquisition Points 1760pt" are displayed. This number of points is a number larger than that at the start of the jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. It is the total value with the number of prize balls that can be expected to be acquired during the state. Furthermore, a point 813 of characters "+V" is displayed so as to emerge from the third guidance display area Dm5, indicating that the number of prize balls shown in the third guidance display area Dm5 has been added by winning the jackpot. , the player can easily grasp.

Note that in the present embodiment, the point 813 of the character "+V" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is configured to be displayed so as to emerge from the third guidance display area Dm5, but this is not the only option. Instead, the point 813 may be displayed first according to the jackpot type won, and may be displayed by changing the presentation mode such as being sucked into the third guide display area Dm5. In this way, by providing various presentation modes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the latent definite state, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the jackpot and the probability set after the jackpot game is completed are calculated from the already displayed expected winning prize balls. The number of prize balls that can be expected to be acquired in the state is switched and displayed. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while hoping to win a big win and increase the number of expected prize balls to be won, and can increase the willingness to continue playing the game.

As shown in FIGS. 633 to 636, in this embodiment, not only the number of remaining times of the latent definite state but also the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent definite state are displayed. In this way, by presenting specific information to the player that many benefits can be obtained even in the latent state, the player can perform the game while calculating the benefits in detail. It becomes possible, and a player can be made to plan. In addition, it is possible to play the game while giving the player a sense of anticipation that he or she will be able to obtain such a large number of benefits.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the A1 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 637 to 654, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment will be described. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 629) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 637) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 637, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). A first winning type counter C2 used for , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 655), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 674). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value for winning the first ball opening 64 is stored, and each counter value for winning the second ball opening 640 is stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. For this reason, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbols are not being variably displayed or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is increased to the first. It is stored in the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Also, if the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), the prize balls (five in this embodiment) are not obtained without acquiring each counter value. prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 during the second special symbol lottery period such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , only the prize balls are treated as invalid balls that are paid out to the player without acquiring the counter values and the like.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entrance 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3), More than 4 (eg, 8) may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entry into the second ball entry hole 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not withheld. By configuring in this way, when the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the time of shifting from the latent sure state to the normal state, the second special pattern reserved ball remains, and the remaining reserved ball. It is possible to win a jackpot by lottery of special symbols and prevent the player from shifting to a variable probability state not desired by the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 655) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 674).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball is pushed through the upper first ball entrance 64b or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the second ball entrance 640 is won. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 639(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is specified in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 639(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 638 to 644. FIG. FIG. 639 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a large winning type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 639(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this embodiment, specifically, as shown in FIG. 639(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired second It is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 per one is "6 or 7". In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "0 to 5". If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 639(b), the small hit random number table 202b will be described. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, it is configured to indicate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be acquired during the latent state (during RUSH). Therefore, in order to easily calculate the number of expected prize balls to be obtained, the lottery of the second special symbols is configured so that about 98% of the prizes other than the big wins are won as small wins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 639(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, no random number value for a small win is defined. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the game state, in all game states shown in FIG. It is determined whether the value of the win random number counter C1 is within the range of "8 to 479", and if it is within the range of "8 to 479", it is determined to be a small win.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small winning, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is that at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the second The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 479. As shown in FIG. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 2, so the probability of winning a special symbol with a big win is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 6, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 471 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number "8 to 479" is stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 472, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "472/480" (approximately 98%).

Returning to FIG. 637, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the big win type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the big win type selection table 202d (see FIG. 639(a)). becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 639(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. This value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 in the second special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 662) (see S802 in FIG. 662). , its value is acquired and stored in the execution area (see S803 in FIG. 662). Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A ) is selected (see S1203 in FIG. 666). Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 640(b).

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this variation type counter CS1 is the first special symbol reserved ball number counter when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (see S1501: Yes in FIG. 669) in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 669). When it is determined that the value of 203d is less than 4 (see S1506: Yes in FIG. 669), the value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a (see S1506 in FIG. 669). . Then, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 659) of the first special symbol variation start process (see S204 in FIG. 657), based on the acquired value, the set variation pattern selection One variation pattern is determined from the table (see S505 in FIG. 659). A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time.

Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 in FIG. 662), if there is a winning of the second entrance 640 (see S802 in FIG. 662: Yes), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired. , the acquired value is stored in the execution area (S803). Then, based on the value, one variation pattern is determined from the set variation pattern selection table (see S1105 in FIG. 665 and S1205 in FIG. 666).

The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once (see S2002 in FIG. 674) each time the main process (see FIG. 674) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. (S2012 in FIG. 674). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 641 to 643) storing a random number for determining one fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

In this embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 referred to when the first special symbol is varied is configured to be acquired when the first entrance 64 wins, but this is not the only option. It may be configured so that it is acquired at the start of fluctuation instead of without. By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 641 to 18). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern selection tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 655), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at that time and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 . The value of this second symbol hold is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 671).

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 639(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 639(c).

FIG. 639(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 231 random numbers that are normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), and the range is "0 to 9". . Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 10, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "10/233".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time-saving state of the normal design), there are 232 random numbers for the normal design, and the range is "0 to 231". The total number of winning random numbers is 232 out of 233 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 3 seconds. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the symbol "O" is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (see S1705 in FIG. 671), and based on the value of the acquired normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, it varies from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 644) Set the time (see S1617 in FIG. 670). The details of this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 655). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 674).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 640(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. Jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 640 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. This value of the first winning type counter C2 is obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 669), and the value is acquired and the first special symbol reserved ball is obtained. It is stored in the number storage area 203a (see S1506 in FIG. 669). Then, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in Figure 659) of the first special symbol variation start process (see S204 in Figure 657), when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (See S501 of FIG. 659: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected ( See S304 in FIG. 659).

As shown in FIG. 640(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 31" in association with "jackpot A". . This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is set as the target for opening the variable winning device. After the end of the jackpot game, 100 is set to the values of the probability variable counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g, and the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 32 counter values are "jackpot A", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A" is determined ratio is 32% (32/100).

"Jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but in the normal state and the variable state, basically the game state after the end of the jackpot. is set (advantageous latent state is not given), it is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big win.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "32 to 79" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" has 7 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the variable probability counter 203k is set to 100, and the latent probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). ) is set as the game state. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 48 counter values are "jackpot B". 48% (48/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the second smallest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but if you hit the ball toward the first variable prize winning device 650 during the big win. If the player hits to the right (if he hits right), the game shifts to a latent probability state that is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state, which is advantageous in terms of the game state.

The value of the first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the variable probability counter 203k is set to 100, and the latent probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). is set as the game state. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). The "jackpot C" is a jackpot type with the smallest number of rounds, but after the jackpot ends, a latent definite state that is advantageous to the player is set.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is set as an open target. Also, after the jackpot game is over, 100 is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203g, and the latent probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). "Jackpot D" has the largest number of rounds, and basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the jackpot is completed regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so that the jackpot type is the most advantageous for the player. one of.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 79" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has 7 rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is set as the target to be released. After the end of the jackpot, the variable probability counter 203k is set to a value of 100, and the latent probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state. In addition, among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values become the "jackpot E", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E" is given. The ratio determined is 80% (80/100). On the other hand, the lottery for the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if the "jackpot E" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win is the player. be advantageous to

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 95" in association with "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" has two rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is set as an open target. Then, after the end of the jackpot, a value of 100 is set in the variable probability counter 203k, and the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 15 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 15% (15/100). Although the number of rounds of this big win F is small, after the big win game is over, a latent state is set, so the big win is advantageous for the player.

Next, the value of the first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of "96 to 99" in association with "big win G". This "jackpot G" has 15 rounds, and the first variable winning device 650 is set as an opening target. Then, after the end of the jackpot, a value of 100 is set in the variable probability counter 203k, and the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state. Then, among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot G" is four, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is given. The percentage determined is 4% (4/100).

Since this "jackpot G" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpot types of the second special symbols, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery for the second special pattern is basically performed in a latent state, and when the "jackpot G" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win can also be used by the player. be advantageous to

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the left hand is hit in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent advantage is obtained at a rate of 68% (jackpots B, C, D). It is configured to transition to a certain state. Then, when the player hits to the right in the latent definite state and wins big in the lottery of the second special symbols, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once the latent state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by winning the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. It is easy to execute, and the state of high jackpot probability and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. Therefore, the player can play the game with the purpose of making the transition to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the normal state, the basic game method is to play a game aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b by hitting to the left. There is a risk of executing an illegal game that allows you to enter a ball. In this pachinko machine 10, in order to prevent the irregular game method from being executed without executing the normal game method, the jackpots E to G won in the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal state are After the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the variable probability state at a rate of 100% in total. In this way, in the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, only the jackpot type that shifts only to the variable probability state that the player does not desire is provided, thereby preventing the irregular game method from being executed. Since the demerit of the game can be increased, it is possible to prevent fraud such as execution of an irregular game method.

Next, with reference to Drawing 640 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202e are explained. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 640(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 99" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is an open state in which the opening and closing plate 65f of the second variable winning device 65 can enter the second specific winning hole 65ab twice for 0.6 seconds during a small winning game. It is a small hit type that is set to be. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, since 100 random numbers become the "small hit A", when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit A" is obtained. is 100% (100/100). This value of the small hit type counter C5 is the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 in FIG. 662), when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (see S802 in FIG. 662) ), its value is acquired and stored in the execution area (see S803 in FIG. 662). Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A ) is selected (see S1203 in FIG. 666).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery results in a small win, the opening of the second variable winning device 65 is set, and a small win game is executed. The second variable winning device 65 is provided with a second specific winning opening 65ab, and when a small winning game is executed, the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing door 65f is set twice for 0.6 seconds (Fig. 679 (see S2602 of ).

Further, as described above, when the game state is the latent state, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol is set to 1 second. The time from when the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 to when the next game ball reaches the second variable prize winning device 65 is also configured to be about 1 second. That is, at the timing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the opening/closing door 65f of the second variable prize winning device 65 is in an open state in which the ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65ab, the game ball is hit rightward and flows down. reaches the second variable winning device 65, it is possible to win the game ball into the second specific winning port 65ab without missing it.

Also, the second variable prize winning device 65 is provided with two prize winning ports (a right specific prize winning port 65a and a left specific prize winning port 65b). The game ball that has flowed down is configured to first enter the right specific winning hole 65a, but there is a possibility that it cannot enter the right specific winning hole 65a due to a malfunction of the sorting device 700 or ball clogging.

In this way, in order to prevent a difference in the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained due to a malfunction or the like, if there is no winning in the first opening operation (0.6 seconds), After a closing period of 0.4 seconds, an opening operation (0.6 seconds) is set for the opening/closing door 65f so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning hole 65ab. During the closing period of 0.4 seconds, the game ball flows down the flow path f of the second variable winning device 65, and the game ball enters the left specific winning hole 65b during the second opening operation. Configure. By thus providing two specific winning holes (the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 65b), it is possible to win the second specific winning hole 65ab without almost failing to win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state without difference, and it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being presented to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, although one type of small hit type is used, the number of types is not limited to this, and two or more types may be used. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which small prize has been won, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 641 to 643. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a random number that determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 641, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, a probability variation table 202f2 for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state, At least a latency table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latency state is included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 642 and 643. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 642 and 643, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table 202f1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. FIG. 643 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 643, the normal table 202f1 is a random value for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and each stop type of special symbol (counter of variation type counter value CS1 value) is specified.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", Super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198" C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of held balls. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 643, when the number of held balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds) is associated with a variation pattern of , and outside the range of "71 to 150", normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "151 to 170" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "171 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

On the other hand, when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, a short deviation (8 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation type As the value of the counter CS1, the range of "71 to 150" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of long outliers (10 seconds), and the range of "151 to 170" is associated with the normal reach (20 seconds). In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "171 to 185" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "185 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is It should be noted that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S307 of S210) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 657). Executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is not referred to when there are four balls on hold.

Thus, when the number of held balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to secure the time for accumulating the held balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the variation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate the held balls. can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

In the normal state, when the right hand is hit and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the second special symbol lottery result is displayed in the small area Dm1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The third pattern shown is displayed (see FIG. 630(b)). As described above, in this small area Dm1, the three third symbols in a simple manner, each composed of only one of the numbers "1" to "9", are variably displayed to obtain the second special symbol. Even if the long variation of the pattern is executed, it can be shown to the player without disturbing the variation display of the main first special symbol lottery, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be shown to the player in the small area Dm1 (see FIG. 630(b)) of the main display area Dm in the normal state. Depending on the result (such as a big hit), the variable display of the first special symbol displayed in the main display area Dm before the variation stops (for example, 30 seconds ago) may be replaced with the variable display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to present an effect mode that makes the player feel a sense of anticipation that something has happened.

Next, the details of the probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 643(a). This probability variation table 202f2 is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 643 (a), the jackpot of the first special symbol is defined in association with the whole range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take (12 seconds). ing. Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation variation A (12 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

Also, even in the variable probability state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, similarly to the normal state, when the right hitting is performed in the variable probability state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the game is played rather than hitting left. Efficiency is greatly reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 643(b), the details of the confirmation table 202f3 will be described. This table 202f4 for latent probability is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 643(b), the jackpot of the first special pattern is defined by matching the middle variation (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. It is Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation short variation A (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 643 (b), the second special symbol jackpot is associated with a short variation (1 second) for the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). , and the small hit of the second special symbol is defined in association with the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second In the deviation of the special symbol, the deviation short variation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the latent state, the lottery for the second special symbol is basically performed, so the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol is approximately 1 second. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently (speedily) by hitting to the right in an advantageous latent state. Also, even if the lottery for the first special symbol is lost in the latent definite state, 1 second is selected as the variable time. When entering the state, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the latent certainty state.

In addition, when entering the latent state with one or more holdings of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. Visible to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that the reserved ball of the first special symbol has been completely digested, and a game with transparency can be provided.

It should be noted that, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set because if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the latent state, This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when the jackpot A is reached in the potential probability state, the game state after the jackpot ends becomes the probability variable state. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting a relatively long variation time when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, by performing a right hit during the first special symbol big hit variation, the second special It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed a plurality of times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, almost (at about 98%) a small hit is won, so before the end of the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the small hit variation of the second special symbol It can be terminated with high probability. As described above, in the present embodiment, a simultaneous variation method is adopted in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. In addition, if the fluctuation display of one special design is confirmed and displayed with the stop design of the big hit or the small hit during the simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special design is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of the fluctuation Regardless of the result, it will be forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is out. Therefore, even during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit of the first special symbol can be discarded by first confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the small hit due to the small hit variation of the second special symbol. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) with a high probability the start of the first special symbol jackpot, which may end the latent certainty state, so that the player can more surely enjoy the latent certainty state. can let

Next, with reference to FIG. 644, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in Figure 644, in this general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, for each game state at the time when the normal pattern lottery is executed, the range of the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) and are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 644, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time of 100 seconds for the entire range of values that can be taken by the normal figure variation type counter CS2 (0 to 198) A variation pattern is associated. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the lottery of normal symbols from being frequently performed.

When the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time is 3 for the whole range of values that can be taken by the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 (0 to 198) A second variation pattern is associated. And, when the game state is a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), it fluctuates with respect to the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 A variation pattern with a duration of 3 seconds is associated.

In addition, in the present A1 embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to provide one variation pattern for each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of variation pattern variations may be provided. With this configuration, the game can be played while making the player interested in which variation pattern was selected.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is also possible to use a configuration that changes the variation time based on the number of times of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration that sets the variation time of normal symbols by a method combining the above-described various configurations. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, and after that (51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, during the period when the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbols based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbols is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. You can continuously hit right. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is changed. It is preferable to configure such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of pending memories of the lottery is smaller.

Further, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the larger the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to easily accumulate the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to increase the number of balls per unit time. Normal pattern lottery frequency can be made uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 645 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 645, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203g, winning counter 203h, variable probability counter 203k, jackpot flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small hit flag 203o, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, special figure 2 It has at least a variable timer 203t, a flag 203u during a big hit, a flag 203v during a small hit, and a memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

However, shifting data from the reserved first area to the execution area leaves the reserved first area empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

In this embodiment, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. However, without being limited to this, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 shifts the data of the pending ball from the first pending area to the execution area, It may be configured so as to be obtained when a symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to store only winning data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The second special symbol execution area 203b, like the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected is stored.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through one of the through gates 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to reserved 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 669). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 657).

The value of this first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 657, in FIG. 669 S1505 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the holding of the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display is held in normal symbols) is initially set to zero. is increased by 1 up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 671). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1605 in FIG. 670).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 671). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1703 in FIG. 671: No reference).

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the high probability state of the normal symbols. This time saving counter 203g is set to 100 as a value at the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot A is won in the normal state or the variable probability state (see S2303 in FIG. 677). Also, the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 660). If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal design is performed, it is determined that the normal design is in a high probability state, and the judgment for the normal design is executed by referring to the table for the high probability. (See S1610 in FIG. 670). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined as the normal state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the table for low probability (see S1611 in FIG. 670). In addition, since the latent probability state is a game state that is determined as the normal state of the normal symbol, the value is not set at the time of transition to the latent probability state, and the table for low probability is referred to. The suitability determination of normal symbols is executed.

The prize winning counter 203h counts the number of balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 650a in each round of the big win. ) is a counter that counts the number of spheres. When the value of the prize winning counter 203h reaches 5, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end conditions for the round are met, and the round is ended. Also, the value of the winning counter 203h of the small winning game is set to 1 as the upper limit. It should be noted that even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5 in each round of the jackpot, the round is terminated when the round period set for each round is reached. The prize winning counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected to enter the specific prize winning opening 650a during the jackpot round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The variable probability counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special It indicates that it is a low probability state of the pattern).

The variable probability counter 203k has an initial value set to 0, and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 660) that is executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by one (in FIG. 660 (see S602). In addition, the variable probability counter 203k is reset to 0 when a jackpot game is started (see S706 in FIG. 662 and S1309 in FIG. 667). This probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the probability variation state of the special symbols in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 658) and the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 663). (See S402 in FIG. 658 and S902 in FIG. 663).

In addition, the variable probability counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state, and the time saving counter 203g described above is a counter indicating whether or not it is in a normal symbol high probability state. When the value of the variable probability counter 203k is a value greater than 0, it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability state of special symbols (variable probability state or latent probability state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 203g is a value larger than 0, it is determined that the game state is a high-probability state of normal symbols (in this embodiment, a variable probability state).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 starts to fluctuate. It is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that it coincides with the jackpot determination value at times (see S406 in FIG. 658 and S906 in FIG. 663). This jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S707 in FIG. 661 and S1309 in FIG. 666). A 2-bit storage area is assigned to the jackpot flag 203m, and information corresponding to the first special design is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special design is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "01B", it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot variation is not executed.

With this big hit flag 203m turned on, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on ends, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 661, FIG. 667) (see S1306 of ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the variable probability counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the probability variable counter 203k are both 1 or more), information indicating the probability variable state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n "01H" is stored. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n "02H" is stored as information indicating the certain state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is held until the end of the jackpot, and the information stored in the winning state storage area 203n when the probability is changed or the probability is set after the jackpot ends. is referenced (see S2301 in FIG. 677). In this embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning. For example, as described above, in order to prevent fraud such as the player executing an irregular game method, if the jackpot E to G is won in the second special symbol lottery during the normal state, that After finishing the game of the winning jackpots E to G, the variable probability state is set, but when the jackpot E to G is won in the lottery of the second special symbols during the latent probability state, the latent probability state is set again. be. In this way, information corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the big win is stored in the state storage area 203n at the time of winning, and by referring to it at the end of the big win, according to the game state at the time of winning and the type of the big win, An appropriate game state can be set after the end of the jackpot game.

The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1002 in FIG. 664). This small win flag 203o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1406 in FIG. 668). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the small hit flag 203o is on, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the missing symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 668). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the big hit and when the big win is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S801: Yes in FIG. 662). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped in the off design (see S703 in FIG. 661), avoiding the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF (S808 in FIG. 662).

The special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. This special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s and special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203tIt is decided whether or not the fluctuation time of each special design has ended (see S701 in FIG. 661 and S1301 in FIG. 667).

The jackpot flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203u is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in jackpot, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is not jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 661 and S1310 in FIG. 667). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2306 in FIG. 677).

The flag 203v during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If this small winning medium flag 203v is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small winning state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not in a small winning state. This small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 668). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2412 in FIG. 678).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

As described above, the RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and the data stored in the RAM 203 is , all backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see S2015 in FIG. 674) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 672) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present A1 embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and novel state transitions shown in FIG. 632 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 646, details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will be described. FIG. 646(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 646(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 646(b). FIG. 646(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. A type selection flag 223f, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, an effect counter 223h, a state setting area 223i, a remaining winning ball counter 223j, a jackpot winning ball number storage area 223k, and an additional winning ball flag 223m. , a remaining probability variable number of times area 223o, a remaining short time number of times area 223q, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 681) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the first winning type counter C2 are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) is predicted by the main controller 110 ( estimated), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a prize winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

Also, the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a matches the information contained in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, Since the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is updated, while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, when updating the value, the winning information is synchronized. The information in the storage area 223a is updated.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is being held up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. are managed by type.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 6488). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and special figure 2 variation start flag 223e receive the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 respectively. It is turned on (see S4305 and S4308 in FIG. 683), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4902 and S4906 in FIG. 688). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 682), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop classification selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223g receive the first special symbol stop classification command and the second special symbol stop classification command transmitted from the main control device 110 , respectively (see S4302 in FIG. 683), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4910 in FIG. 688). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. be done.

The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. This state setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command each time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (S4011 in FIG. 681, FIG. 683 S4315). More specifically, the state setting area 223i is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and whether it is a probability variable state of a special symbol or not, whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol, in order from the upper bit A value indicating is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223i is "11B", it means that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol (that is, the probability variation state) If "10B", It means that the definite variable state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent definite state). On the other hand, "00H" means the normal state.

By updating the state setting area 223i according to the state command output from the main control device 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The remaining obtained ball number counter 223j is a counter for storing the remaining number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained by winning a big win or a small win during the latent state. This remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is the number of prize balls expected from the small winning game in the latent certainty state (the specified number of times of the latent certainty state is 100 times) when winning the jackpot type in which the game state shifts to the latent certainty state. × 15 balls for the small winning game = 1500) and the number of prize balls due to entering the second ball entrance 640 during the latent state (100 times the specified number of times in the latent state × 1 time 1600 is set (see S4615 in FIG. When the hit no winning command is received, the value is subtracted by 16 (the number of prize balls for winning the second ball entrance 640 + the number of prize balls for the small winning game of 15 balls) (S4703 in FIG. 686). , S4706).

Further, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, even when a jackpot is won in the latent state, the player is provided with information indicating benefits that can be expected to be obtained during the jackpot game. there is When a jackpot is won in the lottery of special patterns during the latent probability state, the value read out from the jackpot winning ball number storage area 223k storing the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained for each number of rounds is stored as the remaining winning balls. It is set in the number counter 223j (see S4604 in FIG. 685). Furthermore, in the remaining number update process (S4319 in FIG. 687), if the value is 0 or more at the timing of the end of the latent state (S4806 in FIG. 687: Yes), that value is actually obtained. It is set as a difference from the number of prize balls produced (see S4807 in FIG. 687). Then, that value is cleared (see S4808 in FIG. 687).

The jackpot acquisition ball number storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the number of prize balls that can be acquired in each round set based on the jackpot type. This jackpot winning ball number storage area 223k is read in order to set the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the remaining winning ball number counter 223j based on the number of rounds of the winning jackpot when the game state is the latent state. is executed (see S4603 in FIG. 685).

Here, with reference to FIG. 647, the contents of the jackpot acquired ball number storage area 223k will be described in detail. FIG. 647 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the number-of-balls-for-jackets storage area 223k. As shown in FIG. 647, the jackpot win ball number storage area 223k defines the number of prize balls that can be expected to be won for each number of rounds.

It should be noted that the number of prize balls stored in the jackpot winning ball number storage area 223k is 80 balls, which is the number of prize balls that can be expected for each round (the number of prize balls for winning the specific winning hole 650 x 16 balls). It is a value obtained by multiplying the upper limit of winning (5 balls) by the set number of rounds. Specifically, among the three types of round numbers, "15R", which is the largest number of rounds, has a number of winning balls of "1200" (80 prize balls per round x 15 rounds = 1200). there is Next, "7R", which is the second largest number of rounds, is defined as "560" (80 prize balls per round x 7 rounds = 560). Among the three types of round numbers, "2R", which is the smallest number of rounds, is defined as "160" (80 prize balls per round x 2 rounds = 160). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls is stored for each number of rounds, but the number of prize balls may be stored for each type of jackpot without being limited to this.

Returning to FIG. 647, the description continues. The increased winning ball flag 223m is a flag for indicating whether or not the jackpot won this time is a jackpot won during the latent probability state. This extra winning ball flag 223m is set to ON when a big win is won in the latent state (see S4605 in FIG. 685), and is set to OFF at the ending of the big win (see S4613 in FIG. 685).

The remaining probability variable number of times area 223o and the remaining time reduction number area 223q are storage areas for storing the number of remaining times of the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining probability variable number area 223o and the remaining short time number area 223q are notified by a residual probability variable number command and a remaining short time number command output each time the values of the variable probability counter 203k and the short time counter 203g are updated in the main control device 110, respectively. (See S4802 and S4812 in FIG. 687). As a result, in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining short time number area 223q can be updated, so the sound lamp control device The remaining number of probability variations and the number of times of saving time grasped by 113 can be matched with the actual number of times of probability variation and the number of times of saving time updated by the main controller 110 .

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S4114 in FIG. 682). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is ON (see S4002: Yes in FIG. 681) in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 681), the power-off flag 223y is set to ON for a certain period of time. This is when the audio lamp controller 113 wakes up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 681). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 648, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 648 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 689) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 689) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 654) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 691(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 689).

Here, with reference to FIG. 649, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 649 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 649(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 649(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. 649(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special design jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 649(b) and (c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. 649(b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 648, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 650, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 650 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 650(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "empty stage", respectively, for back face A corresponding to "town stage". . Also, FIG. 651 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 650, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to each of the back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When a change in the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface. First, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between position a and position a′ of the image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 651, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . . . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over a mountain changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 651(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 651(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 651(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 651(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 651(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 651(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. 651(a) to 651(a) to 651(c) are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 again.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 650(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Also, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 651(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 651(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face E, the images of FIGS. 651(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 651(b) to (c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 651(a) and (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 651(b) and (c) and FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. 651(b)-(c) and 651(c)-(a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in normal-use video RAM 236 for rear-surfaces BE is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-surface images provided in image storage area 236a of normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 648). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 648, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 652 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to E, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 652) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 654), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 653, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 653 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 653). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 653).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 654) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 653, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 689) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 689). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 701(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 691(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 691(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 691(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 692 to 697) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 698 to 700) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 701(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 701(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 702) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 654) in which the contents of the instruction for drawing an image for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 654), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 654) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 691(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 697) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 654), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 654 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 691 (b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 698). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 689) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 702) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 702). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 702). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 703).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 691(b)) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7101 in FIG. 697(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 702), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 702). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 697 (a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 698) (see S7221 in FIG. 698). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 693(a), S6705 in FIG. 694(a), S6805 in FIG. 694(b) , S6905 in FIG. 70). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 698) (S7214 in FIG. 698). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 693(a), S6705 in FIG. 694(a), S6805 in FIG. 694(b), FIG. 70, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control processing of the main controller in the A1 embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

655 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (in this embodiment 479, 99, 232, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol variation process for performing the process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( S106). After executing the normal symbol variation process, the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. Next, the firing control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 656, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 656 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 656) performs various judgments and determinations based on each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the variable display mode determined by the control of , the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 can be controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. is executed. The special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 656) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 656), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is ON) (S201), and the jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203u is ON). 203u is ON) (S201: Yes), since there is no need to set special symbol lottery or stop variable display, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether the small hit flag 203v is on) is determined (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the small winning medium flag 203v is on (S202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the small hit (the flag 203v during the small hit is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the variable time of the first special symbol in the variable display has passed , a first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying a stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process proceeds to S206. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is forcibly removed. Stop display processing is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that it has been done, the first special symbol variation start processing is executed for executing the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data (S204), and the processing proceeds to S206. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S206 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S206), if the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (S206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. In this second special symbol variation stop process (S208), similarly to the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed, the second special symbol It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result. The details of this second special symbol variation stop process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S206: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected, the second special symbol is displayed. A special symbol lottery is executed to execute a second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display (S207), and this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 657, the first special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 656, S104), will be described. FIG. 657 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S204).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 657, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the processing of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S302: No), this processing ends as it is. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1. (S303), set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after subtraction (S304).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 674) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S305 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 658, S306) will be described later in detail. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state.

When the process of S306 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 659, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) ends, then the game state update process is executed (S308), and this process ends. This game state update process (FIG. 660, S308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability variation counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 This is processing for updating the state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 658, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 657, S204), will be described. FIG. 658 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 658, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probability variable state of special symbols). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the first per random number table 202a for high probability When it is defined as a jackpot It is determined whether or not the random value obtained from the counter buffer matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S407). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203n (S409), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost (S405: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and then , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 659, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 657, S204), will be described. FIG. 659 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 659, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 658, S306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203m is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S406 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 658).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 658) Acquired in the process of S401 Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 640(a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S503.

In the processing of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 640 to 644) corresponding to the game state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the value of the variable probability counter 203k and the value of the time reduction counter 203g. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S506).

When the processing of S506 ends, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (S507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 660, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 657), will be described. FIG. 660 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S308).

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 660) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processes of S602 to S605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining probability variable number command indicating the value of the probability variable counter is set ( S603).

The remaining probability variation count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 6477), which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the residual probability variation number command, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the residual probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the residual probability variation number area 223o of the RAM 223. In this way, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223o in accordance with the pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 203k of the main controller 110. while you can update its value. As a result, it is possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state, and to execute the corresponding effect.

When the process of S603 ends, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), S605 Skip the process and move to the process of S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606), and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S606, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S607), and a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is set. After (S608), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 674) described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the short remaining time command, it extracts the value of the short working time counter 203g from the short remaining time command and stores the extracted value in the short remaining time area 223q of the RAM223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction number area 223q according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110. while you can update its value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 661, the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 656, S104), will be described. FIG. 661 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (S205).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 661, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( S701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p has been turned on (S704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S705), and the value of the special figure 2 variation timer 203t is reset (S706).

When the processing of S706 is finished, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S707), and the jackpot flag 203m, probability variation counter 203k, and time reduction counter 203g are reset (S708). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON (S709), and the process proceeds to S710.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S702: No), the process of S703 to S709 is skipped and the process proceeds to S710.

In the processing of S710, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S710). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S711), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S712), this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing (S205), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game Processing (S703 to S711) for stopping the variable display is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S702: Yes), a process (S703 to S706) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In addition, in the present A1 embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 658). For example, using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S707 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 658). You may make it

Next, with reference to FIG. 662, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 656, S104), will be described. FIG. 662 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 662, S207), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, as described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, is a flag that is set to ON while causing the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON in the process of S801, without executing each process of S802 to S806 for setting the start of fluctuation, the process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entrance 640 It is determined whether or not winning has been detected (S802). If it is determined that the winning to the second ball entrance 640 has not been detected (S802: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S802: Yes), then the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small per type Each value of the counter C5 is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and second special symbol jackpot determination processing for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination based on each stored counter value (S804). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S804 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute (S805). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S805 ends, the game state update process (see FIG. 660) described above is executed (S806), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 663, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 662, S207), will be described. FIG. 663 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination processing (Fig. 663, S804), the same processing as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see Fig. 658) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (Fig. 658 ) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). Then, the processing of S902 to S904 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is won is executed based on each acquired counter value and the value of the variable probability counter 203k. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. control is executed.

When the processing of S903 or S904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S905), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each process of these S906-S909, the same process as each process of S406-S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 658) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S905, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S905: No), a small hit of the second special symbol or a stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing is executed (S910), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 664 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S909).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S903 or S904 in FIG. If so (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1003). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then, End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 665, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 662, S805), will be described. FIG. 665 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 663, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1102). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S906 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 663).

In the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 641 and 643) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S901 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 663), the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 640 (a)) The type is determined (S1105).

When the process of S1105 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1105), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to S1108.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process of S1108 Transition.

In the process of S1108, the special figure 2 stop classification command which shows a stop design is set (S1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1109), and then terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 666, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be described. FIG. 666 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1107).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 666, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is ON (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 640(b)), the small hit type is selected (S1203).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 642 and 643) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1204), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1205). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S1206), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1201: No), the variation pattern selection table (Fig. 642 and FIG. 643) is read (S1207), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1208). After that, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1209), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 667, the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 656, S104), will be described. FIG. 667 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S208).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set (S1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305), The process proceeds to S1306.

Next, the processing after S1306 differs from the processing after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 661, S205) in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special figure 2 in that it is changed to a definite command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1303, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S1304), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 668, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1304), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 667, S208), will be described. FIG. 668 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S1304).

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (FIG. 668, S1304), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1403), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s is reset (S1404).

After completing the processing of S1404, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S1405). After that, the small hit flag 203o is set to OFF (S1406), and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON (S1407).

When the processing of S1406 ends, a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S1408). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops variably with the small hit symbol (S1409), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1410). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1411), and this process is finished.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 669, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 655) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 669 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 669, S105) determines whether the game ball has won the first start port (first ball entrance) 64, and if it wins, the upper limit number of reservations Up to 4), it is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process of predicting the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 669, S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 669, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S1501). Here, winning to the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reservations for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1505). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of determination of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is finished.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, based on the information stored on hold, the winning/failure determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failure determination to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 670, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 670 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 670, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) to when the electric accessory 64a is controlled to open and close. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1602). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618 ). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1617, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1618, if the variable time has not elapsed (S1618: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the processing of S1619, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1613, the second symbol display device (not shown) stops the "○" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1615, the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display on the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1613 and the process of S1615. Stopped display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1620). When it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1620: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set (S1621). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1620: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1604), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state. In the processing of S1608, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S1608: No), based on the hit determination value of the normal per symbol random number table for low probability (see FIG. 639 (c)), the success or failure determination A result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1609: No), the normal per symbol random number table for high probability (see FIG. 639 (c)) hit determination value Based on this, the result of the suitability determination is acquired (S1610).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit (S1612), and when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not hit (that is, it is lost). (S1612: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when out, is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (that is, winning) (S1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is "○". is set (S1613).

Next, the electric accessory 64a is set to be opened for 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1614). Then, in the process of S1616 to be executed after executing the process of S1614 or S1615, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g (see Figure 643) is read (S1616), the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the read normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g A variable time corresponding to the value of is set (S1617), and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 671 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 655) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 671, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1703).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 655) is stored in the free reservation area (holding first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1705), and the process ends. In the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that, when the performance is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the determination of the success or failure of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 64a is opened when the general pattern is determined to be winning. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, a game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game board 13, it is possible to switch to a game (so-called right hitting) aiming at the right side of the game board 13 before the electric accessary 64a performs the opening operation, and the normal game state. Even so, there is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 can be increased.

672 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 673, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 673 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 673), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 629) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 629) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). : No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1911, S1912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 629). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 629) is pressed during execution of the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 629) is not turned on (S1904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913). After that, each value of the variable probability counter 203k and the time saving counter 203g is read (S1914), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). After the process of S1915 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S1916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 674, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 674 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (FIG. 674), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 655), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each sub-side control device. (Peripheral control device) External output processing is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). A jackpot control process is executed (S2004). Details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 675, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2006). In this electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2006), the opening/closing process of the electric accessary product 64a is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 Then, the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is in a winning state, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2010: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S2009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S2009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process in FIG. 672 is executed, so the power-off process from S2013 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2001. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initialization process (FIG. 673, S1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 675 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control process (S2004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 674), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 675, S2004), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2101: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the process of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), an opening command for jackpot is set (S2104), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

In the processing of S2105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (S2106), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is not the time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed has been met ( S2107). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 650a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is met. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the processing of S2108 sets the specific winning opening 650a to be closed (opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 650a The solenoid is turned off so that 650f1 is closed), and this process is terminated. It should be noted that the determination process of S2105 to S2107 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not established (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing of (S2109: Yes), the ending command for big hits is set (S2110), and this process is completed. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 674). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2111: Yes), the big win end process for setting the gaming state after the big win ends (S2112), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 676, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2004 in FIG. 675), will be described. FIG. 676 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 676, S2106), first, the opening scenario in which the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to start is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 650a is set according to the data read in the processing of S2201 (S2202), and this processing ends.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 650 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 677, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 675, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 677 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2112).

In the jackpot ending process (FIG. 677, S2112), first, based on the winning state storage area 203n, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the big win type of this time is the big win A (S2302). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (S2302: Yes), 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203g in order to set the variable probability state (S2303). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is not the jackpot A (S2302: No), since there is no need to set the high probability state of the normal symbol, the process of S2303 is skipped and the process of S2304 is performed. do. In the process of S2304, 100 is set to the value of the probability variation counter 203k (S2304). Next, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2305), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in this embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set according to the type of jackpot won. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting which jackpot has been won until after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 678, the small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 674) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 678 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (S2005 in FIG. 678), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2401). Specifically, the processing of S1405 of the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 668) is executed, and it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2401, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2401: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if the small winning scenario is set (S2401: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2402), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2403). More specifically, in the processing of S2402, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2403, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the processing of S2403, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2403: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2404), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2403: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2405).

In the processing of S2405, if it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2405: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S2406), and this processing ends. Details of the small winning operation setting process (S2406) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2405: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2407). Here, in this embodiment, while the second specific winning opening 65ab is open, if a predetermined number of balls (for example, one) win in total, or the opening period of the second specific winning opening 65ab is When the predetermined time has passed, it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the process of S2407, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2407: Yes), the second specific winning opening 65ab is set to be closed in the process of S2108. (The solenoid is turned off so that the opening/closing plate 65f of the second specific winning port 65ab is closed), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 65ab is not satisfied (S2407: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2409).

In the processing of S2409, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2409: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2410), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 674). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2409, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2409: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2411). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2411, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2411: Yes), the flag 203v during the small hit is set to OFF (S2412), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2411: No), the second winning process is executed (S2413), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 679, the small hit operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hit control process (FIG. 678, S2005) will be described. FIG. 679 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506). In the small winning operation setting process (S2506 in FIG. 679), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small winning to start is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the second specific prize winning opening 65ab (and the associated opening/closing plate 65f (see FIG. 6)) is set according to the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the second variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 680, details of the second winning process (S2413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 680 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2413). This second winning process (S2413) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 679), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the second specific winning opening 65ab.

In this second winning process (S2413 in FIG. 680), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2601). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the second specific winning port 65ab is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round valid period (S2601: No), the prize winning counter 203h is reset (S2609), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the second specific winning opening 65ab is detected (S2602), and the second specific winning If winning to the mouth 65ab is not detected (S2602: No), a small winning no winning command is set (S2603), and this process is terminated. Here, the set small hit no command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 674). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the no-small-hit command, it assumes that the expected number of prize balls could not be obtained, and executes processing for subtracting the remaining winning ball number counter 223j.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, if winning to the second specific winning port 65ab is detected (S2602: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203h is updated by adding 1 (S2604). Then, a small hit winning command is set (S2605). Next, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (S2606), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) S2606: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (S2606: Yes), the closing of (the opening/closing plate 65f associated with) the second specific prize winning port 65ab is set (S2607). . Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 681 to 688, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 681, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 681 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 682, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of power failure from the main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 682), it executes power failure processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4114 in FIG. 682). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 682, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 682 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the processing of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4110 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4109. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4109 are processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4110, and S4111, it is preferable to execute the command determination process and the variable display setting process in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4107), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4109). After that, the process proceeds to S4110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S4107 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4108 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4110) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4111. Details of this command determination process (S4110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4111, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S4111 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4112). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4112 (S4112: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4114), and the power-off processing is executed (S4115). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4116), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4112), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4113: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 683 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4110). This command determination process (S4110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 682) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4110) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301: Yes), the stop type selection flag of the symbol corresponding to the received command is set to ON (S4302 ). Next, the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4303), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received It discriminates (S4304). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4304: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4306), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4304: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4307). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4307: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4308), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4309), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 688) to be described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4307, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4307: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4310). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4310: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4311), the process ends. In addition, since this embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4311, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c Only updates are performed.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the processing of S4311 , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, If the pending ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol pending ball of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203d.

Also, in the process of S4310, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S4310: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4312). In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4312: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponding winning information The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4313), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4312 that the winning information command has not been received (S4312: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S4314). If it is determined that the state command has been received (S4314: Yes), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4315), and this process is terminated. Based on the state command received in this process, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state) is set in the state setting area 223i.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4314, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4314: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S4316). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4316: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4317), and the process ends. Details of this hit-related processing (S4317) will be described later with reference to FIGS. During the state, a process of setting or subtracting the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4316, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4316: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time reduction number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4318 ). In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4318) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the content of the effect display to be displayed is executed.

In the process of S4318, if it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number of times command nor the remaining time short number of times command is received (S4318: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4320), and this process ends do. In the process of S4320, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 684, the hit-related processing (S4217) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 684 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S4217). This hit-related processing (S4217) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 683) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the win-related processing (S4217) will be described below.

In the hit-related process (S4217), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S4501). When it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S4501: Yes), a jackpot related process is executed (S4502), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot related processing (S4502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received (S4503). When it is determined that the small hit related command is received (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed and this process ends. Details of the small hit related process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4505). When it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter (S4506), and then the prize ball number command for display is set. (S4507), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number-of-balls command has not been received (S4505: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 685, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the winning related process (S4216) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 685 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot related process (S4502). In the big win related process (S4502), a process of setting a display command related to the big win to the display control device 113 is executed. Execute the process of adding values.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S4501). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the potential state (S4602). If the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S4602: Yes), the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained this time is read out from the jackpot winning ball number storage area 223k based on the jackpot type of this time. (S4603). For example, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot C, the jackpot is set to 2R, so "160" is read as the expected number of prize balls. Then, based on the expected number of winning balls read in the process of S4603, the value of the remaining winning ball number counter 223j is set (S4604). Here, based on the set value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j, the expected remaining acquired points of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. Then, the increased number of balls flag 223m is set to ON (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot this time is not the latent state (S4602: No), it is not necessary to set the value of the remaining obtained ball number counter 223j, so the processing of S4603 to S4605 is skipped and S4606 is skipped. to process. In the processing of S4606, a large winning start command for display is set (S4606), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4607). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4607: Yes), it is determined whether or not the increased ball number flag 223m is on (S4608). If it is determined that the increased number of balls flag 223m is ON (S4608: Yes), the value of the remaining number of acquired balls counter 223j is subtracted by 80 (S4609), and a display round number command is set (S4610), End this process.

In this way, in the jackpot in the latent probability state, the process of subtracting the number of winning balls obtained for each number of rounds is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4608 that the increased number of balls flag 223m is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4608: No), the process of S4609 is skipped and the process of S4610 described above is executed. and terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the round number command has not been received (S4607: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4611). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the increased number of balls flag 223m is on (S4612). If it is determined that the increased number of balls flag 223m is ON (S4612: Yes), the increased number of balls flag 223m is set to OFF (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4614. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4612 that the increased number of balls flag 223m is not ON (S4612: No), the process of S4613 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4614.

In the processing of S4614, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot game executed this time is jackpot A (S4614). If it is determined that it is not a jackpot A (S4614: No), since the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, 1600 is set to the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j (S4615), and an ending command for display is issued. is set (S4616), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (S4614: No), the process of S4615 is skipped, the process of S4616 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the first variable prize winning device 650 can win the specific prize winning port 650a without missing any balls fired during the jackpot game. Even if the subtraction is executed, the processing load can be reduced because the difference from the number of prize balls actually obtained does not occur.

In this embodiment, the number of expected winning balls is subtracted for each round of the big win, but the invention is not limited to this. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 686, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 686 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small hit related process (S4504). In the small hit related process (S4504), a process of setting a display command for the small win to the display control device 113 is executed, and a process of subtracting the value of the remaining winning ball number counter 223j is executed.

In the small hit related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit start command is received (S4701). When it is determined that the small winning start command has been received (S4701: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S4702), and 16 is subtracted from the value of the remaining acquisition ball number counter 223j (S4703). The value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j to be subtracted here is a value obtained by adding the number of prize balls entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the number of prize balls for winning a small hit. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the number of prize balls for small hits are subtracted at the same time. You can By configuring in this way, the value of the remaining acquisition ball number counter 223j can be appropriately updated, and an abnormality can be confirmed by either processing. Next, based on the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j subtracted in the processing of S4703, a reduced acquired ball number command for display is set (S4704), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit no winning command has been received (S4705). The small winning no prize command is a command received from the main controller 110 when a small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbols and there is no winning of the second specific winning opening 65ab. If it is determined that the no small winning prize command has been received (S4705: Yes), the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is subtracted by 15 (S4706), and the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j subtracted in the processing of S4706 Based on (S4707), the acquired ball number command for display is set, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the no command for small winning prizes has been received (S4705: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4708). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4708: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4709), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4708 that the ending command has not been received (S4708: No), this process ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the small hit start command is received, the value of the remaining obtained ball number counter 223j is subtracted. By subtracting at the start timing of the small winning game in this way, the subtraction effect can be executed for a longer time. Further, the process of subtracting the value of the remaining obtained ball number counter 223j is not limited to the start timing of the small winning game, but is executed at the start timing of the small winning variation or the timing of winning the second specific winning opening 65ab. good too.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to win about 98% of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol, a time counter or the like is provided, and a process of subtracting at regular intervals is executed. You may By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 687, the remaining count update process (S4317) will be described. FIG. 687 is a flow chart showing the contents of this remaining count update process (S4317). This remaining count update process (S4317) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 683) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113. Alternatively, based on the reception of the remaining time short command, the content set in the remaining probability variable number of times area 223 o and the remaining time short number of times area 223 o is updated, and if it is the timing of the end of the latent certain state, the remaining A process of clearing the value of the acquired ball number counter 223j is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4317), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation count command has been received (S4801: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation count area 223o (S4802). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the potential state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4803).

That is, in the process of S4803, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent state or the variable probability state, and if it is determined to be the latent certainty state, an effect display exclusively for the latent certainty state, which will be described later. will be executed.

In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the data indicating the probability state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4803: Yes), the number of remaining probability changes notified (received) from the main controller 110 is 0 (S4804). In the processing of S4804, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 0 (S4804: Yes), the latent probability state end effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (S4805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is greater than 0 (S4806). If it is determined that the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is greater than 0 (S4806: Yes), the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is set as the difference from the expected acquired ball number (S4807). The difference set in S4807 is set as a display command, and notified to the player at the end effect of the latent certainty state. Next, the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is cleared (S4808), data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i (S4809), and the process proceeds to S4810. On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main controller 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0 times) (S4804: No), S4805 to S4809 Skip the process and move to the process of S4810.

In the processing of S4810, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4810). When it is determined that the short remaining time command has been received (S4810: Yes), the value corresponding to the command is stored in the short remaining time number area 223q (S4811). Next, it is determined whether the notified remaining number of times is 0 (S4812). When the notified remaining number of times is 0 (S4812: Yes), since it is the timing of the end of the high probability of the normal symbol, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i (S4813), and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, in the process of S4810, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has not been received (S4810: No), or in the process of S4812, the notified remaining number of times is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) If it is determined that (S4812: No), this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 688 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4111). This variable display setting process (FIG. 688, S4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 682) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 688, S4111), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 688, S4111), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4901). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4901: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S4905 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4902).

Next, in the processing of S4903, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S4304 of the command determination processing (Fig. 683, S4110) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. 223z to generate a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S4903). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4903 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 682). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4904).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the processing of S4909 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S4906). In the process of S4307 of the command determination process (Fig. 683, S4110), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the second 2 Set a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols (S4907).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4907 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 682). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4908).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4909). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4909: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S4909: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S4910).

In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (S4110 in FIG. 683), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4911), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the A1 embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 689 to 703. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 689, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 689 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 690, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 690 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 689) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 689) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 690, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in transfer setting processing (see FIG. 701(a)), which will be described later. A resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7502 in FIG. 701(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 691(b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 691(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 691(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 691(a). FIG. 691(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 691(b). FIG. 691(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 691(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 701 and 702. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 654, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that the details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 692 to 697, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 692 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 692, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 693(a). FIG. 693(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 693(b). FIG. 693(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 691 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 692, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 694(a). FIG. 694(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 692, the description continues. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 694(b), the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 694(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 692, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 695 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 692, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of remaining acquired balls for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a command for the number of remaining acquired balls for display (S6414: Yes), the command processing for the number of remaining acquired balls is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 696, the details of the remaining acquired ball number command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 696 is a flow chart showing remaining acquired ball number command processing (S6415). In this remaining acquired ball number command processing (S6415), a process corresponding to the display remaining acquired ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the remaining acquired ball number command processing (S6415), first, a remaining acquired ball number display data table corresponding to the remaining acquired ball number indicated by the display remaining acquired ball number command is determined, and the determined remaining acquired ball number display data is displayed. The table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7002).

Then, based on the remaining winning ball number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S7005), the remaining number of acquired balls command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 692, the description continues. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of remaining acquired balls for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a back image change command (S6416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 697, the details of the back image change command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 697 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7051). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7052), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7051 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7052. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7052, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7052, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no back image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). Otherwise (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 697(b). FIG. 697(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 691(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 693 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 693 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 693(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 698 to 700, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 698 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 698, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 699, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 700 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 698 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 691(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 701 and 702, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 701(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 701(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 701(b). FIG. 701(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in V interrupt processing (see FIG. 691(b)), command Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 692 to 697) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 698 to 700) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 702) (see S7501: No in FIG. 701(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 702 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 703, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 703 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 654) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 691(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment is configured to switch between the three game states, ie, the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, triggered by a big win or the like. Then, the probability state is set to the most advantageous game state. Specifically, compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 98%), in the latent state, other games It is configured to make it easier to execute the lottery of the second special symbol compared to the state. As a result, in the latent definite state, if the second special pattern is drawn by lottery, the probability of winning is almost small and the probability of winning a big win is increased, so the ball is made to enter the second specific winning port 65ab and the prize ball is entered. can be made more likely than other game states. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of transition to the latent certainty state.

However, in such a conventional game machine, although the remaining period of the latent state is indicated, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained by the end of the latent state is not indicated, and there is an expectation for the number of prize balls. It was difficult.

On the other hand, in the present A1 embodiment, when the game state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the latent state is displayed. Specifically, at least the number of prize balls that can be obtained (prize balls for entering the second ball entrance 640 for the prescribed number of times in the probability state + prize balls for small hits for the prescribed number of times in the probability state = 1600) display. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls that can be expected in the latent state at the time of transition to the game state, and has a sense of expectation for the specific number of prize balls. A game can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 65, which is to be released when a small win is won, is configured so as not to miss the launched game when released. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit (about 98%). Therefore, by calculating the number of prize balls based on the specified number of times, it is possible to show the expected number of prize balls to the player without difference from the number of prize balls that can actually be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more transparent game.

Furthermore, when a small win is won and a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in the second specific prize winning port 65ab, subtraction processing is not executed when the next and subsequent small wins change, and the number of prize balls displayed does not change. The difference may be adjusted, and an effect such as a performance that holds up without reducing the number of prize balls may be executed. In this way, by executing an effect in which the number of prize balls is not subtracted, it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he or she has been able to obtain a larger number of prize balls than expected. In addition, the game can be played with expectation that more prize balls will be obtained in the lottery in the future, and the interest in the game can be improved.

And, in this embodiment, the subtraction of the expected number of prize balls is executed at the start of the small winning game. By subtracting at the start of the small win game in this way, it is possible to set the subtraction effect for a longer period of time, and it is possible to show the player that the prize ball is obtained as expected in a more comprehensible manner. .

In this embodiment, since the second variable winning device 65 is configured so as not to miss any game balls, it starts subtracting the expected number of prize balls at the start of the small winning game, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be executed when the second specific winning port 65ab is won. Alternatively, a clock counter may be provided so as to decrement after a predetermined period of time (2 seconds, etc.) has elapsed. By configuring in this way, the subtraction can be performed smoothly, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the latent state, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the jackpot game is also shown to the player. Specifically, the number of prize balls is stored for each number of rounds of the jackpot, and when the jackpot variation is executed during the latent probability state, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained is read from the jackpot type, and that value is used. It is configured to be shown to the player. As a result, the player can grasp the specific numerical value of the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the big win, and it is possible to provide a more comprehensible game.

Further, when a jackpot is won during the latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is looped regardless of the type of jackpot won. With this configuration, 1600 are set as the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained again after the end of the big win, so that the player can easily understand that it is possible to obtain the number of prize balls again. and, moreover, it is possible to obtain the pleasure of increasing the number of prize balls. As a result, the player can continue playing the game with peace of mind, and the desire to continue playing the game can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the latent probability state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable probability state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the variable probability state, the ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and in the normal state and the latent state, the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 than the second ball entrance 640. may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state and the latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern, and in the variable state. , a variation pattern having an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the defined contents of the probability variation table 202f2 and the probability probability table 202f3 in the above-described A1 embodiment may be exchanged. Also, the normal state may be set as the most advantageous state instead of the latent probability state or the probability variable state.

In addition, in the present A1 embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, the game state is always changed to the probability variable state or the latent probability state, but not limited to this, a predetermined condition is established after the jackpot game is completed. It may be configured so that the game state shifts when the game is played. In addition, during the probability variable state or the latent probability state, when the lottery of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot, the game state is configured to shift to the normal state, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, even if the lottery has not been executed a predetermined number of times, the game state may be shifted based on the establishment of a predetermined condition such as the result of the lottery of the special figure. By constructing in this way, the player can have a thrilling feeling that the game state will change when, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the present A1 embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the latent state is shown numerically, but it is not limited to this. You may indicate the number of balls. For example, an effect may be executed in which circular foods such as donuts are eaten more and more, and the remaining prize balls are shown in the state of digestion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of giving wrong information to the player even when there is an error with the expected prize ball.

In addition, if there is an error between the number of expected prize balls and the number of prize balls actually obtained due to a defect, etc., the value of the error is counted and a certain number or more (for example, 50 balls) (above) If an error occurs, the number of prize balls may be configured not to be indicated. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game without feeling disappointment that the prize ball was not obtained as expected.

Further, it may be configured such that the player can set (select) whether or not to indicate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained, using an operation means that the player can operate. Thus, by allowing the player to set whether or not to indicate the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained, it is possible to provide a game property more suited to each player's taste.

In the present A1 embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. Also, if either the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol will win a big hit or a small hit until the big hit or small win is stopped. A compulsory lottery that never wins may be executed so that the result of the lottery is always a loss. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are elected as a big win or a small win. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining time reduction number are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a fair game to the players.

<A2 Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 704 to 735. FIG. In the above-described A1 embodiment, the game state is a high probability of special symbols, and the low probability state of normal symbols is set. A game in which a game is executed with the aim of entering a ball into the mouth 640, and a game in which the number of balls is increased by a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol has become an advantageous game method for the player. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is constructed so that a small prize is won at about 98%. In addition, the second specific winning opening 65ab of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter for a predetermined period (0.6 seconds x 2 times) due to the small hit, and further, the second special symbol. By providing variable time and two specific prize winning ports, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the second specific prize winning port 65ab can be won without missing anything. rice field.

By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the latent state is the number of prize balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640 for the prescribed number of times (100 times) in the latent state. (100 balls), it is possible to easily calculate the number of prize balls (1500 balls) due to the small hits for the prescribed number of times (100 times) in the latent state, and the calculated value is given to the player during the latent state. By showing the score that can be obtained in the , it was configured so that it was possible to specifically grasp not only the period of time that the latent state would last, but also the benefits that could be expected to be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present A2 embodiment, not only the number of winning balls (privilege) that can be obtained, but also the period of how long the latent state will continue, allows the player to have a sense of expectation. Specifically, when the attacker 650 wins, or when the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 wins over with a small hit, etc., the third symbol display device 81 displays the The number of times of remaining probability variation of the effect which is performed is displayed by increasing or decreasing.

In addition, during the latent state, the variation time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to 1 second, and the game can be executed efficiently. . On the other hand, in the lottery for the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the variation time (dynamic display period) due to the loss is set to 1 second, like the variation time for the second special symbol. However, 10 minutes is set as the variation time for winning the special symbol, which makes the game inefficient. And, in this embodiment, since the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so as not to win a small prize, the number of balls in hand does not increase even if the game is continued with the first special symbol. Therefore, for the player, executing the lottery for the first special symbol during the hidden certainty state is a disadvantageous game method with a large demerit.

However, if a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 even in the latent state, the remaining number of times in the latent state will be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, so the player may mistakenly enter the first ball into the first ball entrance 64. If this is done, the remaining number of times in the latent certainty state will be subtracted at that time, which may cause the player to feel disappointed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment, the subtraction of the remaining number of times due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the latent state is configured to be executed when the fluctuation is stopped. By configuring in this way, even if the ball is accidentally entered into the first ball entrance 64 during the latent state, the remaining number of times is not subtracted until the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops. A sense of security can be given to the player.

The pachinko machine 10 of the A2 embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 of the A1 embodiment in that the arrangement position of the first variable winning device 650 on the game board 13 is the right-handed area (second area). ) Moved from the top to the bottom of the right-handed area, changed the structure of the second variable winning device 65, and replaced the two specific winning ports 65ab provided in the second variable winning device 65 with one specific winning port 65a. , the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the main controller 110, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the content of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the voice lamp The content of the RAM 223 provided in the control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 704, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 704 is a front view of the board surface 13 in Embodiment A2. As shown in FIG. 704, in the A2 embodiment, the first variable winning device 650 arranged above the right side area (second area) of the game board 13 is replaced with the right side area (second area) in the A1 embodiment. ) The difference is that the second specific winning opening 65ab, which is two winning openings provided in the second variable winning device 65, is replaced with one specific winning opening 65a.

Although the details will be described later, in the A2 embodiment, the number of remaining probability variations notified to the player during the latent probability state is configured to increase or decrease according to the establishment of the game condition. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when a ball is shot aiming at the left area (first area) of the game board, a flow path is formed by a nail, a pinwheel, or the like. A flow path is formed with a nail, a pinwheel, or the like so that a prize can be won at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Also, when a game is executed aiming at the right side area (second area) of the game board 13, it is possible to enter the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 650, and the second variable winning device 65. .

In this embodiment, as described above in the A1 embodiment, when the game state is a normal game state (low probability of special symbols: low probability of normal symbols), when the jackpot is won, the latent state with a probability of about 68% (See FIG. 7). In addition, when a jackpot is won from the latent certainty state, the 100% latent certainty state is looped. In the hidden game state ST3 shown in YZ3 of FIG. 7, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, so the second special symbol is drawn. A right-handed game in which a game is executed with the aim of winning a prize in the second ball entrance 640, which is a trigger for execution, is a game method with great merit for the player.

Then, as the game progresses, when the number of lotteries for the special symbols reaches the specified number of times (100 times) without winning the jackpot, the game state changes from the hidden state to the normal game state ST1 indicated by YZ1 in FIG. Transition. In this embodiment, information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state is notified to the player, and the remaining number of times is indicated to the player when the game condition is satisfied. configured to increase or decrease By configuring in this way, the player can play the game with expectation that the remaining period will be extended.

The first variable winning device 650 is set to be in an open state in which a game ball can enter a specific winning hole 650a when winning a special symbol jackpot, or a small win A or a small win B. This first variable prize winning device 650 wins a jackpot, and when one game ball enters the specific prize winning port 650a, 16 prize balls are paid out, and when five balls win, one round ends and the first variable prize winning device. Configure 650 to be closed. Also, in the case of winning a small prize, when one game ball wins, the first variable prize winning device 650 is closed for 10 prize balls.

In this way, the first variable winning device 650 is determined to be closed when the opening period set for each type of big win or small win elapses, or when a prescribed number of balls wins a prize. However, during a big win or a small win, there are cases where more balls than the specified number of balls are won (so-called over-winning). In this case, more prize balls than expected are paid out. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the small win A or the small win B is won, and the first variable prize winning device 650 wins over, the additional effect of the remaining probability change number is executed, which will be described in detail later. be.

The second variable prize winning device 65 is a variable prize winning device that changes to an open state so that a game ball can enter when a small win C is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. Then, the second electric accessory 65b is changed to a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter when a prescribed period (3 seconds) elapses or when one ball is won in the second specific prize winning port 65b. do. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second variable prize winning device 65 wins, it is determined whether or not an additional effect is executed based on the number of small wins won during the latent state so far ( See S5104 in FIG. 728).

In addition, in the present A2 embodiment, the entrance for efficiently executing the game is different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal state, the gaming method of executing the lottery of the first special symbol toward the first ball entrance 64b1 that can always enter the game ball is an efficient gaming method, and the variable probability state In some cases, the normal pattern is in a high probability state, so that the electric accessory 64a is set to be easily opened (a game ball can be entered). Therefore, during the variable probability state, the game method of executing the lottery for the first special symbol aiming at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is an efficient game method. In addition, as described above, during the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set as short as 0.5 seconds to 5 seconds. is an efficient game method. By thus providing a ball entrance that enables efficient execution of the game according to the game state, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the game state. Also, as the player gets used to the game, it becomes easier to remember which ball entrance to aim at, and the possibility of executing the wrong game method can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 705, the game flow in the present A2 embodiment will be described. Fig. 705 shows that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the normal state (low probability of special symbols: low probability state of normal symbols), which is the gaming state set as the initial state, is set. An example of the game flow when winning a jackpot (jackpot B) in which the game state shifts to a latent state (high probability of special patterns: low probability state of normal patterns) in the lottery of the pattern (special pattern 1). It is a timing chart shown. As shown in FIG. 705, in this A2 embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot B to jackpot D, the second special symbol jackpot E to shift to the latent state or set the latent state again Information for indicating the period from the ending of the jackpot game (see FIG. 705(a)) to the end of the latent certainty state, when the jackpot type of the jackpot G is won, until the latent certainty state ends. (Remaining number of times) is configured to be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, 100 times is set as the specified number of times of the latent state. Then, the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times as many times as the specified number of times, and when the specified number of times is performed without winning the jackpot, the state is shifted to the normal state. In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays information for indicating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times of the latent certainty state is completed.

Although the specified number of times actually set is 100, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times less than the specified number of times is displayed (see FIG. 705(a)). The value is configured to increase or decrease when the game condition is satisfied. In this way, by executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the remaining number of times, the game can be executed with a sense of anticipation as to how long the latent state, which is advantageous for the player, will continue, and the desire to continue the game can be improved. I can. In the present embodiment, 80 times are displayed as the number of display remaining probability variations at the time of the ending of the jackpot. may be configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to randomly set the number of display remaining probability variation times, and the player can be interested in which number of times is selected, and the interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, you may set for every jackpot classification which was elected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 705(a), 80 times is set as the display remaining probability variation number at the time of the ending of the jackpot game. Then, every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the number of times is subtracted and displayed. In addition, every time the special symbol starts to change, a lottery is conducted to see if the display count will increase or decrease (see S5006 in FIG. 726). An additional (increase) production of is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the increase/decrease performance of the display remaining probability variation count is executed with the establishment of the game condition as an opportunity other than when the special symbols start to vary. As shown in FIG. 705(b), when winning the small hit C in the lottery of the second special symbol and winning the second variable winning device 65, the display calculation probability variation number of times is increased by "+5". Information is displayed to indicate that the

Here, the display screen when winning the second specific winning opening 65a during the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 706(a). In the A2 embodiment, an increase/decrease point 815 is displayed as information indicating that the number of remaining displays has increased or decreased when the game condition is met. If this increase/decrease point 815 is the increase/decrease point 815 indicating addition, it is displayed so as to be absorbed in the remaining number of times displayed in the second guidance display area Dm4. It also shows in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining number of times has increased. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 acquires the treasure 816 and displays an effect of being happy. !” is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the number of remaining display times has increased in an easy-to-understand manner. Since other display elements are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 705, the description continues. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a small win is won, and there are more wins than the specified count value in the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 65a. When it is determined as (over winning), when the special symbol next to the over winning small winning game fluctuates, the number of times of display is added to the effect (see FIG. 705 (c)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 706(b), the display screen when over winning is won in the small winning game in the latent state will be described. When an over-win is made in the latent state, a running character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the character 811 noticing the unknown object 817 is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Wow!?" With this configuration, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation that something will happen in the future.

Next, with reference to FIG. 707(a), the display screen when the next small winning variation stops after winning over during the latent state will be described. In the present embodiment, the next small winning variation is executed after over winning, and the additional performance is executed when the variation stops. As shown in FIG. 707(a), the main display area Dm shows that the character 811 has acquired a treasure 816 and is happy, and the sub-display area shows that the number of remaining displays has increased. The characters "GET!!" are displayed as a notification mode for Also, an increase/decrease point 815 indicating that the remaining display count has increased is added to the remaining display count displayed in the second guide display area Dm4, and the increase in the remaining display count is notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the increase/decrease point 815 indicating that the number of remaining display times has increased is displayed when an over-win is achieved. may be configured to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player why the number of remaining displays has increased in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby providing a transparent game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that an additional effect is executed at the time of the next change after over winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode after the next change may be configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, the additional performance can be executed at a timing unexpected by the player, and an unexpected game can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 707(b), the display screen when the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is 0 and the value of the actual number of times of remaining probability variation remains in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 707(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability change is 0 and the value of the actual number of times of remaining probability change remains. As shown in FIG. 707(b), when the value of the substantial remaining probability variation number is greater than 0, when the value of the remaining probability variation number becomes 0, the remaining effect displayed in the second guide area Dm4 Characters of "Remaining DANGER" are displayed as a display mode indicating that it is not known when the remaining period ends. As a result, the player can play the game with a thrilling feeling that the latent certainty state will end when. A character 811 running in haste is displayed in the main display area Dm, and characters "DANGER" are displayed so as to scroll from left to right in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by presenting a dangerous presentation mode, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of urgency.

In the present embodiment, the effect that adds the number of times of residual probability change to the effect is executed. However, by executing the effect mode shown in FIG. 707(b), even though the effect remaining probability variation count has become 0, the latent guaranteed game state continues, etc., providing an uncomfortable effect. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the value of the remaining probability variation number of times is 0 and the value of the actual remaining probability variation number of times remains, the characters "DANGER" are displayed as the number of the remaining probability variation of the effects. However, after the number of times of residual probability change becomes 0, it is also possible to execute an additional effect of adding the value of the actual number of times of residual probability change in the next and subsequent special pattern fluctuations. Also, the number of additions may be determined by lottery or the like. By constructing in this way, the player can obtain unexpected joy by continuing the latent guaranteed game state which was thought to have ended. In addition, even when the number of remaining probability variations becomes small, the player can have a sense of expectation that the game will be revived, and the desire to continue playing the game can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 705, the description continues. The latent probability state game continues, and when the actual remaining probability variation number reaches 70 times, as shown in FIG. Details will be described later, but during the period of the super rush (between 60 and 70 times of the remaining probability variation), the second special symbol variation time (dynamic display period) is shorter than the remaining probability variation frequency period. It is a period that is set and there is a possibility that the number of balls will increase in a short period of time. Further, as described above, during the latent state, the remaining display count, which is information indicating the remaining period, is displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 707(a)). , during the period of this super rush, the display is switched to the information indicating the privilege that can be expected to be obtained during this latent state (see FIG. 708(a)).

Now, with reference to FIG. 708(a), the super rush start screen will be described. FIG. 708(a) is a diagram schematically showing a screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of super rush. As described above, when the remaining probability variation number is 70 times, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, and is set shorter than the other remaining probability variation number period, and it is a period in which the number of balls may increase in a short period of time. Enter a super rush mode. When entering the super RUSH mode, a disheartened character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the character 811 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as "Do your best!" is displayed. Also, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display mode "246" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed.

Then, in the second guide area Dm4, the display is switched from the remaining count display that was displayed before the start of the super rush to the points (the number of prize balls) that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state. there is Also, in the left area of the main display area Dm, there is an acquisition point 818 indicated by characters "-15pt" indicating the number of prize balls won by the small hit won by the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 705(d). An effect mode is executed in which the acquired points 818 are sucked into the second guide area Dm4 displayed with the characters "remaining acquired pt 1050pt". As a result, the value of the earned points 818 is subtracted from the remaining expected earned points displayed in the second guide area Dm4. As mentioned above, during the Super Rush, the display is switched from the remaining number display that was displayed before the start of the Super Rush to the points (number of prize balls) that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state. Each time a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of prize balls (15 balls in the case of a small hit) is displayed to be subtracted. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp that the number of prize balls has been obtained in this super rush, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 708(b), a display screen when a jackpot is won during the super rush period will be described. FIG. 708(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when a jackpot is won during the super rush period. In the main display area Dm, the character 811, which had been displayed as if he was fainting at the start of the super rush (see FIG. 708(a)), is displayed as being enveloped in flames and resurrected. In the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations!!" are displayed to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that he or she has won the special symbol jackpot. Also, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the symbol "333" is displayed, indicating that the big hit is won by the variation of the second special symbol. In addition, in the left area of the main display area Dm, the acquired points 818 indicating that the jackpot has been won are displayed in the form of "+V". The jackpot game points are added and displayed in the display mode of "remaining acquired points ↑↑".

In this way, when a jackpot is won during the super rush, the value is displayed in the second guide area Dm4 as information indicating the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the super rush effect is started, the remaining number display is switched to the expected winning ball number display. You may make it switch from. By switching the display mode during the super rush, the interest of the player can be more attracted.

In addition, although the second guidance area Dm4 is configured to display specific numerical values of benefits expected to be acquired, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presentation mode has a story, such as donuts being eaten and decreasing. may indicate that the number of prize balls to be obtained is subtracted. Further, it may be configured such that the player can switch between the display of the number of remaining won winning balls and the remaining number of times by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 709(a), the flow of the game when the display remaining probability variation count is subtracted will be described. FIG. 709(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the subtraction effect executed when the actual remaining probability change count and the displayed remaining probability change count become the same value due to the addition effect. In this embodiment, as described above, when the second variable winning device 65 wins, or when the next variation stops after over winning the specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 65a, various When a game condition is satisfied, a presentation is executed to add the display remaining probability change number. However, if only the additional effect is executed, the display remaining probability change frequency catches up with the actual remaining probability change frequency, and there is a possibility that the additional effect is not executed at all from the middle of the latent probability state. Further, when the number of display residual probability changes becomes 0 while the number of display residual probability changes is larger than the actual residual probability change frequency, the latent probability state suddenly ends even though the display residual probability change frequency still remains. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust. In order to prevent such a fear, in the present embodiment, when the value of the display remaining probability variation count becomes a value equal to or greater than the actual remaining probability variation count, it is determined whether or not to execute the subtraction effect (see FIG. 726). (see S5015).

As shown in FIG. 709 (a) (1), in the case where the actual remaining probability variation count is set to 73 times and the display remaining probability variation count is set to 68 times, if the additional effect of "+5 times" is selected, The number of remaining probability variations and the number of display remaining probability variations are the same as 73 times. In this way, when the actual residual probability variation frequency and the displayed residual probability variation frequency become the same value, it is determined whether or not the subtraction performance is selected at the start of variation of the second special symbol. Then, when the subtraction effect is selected, the effect of subtracting the display remaining probability change number is executed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols shown in FIG. 709(a)(2), 70 times, which is the same value as the actual remaining number of times, is displayed as the remaining display number of times, but FIG. 705(a)(3). When the variation is stopped as shown in , an effect display of "-5 times" is displayed, and the display remaining probability variation count is reduced to 65 times.

Here, with reference to FIG. 709(b), the display screen when the subtraction effect is executed will be described. FIG. 709(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the subtraction effect is executed. When the subtraction effect is executed, an increase/decrease point 815 indicating "-5 times" is displayed in the main display area Dm from the second guidance display area Dm4 so as to inform the player that the number of remaining display times has decreased. It is easy to understand. Then, in the second guidance region Dm4, "65 G left" and the value selected in the current subtraction effect are subtracted from the remaining display remaining number and displayed. In addition, in the main display area Dm, a chagrin character 811 is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the character "Unfortunate" is displayed, making it easier for the player to understand that the remaining number of times has decreased. showing.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine (discriminate) whether or not to execute the subtraction effect at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Also when other game conditions are established, the subtraction effect may be executed. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game with a feeling of throbbing, not knowing when it will be subtracted, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 705 to 709, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot where the game state shifts to the latent certainty state is won, more A small number of times (80 times) is displayed as the display remaining probability variation number. A lottery for special symbols, a lottery based on the number of small wins that have been won in the second variable prize winning device 65, and an over-win in a specific winning port, etc. Executes a production that adds the number of times of probability variation. In addition, when the value of the display residual probability variation number becomes equal to or more than the actual residual probability variation number value, it is determined whether or not to execute the subtraction production at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and if the subtraction production is selected , Perform the subtraction of the display remaining probability variation number of the next special symbol.

In this way, by executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of display remaining probability variations, the player can execute the game with a sense of expectation that the latent probability state may be continued for a long time, and the player can enjoy the game. It can improve willingness to participate. In this embodiment, the additional effect is configured to execute the additional effect of the number of remaining display times when the special pattern starts to fluctuate. Alternatively, it may be executed at the end of the small winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of remaining probability variations, but it is not limited to this, and the benefits that can be expected to be obtained during the latent probability state (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the latent probability state ) may be configured to execute an increase/decrease effect. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having both the expectation that he will be able to execute more benefits and the nervous feeling that the benefits will be reduced. , can improve the interest of the game.

Also, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, either the first variable winning device 650 or the second variable winning device 65 is specified according to the type of the won small win. It is configured to be in an open state in which game balls can enter the winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 65a. When one ball enters the specific winning hole 650a or the second specific winning hole 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out. As described above, when executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent state, the number of prize balls of 15 balls is subtracted at the end of the small winning game.

In the case of executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during the latent definite state, the number of prize balls set to the specific prize winning port 650a and the second specific prize winning port 65a should be set to different values. . For example, when winning a small prize and entering the specific winning hole 650a, 10 prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when winning the second specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are set. Then, the difference in the number of prize balls set there is used for the increase/decrease effect of the number of prize balls to be obtained.

Specifically, a small win is won in the variation of the second special symbol during the latent certainty state, and the process of subtracting the number of prize balls obtained at the end of the small win game is executed. Even when 65a is won and 15 prize balls are actually obtained, subtraction display is performed from the expected acquisition points as if 10 prize balls were obtained. A counter for counting and accumulating 5 balls, which is the difference between the actual number of prize balls and the number of displayed prize balls, is provided, and the number of prize balls to be added from the value of the counter is calculated when performing the performance of adding the number of prize balls. It should be configured to select. By constructing in this way, when executing the performance of adding the expected number of prize balls to be obtained, the additional performance is executed without causing a large difference between the number of prize balls that can actually be expected to be obtained and the expected number of prize balls to be obtained. can do.

Further, the display remaining probability variation count and the expected number of prize balls to be won may be configured to be switched and displayed by operating an operation means that the player can operate. By configuring in this way, more information can be provided to the player. In addition, the player himself/herself can decide the display mode, and the width of the game can be expanded.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the A2 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 710 to 717, the electrical configuration of the A2 embodiment will be described. In the A2 embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed from the above-described A1 embodiment, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 are changed. is changed. Other points are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 710 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202fa in the present A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 710, the variation pattern selection 2 table 202fa replaces the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 641(a)) of the above-described A1 embodiment with the latency 2 table 202f3. It is different from the above-described A1 embodiment in that it is replaced with 202fa1 and that a long small winning table 202fa2 is provided. In each table shown in FIGS. 711 and 712, the variation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in units of seconds in order to facilitate understanding.

Here, with reference to FIG. 711, the contents of the second table for latency confirmation 202fa1 will be described. The probability 2 table 202fa1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the probability state is set as the game state. The difference is that the variable time differs depending on (the value of the probability variable counter 203k). In addition, it differs in that the variation time is short with respect to the long small hit table 202fa2 (see FIG. 712) described later.

As shown in FIG. 711, in the first special symbol jackpot, when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 to 100, the variation type counter CS1 can take the whole range of values (0 to 198) per variation (600 seconds) are associated and defined. In addition, in the deviation of the first special symbol, when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 to 100, the deviation variation (600 seconds) for the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) are defined in association with each other.

Although details will be described later, in the A2 embodiment, the game state is updated not at the start of fluctuation but at the stop of fluctuation in the lottery of the first special symbols in the latent state. That is, the subtraction process of the remaining number of latent definite states is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (see S752 in FIG. 720). As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the present A2 embodiment is set to a long fluctuation of 600 seconds (10 minutes), so the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the latent state. , the remaining count is not decremented until 600 seconds later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a longer probability state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, the variation time of the second special symbol is a winning judgment result, and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is "71 to 100" or "31 to 59", the variation type counter CS1 can take. A full range of values (0 to 198) is associated with semi-variation (1 second). In addition, when the result of the judgment is a small hit, a small hit semi-variation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. Further, when the result of the judgment is out of line, a semi-out of range (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Then, if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is in the range of "60 to 70" and the result of the success/failure determination is hit, the hit short against the whole range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) A variation (0.5 seconds) is associated and defined. In addition, when the result of the judgment is a small hit, a small hit short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. . In addition, when the result of the judgment is out of range, the out of range short variation (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1.

As described above with reference to FIG. 708, when the value of the variable probability counter 203k is in the "60 to 70" during the latent probability state, the super RUSH mode is executed. Thus, when the value of the variable probability counter 203k is in the range of "60 to 70", by setting a variation time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the variation time set with other range values, This is a period in which the player can efficiently execute the game in a short period of time, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time during the super RUSH mode (the variation time when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is in the range value of "60 to 70") is the variation set during another latent probability gaming state Although the variable time is configured to be shorter than the time, the variable time is not limited to this, and may be configured to be longer than the variable time set during other latent certain game states. In this way, when a long variation time is set, it becomes possible to execute various effects, and the interest in the game is improved.

Returning to FIG. 711, the description continues. If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is in the range of "1 to 30", and the result of the success or failure determination is a hit, a long variation ( 4 seconds) are associated with each other. In addition, when the result of the determination is a small hit, a small hit long fluctuation (4 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, when the result of the judgment is out, long fluctuation (4 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Thus, when the remaining period of the latent probability state is short (when the value of the probability variable counter 203k is small), when the remaining period of the latent probability state is long (when the value of the probability variable counter 203k is large), a long fluctuation By setting the time, it is possible to make it easier to execute the effect mode indicating that the remaining period of the latent state is short, and to show the player that the remaining period of the latent state is short in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when selecting a variation pattern with reference to the 2 table 202fa1 for probability, the variation pattern is configured to be selected based on the value of the probability variation counter 203k and the value of the variation type counter CS1, Without being limited to this, even when selecting a variation pattern based on the probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern based on the value of the probability variation counter 203k and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to select a variation pattern based on the remaining period of the game state, it is possible to provide the player with various game properties.

Next, with reference to FIG. 712, the contents of the long small winning table 202fa2 will be described. This long small hit table 202fa2 is, during the latent state, when a specific small hit type (small hit A in this embodiment) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the latent that has been referred to so far. It is a variation pattern table that is referenced by switching from the definite 2 table 202fa1 (see S1253 in FIG. 722), and the value of the definite variable counter 203k for the definite 2 table 202fa1 is "71 to 100" or " 31 to 59”, the difference is that 1.2 seconds is defined as the variation time based on all the pass/fail judgment results. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is in the range of "71 to 100" or "31 to 59", the variation time longer than the variation pattern selected with reference to the probability 2 table 202fa1 A variation pattern is selected. In this way, even when the value of the variable probability counter 203k is large, by setting a long variation time, it is possible to execute a longer performance mode, and it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the player. be. Then, after switching to the long small hit table 202fa2 is executed, and when a specific small hit type (in this embodiment, a small hit A) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variation to be referred to The pattern table is switched again to the latent identification 2 table 202fa1.

In this embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to switch the variation pattern table when a specific small hit type is won, but without being limited to this, the lottery of the second special symbol It may be configured to switch the variation pattern table when a result (for example, in the case of being out) is obtained. Further, the variation pattern table may be switched not only when the lottery for the second special symbol but also when the lottery for the first special symbol has a specific result. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to switch the variation pattern table on various occasions, and the player can enjoy various variation patterns.

Next, with reference to FIG. 713, details of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ae in the present A2 embodiment will be described. Small hit type selection 2 table 202ae in the present A2 embodiment, relative to the small hit type selection table 202e in the A1 embodiment, the point that added the small hit type, the release target that is set based on the small hit type The difference is that the variable winning device (attacker) is changed. About other points, since it is the content same as the small hit classification selection table 202e in 1st A1 embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 713, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit A" in the range of "0 to 39". During the small winning game, the opening and closing plate 650f (see FIG. 704) of the first variable winning device 650 (first attacker) is 0.6 seconds x 2 times, and the game ball is the first specific winning opening. It is a small hit type that is set to an open state in which it is possible to enter 650a. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, since the random number value that becomes the "small hit A" is 40, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit A" is obtained. is determined is 40% (40/100).

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit B" in the range of "40 to 89". During the small winning game, the opening and closing plate 650f (see FIG. 704) of the first variable winning device 650 (first attacker) is 0.8 seconds x 2 times, and the game ball is the first specific winning hole. It is a small hit type that is set to an open state in which it is possible to enter 650a. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, 50 random numbers become the "small hit B", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit B". is determined 50% (50/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "small hit C". In this "small hit C", the second electric accessory 65b (see Fig. 704) of the second variable prize winning device 65 (second attacker) is 3 seconds x 1 time, and the game ball enters the second specific prize winning port 65a. It is a small hit type that is set to a possible open state. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, 10 random numbers become ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning C''. The proportion is 10% (10/100).

Thus, in the present A2 embodiment, three small hit types are defined, and the player can be entertained with various small hit types. In addition, since the variable winning device to which the open state is set differs according to the type of small win, it is easy for the player to know which type of small win has been won. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when the "small hit C" is won and the game ball wins the second specific prize winning port 65a of the second variable prize winning device, based on the number of small hits so far, A process for determining whether or not to execute an effect is executed (see S5104 in FIG. 728). Since this "small win C" has a longer opening period of the variable winning device (3 seconds) than the other small win types, it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole than the other small win types. It is configured. In addition, since the number of prize balls (15 balls) larger than that for winning the first specific prize winning opening 65a is set, the player can execute the game while desiring to win the "small win C". Become.

In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the kind of small hit might become three types, it may be comprised so that it may become two or less types, and may be four or more types, without restricting to this. By constructing in this way, it is possible to arouse interest in the player as to which sub-win has been won, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 714, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 714 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 714, the RAM 203 in Embodiment A2 differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in Embodiment A1 (see FIG. 645) in that a switching flag 203aa is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The switching flag 203aa is set to ON when the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched from the latent 2 table 202fa1 to the long small winning table 202fa2 based on the winning of the small winning A in the second special symbol lottery. (see S1254 in FIG. 722). With this switching flag 203aa turned on, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, this switching flag 203aa is set to off (see S1255 in FIG. 722), and the variation pattern table is changed again to the second table for confirmation. 202fa1 is executed (see S1256 in FIG. 722). As a result, the variation pattern table can be switched again at the next variation after switching the variation pattern table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 715(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 715(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 22 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 715(a), the ROM 222 in the present A2 embodiment has an additional effect table 222aa and a second specific winning opening for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the A1 embodiment (see FIG. 646(a)). The difference is that an additional effect selection table 222ab and a effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table 222ac are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 716(a), details of the additional effect table 222aa in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 716(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 222aa in the present A2 embodiment. This add-on performance table 222aa is a table referred to when determining the type of add-on effect to be executed during the latent probability state, and is a difference value indicating the difference between the actual remaining probability variation number of times and the effect remaining probability variation number of times. The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223h. This additional effect is an effect that adds (adds) the value of the number of times of remaining probability variation displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 during the latent probability state, and for each type of additional effect A different value (a value to be added (added)) is set.

This additional effect table 222aa, in the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (see S4351 in FIG. 726) in the latent certainty state, when it is determined that the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is less than the value of the number of times of real remaining probability variation ( S5003 in FIG. 726: Yes), and when the winning ending command is received during the latent state (see S5263 in FIG. 730).

As shown in FIG. 716(a), the add-on effect table 222aa in the present A2 embodiment is different in the add-on effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation frequency and the value of the effect remaining probability variation frequency. is set to Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "1 to 40" and the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional performance is executed. If the value of the effect counter 223h is "100 to 179", the additional effect A (number of additions +5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (number of additions +10 times) is set as an additional effect.

When the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 49", the additional performance is not executed, and the performance When the value of the counter 223h is "50 to 149", an additional effect A (number of additions +5) is set as an additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "150 to 198", an additional effect B (number of times of addition +10 times) is set as an additional effect.

Furthermore, if the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional performance C (addition number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "100 to 198", an additional effect D (number of additions +40 times) is set as an additional effect.

As described above, in the present A2 embodiment, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is calculated, and based on the calculated difference value, the type of additional production is selected. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional production suitable for the display situation of the production remaining probability variation number of times in the latent probability state. In addition, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the number of times of the production remaining probability variation, the more the additional production is set to be easily executed. When there is a divergence (when the difference value increases), the difference can be made easier to converge. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect display in the latent probability state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change frequency remains large even though the value of the effect residual probability variation frequency is "0". can.

Furthermore, in this A2 embodiment, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number, the larger the value added (added) in one additional performance. there is Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation count and the value of the effect residual probability variation count deviate greatly (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the performance display in the latent probability state due to a large value of the substantial remaining probability variation frequency remaining despite the fact that the value of the performance remaining probability variation frequency is "0". be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 716(b), the details of the additional effect selection table 222ab for the second specific winning opening in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 716(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ab for the second specific winning opening in the present A2 embodiment. This second specific winning opening additional effect selection table 222ab wins a specific small winning type (small winning C) in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, and the game ball is the second variable winning device 65. is a table referred to when determining the type of additional effect when winning the second specific winning port 65a, and is a table for adding effect based on the value of the small win number counter 203ad and the value of the effect counter 203h. A type is selected.

This second specific winning opening additional effect selection table 222ab is used when it is determined in the second ball entering process (see S4356 of FIG. S5102 in FIG. 728: Yes), it is referred (S5105 in FIG. 728).

As shown in FIG. 716(b), the addition effect selection table 222ab for the second specific winning opening in the present A2 embodiment is the addition effect selected based on the value of the small hit frequency counter 203ad and the value of the effect counter 203h. The types are set differently. Specifically, when the value of the small hit number counter 203ad is "0 to 40" and the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional production is not executed, and the value of the production counter 223h is " 100 to 179", an additional effect A (the number of additions +5) is set as an additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (number of times of addition +10 times) is set as an additional effect.

When the value of the small hit frequency counter 203ad is "21 to 50" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 49", the additional effect is not executed and the value of the effect counter 223h is "50 to 149". In the case of , an additional performance A (the number of additions +5) is set as the additional performance. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "150 to 198", an additional effect B (number of times of addition +10 times) is set as an additional effect.

Furthermore, when the value of the small hit number counter 203ad is "51 or more" and the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional performance is not executed, and the value of the performance counter 223h is "100 to 179". In the case of , an additional performance A (the number of additions +5) is set as the additional performance. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (number of additions +10 times) is set as an additional effect.

In this way, when winning the second specific winning hole 65a, an additional effect is executed based on the value of the small winning number counter 203ad and the value of the effect counter 203h. By executing the additional performance based on the number of small wins in this way, the player can play the game while desiring to win more small wins, and the willingness to participate in the game is improved.

Next, details of the effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table 222ac in the present A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 717 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table 222ac in the present A2 embodiment. This effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table 222ac is a table that is referred to when determining the type of subtraction effect to be executed during the latent probability state, and is the value of the effect remaining probability variation count and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h. The type of subtraction effect is selected based on and. This subtraction effect is a effect of subtracting the value of the number of times of remaining probability change displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 during the latent probability state, and a different value for each type of subtraction effect ( value to be subtracted) is set.

This effect residual probability variation count subtraction table 222ac is determined in the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (see S4351 in FIG. 726) during the latent probability state that the value of the effect residual probability variation count is greater than or equal to the value of the substantial residual probability variation count. If so (S5013 in FIG. 726: Yes), it is referred to (S5015 in FIG. 726).

As shown in FIG. 717, the effect remaining probability variation count subtraction table 222ac in the present A2 embodiment is set so that the subtraction effect type selected according to the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is different. Specifically, when the number of times of production remaining probability variation is 21 or more and the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 99", the subtraction production is not executed, and the value of the production counter 223h is "100 to 189". In this case, a subtraction effect A (the number of times of subtraction - 5 times) is set as an additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223h is "190 to 199", the subtraction effect B (the number of times of subtraction - 10 times) is set as the subtraction effect. On the other hand, when the number of times the effect remaining probability variation is 20 times or less, no subtraction effect is defined for the entire range of possible values (0 to 199).

As described above, in the present A2 embodiment, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is calculated, and based on the calculated difference value, the type of added production is selected. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional effect suitable for the display situation of the number of times of production remaining probability change in the latent state, but if the value of the number of times of production remaining probability change exceeds the value of the actual number of times of probability change , is configured so that the additional effect is not executed. Therefore, even if the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is large, if the value of the remaining number of productions becomes a larger value, the additional production will not be executed, and there is a risk that the remaining latent probability game will become monotonous. there were. However, in the present embodiment, when the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation exceeds the value of the actual number of times of probability variation, the additional production can be executed again by executing the subtraction production of the number of times of production remaining probability variation. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the effect remaining probability changes is small (20 times or less), the subtraction effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to subtraction from the value of the number of times of the remaining probability variation of the effect that is small.

Next, with reference to FIG. 715(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 715(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 715(b), the RAM 223 in the present A2 embodiment has a remaining probability variation count display flag 223aa and an additional effect flag for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the A1 embodiment (see FIG. 646(b)). 223ab, additional effect type storage area 223ac, small hit number counter 223ad, over winning flag 223ae, remaining winning ball number display flag 223af, rush flag 223ag, subtraction effect type storage area 223ah, subtraction effect flag 223ai, effect probability variable number area 223aj is newly added. Since other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number displaying flag 223aa is a flag for indicating a period in which the number of remaining probability variations is displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 (see FIG. 706(a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. is set, the number of times of remaining probability variation is displayed. In the ending process (see S5211 in FIG. 730), the remaining probability variation count display flag 223aa determines that the jackpot won this time is a jackpot that shifts the gaming state to the latent probability state after the jackpot game ends ( S5252 in FIG. 730: Yes), further, when it is determined that the flag 223ca during the display of the number of remaining probability variations is not set to ON (S5253 in FIG. 730: Yes), it is set to ON (S5256 in FIG. 730), , In the ending process (see FIG. 730), it is referred to when determining whether the current winning game is a winning game capable of executing an additional effect (S5253 in FIG. 730). Then, in the state command process 2 (see S4314 in FIG. 727), when the state command indicating that the game state has changed from the latent state to the normal state is received (S4531 in FIG. 727: Yes), it is set to OFF. (S4532 in FIG. 727).

The additional effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where the additional effect is executed, and when it is set to ON, the variable display setting process 2 (Fig. 732 S4112 reference) is executed, the addition production is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4736 in FIG. 733) executed in the fluctuation display setting processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 732) (Fig. S5315 of 733). This add-on effect flag 223ab is set to ON (S5010 of FIG. 733: Yes) when the add-on effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (see S4351 of FIG. 726) (S5012 of FIG. 733 ). Also, when the second specific winning opening 65a is won and the second ball entering process (see S4356 in FIG. 728) is selected, the additional effect is selected (S5106 in FIG. 728: Yes), it is set to ON ( S5108 in FIG. 728).

Then, referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4736 of Figure 733) (S5312 of Figure 733), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5312 of Figure 733: Yes), is set to OFF (S5313 in FIG. 733), an additional effect is set (S5313 in FIG. 733). It is also referred to in the second ball entry process (S4356 in FIG. 728) (S5101 in FIG. 733), and if it is determined to be on (S5101 in FIG. 733: Yes), another game condition is established, Since the additional performance is selected, the second ball-entering process is terminated without executing the additional performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the problem of redundantly selecting the additional effect.

The add-on effect type storage area 223ac is an area for setting the add-on type selected by referring to the add-on effect table 222aa. (see S4736 of )). This add-on effect type storage area 223ac stores the type of add-on effect selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (see S4351 in FIG. 726) (S5011 in FIG. 726). In addition, when it is determined that the over winning flag 223ae is ON in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (see S4351 of FIG. 726) (S5005 of FIG. 726: Yes), the addition production A is selected from the addition production table 222aa. (5009 in FIG. 726), and the selected add-on A is stored (S5011 in FIG. 726). Furthermore, when winning the small win C and winning the second specific prize winning port 65a, even if an additional effect is selected (S5106 in FIG. 728: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is stored. (S5107 in FIG. 728). Then, when it is determined that the addition production flag 223ac is set to ON in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4736 in FIG. 733) (S5312 in FIG. 733: Yes), the type of the addition production that is set is set (S5314 in FIG. 733).

The small hit number counter 223ad is a counter for counting the number of small hits when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the latent state, and is used for ending processing (S5211 in FIG. 730). , when it is determined that the win-related command received from the main controller 110 this time is a small win (S5258 in FIG. 730: Yes), the value of 1 is added (S5259 in FIG. 730). This small hit number counter 223ad is referred to when selecting an additional effect based on the winning of the second specific winning hole 65a (S5104 in FIG. 728). An additional effect is selected based on the values of the small hit number counter 223ad and the effect counter 223h (S5105 in FIG. 728). Then, in state command processing 2 (see S4314 in FIG. 727), when it is determined that a state command indicating transition to the normal state has been received from main controller 110 (S4531 in FIG. 727: Yes), the value is reset. (S4535 in FIG. 727).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the above-described small hit number counter 223ad is configured to be added each time a small hit is won, but without being limited to this, a specific small hit type (for example, The value may be added when the small win A) is won. By configuring in this way, regardless of the set small winning probability, the value of the small winning number counter 223ad can be irregularly updated, referring to the second specific winning opening additional effect table 222ab, When executing the additional performance, it is possible to select the additional performance more irregularly, and thus various additional performances can be provided to the player.

Over winning flag 223ae wins a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and more game balls than the upper limit of winning in the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 65a (so-called It is a flag for indicating that it is an over-winning, and is a flag for selecting an additional effect based on the over-winning. This over-winning flag 223ae is set to ON ( S4354 of FIG. 725), special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S5005 of FIG. 726), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5005 of FIG. 726: Yes), is set to OFF (of FIG. 726 S5008), select the additional effect A from the additional effect table (S5009 in FIG. 726).

The effect probability variable count area 223af is a storage area for storing a guideline of the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the second guide display region Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 when the game state is the latent state. be. 80 is set in the effect probability variable count area 223af when the game state shifts to the latent probability state in the ending process (see S5211 in FIG. 730) (see S5254 in FIG. 730). Also, in the latent certainty state, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation of the second special symbol is executed (see S5307 in FIG. 733 and S5401 in FIG. 734).

The rush flag 223ag is a flag for indicating that it is during the period of super rush which is executed when the number of remaining probability variations is 60 to 70 times. As described above, in this embodiment, during the latent state, the number of times of remaining probability variation is displayed in the second guide display area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81. However, the remaining period of the latent state is 70. During times to 60 times, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained during this latent probability state is displayed. This rush flag 223ag is set to ON (S5403 in FIG. 734) when the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 70 (5402 in FIG. 734: Yes) in the super rush process (see S5306 in FIG. 734). ),. Then, it is referred to when it is time to execute the additional effect (S5004 in FIG. 726, S5102 in FIG. 728), and when it is ON, the process of executing the additional effect is skipped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the problem that the remaining number of prize balls is displayed in the second guidance display area Dm4, but the performance is executed in addition to the remaining number of prize balls.

Also, when a jackpot opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S5202 in FIG. 729: Yes), this rush flag 223ag is referred to, and if it is set to ON (S5203 in FIG. 729: Yes), the display opening command for displaying the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 708(b) is set (S5204 in FIG. 729). By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the effect mode of the big win won during the period of the super rush, and to provide the player with various effects.

Then, it is set to off at the ending of the jackpot won during the super rush (S5261 in FIG. 730). Also, when the value of the remaining probability variable number of times area 223af becomes 60 without winning the special symbol jackpot during the period of the super rush, it is set to OFF (S5410 in FIG. 734).

The subtraction effect type storage area 223ah is an area for setting the subtraction effect type selected by referring to the effect remaining probability variation number subtraction table 222ac. (see S4816 in FIG. 735). This subtraction effect type storage area 223ah stores the type of subtraction effect selected in the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (see S4351 in FIG. 726) (S5017 in FIG. 726). Then, when it is determined that the subtraction effect flag 223ac is set to ON in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4736 of FIG. 733) (S5317 of FIG. 733: Yes), the subtraction effect setting process (see S4736 of FIG. 735 S4816) is executed, and a subtraction effect based on the type of the set subtraction effect is set (S5504 in FIG. 735).

Subtraction effect flag 223ai is a flag for indicating that the subtraction effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, subtracted in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (see S4351 in FIG. 726) When the effect is selected (S5016 in FIG. 726: Yes), it is set to ON (S50128 in FIG. 726).

Then, referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4736 in Figure 733) (S5317 in Figure 733), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5317 in Figure 733: Yes), subtraction effect setting process (S4816 in FIG. 735) is executed. This subtraction effect setting process (S4816 in FIG. 735) is set to OFF (S5501 in FIG. 735), and the subtraction effect is set (S5313 in FIG. 733). It is also referred to in the second ball entry process (S4356 in FIG. 728) (S5101 in FIG. 733), and if it is determined to be on (S5101 in FIG. 733: Yes), another game condition is established, Since the add-on effect is selected, the second ball-entering process is terminated without executing the add-on effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the problem of redundantly selecting the additional effect.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the A2 embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 718 to 724, regarding each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the present A2 embodiment, the contents of the control process different from those in the above-described A1 embodiment are mainly described. give an explanation. In the above-described A1 embodiment, regardless of the type of special symbol, it is configured to execute the updating process of the game state (probability variation number of times) at the same timing. Concretely, it is configured to execute update processing of the game state (probability variation number of times) at the timing of starting the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, processing for updating the game state (probability variation number of times) (game state update processing (see S308 in FIG. 660)) can be executed, and the main control It was possible to reduce the processing load of the device 110 .

However, when the configuration described above is used, in the pachinko machine 10 having a function (so-called simultaneous variation function) capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol as in the A1 embodiment, the game There is a risk that the set number of states (for example, the variable probability number) will be updated at the same time, providing a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Specifically, the jackpot game ends in a state in which both the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are held, and the probability variable number of times is set to 100 after the jackpot game ends. When the variable probability state is set, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time after the end of the jackpot game (after the variable probability state is set). In this case, the probability variation number is updated (1 subtraction) based on the start of variation of the first special symbol, and the probability variation number is updated (1 subtraction) based on the variation start of the second special symbol, so the remaining number of probability variation number will be subtracted from 100 times to 98 times. In fact, the control processing of the main controller 110 is not executed at the same time, but the update processing of the probability variable number corresponding to each special symbol is executed after a time difference of several milliseconds of a comma, but the time difference is A time interval (4 milliseconds) for outputting a remaining probability variation number command in which information indicating the remaining probability variation number is set from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 (externally output in the main processing of the main controller 110 The interval is shorter than the interval at which the process is executed (see FIG. 674))).

Therefore, for example, a display mode (remaining number display) for notifying the player of the remaining number of times of probability variation is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see second guidance display area Dm4 in FIG. 634). , if the display mode (remaining probability variation number) is set based on the remaining probability variation number command output from the main control device 110, the remaining probability variation number will be subtracted by two at a time and displayed. There was a fear that it might give a sense of distrust. Furthermore, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, in a specific probability variation state (latent probability state), among the special symbol variations that are being executed at the same time, variation production based on one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) is emphasized more than the variation performance based on other special symbol variation (first special symbol variation), that is, when performing a variation performance that makes it look as if only one special symbol is fluctuating, There is a problem that the number of times of residual probability change is suddenly reduced by two times, which causes distrust in the game.

On the other hand, in this A2 embodiment, the timing of updating the set number of times (probability variation number) of the game state based on the variation of the first special symbol, and the set number of times of the game state based on the variation of the second special symbol It is configured to be different from the timing of updating (probability variable number of times). By configuring in this way, when the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the probability variation number is updated (subtracted by 1) based on the start of variation of the first special symbol. It is possible to make the timing to be different from the timing at which the probability variation number is updated (subtracted by 1) based on the start of variation of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the number of remaining probability variations is displayed after being subtracted by two at a time, causing the player to feel distrustful.

Furthermore, in the above-described A1 embodiment, when the latent state is set, the lottery result of the second special symbol is easier to stop and display than the lottery result of the first special symbol. As the variable time, a variable time (for example, 10 minutes) longer than the variable time of the second special symbol is configured to be easily selected. When a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation being executed is forced in a display mode indicating failure at the timing of stopping the variation of the second special symbol in which the small winning is won. configured to stop. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to stop and display the lottery result of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously varying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, only the lottery result of one special symbol (second special symbol) during a specific game state (latent state). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with different games depending on the game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

However, in the above-described A1 embodiment, when both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol exist after the end of the small winning game, the first special symbol and the first special symbol after the end of the small winning game The second special symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time, and every time the fluctuation of each special symbol starts, the update process of the number of times of probability variation is executed, so the lottery result is difficult to stop and display For the first special symbol. However, there is a problem that the probability variable number is subtracted corresponding to the fluctuation start number, and the player cannot sufficiently enjoy the game during the latent probability state.

On the other hand, in the present A2 embodiment, the second special symbol, which is mainly varied during the latent state, updates (subtracts) the set number of times (probability variation number) of the gaming state at the variation start timing. The first special symbol, which is composed and becomes a variation that is not the main during the latent probability state, is configured to update (subtract) the set number of times (probability variation number) of the game state at the variation stop timing. By constructing in this way, both the reserved ball of the first special pattern and the reserved ball of the second special pattern are present after the end of the small winning game, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern are present after the end of the small winning game. Even in the case where both start to fluctuate at the same time, the set number of times (probability variable number of times) of the game state is not updated (subtracted) based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the game during the latent state.

In addition, in the present A2 embodiment, only when the first special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed based on the passage of the variation time, so as to update (subtract) the set number of times (probability variation number) of the gaming state In the forced stop of the first special symbol executed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the second special symbol has been won (forced stop in the display mode indicating the loss), the game state It is configured not to update (subtract) the set number of times (probability variable number of times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to update (subtract) the set number of times (probability variation number) of the game state based on the variation of the first special symbol during the latent probability state.

From here, the specific contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 of the present A2 embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 718, the content of the game state update process 2 (see S351 in FIG. 718) in the present A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 718 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S351). This game state update process 2 (see S351 in FIG. 718) is a control process executed in place of the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 660) of the above-described A1 embodiment, and is a variable display of special symbols. is executed at the start timing of In addition, among the content of this control, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part of the same content as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the game state update process 2 (see S351 in FIG. 718) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in the latent state (S651). (S651: No), the processing of S601 to S608, which is the same as the gaming state update processing of the first control example (see S308 in FIG. 660), is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S651, when it is determined that the current game state is in the latent certainty state, it is then determined whether the current special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation (S652), and the first special symbol variation is determined. When it is determined that the pattern is changed (S652: Yes), the processing of S601 to S605, which is the updating processing of the probability variation counter, is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S606. On the other hand, in the processing of S652, when it is determined that the current special symbol variation is not the first special symbol variation (the second special symbol variation) (S652: No), the process proceeds to S601.

Thus, in the present A2 embodiment, in the gaming state update process 2 (see S351 in FIG. 718) executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol, if it is the variation start timing corresponding to the second special symbol, The process of updating the number of probability variations is executed, and when it is the variation start timing corresponding to the first special symbol, the process of updating the number of probability variations is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the timing of updating the probability variation number between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the process of updating the value of the variable probability counter for measuring the specified number of times to continue the variable probability state is configured to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, without being limited to this, the execution timing of the process of updating the value of the counter (time saving counter) for measuring the specified number of times to continue the time saving state is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured.

Next, referring to FIG. 719, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S251 in FIG. 719) will be described. FIG. 719 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S251 in FIG. 719). This first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S251 in FIG. 719) is a control process executed in place of the above-described first special symbol variation process (see S205 in FIG. 661). The difference is that a control process is added when the symbol variation time has elapsed is in the latent definite state, and the rest is the same. In addition, among the content of this control, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part of the same content as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S251 in FIG. 719) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first special symbol being executed has passed (S701), and the variation time has not passed. (S701: No), the process of S712, which is the same as in the above-described A1 embodiment, is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that it is time to end the variation time (if it is determined that it is time for the variation time to pass) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is the potential state. (S751).

In the process of S751, if it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S751: Yes), the latent certainty state update process is executed (S752), the process proceeds to S702, and the current game state is If it is determined that the state is not latent (S751: No), the process of S752 is skipped and the process proceeds to S702. Then, the same processing of S702 to S711 as in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol updates the probability variation count (updates the value of the probability variation counter 203k) at the timing of the fluctuation stop (stop display) of the special symbol, and the second special symbol is the variation of the special symbol. It is configured to update the probability variation count (update the value of the probability variation counter 203k) at the start timing. Then, during the latent definite state, the variation time of the first special symbol is easily set to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol.

Therefore, the game state may not be in the latent certainty state at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol that started to fluctuate in the state in which the latent certainty state is set. Specifically, when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is "3", the variation of the first special symbol is started, and the variation of the second special symbol is executed three times or more during the variation of the first special symbol. In that case, the game state at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped becomes the normal state. In this case, since there is no need to update the value of the probability variation counter 203k at the timing of stopping the variation of the first special symbol, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S251 in FIG. 719) of the present embodiment, the first special symbol (See S751 in FIG. 719). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability state update process (S752) is executed even though the normal state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 720, the content of the probability state update process (S752) will be described. FIG. 720 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the probability state update process (S752). This latent state update process (S752) is a control process executed when it is determined that the latent state is in progress in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S251 in FIG. 719). (update the value of the probability variation counter 203k).

When the probability state update process (S752) is executed, first, the value of the probability variable counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S2701), and the remaining number probability variable number command indicating the value of the probability variable counter 203k after the subtraction is set (S2702). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k subtracted in the process of S2701 is 0 (S2703).

Then, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S2703: Yes), since this is the case where the latent probability state ends at the stop timing of the first special symbol variation this time, normal A status command indicating the status is set (S2704), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S2703: No), the process of S2704 is skipped because the latent probability state continues. to terminate this process.

As described above, in the present A2 embodiment, only the first special symbol variation in the state where the latent state is set updates the value of the probability variation counter 203k at the timing of stopping the variation of the first special symbol variation (subtraction ). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the probability variation number of times is subtracted based on the first special symbol variation during the latent probability state.

Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present A2 embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly displayed in a display mode that shows the deviation. In this case, it is configured to reset the variation time of the first special symbol that has been executed. As a result, when the first special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a forced disconnection, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 656) executed after the small winning game is completed. In the process, it is determined that the first special symbol is not changed (S203 of FIG. 656: No), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S251 of FIG. 719) is not executed. can. Therefore, when the first special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating forced disconnection, the probability variation number (the value of the probability variation counter 203k) is not updated based on the stop display. , During the latent definite state, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the number of definite variations is subtracted based on the first special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 721, the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S851) will be described. FIG. 721 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S851). This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S851) is different from the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S801 in FIG. 665) of the above-described A1 embodiment. If it is determined that it is not (S1102: No), the process to be executed is changed to the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1107 in FIG. 666), and the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 2 (of FIG. 722 S1151)), and the rest is the same. Among the contents of this control, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as those of the above-described A1 embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this A2 embodiment, the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the setting status of the switching flag 203aa. ing. Specifically, when the switching flag 203aa is set to ON, in the process of S1103 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S851), the long small hit table 202fa2 (see FIG. 712) is referred to 711) is referred to. Different fluctuation times are defined in each table to be referred to.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a variation pattern in which a different variation time is set according to the setting state of the switching flag 203aa in the state where the latent state is set, and the main controller 110 When receiving a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to set various variation effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the present A2 embodiment, after winning a specific small hit (small hit A) in the lottery of the second special symbol, and setting the variation pattern of the change that won the small hit A, the switching flag 203aa is turned on. configured to be set to As a result, it becomes possible to set the variation pattern of the second special symbol following the winning of the small win A by referring to the long small win table 202fa2. Therefore, when a variation effect based on a variation pattern (a variation pattern with a variation time of 1.2 seconds) selected only when referring to the long small hit table 202fa2 is executed, the player receives the previous It is possible to grasp after the fact that the small prize won in the special pattern lottery was the small prize A.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present A2 embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to be able to set a small hit A to a small hit C as a small hit type. Even in the case of winning, it is configured to be able to provide the player with the potential state for a predetermined period. It is preferable to use the configuration using the switching flag 203aa described above for the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the period in which the state is set is variable.

Specifically, for example, as the end condition of the latent certainty state, it is established when the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) during the same latent certainty state as in the second embodiment reaches a predetermined number (100 times) In addition to the first end condition, the above-described switching flag 203aa is used in the pachinko machine 10 in which the second end condition established when the number of times of winning a specific small win (small win A) reaches 50 times is set. Use configuration.

In this case, at least, the game contents of the small winning game executed when the small winning A is won, and at least one small winning type other than the small winning A (for example, the small winning B) are executed when winning. The game content of the small winning game is configured to be the same (concept including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to identify), and it is difficult to distinguish the type of the winning small winning game depending on the content of the small winning game to be executed. It is better to configure it so that

According to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the specific small win A is won, the switching flag 203aa is set to ON, so that the special symbol variation that wins the specific small win A is executed next. The variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation executed after the small winning game based on the small winning A) is set by referring to a dedicated variation pattern selection table (for example, long small winning table 202fa2). It will be. Then, a special symbol variation is executed based on a dedicated variation pattern (dedicated variation time) set with reference to a dedicated variation pattern selection table (for example, a long small winning table 202fa2), thereby achieving a small winning. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that A has been won after the fact.

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol variation that approaches the establishment of the condition disadvantageous to the player (the condition for ending the latent state (second end condition)) can be determined after the fact. Thus, the player can play the game with a sense of tension during the remaining latent state. Also, by discriminating the type of variation pattern set in the special symbol variation executed after the end of the small winning game, it is also possible to determine that the small winning game executed last time is not the small winning A. Become. As a result, it is discriminated that the lottery result of the special symbol that approaches the establishment of the condition disadvantageous to the player (the condition for ending the latent state (second end condition)) has not appeared, and the You can also let them play games with care.

Next, with reference to FIG. 722, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 2 (see S1151 in FIG. 722) executed in the above-described second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see S851 in FIG. 721) Explain the content. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process 2 (see S1151 in FIG. 722). This special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 2 (see S1151 in FIG. 722) is for the above-mentioned special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (see S1107 in FIG. 666), when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol The difference is that a process for switching the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is added, and the rest is the same. In addition, among the content of this control, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part of the same content as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 2 (see S1151 in FIG. 722) is executed, the same S1201 to S1209 processes as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process described above (see S1107 in FIG. 666) are executed. . When the process of S1206 or S1209 is completed, it is then determined whether the switching flag 203aa is set to ON (S1251).

In the process of S1251, when it is determined that the switching flag 203aa is not set to ON (S1251: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit A (S1252), and if it is a small hit A If it is determined (S1252: Yes), the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the next variation pattern is set to be the long small hit table 202fa2 (S1253), and the switching flag 203aa is turned on. (S1254), and the process ends. As a result, in the next variation after the winning of the small hit A, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the long small win table 202fa2 (see FIG. 712).

On the other hand, in the process of S1251, if it is determined that the switching flag 203aa is set to ON (S1251: Yes), that is, after selecting the variation pattern with reference to the long small per table 202fa2 (see FIG. 712) , the switching flag 203aa is set to OFF (S1252), and the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the next variation pattern is switched to the latency table 202fa1 (see FIG. 711). It sets (S1256) and terminates this processing.

As described above, in the present A2 embodiment, in the latent state, only when the small hit A is elected, the second special symbol variation that is executed next to the second special symbol variation that is elected to the small hit A It is configured such that the symbol variation pattern is selected with reference to the long small winning table 202fa2. And it is configured so that the special symbol variation for selecting the variation pattern with reference to the long small hit table 202fa2 is one time. As a result, it is possible to set a special variation pattern only for the next variation of the special symbol variation that won the small winning A, so that only skilled players who can grasp the special variation pattern can receive the small winning A. It is possible to determine after the fact that the winner has been elected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the setting condition of the switching flag 203aa is the same for the entire period of the latent probability state, that is, regardless of the number of remaining probability changes. When the number of residual probability changes is large, that is, immediately after the latent probability state is set, the switching flag 203aa may be set to ON more easily than when the number of residual probability changes is small. The switching flag 203aa may be easily set to ON only during a specific period of time. In this case, after determining that the small hit A is won (for example, S1252: Yes in FIG. 722), a determination process for determining the value of the probability variation counter 203k is provided, and based on the determination result of the determination process , a switching lottery is performed to determine whether to set the switching flag 203aa to ON, and when the lottery result indicates that the switching flag 203aa is to be set to ON in the switching lottery, the switching flag 203aa is set to ON; It is preferable to configure so as to select a variation pattern with reference to the long small hit table 202fa2. Thereby, according to the remaining period (elapsed period) of the latent certainty state, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern with reference to the long small hit table 202fa2 can be changed. can be made easy to predict the remaining period of

In addition, as the end condition of the latent state described above, the first In the case of a pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a second termination condition that is established when the number of times a specific small win (small win A) is won reaches 50 times in addition to the end condition, the small win A that has already been won can be set. Depending on the number of times, the long small win table 202fa2 may be referred to and the ratio of selection of the variation pattern may be changed. ), it is preferable to refer to the long small winning table 202fa2 so that the rate of selection of the variation pattern increases. This makes it possible to suggest that the establishment of the second end condition is nearer as the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern selected with reference to the long small hit table 202fa2 is executed.

In addition, in the present A2 embodiment, it is configured to switch only the variation pattern of the next variation that has been elected to a specific small hit (small hit A), but it is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the special symbol variation twice or more. The switching flag 203aa may be set so as to switch the variation pattern, or it may be configured to switch the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that wins a specific small hit (small hit A).

Next, with reference to FIG. 723, the contents of the small hit operation setting process 2 (S2551) will be described. FIG. 723 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the small hit operation setting process 2 (S2551). This small hit operation setting process 2 (S2551) is executed instead of the small hit operation setting process (see S2506 in FIG. 679) in the above-described A1 embodiment.

When the small hit operation setting process 2 (S2551) is executed, first, the process of S2601, which is the same as the small hit operation setting process (see S2506 in FIG. 679) of the above-described A1 embodiment, is executed, and then the read opening operation is set for the corresponding specific winning slot (S2651), and the process ends. As described above, in the A2 embodiment, different specific winning openings are configured to be opened during the small winning game to be executed according to the winning small winning type. As a result, various small winning games can be provided to the player, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 724, the contents of the second winning process 2 (S2552) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 724 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second winning process 2 (S2552). This second winning process 2 (see S2552) is different from the second winning process (see S2413 in FIG. 680) of the above-described A1 embodiment. Processing when the above number of balls wins the specific winning opening 650a, processing during the small winning game (small winning game executed based on the small winning C) that opens the second specific winning ball opening 65a, are the same except for the addition of In addition, among the content of this control, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the part of the same content as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the second winning process 2 (S2552) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the second specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2753.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the second specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the second specific winning If it is determined that the winning to the mouth 65a has not been detected (S2703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the winning to the second specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h (S2704), and the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit. value (1 in this embodiment) or more (S2705), and if it is determined that the value of the winning counter 203h is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (S2705: No), The process proceeds to S2753.

In the processing of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the second specific prize winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f associated therewith) is opened. Close is set (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2751.

In the process of S2751, it is determined whether or not the current winning is an over-winning, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter 203h has exceeded the upper limit. Here, when it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter 203h does not exceed the upper limit (S2751: No), the process of 2753 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 203h exceeds the upper limit (S2751), an over winning command is set (S2752), and then the process proceeds to S2753.

In the processing of S2753, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second specific ball entrance 650a (S2753). ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2753 that the ball has not entered the second specific ball entrance 650a (S2753: No), this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the A2 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 725 to 735, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in Embodiment A2 will be described. In the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the A2 embodiment, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described A1 embodiment is performed by replacing the command determination processing (see FIG. 683) with command determination processing 2. (See FIG. 725), hit-related processing 2 (see FIG. 729) instead of hit-related processing (see FIG. 684), remaining count update processing 2 (see FIG. 731) instead of remaining count update processing (see FIG. 687), Variable display setting processing (see Figure 688) instead of the variable display setting processing 2 (see Figure 732) to execute, also, new special figure 2 variation setting processing 2 (see Figure 726), state command processing 2 (Figure 727 reference), second ball processing (see Figure 728), ending processing (see Figure 730), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see Figure 733), super rush processing (see Figure 734), subtraction effect setting processing (Figure 735) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 725, the command determination process 2 (S4151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in Embodiment A2 will be described. FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4151). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4110 in FIG. 683) in the above-described A1 embodiment in that the processes of S4351 to S4358 are added. Other processing is the same as the command determination processing (S4110) in the A1 embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4151) is executed, first, the same processes of S4301 to S4307 as the command determination process (S4110 in FIG. 683) in the above-described A1 embodiment are executed. Then, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4307: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 726, command determination processing 2 (S4151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment Special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing 2 (S4351) which is one processing in explain. Figure 726 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing 2 (S4351). In this special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351), the process of setting the addition production or the subtraction production is executed.

When the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S5001), and then the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5002). The processing of S5001 described above is the same as the processing of S4308 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 683) of the A1 embodiment described above, and the processing of S5002 is the same as the command determination processing of the A1 embodiment (see FIG. 683). 683), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the remaining probability variation number set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 223af (hereinafter referred to as the effect remaining probability variation number) are compared and determined (S5003). In the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the number of times of residual probability variation is smaller than the value of the number of times of real probability variation, that is, the number of times of residual probability variation displayed in the second guide area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 When it is determined that the value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation count and that the additional effect can be executed (S5003: Yes), it is determined whether or not the rush flag 223ag is on (S5004). ). If the rush flag 223ag is ON, that is, during the period of the super rush mode (S5004: Yes), the effect of increasing/decreasing the number of times of variation of the effect remaining probability is not executed, so the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rush flag 223ag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the super rush mode is not in progress (S5004: No), the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 650a It is determined whether or not the over winning flag 223ae indicating over winning is turned on at the mouth 65a (S5005). When it is determined that the over winning flag 223ae is not on (S5005: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5006), then the additional effect table 222aa is referred to, and the value of the actual remaining probability change number of times and the effect An additional effect type is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of S5006 and the difference value from the value of the remaining probability variation frequency (S5007). Then, the process proceeds to S5010.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the over winning flag 223ae is turned on in the process of S5005 (S5005: Yes), an additional effect based on over winning in the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 65a , the over winning flag 223ae is set to OFF (S5008), the additional effect A (+5 times) is selected from the additional effect table 222aa (S5009), and the process proceeds to S5010.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional effect based on the over-winning of the first specific winning port 650a or the second specific winning port 65a is configured to select the additional effect A, but it is limited to this. The type of the additional effect may be determined by lottery. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of additional effects. Moreover, when executing in this way, an additional effect may be selected based on the above-described value of the effect counter 223Ah and the additional effect table 222aa. By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

In the processing of S5010, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is selected in the processing of S5007 or S5009 (S5010). When it is determined that the add-on effect is selected (S5010: Yes), the type of the selected add-on effect is set in the add-on effect type storage area 223ac (S5011), and the add-on effect flag 223ab is set to ON (S5012). , S5013.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5003, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of probability variation remaining in the effect is a value larger than the value of the number of times of real probability variation (S5003: No), or if the addition effect is not selected in the processing of S5010 If it is determined (S5010: No), the process of S5004 to S5012 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5013 because the additional effect is not executed.

In the processing of S5013, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of times of residual probability variation of effect is equal to or more than the value of the number of times of substantial residual probability variation (S5013). When it is determined that the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is not equal to or greater than the value of the number of times of real probability variation (that is, the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is less than the value of the number of times of real probability variation) (S5013: No), subtraction production Since there is no need to execute

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of times of production remaining probability change is equal to or more than the actual number of times of probability change (S5013: Yes), a process of judging whether or not to execute a subtraction production is executed. Specifically, the value of the production counter 223h is acquired (S5014), and based on the value of the production counter 223h acquired in the processing of S5014, subtraction is made based on the value of the production remaining probability variation number subtraction table 222ac and the production counter 223h. An effect is selected (S5015), and the process proceeds to S5016.

In the process of S5016, it is determined whether or not the subtraction effect is selected in the process of S5015 (S5016). If it is determined that the subtraction effect is not selected (S5016: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subtraction effect is selected (S5016: Yes), the subtraction effect type selected in the processing of S5015 is stored in the subtraction effect type storage area 223ah (S5017), and the subtraction effect flag 223ai is turned on. It sets (S5018) and terminates this processing.

Returning to FIG. 725, the description continues. In the processing of S4307, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S4007: No), the same processing as S4310 to S4314 in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. Then, in the processing of S4314, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control storage 110 (S4314). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4314: Yes), state command processing 2 (S4352) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 727, the state command process 2 (S4352), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in Embodiment A2, will be described. FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the contents of state command processing 2 (S4352). State command processing 2 (S4352), when a state command is received from the main controller 110, executes processing for storing a value corresponding to the command in the state setting area 223i. A process is executed to clear the counters and flags

In state command processing 2 (S4314 in FIG. 727), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value stored in the state setting area 223i (S4531). Next, in the processing of S4531, it is determined whether or not the game state before receiving the determined state command is the latent state (S4532). If it is determined to be in the latent state (S4532: Yes), it is determined whether the command received from main controller 110 this time is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4533). When it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating that the game state shifts to the normal state (S4533: Yes), the remaining probability variation count display flag 223aa is set to OFF (S4534), and the small hit The value of the number counter 223ad is cleared (S4535).

In this way, when it is determined that the command indicating the transition to the normal state is received, by executing the process of resetting the value of the remaining probability variation number display flag 223aa and the value of the small hit number counter 223ad, there is no problem It is possible to shift to the normal state. Then, the process proceeds to S4536. On the other hand, in the processing of S4532, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4532: No), or if it is not a state command indicating a transition to the normal state in the processing of S4533 When it is determined (S4533: No), since it is not necessary to reset the value of the remaining probability variation number display flag 223aa and the value of the small hit number counter 223ad, the processing of S4534 to S4535 is skipped and the process of S4536 is performed. . Next, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4536), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 725, the description continues. In the process of S4314, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4314: No), it is determined whether or not the over winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4353). When it is determined that the over-winning command has been received (S4353), the over-winning flag 223ae is set to ON (S4354), and this process is terminated. Here, the over winning flag 223ae set to ON is referred to in the processing of the special figure 2 variation setting processing 2 (S4351), and when it is determined to be ON, the additional effect is selected.

On the other hand, in the process of S4353, if it is determined that the over winning command has not been received (S4353: No), it is determined whether or not the second ball entering command has been received (S4356). This second ball entry command is a command sent from the main controller 110 when the second specific ball entry port 65a of the second variable prize winning device 65 is won. If it is determined that the second ball entering command has been received (S4355: Yes), the second ball entering process is executed (S4356), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 728, the second ball entering process (S4356), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in Embodiment A2, will be described. . FIG. 728 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second ball entry process (S4356). In the second ball-entering process (S4356), when a second ball-entering command is received from main controller 110 during the latent state, a process of selecting whether or not to execute an additional effect is executed.

In the second ball entering process (S4356), first, it is determined whether or not the addition effect flag 223ab is ON. When it is determined that the add-on effect flag 223ab is ON (S5101: Yes), since the add-on effect is set in other game conditions, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition effect flag 223ab is not ON (that is, OFF) (S5101: No), it is determined whether the rush flag 223ag is ON (S5102). When it is determined that the rush flag 223ag is ON (S5102: Yes), it is during the period of the super rush mode, and since the additional effect of the remaining probability change number of times is not executed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rush flag 223ag is not ON, that is, it is outside the period of the super rush (S5102: No), the value of the remaining probability variation count is less than the actual remaining probability variation count. That is, it is determined whether or not it is possible to execute the additional effect of the effect remaining probability variation number of times (S5103). When the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability change is larger than the value of the number of times of real probability change (S5103: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is smaller than the value of the number of times of real probability variation (S5103: Yes), the value of the production counter 223h is acquired (S5104), and the value of the small hit number counter 223ad is acquired (S5105). ).

Next, with reference to the second specific winning opening add-on effect selection table 222ab, the add-on effect type is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223h obtained in the process of S5104 and the small hit number counter 223ad obtained in the process of S5105. (S5106). When it is determined that the add-on effect is selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected add-on effect is set in the add-on effect type storage area 223ac (S5108), and the add-on effect flag 223ab is set to ON (S5109). , the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5107 that the additional effect is not selected (S5107: No), this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 725, the description continues. If it is determined that the second ball-entering command has not been received (S4355: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (S4316). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4316: Yes), the hit-related process 2 is executed (S4317), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 729, the hit-related process 2 (S4357), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in Embodiment A2, will be described. FIG. 729 is a flow chart showing the contents of win-related processing 2 (S4357). The hit-related process 2 (S4357) is different from the hit-related process (see FIG. 684) in the above-described A1 embodiment, in that it executes a resurrection effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot during the super rush period, and the ending process ( The difference is that the process of S5211) is added.

In the hit-related process 2 (S4357), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5201). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot opening command (S5202). When it is determined that it is a jackpot opening command (S5202: Yes), it is determined whether the rush flag 223ag is on or whether it is a jackpot during a super rush (S5203). If it is determined to be a big hit during the super rush, an opening command for display including a resurrection effect (see FIG. 708(b)) is set (S5304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that the big win is not made (S5202: No), an opening command for display based on the small win is set (S5205), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S5203 that the rush flag 223ag is not ON (S5203), it is outside the super rush period, and an opening command for display is set (S5205), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S5206). If it is determined that the round start command has been received (S5206: Yes), the round command for display is set (S5207), and this processing ends. In the case of a round start command for a big win or a small win during a rush, a round command for display including subtraction of the number of expected winning balls for the number of rounds is set here.

In the process of S5206, when it is determined that the round start command has not been received (S5206: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the small winning prize has been received (S5208). When it is determined that the command related to the small winning prize has been received (S5208: Yes), 16 is subtracted from the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j (S5209), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5208, when it is determined that the small winning prize command has not been received (S5208: No), it is determined whether or not the winning ending command has been received (S5210). When it is determined that the winning ending command has been received (S5210: Yes), ending processing (S5211) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning ending command has not been received (S5210: No), this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 730, the ending process (S5211), which is one process in the win-related process 2 (S4357) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the A2 embodiment, will be described. FIG. 730 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S5211). In the ending process (S5211), when the latent certainty state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the process of executing the remaining probability variation number for production and the process of determining whether or not to select the additional production in the case of a small hit are executed. be.

In the ending process (S5211), first, a display ending command is set (S5251). Next, it is determined whether or not the received ending command for display is a jackpot ending command to shift to the latent certainty state (S5252). When it is determined that it is a jackpot that shifts to the latent probability state (S5252: Yes), it is determined whether or not the remaining probability variation count display flag 223aa is on, that is, whether or not the jackpot has been won during the latent probability state. (S5253). When it is determined that it is not a jackpot in the latent probability state (S5253: No), the remaining probability variation number of effects in the effect probability variation number area is set to 80 (S5254). Then, the command for starting the display of the remaining probability variation count display is set (S5255), the flag 223aa during the display of the remaining probability variation count is set to ON (S5256), the value of the remaining acquired ball number counter 223j is set to 1600 (S5257), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5252, when it is determined that it is not a potential big hit (S5252: No), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S5258). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S5258: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a small hit (S5258: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223ad (S5259), and the process proceeds to S5260.

In the processing of S5260, it is determined whether or not the rush flag 223ag is ON (S5260). If the rush flag 223ag is on (S5260: Yes), the super rush mode is ending, so the rush flag 223ag is set off (S5261), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rush flag 223ag is not ON (S5260: No), a process of selecting an additional effect based on the winning of a small win or the winning of a big win in the latent state is executed.

First, the value of the production counter 223h is acquired (S5262), then the additional production table 222aa is referred to, and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number and the production acquired by the processing of S5262 Based on the value of the counter 223h, an additional effect type is selected (S5263). Next, in the processing of S5263, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is selected (S5264). If it is determined that the additional effect is not selected (S5264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that an additional effect has been selected (S5264: Yes), an additional effect command for display indicating the type of the selected additional effect is set (S5265), It is set in the storage area 223ac (S5266), the addition effect flag 223ab is set to ON (S5267), and this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the additional performance even at the end of the big winning game or the small winning game, and it is possible to provide various additional performances to the player.

Returning to FIG. 725, the description continues. In the processing of S4316, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4316: No), it is determined whether or not the residual probability change or the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4317). If it is determined that the remaining probability change or the remaining short time command has been received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number update process 2 is executed (S4358) and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability change or the remaining time reduction number command is not received (S4317: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4319), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 731, the remaining count update process 2 (S4358), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 731 is a flowchart showing the details of the remaining count update process 2 (S4358). The remaining count update process 2 (S4358) differs from the remaining count update process (S4319) in the above-described A1 embodiment in that the processes of S4806 and S4807 are not executed. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 732, the variable display setting process 2 (S4152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in Embodiment A2 will be described. FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4152). The variable display setting process 2 (S4152) differs from the variable display setting process in the above-described A1 embodiment in that the special figure 2 variable start process is added. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to Drawing 733, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is one processing in fluctuation display setting processing 2 (S4152) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 in a 2nd embodiment is explained. Figure 733 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process executes the process of selecting the additional effect of the remaining number of effects and the process of updating the remaining number of effects in the latent certainty state.

In special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, first, the processing of S5301 to S5303 which is the same as the processing of S4906 to S4908 in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the latent state (S5304). If it is determined that it is not in the latent definite state (S5304: No), the processing for updating the remaining number of effects is skipped, and if it is determined that the game state is in the definite state (S5304: Yes), It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223o is between 61 and 71 (S5305). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223o is 61 to 71 (S5305: Yes). A super rush process is executed (S5306). Details of the super rush processing (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223o is not 61 to 70 (S5305: No), the value of the remaining probability variation number of the effect probability variation number area 223af is subtracted by 1 (S5307). Then, in the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the remaining effect probability variation number is greater than 0 (S5308). When it is determined that the value is greater than 1 (S5308: Yes), based on the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change, the remaining number of times command for display displayed in the second guidance display area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. set, and the process proceeds to S5312.

On the other hand, in the process of S5308, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5308: No), It is determined whether the value of the probability variation number is greater than 0 (S5310). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of times of residual probability variation of the effect is 0, but the value of the number of times of real probability variation is not 0 (1 or more).

In the process of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5310: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S5309 process, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number Based on this, a display residual probability variation command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the second guide area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S5309). Then, the process proceeds to S5312.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is greater than 0 (S5310: Yes), a display residual probability variation number command indicating the number of times of the effect remaining probability variation "DANGER" is set (S5311). , the process ends. By doing so, in a situation where the value of the actual residual probability variation frequency is not 0, when the effect residual probability variation frequency displayed in the second guide area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 is "0 times" "DANGER" can be displayed instead of the display of "0 times" (see FIG. 707(b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent probability state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of times of remaining probability variation of the effect. In addition, by setting the number of times of the effect remaining probability change to "DANGER", the player can play the game while predicting how long the latent probability state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the process of S5304, if it is determined that it is not in the hidden state (S5304: No), or in the process of S5309, the value of the remaining number of effects shown in the second guide area Dm4 of the third pattern display device 81 is updated. After executing the processing, it is determined whether or not the addition effect flag 223ab is ON, that is, whether or not it is time to execute the addition effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5312). When it is determined that the add-on effect flag 223ab is ON (S5312: Yes), the add-on effect type stored in the add-on effect type storage area 223ac is acquired (S5314). Then, a display command for showing the acquired addition effect type on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S5315), and the remaining probability variation number added in the addition effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number of the effect probability variation number area 223af. (S5316), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the addition effect flag 223ab is off in the process of S5312 (S5312: No), it is determined whether the subtraction effect flag 223ai is on (S5317). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the subtraction effect. When it is determined that the subtraction effect flag 223ai is ON (S5317: Yes). A subtraction effect setting process (S5318) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the subtraction effect setting process (S5318) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5317 that the subtraction effect flag 223ai is OFF (S5317: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 734, super rush processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 734 is a flow chart showing the contents of super rush processing. In the super rush process, when the potential remaining number of times is 70 to 60, the process necessary for executing the super rush mode effect is executed.

First, in the super rush process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect probability variation frequency in the effect remaining probability variation frequency area (S5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining probability variation count area is 70 (that is, whether the remaining probability variation count is 70) (S5402). In the process of S5402, when it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area is 70 (S5402: Yes), the rush flag is set to ON (S5403), and the characters indicating the start of the super rush are displayed on the third symbol display device. Set a display command for displaying in 81 (S5404), set the remaining probability variation number display flag to OFF (S5405), and set a display prize ball number command based on the value of the remaining acquired ball number count. (S5406). In this way, when the probability variation remaining number reaches 70 times, the process of entering the super rush mode is executed, so that the characters "entering the super rush mode" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability variation remaining number of times becomes 70 times. is displayed, and the number of prize balls obtained so far is displayed.

If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area is not 70 (S5402: No), that is, if the value of the remaining probability variation number area is any of 60 to 69, the value of the probability variation remaining number area is 60 (S5408). If the value of the remaining probability variation number area is not 60, that is, if it is any of 61 to 69 (S5408: No), a display command for displaying the characters in the super rush on the third symbol display device 81 Set (S5413).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area is 60 (S5408: Yes), a display command for displaying the super rush end characters on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S5409). . The rush flag is set to OFF (S5410), the remaining probability variation count displaying flag is set to ON (S5411), and the remaining probability variation count display start command for display is set based on the value of the effect remaining probability variation count area (S5412). . After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 735, the subtraction effect setting process (S4816) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 735 is a flow chart showing the contents of the subtraction effect setting process (S4816). In the subtraction effect setting process (S4816), when the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability change has become equal to or more than the value of the actual number of times of remaining probability change, the process for executing the subtraction effect of the number of times of effect remaining probability change is executed.

In the subtraction effect setting process (S4816), first, the subtraction effect flag is set to OFF (S5501), and the subtraction effect type of the subtraction effect type storage area is acquired (S5502). Set the subtraction effect command for display indicating the subtraction effect type acquired in the processing of S5502 (S5503), the number of residual probability change to be subtracted in the subtraction effect (see FIG. 709 (b)) is the number of residual probability change in the effect probability change number area (S5504). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present A2 embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays information for indicating the remaining period of the latent certainty state during the latent certainty state. Then, the remaining period is used as the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect, and the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect is executed when various conditions (such as winning the second specific winning port 65a) are satisfied.

In this way, by executing an effect that increases or decreases the number of times of the effect remaining probability change, the player has an expectation that the period of the latent probability state, which is an advantageous state, will be extended, and the period will be shortened. It is possible to play the game with a feeling of tension that the player may lose the game, and to increase motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific small hit type is won, the variation pattern table is switched, and the variation time of the special figure of the next variation is set to a long variation time, and when the next variation is performed, the variation pattern table configured to switch By setting such a long variation time, it is possible to increase the number of effects that can be executed. In addition, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a long fluctuation time is set until a specific small winning type is won. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to construct a configuration in which small winning effects are connected in a pseudo fashion to execute a story-like effect. With such a configuration, the player can play the game while hoping to see the story effect to the end, and the player's desire to continue playing the game is enhanced.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of production times of the latent state increases or decreases, but without being limited to this, the benefits (points, number of prize balls, etc.) that the player can expect in the production can be increased or decreased. can be In addition, it is also possible to execute the effect of increasing/decreasing the remaining effect period for other game states in which a prescribed number of times is provided, not limited to the latent state. With such a configuration, various effects can be provided to the player.

<A3 embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the A3 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 736 to 743. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, among the game balls hit to the right, the game balls that did not enter the second ball entrance 640 are guided to the variable winning device 65, and in the latent probability variable gaming state, the small The number of game balls winning a prize in the variable prize winning device 65 when hit can be predicted in advance. In this A3 embodiment, a distribution device 670 capable of distributing the right-handed game ball in a predetermined order of the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 640, and the general winning opening 63 is arranged. It is different from the A1 embodiment in that it is configured so that the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the probability variable gaming state can be grasped in advance. In addition, the description is abbreviate|omitted about the same content as 1st Embodiment.

FIG. 736 is a front view of the game board 10 in the A3 embodiment. In the A1 embodiment, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is arranged below the upper first ball entrance 64b, but the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is deleted and the upper first ball entrance 64 is arranged. In addition, a first variable winning device 650 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 . In addition, a through gate 67 is arranged in the right hitting area, which is the right area of the third symbol display device 81, and a sorting device 670 for guiding game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 is arranged below it. A second variable prize winning device 65 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the dividing device 670, a second ball entrance 640 is arranged to the lower side of the sorting device 670, and a general prize winning port 63 is arranged to the lower right of the sorting device 670, respectively.

A lottery corresponding to a first special symbol can be executed when a game ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64, and a second special symbol is entered when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加is configured to execute a lottery corresponding to In the normal game state (low probability of winning the jackpot and normal symbols), the variation time of the second special symbol is long (10 minutes in this embodiment), so the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is set. A game is played so as to enter the game ball into the upper first ball entry hole 64 by a left-handed hitting game in which the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down.

In the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is executed when the game ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64, the jackpot lottery is executed, and the jackpot type is determined by lottery. A jackpot game corresponding to is executed. Jackpot types include jackpot A (15 round jackpot: jackpot probability after jackpot game is low probability, normal pattern win probability is low probability (normal game state)), jackpot B (15 round jackpot: jackpot probability after jackpot game) is high probability, normal pattern hit probability is high probability (probable variable game state)), jackpot C (15 rounds jackpot: high probability after jackpot game, normal pattern hit probability is low probability (latent probability variable game state) ) is set.

When jackpots A to C are executed, the first variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state (30 seconds per round or until 10 balls are won). In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 741, the probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is set at 231/233 at low probability, and set at 232/233 at high probability. It is set with a slight difference both at the time of probability and at the time of high probability. By configuring in this way, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability (the left and right blade members rotate in a V shape so that the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640). It is configured so that the frequency of being in a state where the

As a result, it becomes possible to enter the second ball entrance 640 by performing a right-handed game in the normal game state, but in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation time ( Since the variable period) is configured to be selected, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the game with an incorrect game method. Furthermore, in the normal game state, since the pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a smaller size than the pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Even if the ball enters, it is difficult to understand that the second special symbol has started to fluctuate, and it is difficult to understand that the lottery game is being executed. The player can be made to think that nothing will happen, and the player can be guided to a correct game method of performing a left-handed game so as to enter the game ball into the upper first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

Since a long variation time is likely to be selected for the variation time of the second special symbol even when the big hit B is executed and the variable probability game state is executed, the game is played so as to perform a left-handed game. In the variable probability game state, the game is played by entering the game ball into the upper first ball inlet 64, but since the probability of the big hit is set at a high probability (1/80), it is higher than the normal game state (1/240). is also configured such that the jackpot is easily determined. In addition, even if the probability variation gaming state is set, the same effects as the normal gaming state (background color, variation time (variation pattern), etc.) are executed, so the player can understand whether the probability variation gaming state has been set. difficult to configure. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to be in the variable probability game state even in the normal game state, and to continue the game.

When the jackpot C is executed and the latent probability variable game state is set, the variation time of the first special symbol is set so that a long variation time is likely to be selected, and the variation time of the second special symbol is easily selected so that a short variation time is set. . As a result, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and play a game, and a right-handed game (shoot a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the third symbol display device 81). game method) is executed. A game nail is arranged so that all the game balls struck to the right are guided to the through gate 67, and all the game balls passing through the through gate 67 are arranged in a distribution device 670.例文帳に追加. The sorting device 670 is configured to sort the game balls in order in three directions. Below the sorting device 670, a left partition plate 680a is arranged to separate the left channel 690a and the central channel 690b, and a right partition plate 680b is arranged to separate the central channel 690b and the right channel 690c. there is

The distribution device 670 distributes the game balls that have passed through the through gate 670 to the central flow path 690b, then distributes the game balls that have flowed down to the distribution device 670 to the left flow path 690a, and then distributes the game balls to the left flow path 690a. It is configured to distribute the game ball 670 that has flowed down to the right channel 690c. The sorting device 670 sorts out the game balls that repeatedly flow down in the order described above. By configuring in this way, game balls hit to the right can be distributed to the respective ball entering means in a predetermined order, and game balls that become out balls without entering the ball entering means can be suppressed. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, by passing through the through gate 67, the variation of the normal pattern is executed, and when the passing game ball is distributed to the central flow path 690b and reaches the second ball entrance 640, the lottery result If the ball wins, the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加When the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and if the lottery result is a small hit, then the distribution device 670 distributes it to the left flow path 690a. At the timing when the game ball reaches the second variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 65 is in an open state so that the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加. Next, by entering the game ball distributed to the right channel 690c by the distribution device 670 into the general winning hole 63, one prize ball is paid out.

In the present embodiment, the probability that a small hit is drawn in the second special symbol is configured to be 59/60, and is configured to determine a substantially small hit. A lottery result other than a small win is a big win, and a game of entering a game ball into the first variable winning device 65 by a left-handed game is executed. In addition, the latent probability variable gaming state is continuously set until the number of variations of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) fluctuates 100 times or the jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, the number of times the small winning game is executed during the period in which the latent probability variable gaming state is set can be estimated as a maximum of 100 times. The number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 65 can be estimated by sorting them in order by the device 670 . In addition, since the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set to one, the prize balls to be paid out by winning the second variable prize winning device 65 (this embodiment Then, it is possible to calculate the minimum number of prize balls to be paid out in one latent probability change from the number of 15 balls for one ball) and notify the player.

By configuring in this way, when the latent probability variable gaming state is set, by notifying the player of the minimum number of winning balls that can be obtained, the value of setting the latent probability variable gaming state is made known in advance. The game can be played while grasping it, and the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, when the latent probability variable gaming state is set, the number of points (1500pt in this embodiment) corresponding to the expected number of winning balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the second variable winning device 65 The number of points (15 pt in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of winning balls is subtracted and updated each time a game ball enters.

In addition, in the small winning game, the game consists of one round, and the second variable winning device 65 is set to be in the open state until one ball or 30 seconds elapses in one round. When two or more balls are entered in one round (when an overflow occurs), points corresponding to the number of winning balls corresponding to the overflowed balls are displayed so that the overflow can be recognized. It is

It should be noted that the points corresponding to the number of prize balls actually paid out may be displayed, and the number of points corresponding to the number of prize balls that have overflowed may be added to the acquired points and displayed.

Next, details of the distribution device 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 737 and 738. FIG. FIGS. 737(a) to (c) are perspective views of the sorting device 670, showing a state rotated by 120 degrees. 738(a) to (c) are right side views of the sorting device 670, showing a state rotated by 120 degrees. As shown in FIG. 737(a), the sorting device 670 has a columnar shape and is rotatably supported on the rotation axis XC. As shown in FIG. 737(a), the sorting device 670 has a central groove 720 formed in the central portion of the side surface A within a range of 120 degrees from the center X. As shown in FIG. This central groove 720 has a width that allows one game ball to enter, and a holding portion 720a capable of holding a game ball is formed on the front side of the side surface C (upward in FIG. 737(a)). It is As a result, when a game ball enters the central groove 720, the game ball flows downward in the central groove 720 and reaches the holding portion 720a, the weight of the game ball causes the distribution device 670 to rotate downward. Then, when it rotates 120 degrees, the holding part 720a faces directly below the pachinko machine 10, and the held game balls fall and are distributed to the central flow path 690b. In addition, on the left side of the sorting device 720, magnets are arranged at the boundaries of the sides A to C, respectively. , the sorting device 720 is held in a stopped state.

The magnetic force held by the magnets 710a to 710c is generated when the game ball enters each groove (central groove 720, left groove 721, right groove 722) of the sorting device 670 and is held by the holding portion. It is configured to be smaller than the rotational force applied by the ball's own weight, and is configured to release the holding by the magnets 710a to 710c by rotating while holding the game ball.

When the game ball enters the central groove 720 and the sorting device 670 is rotated 120 degrees, it is held by the magnets 710a to 710c at the position where the side B shown in FIG. 737(b) is the front. The side surface B is formed with a left groove 721 into which one game ball can enter. The left groove 721 is formed in a shape curved leftward from the center of the distribution device 670, and a holding portion capable of holding a game ball is formed at the end. By the left groove 721, the game ball entering the left groove 721 from the center of the distribution device 670 is guided leftward by the left groove 721, held by the holding portion, and moved to the distribution device 670 by its own weight. A rotational force is applied to it, and the sorting device 670 is rotated downward.

When the sorting device 670 is rotated downward, the holding portion of the left groove 721 faces downward of the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls held in the holding portion drop downward due to their own weight, thereby releasing the holding portion. be released. In this way, game balls flowing down to the central position of the sorting device 670 can be sorted toward the left end of the sorting device 670 by entering the left groove 721 of the sorting device 670 . When the game ball enters the left groove 721 and is held by the holding portion and the distribution device 670 is rotated downward by its own weight, the position shown in FIG. 737(c) (shown in FIG. 737(b)) It is rotated by the weight of the game ball to the state where it is rotated downward by 120 degrees), and is held so that the rotation of the sorting device 670 is restricted by the magnetic force of the magnets 710a to 710c. In this state, the side surface C is configured to be the front, and the side surface C is formed with a right groove 722 . The right groove 722 has a width that allows one game ball to enter, and is gently curved from the central position of the sorting device 670 toward the right end. The game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 10 receives the game ball on the upstream side of the right groove 722 (at the center position of the sorting device 670), and when the game ball enters the right groove 722, it moves inside the right groove 722. As the game ball flows down, it is guided toward the right end of the sorting device 670 . When the game ball flows down to the end of the right groove 722 , the game ball is held by the holding portion formed at the end of the right groove 722 . The holding portion is formed with a curved surface matching the outer surface of the game ball at the terminal end so as to prevent the game ball from flowing out of the right groove 722 .

When the game ball is held by the holding portion at the terminal end of the right groove 722, the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower side of the distribution device 670, so that the distribution member 670 is rotated downward, and the right groove 722 is held. When the portion faces downward of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball held by the holding portion falls to the outside of the right groove 722 and flows downward. After that, the sorting device 670 is rotated downward by inertia, and is held at a position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. . In this way, the game balls received by the central portion of the distribution device 670 can be distributed to the right by the right groove 722 .

As described above, when the sorting device 670 is held by the magnets 710a to 710c at the positions shown in FIGS. The game balls flowing down to 720 are in a state where they can enter, and the falling game balls enter the central groove 720, so that the game balls are distributed (guided) so that the game balls flow down to the central flow path 790c. can be configured to

In addition, after the game balls are distributed to the central flow path 790c, the rotation is restricted by the magnets 710a to 710c with the side surface B facing the front as shown in FIGS. 737(b) and 738(b). As a result, the game balls flowing down into the left groove 721 are in a state where they can enter, and the falling game balls enter the left groove 721, so that the game balls are distributed so that the game balls flow down into the left channel 790a ( can be configured to guide

In addition, after the game balls are distributed to the left flow path 790a, the rotation is restricted by the magnets 710a to 710c with the side surface C facing the front as shown in FIGS. 737(c) and 738(c). Then, the game ball flowing down to the right groove 722 is in a state where it can enter, and the game ball flowing down enters the right groove 722, so that the game ball is distributed so that the game ball flows down to the right channel 790c ( can be configured to guide

In this way, the game balls guided to the sorting device 670 can be sorted one by one in the order of the central channel 790b, the left channel 790a, and the right channel 790c, so that the game balls can be sorted in this order. By performing the control corresponding to the game property that can be realized by , the player can easily play the game even for the game property that requires a complicated winning order, etc., without performing complicated operations.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 739 and 740, the playability at the time of hitting to the right (at the time of the latent probability variable game state) in the present A3 embodiment will be described. FIG. 739 shows the progress of the game when six game balls are hit to the right in order, and the game balls are sorted by the sorting device 670 and enter the respective ball entry holes (winning holes). It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. FIG. 740 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged area below the through gate 67 of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A3 embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 740, all game balls hit to the right are guided to the through gate 67 and pass through the through gate 67 by the arrangement of the game nails. In the example shown in FIG. 739 in which six game balls are struck to the right, the side A of the sorting device 670 is arranged in front, and the game balls enter the central groove 720 (shown in FIG. 737(a)). state) and the rotation of the sorting device 670 is restricted and the first ball is shot.

When the first game ball is struck to the right, it passes through the through gate 67 to execute a lottery for winning or losing the second symbol (normal symbol). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 741, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired by passing through the through gate 67 and the judgment value defined in the second winning random number counter 202bc match. A determination is made as to whether In this embodiment, when the probability of the second symbol is low (normal game state, latent probability variable game state), when the value of the acquired count value matches one of the determination values of "0 to 230", the second It is determined as a hit of the design. On the other hand, when the probability of the second symbol is high, if any of the "0 to 231" determination values and the value of the obtained count value match, it is determined that the second symbol wins.

In the present A3 embodiment, 0.2 s is selected as the variation time of the second symbol in either case of winning or losing the lottery of the second symbol in the latent probability variable gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 739, there is shown an example in which the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit. It is configured to rotate to an open state in which the ball can enter the second starting port 640 . The opening period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 0.3 s, and when one ball is entered before 0.3 s elapses, the electric accessory 640a is configured to close at that timing. ing.

Through gate 67, second ball entrance 640, and a flowing period of 0.3 s (f1 ) are placed at the required positions. As a result, 0.3 seconds after the first game ball passes through the through gate 67, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, and the second special Symbol variation (special figure variation) is started. Here, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 0.5 seconds regardless of whether the lottery result is a win or a small win, and the second special symbol is stop-displayed after 0.5 seconds from the start of variation. In the example shown in FIG. 739, the lottery result of the second special symbol shows the case of a small hit, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second variable winning device 65 is opened. is configured to The opening period of the second variable winning device 65 is 0.5 s, and when it is detected that one game ball has entered before 0.5 s elapses, it is changed to the closed state at that timing. configured to be Each time one game ball enters the second variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls.

In this embodiment, game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 s regardless of the shooting intensity due to the operation of the shooting handle. That is, the second game ball is configured to pass through the through gate 67 0.6 seconds after the first game ball passes through the through gate 67 . After distributing the first game ball to the central flow path 690b, the distributing device 670 is in a state where the rotation is regulated at the position where the side surface B faces the front, and passes through the through gate 67 into the left groove 721. A game ball can be entered. After passing through the through gate 67, the second game ball is distributed to the left channel 690a having entered the left groove 721.例文帳に追加The flow period (f2 shown in FIG. 739) until the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the specific winning hole 65 of the second variable winning device 65 is 0.3 s. A variable winning device 65 is arranged. As a result, as shown in FIG. 739, the second game ball is configured to enter the second variable winning device 65 in the open state.

Next, the third game ball passes through the through gate 67 0.6 seconds after the second game ball passes through the through gate 67, and rotation is restricted with the side surface C facing forward. The ball enters the right groove 722 of the distribution device 670 , is distributed to the right channel 690 c , and enters the general winning hole 63 . When game balls enter the general winning hole 63, 15 prize balls are paid out to the player. It should be noted that the flowing period (f3 shown in FIG. 739) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 until it enters the general winning hole 63 is 0.3 s. For the 4th to 6th game balls, as shown in FIGS. 739(d) to 739(e), the game flow similar to that of the 1st to 3rd balls is repeated.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol is continuously set until it fluctuates 100 times (the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the latent probability game state (latency probability variable game state). However, since all the game balls hit right in the latent game state are distributed to the winning openings where the prize balls are paid out to the player and can be entered, the latent game state is set. Based on this, the number of points corresponding to the minimum number of winning balls to be paid out to the player is displayed (in this embodiment, the characters of 1500pt are displayed on the third symbol display device). In the latent game state, when a game ball enters each winning hole, points corresponding to the number of winning balls paid out due to the winning are subtracted and displayed (in the second variable winning device, 15 winning balls are displayed). 15pt corresponding to , the second entrance 640, 3pt corresponding to 3 prize balls, and the general winning opening 63, 15pt corresponding to 15 prize balls). Also, the same number of points as the number of subtracted points is added to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the number of acquired points.

On the other hand, if the game ball rolls irregularly or does not enter the prize-winning openings due to a gap in the flow period, etc., the passing sensors 740 and 741 detect the game ball flowing down in the direction of the out port 66. Then, corresponding to the detection, the corresponding number of points is subtracted from the number of remaining earned points. In this case, when deductions are made, the number corresponding to the number of points to be deducted is displayed after the number corresponding to the number of points to be deducted is displayed outside the area where the remaining number of points is displayed. A special display that disappears outside the area is displayed. In addition, if the points corresponding to winning a prize will be subtracted from the display of the number of remaining earned points, the number corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted will be displayed so as to pop out from the display area of the number of remaining earned points. After that, the number of acquired points is displayed after moving to the display area of the number of acquired points.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a hit, the jackpot game is executed by the open game of the first variable prize winning device 650, and the number of acquired points corresponding to the prize winning to the first variable prize winning device 650 is increased. After being added and displayed, at the end of the jackpot game, the number of remaining acquired points is added and displayed corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the remaining potential game state to be given. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols in the latent sure game state, the latent sure game state is always given 100 times (variation number of special symbols) after execution of the big win game. Here, when the jackpot is won when the number of remaining fluctuations reaches 30 times, a value corresponding to the number of points that the player can acquire in the hidden game state for 70 times is given to the number of remaining acquired points. In addition, it may be configured to determine the rotational position of the sorting device 670 (which of the side surfaces A to C is facing the front) and add the number of remaining acquired points. (The number of prize balls to be paid out is determined according to which prize winning opening the game balls are guided to when starting right-handed hitting). By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately display the number of remaining acquired points.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol in the hidden game state is constant regardless of the lottery result, but as shown in FIG. 742(b), the variation time of the first special symbol It was configured to determine a long variation time (10 minutes for a hit, 10 seconds for a miss) compared to the 2 special symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem of erroneously continuing the left-handed game so as to execute the variation of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player in the hidden game state. Furthermore, when the probability variable gaming state or the normal gaming state shifts to the latent certain gaming state, the first special symbol remains reserved (one or more is stored), so that the first special symbol fluctuates for a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the problem that disadvantageous fluctuations are likely to occur due to the

Also, as shown in FIG. 742(a), in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation of the first special symbol, and the right-handed game is illegally executed during the probability variation gaming state. , It is configured to suppress fraud due to the small winning game being executed in a short period of time.

As shown in FIG. 743, the variation time of the second symbol is configured such that 100 s is selected in the normal game state, 0.1 s in the probability variable game state, and 0.3 s in the latent probability game state. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to vary at the same time as in the A1 embodiment, but not limited to that, the second special symbol, the first Either one of the special symbols may be preferentially changed, or may be changed in the order of winning the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sorting device 670 is configured to sort to each of the three flow paths regularly, but may be configured to sort randomly. Also, it may be arranged to distribute with a large ratio of distributing to one channel. Furthermore, the distribution device 670 is configured to rotate and control with a motor or the like, and the remaining number of times of the hidden game state and the type of privilege game in which the latent game state is set (for example, the hidden game state is set By changing the ratio and order of the flow path to which the distribution device 670 distributes the game balls, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the hidden game state can be changed. It may be configured to suggest the value at the start of the latent game state or during the latent game state. Furthermore, in this case, during the privilege game in which the hidden game state is set, the number of points corresponding to the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the latent game state after the bonus game may be notified. good.

Specifically, a mini-game effect is executed in each round of the jackpot game or a specific round, or the frame button 22 is operated, and points are given according to the result of the effect or the operation content of the frame button 22. You may comprise so that a number may be changed. In this case, the type of privilege game being executed and the game state when the privilege game is executed (remaining latent probability number, jackpot history, etc.) determine the content of the effect to be executed, the operation effect, etc. .

<Regarding Modified Example of Embodiment A1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 744 to 745, the HOLD effect executed when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the latent state in the modified example of the A1 embodiment will be described. As described above, in the A1 embodiment, the benefits (expected number of winning balls) that can be expected are displayed during the latent state. Then, when a jackpot is won in the latent definite state, the number of expected winning balls that can be obtained is added at the opening of the jackpot, and is displayed as the remaining winning pt in the third guide area Dm5 of the third pattern display device 81. It was configured as

In the modification of the present A1 embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the latent state, at the ending of the jackpot, "remaining winning pt 1600pt" indicating that the game state has shifted to the latent state again is displayed, Also, during the jackpot game, the number of expected winning prize balls displayed from the latent state is configured not to decrease. To provide a game with unexpectedness by not decreasing the number of expected acquired balls even though the player has obtained a privilege and further increasing the expected number of acquired balls to a state in which a latent definite state is set again. can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 744 and 745, an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when winning the jackpot during the latent certainty state in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 744(a), the start screen of the jackpot effect (hereinafter referred to as HOLD effect) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 744(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the HOLD effect start screen.

When the HOLD effect is started, first, "222" is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol lottery has won the jackpot. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 standing in front of a barbell 830 is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters "Training start" indicating that the effect is to start are scrolled. is displayed in In the third guide area Dm5, "remaining acquisition pt 303 pt" is displayed as information for indicating benefits that can be expected to be acquired during this latent state. By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of anticipation that something will happen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 744(b), an example of the display screen during the HOLD effect (during the jackpot game) will be described. FIG. 744(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a screen during HOLD effect (during jackpot game). In the main display area Dm during the HOLD effect (during the jackpot game), a character 811 standing in front of the barbell 830 at the start of the HOLD effect is displayed holding the barbell 830 slightly up. In spite of the fact that the characters 831 of "HOLD" are displayed as if to pop out from the character 811 and the prize balls are being paid out, it is possible to expect to obtain them in the third guide area Dm5 from the start of the HOLD effect. The information "remaining acquisition pt303pt" for indicating the privilege is displayed without being subtracted. In this way, the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained is displayed so as not to decrease even though the player has obtained the prize balls. improves. Also, the game can be executed while concentrating more on the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 745, an example of the display screen of the HOLD effect success screen (during the ending of the jackpot) will be described. FIG. 745 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a HOLD effect success screen. In the HOLD effect success screen, the character 811, who had been holding the barbell up slightly during the HOLD effect in the main display area Dm, has successfully lifted the barbell 830 completely, and in the secondary display area Ds, Characters of "Successful training!" indicating that the HOLD effect was successful are displayed in a scrolling manner. Then, in the second guidance area Dm4, the characters "remaining 100G" are displayed, and in the third guidance area Dm5, "remaining acquisition pt 1600pt" is displayed. It indicates that the value of Dm4 and the value of the third guidance area Dm5 have increased. By constructing in this way, the player feels as if the period of the potential number of times has been extended, and an unexpected game can be provided.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the A1 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 746, control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the modification of the A1 embodiment will be described. FIG. 746 describes the jackpot related process 4 (S4571) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. FIG. 746 is a flow chart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 4 (S4571). In the jackpot related process 4 (S4571), the process for showing the HOLD effect to the third symbol display device 81 is added to the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 685) in the above-described A1 embodiment. differ. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot-related processing 4 (S4571), when it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received in the processing of S4601 (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the game state at the time of jackpot winning is a latent state (S4602). . When it is determined that it is in the latent definite state (S4602: Yes), the display jackpot start for displaying the HOLD effect start screen (see FIG. 744 (a)) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A command is set (S4671). Next, the HOLD flag 223da provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the modification of the present A1 embodiment is turned on to indicate that the HOLD effect is in progress (a jackpot game won in the latent state). set. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the big win this time is not the latent state (S4602), it is not the execution timing of the HOLD effect, so the above-described processing of S4606 is executed. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4607). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4607: Yes), it is determined whether or not the HOLD flag 223da indicating that the HOLD effect is being performed is ON (S4673). When it is determined that the HOLD flag 223da is ON (S4673), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the HOLD effect is being performed (see FIG. 744(b)) (that the number of remaining acquired balls is maintained). is set (S4674). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4673 that the HOLD flag 223da is not ON (S4673: No), the process of S4610 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the round number command has not been received (S4607: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4611). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the HOLD flag 223da is ON (S4675). When it is determined that the HOLD flag 223da is ON (S47675: Yes), the flag 223da indicating the end of the HOLD effect is set to OFF (S4676), and the value of the remaining acquired balls counter 223j is set to 1600. Then (S4677), an ending command for display indicating success of the HOLD effect is set (S4678), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the HOLD flag 223da is not ON (S4675: No), that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the latent state, the HOLD effect is not executed, so S4614 to S4616 described above. , and terminate this process.

As described above, in the modified example of the A1 embodiment, when the jackpot is won during the latent state, the residual displayed in the second guidance display area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game An effect is executed in which the probability variable number and the expected winning number of balls displayed in the third guide area are not reduced. With this configuration, the number of expected winning balls does not decrease even though the prize balls are paid out, so that the player can be given the impression that he or she has obtained an unexpected privilege. , can provide games with unexpectedness.

In the modification of the A1 embodiment, the HOLD effect is configured so that the expected number of winning balls is not reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may In this way, not only is the number of expected winning balls displayed in the third guide area Dm5 not subtracted, but also the expected winning balls increase step by step, such as each round of a big win, so that the player can: The player can play the game with a sense of excitement that the number of benefits that can be expected to be obtained will increase from now on.

In addition, the opportunity to execute the HOLD effect is not limited to the big win game, and may be configured to be executed when other game conditions are met, such as when winning a small win. In such a configuration, a counter or the like is provided for pooling the value of the expected number of winning balls that has not been subtracted, and the subtraction performance of the expected number of winning balls is executed by lottery or the like from the value of the counter. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with more diverse effects.

<Regarding the second modification of the A1 embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the above-described A1 embodiment will be described. In the above-described A1 embodiment, when the latent certainty state is set as the gaming state, the latent certainty state is configured to continue for a specific period (period until special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times) . Furthermore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed during the latent definite state and the big win is won, the latent definite state is always set after the big win game is finished. Then, when the latent certainty state is newly set after the end of the jackpot game, the specific period is set again as the period during which the latent certainty state continues (see FIG. 636(a)).

In the A1 embodiment configured in this manner, immediately after the latent state is set, for example, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery for the fifth time after the latent state is set, the latent The jackpot game is executed with 95 remaining periods of the definite state, and 100 times are set as the remaining period of the definite state after the jackpot game is finished. That is, the remaining period of the probability state that increases based on the winning of the jackpot is substantially five times.

On the other hand, when the remaining period of the latent state is short, for example, when the jackpot is won in the 95th second special symbol lottery after the latent state is set, the remaining period of the latent state is left 5 times. A jackpot game is executed in the state, and 100 times are set as the remaining period of the latent certainty state after the jackpot game is finished. That is, the remaining period of the probability state that increases based on the winning of the jackpot becomes substantially 95 times.

As described above, in the A1 embodiment, in the specific period in which the latent state is set, depending on the timing of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbols, the benefit given after the jackpot game (latency that actually increases) The length of the certainty period) will be different.

However, in the above-described A1 embodiment, even if the jackpot is won at any timing during the latent state, the suggestion effect (the jackpot win Since the variable display effect executed using the variable period of the special symbol variation) is set, it is possible to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect in association with the amount of benefits given to the player. However, there is a problem that the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, in the state where the latent state is set, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, based on the remaining period of the latent state at the time of winning the jackpot It is configured to set the aspect of the suggestion performance for suggesting the winning of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the amount of benefits given to the player (the amount of benefits (for example, the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the game state set at the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game When the latent certainty state is set after the end, it is possible to set an effect mode associated with the actual increase amount during the period in which the latent certainty state is set, thereby providing a game that is easy for the player to understand. can.

Specifically, the latent definite state ends with a remaining period measuring means capable of measuring the remaining period until the end of a specific period in which the latent definite state continues (for example, the period until the special symbol changes 100 times). Based on the measurement results, the first remaining period is "100 to 81 times", the second remaining period is "80 to 31 times", the second remaining period is "30 A remaining period information discriminating means is provided for discriminating which of the third remaining periods of "1 time to 1 time".

Then, based on the determination result determined by the remaining period information determination means, and information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and the variation time. A performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the suggestive performance is provided.

According to this modified example configured in this way, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol shows the same jackpot, the remaining period of the latent state is the first remaining period, It is possible to set a different effect mode depending on whether it is the second remaining period or not.

It should be noted that, when using a configuration like this modified example, for example, based on the type of the jackpot game to be executed and the actual increase in the period in which the probability state is set, the jackpot that was won It is preferable to provide a rank setting means for setting the rank, and to set the effect mode based on the jackpot rank set by the rank setting means.

In this case, the types of jackpot games to be executed are at least a first type that is disadvantageous to the player (eg, 5-round game) and a second type that is more advantageous than the first type (eg, 15-round game). , and the rank setting means sets the first type as the type of jackpot game, and the second type is set when the remaining period information determining means determines that the remaining period is the third remaining period. It is preferable that the same jackpot rank is set when the period information determining means determines that it is the first remaining period.

In this way, when the jackpot rank is set based on a plurality of conditions, if one condition is a disadvantageous condition that is disadvantageous to the player and the other condition is an advantageous condition that is advantageous to the player, one condition is the game. By setting the same jackpot rank under favorable conditions that are advantageous to players and other conditions that are unfavorable to players, what benefits are given when one jackpot rank is set The game can be played while the player predicts whether the game will be played.

Here, as the suggestive effect set in this modified example, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be used, or it may correspond to the dynamic display of the identification information. You may use the variable display effect|presentation performed by . Moreover, based on the look-ahead information included in the prize winning information command output from the main controller 110, the reserved design of the special design may be varied.

In addition, in the above-described second modification, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the latent state, after the big win game is finished, the latent state is configured to be set for a specific period (100 times), but without being limited to this, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the latent state, after the jackpot game ends, latent A jackpot type in which a definite state is set and a jackpot type in which a game state other than the definite state is set may be settable. Furthermore, among the jackpot types for which the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the length of the specific period for which the probability state is set may be different. Of these, when the first jackpot type is set, the latent state is set for the first specific period (100 times) after the jackpot game ends, and the second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set. When it is set, it is preferable to configure so that the latent certainty state is set for the second specific period (50 times) after the end of the jackpot game.

When the above-described configuration is used, when a jackpot is won during the latent probability state, the determination result of the remaining period information determination means at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot It is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game in correspondence. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect according to the benefit (the length of the latency period that actually increases) to be given after the end of the jackpot game, the game is easy for the player to understand. can be provided.

Furthermore, the configuration of the second modified example described above may be used in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of times of continuously setting the latent certainty state after the end of the jackpot game is limited. Specifically, a frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is provided, the jackpot is won during the probability state, and the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. , the number of times is incremented by one by the number of times measuring means. When the number of times measured by the number-of-times measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) and the jackpot is won, the game state is set so that the latent state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Establish regulatory means to regulate.

According to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively setting a game state (potential state) advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the entire period during which the latent state is set in the above-described pachinko machine 10 (the period from when the latent state is initially set until the restriction is applied by the restricting means) is referred to as the total latency period.

In the pachinko machine 10 described above, the upper limit of the length of the total latency period is set by the regulation means. While it is possible to execute 396 special symbol lotteries per time, if you continue to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the latent state, only 4 special symbol lotteries will be performed 1 x 4 times. It becomes unexecutable. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the upper limit of the length of the total latency period is set, the problem to be solved by the above-described second modification appears more prominently.

Therefore, by using the configuration of the second modified example for the pachinko machine 10 described above, it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand.

In addition, in the second modification described above, it is configured to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the length of the remaining period of the set latent state, but it is not limited to this. Set the production mode of the suggestive production based on the length of the elapsed period of the latent certainty state, or set the production mode of the suggestive production based on the ratio between the elapsed period and the remaining period of the set latent certainty state. Alternatively, the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be set based on the accumulated number of times of the special symbol lottery executed in the latent certainty state which is continuously set.

In addition, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 that displays the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the period in which the probability state is set, the remaining prize that can be obtained is not displayed for the remaining period of the probability state. It may be configured to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the number of balls.

<Regarding Modified Example of Embodiment A3>
Next, a modification of the A3 embodiment described above will be described. In the above-described A3 embodiment, as shown in FIG. 736, a game ball hit to the right can be distributed in a predetermined order of the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 640, and the general winning opening 63. By arranging the device 670, it is possible to comprehend in advance the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the latent probability variable gaming state, and based on the result of the advance grasp, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is notified to the player in advance. was configured to notify

However, in the above-described A3 embodiment, the number of prize balls is calculated in advance by regularly distributing the right-handed game balls to each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c). Since it is constructed so as to be grasped, there is a problem that the ball flow of the game ball becomes monotonous and the desire to play the game is lowered.

On the other hand, in this modification, instead of the sorting device 670 that can be sorted in a predetermined order, the game balls are sent to each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c). The point of providing a sorting device for randomly sorting and each detection means (proximity sensor) for detecting balls in each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c), specifically , the left side detection means is provided in the left flow path 690a, the center detection means is provided in the central flow path 690b, and the right detection means is provided in the right flow path 690c. This embodiment is different from the above-described A3 embodiment in that it is possible to enter a ball into a variable winning device 65 capable of imparting a special privilege.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection means provided in each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c), the flow path through which the right-handed game ball flowed down is determined. The number of winning balls that can be obtained based on the determination result is predicted before the game balls actually enter each winning hole (variable winning device 65, second ball winning hole 640, general winning hole 63), and The predicted result is notified to the player (notified before the game ball actually enters each winning hole (variable winning device 65, second ball winning hole 640, general winning hole 63)). .

By configuring in this way, for each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c), even when using a configuration in which game balls are distributed irregularly, latent probability variation The number of prize balls that can be obtained by a player in a game state can be grasped in advance, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be notified to the player in advance based on the result of the advance grasp.

Also, in this case, after the game ball is detected by the detection means for detecting that the ball has flowed down each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c), the detected game ball is It is preferable to provide delay means for delaying the period until reaching a predetermined winning hole in each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c). By providing this delay means, it is possible to lengthen the period from notifying the player of the number of prize balls that can be obtained based on the result of prior understanding to actually obtaining the number of prize balls. , it is possible to enhance the notification effect of advance notification.

Furthermore, the current game situation (normal symbol lottery result, normal symbol remaining variation time, opening operation status of electric accessory 640a, second special symbol lottery result, remaining time of second special symbol variation, variable winning device 65 ) and the detection result of each detection means, the game ball flowing down each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c) can enter the corresponding winning opening. It is also possible to provide a prize destination discriminating means for discriminating whether or not, and based on the discrimination result, it is possible to comprehend in advance the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the latent probability variable gaming state.

In addition, in this modification, as in the above-described A3 embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is varied for each winning hole (variable winning device 65, second ball entering hole 640, general winning hole 63). 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the variable prize winning device 65, and 3 prize balls are paid out by entering the second ball entrance 640. , and one prize ball is paid out by entering the general prize hole 63. - 特許庁

Then, the game ball flowing down the left channel 690a can win only the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing down the central channel 690b can win the second ball inlet 640 or the variable winning device 65, A ball that has flowed down the right channel 690c is configured to be able to win a prize in the general winning port 63 or the variable winning device 65 . Then, when each detection means detects a game ball, the determination by the winning destination determining means is executed, and the display mode for indicating the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening determined to be able to win is the third symbol display. It is displayed on the display screen of the device 81 .

Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the general winning hole 63, which is one ball with the smallest number of prize balls, can win a prize, the first suggestion display mode simulating a white ball is displayed, and the number of prize balls is displayed. When it is determined that the second ball entrance 640 with three balls can win a prize, a second suggestive display mode simulating a red ball is displayed, and the variable prize winning device 65 with 15 balls with the largest number of prize balls is displayed. When it is determined that a prize can be won, a presentation mode of the third suggestive presentation imitating a golden ball is displayed.

As a result, the player predicts the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the future and the type of winning hole that the game ball can win in accordance with each suggestive display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

Furthermore, in this modification, since it is configured so that the game ball flowing down any flow path can win the variable winning device 65, for example, the variable winning device by winning game (big winning game, small winning game) 65 is opened (at the time when the game ball detected by each detection means reaches the variable winning device 65, the variable winning device 65 is in the open state), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 , the third suggestive display mode imitating a golden sphere is likely to be displayed more often. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in various suggestive display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition to the configuration of this modification, for example, the central first detection means is upstream of the second ball entrance 640 of the central flow path 690b, and the variable winning device 65 is downstream of the second ball entrance 640. A central second detection means may be provided on the upstream side, and the suggestive display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be changed on the way based on the detection result of each detection means. .

In addition, in this modification, since the delay means for delaying the period from when the game ball is detected by each detection means until it reaches each winning hole is provided, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Although it is configured so that many suggestive display modes can be displayed, for example, the display modes displayed as the suggestive display modes may be combined and displayed. When five display modes are displayed, one third suggestion display mode indicating 15 prize balls may be displayed. Conversely, instead of the third suggestive display mode indicating 15 prize balls, five second suggested display modes indicating 3 prize balls may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know in which winning hole the game ball will win, while informing the player of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the future, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the number of prize balls is different for each winning hole, but it is not limited to this. The same number of prize balls may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand in which winning hole the game ball will win only from the suggestive display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition to the payout, the player can be interested in whether or not the lottery for the special symbols has been executed.

In addition, in this modified example, an example is shown in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the future is displayed as a suggestive display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. The win effect may be executed using the period until the prize is won, and when the ball wins the variable prize winning device 65, the win effect and the suggestive display mode may be changed according to the passage through which the ball passes. may be configured.

In this modification, a delay means is provided for delaying the period until the game ball detected by each detection means reaches each winning hole. For example, a distribution device that randomly distributes game balls to each flow path (left flow path 690a, central flow path 690b, right flow path 690c) As such, it is preferable to provide a clown member having a retention portion for retaining the balls, and three openings through which the balls retained in the retention portion can pass and which are in communication with the flow paths. In this case, after the game ball struck to the right stays (rolls) in the staying portion of the crew member, it passes through one of the openings and flows down to the corresponding channel. As a result, the right-handed game balls can be distributed randomly, and the distribution interval can be made indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to detect a plurality of balls by the detection means in a short period of time (for example, a period shorter than the game ball shooting interval (0.6 seconds)). It is possible to execute an effect with unexpectedness for the player.

<Invention summary of each embodiment of A>
As described above, in the above-described A-th embodiments, predetermined conditions (for example, after the end of the jackpot game in which the specific jackpot type is set, or the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols probability state) is set, the transition condition to shift the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state When the lottery result of)) is established, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set, and when the latent state is set, It is configured so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

The second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed means that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than when another game state is set, for example, another game state. is set, a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning opening 640, which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, or the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. As the dynamic display period (fluctuation time of the second special symbol), a short dynamic display period is more likely to be set than when another game state is set.

Each of the above-described A-th embodiments is configured so that a small win is won with a high probability by lottery of the second special symbol, and a small win game executed based on the small win winning is frequently executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a specific game in which the player wins prize balls.

Here, the contents of the small winning game will be briefly explained. A small winning game is a winning game that is executed when a small winning that can be won in a part of the case where a special symbol lottery does not win a big winning, and is given to a player by one winning game. The privilege (the number of prize balls) to be played is set to be smaller than the privilege (the number of prize balls) given to the player than the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. In addition, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set while the jackpot game is being executed, and after the end of the jackpot game. , the game state corresponding to the jackpot type set for the winning big win is set, whereas when the small win is won, the small win game is played and the small win game ends. It is configured so as not to set a new game state later.

That is, in each of the above-described Ath embodiments, when the latent state is set as the game state, the game (right A beating game) is performed, and a game aiming at winning the next big hit is performed while acquiring the number of prize balls by the small winning game, and the game state becomes the most advantageous to the player.

Further, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, an upper limit is set for the period in which the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is set. Specifically, when the number of lotteries of special symbols executed during the latent state reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times), the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols ) to a normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols). This prevents the player from setting the most advantageous game state for a long period of time and giving the player an excessive privilege. In addition, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, the latent state is terminated based on the number of special symbol lotteries during the latent state, but the latent state is ended without being limited to this. As the latent state end condition, for example, a latent state end condition that is established based on the fact that the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol among the special symbols reaches a predetermined number may be set. As a result, for example, it is possible to make it difficult for the latent state to end based on the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol during the latent state, so that when the latent state is set, the player can It is possible to make it easier to give the minimum privilege to the customer.

In addition, a latent state end condition that is established when the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (for example, a small win of a specific type) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) is set. Also good. As a result, the period for which the latent definite state is set is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how long the latent definite state will continue. In addition, by setting the latent state end condition based on the winning of the specific type of small winning, it is possible to execute the small winning game at least once, so that when the latent state is set, the player can It is possible to make it easy to give the minimum privilege to the customer.

As described above, the game in which the small winning game is frequently performed during the latent certainty state described above will be referred to as a specific game and the description will be continued.

In each of the above-mentioned Ath embodiments, when a specific game is being played, in addition to the remaining period of the specific game, the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the specific game can be notified to the player in advance. Configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp at least the award amount (the number of prize balls) that can be obtained at the time when the specific game ends, so that the motivation for the game can be increased.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned A-th embodiments, while the specific game is being executed, the remaining period information that suggests the remaining period of the specific game and the remaining privilege that suggests the remaining privilege amount that can be obtained during the specific game Although it is configured to display the amount information, it may be configured to display only the remaining privilege amount information without displaying the remaining period information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the specific game will continue. In addition, it may be configured to display privilege amount information that can suggest to the player the total privilege amount that can be granted during the current specific game, the privilege amount that has already been granted, and the remaining privilege amount. .

Furthermore, in the above-described Ath embodiments, the remaining privilege amount information is set for the entire period until the end of the specific game, and is configured to be notified (displayed) to the player. Without limitation, the remaining privilege amount information may be set for a part of the period until the end of the specific game. In this case, the remaining privilege amount information may be set again based on the remaining period of the specific game when the period corresponding to the set remaining privilege amount information has passed (will be). By constructing in this manner, the specific game can be continued after the specific game is finished while informing the player of the privilege amount that can be acquired in advance. It is possible to provide a game with

Furthermore, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, the game ball fired during the specific game can be used in accordance with a predetermined rule. Since it is constructed so as to win prizes, it is possible to easily determine in advance the amount of privilege that can be obtained during the specific game.

In addition, a discriminating means is provided to discriminate between the pre-determined privilege amount (predicted privilege amount) and the actually given privilege amount (actual privilege amount). correction means capable of executing correction processing for correcting the predicted privilege amount when it is determined that there is a difference in By providing this correction means, the privilege amount displayed to the player as the predicted privilege amount can be displayed more accurately.

In addition, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, as the predicted privilege amount, the minimum privilege amount that can be obtained when the game is played normally is predicted and calculated. It is configured so that the case where the amount is larger is more likely to occur. Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is opened, the predicted privilege amount is calculated on the assumption that the number of winning balls is one. It is configured so that more balls than balls can win a prize in the variable prize winning device 65. - 特許庁In this way, by making it easier for the actual bonus amount to be larger than the predicted bonus amount, the player can grasp the minimum bonus amount that can be obtained, and at the same time correct the predicted bonus amount upward. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game.

In addition, when it is determined that the actual privilege amount is larger than the predicted privilege amount, the difference may be corrected after a predetermined period of time, instead of being corrected immediately. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which timing and which game caused the increase in the predicted bonus amount. , an event in which the ball does not win during the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 once), the difference can be offset.

In each of the Ath embodiments described above, the remaining privilege amount information for indicating the privilege amount obtainable during the specific game is indicated by the number of points, and the number of points is subtracted each time the player obtains a privilege. However, without being limited to this, the character moves on the gauge based on the gauge indicating the total amount of the predicted privilege amount that can be acquired during the specific game, the already acquired privilege amount, and the remaining privilege amount. You may use the display mode which carries out. With this configuration, the player can roughly predict the remaining privilege amount, and when the predicted privilege amount is slightly corrected, the presence or absence of the correction can be made difficult for the player to notice.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, when a privilege is actually acquired, the remaining privilege amount information is updated according to the acquired privilege amount. The remaining privilege amount information may be updated collectively when the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 50 balls). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the remaining privilege amount information from being frequently updated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining privilege amount information.

In addition, when a jackpot is won while a specific game is being executed, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game and the specific game in the latent state set after the jackpot game ends. An addition means is provided for adding the number of possible prize balls to the remaining privilege amount information.

The adding means determines the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has actually been won, and the latency state set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to add the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the specific game inside. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls to be additionally provided based on the winning of the jackpot can be updated (added) at once, and an easy-to-understand display for the player can be provided.

In addition, the configuration of the adding means is not limited to this, for example, based on the result of the special symbol pre-reading process, the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the future is determined in advance, and based on the determination result, in advance Addition by an addition means may be performed. By configuring in this way, the remaining privilege amount information can be added at various timings (timing before the execution of the jackpot change, predetermined timing during the jackpot change, etc.). It is preferable that the amount of addition be within the maximum number of prize balls (15 balls) given to one game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the value added by the addition process indicates a big win. Also, in order to suggest that a jackpot will be won, an additional amount larger than 15 balls may be displayed.

In addition, based on the winning of the jackpot, the number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtainable during the specific game in the latent state set after the end of the jackpot game are determined. It is preferable to configure so as to add at different timings. By constructing in this way, the game machine is capable of setting a jackpot type in which a latent probability state is set after the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a jackpot type in which the latent probability state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. , it is possible to suppress grasping of the game state set after the end of the big win game based on the number of prize balls added when the big win is won.

Further, in each of the above-described A-th embodiments, in order to indicate the remaining game information of the specific game, it is configured to indicate the remaining privilege amount information or the remaining period. It may be constructed so as to show total information obtained by summing up the game contents (amount of privilege, game period) that can be executed in a specific game, or it may be constructed so that the player can select the game contents displayed during the specific game. . In addition, the player can select the execution frequency and execution timing of the additional effects (addition of the remaining privilege amount, addition of the remaining period) executed during the specific game at a stage before the specific game is executed. can be configured to

Also, in the above-described A-th embodiments, the right-handed game is performed during the specific game, and the left-handed game is performed in other game states. A board configuration may be used in which the hitting game is performed and the rest is performed in the right-handed game.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main controller 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main controller 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Prevention of banging with the solenoid. Use of cushion>
displacement means configured to be displaceable; driving means disposed on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and capable of generating a driving force for driving the displacement means in the predetermined direction; and resistance means configured to generate resistance against displacement in the predetermined direction,
The game machine a1 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured to displace a displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the electromagnetic solenoid receives the load from the displacement member only, and the electromagnetic solenoid receives an excessive load. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine a1, the resistance means is positioned on the predetermined direction side (driving means side) of the displacement means.
Since a resistance against displacement is generated and the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the drive means from receiving an excessive load. Thereby, the durability of the game machine can be improved.

The mode of reducing the load applied to the driving means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be dispersed by increasing the number of locations that receive the load, and the load may be suppressed, or the load may be transmitted by providing a gap between the displacement means and the driving means by the resistance means. may be blocked, or the load per unit area may be reduced by enlarging the surface on which the resistance means acts on the displacement means.

A gaming machine a2 in the gaming machine a1, further comprising supporting means for supporting the displacement means, wherein the driving means is arranged closer to the supporting means than the resistance means.

According to the game machine a2, in addition to the effects of the game machine a1, the arm length between the support means and the drive means (the arm length of the moment of force) is kept short, thereby reducing the load applied to the resistance means. Excessive size can be avoided.

In the game machine a2, the supporting means rotatably supports the displacement means about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. .

According to the game machine a3, in addition to the effects of the game machine a2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from reversing in the direction (horizontal direction) intersecting the predetermined direction,
Since it is possible to limit the side of the portion covering the rotating shaft where rubbing occurs to one side (avoiding slight lateral displacement), it is possible to limit the portion that needs to be formed thick.

In the gaming machine a3, first resistance means for generating a load against displacement in the predetermined direction;
a second resistance means that generates a load against displacement in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction side, wherein the first resistance means and the second resistance means are arranged at different positions when viewed in the predetermined direction; , wherein the first resistance means is arranged farther from the predetermined axis than the second resistance means.

According to the game machine a4, in addition to the effects of the game machine a3, the load applied from the first resistance means to the displacement means can be reduced. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by lengthening the arm length of the moment of force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

In addition, by separating the location where the load is applied between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the location where the load is applied between the second resistance means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid concentration of the load. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine a3 or a4, the displacement means includes a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means, and an attached portion extending radially outward of the transmission portion, and the first resistor The gaming machine a5, wherein the means is disposed so as to be able to abut against the attached portion.

According to the game machine a5, in addition to the effects of the game machine a3 or a4, even if the attached part is damaged, it is possible to transmit the driving force to the displacement means. can continue to displace the displacing means.

In addition, the mode of the transmission section is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be arranged at a position close to the drive means, or may be arranged on the opposite side in the axial direction of the side on which the drive means is arranged with reference to the shaft member arranged along the predetermined axis. But it's okay.

In addition, with respect to the shaft member, the aspect of the opposite side in the axial direction to the side on which the driving means is arranged is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the drive means and the transmission section may be arranged at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane orthogonal to the predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite sides, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmission portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5, the gaming machine a6 is characterized by comprising load applying means for applying a load in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to the displacement means.

According to the game machine a6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines a1 to a5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

In the game machine a6, the load applying means are arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine a7, in addition to the effects of the game machine a6, it is possible to avoid imbalance in the attitude of the load applying means and the load caused by the influence of the driving force.

A game machine a8 according to any one of the game machines a1 to a7, wherein the resistance means is configured to be capable of applying a reaction force while being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the game machine a8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines a1 to a7, frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine a8, the displacement means is configured to receive an external force, and the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Gaming machine a9.

According to the game machine a9, in addition to the effects of the game machine a8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced by an external force by means of frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
base means, intermediate means slidably supported by the base means, distal end side means supported by the intermediate means so as to be displaceable, and intermediate means supported by the intermediate means, the intermediate means with respect to the base means a game machine comprising displacement constituting means configured to be capable of displacing the tip end side means with respect to the intermediate means as a result of displacement, wherein the base means is displaceable in a non-corresponding manner to the displacement mode of the intermediate means A gaming machine b1 characterized by comprising:

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines having a structure in which a pinion is sandwiched between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, since the racks are displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, it is possible to increase the displacement speed of one rack with respect to the other rack, thereby constructing a production body that displaces at high speed. It is possible.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effect body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b1, since the base means is configured to be displaceable, by displacing the base means according to the displacement of the tip side means and the intermediate means, the base means can be displaced by the tip side means and the intermediate means. can be hidden. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately prepare a shielding member, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the distal end side means.

A gaming machine b2 characterized in that in the gaming machine b1, the base means is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both members (foundation means and tip end side means) sandwiching the pinion are racks that slide in parallel, and when the pinion and the rack are arranged on the same plane, it is necessary to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed in a position that overlaps the rack when viewed in the direction of displacement, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction that intersects the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that

In addition, since it is necessary to arrange support portions at multiple points to maintain the rack posture and to optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk of complicating the member structure and increasing the number of assembly man-hours. There was a problem. In other words, there is room for improvement in terms of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the protruding portion on the base means side and the recessed portion on the tip side means overlapped in the sliding displacement direction, so the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the game machine b2, since the base means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the base means and the displacement constituting means can be arranged at overlapping positions when viewed in the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means, thereby saving space. In addition, since it is sufficient for the foundation means to have a structure for pivoting, the structure can be simplified.

In addition, since the overhang portion on the base means side can be arranged on the far side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine b2, a part of the base means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the base means is reversed along the sliding displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating about the other part as a fulcrum. , the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting with the slide displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine b3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine b2, since both the part of the basic means and the displacement constituting means are supported by the intermediate means, the distance between the part of the basic means and the displacement constituting means is reduced. Load transmission can be stabilized.

Further, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in a direction intersecting the sliding displacement direction, the displacement of the part of the foundation means and the other part of the foundation means can be balanced, and the displacement of the entire foundation means can be reduced to (
up, down, left, and right) can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines b1 to b3, the tip side means is one side of the displacement range (overhang side)
A gaming machine b4 characterized in that, in a state arranged at the end position, the base means receives a load for maintaining a posture from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the game machine b4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines b1 to b3, the load necessary for the slide displacement can be reduced compared to the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. can be done. Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the base means is maintained in a state in which the tip side means is arranged at the one end position, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized.

In any one of game machines b1 to b4, the tip side means is the other side of the displacement range (retreat side)
A gaming machine b5 characterized in that, in a state arranged at the terminal position, the base means assumes a posture in which the load applied from the intermediate means faces the displaceable direction of the base means.

According to the gaming machine b5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines b1 to b4, basic means,
Activation of intermediate means and displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any one of game machines b1 to b5, the tip side means is the other side of the displacement range (retreat side)
A game machine b6 characterized in that the base means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the retracted position side more than the intermediate means in a state arranged at the end position.

According to the gaming machine b6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines b1 to b5, by adopting a configuration in which the protruding portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (retreat side) end position that is difficult to see from the player, the intermediate means While keeping the vertical dimension of the base means below the dimension of the base means, the base means can be hidden by the intermediate means at the end position of one side (overhang side).

In any one of the game machines b1 to b6, a part of the base means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means and the tip side means is provided with electric wiring guided to the base means. A game machine b7 characterized by being connected to

According to the game machine b7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines b1 to b6, by utilizing the fact that the displacement of a part of the base means is suppressed, the passage route of the electric wiring can be easily secured and the electric wiring can be performed. It is possible to suppress the load applied to.

A game machine b8 in the game machine b7, characterized in that the tip side means is configured to be slidably displaceable, and the electrical wiring is arranged outside the tip side means.

According to the gaming machine b8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine b7, the load given to the electrical wiring is reduced compared to the case where the electrical wiring is connected to the tip side means that is displaced by the sliding displacement that easily applies a load to the electrical wiring. can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) occurring in the operation between the tip side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. for example,
The drive means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the base means and the drive means for driving the distal end side means with reference to the intermediate means can be configured separately while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small.

In any one of the game machines b1 to b8, the displacement configuration means is configured to be capable of displacing the tip side means with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the amount of displacement of the intermediate means. game machine b9.

According to the game machine b9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines b1 to b8, the tip side means can be stably displaced at high speed (higher speed than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are asymmetrically configured>
a plurality of displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a first relative position and a second relative position arranged farther apart than the first relative position; or configured to be visible in a series of predetermined shapes in at least one of said second relative positions;
A gaming machine c1, wherein the plurality of displacement means comprises a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a series of shapes are formed by arranging a plurality of substantially identical operating units close to each other (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095).
. According to this structure, it is possible to easily construct a large effect body by combining small-sized moving parts, and in addition, since the moving parts themselves have substantially the same structure, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of the assembly work. can.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the shape of the motion part is configured to be substantially the same, the space required for realizing the displacement of each motion part is common to each motion part, so the space is limited. However, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in design so that the space can be utilized.

For example, when the action unit is displaced on the right side of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from the player. Nevertheless, the space required for the displacement of the action part is symmetrical with respect to the action part, so the displacement possible amount of the left side of the action part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement of the right side of the action part. There was a problem that it would be limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine c1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means visually recognized as a series of shapes are configured with different sizes, the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, the space required to achieve the displacement can be made different, so the limited space can be used well, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the gaming machine c1, the gaming machine c2 is characterized in that the outer shapes of the first displacing means and the second displacing means are set according to the disposition possible regions in the second relative position.

According to the game machine c2, in addition to the effects of the game machine c1, regardless of the difference in the size of the placeable region at the second relative position, the first relative position is visually recognized by the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

Also, as in the case where the game board is made of a light-transmissive resin, the decoration of the area at the second relative position can be improved by substituting the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the game machine c1 or c2, guide means is arranged on the back side of the plurality of displacement means and guides the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is, when viewed from a predetermined direction, A game machine c3 characterized by being configured to be displaced.

According to the gaming machine c3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine c1 or c2, it is possible to prevent the guide means from being visually recognized through the gaps between the plurality of displacement means. As a result, instead, it is possible to make effective use of the gap, such as making the decorative portion other than the guide means visible through the gap.

In the game machine c3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the plurality of displacement means is determined from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and extending in the predetermined direction as viewed in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine c4 characterized in that it is arranged in a shifted position.

According to the game machine c4, in addition to the effects of the game machine c3, considering the load balance etc., the part (reference (corresponding to lines) can be hidden by a plurality of displacement means so as to be difficult for the player to see, thereby avoiding deterioration of the design.

In any one of the game machines c1 to c4, a driving means for generating a driving force is provided, the first displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means is the A game machine c5, characterized in that it is arranged downstream of a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines c1 to c4, by configuring the member to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

In the game machine c5, the driving means and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left part of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged in the upper left part. A gaming machine c6 characterized in that the first displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means arranged at a position different from the upper left part.

According to the gaming machine c6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine c5, from the configuration and arrangement of the payout device,
The drive means and transmission means arranged in the upper left part, which can easily secure a larger area than the upper right part as the inner area of the rear case, can be easily hidden by the first displacement means arranged in the upper left part. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive means and the transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to configure a separate cover for concealing the drive means and the transmission means.

In the game machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means is configured so that gravity acts in a tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to approach the second displacement means by tilting displacement. Characterized game machine c7.

According to the game machine c7, in addition to the effects of the game machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows contact, but a clearance ( When there is a gap due to misalignment that does not come into contact with a gap between the guide rail and the guided part, play between meshing gear teeth, gap between the guide rail and the guided part, etc., the gap can be easily filled by tilting displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

As a result, it is possible to avoid maintaining a state in which a gap is generated between the first displacement means and the second displacement means. It is possible to improve the designability when configuring the shape.

A gaming machine c8 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines c5 to c7, electrical wiring passes through the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to the game machine c8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines c5 to c7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are over-displaced by passing the electric wiring through the second displacement means side where over-displacement is less likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any one of the game machines c1 to c8, the predetermined shape is composed of a symmetrical shape, and the split surface forming part that forms the split surface separating the first displacement means and the second displacement means is located at the center of the game area. A gaming machine c9 characterized by being arranged on the far side from the position.

According to the game machine c9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines c1 to c8, the asymmetrical split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of vision (the side that is difficult to see from the player), thereby providing the first displacement means. and deterioration of the appearance of the second displacement means can be avoided.

The appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape of the opposite side, the central position side of the game area (the side closer to the field of view, the side easier for the player to see) into a symmetrical shape.

In any one of the gaming machines c1 to c9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged such that the sides on which the size of the dispositionable area is restricted in the second relative position face each other in the first relative position. Machine c10.

According to the game machine c10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines c1 to c9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacing means composed of asymmetrical shapes in a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any one of the game machines c1 to c10, the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is a downward displacement, and the first displacement is A game machine c11 characterized in that it is configured such that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine c11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines c1 to c10, by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, if the upper inner surface of the back case is displaced vertically due to the shape of the dispensing device, the plurality of displacing means will not affect the up-down position of the back case (equivalent to a predetermined section). By starting the second displacement after the second displacement is started, it is possible to equally form the regions in which the displacements of the plurality of displacement means are permitted without being affected by the vertical positional deviation of the upper inner surface of the rear case. Even when the displacement modes of the displacement means are the same, it is possible to easily avoid collision of the plurality of displacement means with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement by placement>
Displaceable first displacement means and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means, wherein the first displacement means supports one of the second displacement means and a second support portion for supporting the other second displacement means, wherein the first displacement means supported by the first support portion accompanies a predetermined displacement of the first displacement means. 2. Displacement modes with respect to the first displacement means generated in the displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion as the first displacement means undergoes a predetermined displacement. A game machine d1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the displacement mode with respect to.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that the second displacement means (353) is displaced as the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) are displaced (for example, JP-A-2015- 231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine d1, the second
Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be varied depending on whether the displacement means is supported by the first support part or the second support part, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can complicate the displacement mode, and can improve the presentation effect.

In the game machine d1, the gap between the one second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion. The displacement means are
The game machine d2 is characterized in that the displacement amount is larger on the side of the first support portion than on the side of the second support portion.

According to the game machine d2, in addition to the effects of the game machine d1, the displacement of the first displacement means can be configured to eliminate the gap of the first support portion, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

In the game machine d1 or d2, load application means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the first displacement means is supported on one side in a predetermined direction and displaceable on one side. and the displaceable amount of the other side portion are different, and the load imparting means is configured so that the first
The second displacement means is configured to apply a load to the other side of the displacement means, and the second displacement means includes one side second displacement means arranged on the one side and the other side second displacement means arranged on the other side. A gaming machine d3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine d3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine d1 or d2, the displacement of the second displacement means is placed on one side regardless of where the load imparting means applies the load to the first displacement means. or on the other side.

In any one of the game machines d1 to d3, a load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, the load applying means are arranged at a plurality of positions, and each independently performs the first displacement A game machine d4 characterized in that it is constructed so that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the gaming machine d4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d3, the need for auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means can be eliminated.

In any one of the game machines d1 to d4, the load application means is configured to be capable of applying a load to the first displacement means, and a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface is provided, and the load applying means is at least attached to the light emitting substrate. A game machine d5 characterized in that a part thereof is shielded when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine d5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines d1 to d4, the light-emitting substrate can hide the load imparting means. That is, by using the light-emitting substrate necessary for the convenience of light-emitting production,
It is possible to prevent the load applying means from being visually recognized by the player. In this case, by irradiating strong light from the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate, visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. can also be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

When the light emitting substrate and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a driving device (eg, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying means by utilizing the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting substrate. Since the electrical wiring can be passed through, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately create a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine d5, the light-emitting substrate is disposed on the back side of a game board, and the game board is provided with a recessed portion in which the opposing side is recessed at a position facing the light-emitting substrate. Machine d6.

According to the game machine d6, in addition to the effects of the game machine d5, an area for arranging the light emitting substrate can be secured between the game machine and the game board, and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the game board. can be prevented.

A gaming machine d7, wherein the recessed portion is disposed outside the outer shape of the gaming area when viewed from the front in the gaming machine d6.

According to the game machine d7, in addition to the effects of the game machine d6, even if the film member formed in front of the recessed portion is displaced, the displacement can avoid affecting the game area. can be done.

In any one of the game machines d1 to d7, a game characterized by comprising guide means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, the guide means being disposed on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine d8.

According to the game machine d8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines d1 to d7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be restricted by the guide means, and the guide means is arranged near the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced compared to , it is possible to suppress rubbing between the first displacement means and the guide means.

In game machine d8, a support plate for supporting the guide means, a thin film member fixed in a predetermined region to the support plate, and a light emitting substrate disposed on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and having a light emitting portion and wherein the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without a gap.

According to the game machine d9, in addition to the effects of the game machine d8, by partitioning the guide means and the light emitting substrate with the thin film member, it is possible to prevent the rubbing powder of the guide means from entering the light emitting substrate side. can.

A gaming machine d10 in the gaming machine d9, characterized in that said thin film member is constructed with a dimension capable of avoiding contact with other displacement means.

According to the game machine d10, in addition to the effects of the game machine d9, it is not necessary to ensure the rigidity of the thin film member. can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. The key to communication>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, wherein the transmission means is a driving A game machine e1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state so as to change the transmission mode of force.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of the displacement means, and the transmission means displaces the deformation means to displace the displacement means ( For example, see JP-A-2010-234152). According to this game machine, since the deformation groove is formed to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb some excessive displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the deformed groove is configured to absorb excessive displacement of the transmission means, extra wall thickness and dimensional length are required to constitute the deformed groove. The restrictions on the shape of the displacement means are increased. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine e1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, the excessive displacement of the transmission means can be absorbed by the change of the state of the transmission means. can. Therefore, since there is no need to add an extra structure to the displacement means, the structure of the displacement means can be improved.

Note that the change in transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the transmission efficiency of the driving force may be changed by changing the rigidity of the transmission means or by adjusting the direction of the load applied to the transmission means, or by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. .

A gaming machine e2 characterized in that in the gaming machine e1, the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the game machine e2, in addition to the effects of the game machine e1, the load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source for changing the state of the transmission means.

In addition, the mode of change of the state of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to changes in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Further, examples of modes of deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, deflection, and twisting, and deformation such as bending and positional displacement that causes a boundary. Examples of the mode of change in rigidity (strength) include a mode in which the thickness of the transmission means changes, and a mode in which the core inserted through the transmission means comes out.

In the gaming machine e2, the transmission means is configured with a shape having different easiness of bending depending on the direction,
A game machine e3 characterized in that an angle between a direction of a reaction force received from the displacement means and a direction of easy bending changes before and after the displacement means passes through a predetermined reference position as the displacement means is displaced. .

According to the game machine e3, in addition to the effects of the game machine e2, the fact that the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means changes during the displacement of the displacement means can be utilized for the shape change of the transmission means.
With the predetermined reference position as a boundary, it is possible to divide a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the driving force mainly bends and deforms the transmission means.

In the game machine e3, the displacement means is driven to stop in a predetermined midway posture, and the transmission means receives a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is in the midway posture. A gaming machine e4 characterized in that the direction of is configured to be along the direction of easy bending.

According to the game machine e4, in addition to the effects of the game machine e3, the deflection of the transmission means makes it easy to keep the displacement means in the halfway position. Even if it is set, it is possible to easily keep the displacement means in the halfway posture.

In the gaming machine e4, the drive means applies a driving force so that the pushing portion of the transmission means for pushing the displacement means passes through the abutment position of the displacement means in the midway posture before being bent. A game machine e5 characterized by being controlled to generate.

According to the game machine e5, in addition to the effects of the game machine e4, even after the displacement means is in the halfway posture, it is possible to make the driving energy inherent, and use this to vibrate the displacement means.

In other words, since the transmission means has a posture that allows it to easily bend, it is possible to cause the transmission means to vibrate using the bending without generating the driving force of the drive means in a mode for generating vibration. This makes it possible to generate vibration with a simple mechanism.

A gaming machine e6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines e1 to e5, a gaming machine e6 is provided with range setting means capable of setting a range in which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to the game machine e6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines e1 to e5, the range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set by the range setting means. You can adjust accordingly.

In the game machine e6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to a downstream side of a driving force transmission path with respect to a predetermined position. .

According to the gaming machine e7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine e6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the drive means, so that the transmission on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force can be performed. A decrease in efficiency can be suppressed.

Further, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of state change occurring in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced.
Therefore, even if the drive means cannot be precisely controlled, the deviation of the displacement mode of the displacement means (for example, the deviation of the stop position) can be kept small.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
A gaming machine comprising a rotational displacement means configured to be rotationally displaceable, and an electricity supply means arranged along a line connecting the rotating shaft and the radial portion of the rotational displacement means and capable of supplying electricity to the rotational displacement means, The game machine f1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means comprises a placed portion arranged on the rotating shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which electric wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member that is rotatably supported, and the electric wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example,
See JP-A-2012-157474). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the electrical wiring is only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and there is a risk that the electrical wiring will expand and contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the game machine f1, since the arranged portion of the electric supply means (electric wiring) is arranged on the rotating shaft portion of the rotational displacement means, when the rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs, the rotational displacement means It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the portion to be arranged that occurs with respect to and suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

The gaming machine f1 includes displaceable means displaceably disposed near the electricity supply means, and suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction toward the displacement means. A gaming machine f2 characterized by:

According to the game machine f2, in addition to the effects of the game machine f1, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the game machine f2, the game machine f3 is characterized in that the disposition displacement means is configured to be easily separated from the electricity supply means when an unexpected displacement occurs.

According to the game machine f3, in addition to the effects of the game machine f2, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the game machine f3, the disposition displacement means includes a first displacement means that displaces closer to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position that displaces closer to the electricity supply means and stops is the first disposition displacement means. a second displacing means set at a position distant from the electricity supplying means compared to the stop position, wherein the first displacing means and the second displacing means are adapted to move to the electricity supplying means; A game machine f4 characterized in that it is configured to abut against each other by being displaced closer to each other and apply a load in a direction away from the electricity supply means.

According to the game machine f4, in addition to the effects of the game machine f3, even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced excessively, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the electricity supply means. can do.

A gaming machine f5 in the gaming machine f4, characterized in that the first arrangement displacement means is constructed so as to have smaller inertia than the second arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine f5, in addition to the effects of the game machine f4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first arrangement means unintentionally contacts the electricity supply means.

In addition, the aspect which comprises the magnitude|size of inertia is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of inertia may be configured by configuring the first displacing means to be lighter and smaller than the second disposing displacing means, or the form of the support section may be changed. The magnitude of inertia may be configured by generating the magnitude of displacement resistance with .

In any one of the game machines f1 to f5, provided with support means for supporting the rotational displacement means, the support means having an open portion opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means, The gaming machine f6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the opening.

According to the game machine f6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines f1 to f5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed compared to the case where the electricity supply means is passed through the inside of the predetermined rotating shaft. be able to.

The game machines f1 to f6 are provided with displaceable means disposed near the electricity supply means and driving means for generating a driving force for driving the displaceable means, the driving means comprising: A game machine f7 characterized in that it is arranged on the side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.
.

According to the game machine f7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines f2 to f6, it is possible to improve the layout efficiency.

The game machine f8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines f1 to f7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine f8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines f1 to f7, the means for guiding the electric wiring is provided with a driving force transmission function, so that the member can be used in common. The number can be reduced.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Drive Unit 600 as an Example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance to open or close the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, wherein the transmission mechanism comprises the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotary member. A game machine g1 characterized in that a sliding groove through which a set portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of feather members.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A-2010- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a protruding portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of feather members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposed portions are formed which face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the projecting portion of the feather member is inserted between the opposed portions. Therefore, when the rotary member is rotated, the facing portion of the rotary member pushes up or pushes down the projecting portion of the wing member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening and closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is changed according to the outer shape (thickness) of the projecting portion. ), the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible to rotate the rotating member. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing parts to a size that does not interfere with the projecting part, and the gap between the facing part and the projecting part is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing members are likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operations of the wing members are not stable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine g1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the slide member is the sliding displacement, and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding portion, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding portion during rotation unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set equal to the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, so that the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. .
As a result, rattling of the wing members can be suppressed, and opening and closing operations of the wing members can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a recessed groove (dent) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove should be formed such that the protruding portion inserted therein can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (the direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the game machine g1, the game machine g2 is characterized in that the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation shafts of the pair of feather members.

According to the gaming machine g2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g1, since the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotational axis of the pair of blade members, the slide member is positioned substantially with respect to the blade members. They can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the blade member and the slide member can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine g1 or g2, the protruding portion protrudes from the feather member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and extends linearly along a direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement of the slide member. A game machine g3 characterized by being extended in a shape.

According to the gaming machine g3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g1 or g2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extended linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operation of the blade member. Therefore, rattling of the wing members can be suppressed, and opening and closing operations of the wing members can be stabilized. again,
Since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of extension of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of hollowing that accompanies the recessing of the slide groove, and to improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any one of the game machines g1 to g3, the projecting portion is projected from the feather member, the slide groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slidably displaced upward in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine g4 characterized in that the position of the protruding portion when starting is set below the rotating shaft of the feather member along the direction of gravity.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotary member is directly connected to the blade member, in the present invention, since the slide member is interposed between the blade member and the rotary member, the slide member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of movement, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade members in the stopped state to open or close them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine g4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines g1 to g3, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protruding portion when the member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the blade member, the protruding portion is pushed up by the inner wall of the slide groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and decrease (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing members in the stopped state to open or close them.

In the game machine g4, the game machine g5 is characterized in that when the slide member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction to be opened.

According to the game machine g5, in addition to the effects of the game machine g4, when the slide member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member can be moved by its weight. It can be rotated by (self weight). Therefore, even in the present invention, in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation for starting the drive of the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

In the game machine g4 or g5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the protruding portion abuts when the sliding member starts to slide upward in the gravity direction includes the rotating shaft of the feather member and the gravity force. A gaming machine g6 characterized by forming an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to a direction.

According to the gaming machine g6, in either the gaming machine g4 or g5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity is provided with a feather member. Since an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane that includes the rotation axis and is perpendicular to the direction of gravity,
Even if the position of the projection is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the wing member, the projecting portion is guided along the direction of inclination of the inclined surface so as to move upward in the direction of gravity of the slide member. It is possible to smoothly start the sliding displacement toward.

In addition, by forming the inclined surface on the inner wall of the slide groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion be reduced accordingly, but also the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface can In addition to displacement of the installation portion in the direction of gravity, displacement in the horizontal direction can also be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the blade member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibration accompanying the falling game ball, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open or closed posture.

In any one of the gaming machines g1 to g6, the inner wall of the sliding groove is provided with a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid to a position for closing the wing member, The gaming machine g7 is characterized in that rotation of the feather member is restricted in a state in which the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to the game machine g7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines g1 to g6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives the protruding portion when the slide member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state in which the receiving portion is recessed and the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

The gaming machine g8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine g7, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine g8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g7, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. ) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

In any one of the game machines g1 to g8, the rotary member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side; a second abutted portion that is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member; is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member so that at least the other-side contact portion is engaged with the The gaming machine g9 is characterized in that, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutment portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine g9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines g1 to g8, the rotating member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the blade member, and a direction of sliding displacement with the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to and is abutted against the other side of the abutting portion when the rotary member is rotated toward the other side to open the feather member, When the rotary member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing members are released.

In this case, when the blade member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the abutted portion on one side and the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. The sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contacting portion contacts the other side contacted portion, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released. By rotating the member further to the other side, the sliding member can be slidably displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In game machines g1 to g8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates,
A protruding portion protrudes from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is formed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The rotary member, which is recessed, includes a contact portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion,
The slide member includes a one-side abutment portion with which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the feather member, and a one-side abutment portion of the abutment portion. When the rotary member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the blade member, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact. and a contact portion on the other side,
When the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, and from the state where the wing member is closed, the one-side abutting portion is brought into contact with one side of the abutting portion. A gaming machine g10 characterized in that when said slide member is slid to a position where said portion abuts, said projecting portion is engaged with said slide member.

According to the game machine g10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines g1 to g8, the rotating member has a contact portion and a protruding portion that protrudes from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the blade member, and a direction of sliding displacement with the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to and is abutted against the other side of the abutting portion when the rotary member is rotated toward the other side to open the feather member, When the rotating member is rotated to one side, along with the rotation,
When the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion and the slide member is slidably displaced toward one side, the blade member is closed while the rotating member is rotated to the other side. Along with the rotation, the other abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward the other side, thereby releasing the feather member.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts against one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the blade member is closed, the projecting portion is disengaged from the slide member.
A wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang and the one-side abutting portion can allow the rotating member to rotate to the other side. It is necessary to form it into an appropriate shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a possibility that not only the strength will be lowered, but also the engagement will be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the blade member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. The member need not be shaped to allow rotation to the other side.
Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that facilitates holding the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

In any one of the gaming machines g1 to g10, in a state in which a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the above-described A game machine g11, wherein a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine g11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines g1 to g10, it is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the projecting portion is not in contact with the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. The sliding member can regulate the falling game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the slide member slides from a position to open the feather member to a position to close it. A gaming machine g12, characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against an edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine g12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines g1 to g11, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the position to open the wing member to the position to close it, the passage of the passage member is crossed and the passage member Since the slide member has a friction contact portion that rubs against the edge of the
An illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance can be cut.

For example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) to reciprocate the game ball. According to the present invention, against such a fraudulent act, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members opened, the slide member is slidably displaced from the position where the wing members are opened to the position where the wing members are closed, When the frictional contact portion traverses the passage of the passage member, the midway portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the frictional contact portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the frictional contact portion crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact portion of the slide member from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion (rubbing contact portion) of the slide member may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the passage member (the portion where the friction contact portion is in friction contact) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the friction contact portion and the portion (the edge portion of the passage member) with which the friction contact portion is in friction contact are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In any one of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position in which the feather member is opened to a position in which it is closed. A gaming machine g13 characterized by comprising a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when cutting.

According to the game machine g13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines g1 to g11, when the feather member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of each other. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage through the ball entrance.

For example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) to reciprocate the game ball. According to the present invention, against such fraud, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members open, the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the string crosses the passage of the passage member, the midway portion of the string, the tip of which is adhered to the game ball, can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that are in frictional contact with each other) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine g12 or g13, the driving means displaces the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and displaces the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator operated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the blade member from the open position to the closed position causes the drive shaft of the drive means to move to the first position.
A game machine g14 characterized in that it is performed by displacing in a direction.

According to the game machine g14, in addition to the effects of the game machine g12 or g13, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut off an illegal object (for example, a string) between the friction contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any one of the game machines g1 to g14, the rotating member has an abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to engage the abutment when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side contacted portion with which one side of the contact portion abuts; A game characterized in that the other side of the contact portion is contacted by the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. Machine g15.

According to the game machine g15, in addition to the effects of the game machines g1 to g14, the rotating member has an abutting portion, and the slide member is provided to close the wing member when the rotating member is rotated toward one side. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the one side contacted part and the one side contacted part that is opposed to the one side contacted part and to open the feather member The other side of the abutting portion is provided with the other side abutted portion, and the one side abutted portion and the other side abutted portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between itself and the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid along with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of feather members during the operation of opening or closing the pair of feather members by slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member, When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of blade members at two points and is also connected to the rotation member at two points, the pair of blade members and the rotation member rotate. It is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidably displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the slide member is connected to the pair of blade members at two points and is connected to the rotating member at one point. Even if the load from the game ball is applied only to one side, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotary member.

The approximate center in the width direction where the one-side contacted portion and the other-side contacted portion are formed passes through the approximate center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of feather members are opened or closed. , and a position on an imaginary line along the direction of slide displacement.

In the game machine g15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less than the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine g16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g15, the width dimension of the one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less than the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion. It is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between the blade member and the rotating member. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be twice or less the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion. This is because it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described tolerance of posture change.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning port unit 930 as an example>
A first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and the second ball entrance The second to open or close the mouth
In a game machine comprising an opening/closing member and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged behind the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine h1 characterized by:

Here, the first ball entrance, the first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, the first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, the second ball entrance, the first A gaming machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes two ball entrances and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged behind the first opening and closing member and the second opening and closing member, respectively. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine h1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, Space can be formed. That is, by concentrating the installation space for the first driving means and the second driving means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is provided by the first opening/closing member (first opening/closing member).
It can be secured on the back of the entrance), and the space can be used effectively.

In the game machine h1, the game machine h2 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine h3, wherein in the gaming machine h1 or h2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.
.

According to the game machine h2 or h3, in addition to the effects of the game machine h1 or h2, the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member, or the first drive means and the second driving means.
The dead space behind the opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine h3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second ball entrance to the second opening/closing member.
A gaming machine h4 characterized by being arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing member.

According to the game machine h4, in addition to the effects of the game machine h3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are the second ball-entering means. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the opening, the dead space on the back side of the second entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any one of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first driving means and the second driving means comprise a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and driving the drive shaft and driving the main body. and a wiring that supplies power to the driving portion and is pulled out from the other side of the main body portion, wherein the first driving means and the second driving means connect the driving shaft to the second driving means. A gaming machine h5 characterized in that it is disposed in a posture facing the opening/closing member.

According to the gaming machine h5, in any one of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first driving means and the second driving means comprise a main body, a drive shaft provided on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft of the main body. and a wiring that supplies electric power to the driving unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit. Since it is arranged in a posture directed toward the opening and closing member 2, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the gaming machine h5, the body portion of the first drive means and the body portion of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and the wiring of the outer surface of the body portion are arranged. A game machine h6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where one outer surface is substantially flush with the other.

According to the gaming machine h6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the outer surface of the main body has a driving force. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces except for the outer surfaces on which the shaft and wiring are disposed are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means have different outputs and the main body portions of the two have different sizes, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other areas can be simplified.

That is, when the body portion of the first drive means and the body portion of the second drive means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one body portion and the other body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending along the step, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first outer surface of the main body is located at a position where the outer surfaces are substantially flush with each other.
Since the drive means and the second drive means are arranged and the outer surfaces do not form a step, the shield plate can be made flat. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and divides the two areas. is a conductive barrier for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any one of the gaming machines h1 to h6, a first passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the first ball entrance and a passage for a game ball entered into the second entrance and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, wherein the first opening/closing member rotates to a position sandwiching the ball inlet. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. A gaming machine h7 comprising a rotating member disposed between members, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine h7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines h1 to h6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is rotated between the first passage member and the second passage member. and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of blade members. As a result, spaces can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entrance. In addition, unlike the conventional product, the first passage member is replaced with the second passage member to avoid interference with the rotating member.
Since it is not necessary to bend toward the passage side, the first ball entrance can be brought closer to the second ball entrance.

In the gaming machine h7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A game machine h8, wherein the first portion is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine h8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h7, the rotating member includes the first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and the first driving portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member. and the second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The distance to the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed linearly, and the length dimension of the first portion (the distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is the distance from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. If the distance is set to be the same as the straight line distance to the part where the slide member slides, the slide amount of the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the entire size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length dimension of the first portion is set shorter than the linear distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first Although the distance between the driving means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, the sliding amount of the slide member is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The distance between members can be suppressed.

In the game machine h8, the game machine h9 is characterized in that the second part of the rotary member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine h9, in addition to the effects of the game machine h8, the second part of the rotary member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. The resulting space can be effectively used to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the size of the entire device can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor is provided for detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first driving means. A gaming machine h10 characterized by being arranged between.

According to the game machine h10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines h1 to h9, it is equipped with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is the second opening/closing mechanism. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, the second opening/closing member is opened to open the second opening/closing member.
When the first driving means is tampered with through the ball entrance, the first driving means can be hidden by part of the detection sensor, making it difficult to commit such tampering.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of such a detection sensor, fraud can be detected. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the second
Even if the opening/closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with through the second ball entrance, by closing the second opening/closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening/closing member and the tampering is prevented. Since the added portion becomes invisible, it is particularly effective to be able to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above.

The game machine h10 includes a case member that houses the detection sensor, and a screw member that is fastened to the case member. is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is positioned between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.
11.

According to the game machine h11, in addition to the effects of the game machine h10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is positioned between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with through the second ball entrance, the first driving means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such fraudulent acts more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors. is the tightening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be compensated for by the screw member, making fraud more difficult.

The screw member may be used to fasten and fix the two members of the case member, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A gaming machine h12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine h11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is positioned between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine h12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h11, since the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is positioned between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, for example, the second opening and closing member can be opened and the second input When the first driving means is tampered with through the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to drill a hole, the wiring may be damaged due to the fraudulent act. (Disconnection) can be made easier. or
It is possible to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent activity.

In the game machine h12, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine h13, in addition to the effects of the game machine h12, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wires of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the wiring. So for example
When the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first driving means through the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In the game machine h12 or h13, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the seat portion is separated from the second opening/closing member. Gaming machine h14.

According to the game machine h14, in addition to the effects of the game machine h12 or h13, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape that expands in diameter as it separates from the second opening and closing member. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball inlet to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, etc., the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. The wiring can be easily damaged (disconnected) by lateral displacement (slide) on the outer peripheral surface of the .

A game machine h15 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines h12 to h14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine h15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines h12 to h14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the
That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first driving means through the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member, and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board, wherein the first member engages with the first member.
A gaming machine i1 comprising a third member having an engaging portion and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member.

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 20
12-5783). After flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member, the game ball flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and on the back side of the game board,
Pass through the second passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be entertained.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth downflow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. are requested to do so. However, the game machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the second member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, the game board is turned over A separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not realistic.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine i1, since it comprises the third member having the first engaging portion that engages with the first member and the second engaging portion that engages with the second member, the third member can be used to position the second member relative to the first member.

In the gaming machine i1, the game board is provided with an opening in which a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space, and the opening A game machine i2 characterized in that the third member is arranged in an internal space of a part.

According to the gaming machine i2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i1, the game board is formed with an opening and the first
The connecting portion between the first passage of the member and the second passage of the second member has an opening disposed in the interior space, and the third member is disposed in the interior space of the opening. There is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as a space for arranging the third member, the number of processing steps is reduced accordingly, and the product cost is reduced. can be planned.

In the gaming machine i1 or i2, the third member has the first engaging portion that is the first member of the first member.
A gaming machine i3 characterized in that the second engaging portions are engaged with the second passages of the second member, respectively.

According to the gaming machine i3, in the gaming machine i1 or i2, the third member has the first engaging portion in the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion in the second passage of the second member. The engagement allows effective positioning of the second member with respect to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress the occurrence of positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage. Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other portions are positioned by the third portion. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the gaming machine i3, a gaming machine i4 is characterized in that part of an inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed of the third member.

According to the game machine i4, in addition to the effects of the game machine i3, since a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine i5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines i1 to i4, the first member is formed so as to be capable of holding the third member.

According to the game machine i5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines i1 to i4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member. When attaching each member, it is not necessary to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i5, a gaming machine i6 characterized in that a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member in a state where the third member is held by the first member. .

According to the gaming machine i6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. There is no need to separately engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member after the first member and the third member are attached to the game board. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine i7, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine i7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board after attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time, simultaneously with the attachment operation, the third member can be engaged with the third member. 2 engagement part to the second
It can be engaged with a member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any one of gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the fixing member is provided with the third
A gaming machine i8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine i8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. prepared,
Since the third member is fixed to or formed integrally with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) on the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any one of the game machines i1 to i8, the first member rotates to a position sandwiching a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can enter and communicated with the first passage, and the ball entrance. A pair of blade members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of blade members, and a driving force of the driving means for applying the driving force to the pair of blades. a transmission mechanism for transmitting power to a member, the transmission mechanism comprising: a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means; and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of blade members. and wherein the sliding displacement of the sliding member can be guided by the third member.

According to the game machine i9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines i1 to i8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pair of rotating members slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is provided with a slide member for opening and closing the blade members, compared to the conventional product in which the opening and closing of the pair of blade members is performed only by a rotating member, the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage
space can be reserved for In this case, since the third member can guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine i9, the pair of feather members has a protruding portion projecting toward the slide member, and the slide member has a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted,
A gaming machine i10, wherein the third member comprises a covering surface portion facing an opening of the sliding groove of the slide member on the side opposite to the feather member.

According to the game machine i10, in addition to the effects of the game machine i9, the pair of feather members are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portions are slidably inserted through the slides. Since the sliding member has the moving groove and the third member has the covering surface portion facing the opening of the sliding groove on the side opposite to the blade member, the sliding member can be slid by the covering surface portion of the third member. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably open or close the pair of blade members by suppressing the hindrance of the sliding of the projecting portion due to dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the specific winning port unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered into the ball entrance rolls, and its rolling. A gaming machine j1 comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening and closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance,
A game machine is known that has a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into a ball entrance (
For example, JP-A-2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered into the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time is flowed into. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member is correspondingly increased. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, which tends to cause over-winning. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine j1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even if the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member is reduced. length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened accordingly, and the liquid can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The gaming machine j1 is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine j2.

According to the game machine j2, in addition to the effects of the game machine j1, it is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress entry of another game ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entry port, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The game machine j1 or j2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface inclined from the ball entrance to the passage member and formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide means is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance. and the passage member.

According to the game machine j3, in addition to the effects of the game machine j1 or j2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the entrance. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is pushed by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. Guided to the passage member, it is possible to make it difficult to stay on the longitudinal end of the rolling surface.
Therefore, the game ball entering from the ball entrance can be quickly made to flow into the passage member, and as a result,
Over winning can be suppressed by suppressing entry of another game ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance.

A gaming machine j4 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines j1 to j3, the gaming machine j4 is characterized by comprising a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. .

According to the game machine j4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines j1 to j3, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive the game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the ball entrance can be quickly made to flow into the passage member, and as a result, entry of another game ball is suppressed until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. By doing so, over-winning can be suppressed.

A game machine j5 in the game machine j4, wherein the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine j5, in addition to the effects of the game machine j4, since the guide grooves are linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, A game ball rolling in a direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be rapidly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine j5, wherein the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball in the game machine j4 or j5.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j4 or j5, the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly made to flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any one of the game machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guide means is disposed, across the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. A gaming machine j7 characterized in that the second area is formed so as to slope downward toward the first area.

According to the gaming machine j7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is
The second region, which is opposite to the first region in which the first guide means is disposed, across the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region. A game ball that has entered the second area or a game ball that has rolled from the first area to the second area can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second area. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine j8 characterized in that the gaming machine j7 is provided with second guide means projecting from the second area of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine j8, in addition to the effects of the game machine j7, since the second guide means protruded from the second area of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area. A game ball can be decelerated in front of a passage member. That is, while increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member, it is decelerated before (just before) the passage member, and the game ball passes through the passage member from the second area to the first ball.
It is possible to suppress rolling to the area. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine j7 or j8, a game provided in the second region of the rolling surface and rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member on the second region of the rolling surface A gaming machine j9 characterized by comprising a second guide means capable of guiding a ball to the ball entrance side.

According to the gaming machine j9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j7 or j8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and extends the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball rolling along the passage toward the ball entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area can be placed in front of the passage member. can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region through the passage member by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (immediately) the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine j9, the game machine j10 is characterized in that the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine j10, in addition to the effects of the game machine j9, the opening/closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can contact when the ball entrance is open. The game ball guided to the ball entrance side by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced back toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entrance as the side edge opposite to the first guide means is spaced away from the first guide means, A gaming machine j11 characterized in that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side portion opposite to the first guide means.

According to the gaming machine j11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guiding means
The side edge on the side opposite to the first guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entrance as it separates from the first guide means, and the upper surface of the side edge is inclined toward the side edge on the side opposite to the first guide means. Since it is inclined downward, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out of the ball entrance.

That is, among the game balls rolling along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, the game balls with a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are fed from the ball entrance. Since there is little risk of it jumping out to the outside, it can be prevented from rolling from the second area to the first area through the passage member by contacting the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the entrance side. By suppressing the flow, the flow into the passage member can be accelerated accordingly. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first region (first guide means) by passing over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by the overriding of the second guide means and the collision with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the liquid into the passage member while suppressing the liquid from jumping out of the entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine j11, the side edge portion of the second guide means on the side facing the first guide means extends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. game machine j1
2.

According to the gaming machine j12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is Since the dimension of the side edge part of the second guide means is made larger than the size of the side edge part, the game ball which has climbed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be surely decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In gaming machine j11 or j12, gaming machine j13 characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine j13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j11 or j12, since the side edge portion of the second guide means includes the position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has crossed over is brought into contact with (collides with) the side edge of the first guide means, and can be reliably decelerated and easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

A gaming machine j14 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the second guiding means is positioned on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the direction of inclination.

According to the gaming machine j14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the second guiding means is positioned on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the direction of inclination, so the first guiding means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact with (collides with) the second guide means. , can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In the gaming machine j14, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member, and the second guide means is guided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine j1 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the game ball.
5.

According to the game machine j15, in addition to the effects of the game machine j14, the guide groove is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove to the top of the second guide means is larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is When relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily abut (collide) with the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member,
It can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In any one of the game machines j1 to j15, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove is A gaming machine j16 characterized in that the size of the game machine j16 is reduced toward the passage member.

According to the game machine j16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines j1 to j15, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove. To easily change the rolling direction of a game ball to the direction toward a passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening formed so that a game ball can be entered and a passage connected to the ball entry opening, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, An opening is formed in the game board in the board thickness direction, and the ball-entering unit has the ball-entering hole and a first passage connected to the ball-entering hole, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage. A game machine K characterized by
1.

Here, a game comprising a ball-entering unit provided with a ball-entering opening formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and a game board on which the ball-entering unit is arranged machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball-entering unit with another ball-entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the game board. can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the ball-entering unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance in front of the game board. Therefore, when using a ball-entering unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine k1, the ball-entering unit has a ball-entering opening and a first passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. 1 unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and disposed through the opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be diverted (commonly used), and when the specifications of the game board are changed, the game board can be changed. The space in front of the can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine k1, at least part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and is similar to the first unit when viewed from the front. A gaming machine k2 characterized in that it is arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine k2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k1, the first unit is made of a light-transmissive material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and is larger than the first unit when viewed from the front. Since the second unit is arranged at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Also, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light transmissive material. wear,
Alternatively, since the game board can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine k2, the game machine k3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is made of a light transmissive material.

According to the gaming machine k3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k2, at least the second unit of the second unit
Since the front side of the passage is made of a light-transmitting material, the game ball flowing down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit can be visually recognized by the player, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Note that the first unit may be entirely made of a light transmissive material. Moreover, when only a part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit overlapping the second passage in a front view is made of a light-transmitting material. This is because it is possible to visually recognize the flow of the game ball, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k3, the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmissive material, and the second unit
A gaming machine k4 characterized in that the units are formed from a colored light-transmissive material.

According to the gaming machine k4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k3, since the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is made of a colored light-transmitting material, When the player visually recognizes the second unit, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction between the first unit and the second unit. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down while changing its position in the front-rear direction, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine k4, the gaming machine k5 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed in front of the second path of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine k5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k4, information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed in front of the second path of the second unit, so that the second unit can be visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) by using the display as a mark (reference position). In addition, examples of display mode include printing with ink, attaching a seal, two-color molding, and the like.

In any one of the game machines k1 to k5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage. and a plurality of second connection passages respectively connected to the plurality of second branch passages, wherein the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A game machine k6 characterized in that a detection sensor for detecting passage of a game ball is arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k6, in any one of the gaming machines k1 to k5, the second unit is the first
A second upstream unit disposed on the back side of the unit and formed with a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages, and a plurality of second connecting passages disposed in the second upstream unit is formed, and detection sensors for detecting the passage of game balls are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages. When manufacturing a game machine with different specifications by changing to a smaller number of units, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection sensors to be arranged.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passages, the number of detecting sensors corresponding to the number of the second connecting passages can be arranged. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor, but only the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, with a structure in which detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine k6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a third passage through which a game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes, the first unit;
A detection sensor for detecting a game ball is provided in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit and formed over the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit respectively. A gaming machine k7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine k7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k6, the first unit has a second ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a ball is entered into the second ball entrance. The third through which the game ball passes
A passage is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit, and a detection sensor for detecting a game ball is arranged in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Therefore, the detection sensors provided in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine k7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit is directly or indirectly engaged with each other. A game machine k8 characterized in that the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is performed by matching the second unit.

According to the gaming machine k8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k7, the direct or indirect engagement of the second passage with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging the second unit, it is possible to position the second unit even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passage is connected is the same. or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages. , the target portion (the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned. step) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any one of the game machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruded A gaming machine k9, wherein a receiving portion for receiving part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine k9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. In addition, since a receiving portion for receiving a part of the projecting detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, the engagement between the detection sensor and the receiving portion positions the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit. while suppressing part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside,
It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole.

In the gaming machines k1 to k6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a third path through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed at least between the second branch passages in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine k10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines k1 to k9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. , the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines k1 to k10, the second path is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion at the bent portion. A game machine k11 characterized in that a standing portion is erected from the bottom, and the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine k11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines k1 to k10, the second path is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit,
The standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the bent portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the curved part of the second passage. That is, the erected portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend of the bent portion, thereby increasing the rigidity of the passage and improving the durability, and at the same time, along the erected tip of the erected portion, the game ball can be moved. While it is possible to guide and smoothly flow down the bent portion, since the erected portion is positioned in front of the game ball in a front view, the game ball is hidden in the erected portion and visibility of the game ball is improved. decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring the rigidity and guiding the game ball, while maintaining the standing position. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member having an upstream end connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowing down from the first passage member pass. ,
A gaming machine l1 characterized in that at least a bottom surface upstream end and a side surface upstream end of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passage direction of a game ball.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2012-5783). However, in this way, the first
In a structure that connects the passage member and the second passage member, since positional deviation between the two cannot be avoided, a step is formed at the connecting portion between the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member. , there is a problem that the smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine l1, of the upstream ends of at least the second passage member, the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ,
The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface side (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

In the gaming machine l1, the gaming machine l2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart from the upstream end of the bottom face by a radius of a game ball is included in the upstream end of the side face.

According to the game machine 12, in addition to the effects of the game machine 11, since the upstream end of the side face includes a position separated from the upstream end of the bottom surface by the radius of the game ball, the game ball can pass from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the side surface upstream end. That is, the position of the step on the bottom side and the position of the step on the side where the game ball is affected can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influences.
Accordingly, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

In the gaming machine l1 or l2, of the downstream ends of the first passage member, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, The passage member has a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and has a protruding tip that serves as the side downstream end, and the second passage member has an upstream end thereof. A game machine l3, characterized in that it comprises a recessed portion which is recessed in and receives the projecting piece and a portion facing the projecting tip of the projecting piece serves as the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the game machine l3, in addition to the effects of the game machine l1 or l2, the first passage member protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip thereof is the side downstream end. In addition, the second passage member has a recess provided in its upstream end to receive the projecting piece and a portion facing the projecting tip of the projecting piece as the side wall upstream end.
The lateral downstream end and the bottom downstream end of the passageway member can be adjacent to the lateral upstream end and the lateral downstream end of the second passageway member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed in a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the projecting piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the projecting piece has relatively low rigidity and may be broken. Even if the protruding piece is broken, the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being simultaneously affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side surface, and the influences are dispersed, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes) accordingly.
can be made

Further, according to the game machine l3, the game machine protruding piece is the first passage member, the concave portion is the second passage member,
Since they are formed respectively, the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be restricted by abutting the side surface of the recess on the protruding piece. That is, at the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it, so the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member Also, compared to the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position), it is easy to hinder the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, as in the gaming machine l3, the upward positional deviation of the second path member with respect to the first path member can be restricted, which means that the upstream end of the second path member is positioned higher than the downstream end of the first path member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

A game machine 14 characterized in that, in the game machine 13, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 13, the side upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side upstream end of the second passage member Compared to the case of forming perpendicularly to the passage direction of the game machine, the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

A gaming machine 15, wherein at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball in the gaming machine 11 or 12.

According to the game machine l5, in addition to the effects of the game machine l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second path member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second path member The side upstream end of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore,
Compared to the case where the side upstream end of the second path member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the side upper end surface of the second path member can be slid along the slope. , can be difficult to bounce off. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

In this case, according to the gaming machine 15, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined. , the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity of the injection molding die can be moderated, so air bubble accumulation (air entrapment) and insufficient filling can be suppressed. It is possible to improve the quality.

A game machine 16 characterized in that in the game machine 14 or 15, the side upstream end of the second passage member is inclined downward along the passing direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine l6, in addition to the effects of the game machine l4 or l5, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member A game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed to the bottom side. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the specific winning port unit 550 as an example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance to open or close the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members moves from the outside in the opening direction A gaming machine m1 characterized in that the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction when they are displaced.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of feather members to open or close. a drive means for causing
When the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged at the allowable position for allowing the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. and a regulation means arranged at a regulation position for regulating entry of a game ball into a ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are released by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of feather members is inserted into the entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is placed at the restricting position, so that when the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate what is entered.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted,
For example, after forcibly releasing the pair of feather members from the outside, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the permissible position. There was a problem that it was inadequate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine m1, when the pair of wing members are displaced in the opening direction from the outside, the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member. Therefore, illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance can be easily regulated.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members. The inner wall of the is recessed with a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slid to a position where the blade member is closed, and when the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion , a game machine m2 characterized in that the rotation of the feather member is restricted.

According to the gaming machine m2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine m1, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid to the position where the blade member is closed. In a state in which the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

A gaming machine m3, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of said sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation shafts of said pair of feather members in said gaming machine m2.

According to the game machine m3, in addition to the effects of the game machine m2, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of blade members, so that the blade members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even if the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, the slide displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member.

Also, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the blade member. As a result, the space required for arranging the blade member and the slide member can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine m4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine m2 or m3, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine m4, in addition to the effects of the game machine m2 or m3, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. (Self-weight) can be used to facilitate maintenance of the state in which the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members, and the rotary member is , an abutment portion, and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to rotate when the rotary member is rotated toward one side in order to close the blade member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion and the one-side abutted portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the feather member. a second side abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the feather member is closed, the one side abutted portion , one side of the abutting portion is abutted, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts on the other abutted portion. The game machine m5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine m5, in addition to the effects of the game machine m1, the rotary member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotary member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined gap in the sliding displacement direction from the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the blade member. When it is rotated to , the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, whereby the blade member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side, the other side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing members are released.

In this case, when the blade member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the abutted portion on one side and the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. The sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contacting portion contacts the other side contacted portion, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released. By rotating the member further to the other side, the sliding member can be slidably displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members, and the rotary member is , an abutment portion, and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to rotate when the rotary member is rotated toward one side in order to close the blade member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion and the one-side abutted portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the feather member. a second-side abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the member is rotated toward the other side; When the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the member is disengaged and the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion is in contact with one side of the contact portion. , the game machine m6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine m6, in addition to the effects of the game machine m1, the rotary member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotary member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined gap in the sliding displacement direction from the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the blade member. When it is rotated to , the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, whereby the blade member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side, the other side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing members are released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts against one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the blade member is closed, the projecting portion is disengaged from the slide member.
A wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang and the one-side abutting portion can allow the rotating member to rotate to the other side. It is necessary to form it into an appropriate shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a possibility that not only the strength will be lowered, but also the engagement will be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the blade member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. The member need not be shaped to allow rotation to the other side.
Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that facilitates holding the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

In any one of the gaming machines m2 to m6, in a state in which a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the above-mentioned A game machine m7 characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine m7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines m2 to m6, it is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the projecting portion is not in contact with the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. The sliding member can regulate the falling game ball.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning port unit 930 as an example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance to open or close the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of feather members, wherein a game ball entered into the ball entrance and a part of the transmission mechanism traverses the passage of the passage member when the feather member is displaced from the open position to the closed position.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A-2010- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the blade member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) the other end of the game ball to make the game ball reciprocate. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress cheating by adhering the tip of the string to the game ball and causing the detection sensor to detect the same multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine n1, when the feather member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is in the middle. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the part. As a result, by making the game ball reciprocate, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of causing the detection sensor to detect the game ball multiple times.

In the game machine n1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to traverse the passage of the passage member and the slide member to rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the blade member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine n2 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion.

According to the gaming machine n2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to traverse the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, and moves the slide member to the passage member. Since the edge portion is provided with the friction contact portion, it is possible to cut off an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage through the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member opened, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the rubbing contact portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member,
A middle portion of the string whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact portion of the slide member from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion (rubbing contact portion) of the slide member may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the passage member (the portion where the friction contact portion is in friction contact) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the friction contact portion and the portion (the edge portion of the passage member) with which the friction contact portion is in friction contact are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine n1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub their edges together when the feather members are displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine n3 characterized by:

According to the game machine n3, in addition to the effects of the game machine n1, when the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub the edges of each other. Since the cutting member is provided in the transmission mechanism, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage through the entrance.

That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members opened, when the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, A midway portion of the thread, the tip of which is adhered to the game ball, can be cut by being sandwiched between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that are in frictional contact with each other) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine n2 or n3, the driving means displaces the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and displaces the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The blade member is formed as a solenoid actuator operated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the blade member from the open position to the closed position is carried out by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine n4 characterized by.

According to the game machine n4, in addition to the effects of the game machine n2 or n3, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut off an illegal object (for example, a string) between the friction contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Characteristic group A> (The point where the player's pushing direction is the direction from the back to the front)
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

In addition, considering the game posture of the player, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the force applied to the operation means by the player should be naturally weakened. can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is canceled, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be capable of canceling the maintaining state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light-emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operating means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Characteristic group B> (Points that make it possible to respond to repeated hits while reducing the repulsive force under normal conditions)
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to an end position, a first state and a second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the end position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operation means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction from the end of the push to return to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Characteristic group C> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration production device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the drive force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized by driving the voice coil motor in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Characteristic group D> (Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch)
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player while driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. They can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is driven "as an effect",
It goes through one phase of the button action. In addition, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The player's feeling of "starting to move because the load on the player is relieved" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Characteristic group E> (Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam)
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection. , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases, etc.
exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load given from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is arranged operably with respect to the transmitting means, and is characterized in that whether or not the releasing load means and the transmitting means are synchronously operated is switched by the operation of the load releasing means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. ,
You can expand your production range. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Characteristic group F> (Vibration device supported by a soft case)
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means disposed so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is disposed at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed,
The intensity of transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is made lower than that.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<Feature G group> (One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the attachment part.)
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role of a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, a role of a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Prepare. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting in parallel with the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the projecting portion and an extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member arranged at a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristic group H> (Structure to prevent balls with threads)
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, JP 2015-02
4179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means which does not apply a load to the game balls flowing down, but applies a load to the objects flowing backward, on the inner corner side of the bending.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul balls reach first on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Characteristic group I> (Structure of board holding down)
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change its state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means contacts the game board and adds a pushing force,
The effect is that the game board can be pushed to the position of the use state.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used to
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutment means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided blocking means for blocking the opening on the one side of the receiving means, the blocking means being unusable by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<Feature J group> (Inverted cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck)
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP-A-2016-
26573). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the arrangement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control portion with high heat occurs, changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (disconnection due to heat, etc.) are detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means arranges the members entered from the outside,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising elimination means for guiding to an elimination area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the members entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Characteristics K group> (Structure of decorative plate with 5-piece structure, including fraud prevention)
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done.
This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Characteristic group L> (Point L to utilize curved light guide means. Not achieved as a point)
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion Department and
It is possible to change the emission intensity of the projection target means.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Characteristic group M> (arrangement structure of bass reflex speaker)
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a portion of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are performed by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1
6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right central position of the gaming machine and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left-right width of the game machine, where the effect of making the bass sound is likely to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means are connected in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding portion in the gaming machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means for performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Feature N group> (Movable unit, reverse-rotating flowers, petals that stop in the middle)
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacing state switchable between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means
and a displacement means, wherein at least when the second displacement means is in the following state, the third displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means follow and change. can be done.

<Characteristics Group O> (Utilization of shell buttons and punched holes. Not achieved as a point)
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
The solid object can be easily removed through the second opening because the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Characteristic P group> (G2 advance notice control)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player in the case where the Determining means for determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the effect executing means for the dynamic display of the continuous identification information, and the determining means determines that the specific effect is to be executed. and interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition, when the game machine P1 is in the state of the game machine P1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, by executing a special effect for a plurality of continuous variable effects, a series of effects using a plurality of variable effects are provided to the player to enhance the interest of the game. A game machine capable of improving the is proposed (Patent document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if a notification effect, etc. that should be executed in the meantime occurs irregularly, etc., the execution is delayed, etc., causing the player to lose interest in the game. There is a risk that the content will be difficult to understand. This technical idea was made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily understand the content of the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, even when the determination means determines that a specific effect is to be executed for each of the plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information, the specific effect is executed based on the establishment of the specific condition. is interrupted until the return condition is met. Therefore, even if the execution of a specific effect is determined, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control, etc. can be performed. Easy game can be provided. Further, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific performance is resumed, so that the player can be notified that the specific performance is not finished in the middle, thereby providing the player with a performance that is easy for the player to understand. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine P1, there are operating means that can be operated by the player, switching means that can switch and set settings when the operating means is operated, and based on the settings that are set by the switching means. a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the game machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by a player's operation, to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. There is

In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is established by switching the setting by the switching means when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means. Game machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same way, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that it is difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, and its acquiring means. and storage means for storing the information acquired by the game machine, wherein the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the game ball whose information is acquired by entering the game ball into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

In the gaming machine P4, the ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the obtaining means is the first ball-entering means. When a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the first information can be acquired, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second information can be acquired, and the dynamic display The means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result when the determination means determines the first information, and when the determination means determines the second information. dynamically displays the second identification information for indicating the determination result, and the determining means preferentially performs the determination on the second information rather than the first information stored in the storage means. is executed, and the specific condition is a state in which execution of the specific effect is determined for dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, and the second A gaming machine P6 characterized by being established when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, the second ball entry is performed. Even if a ball is entered into the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is given priority. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

In the gaming machine P7, the first ball entering means is configured to allow the game ball to enter more easily than the second ball entering means when in the first gaming state, and the second ball entering means , a gaming machine P8 characterized in that the game machine P8 is constructed such that, in a second game state different from the first game state, the ball is easier to enter than the first ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7, when in the first gaming state, game balls easily enter the first ball entering means, so the first identification information is continuously moved. There is an effect that the target display is facilitated, the specific performance can be easily executed many times, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (G production)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means. a special game executing means for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, in which a special effect is executed for a plurality of continuous dynamic displays of the identification information. A game machine Q1 characterized by having a performance executing means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed which does not result in a specific determination result, it is possible to show the identification information for a plurality of times as one dynamic display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect execution means is executing the specific effect, an interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition; A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is suspended until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player can know that the specific condition is established. There is an effect that it can be shown easily. In addition, when the return condition is met, the execution of the specific performance is resumed, so that the specific performance is terminated in the middle, and the content of the performance is halfway, which confuses the player. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a switching means that can switch and set settings when the operating means is operated, and the settings that are set by the switching means dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the above.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. The dynamic display mode can be changed by the player's operation, the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed can be increased, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. has the effect of

A game machine Q4 characterized in that, in the game machine Q3, the specific condition is established by switching the setting by the switching means when the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same way, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that it is difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and its acquiring means. and storage means for storing the information acquired by the gaming machine Q5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the game ball whose information is acquired by entering the game ball into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

A gaming machine Q6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q5, the game machine Q6 is characterized by comprising preliminary determination means for executing determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, since the preliminary determination is executed by the preliminary determination means, the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the obtaining means comprises the first ball-entering means. When a game ball enters the ball means, the first information can be acquired, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second information can be acquired, and The target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result when the first information is determined by the determination means, and the second information is determined by the determination means. the second identification information is dynamically displayed to indicate the determination result, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is displayed dynamically after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that it is established when a mark is displayed.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, the second Even if a ball is entered into the ball entering means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is given priority. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine Q7, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball by varying the shooting force based on the player's operation, and a game ball shot with a first shooting force by the shooting means are configured to flow down. and a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a game ball that has been fired with a second firing force different from the first firing force can flow down. and a second flow path, wherein the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entering means is the A game machine Q8 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally easily establish the specific condition by adjusting the shooting force of the game ball.

<Feature R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of time saving, it will not shift to charge effect until 5 fluctuation)
A first ball-entering means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entering means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. an acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entering means; , storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means, and identification information for indicating the specific result of determination on the display means is stopped and displayed. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, wherein the second ball-entering means is changed from the second state to the first state. Determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; Effect means for executing an effect for indicating the result of determination by the determining means; effect determination means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be executed by; prohibition means for prohibiting execution of the specific effect by the effect determination means when a prohibition condition is satisfied; A gaming machine R1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set in which it is easier to enter the ball into the starting hole than usual, an effect is executed to inform that the special period will be executed in advance or during the period. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent document: JP-A-2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of held balls are generated immediately after the state in which it is easy to enter the starting hole, the player is notified that it is not advantageous. There is a possibility that a problem may occur that the interest in the game will be reduced. This technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine R1, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect indicating that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means is not executed. It is possible to execute an effect that meets the needs of the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

The game machine R1 has state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state. and the prohibition condition is set as at least one condition, which is a first condition that is satisfied when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine R2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the end of the special state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means is set as the establishment condition as the prohibition condition. Therefore, a lot of the second information is stored, and even if the game ball is entered into the second ball entering means, the specific performance is executed during a period when the profit for the player is low, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of lowering the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine R2, the prohibition condition is such that a predetermined number or more of the second information are stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, when the special state ends, the condition is that a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored. The prohibition condition is established only in the stored state, and there is an effect of suppressing the problem that the player's profit is lost because the specific performance is not executed even though the number of stored second information is small. .

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the determination means includes a specific first determination result that causes the second ball-entering means to change to the first state for a first period, and During a second period, it is configured to be able to determine a specific second determination result that is varied to the first state, and the effect determination means determines the specific state based on the fact that the specific second determination result is determined. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it determines the performance.

According to the gaming machine R4, by executing a specific effect in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify the player that it is a more advantageous period, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

<Feature S group> (volume control)
A game machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means. a sound output means capable of outputting sound as a part of the effect executed by the effect execution means; a first state in which the sound is output from the sound output means based on the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means; and the sound at a predetermined volume regardless of the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means. output control means for switching between a second state in which sound is output from the output means; and a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started from a power failure state in which the power supply for operating the game machine is interrupted. and initial setting means for setting the second state when a game machine S1 is reached.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as effects can be variably set according to the operation of the player or the settings of the game parlor (patent document: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2011-200511). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of more suitable volume control. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims at providing a game machine capable of suitable sound volume control.

According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state is set in which output is performed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. This has the effect of enabling the user to recognize the sound in a suitable manner and to perform suitable volume control.

In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be smaller than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be smaller than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. There is an effect that the noise in the game parlor can be reduced. In the game machine S1 or S2, the game machine S3 is characterized in that the output control means continuously sets the second state until the effect executing means finishes execution of one effect.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the 1st effect is completed, so that the power supply is turned off during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that it is the performance executed after the power is turned on by the sound volume of one performance to be executed later.

In one of the game machines S1 to S3, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the game machine to an initial state on the condition that a predetermined operation from the outside is performed when the game machine is powered on. The game machine S4, wherein the sound output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the game machine has been initialized by a notification sound. also has the effect of being able to detect fraud at an early stage.

<Characteristic T group> (Reserved pattern display area variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. A pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each piece of information, and a display mode of an area in which the pattern is displayed on the pattern display means is varied according to the number of the information stored in the storage means. A game machine T1, characterized by comprising a symbol display area changing means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which the reserved ball information is displayed becomes difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed. was wanted. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

According to the game machine T1, since the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied depending on the number of information stored in the storage means, the pattern is stored according to the display mode of the display area where the pattern is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize the number of pieces of information and provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In the gaming machine T1, the pattern display means displays area information indicating the area in which the pattern is displayed even in a state where the pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display area changing means is provided. is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, the area information is displayed while being varied according to the number of stored information. , has the effect of being easy to understand.

In the game machine T1 or T2, the game machine T3 is characterized in that the symbol display means displays identification information capable of identifying an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1 or T2, the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being played so that the acquisition condition is satisfied when the upper limit number is exceeded. .

In the game machine T3, the identification information is set to non-display when the symbols corresponding to the upper limit number are displayed.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, the identification information is not displayed when the maximum number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is suppressed. , there is an effect that the pattern can be easily identified.

In any one of game machines T1 to T4, a period discriminating means for discriminating a period in which a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the pattern is displayed according to the period discriminated by the period discriminating means. and rule changing means for changing the variable display rule.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied depending on the period until the predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is satisfied by changing the display mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of the game machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays the first display mode until the first number of the symbols are displayed, and when the first number is exceeded, the first display mode is displayed. A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the display is changed to a second display mode different from that of the game machine T6.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the willingness to establish the, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic U group> (Release display of pending number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. a pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to each piece of information; and a display mode changing means for varying a display mode displayed on the pattern display means based on a period in which a predetermined number of pieces of the information are acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine U1, since the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is varied depending on the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information are obtained, the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to make it have and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine U1, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the symbols are displayed based on the period.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbols are displayed is varied based on the period. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the display area in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol display means has a suggesting mode suggesting that the symbols are displayed even during a period when the symbols are not displayed. A game machine U3 characterized in that it is set to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, by displaying the suggestive mode even during the period when the symbols are not displayed, it is possible to quickly confirm that the information has been acquired. has the effect of

A gaming machine U4 in the gaming machine U3, wherein the display mode varying means varies the suggesting mode corresponding to the period.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the suggestion mode is varied in accordance with the period required for storing the predetermined number of information, so the frequency at which the information is stored according to the suggestion mode has the effect of being able to confirm

In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestive mode is regularly changed and displayed based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode changing means displays based on the period. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the special suggesting mode different from the suggesting mode corresponding to the number of symbols present is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U3 or U4, the acquisition frequency of information can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode varies regularly and irregularly. There is an effect that the game can be played while enjoying the situation.

<Feature V group> (hold navigation)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information before being judged by the judgment means is stored in the storage means. A game machine V1 characterized by having a performance executing means capable of executing a specific performance based on the number or more of stored performances.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine V1, since the specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the determination result but also in the number of information stored. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, prior determination means for executing a determination before the determination means determines the information stored by the storage means; A game machine V2, characterized by comprising an effect determination means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, so the identification information is stored before the specific effect is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest the determination result of the information that is present, and that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. .

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until the predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to identify the frequency with which information is stored by the presentation.

Any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3 has history information storage means for storing game history information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. A game machine V4 characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the game history information, so the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines V1 to V4, the game machine V5 is characterized in that the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes equal to or less than a specific number. .

According to the gaming machine V5, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number of stored information becomes equal to or less than the specific number. There is an effect that it is possible to motivate

In any one of the game machines V1 to V5, a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means; and symbol display area varying means for varying the display mode of the area in which the symbols are displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of the information displayed.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied in accordance with the number of information stored. There is an effect that the number can be easily identified.

<Characteristic W group> (Lucky number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to each piece of information; A number information storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of the information stored before being judged by the judgment means, and a specific performance is executed based on the number information stored in the number information storage means. A game machine W1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine W1, when information is stored, number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored at the time the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and identification based on the number information is stored. Since the performance is executed, there is an effect that the interest can be further improved when the information is stored.

In the game machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result. It is possible to make the player interested in the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode indicating the area where the pattern corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored with respect to the information previously determined as the specific determination result by the specific performance when the symbols are displayed. , there is an effect that the game can be played expecting that the pattern will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

A game machine W4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines W1 to W3, the symbol is provided with a suggestive mode corresponding to the number information.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a suggestive mode corresponding to the number information is attached to the symbol. Also, there is an effect that the stored count information can be recognized in a suggestive manner.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the number information of the specific effect when the privilege game is being executed. and reporting means for reporting suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game being executed based on the fact that the information is stored in the memory number corresponding to Gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, suggestive information suggesting the type of privilege game being executed by storing information up to the number of memories corresponding to the specific effect is reported. Therefore, the game can be played so as to store the information even during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The game machine W6 is characterized in that the game machine W5 is configured such that the type of the privilege game is difficult to identify from the identification information indicating the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W5, the identification information makes it difficult to identify the type of the privilege game, thereby increasing the value of the suggestive information reported. be.

<X group> (charge effect derivative)
A first ball-entering means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entering means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. an acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entering means; , storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means, and identification information for indicating the specific result of determination on the display means is stopped and displayed. and a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, wherein the second ball-entering means is varied from the second state to the second state. Determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; Effect means for executing an effect for indicating the result of determination by the determining means; and an effect determination means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be executed by the game machine X1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a vane shape that regulates the entry of a ball into the starting hole and releases the regulation when the opening condition is satisfied so that the game ball can be easily entered. A game machine has been proposed in which the is attached to the start port (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). In the above-described pachinko machine or the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member is moved, there is a possibility that the player may become bored with the game. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims at providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the game machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is established by the specific performance, and plays the game expecting not only the specific determination result but also the execution of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine X2 is characterized in that the game machine X1 has prohibiting means for prohibiting the determination of the specific effect by the effect determining means when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, the fulfillment of the avoidance condition prohibits the determination of the specific performance, so that the reckless execution of the specific performance can be suppressed. effective.

a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state in the gaming machine X1 or X2; wherein the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition based on the fact that the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. Gaming machine X3.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effects of the game machine X1 or X2, at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means. can be easily established, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of excessive ball entry into the second ball entry means.

In the game machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that at least one condition is set.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effect of the game machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the second information is excessively stored.

In any one of the game machines X2 to X4, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball by varying the shooting power based on the player's operation, and a game ball shot by the shooting means with the first shooting power. and a game ball shot with a second firing force different from the first firing force, configured to make it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first channel to flow down. and a second flow path configured to be able to flow down, wherein the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second entering means The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. The gaming machine X5 is characterized in that it notifies the player of suggesting information suggesting that the game be played.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect exerted on any one of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is met, the information suggesting that the game ball flows down to the first flow path is notified. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that a player enters a game ball into the second ball entering means that has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (button pop-out control)
An operation means having an operation surface that a player can operate, a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the movement means, The moving means is configured to be capable of executing a first action of moving the operation surface of the operating means in a first movement manner and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement manner different from the first movement manner. and the motion control means performs the first motion when a first condition is satisfied, and the moving device performs the second motion when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y1 characterized in that it controls the operation of .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operation means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operation means can be varied, or the type of background can be changed. A game machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine Y1, since the operation control means can move the operation surface of the operation means in different movement modes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect using the operation means, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the game machine Y2, since the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operation means to a specific operation position can be varied by the operation control means, the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means can also be performed. can make people interested.

In the gaming machine Y2, the movement means moves the operation surface of the operation means so that the movement period in the second action is longer than the movement period in the first action. Gaming machine Y3.

According to the game machine Y3, since the movement period can be changed according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of movement of the operation surface of the operation means.

In game machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. and the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and changes the operation contents of the moving means according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. Characteristic game machine Y4.

According to the game machine Y4, it is possible to vary the operation contents of the moving means by varying the contents of the drive control to the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control contents of the operation control means.

In the game machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotational movement, and the operation control means is a first driving control for rotating the driving means in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. and a second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving means is capable of executing the first drive control when the first drive control is executed by the control means. A gaming machine Y5 characterized in that it executes one action, and executes the second action when the second drive control is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y5, the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, so that the movement mode for moving the operating surface of the operating means can be easily varied.

A gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Y5, it has speed varying means capable of varying the rotation speed of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is varied by the speed varying means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the operation means. can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode moves the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotation speed of the driving means varied by the speed varying means. Characteristic game machine Y7.

In game machines Y1 to Y7, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. and suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting that the determination result of the determining means is the predetermined determined result, and the moving means operates as the suggestive effect. , the game machine Y8, wherein the operation control means determines the content of the operation control according to the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine Y8, since the determination result of the determination means can be suggested by the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means to be executed, the player can pay attention to the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the operation means.

<Feature Z group> (Prevention of button pop-out destination)
Operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means determine the predetermined movement. moving means capable of moving the operating surface of the operating means from the retracted position to the projecting position when a condition is satisfied; movement control means for controlling the moving means; and effect executing means for executing a effect based on the operation of , wherein the moving means includes a first action for moving the operating surface of the operating means to the projecting position; and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the projecting position, and the movement control means causes the effect execution means to perform the predetermined operation by the operation means. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the first action is executed when the effect becomes executable.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operation means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operation means can be varied, or the type of background can be changed. A game machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine Z1, regardless of whether or not the operation surface of the operation means is moved, the operation control means causes the movement means to perform the first movement. By grasping whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing it in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Moreover, there is an effect that the player can expect that the second action will be performed by performing the first action.

In the game machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by a rotating operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. and the movement control means includes, as the plurality of movement controls, first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction, and rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. and a second drive control to cause the moving device to execute the first drive control when the movement control device executes the first drive control, and the second drive control is executed. A game machine Z2 characterized in that the second action is executed when the game is played.

According to the game machine Z2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Z1, the operation surface of the operation means can be configured not to move even if the drive means is driven, and the position of the drive means can be changed according to the state of the operation surface. There is an effect that it can be changed without moving.

The game machine Z2 has a control means that can be changed between a control state that controls the movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the movement means and a release state that cancels the control, and the content of control of the movement control means is controlled by the movement control means. The first operation executed by the moving means in response is an operation for changing the restricting means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the projecting position. Game machine Z3 characterized by motion.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Z2, the movement of the moving means is restricted by the restricting means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to vary the state of the restricting means in accordance with the content of control executed by the motion control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operation surface of the operating means is moved.

In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means includes a rotating member capable of rotating in synchronism with the rotating motion of the driving means, and an action member connected to the operating means and on which the rotating motion of the rotating member acts. and, the rotating member has a projecting portion that can come into contact with the acting member, and the restricting means rotates the driving means in the first direction to move the projecting portion to the acting member. A game machine Z4 characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by bringing it into contact with.

In the gaming machine Z4, the restricting means is not changed to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction to bring the projecting portion into contact with the action member. Gaming machine Z5.

In the gaming machine Z5, the position where the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6 to play.

In game machines Z1 to Z6, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, and a benefit granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. and suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, and the predetermined movement condition according to the determination result of the determination means. The game machine Z7 is characterized in that

<Characteristics α group> (Over winning at the time of jackpot)
discrimination means capable of making a decision; display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result obtained by the reverse part acquisition means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game when displayed; a first privilege game in which a first privilege advantageous to a player is given as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; A second privilege game in which a second privilege more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given, and a determining means capable of deciding either of the above, wherein the privilege game is played by the privilege game execution means. is executed, a type determination means for determining, from a plurality of types, a notification type for notifying the player of notification information for notifying the type information of the privilege game being executed. Gaming machine α1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is executed, the notification type for suggesting the privilege game type is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification type is variously executed and the interest of the game is enhanced. have the effect of improving

In the gaming machine α1, variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the open state; and variable control means for causing an open game in which the variable ball entry means is varied until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in an open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. A gaming machine α2 characterized by including at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value of allowing the variable ball entry means to enter more than a predetermined number of game balls, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine α2, the privilege game is to execute the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on the execution of the open game a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine α3 characterized by having notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, it can be switched to another notification type during the privilege game, so that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

In the gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of overlapping notifications. .

<Feature β group> (Directing normal hits as variable hits)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, and the information is stored before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. If the information that is determined as the specific determination result by the preliminary determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the preliminary determination execution means for executing the determination and the privilege game execution means is stored , and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the privilege game is executed, if it is further determined that the privilege game will be executed after that, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine β1, the privilege game includes a first privilege game in which a normal game state is set after execution, and a higher probability that the player will determine the specific determination result than the normal game state after execution. At least a second privilege game in which a special game state is set is set, and the specific effect is configured in a manner suggesting that the special game state is set. gaming machine β2.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. stop display switching means capable of stopping display in the specific stop display mode when the information determined as the specific determination result is stored when the identification information is dynamically displayed A game machine β3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, it is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, so it seems as if the second privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it can make you think.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined as the specific determination result when the identification information for executing the first privilege game is dynamically displayed. is not displayed, and is switched to the specific stop display mode based on the fact that the information determined as the specific determination result is stored during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode can be switched even after the dynamic display is started, so there is an effect that the chances of displaying in the specific stop mode can be increased. be.

<Characteristics AA group> (BGM is reset when power is restored)
Power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, Notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power is supplied by the power supply means, and After the notification executed by the notification means is completed In a game machine having effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and sound output means capable of outputting sound based on sound data of a predetermined period, the sound output means is adapted to output the notification by the notifying means. The sound is output from the start position of the sound data during the notification period to be executed, and the sound is output from the predetermined position of the sound data when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Characterized game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is a method that stops subtraction of the variable time when the power is turned off during a predetermined variable time, displays a recovery screen after the power is turned on, and restarts the subtraction of the stopped variable time (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016. -005505). In such a game machine, it was possible to inform the player that the power was turned on by displaying the recovery screen in an easy-to-understand manner. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the subtraction of the variable time has been restarted. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of the gaming situation at the time of power return in a more comprehensible manner.

According to the game machine AA1, even while the notification indicating that the power is supplied is being executed, the sound output during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that the period during which the power supply is notified and the subsequent period can be associated with each other. In addition, at the timing when the notification indicating that the power is supplied is finished and the predetermined effect is started, the sound based on the sound data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the sound data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect to be executed after the end of the notification indicating that the power is supplied. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned gaming machine AA1, a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure variation is being executed at the time the power is turned off, and the determination result during the predetermined period when the power is turned off A storable storage means is further provided, and when it is determined that the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation when the power is supplied, during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied, the special It is preferable to configure so as to output BGM that is output during figure fluctuation. Thereby, while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being performed, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure variation is being performed by using the voice. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, it is preferable that the period for notifying that the power is supplied is continuously set until the start-up process for various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that the power supply has been supplied. In addition, if the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, or if the special figure fluctuation is started during the period of notifying that the power supply is supplied, the period of notifying that the power supply is over , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing of the normal display screen. In this case, determine the period from the time the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure variation in progress, and set the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure variation in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect for notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). . As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect corresponding to the remaining variable time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify it, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AB group> (Different background change timing according to pattern change speed at the time of button operation)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. , an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determiner, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. A variable timing setting for setting a timing for varying the presentation mode based on a dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine AB1 characterized by comprising means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. It was possible to make the player operate willingly, that is, to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Since the number of performance modes to be executed becomes scarce, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of performance modes and to enhance the performance effect.

According to the game machine AB, since the performance mode can be changed according to the variation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, various performances can be provided. In the game machine AB described above, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is conceivable as the effect mode variable by the effect mode changing means. Thereby, the timing for variably setting the background mode can be varied according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, in a state immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the current dynamic display speed of the identification information. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode will be changed immediately after operating the operation means in order to change the effect mode. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operation means to change the effect mode to when the effect mode is changed is longer than or equal to the predetermined period, the player is informed that the effect mode will be changed after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is preferable to configure to display the comments shown in . As a result, when an operation for changing the presentation mode is executed, it is possible for the game company to easily grasp whether or not the game machine is accepting the operation.

Furthermore, when providing an interval of a predetermined period or more from operating the operation means until the effect mode is varied, for example, the timing at which the next special figure variation is executed is configured to be the predetermined period described above. good to do By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode in a state in which the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic AC group> (Switching development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determination means capable of measuring the number of times that the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means to be performed; a determination result of the operation timing determination means; a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on the measurement result of the measuring means; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in accordance with the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. Characterized game machine AC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). Such a game machine is configured to set an effect mode based on the operation content or the number of times of operation on the operation means. In a game machine constructed in this way, it is difficult to set a variety of presentation modes according to the operation contents of the operating means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. There has been a demand for a game machine that can set modes.

According to the game machine AC1, since the performance mode can be changed based on both the operation timing and the number of times of operation for the operation means, it is possible to set a wider variety of performances and enhance the performance effect. .

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to execute a continuous operation effect in which the effect mode is changed corresponding to the operation of the operation means a plurality of times, and the period during which the continuous operation effect is executed Of these, it is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode variable timing of the successive operation effect in accordance with the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the timing of the first operation to the operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is varied. Good to configure. With such a configuration, it is possible to set various effects modes without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the operation means for the first time, it is preferable to set the same presentation mode for the operation to the operation means for the first time. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing of the operation means for the first time.

In addition, according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed when the continuous operation effect is completed, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous operation presentation. In addition, the continuous operation production can be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the production mode executed after the continuous operation production is set based on the production result of the continuous operation production and the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. , and based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period, the effect mode variable condition of the continuous operation effect (operation It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic AD group> (The display of the number of pending balls displayed on the liquid crystal is provided with a state in which it is synchronized with the actual number of pending balls and a state in which it is not synchronized)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is established based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; storage means capable of storing information up to a first predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect multiple times; and a mode display means for displaying the display mode of on the display means, wherein the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied. is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed. A gaming machine AD1 characterized in that a second mode for indicating the number of games is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery can be stored so that the game can be played efficiently. In some gaming machines configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (reserved) to execute a lottery, a reserved symbol is displayed to show the number of reserved rights stored to the player. (For example, JP-A-2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, the content of the game can be determined based on the number of reservations, and the game can be played efficiently. In addition, a function of determining the lottery result in advance is given to the stored hold before the lottery is actually executed, and the stored number of holds becomes a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of reservations is executed. In such a continuous effect, the results of pre-discrimination for multiple holds can be executed using a series of effects, so the winning is included in the target lottery rather than the effect based on the result of a single lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay attention to the performance. However, in the gaming machine described above, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold pattern corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbols indicating the hold targeted for the continuous effect. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine up to which reserved symbols are to be subjected to the continuous effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of reserved symbols to be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AD1, the display mode indicating the number of memories displayed on the display means may display the number of memories stored in the storage means according to the conditions established, or display information indicating the number of effects. Since it is possible to variably set when to play, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide second display means capable of always displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the number stored in the storage means, which affects the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-described display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emission mode of light emission means such as an LED. Also good.

Further, it may be configured such that the number stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means while the information indicating the number of performances is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, it is preferable that the second display means be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of performances, the number stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the performance period may be displayed. (eg, one display every 30 seconds). Also, a display showing the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including temporary stop) during the performance period may be used.

<Feature AE group> (Notice effect executed only when the background is changed)
An operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a performance mode for varying the performance mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means. variable means, effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means, and when the variable timing at which the effect mode is varied by the effect mode changing means satisfies a specific condition; , and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine that executes a suggestive effect to make the player play the game while expecting that the lottery result will be a win. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, there has been a configuration in which the mode in which the suggestive effect is executed can be changed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-213999). Furthermore, there is also a game that varies the mode (background) in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. In such a game machine, by executing a dedicated suggestive effect according to the set mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by providing a variety of effects to the player. However, there is a problem in that the player willingly operates the operating means after watching the special effects corresponding to each mode and loses the desire to change the mode. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of allowing a player to change modes at will.

According to the game machine AE1, since a dedicated effect can be executed when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience the game even if the game is played for a long time during the period when each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to experience various effects to operate the operating means.

<Characteristic AF group> (A period during which the current mode is notified and a period when it is not notified are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the period when the current mode is not notified)
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a production mode notifying means capable of informing a given production mode, an operating means operable by a player, and an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or during a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine AF1, characterized in that information for indicating the performance mode set by the mode setting means is notified when the game machine AF1 is set. According to the game machine AF1, the performance mode notification period and non-reporting period are set, and even during the non-reporting period, the performance mode can be reported based on the operation to the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means so as to grasp the presentation mode. In this case, when the predetermined operation is not performed on the operation means during the second period, it is preferable to notify other information about the game. It is preferable to configure so as to report suggestive information suggesting the speed and the determination result of the determining means. Thus, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the player's operation on the operating means.

<Characteristic AG group> (Step up button vibe)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and the vibration means a vibration amount varying means capable of varying the amount of vibration for vibrating the operation means to a different vibration amount; It has a period setting means for setting a possible variable period and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Gaming machine AG1. According to the game machine AG1, since the suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the vibration amount of the operation means is variable, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

<Characteristic AH group> (Informs the speed of pattern change with the color of the button)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. operation determining means capable of determining the operation determining means, operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and mode changing means capable of varying the mode of the operating means, The mode changing means changes the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means changes from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. A gaming machine AH1 characterized in that the . According to the game machine AH1, it is possible to grasp the dynamic display speed of the identification information depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic AI group> (The background changes depending on the combination of stop patterns)
determining means for executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period of time; the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode A gaming machine comprising stop display means for stop-displaying in a display mode, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means, The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and can change the performance mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A game machine AI1 characterized by comprising a variable means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the game machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, it is preferable that the stop display mode can be selected. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operation means.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Prevention of advance in preparatory drive for character action)
display means for executing a predetermined effect display; effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario; movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation; a production operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the production operation based on the production scenario; and production scenario setting means capable of setting one production scenario from a plurality of production scenarios as the production scenario; The movable means is configured to be movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. It has an executable preparation movement control means, and the preparation movement control means executes the preparation movement before the production display is executed by the production display control means based on the production scenario. A gaming machine AJ1 characterized by: According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the effect scenario. Furthermore, since it is configured to perform the preparatory movement control separately from the presentation action based on the presentation scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed both when the presentation action is executed and when it is not executed. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the performance action is executed even if the movable means performs the preparatory movement.

<Characteristic AK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the action state of the character)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine in which a display means capable of displaying and a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the information corresponding to the information. storage means capable of storing up to a first predetermined number until determination is performed; and storing the information stored in the storage means until dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started pre-determining means capable of pre-determining in advance; effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determining means; and the effect set by the effect mode setting means A specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the mode at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. and effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by Amusement machine AK1. According to the game machine AK1, the performance mode set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means can be replaced with the replacement performance mode, so that the performance can be executed according to the situation and the performance effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move within a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode replacement means based on the position information of the movable means. It should be configured so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means indicates a position at which it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the effect mode replacement means changes the movable means. It is preferable to set a rendering mode that is not used, for example, a rendering mode that uses only the display means, as a replacement rendering mode. In addition, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and using the above-mentioned technical concept in a game machine with enhanced production effect, the production mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Features AL Group> (Different setting timing of operation effective period during demonstration according to game state)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is likely to be set. and a waiting state for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means is not executed. State setting means, operation means that can be operated by the player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation based on the determination result of the operation determination means. Operation effect execution means capable of executing effects, and effective period setting means setting an operation effective period during which the operation determination means can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The valid period setting means extends the valid period after the standby state is set when the second period is set by the gaming state setting means more than when the first period is set. The game machine AL1 is characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until setting is long. According to the game machine AL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for validly determining the operation to the operation means can be changed according to the set game state, so that the operation is not executed carelessly. can be suppressed. In addition, in the case where notification means for notifying the player that the operation effective period has been set is provided, frequent notification by the notification means can be suppressed. In addition, while the second game state is being set, it is preferable to make the discrimination by the discrimination means easier to execute. As a result, the second game state can be made more advantageous than the first game state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second game state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AM group>
Power supply means capable of supplying power to a game machine, notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means, and execution by the notification means Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the basis of the end of the notification, and reproduction capable of reproducing predetermined audio data on the basis of the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means, wherein the notification is performed as the reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means. A game machine AM1, characterized by comprising reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by said means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on (for example, JP-A-2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been demanded to make it easier to understand the game situation when the power is turned on. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine AM1, power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine, and notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. , based on the completion of the notification executed by the notification means, a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect, and a predetermined effect based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data; and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means; A reproduction start position setting means is provided for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by the notification means as the reproduction start position. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine AM2.

According to the game machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more favorably.

In the game machine AM1 or AM2, the game machine AM3 is characterized in that the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the voice data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio can be output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines AM1 to AM3, an execution determination means is provided for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the predetermined performance are satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. A gaming machine AM4, wherein said reproduction means reproduces said voice data based on said execution determination means determining that said execution condition is established.

According to the gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, the condition for executing the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data when the execution condition is judged to be satisfied by the execution judgment means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AN group>
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. In a gaming machine having operation determination means capable of determining the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed speed setting means for setting a speed; and period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result. and a gaming machine AN1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine AN1, there is provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display. privilege providing means for awarding a privilege based on the static display of the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means in a specific display mode; operation means operable by the player; an operation determining means capable of determining that an operation has been performed; an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determining means; and the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means The performance mode is varied based on the performance execution means capable of executing the corresponding performance and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. and variable timing setting means for setting timing. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AN1 has a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the performance execution means is controlled by the speed setting means. The game machine AN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the set dynamic display speed of the identification information.

According to the game machine AN2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the game machine AN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN2, the player can select whether to operate the operation means or the second operation means during the first period, and the player can play the game. It is possible to increase the willingness to participate in Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AO group>
an operation means capable of being operated by a player; an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; and an operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determined to have been performed, and based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means, a performance mode during a second period set after the first period is set. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, wherein the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means. A game machine AO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting a mode of effect during the second period is executed during the first period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine AO1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. an operation timing determining means capable of determining an operation timing at which the predetermined operation is determined by the determining means; and a second period set after the first period based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means. a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during a period; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means; A suggestive effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AO1 has measuring means for measuring the number of determinations that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means counts the number of determinations measured by the measuring means. A gaming machine AO2, characterized in that an effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing at which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine AO2, the effect executing means, when the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times smaller than the specific number of times, during the second period set by the effect mode setting means The game machine AO3 is characterized by executing a unified performance that does not suggest a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO2, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AP group>
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for executing determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination results of the determination means are specified. privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the acquisition means storage means capable of storing the information acquired by at least up to a first predetermined number until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode; As a display mode to be displayed in the display mode, a specific display mode is displayed based on the number of information items of the information stored in the storage means becoming a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. and a third predetermined number less than or equal to the second predetermined number out of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on the fact that the information of is used for determination by the determination means at least.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine AP1, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means upon establishment of the discrimination condition, and Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means. execution means, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied, and display in a predetermined display mode display means, and a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaching a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number; and the second predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode termination means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least a third predetermined number of the information being used for determination by the determination means. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AP1 comprises a second display control means for displaying, on the display means, a number-of-times indication mode suggesting the remaining number of determinations by the determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. A gaming machine AP2 characterized by:

According to the game machine AP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP1, the display means is provided with a number-of-times suggestion mode for suggesting the number of determinations of the remaining determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine AP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the number of information suggesting mode suggesting the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number of times suggesting mode. A gaming machine AP3 characterized by comprising third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, an information number suggesting mode that suggests the number of information stored in the storage means is provided. Since the third display control means is provided for displaying in a manner indistinguishable from the number-of-times suggesting mode, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggesting mode.

In the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means controls a predetermined specific condition when the new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. is established, the game machine AP4 increases the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion mode.

According to the game machine AP4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means stores the new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. If a predetermined specific condition is established when the game is played, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AQ group>
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. Execution means, specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during execution of the specific effect. A game machine AQ1 characterized by comprising a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting a type.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, the determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means that is a predetermined specific determination result, which is advantageous to the player. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means; a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the above. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AQ1, the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means include a first specific effect in which a first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a second specific performance in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed after at least the specified period has passed from the start of the performance. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect based on the establishment of the specific condition before the specific period elapses. AQ2.

According to the gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ1, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first effect mode is performed after at least a specific period has passed since the start of the specific effect. A plurality including at least a first specific effect to be executed, and a second specific effect to be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode after at least the specified period has passed since the start of the specific effect. The suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect based on the establishment of the specific condition before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2 is provided with an operating means operable by a player, and the specific condition is established based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the game machine AQ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AQ1 or AQ2, it is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the fact that the operation means is operated. , the player who desires to execute the suggestive effect can be made to positively operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the taste of the player.

<Characteristic AR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notifying means capable of notifying the performance mode that has been set, and a suppression period for suppressing the performance mode notification by the performance mode notifying means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. suppression period setting means; and notification control means for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period. A gaming machine AR1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the game machine AR1, mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of effect modes, and effect executing means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notification means capable of reporting the performance mode set by the mode setting means; and a suppression of notification of the performance mode by the performance mode notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period to be set; and notification control for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period. and means. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AR1, as a type of effect executed by the operation means operable by the player and the effect execution means, a first operation to the operation means is detected during a specific period included in the effect period. effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the suppression period setting means, at least during the specific period , the suppression period is set, and the presentation mode notification means notifies the presentation mode based on detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A game machine AR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AR2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR1, the above-mentioned an effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operating means; The period setting means sets the suppression period for at least the specific period, and the presentation mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. Based on what has been done, the effect mode is notified. As a result, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic AS group>
an operating means operable by a player; a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating an operation to the operating means as effective during one effect period is set; and between the effective period. Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated, and first control and second control as types of specific control executed by the specific control execution means. and control type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least and, as the type of the specific effect, when the operation means is operated a specific number of times during the effective period of one , a first type in which the first control is likely to be executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed the specific number of times than the first type. A game machine AS1 characterized by comprising a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine AS1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation to the operation means as valid is set during one effect period, Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the valid period, and the type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means, a first control type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least control and second control; and as the type of the specific effect, a specific number of operations on the operation means during the one effective period. and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than in the first type. and specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least . As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AS1, in the specific effect, a correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and a control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is set in advance for each type of the specific effect. A gaming machine AS2 characterized in that it is defined.

According to the game machine AS2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AS1, the specific effect is the correspondence between the number of times the operation means is operated during the effective period and the control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control vibrates the operation means with a vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity. A gaming machine AS3 characterized in that the control is for vibrating at a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine AS3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operation means. Since it is a control for vibrating the means with the second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by confirming the vibration intensity of the operation means. effective.

In any one of the game machines AS1 to AS3, the specific effect is defined by the specific effect in which the correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the effective period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is the specific effect. A game machine AS4 characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of the game machine AS4.

According to the game machine AS4, in addition to the effect of any one of AS1 to AS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the execution of the specific control during the execution period of one specific effect for the display means. and display control means for displaying a history of controls executed by the means. As a result, the player can easily understand the type of the executed specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's convenience can be improved.

<Characteristic AT group>
Operation means operable by the player, operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and predetermined operation performance can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. operation effect execution means, wherein the operation effect setting means sets one of the plurality of operation effects as the operation effect to be executed by the operation effect execution means; and the operation means. wherein the mode variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. A gaming machine AT1 characterized by:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine AT1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and an operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, wherein one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. Setting means and mode changing means capable of varying the mode of the operating means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode of the operating means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable in the suggested mode. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AT1, characterized in that it has light emitting means for emitting light in an area visible to a player in said operating means, and said mode varying means varies the light emitting mode of said light emitting means. AT2.

According to the gaming machine AT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it has light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means varies the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. As a result, there is an effect that the current situation can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who intends to operate the operating means.

In game machine AT1 or AT2, determining means for performing predetermined determination, dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means on display means for a predetermined period, and dynamic display thereof and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and A game machine AT3 is characterized in that it is possible to set different operation presentations during a displayed period.

According to the game machine AT3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AT1 or AT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and a dynamic and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the displayed identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, wherein the operation effect setting means is provided during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects for each.

As a result, different operation presentations are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AU group>
A display means capable of displaying identification information, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, and a privilege of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. game execution means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; A first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period of time has passed since the display was started, and a second mode different from the first mode is displayed after the specific period of time has passed. a mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and a period from when the dynamic display of the identification information is started until the specific period elapses and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first mode is displayed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed; .

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine AU1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the determination means for executing the predetermined determination, and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and based on the determination result, it is advantageous to the player. bonus game execution means for executing a special bonus game; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As a type of, a first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period has passed since the dynamic display was started, and the first mode after the specific period has passed a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed; mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least; Suggesting that the first mode is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. a specific performance type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a possible first specific performance and a second specific performance capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AU1, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display a failure effect mode showing a failure determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. The first specific effect is such that a combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects is a first combination, and the second specific effect A game machine AU2 characterized in that a combination of said failure effect modes displayed during an execution period of said one specific effect is a second combination different from said first combination.

According to the gaming machine AU2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the failure effect mode showing the result of the determination of failure different from the result of the specific determination a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. In the first specific effect, the combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one specific effect is the first combination, and in the second specific effect, the combination is one The combination of the out-of-line effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic AV group>
In a gaming machine having effect control means capable of executing effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect, and effect mode setting means for the effect mode setting means. and an output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the output means, based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect for the first effect means A first performance control means for executing a performance operation and a second performance means different from the first performance means for executing a predetermined second performance operation based on the performance information output by the output means. and a second effect control means, wherein the first effect control means is a specific information output means capable of outputting specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. A gaming machine AV1 characterized by having:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine AV1, in the gaming machine having the effect control means capable of executing the effect control for executing the predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. and an output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means and a first effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a predetermined effect for a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. and a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, wherein the first effect control means transmits specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has specific information output means capable of outputting. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means indicates the duplicate effect mode. The production information is output to the first production control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second production operation among the duplicate production modes to the second production control means as the specific information. A gaming machine AV2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AV2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means outputs the effect information indicating the duplicate effect mode. to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation among the overlapping effect modes to the second effect control means as the specific information. . As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the game machine AV2, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Game machine AV3.

According to the game machine AV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic AW group>
a performance period setting means capable of setting a predetermined performance period; and when a first performance condition is established while the first performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the performance period is set at least from a first position. a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect using a effect member movable to a second position different from the first position; a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, wherein the first effect a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means in a specific effect period within the effect period; a movable state determination means for determining a movable state of the effect member; a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Gaming machine AW1 to play.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine AW1, when the first effect period is established by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period, and the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means, A first performance executing means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and the first performance period are set. a second performance executing means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the first performance condition is established during the game. In the game machine, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means and a movable state of the effect member are determined in a specific effect period within the first effect period. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the result of determination by the movable condition determiner is a specific result. It is. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AW1, the movable state determination means determines the specific determination result when the effect member is not positioned at the first position.

According to the game machine AW2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AW1, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable state determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained when the effect member is not positioned at the first position. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine AW1 or AW2, the game machine AW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means.

According to the game machine AW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Any one of the game machines AW1 to AW3 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first The performance condition is satisfied when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine AW4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine AW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which the operation judging means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine AW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine AW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which the operation judging means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AX group>
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , standby state setting means for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, operation means operable by the player, and predetermined operation means for the operation means. and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the result of determination by the operation determining means, wherein the operation determining means When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and based on the game state set by the game state setting means, the A gaming machine AX1 is characterized by having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting a standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine AX1, there is provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means. A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display executing means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. a game state setting means capable of setting a possible second game state; a waiting state setting means for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied; an operating means operable by a player; an operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; and an operation performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means; The operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and is set by the game state setting means. It has standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition based on the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is performed. The means variably sets the standby condition so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. A gaming machine AX2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AX2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting means The standby condition is variably set so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the game machine AX1 or AX2, the game machine AX3 is characterized in that the determination by the determination means is easier to execute in the second game state than in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine AX3, the determination by the determining means is more likely to be executed in the second game state than in the first game state. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Feature ZA group> (Display of number of winning balls for small hit rush)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific result of determination is displayed on the display means a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player; and a variable ball entering state in which a game ball can be entered when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine having means and privilege giving means capable of giving a predetermined privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, wherein the first game state and the A game state setting means capable of switching and setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more likely to be executed than the first game state, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, A period setting means for setting a period during which the second game state is set to the first game state, and a bonus given by the bonus granting means when the bonus game is executed during the period set by the period setting means. and suggesting means capable of suggesting suggestive information corresponding to the rest of the benefits that can be obtained.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, when an advantageous state is set, it is difficult to determine how advantageous the given advantageous state is to the player, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced. This technical idea was made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by executing it during its execution.

According to the gaming machine ZA1, the suggestive information corresponding to the remaining privilege to be given is suggested in the period set by the period setting means, so that the information on the privilege to be given by the period setting means is grasped in advance. This has the effect of allowing the player to quickly feel the value of the period set by the period setting means.

In the game machine ZA1, the period setting means is set according to the number of times the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed in the second game state. Game machine ZA2 to play.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZA1, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of display times of the determination result executed in the second game state, and gradually make the player feel the rest of the period. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the discrimination can be executed by the discriminating means based on the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball into the game area and the game ball launched by the shooting means entering the game area. a ball entering means, a variable means for changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball. judgment means capable of executing a judgment based on the detection of the variable control means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when judgment information is displayed; , said ball entry means, and distribution means capable of distributing to said variable ball entry means in a predetermined order.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the game is distributed to each means in a predetermined order by the distribution means in a predetermined order. There is an effect that it is possible to easily execute a game of game nature.

In the gaming machine ZA3, during the period from when the game ball is detected by the detecting means until when the determination information indicating the specific determination result is displayed, the sorting means distributes the game ball to the incoming ball means. A gaming machine ZA4 characterized in that the game ball is constructed in a period in which the game ball can reach the ball-entering means in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first state.

According to the game machine ZA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA3, the game ball detected by the detection means can be easily entered into the ball entry means, and the ball enters the ball entry means in the second game state. There is an effect that the number of incoming balls to be played can be made constant.

<Characteristic ZB group> (Number of balls display (completely secured AT))
A first region where a game ball can flow down; a second region where the game ball that has flowed down the first region does not pass; a discriminating means capable of discriminating when a game ball enters the ball means; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; dynamic display means for displaying; an opening into which a game ball that has flowed down the second area can enter; a variable member that can be changed between a position and a second position where a game ball can enter the opening by retreating from the upper surface of the opening; and for displaying the specific determination result on the display means. variable control means for varying the variable member from the second position to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied when the identification information of is displayed, wherein the second region a ball-entry auxiliary means for making it easier for game balls other than those that have entered the ball-entering means to enter the opening, among the game balls that have flowed down into the ball-entering means; and suggesting means capable of suggesting information corresponding to the remaining number of game balls entering the opening.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, when an advantageous state is set, it is difficult to determine how advantageous the given advantageous state is to the player, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced. This technical idea was made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by executing it during its execution.

According to the gaming machine ZB1, since information corresponding to the remaining number of game balls entering the opening during the specific period is suggested, it is possible to determine whether there is a remaining number of balls to enter the opening during the specific period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is stopped suddenly, and that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine ZB2 in the game machine ZB1, wherein the ball-entering assisting means has a guide path for guiding game balls other than those entered into the ball-entering means to the opening. .

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB1, the game ball other than the ball entering the ball entering means is guided to the opening by the guide path of the ball entering assisting means, so that the game ball is an out ball. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes, and the ball entrance rate to the opening can be increased.

In the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the specific period consists of a period during which the discrimination is performed a specified number of times by the discrimination means or a period until the identification information indicating the discrimination result is displayed the specified number of times. A gaming machine ZB3 characterized in that it has a

According to the game machine ZB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the length of the specific period can be determined by the number of dynamic display times of the identification information, and the period until the specific period ends can be determined. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine ZB3, the determination means is configured to have a higher probability of determining the specific determination result than other determination results, and a first game state in which the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed; game state setting means capable of switching and setting a second game state in which discrimination by the discrimination means is more difficult than in the game state; A game machine ZB4 characterized in that the identification information for indicating the determination result is set in a period until the identification information is displayed for the specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZB3, the specific period is continuously set until the result of determination based on the identification information of the second game state is displayed a specific number of times, so that the player can take a break or the like. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if a period during which no game is played occurs.

<Characteristic ZC group> (Additional game notification control)
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed in the first game state; A game state setting means capable of switching and setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, a period setting means for setting a period in which the second game state is set, and the period setting means. Reporting means for reporting period information corresponding to at least part of the set period, and update means capable of adding and updating the period information reported by the reporting means when a specific condition is satisfied. and a gaming machine ZC1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, when an advantageous state is set, there is a problem that the period until the advantageous state ends becomes monotonous, and the interest in the game decreases. This technical idea was made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, etc., and by suppressing the game from becoming monotonous even during the period when advantageous conditions are set, To provide a gaming machine capable of improving

According to the gaming machine ZC1, when the second game state is set, the period information is updated by the updating means, so that the period until the second game state ends is suppressed from being felt constant. Thus, there is an effect that the problem that the game becomes monotonous during the second game state can be suppressed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the period set by the period setting means is set to a period until the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed a specific number of times. Game machine ZC2 to play.

According to the game machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC1, the period in which the second game state is set can be recognized by the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, and an easy-to-understand game can be played. has the effect of

The game machine ZC1 or ZC2 has a first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, and The gaming machine ZC3 is characterized in that the updating means is configured to be able to update the period information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC1 or ZC2, by entering the game ball into the first variable ball entering means, the period information can be added and updated easily. There is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that the ball will be entered by the 1 variable ball entering means.

In the gaming machine ZC3, when the second variable ball-entering means different from the first variable ball-entering means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed, the above-mentioned and a privilege type determining means for determining a privilege type determining means, wherein the privilege providing means is the first variable entering means or the second entering means corresponding to the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means. The game machine ZC4 is characterized in that the ball means is variable from the closed state to the open state.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, the variable ball entry means to be opened differs depending on the type of privilege, so the privilege type granted by the variable ball entry means to be opened is discriminated. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature ZD group> (Performs production based on occurrence time)
A determination means capable of executing determination, a performance execution means capable of executing performance based on the determination result of the determination means, and a benefit advantageous to the player when the specified performance is executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a game and variable ball entry means for changing a state in which a game ball can be entered when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, The privilege game execution means changes the variable ball entry means to a state in which game balls are difficult to enter based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, and the effect is executed. The means is characterized in that the aspect of the effect executed after the privilege game is varied when game balls more than the predetermined number enter the variable ball entry means. A game machine ZD1.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, there is a problem that games such as winning games become monotonous, and the interest in the games decreases. This technical idea was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. do.

According to the gaming machine ZD1, since the state of the effect is varied when more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, there is an interest in allowing a large number of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

In the gaming machine ZD1, game state setting means capable of switching and setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the effect execution means are: When the second game state is set, it is possible to notify as part of the effect suggestive information suggesting a period until the first game state is set, and the variable The gaming machine ZD2 is characterized in that, when game balls more than the predetermined number enter the ball entering means, at least the performance with the suggestive information varied is executed.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZD1, the suggestive information indicating the period during which the second gaming state is set is varied when the variable ball entering means receives more game balls than a predetermined number. Since the effect is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by entering more balls than predetermined into the variable ball entering means.

In the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the game state setting means sets, as one condition, the effect corresponding to the determination by the determination means for a predetermined number of times after the setting of the second game state. It is configured to be settable by switching to a game state, and the suggestion information is configured to suggest information based on the remaining number of times corresponding to at least part of the predetermined number of times. A game machine ZD3 characterized by.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the suggestion information can be used to predict the period until switching to the first game state, and the timing at which the first game state is set can be predicted. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by playing the game while playing the game.

Any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3 has privilege game type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the type determined by the privilege game type determination means includes: When the second game state is set, a first type in which the game state after the privilege game is set to the first game state, and when the second game state is set, the privilege A game machine ZD4 characterized in that at least a second type in which the second game state is maintained even after a game is played is set.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, when the privilege game is executed, the type can be made interesting, and the privilege game can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine ZD4, a specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball different from the variable ball entry means is provided, and the privilege game execution means is the variable ball entry means or the specific ball entry means corresponding to the type of the privilege game. The game ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the suggestive information is displayed in a variable manner. A game machine ZD5.

According to the game machine ZD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD4, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect to enter the game ball into the specific ball-entering means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

<Characteristic ZE group> (Differential display)
determination means capable of performing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed in the game machine, wherein the privilege can be granted for a specific period. Suggestion means for suggesting suggestion information corresponding to said privilege during said specific period; Storage means for storing information corresponding to said privilege given to a player during said specific period; a game machine ZE1, characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information suggested by the suggesting means and the suggesting information suggested by the suggesting means.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, there is a problem that when a game state advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous and the interest in the game decreases.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. do.

According to the gaming machine ZE1, an effect is executed based on the suggestion information suggested when the specific period is set and the information corresponding to the privilege actually given to the player, thereby It is possible to recognize the information on the privilege that was scheduled to be given and the privilege that has been acquired from the effect that has been executed, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine ZE2 in the game machine ZE1 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes an effect capable of suggesting a difference between the information stored in the storage means and the suggestive information.

According to the game machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1, it is possible to recognize the difference by the presentation, and there is an effect that the player can evaluate the game being executed.

In a game machine ZE1 or ZE2, a variable ball entry means that is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered, a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, and a game ball in the variable ball entry means a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the player based on the entry of a ball by the player, wherein the privilege granting means, as at least one of the privileges, moves the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the The suggestive information is composed of information based on the number of game media to be paid out corresponding to the number of game balls that can be entered by the variable ball entering means during the specific period. A game machine ZE3 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to determine the number of game media to be paid out to the player based on the suggestive information, so that the number of game media acquired after a specific period of time can be determined at an early stage. has the effect of being able to expect

In the gaming machine ZE3, the information corresponding to the privilege is composed of information corresponding to the game medium paid out based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Characteristic game machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE3, it is possible to accurately discriminate the game media that have been paid out, so that the result of the game can be known at an early stage.

<Characteristic ZF group> (Number of times subtraction)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, and the second determination means display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by each; and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the display means or the specific second identification information In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when second identification information for indicating a determination result is displayed, a first game state and from the first game state a game state setting means capable of switching and setting a second game state that is advantageous to the player; period setting means for setting a period until a condition based on is established; period notification means for notifying period information corresponding to the period set by the period setting means; and the first identification information or the second updating means for updating the period information based on the start of dynamic display of the identification information; setting means for setting the second determination to be easily executed when the second game state is set; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing that the second identification information is dynamically displayed more than is actually the case when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the second game state; A gaming machine ZF1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. When the lottery result is winning, a winning game is executed, and control processing is executed to set the game state after the winning game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and the advantageous state is set. It has been proposed to broadcast information about the period over which (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, when a period in which an advantageous state is set is announced, it is difficult to understand the timing at which the remaining period is updated. There was a problem that the difference occurred in the period and the game became difficult to understand. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine in which players can easily understand the game by arranging a configuration that allows the player to easily recognize the content of the notification. intended to provide

According to the game machine ZF1, when the first identification information is dynamically displayed during the period in which the second game state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information is made to appear more dynamic than it actually is. By executing the specific effect for the purpose, even if there is a player who has overlooked the dynamic display of the first identification information, it can be made to think that the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information is large. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the number of dynamic display times of the identification information executed in the second game state and the player's recognition.

In the game machine ZF1, the specific effect is to dynamically display the second identification information dynamically displayed again after temporary stopping with identification information other than the identification information for indicating the specific second identification information. A gaming machine ZF2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF1, the specific effect can make it appear that the second identification information has been pseudo-dynamically displayed many times. There is an effect that it can be made to think that many were executed.

In the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, the specific effect is to dynamically display at least part of the second identification information in association with the first identification information.

According to the game machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, at least part of the second identification information is dynamically displayed corresponding to the first identification information, so the dynamic display of the first identification information There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand.

In any of the game machines ZF1 to ZF3, when the second game state is set, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is set longer than when the first game state is set. A game machine ZF4 characterized in that

According to the game machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF3, when the second game state is set, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information can be suppressed. There is an effect that the game can be played while concentrating on the dynamic display of the 2-identification information.

<Characteristic ZG group> (Variable channel production)
Multiple ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter; privilege granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when a game ball enters the ball entry means; In a gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to ball entry, a first flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the ball entry means is different from the first flow path. a second flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the ball entering means, and the effect executing means guides the game ball to the first ball entering means after being guided to the first flow path. When a game ball is guided to the second flow path and enters the second ball entering means, a second effect different from the first effect can be executed. A gaming machine ZG1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. It has been proposed that when the lottery result is a win, a win game is executed and control processing is executed to set the game state after the win game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. . (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, in a winning game or the like, when a game in which a game ball is entered into the variable prize winning means or the like is performed, the game becomes monotonous and the player becomes bored with the game early. The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine ZG1, when a game ball enters the ball-entering means, the effect differs depending on the channel in which the ball enters, so the player is entertained by which channel the ball entered. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine ZG1, a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when displayed, and a game ball entering the ball entry means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. a state setting means for setting a possible state; a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means; a first game state; A game state setting means capable of switching and setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more likely to be executed than in the first game state, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the second game state A period setting means for setting a period during which the second game state is set to the first game state, and a bonus is granted by the privilege granting means when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means. a suggesting means capable of suggesting suggestive information corresponding to the rest of the privilege, wherein the suggesting means flows down the first flow path and enters the ball entering means. The gaming machine ZG2 is characterized in that the suggestive information is changed in different manners depending on whether the game ball flows down the second flow path and enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG1, the suggestive information is varied in different manners depending on the passageway in which the ball entering means enters the ball. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic ZH group> (advantage/disadvantage reversal)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player in the event of a failure; In a gaming machine having a preliminary determination means, based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, a first game state, and a player more sensitive than the first game state A game state setting means capable of setting by switching to a second game state that is advantageous, and period information until the first game state is set when the second game state is set. A gaming machine comprising: a period discriminating means for discriminating; and an effect varying means for varying an effect executed by the effect executing means based on the period determined by the period discriminating means. ZH1.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. When the lottery result is winning, a winning game is executed, and a control process for setting the game state after the winning game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period is executed. It has been proposed that a notice effect for notifying the lottery result is executed before the lottery result such as winning is displayed. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2010-35664). However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early because the degree of expectation for the executed announcement effect is constant. The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine ZH1, the effect executed by the effect execution means is varied based on the period information determined by the period determination means, so that the degree of expectation for the determination result by the advance determination means can be varied, and the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the interest of the game.

The game machine ZH1 has identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means, and the effect execution means uses the identification pattern as the effect. is variably displayed, and when the first game state is set in the mode of the identification pattern that is varied by the effect execution means, the first mode is an advantageous mode for the player and a second mode which is more disadvantageous than the first mode can be executed, and when the second game state is set, the gaming machine is configured to perform the period information determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine ZH2 has switching means for switching between executing the second mode as an advantageous mode for the player and executing the first mode as a disadvantageous mode for the player.

According to the game machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZH1, depending on the period in which the second game state is set, the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means is different from the case where the first game state is set and the case where the game is played. Since the advantages and disadvantages for the player are reversed, the effect of making the game presentation novel and preventing the player from getting bored early can be obtained.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. When the lottery result is winning, a winning game is executed, and control processing is executed to set the game state after the winning game to be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and the advantageous state is set. It has been proposed to report information on the period of time to be set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-35664).
Among such gaming machines, there is a demand for a gaming machine that enables easy-to-understand games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that enables easy-to-understand games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises a first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, and a first determination by the first determination means. display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result and second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means; and privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information for indicating the determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed. , game state setting means capable of switching between a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; A period setting means for setting a period until a condition based on the number of times the first determination or the second determination is performed is established, and a period for announcing period information corresponding to the period set by the period setting means. notification means; update means for updating the period information based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information; 2) a setting means for setting the discrimination to be easily executed; and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the second game state, the second identification information is displayed dynamically more than it actually is. and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the specific effect is to replace the second identification information dynamically displayed with identification information other than identification information for indicating the specific second identification information. After temporarily stopping with the identification information, the display is dynamically displayed again.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the specific effect dynamically displays at least part of the second identification information in association with the first identification information. is.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, and a first determination result by the first determination means are shown. display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for the purpose and the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means; and the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information for indicating the specific second determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed; a game state setting means capable of switching between a state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; period setting means for setting a period until a condition based on the number of times the second determination is performed is satisfied; period notification means for notifying period information corresponding to the period set by the period setting means; updating means for updating the period information based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information; and executing the second determination when the second game state is set. a setting means for setting the second identification information to be easily displayed, and a specific effect for showing that the second identification information is dynamically displayed more than actually when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the second game state. and a specific effect execution means for executing
Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be played.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific effect is to temporarily stop the dynamically displayed second identification information with identification information other than the identification information for indicating the specific second identification information, and then dynamically display the second identification information again. .
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it seem that the number of times of dynamic display has been increased.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific effect dynamically displays at least part of the second identification information in association with the first identification information.
Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be played.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )

Claims (1)

a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of aspects related to visual recognition in production;
A game machine having an effect executing means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the mode set by the setting means,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
display means capable of displaying information about the mode set by the setting means;
The information displayed on the display means is hidden when a predetermined condition is established,
As the effect type of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, from among a plurality of effect types including a effect type in which a specific effect is executed by executing a predetermined operation on the operating means during a specific period. 1 production type can be determined,
If the predetermined operation is performed during the specific period, the information is not displayed, and the predetermined operation is performed during a predetermined period that is different from the specific period and in which the information is not displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display said information when said information is displayed .